+

Ee
pe

ecm inate, ees,
ee ST err
ne O- -

eee
>

7-8 PY YS
= ta a ee al Ms
_ Pr

ee oe
ee

Tt ee
A ee
eta

hat uh

fire:

Ea!

Any
nite
ih

il

»>

rs
;
; 5
\
z
° ee t ia
ibe ;
4
4 i
i i
aa >)
G é E (
q
% f ‘
‘ 3 ‘ i
, ‘ i

TRANSACTIONS

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,

~ HELD AT PHILADELPHIA,

FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE.

VOL. VII.—NEW SERIES.

a a th

% A cY 7
La ay mre
coh a
“SiS 2

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY.

Bhilavelphta:
PRINTED BY WILLIAM S. YOUNG, PRINTER TO THE SOCIETY,

No. 88, Nortu Sixtn STREET.

1841.

\ g ek?
SS national

acne mene

Rian taco we Yaa ;

J

PQthat 2 park , 0 foblowr:

fart TL, Soft, 18¥0, Hp.

(“erfig prmrercted | A mtg Y Sah, 18.)
fark ©, hol, 181, Pf. ne

( imal eae

font IZ, prt! eta ane oe.
(tard om te txble" at moertine 0 Apritr,” )

EXTRACT

FROM THE

LAWS OF THE SOCIETY RELATING TO THE TRANSACTIONS,

1. The Transactions shall be published in numbers, at short intervals, under the direction of
the Committee of Publication.

2. Every communication to the Society, which may be considered as intended for a place in the
Transactions, shall immediately be referred to a committee to consider and report thereon.

3. If the committee shall report in favour of publishing the communication, they shall make
such corrections therein, as they may judge necessary to fit it for the press; or if they shall judge
the publication of an abstract or extracts from the paper to be most eligible, they shall accompany
their report with such abstract or extracts. But if the author do not approve of the corrections,
abstract, or extracts, reported by the committee, he shall be at liberty to withdraw his paper.

4, The order in which papers are read before the Society shall determine their places in the
Transactions, priority of date giving priority of location.

COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION.

Isaac Lea.
Isaac Hays, M. D.
J. Francis Fisher.

ies,
se siie
A ote

Det ic
erate

en
vt

iH :

kg f

auras

OFFICERS
OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY

FOR THE YEAR 1841.

PATRON, His Excellency the Governor of Pennsylvania.

PRESIDENT, Peter S. Du Ponceau.

VicE-PRESIDENTS, Joseph Hopkinson,

Nathaniel Chapman,
Robert M. Patterson.
( Franklin Bache,
} John K. Kane,
1 Alexander D. Bache,
{_Robley Dunglison.

SECRETARIES,

CounsELLors elected for three years. ( William Short,
| George Ord,

LB LSCE \ Joseph Henry,
LC. C. Biddle.

( Nicholas Biddle,
Thomas Biddle,

1 Governeur Emerson,

\J. Francis Fisher.

in 1840,

( Robert Hare,
! William Hembel, Jun.
In 1841, 5 ©. D. Meigs.

(Henry Vethake.

CuRATORs, Isaac Hays,

John P. Wetherill,
Franklin Peale.

TREASURER and LIBRARIAN, John Vaughan.

vil.—6

LIST OF MEMBERS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,

Elected since the Publication of the Sixth Volume.

Theodoric Romeyn Beck, M. D., of Albany.
Richard C. Taylor, of Philadelphia.

Thomas U. Walter, of Philadelphia.

John Penington, of Philadelphia.

Eugene A. Vail, of Paris.

Charles Riimker, of Hamburg.

John Washington, Captain, Royal Navy.

Rev. Charles Gutzlaff, of Macao.

Elias Loomis, of Western Reserve College, Ohio.
Stephen Alexander, of Princeton College, New Jersey.
Judah Dobson, of Philadelphia.

John Forbes, M. D., of Chichester, England.
Michael Faraday, F.R.S., of London.

Rey. C. R. Demmé, D. D., of Philadelphia.
John J. Vanderkemp, of Philadelphia.

Rev. Philip Milledoler, D. D., of New Jersey.
Pedro de Angelis, of Buenos Ayres.

Isaac Wayne, of Pennsylvania.

Samuel D. Ingham, of Pennsylvania.

George M. Dallas, of Philadelphia.

Martin H. Boyé, of Philadelphia.

Hartman Kuhn, of Philadelphia.

F. W. Bessel, of Koénigsberg.

William R. Fisher, M. D., of Philadelphia.
Rev. William H. Furness, of Philadelphia.

LIST OF NEWLY ELECTED MEMBERS.

Francis Beaufort, Captain, Royal Navy.

Paul B. Goddard, M. D., of Philadelphia.

W. H.C. Bartlett, of the Military Academy, West Point.
George M. Wharton, of Philadelphia.

George Washington Smith, of Philadelphia.

Robert Were Fox, of Falmouth, England.

John Sanderson, of Philadelphia.

Francisco Martinez de la Rosa, of Madrid.

James D. Graham, Major U. S. Topographical Engineers.
J. B. B. Eyries, of Paris.

Charles Bonnycastle, of the University of Virginia.
Francois P. G. Guizot, of France.

Bernardo Quaranta, of Naples.

David Irvin, U. S. Judge, of Wisconsin.

Adolph C. P. Callisen, M. D., of Copenhagen.

William Rawle, of Philadelphia.

Rev. Benjamin Dorr, D. D., of Philadelphia.

John A. Stephens, of New York.

Tobias Wagner, of Philadelphia.

OBITUARY NOTICE.

Since the publication of the last volume of these Transactions, the following
members have been reported as deceased:

Francis Nichols, of Philadelphia.

Mathew Carey, of Philadelphia.

Levett Harris, of Philadelphia.

William Sullivan, of Boston.

Jonathan Sewell, of Quebec.

John Newnan, M. D.

Robert Perceval, M. D., of Dublin.

Benjamin Allen, LL. D.

John Frederick Blumenbach, M.D., F.R.S., of Gottingen.
Joseph Parrish, M.D., of Philadelphia.

William Maclure.

William H. Keating, of Philadelphia.

Lucien Bonaparte, Prince of Canino.

Sylvanus Godon.

Charles Bonnycastle, of the University of Virginia.
Benjamin R. Morgan, of Philadelphia.

James Prinsep, of Calcutta.

J. P. F. Deleuze.

CONTENTS.

Laws of the Society relating to the Transactions. - - - - =
Officers of the Society for the Year 1841. - - = = s :
List of the Members of the Society elected since the Publication of the Sixth Volume. -
Obituary Notice. - - - - - - - - 3 a

ARTICLE I.

Observations to determine the Magnetic Dip at various places in Ohio and Michigan. By
Elias Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in Western Reserve
College. Ina letter to Sears C. Walker, Esq., M.A. P.S. - - - -

ARTICLE II.

1. Letter from the Rev. Charles Gutzlaff to John Vaughan, Esq., on the Chinese System
of Writing. 2. Letter from Mr. Duponceau to the same, ordered by the Society to be

published with the preceding one, to which it is an answer. = - : = =

ARTICLE III.

On the Extrication of the Alkalifiable Metals, Barium, Strontium, and Calcium. By Robert
Hare, M. D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. - -

ARTICLE IV.

Astronomical Observations made at Hudson Observatory, Latitude 41° 14’ 37” North, and
Longitude 5h. 25m. 42s. West; with some Account of the Building and Instruments.
By Elias Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in Western Reserve
College, Hudson, Ohio. - - - - - - -

VII.—c

31

43

x CONTENTS.

ARTICLE V.

Description of an Apparatus for Deflagrating Carburets, Phosphurets, or Cyanides, in Vacuo
or in an Atmosphere of Hydrogen, with an account of some Results obtained by these
and by other means; especially the Isolation of Calcium. By Robert Hare, M.D. -

ARTICLE VI.

Upon a new Compound of the Deuto-Chloride of Platinum, Nitric Oxide, and Chloro-
hydric Acid. By Henry D. Rogers, Professor of Geology in the University of Penn-
sylvania, and Martin H. Boyé, Graduate of the University of Copenhagen. - -

ARTICLE VII.

On the Longitude of Several Places in the United States, as deduced from the Observations
of the Solar Eclipse of September 18th, 1838. By E. Otis Kendall, Professor of Mathe-
matics in the Central High School of Philadelphia. - - . - -

ARTICLE VIII.

On the Patella Amena of Say. By Isaac Lea. - - - E = -

ARTICLE IX.

Observations of the Magnetic Intensity at twenty-one Stations in Europe. By A. D. Bache,
LL. D., President of the Girard College for Orphans, one of the Secretaries of the Ame-
rican Philosophical Society, &c., dc. - - - - - - -

ARTICLE X.

Additional Observations of the Magnetic Dip in the United States. By Elias Loomis, Pro-
fessor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in Western Reserve College. - -

ARTICLE XI.

On a new Principle in regard to the Power of Fluids in Motion to produce Rupture of the
Vessels which contain them; and on the Distinction between accumulative and instanta-

33

59

67

73

75

101

CONTENTS.

neous Pressure. By Charles Bonnycastle, Professor of Mathematics in the University

of Virginia. = - - - - E - = = =

ARTICLE XII.

On the Storm which was experienced throughout the United States about the 20th of De-
cember, 1836. By Elias Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in
Western Reserve College. - - - - - - - -

ARTICLE XIII.

Observations on Nebule with a Fourteen Feet Reflector, made by H. L. Smith and E. P.
Mason, during the year 1839. By E. P. Mason. - - - - .

ARTICLE XIV.

Engraving and Description of an Apparatus, and Process, for the rapid Congelation of Water,
by the explosive Evolution of Ethereal Vapour, consequent to the combined influence of
Rarefaction and the absorbing Power of Sulphuric Acid. By Robert Hare, M. D. -

~

ARTICLE XV.

On the Insufficiency of Taylor’s Theorem as commonly investigated; with Objections to
the Demonstrations of Poisson and Cauchy, and the assumed Generalization of Mr. Pea-
cock; to which are added a new Investigation and Remarks on the Development and
Continuity of Functions. By Charles Bonnycastle, Professor of Mathematics in the

University of Virginia. - - - - - - = = is

ARTICLE XVI.

Notice of the Oolitic Formation in America, with Descriptions of some of its Organic Re-

mains. By Isaac Lea. - : - - - - : E

ARTICLE XVII.

Observations to determine the horizontal Magnetic Intensity and Dip at Louisville, Ken-
tucky, and at Cincinnati, Ohio. By John Locke, M. D., Professor of Chemistry in the
Medical College of Ohio. : - - - > - - -

Xl

113

125

165

215

217

251

261

xii CONTENTS.

ARTICLE XVIII.

Observations upon the Meteors of August. By C. G. Forshey, City Engineer of Natchez,
and late Professor of Mathematics and Civil Engineering, Jefferson College, Mississippi.

ARTICLE XIX.

On the Change effected in the Nitrates of Potash and Soda by the limited Application of
Heat, with the View of obtaining pure Oxygen, by which they are only partially con-
vertible into Hypo-nitrites: also on a Liquid and a gaseous ethereal Compound, resulting
from the reaction of nascent hypo-nitrous Acid with the Elements of Alcohol. By Ro-
bert Hare, M. D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. - 2

ARTICLE XX. ;

Descriptions of new Species and Genera of Plants in the natural Order of the Composirz,
collected in a Tour across the Continent to the Pacific, a Residence in Oregon, and a
Visit to the Sandwich Islands and Upper California, during the years 1834 and 1835.
By Thomas Nuttall. - - - - - - - - -

ARTICLE XXI.

Description of Nineteen new Species of Colimacea. By Isaac Lea. - - -

Donations to the Library and Cabinet. —- - . - : = .

265

277

283

455

467

TRANSACTIONS

OF

THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.

ARTICLE 1.

_ Observations to determine the Magnetic Dip at various places in Ohio and Michi-
gan. By Ehas Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy
in Western Reserve College. In a letter to Sears C. Walker, Esq., M. A. P. S.
Read June 21st, 1839.

Tue instrument employed for the following observations was made by Gam-
bey, for Western Reserve College. ‘The vertical circle upon which the dip is
read is graduated to ten minutes, which I am accustomed to divide, by esti-
mation, to single minutes, by the aid of two microscopes attached to the glass
case which covers the instrument. ‘This circle is made of copper, and plated
with silver. The horizontal circle is graduated to half degrees, and reads by a
vernier to single minutes. The axis of the needle rests upon agate supports,
and is centred by two copper y’s. A sensitive level is attached to the instru-
ment, which rests upon three adjusting screws. The two needles which
accompany the instrument are each of them nine inches and six tenths in
lenoth. ‘Their breadth, in the middle, is a half inch, and they terminate at

each extremity in a sharp point. They have, throughout, a uniform thickness
of about the fortieth of an inch.
VII.—A

2 OBSERVATIONS TO DETERMINE THE MAGNETIC DIP

The observations were invariably made in an open area, at the distance of
several rods from any building, or any apparent local cause of attraction. Par-
ticular care was taken to remove all iron in the form of knives, keys, &c.
The instrument was placed upon a solid block of wood of convenient height,
and levelled. The vertical circle was then turned in azimuth until the needle
assumed a vertical position, and the azimuth read off from the horizontal circle.
The needle was then turned upon its supports, (the north extremity of the axis
to the south,) and the observation repeated. Needle No. 1, in which the dis-
tribution of the magnetism was most uniform, was always used for this pur-
pose, and the two readings ordinarily differed by less than a degree. The
mean of the two was taken as indicating the vertical plane at right angles
to the magnetic meridian. In order to test the degree of accuracy of which
the method is susceptible, I made repeated observations at Hudson, where I
had a meridian mark, and knew the variation of the needle. The preceding
method was found to give the magnetic meridian within a fraction of a degree.
Let us inquire what influence such an error would produce upon the observed
dip.

Put 6 = the dip in the magnetic meridian.

6’ = the dip im any vertical plane.

A = the magnetic azimuth of the plane in which 0’ is observed. Then
we shall have tang 6’ = tang 0. sec. A.; from which formula we learn that
at Hudson the dip increases less than one minute, from being observed two
degrees out of the magnetic meridian. The method employed for determining
the magnetic meridian possesses, therefore, all the accuracy which could be
desired for this purpose.

Both needles were observed at each station, and an equal number of times.
In needle No. 1 the magnetic axis was found always to coincide very nearly
with the geometrical axis. Although I have reversed the poles more than a
dozen times, the inclination of the magnetic axis to the geometrical has never
exceeded a small fraction of a degree. In needle No. 2, although it has been
magnetized in the same way, and its poles reversed the same number of times,
the magnetic axis has invariably been found quite oblique to the geometrical
axis, the inclination varying from one to three degrees. [or reversing the
poles I always employ a bar magnet of about a foot in leneth. I draw the flat
side of one half the needle over a pole of the magnet; then the opposite side

AT VARIOUS PLACES IN OHIO AND MICHIGAN. 3

over the same pole. The other half of the needle I apply, in a similar manner,
to the opposite pole of the magnet, and repeat the entire operation three times.
In each set of observations the poles of the needles are reversed, and the same
number of observations made in the two magnetic states of the needle. My
mode of observing is as follows:—Having brought the plane of the vertical
circle into the magnetic meridian by the method already explained, with the
face of the instrument to the east, and the marked side of the needle also to the
east, I read off the graduation at both extremities of the needle. I do not, ordi-
narily, wait for the needle to come to a state of entire rest, but when the are of
vibration is reduced to ten or fifteen minutes; take the mean of the extreme
oscillations. Without disturbing the position of the instrument, I now vibrate
the needle, centring it, and at the same time checking its vibrations by the cop-
per y’s. When the arc of vibration is sufficiently reduced, I read off again, as
before. I repeat the same operation five times, thus obtaining ten readings in
the same position of the instrument and needle. ‘These readings are commonly
nearly identical. In two or three instances, however, the extreme readings
have differed from each other to the amount of about forty minutes. ‘This
occasional sluggishness of the needle may, perhaps, be ascribed to moisture, or
minute particles of dust settling upon the axis of the needle and upon the
agate supports, and acting, by friction, to retain the needle at rest, though out
of the position it would naturally assume. Leaving still the instrument in its
first position, I turn the east side of the needle to the west, and make ten read-
ings as before. ‘Turning, then, the face of the instrument to the west, I repeat
the observations in the same order, making forty readings in one magnetic state
of the needle. Reversing the poles, I repeat the entire operation, which gives
me eighty readings with one needle. ‘The other needle furnishes the same
number of readings, making a hundred and sixty in all; and this is the number
actually taken at each of the places mentioned below, with the exception of
Hudson, where the observations were still more numerous. ‘The preceding
method was adopted in all of the observations, with the exception of those made
at Hudson in September, 1838, where only two readings (one of each pole)
were made in each position of the needle, but the system of reversal was pre-
cisely the same as that above described.

A OBSERVATIONS TO DETERMINE THE MAGNETIC DIP

Magnetic Dip at Hudson, Ohio. Latitude 41° 15' N.; Longitude 81° 24’ W.

The place of observation was the college yard, distant several rods from the
buildings, and the instrument was placed upon a solid block of wood, which
was due north from the transit instrument of the observatory.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1838, Sept. 4 11—12, A.M. No. 2 16 72° 54/3
5 5—6, P. M. 1 16 40'5
6 11—12, A.M. 1 16 54 °3
6 Ce Ct 2 2 16 34 °8
7 11—12, A. M. 1 16 57 +2
20 10—11, A. M. 2 16 48 :1
Mean of 96 observations in September, 1888, . . . . - - - + «+ +» 72 48°2
1839, April 6 4—5, P.M. 1 80 72 46:9
26 9—11, A.M. 2 80 46 °5
27 9—11, A. M. 1 80 44 +3
May 1 9—11, A. M. 2 80 49 -4
Mean of 320 observations in April and May, 1839, . . .. .. . . 7 46:8

Magnetic Dip at Cleveland, Ohio. Latitude 41° 30’ N.; Longitude 81° 51’ WV.

The place of observation was by the Lake shore, nearly in front of the Ame-
rican Hotel.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings, Observed Dip.
1839, May 9, 8—12, A. M. No. 1 80 73° 217-2
6s 66 66 66 ) 80 30 “8

Mean of 168 observations with two needles, eis Rees A OER OO

Magnetic Dip at Detroit, Michigan. Latitude 42° 19’ N.; Longitude 83° 3’ IV.

The place of observation was an open area west of the city, and not far from
the Michigan Exchange.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 11, 2—6, P.M. No. 1 80 73° 37/2
66 66 6é 66 2 80 48 “]

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, Se RCo eee ear eames oh, Ziadial: AIPA C8)

AT VARIOUS PLACES IN OHIO AND MICHIGAN. 5)

Magnetic Dip at Ann Arbor, Michigan. Latitude 42° 18’ N.; Longitude 83° 45’ W.

The place of observation was an open field, a few rods west of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No, Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 14, 4—6, P. M. No. 1 80 73° «(6/5
oe ce 6c oe ) 80 21 2

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, ; eee Se SRO IP ROE Se OSE TST O

Magnetic Dip at Ypsilanti, Michigan. Latitude 42° 14' N.; Longitude 83° 38’ W.

The place of observation was a hill on the east side of Huron river, a few
rods from the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 15, 12—2, P. M. No. 1 80 73° 1179
66 66 ce 66 2 80 94 “]

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, 5 6 RB IS

Magnetic Dip at Monroe, Michigan. Latitude 41° 55’ N.; Longitude 83° 28’ WW.

Place of observation an open field, a few rods south-east of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 16, 4—6, P. M. No. 1 80 73° 24/1
66 66 66 be 2 80 40 6

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, . See die) PH CON ERD CUlom oS

Magnetic Dip at Toledo, Ohio. Latitude 41° 41’ N.; Longitude 83° 33’ W.

Place of observation an open field, a few rods west of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 17, 5—7, P. M. No. 1 80 viaje = (Wc.
ee ce 66 66 9 80 10:2

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, i A ae eh cue ge eel eit cey Wome Ol

Magnetic Dip at Maumee City, Ohio. Latitude 41° 34’ N.; Longitude 83° 38' W.

Place of observation an open field, a few rods north of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 18, 5—7, P. M. No. 1 80 72° 50’:8
66 66 66 ce 2 80 AT "4

Mean of 160 observations with two needles, .
VII.—B

2 WO pid Made OR eB te at lene Re fod Oat YO)Cr |

6 OBSERVATIONS TO DETERMINE THE MAGNETIC DIP, ETC.

Magnetic Dip at Sandusky City, Ohio. Latitude 41° 29' N.; Longitude 82° 48' W.

Place of observation an open field, a few rods south of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Observed Dip.
1839, May 20, 9—11, A. M. No. 1 80 73° «4070
66 6c 8G 60 2 80 72 55°6
Mean of 160 observations with two needles, . . «. ». « © © © « 6 »« 7 57°8

From the preceding observations, compared with such as have been made
in other parts of the United States, and of which a collection may be seen in
the American Journal of Science, Vol. xxxiv. p. 308, it will appear that the
same dip is found in a higher latitude in the western than in the eastern states.
The lines of equal dip, consequently, intersect the parallels of latitude, their
direction being from about N. 82° W. to S. 82° E.

ARTICLE IL

1. Letter from the Rev. Charles Gutzlaff to John Vaughan, Esq., on the Chinese
System of Writing. Read June 21st, 1839.

Macao, January 2d, 1839.

Dear Sir,

I am very much obliged for your valuable present of Mr. Duponceau’s
Dissertation. Will you condescend to receive, for the library of your Society,
the four books and five classics in Chinese. I have also requested Mr. Tracey,
at Singapore, to forward to you, of all my Chinese works, both scientific as
well as religious, a copy, with the contents noted at the covers in English.

Not making, myself, any pretensions to learning, the grand object of my life
has been practical usefulness. Providence having brought me in contact with
all the nations that have adopted the Chinese character, I merely wish to com-
municate the result of experience, without bias.

1st. China was the great focus of civilization, from whence it diverged to all
the countries of Eastern Asia at a very early period of our era. The southern
parts of the empire were completely overrun by Chinese colonists, the abori-
gines driven into the mountains, and the country itself, including Tunkin and
Annam, (though now for many centuries independent,) incorporated with the
central kingdom. A constant influx took place into Corea, but the Chinese
emigrants were less numerous in Japan and the Loo-Choo islands.

2d. The natives of those countries were as rude as the Germanic tribes
when the Romans first invaded their forests, devoid even of the art of writing.

8 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

The Chinese, therefore, made them adopt their characters, and as they had for
many ideas no words, introduced their own to make up their deficiency.

3d. By this process Chinese books became the literature of all the above
named countries, and has remained so, exclusively, until this very day. Go-
vernment availed itself of these characters to communicate its commands to
the people; authors wrote in them, and every man of education studied the
same with all the ardour of a native Chinese.

Ath. Not only the works published by authors of those respective nations in
the Chinese character, but every other work introduced from China, are consi-
dered as a national property, which they share with other countries. Though
well aware that the Chinese character was not of their invention, yet so many
centuries have now elapsed since it was first made known, that they have
ceased to view it as a foreign idiom.

5th. All the nations that adopted this mode of writing speak a language
more or less distinct from the Chinese written idiom; and we may also add,
that the oral medium of all the dialects spoken in China is very distinct from
the language of books. This applies to all dialects, the Mandarin included,
though the latter deviates less from the books written in a colloquial style.
The Chinese, therefore, have to learn the meaning of the characters from
teachers, who explain them in the dialect spoken amongst the people. The
same is the case, in a greater measure, with the nations who adopted the Chi-
nese character; few of the sounds with which they read them are current in
conversation. ‘Though a Cochinchinese reads 5H dow, and also calls it
dow, the head—a Japanese reads it tsze, and calls it kasera. A Fo-kéeen man
reads it tow, and calls it tow kak, &c., whilst a Coréan, in many instances, adds
the native appellation to the sound of the Chinese character.

6th. This is very clear, that the dialects spoken by the nations conversant
with the Chinese character are very distinct from the idiom of the central
kingdom. Both the Coréans, as well as the Japanese, have invented a sylla-
bary, with which they write their own language, whilst every important busi-
ness is transacted by means of the Chinese character. ‘The Cochinchinese
have no such aid, but use, occasionally, the Chinese character in a contracted
form, without any reference to its meaning, merely to express sound.

7th. Though it has been again and again said that sound was not inherent
in the Chinese character, this axiom requires considerable modifications. A

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 9

great part of these signs are not pronounced by the Chinese at random, nor do
the nations that have introduced them amongst themselves entirely abandon
the analogy observed in reading them, though their modes vary very much.

8th. Having, myself, acquired the Japanese, as well as Cochinchinese, and
also had intercourse with the Coréans, of whom several are now at Macao, I
can only extol the ease with which one may communicate to them by means
of the Chinese character, though not understanding a single word of their
idiom. ‘This does not refer to the learned classes only, but to the very fisher-
men and peasants, with only some exceptions. In the Loo-Choo islands men
of distinction talk the Chinese with great fluency, but the bulk of the people
speak a dialect of the Japanese, and use the Chinese character as well as the
Japanese syllabary.

9th. It is, therefore, certain that the nations who have adopted the Chinese
character attach the same meaning to it as the natives from whence it originally
came, and that its construction is likewise retained, with scarcely any altera-
tions.

I have the pleasure of transmitting to you a copy of the Chinese Magazine,
which I have now been publishing for several years. I, myself, possess a
Cochinchinese dictionary, which I compiled some years ago, and also a Cam-
bodian one. If your society wishes to publish the latter, it is at your service.
Whatever I can do for promoting your objects will be readily undertaken; and
I should be happy if you would continue your correspondence.

I have the honour of subscribing myself, dear sir,

Yours respectfully,
(Signed) CHARLES GUTZLAFF.

To Joun Vaucuan, Esa.,
Librarian to the American Philosophical Society.

ViI.—C

10 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

2. Letter from Mr. Duponceau to the same, ordered by the Society to be published
with the preceding one, to which tt 1s an answer. Read September 20, 1839.

My Dear Sir,

I have read, with great pleasure, the letter addressed to you by the Rev.
Mr. Gutzlaff, dated Macao, the 2d of January, in the present year. I regret
that that writer’s excessive medesty has induced him to confine himself to a
statement of facts which, interesting as they are, do not afford the solution of
the important questions which are the object of my “ Dissertation on the Nature
and Character of the Chinese System of Writing.” Possessed as he is, not only
of the Chinese language, in which he has written a universal history, but of
those of Cochinchina and Japan, he appears to me to overstep the bounds of
Christian humility in disclaiming all pretensions to learning; I wish, therefore,
that your respectable correspondent had entered into more details on the sub-
ject of which he treats, and not confined himself to generalities, as he appears
to have done. I would have been happy to learn from him from what causes,
in what manner, and to what extent the Chinese characters have become a
kind of pasegraphy among those nations whom philologists distinguish by the
name of Indo-Chinese. It is an object of curious inquiry, and which, when
fully understood in all its bearings, will, in my humble opinion, throw consi-
derable light on the history of the human mind.

I am particularly struck with the spirit of candour and the love of truth
which pervades the whole of Mr. Gutzlaff’s letter, therefore I am not disposed
to controvert any thing that he asserts of his own knowledge; which, indeed,
I should do with a very ill grace, as I cannot pretend to any thing like that
knowledge he possesses of the Indo-Chinese languages, and their various sys-
tems of writing; I therefore must be considered, in the observations I am going
to make, as the disciple asking questions of his master. It is in that sense only
that I desire to be understood.

I fear that your learned correspondent has formed a higher opinion of the
Chinese system of writing than I can bring my mind to acquiesce in. He

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. ify

considers it to be @ gzgantic effort of human genius, and as performing what
we should have deemed impossible.* Jor my part, I confess that I cannot
see it in that exalted light. The invention of writing, generally, may be, and
is still every where, and, probably, with justice so considered. Almost all
nations have attributed that invention to their gods, or to their heroes, but
when comparing the Chinese system with the syllabic and elementary alpha-
bets, I do not think that its invention is to be attributed to a greater effort of
human genius. It was naturally pointed out by the peculiar structure of the
spoken language. ‘The analysis of sounds, separated from any meaning,
required, indeed, an effort of the human mind; but when a language consisted
only of a small number of monosyllables, each of which was a word, the most
natural method that presented itself was to appropriate a written sign to each
word, first by rude pictures of visible objects, afterwards by metaphorical
images, and when these failed, then some new method, still founded on the
system of a character or group of characters to each word, was gradually
adopted, and at last methodized, when civilization had made sufficient progress
to require it. For we must not believe that the Chinese system of writing was
originally invented by philosophers, and came out complete, like Minerva from
the head of Jupiter; it is more probable that it was the work of ages; and,
indeed, the ancient illegible inscriptions that still exist are sufficient to con-
vince us of it. The method that, in the end, has been adopted, to wit, the
grouping of two or three words in their appropriate characters, to recall to the
memory another word by something more or less connected with the idea that
it represents, and the classing those groups under a certain number of keys or
radicals is, indeed, ingenious; but I cannot see in it such an effort of the human
mind as the analysis of unmeaning sounds which produced the syllabic and
elementary alphabets. I believe, however, that the Chinese lezzgraphy (as I
have taken the liberty to call it) is well suited to the language for which it
was made, and that it would be no improvement to substitute for it a common
syllabary or an elementary alphabet. ‘The reason is in the great number of
hemophonous words in the Chinese language, which could not be so well dis-
tinguished, in writing, from each other, as by the system now in use. ‘This
ocular discrimination is the great advantage of the Chinese characters, which

* Hist. of China, ec. iii.

1 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

prevents much obscurity and ambiguity in books, where it cannot be explained
or corrected as in oral conversation. Yet, we are told by M. Remusat that the
merchants and others in China, in their familiar correspondence, make use but
of one character for each monosyllable of the language; but as M. Remusat
never was in China, and could know that only from hearsay, I shall make no
observation upon it. I wish, however, that your friendly correspondent would
throw some light upon this subject, and let us know how far M. Remusat is
supported by facts in the statement that he makes.

But I am wandering from the main object that has induced me to address
this letter to you. I wish to investigate, with the aid of your learned corre-
spondent, if it can, without too much indiscretion, be obtained, the extent to
which the Chinese characters serve as a means of communication between
different nations who can neither speak nor understand each others’ oral lan-
guage, and the causes by which such a remarkable effect is produced. I once
doubted the fact, because it was asserted as the proof of the alleged superiority
of the Chinese alphabet, independently of the languages to which it is applied,
and as a kind of pasigraphic system that might be applied to every idiom; but
farther reflection, and an attentive study of the peculiar structure of the Chi-
nese language, satisfied me that that fact might be admitted to a certain extent;
hence, in my Dissertation, and before that, in my letter to Captain Hall, which
is annexed to it, I did not venture to deny it in general terms, but only men-
tioned it as a subject requiring farther investigation; it is with a view to that
investigation that I now address this letter to you.

Your correspondent is very explicit in his statement of the fact which we
are investigating. I beg leave to quote here his own words:

“Having,” says he, “myself acquired the Japanese, as well as Cochinchi-
nese, and also had intercourse with the Coréans, of whom several are now at
Macao, I can only extol the ease with which one may communicate to them
by means of the Chinese characters, though not understanding a single word
of their idiom. ‘This does not refer to the learned classes only, but to the very
fishermen and peasants, with only some exceptions. In the Loo-Choo islands
men of distinction talk the Chinese with great fluency, but the bulk of the

people speak a dialect of the Japanese, and use the Chinese characters as well
as the Japanese syllabary.”

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 13

From these facts, which the writer asserts of his own knowledge, and, there-
fore, which I am not disposed to controvert, he draws the following inference:

“Tt is, therefore, certain that the nations who have adopted the Chinese cha-
racter attach the same meaning to it as the natives from whence it originally
came, and that its construction is likewise retained, with scarcely any altera-
tions.”

Here I must acknowledge that I find myself embarrassed. Fortunately the
writer does not state this as a fact founded on his knowledge of those languages,
but as a mere inference. Were it otherwise, it would have embarrassed me
still more; for your learned friend would have been in contradiction, not only
with the grammars and other works that we possess concerning those idioms,
but also with learned and respectable missionaries, like himself, from whose
assertions I cannot withhold my assent. Thus, the Rev. Mr. Medhurst, in his
excellent work upon China, relates, (chapter 13th,) that among a number of
books which he sent to Drs. Morrison and Milne, and either copied or caused
to be copied for them, there were the four books of Confucius, in Chinese, with
a Japanese translation imterlined, a work, says he, of incalculable importance, as
showing that Chinese books, as they stand, are not intelligible to the mass of
the Japanese, and need some addition, in order to general circulation. Anda
little farther he says: “It appears, from a comparison of these books, that the
Chinese books are not in general use in Japan, except when interlined mith Ja-
panese.” ‘Vhus, in Roman Catholic countries, the liturgical books are given
to the faithful in the Latin language, accompanied with a translation in the
vernacular tongue.

And yet the same gentleman, in the fourth chapter of the same work, no
doubt written before he had seen the books above mentioned, and reflected
upon them, speaks of the Chinese characters precisely as your correspondent
does, and says that they are generally read and understood, not only through-
out the vast empire of China, but throughout Cochinchina, Coréa, and Japan;
and that not only the characters, but the stale, that is to say, the arrangement
of the ideas, is likewise understood; which implies that in all those languages
the structure, the metaphors, and the grammatical forms are the same, or nearly
the same, which appears to be the opinion of your learned correspondent. You
have seen how Mr. Medhurst afterwards corrects himself, with respect to the
Japanese; and he seems to be astonished at his discovery, which, he says, is of

V1I.—D

14 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

incalculable importance. And so, in fact, itis; but he does not seem to have
sufficiently inquired into the cause of the fact that he points out, for he ascribes
it to the difference between the Chinese and the Japanese systems of writing,
the one being symbolic, as he conceives it, and the other al phabetical; whereas,
in my opinion, it is rather to be attributed to the difference which exists be-
tween the oral languages, to which the same system of writing cannot be
applied. I speak here only of the Yom? or polysyllabic languages of the Ja-
panese, which is properly their vernacular tongue.

It is remarkable that these two gentlemen, Mr. Gutzlaff and Mr. Medhurst,
both profess to be, and no doubt are, acquainted with the Japanese, as well as
with the Chinese language; how, then, does it happen that they differ so
widely on a subject which must be equally familiar to them both? With the
most unfeigned respect for those venerable missionaries, 1 am forced to pre-
sume that they have studied the Chinese and Indo-Chinese languages so as to
make them subservient to the performance of the duties of their holy office,
without paying much attention to them in a philological point of view, so that
they have been led into, perhaps, too general conclusions from the facts which
have come under their observation. ‘This appears to me to be sufficiently
proved by the example of the Rev. Mr. Medhurst, who did not rectify his ideas
on the subject of the Japanese language until an interlineal transiation, joined
to a Chinese text, convinced him that the Chinese characters were not so fami-
liar to the Japanese as he had conceived.

In what I have ventured to write on the subject of the Chinese system of
writing I have had no object in view but the discovery of truth. I found
that subject involved in mystery; the Chinese characters represented by
enthusiasm as something supernatural; their origin attributed to the philo-
sophical combinations of a barbarous people; their effects magnified to a degree
that exceeds belief; in short, I saw those characters raised to the rank of an
original, of a universal language, to which spoken idioms were subordinate,
and, as it were, auxiliary. My plain common sense revolted against those extra-
vagant ideas, and I tried, with feeble means, to discover what that so much
extolled system really was, and to bring it within the general rule by which it
appears to me that all systems of writing are governed, which is to make it an
ocular representation or image of spoken language, with which mankind
began to communicate with each other, long before they thought of repre-

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 15

senting speech by figures or characters; I, therefore, submitted my views to
the learned, in the hope of profiting by their knowledge, which so much ex-
ceeds mine. Iam happy to find that they have been honoured with the notice
of your correspondent, than whom, from his profound knowledge of the Chi-
nese and Indo-Chinese languages, and their respective systems of writing, no
one is better able to form a correct judgment upon the subject, and to throw
light upon the obseurity im which it is still involved. I therefore submit to
him, with due humility, the few observations that are to follow.

I admit, without difficulty, the fact stated by your respectable friend, to wit,
that he has seen Japanese, Coréans, and Cochinchinese communicate, with
ease, with each other by means of the Chinese characters. He adds that they
did so without understanding “one single word” of each others’ spoken lan-
guage. This appears to me to be a very strong expression, which, perhaps,
Mr. Gutzlaff will be disposed to modify. I shall not, however, contradict it
for the present. This faculty, he says, is not confined to the learned classes,
who speak the Chinese with great fluency, but extends to the very “fishermen
and peasants.” ‘This cannot be meant to imply that all, or nearly all, the fish-
ermen and peasants of those countries can read and write the Chinese; for Mr.
Medhurst tells us that there are villages, even on the coast of China, where
few, “if any,” of the inhabitants can either read or write. ‘This expression,
therefore, must be understood in a restricted sense.

The fact that persons who do not understand each others’ language can com-
municate with ease by means of a common written character is, as I have
already observed, important enough to require to be critically examined, parti-
ticularly in respect to its extent and the causes which produce it. Nothing that
has been written on the subject as yet satisfies me. ‘This phenomenon (if it may
be so called) has been attributed to the almost magical powers of the Chinese
alphabet; to its representing ideas unconnected with sounds; to its “ perma-
nent perspicuity,’ as Dr. Marshman expresses himself; nothing has been said
of the monosyllabic character of the languages which employ that lexigraphic
alphabet, and of the similarity of their grammatical structure: the polysyllabic
languages of Japan and other countries have been confounded with those, and,
upon the whole, many things have been left obscure, which still require to be
elucidated and. explained. Not only the Indo-Chinese nations, but the Chinese
themselves, inhabitants of different provinces or districts, have been said to

16 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

interchange ideas merely in writing, because of their ignorance of each others’
dialects; all these things appear to me to demand investigation, and with this
view I submit the following observations to your learned correspondent, in
hopes that he will deign to favour us with his own.

In order to observe some method in this examination, and for the sake of
clearness, I shall consider, separately, the four following languages, or classes
of languages, to wit:—1. The various dialects of the Chinese empire. 2d. The
Annamitic languages. 3d. The languages of Japan and the Loo-Choo Islands.
Ath. The Coréan. I shall not do this with a view to contradict the fact stated
in a general manner by your learned friend, but to reconcile it, as far as will
be in my power, to the natural order of things, and, if possible, to ascertain its
extent and its causes. That several thousand written characters should serve
as a means of communication between hundreds of millions of people, between
provinces and districts, and even independent nations, who do not understand
each others’ oral languages, is a fact that strikes, at first view, with wonder
and astonishment. Mankind are now too enlightened to ascribe such things to
causes out of the ordinary course of nature, or to gaze upon them with stupid
wonder; they will quire and investigate, and will not be satisfied with theo-
ries founded on mere conjecture. I have shown, in my Dissertation, what
wild theories were recurred to, to explain this apparent phenomenon; theories
which led to the absurd inference that the art of writing existed before the
exercise of the natural gift of speech. It is time to adopt more rational con-
clusions, and for that purpose facts must be collected and brought together
in one point of view, so that fair deductions may be obtained from their con-
centrated light. It is with this view that I submit the following facts and
observations to the superior knowledge of your learned correspondent.

I. Dialects of the Chinese Language.

We are told by the Rev. Mr. Medhurst, in the Preface to his Dictionary of
the Dialect of the Province of Fo kien, which he writes “ Fth-kéen,” and I
know no other work of the same kind, that there are no less than two hundred
of those dialects in the Chinese empire. The people of the different districts,
it is said, or most of them, do not understand each other when speaking, but
communicate together by means of the Chinese written language, as it 1s called.

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 1E7/

This, says Dr. Marshman, is to be attributed to the permanent perspicuity of
the characters which he calls xazv’ s£oyyv, the Chinese language. ‘This is a
strong fact, if true to the extent that it is represented. I fear, however, that
there is in this a creat deal of exaggeration.

Very little is known in this part of the world, and in Europe, respecting
those dialects. It is said that a vocabulary of that of Canton has been printed
at Macao or Serampore, (I do not remember which,) but it has never made its
way to this country, at least that I know of. The indefatigable Mr. Medhurst
has given us, as I have said before, a copious dictionary of the dialect of
Fo-kien, but I do not feel myself competent to compare it with the pure Chi-
nese, or, in other words, with the mandarin dialect; I leave that to your
learned correspondent, who is skilled in both, and I shall content myself with
stating facts, extracted from the works of the most approved authors.

Dr. Marshman, in his Clavis Sinica, or Grammar of the Chinese Language,
has a chapter entirely devoted to the dialects of the Celestial Empire. In that
chapter, p. 560, he clearly describes the general character of those dialects, and
their differences from the mandarin dialect, or pure Chinese. ‘“ Besides,” says
he, ‘the difference of pronunciation, the modes by which the colloquial dia-
lects are varied are generally three: the introduction of words which have no
characters; the use of words to which certain spurious characters are affixed;
and the application of certain characters in a sense not given them in the
dictionaries. ‘The variations observable in the Canton dialect” (which, by the
by, is the southernmost province of the empire, while Petchelee, in which
Pekin is situated, is the northernmost) “do not affect the substantives; these,
as well as most of the verbs, are the same as in the mandarin dialect, except
as varied by a corrupt pronunciation. ‘The principal variations are in the pro-
nouns.”

These differences are very trifling; and it appears, also, that they consist as
much in the alteration, substitution, and misapplication of the characters as in
the spoken language. The greatest difference appears from Dr. Marshman’s
statement to be in the pronunciation; and that, if carried to the extent which
is Insinuated, would, in fact, prevent all oral communication between the inha-
bitants of the different provinces, and reduce them to the necessity of con-
versing in writing as well as they could. But, according to the relation of a
learned English missionary, who is worthy of the highest credit, that difficulty

VII.—E ;

18 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

of conversing orally does not appear to be, by any means, so great as it has
been represented ; it appears to me, on the contrary, that there is no such diffi-
culty at all, and that the inhabitants of China may converse, with the greatest
ease, with those who speak the mandarin language, and be understood by
them, notwithstanding the difference of their dialects.

The Rev. Mr. Medhurst, whose various writings have thrown considerable
light on this important subject, in his imteresting work entitled “China, its
State and Prospects,” relates that, in the year 1835, he hired, at Canton, the
brig Huron, for a voyage of several months along the eastern coast of China.
Their object was to stop at every place where they could get admittance, to
converse with the inhabitants and distribute to them Chinese Bibles, tracts,
and other religious books. Mr. Medhurst took with him the Rev. Mr. Ste-
vens, who had accompanied your correspondent, in 1831, on a similar voyage,
and who was acquainted with the Chinese language. They sailed from Can-
ton, and visited the whole coast and all the maritime provinces of the empire,
except Petchelee, which is the northernmost, and where the capital of the
empire is situated. They landed at a great number of towns and villages in
the different provinces, and there freely conversed with the inhabitants, and
distributed their books, sometimes with, and sometimes without interruption
from the authorities. At every place where they landed they held conversa-
tions, not only with the mandarins and officers of the government, but with
persons of all descriptions, and with assembled multitudes, even in places
where, as he says, “few of the inhabitants, 7f any, could either read or write.”
There is not, at any time or at any place throughout the whole of this widely
extended coast, containing several large provinces and a multitude of districts,
the least mention made of an interpreter being employed or conversation
carried on in writing, but every thing, as far as appears, was said, and all
business transacted by word of mouth, always with the greatest ease. The
pure Chinese or mandarin dialect would seem to have been the medium used.
In one place the people wondered that foreigners could speak so purely the
Chinese language; they believed the missionaries to be natives of the empire;
in another they believed that as their emperor was the master of the whole
world, there could be but one language on the face of the earth, and that was
the Chinese. ‘The missionaries were acquainted with the dialect of Canton,
and with three of those of the adjoiing province of Fo-kien, to wit, that of

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 19

Fo-kien proper, and those of the county of Chang-chow, and the district of
Chang-poo, in the same province, with the natives of which they had had
much communication in the Chinese colonies in the Indian seas; but they
could not be familiar with the dialects of the more northern provinces which
they visited; there must, therefore, have been a common medium of oral com-
munication between them and the mhabitants. Why, then, was not the writ-
ten medium, that universal language, as it is called, made use of, or even at
any time or on any occasion called to their aid in those distant places? ‘This,
I must confess, shakes my belief in a great degree; at least as far as respects
China itself, where sinologists tell us that even those who can converse toge-
ther in the mandarin tongue, even the learned mandarins, are sometimes
obliged to trace characters with their fingers in the air, when they cannot
make themselves understood by word of mouth. I suspect that there is here
a great deal of exaggeration; no one is better able than your learned corre-
spondent to explain it.

Il. Annamitic Languages.

We are now out of the limits of the Celestial Empire; but we have not yet
taken leave of the Chinese race, to which the people of the country I am going
to describe appear to me to belong.

The country called Annam, or Anam, which means “the country of the
south,” is situated on a tongue of land at the southern extremity of the China
Sea. It is bounded to the north by the Chinese empire, to the east and south
by the sea, and to the west by a chain of mountains, which separates it from
the kingdom of Siam, and from the countries that are called the Birman
empire. It contains the kingdoms of 'Tunkin and Cochinchina, to which the
name of Annam is more especially applied, and the lesser states of Cambodia,
Laos, and Ciampa. Of the languages of the last three we know absolutely
nothing; we only presume that they are monosyllabic, like those of ‘Tunkin
and Cochinchina. I see, with pleasure, that your correspondent has composed
a dictionary of the Cambodian language, which he kindly offers to present to
our society, who, I have no doubt, will receive with gratitude that valuable
present, and be the first to make known the Cambodian language to America
and Europe, as they have done the Cochinchinese. We may hope, hereafter,
to become acquainted with the idioms of Laos and Ciampa. ‘There is nothing

20 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

that cannot be expected from the efforts of the zealous propagators of the
Christian faith.

The languages of Tunkin and Cochinchina are considered as the same, or
nearly the same. They are both monosyllabic, and their grammatical structure
does not appear to differ from that of the Chinese. Indeed, it would seem as
if the simplicity of monosyllabic languages did not admit of much difference
in their syntax. Mr. Naxcra, in his Dissertation on the Language of the
Othoni Indians, which has been published in the fifth volume of the new
series of our Transactions, has shown the most striking coincidences between
the phraseology of that language and that of the Chinese. I am told that there
are persons in Hurope, and in this country, who contest the fact of the Othoni
idiom being monosyllabic. If they will only take the trouble to read atten-
tively Mr. Naxera’s Dissertation, with the numerous examples that he has
given of that language, and the translations that he has made into it, with the
addition of grammatical explanations and notes, they will be convinced that it
is impossible for human ingenuity to invent and impose upon the learned
world such a tissue of imposture as he must necessarily have been guilty of, if
his accusers are well grounded in their assertions, and to make a monosyllabic
out of a polysyllabic language, without ever contradicting himself or betraying
the imposition; besides that there are, in print, several grammars and vocabu-
laries of that idiom, by which he might easily be confuted. But it is easier to
criticise than to read.

We should know but very little of the Annamitic languages if it were not
for the Cochinchinese vocabularies, for which our country and philology are
indebted to the munificence of the reverend father Joseph Morrone. We
understand that a complete dictionary of that idiom, compiled by the Vicar
Apostolical of the Catholic church in Cochinchina, is now in a course of pub-
lication under the auspices of the Honourable the Hast India Company; and
what adds to my satisfaction is, that your respectable correspondent is himself
master of that language, and has a dictionary of it in his possession. I regret
that he did not take the trouble to give you his opinion of Father Morrone’s
vocabularies, which, hitherto, I have no reason to believe otherwise than cor-
rect, and deserving of full credit. The comparison of this language with the
Chinese, by M. de la Palun, is a hasty production, for reasons which I have
explained in the preface which precedes them; therefore it would have been

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 2)

very gratifying to me to know whether the inferences that I have drawn from
it are justified by a full comparison of the two languages and their system of
writing, made by such a master hand as that of your correspondent. 1t would
show clearly whether and how far the Chinese characters, as applied by the
two nations to their respective idioms, can serve as a common medium of com-
munication between them, when they are ignorant of each others’ spoken
language.

From the lights that we possess it would appear that the languages of China
and Cochinchina, though both monosyllabic, and having the same grammatical
structure, are yet very different from each other. ‘That there are in the latter
a number of Chinese words more or less corrupted cannot be denied; but the
mass of the language shows clearly that the two nations cannot understand one
another when speaking. ‘The same difference appears in the written charac-
ters; they have been originally Chinese, and many of them remain such, but
a great number are so altered in their form as not to be recognised, while those,
the form of which has not been varied, are either differently combined or asso-
ciated together, or are applied to represent words different from those which
they express in Chinese; and what is most remarkable is, that,-in many
instances, they have been applied to words which, in Chinese and Cochinchi-
nese, have the same sound, but not the same meaning. From this I would
naturally conclude that the two nations cannot understand each other in
writing any more than orally, at least to any considerable extent.

There can be no doubt that those nations are all of the same race, and
descended from the same stock. It also clearly appears that civilization and
the art of writing was introduced into the land of Annam by the Chinese; but
the Annamites have been so long independent of the Celestial Empire, if ever
they were subjected to it, that it is not extraordinary that their language and
their writing should have experienced considerable changes in the course of
so many ages.

That being the case, it will be asked: How comes it, then, that the Cochin-
chinese and the Chinese understand each other in writing, though they cannot
by word of mouth? The enthusiasts attribute this to some mysterious virtue
in the Chinese characters; to their permanent perspicuity, as Dr. Marshman
expresses it; but the philosopher seeks for more natural causes; he knows that
writing was invented to be the representation of seme oral language, and it is

VII.—F

22 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

by comparing the forms of the graphic system with those of the spoken idiom
that he hopes to obtain the solution of the important problem that has so much
puzzled the sinologists of Hurope.

If there is any perspicuity in the Chinese written characters, it is not in
their outward forms, which, whatever some of them may have been in the
beginning, are now nothing more than linear and angular figures, which pre-
sent, of themselves, no idea to the mind, but in the method and arrangement
of them that has been adopted by the Chinese grammarians, and which the
languages to which that system was to be applied necessarily required. The
monosyllabic languages are devoid of grammatical forms; their words are not,
as in the idioms of Europe and Western Asia, derived from roots that lead to
the understanding of their numerous derivatives; no one monosyllable is con-
nected, as to its sense or meaning, with another by means of some slight altera-
tion; but, on the contrary, the same word or monosyllable sometimes serves to
express twenty or thirty, and sometimes even fifty different ideas; and the only
mode of discrimination between them is by the tone of voice or accent, by the
juxta-position of the words to each other, and by joining two words together to
show the separate meaning of one. ‘This, in speaking, is of little conse-
quence; for it is well known, whatever may have been said to the contrary,
that the Chinese, in conversation, understand one another perfectly well, and
without the least difficulty. For this I have the testimony of the Chinese
themselves, several of whom I have interrogated on this particular point, and
who have uniformly given me the same answer. I have also heard them con-
verse together, and never have seen them embarrassed. Besides, if there was
any ambiguity in their discourse, it might be easily corrected at the moment.

But, in inventing a system of writing for such a language, it was necessary
to prevent ambiguities which the author would not be at hand to correct. For
this reason different characters were applied to the same monosyllable, to show
in what sense it was to be understood. This was done by uniting two or more
characters, each representing a particular word, to show in what sense the
word represented was to be taken. ‘This has given rise to the notion that Chi-
nese characters represent abstract ideas, when, in fact, they are but a method
of spelling the same word, analogous to the different orthography that we
employ in writing homophonous words, such as sea and see; scene and seen :
grate and great, &c. ‘Thus the Chinese system of writing was invented to

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 23

suit the language to which it was to be applied. ‘The inventors never thought
of representing ideas any farther than was necessary to recall to the memory a
particular word by a short explanation of its meaning, in which they have not
always been very successful.

In process of time they have methodized the system by classing their words
under a certain number of keys, or radicals, which, while they facilitate the
understanding of the words placed under them, afford to the student an easy
way of finding them in the dictionaries.

The Chinese system, therefore, may be considered as an ingenious invention,
as applied to monosyllabic languages; and it is, perhaps, the only system suited
to them; but, abstractedly speaking, it does not appear to me to be more inge-
nious than that of syllabic and elementary alphabets, which are also suited to
the languages for which they were made.

What has contributed most to the admiration which the Chinese system of
writing every where commands, is the facility with which nations who cannot
speak or understand each others’ oral language communicate with each other
by means of the Chinese written characters. Hence it has been supposed, and
it has become almost the general belief, that those characters represent ideas
entirely abstracted from speech. Your learned correspondent, with better
judgment, has attributed that facility, as far as it extends, to the similarity of
the grammatical structure of the languages of the various nations who thus
communicate. As far as it regards the monosyllabic languages, like those I
am now speaking of, I agree with him so far, that this similarity in the structure
of those languages contributes much to the facility to which he adverts, but
I am far from thinking that it is its only cause. I must explain myself a little
farther.

It being admitted that the Chinese and Annamitic languages, though differ-
ing in the sounds of their words, do not differ materially in their structure and
grammatical forms; that every Chinese word (with, perhaps, a few exceptions)
has a corresponding word in the Tunkinese and Cochinchinese which has
precisely the same meaning, and that they use, in writing, the same characters,
though their forms and their application to the words of the language have
much varied in the course of a long series of ages, it naturally follows that, as
far as those forms have not materially varied, and are still applied to the corre-
sponding words in the two languages, the Chinese and Cochinchinese may com-

24 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

municate by writing, though they cannot by words. But, if we can judge from
Father Morrone’s Cochinchinese Vocabulary, with the characters annexed, it
would seem that that cannot take place to a very great extent. We must look,
therefore, to some other cause.

We find, from the Cochinchinese and Latin Dictionary published with my
Dissertation, that the Chinese language is taught in the schools of Cochinchina,
as well as their own. As the Chinese is the religious and literary language of
the country, which does not appear to have a literature of its own, it is neces-
sary that it should be learned, in order to understand Chinese books. There
is no need, for that purpose, of their learning the spoken language; at least,
they need not pay much attention to the spoken words; they study the cha-
racters as a different spelling of their own, as in our schools we might be taught
the ancient Gothic letters, if there were an object deserving of it. As far, there-
fore, as respects the Annamitic nations, I do not differ much from your learned
correspondent; but we do not seem to agree as regards the polysyllabic lan-
guages, of which I am now going to speak.

Ill. Languages of Japan and the Loo-Choo Islands.

We must now take leave of the Chinese race. We are among different
nations, the origin of whom is not well ascertained. fzom the physical confor-
mation of the Japanese, some naturalists have thought that they were a mixture
of the Chinese and Tartar races; but their language does not warrant this sup-
position. It seems evident, however, that they were civilized by the Chinese,
and they, at present, acknowledge the literary and moral supremacy of the
great empire, but they are under no kind of civil subjection to it. They are,
and have been, independent from time immemorial.

We know very little as yet of the vernacular language of the Loo-Choo
Islands. It is, however, well ascertained that it is a dialect of the Japanese,
and, like it, polysyllabic. It is probable that those islands are inhabited by
colonies from Japan. I shall therefore confine my observations to the language
of the latter country; from the information we have, they may, I think, also be
applied to the Loo-Chooan.

We are, fortunately, well acquainted with the national language of Japan.
The works of Thunberg, Siebold, Klaproth, and Medhurst, and, above all, the

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 25

excellent grammar of that language by Father Rodriguez, translated into
French by M. Landresse, with the explanations of M. Remusat, and the sup-
plement to it by the learned William Humboldt, chiefly extracted from the
grammars of the same language by Fathers Alvarez, Collado, and Oyanguren,
which are now very rare, leave us nothing to wish for upon the subject. The
whole Japanese language is thus spread before us. It is called the Yomz.

This language is entirely different from the Chinese; there is no analogy or
affinity between them. A number of Chinese words have crept into it, but
their foreign origin is easily perceived. ‘The Japanese is polysyllabic, and
abounds in grammatical forms. The nouns are declined by suffixed particles,
and the verbs are conjugated by means of terminations and inflections; they
have adjective verbs, like our Indian languages. The syntax is subject to
rules, and the order in which the words are placed, says Father Rodriguez, is
quite the reverse of that of the Chinese. It is evident, therefore, that the Chi-
nese system of writing could not be applied to it.

The Japanese received the art of writing from the Chinese. But their
teachers, as well as themselves, soon perceived that the same system could not
be applied to both languages, and that the Japanese could not be written /eaz-
graphically. ‘They therefore determined upon giving them a syllabic alphabet.
Out of the many thousand Chinese characters they chose forty-seven, without
paying any regard to their meaning, but only to their sounds, and applied these
to the forty-seven syllables of which the Japanese language iscomposed. ‘Thus
was formed the Japanese alphabet, which they call z ro fa, or, according to
Medhurst, 2 lo ha, from the first three letters of which it is composed.

If the Japanese had no other language and no other alphabet than those I
have described, it is evident that they could not understand or make them-
selves understood by the Chinese, verbally or in writing.

But the Chinese, when they introduced civilization into Japan, introduced,
also, their language, which is there called the koye, which means Chinese
words. The pure koye, says Father Rodriguez, is the Chinese. It is there a
spoken as well as a written language, for it is clear that it could not be read
into Yomi, any more than Greek or Latin into English, without translating.
But such is the difference between the vocal organs of the two nations, that
they cannot understand each other when speaking the same idiom. The
Japanese cannot pronounce the nasal vowels of the Chinese, who have conso-

V1L.—G

26 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

nants that the Japanese cannot articulate, and vice versa. ‘Thus the pronun-
ciation has become so different as to make it almost two different languages,
although it is easy to perceive that it is the same idiom differently articulated.
I have given examples of this difference in my Dissertation, p. 91.

I can thus easily understand how the Japanese cannot converse orally with
the Chinese, either by means of the Yomi, of the Koye, or of the Mandarin dia-
lect, and how they can more easily communicate by means of the Chinese
characters. But I cannot so easily conceive how peasants and fishermen
acquire sufficient knowledge to enable them to do so. I can only account for
it by the Chinese, or Koye, being a religious as well as a learned language.
Religion can perform wonders.

Father Rodriguez tells us that there are three languages or dialects in Japan,
which he thus describes:

“The first is the pure Yom, which is the natural and primitive dialect of the
nation; they write in it works of light poetry and literature.

‘“'The second is the pure Koye (or Chinese ;) the priests employ it in their reli-
gious works.

“The third is a mixture of Yomi and Koye; it is the vulgar language of the
empire. It must be observed, however, that the ordinary language, that is to
say, that in common use, is almost entirely composed of Yomi, with some mix-
ture of Koye, while in the literary and oratorical style there is much more Koye
than Yomi.”

{t follows from the above, that books of light reading, in poetry or prose, are
written in the national language, or Yomi; that religious books are written in
pure Koye, or Chinese, and scientific and literary works in a mixed dialect,
containing more of the Koye than of the Yomi. I presume that in those books
the Koye is written in the Chinese lexigraphic, and the Yomi in the Japanese
syllabic alphabet. It must make a curious mixture; and it is worth inquiry
how and how far the peasants and fishermen are instructed in the Koye lan-
guage and system of writing. I suppose that the same thing may be said of
the people of Loo-Choo.

IV. The Coréan.

The peninsula of Coréa is situated between China and Japan, and separated
from. those countries, on each side, by a narrow straight. It is bounded on the

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 27

north and north-west by Chinese Tartary, every where else by the sea. It is
tributary to the empire of China.

We should know very little of the language of that country if it were not
for the recent publication of the Rev. Mr. Medhurst, entitled “A Comparative
Vocabulary of the Chinese, Coréan, and Japanese Languages,” compiled by a
native of Corea, which has lately made its way into this country. I have had
the book but a few days in my possession, through the kindness of my learned
friend Mr. Pickering, of Boston, to whom it belongs. I have not, therefore,
been able to study it as much as I wished. It is to be regretted that the vene-
rable missionary contented himself with publishing a translation of that inte-
resting work, to which he added very few observations of his own, from which,
and the work itself, I have been able to deduce the following facts.

Corea, like Japan, has two languages, the one vernacular, the other learned.
In the former are written all works intended for common reading; works of
higher literature are in the learned idiom.

The vernacular or popular language has no affinity with either the Chinese
or Japanese; if is probably derived from some ‘Tartar dialect. It is not, as far
as I can judge, monosyllabic; and yet it does not appear to have words of a
greater length than two syllables, but on this I have not had a sufficient oppor-
tunity to form a decided opinion. Of its syntax or grammatical forms I can
say nothing. It has, like the Sanscrit, an alphabetic syllabary, which, I think,
is much superior to that, from its simplicity and clearness. It is not, like the
Japanese, formed out of Chinese characters. It consists of fifty-two elementary
signs, of which twenty-seven, called initials, are single, double, or aspirated
consonants, and twenty-five, called finals, are vowels or diphthongs. I mean
diphthongs to the ear, and not to the eye.

By means of these fifty-two characters, joined or placed close to each other
in the most ingenious manner, the six hundred and seventy-five syllables, of
which the language consists, are represented, and never leave, as in the
‘Sanscrit, the vowel sounds to be understood. They are so simple in their forms
that they may be joined, as we sometimes join in our printed books, the let-
ters fi, ffi, Jl, fi, &c. Thus the consonant K is written —y, and the conso-
nant N thus ¢-. The sign of the long vowel A is y_.. Now the syllable KA
is written Tf, and the syllable Na 4. I know of no other syllabary formed

on this simple and elegant model.

28 ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING.

The learned language is Chinese, but differently pronounced than in China,
and for the same reason that has already been given for the Japanese. The
Coréans want the nasal vowels of the Chinese, and cannot articulate them.
They want the consonant /, of which the Chinese make such frequent use, and
they have the consonant 6, which the Chinese want. ‘They have a multitude
of double, successive, and aspirated consonants, very difficult to be pronounced.
It is well known that the Chinese cannot articulate two consonants successively,
and always interpose a vowel between. Besides, there are the four tones, or
accents, by which the Chinese, in speaking, distinguish their homophonous
words. These, probably, are not much attended to out of China, or are differ-
ently expressed. Though their words are Chinese, their manner of uttering
them is so different that the two nations cannot make themselves understood
of each other by word of mouth. ‘Their vocal organs seem to be cast in differ-
ent moulds.

There is nothing extraordinary in this. We vary, more or less, in the same
manner in our pronunciation of the dead, and even of some living languages.
M. Silvestre de Sacy, the author of the best Arabic grammar extant, could not
understand Arabs when speaking, nor make himself understood by them. If
an ancient Roman were to come again into this world, an Oxonian could
hardly understand him, nor make himself understood by him in his own
Latin; he would be obliged to take to his pen, or to his tablets, after the man-
ner of the Coréans and the Japanese.

Thus the great miracle, which has exercised the fancy of so many enthu-
siasts and produced such strange theories, is naturally explained. This expla-
nation is not to be sought in any thing inherent in the Chinese characters, in
their external forms or in their greater perspicuity, but in their connexion with
the languages for which they were formed, and in their peculiar adaptation to
them. This was well understood by your learned correspondent when he
inferred from the facts that he stated that all the languages which made use
of the Chinese alphabet were formed on the same model, because he knew
that those characters could not be applied to languages differently constructed.
But im speaking thus generally, he did not advert to the vernacular languages
of Japan, the Loo-Choo Islands, and Corea, so different from the Chinese that
it was found impossible to apply to them the Chinese system of writing, though
it was by the Chinese that they were civilized. Therefore I humbly conceive

ON THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF WRITING. 29

that when those people read Chinese characters, they do not read them in their
own vernacular tongue, but in the Chinese which they have learned, with |
only a different pronunciation of the words. It is otherwise with the peo-
ple of Tunkin and Cochinchina, their language or languages being formed on
the model of that of the Celestial Empire, with only some variations, which,
in their schools, they learn to correct, and to employ the proper characters as
a superior orthography, they are thereby enabled to read the Chinese, as well
as their own language.

I submit these ideas to your learned correspondent, which, | hope, he will
have the goodness to correct, if found erroneous. I beg you will be pleased to
transmit to him a copy of this letter, with the assurance of my respect.

Your friend and obedient servant,

PETER S. DU PONCEAU.

Philadelphia, Sept. 20, 1839.

To Joun Vaucuan, Esa.

Vil.—H

ay

ie Gakelnete

ARTICLE IIL

On the Extrication of the Alkali fiable Metals, Barium, Strontium, and Calevum.
By Robert Hare, M. D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Penn-
syluama. Read October 4, 1839.

In the autumn of 1820, I devised an innovation in. the mechanism and in
the mode of completing the circuit of an extensive voltaic series. Previously to
that time, in using any form of the voltaic battery, the circuit had always been
completed by making a communication between the electrodes,* after the sub-
mersion of the plates. In the case of the deflagrator, the electrodes might be
made to communicate before the immersion of the plates, the circuit being
completed by their immersion. Or, in case the electrodes should not be in con-
tact before immersion, the operator was enabled to bring them together so
nearly about the same time, as to avail himself of the pre-eminently energetic
action which immediately succeeds the encounter between the plates and the
solvent.

Fourteen years had elapsed, during which I had the regret of perceiving
that the advantages of the deflagrator were not sufficiently estimated in Europe,
when, about the year 1835, the celebrated Faraday,t while investigating the
principles upon which galvanic apparatus should be constructed, came to a
conclusion that the deflagrator eminently associated the requisites of which he

* Agreeably to the suggestion of Faraday, I use the word electrode, for the pole of a voltaic
series ; also anode, for the positive pole, and cathode for the negative pole.
7 See London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine and Journal, vol. viii., for 1836, p. 114.

32 ON THE EXTRICATION OF THE ALKALIFIABLE METALS,

was in search, and stated many facts and arguments tending to prove that it
was the most perfect form of the apparatus at that time known. More than
twelve years ago, while I was operating with a deflagrator of three hundred
pairs, each seven inches by three, I observed that, in a circuit made through
a saturated solution of chloride of calcium, by means of a coarse platina wire
(No. 14) and a fine wire, (No. 26,) that when the latter was made the cathode
and the former the anode, a most intense ignition resulted, causing the rapid
fusion of the fine wire into globules like common shot. But when the situa-
tions of the wires were reversed, so that the smaller wire’was made to form the
anode, the ignition became comparatively so feeble as to be incompetent to fuse
the fine platina wire. ‘This phenomenon had continued to appear inexplicable,
when, during the last winter, it occurred to me that the evolution and combus-
tion of the calcium might be the cause of the superior heat produced at the
cathode.

This led to the employment of chlorides in the process of Seebeck, Berzelius,
and Pontin, for the production of amalgams from the earths, in which a cathode
of mercury, and anode of platina were used. Accordingly, in operating with a
deflagrator of three hundred and fifty Cruickshank pairs of seven inches by
three, a mercurial amalgam was speedily obtained, which appeared sufficiently
imbued with calcium to become speedily buried under a pulverulent stratum
of lime, and mercury in a minute state of division.

Nevertheless, after exposure of the amalgam thus produced to the air, till all
the calcium had been separated, and igniting the resulting powder to drive off
the adhering mercury, the ratio of the weight of the lime thus obtained, to the
mercury with which it had been united, was not over a five hundredth part.
With a view to procure an amalgam in which the proportion of calcium should
be greater, I was led to devise the following apparatus and process, of which
an engraving and description is now laid before the society.

How far the result of my exertions, subsequently stated, may be considered
in advance of the steps previously taken, will be evident from the fact that all
the knowledge which exists, respecting the isolation of the metals of the alka-
line earths, is due to the experiments and observations of Davy; and to what
point they extended may be learned from the following quotations from the
Bakerian lectures of that celebrated chemist. In reference to his efforts to iso-
late the radical in question, the distinguished lecturer mentions “that to obtain

BARIUM, STRONTIUM, AND CALCIUM. 33

a complete decomposition was extremely difficult, since nearly a red heat was
required, and that at a red heat the bases of the earths acted upon the glass,
and became oxygenated. When the tube was large in proportion to the quan-
tity of amaleam, the vapour of naphtha furnished oxygen sufficient to destroy
a part of the bases; and when a small tube was employed, it was difficult to
heat the part used as a retort sufficiently to drive the whole of the mercury from
the base without raising too highly the temperature of the part serving for a
receiver so as to burst the tube.” ‘‘ When the quantity of amalgam was about
fifty or sixty grains, I found that the tube could not be conveniently less than
one-sixth of an inch in diameter, and of the capacity of about half a cubic inch.
In consequence of these difficulties, in a multitude of trials I had few success-
ful results; and in no case could I be absolutely certain that there was not a
minute portion of mercury still in combination with the metals of the earths.’’*

The observations are more than confirmed by my experience, which leads
me to the conviction that the removal of the mercury is not to be accomplished
thoroughly in glass vessels, and, of course, that Davy was perfectly correct in
supposing that the products which he described as barium and strontium were
alloys with mercury. Iam also under the impression that the metals above
mentioned decompose naphtha, when heated with its vapour, and enter into
combination with its constituents. Had the barium which Davy obtained
been free from mercury, it would not have been fusible below a red heat, as
alleged by him. Agreeably to my experience, that metal requires no less than
a good red heat for its fusion.

In a subsequent paragraph he adds: “The metal from lime I have never
been able to examine exposed to air or under naphtha. In the case in which
I was enabled to distil the mercury from it to the greatest extent, the tube
unfortunately broke while warm, and at the same moment when the air entered
the metal, which had the colour of silver, took fire and burnt, with an intense
white light, into quicklime.”’*

Had the failure of Sir Humphrey, in his efforts to isolate calcium, been due
only to the accidental fracture of a glass tube, it would be inexplicable that a
chemist so indefatigable should not have successfully reiterated the experi-

* See Transactions of the Royal Society, part II. Nicholson’s Journal, vol. xxi., for 1808; or,
Tilloch’s Philosophical Magazine, vol. xxxiii.
Vil.—I

34 ON THE EXTRICATION OF THE ALKALIFIABLE METALS,

ment; or that no other chemist, during thirty intervening years, should have
succeeded by resorting to the same means. No doubt exists in my mind that,
without using a larger quantity of mercury than the sixty grains which he
employed, and resorting to other materials than glass for a distillatory appa-
ratus, no chemist could succeed in the isolation of calcium, nor in the complete
distillation of the mercury from the amalgams of the other metals, so as to
obtain available quantities for examination.

In a subsequent communication to the Royal Society, Davy mentions that,
“by passing potassium through lime and magnesia, and then introducing mer-
cury, I obtained solid amalgams, consisting of potassium, the metal of the earth
employed, and mercury.”

“The amalgam from magnesia was easily deprived of its potassium by
water.” Of the amalgam containing calcium he makes no farther mention,
but suggests the possibility of obtaiing, by operations performed in this man-
ner, quantities of the metals of the earths sufficient for determining their nature
and agencies.*

But I will proceed to explain and describe the apparatus and process to
which I have resorted, and to communicate the results which I have obtained.

A Description of the Apparatus and Process for obtaining Amalgams of Cal-~
cium, Barium, and Strontium from saturated solutions of their Chlorides, by
exposure to the Voltaic Circuit in contact with Mercury.

A and B, two bell glasses, with perforated necks, were inverted and placed
one within the other, so that, between them, there was an interstice of half an
inch, which was filled with a freezing mixture. Concentrically within B a
third similar bell, F, was placed, including a glass flask, of which the stem
extended vertically through the neck of F. From a vessel, V, with a cock
intervening, a tube luted to the orifice of the flask extended to the bottom of it,
so as to convey thither from V a current of ice-water, which, after refrigerating
the bulk of the flask, could escape through the nozzie projecting, horizontally,
from the neck, T. The mercury in the capsule D communicates through the
rod with the negative poles of one or more deflagrators. ‘The capsule L in
like manner with the corresponding positive poles.

* Transactions Royal Society for 1810, part I., p. 62. ‘Tilloch’s Magazine, vol. xxxvi. p. 87.

BARIUM, STRONTIUM, AND CALCIUM. 35

fil HUTA TT

A rod of platina reaches from some mercury in the capsule D, through the
necks of the beds A and B, into a stratum of mercury, resting upon shoulder
of the bell glass B, so as to be about a quarter of an inch beneath the flask.
Several circumvolutions of platina wire, No. 14, forming a flat coil, were
interposed between the mercury and the bottom of the flask. The recurved
ends of this wire were made to reach into the mercury in the capsule L. Over
the mouth of the bell F,, after the introduction of the flask and coil, some bed-
ticking was tied, so as to prevent contact between the platina and mercury, and
to check, as much as possible, any reunion between the radical taken up by
the one and the chlorine liberated by the other. Into the bell T, a saturated
solution of the chloride to be decomposed was poured, and some coarsely pow-
dered crystals of the same compound added. Of course the solution, by pene-
trating the ticking, came into contact with the mercury.

36 ON THE EXTRICATION OF THE ALKALIFIABLE METALS,

Electrolytic Process.

The peculiar mechanism of my apparatus, by which, in ten seconds, the acid
may be thrown on or off of the plates, enables the operator, within that time,
after a due arrangement of the poles is made, to put either or both of the
deflagrators in operation, or to suspend the action of either or both. This mode
of completing or breaking the circuit gives a great advantage in deflagrating
wires; or in the processes, wherein dry cyanides, phosphurets, or carburets
are to be exposed to voltaic action in vacuo, or in hydrogen. It enables us to
arrange every part of the apparatus so as to produce the best effect upon the
body to be acted upon, and then to cause a discharge of the highest intensity
of which the series is capable, by subjecting the plates to the acid previously
lying inactive in the adjoining trough.

In the case in point, where a chloride was to be decomposed, the deflagrators
could be made to act through the same electrodes, either SIERLLENESIS or
alternately. Of these facilities I thus availed myself:

Having supplied each deflagrator with a charge of diluted acid of one fourth
of the usual strength, I began with No. 1, and at the end of five minutes super-
seded it by putting No. 2 into operation. Mean while, having added to No. 1
as much more acid as at first, at the end of the second five minutes I super-
seded No. 2 by No. 1; and, in like manner, again superseded No. 1 by No. 2.
Having thus continued the alternate action of the deflagrators for about twenty
minutes, both were made to act upon the electrodes simultaneously, the balance
of acid requisite to complete the charge having been previously added.

By these means the reaction was rendered more equable than it could become
in operating with one series more highly charged. Although, under such cir-
cumstances, the reaction may, at the outset, be sufficiently powerful to produce
ignition, as I have often observed, after fifteen or twenty minutes it may be-
come too feeble in electrolyzing power to render the continuance of the process
in the slightest degree serviceable. Agreeably to my experience, as the ratio
of the calcium to the mercury increases, the amalgam formed becomes so much
more electro-positive as to balance the electro-negative influence of the voltaic
current. After reacting with one series of two hundred pairs, of one hundred
square inches each, for seventy minutes, I have found the proportion of calcium
to be only one six-hundredth of the amalgamated mass obtained.

ON THE EXTRICATION OF THE ALKALIFIABLE METALS, 37

In this lies the great difficulty of obtaining any available quantity of the
radicals of the alkaline earths by electrolization; especially in the case of cal-
cium. It is easy, by a series of only fifty pairs, to produce an amalgam with
that metal, which, when exposed to the air, will become covered with a pul-
verulent mixture of lime and mercury; but, in such case, the quantity of cal-
cium taken up by the mercury, when estimated by the resulting oxide, will be
found almost too smail to be appreciated by weighing. ‘To increase the quan-
tity of calcium to an available extent I have found extremely difficult, since,
as the process proceeds, the chemical affinity becomes more active while the
electrolyzing power becomes more feeble.

That a change should be effected in mercury, giving to it the characteristics
of an amalgam, by the addition of a six hundredth part of its weight, cannot be
deemed difficult to believe, when it is recollected that Davy found that when, by
amalgamation with ammonium, a globule of mercury had expanded to five times
its previous bulk, it had gained, in weight, only one twelve thousandth part. *

As the affinity between the chlorine and the radicals of the alkaline earths
increases in strength with the temperature, and as heat is evolved in propor-
tion to the energy of the voltaic action, the disposition of the elements sepa-
rated by electrolyzation to reunite is, in this way, promoted. Hence the
necessity of refrigeration.

The best index of the success of this process is the evolution of chlorine;
since in proportion to the quantity of this principle extricated at the anode,
must be the quantity of calcium separated at the cathode. During my opera-
tions, chlorine was evolved so copiously as to tinge the cavity of the innermost
bell with its well known hue. Hence, when the evolution of chlorine ceases
to be very perceptible, the amalgam should be extricated from the apparatus,
and separated by a funnel and the finger from the solution of chloride, and
immediately subjected to distillation.

It has been mentioned, that in the electrolytic process above described I
resorted to the alternate action of two deflagrators. This was effected by
making the negative poles of both communicate with the mercury in capsule
D, while the positive poles communicated with some mercury in capsule L.
For a description of the deflagrators employed, I refer to the American Philo-

* See Tilloch’s Magazine, vol. xxxiil. p. 213.

WAM Se

38 BARIUM, STRONTIUM, AND CALCIUM.

sophical Transactions, vol. v., or to Silliman’s Journal, vol. xxxil. p. 285, as
those which I employed were of the kind there described. There has, however,
been an improvement introduced. Formerly, the plates were secured by ce-
ment; but, of late, I have had them so shaped and fitted as to slide out of the
grooves when pulled by means of forceps. ‘This has enabled me to have them
washed after each operation, and, when necessary, scraped.

Instead of a coating of cement, the wood is defended by mutton suet or bees’
wax, in which, while melted, it is soaked, after being made as hot as possible
without taking fire.

I have found great benefit to arise from Mr. Sturgeon’s expedient of amalga-
mating the surfaces of the zinc; which Faraday has represented as giving,
to a great extent, the properties of a sustaining battery. Agreeably to my
experience, it renders the plates less liable to be encrusted with suboxide of
zine and copper, which always impairs the energy of a voltaic series.

In order to facilitate the insertion or extrication of the plates into or out of
the grooves, the plates are cut so as to be about one-eighth in breadth less at
the lower ends. In addition to the advantage of being enabled to cleanse the
plates, this liberty of removing or replacing them is beneficial in another
respect. It must necessarily ensue, that those edges of the plates which are
lowermost, when the acid is in the act of being transferred, must be much
more corroded than those portions of the surface which are otherwise situated.
In fact, under the circumstances alluded to, the zinc is liable to be eaten
through, near one of the lateral edges, when otherwise not more than half
worn. But, in consequence of the construction above described, by a reversal
of their relative position, each edge may, in turn, be made lowermost, so as to
equalize the degree of corrosion sustained.

Distillatory Apparatus and Process.

A quantity of the amalgam, weighing about three thousand grains, was intro-

Fig. 2. duced into an iron crucible. Of this crucible a section is
represented by Fig. 2, which was forthwith closed by a
~ capsule seated in a rabbet, or groove, made on purpose to
receive it. ‘The capsule being supplied with about half
a dram of caoutchouchine, was then covered by the lid.
In the next place, by means of a moveable handle, or bail,

ON THE EXTRICATION OF THE ALKALIFIABLE METALS, 39

of wire so constructed as to be easily attached, the crucible was transferred to
the interior of the body of the alembic, A. Into the cavity thus occupied, about
a dram measure of naphtha was poured. The canopy, A, and body of the alem-
bic, B, were then joined, (as represented in Fig. 3,) with the aid of a luting of
clay and borax between the grooved juncture and the pressure of the stirrup
screw provided for that purpose. i

Fig. 3.

A communication was made between the alembic and a small tubulated
glass receiver, by means of an iron tube thirty inches long, and a quarter in
bore. The tubulure of the receiver received the tapering end of an adopter, G,
which communicated with a reservoir of hydrogen by means of a flexible lead
pipe. The length of the tube prevented the alembic, or receiver, from being
subjected to the agitation which results from the condensation of the mercurial
vapour. Before closing the juncture completely, all the air of the alembic was
expelled by a current of hydrogen, desiccated in its passage by a mingled mass
of chloride of calcium and quicklime contained in the adopter. By keeping up
the communication with the reservoir of this gas, while subjected to a column
of about an inch or two of water, the pressure within the alembic being greater
than without, there could be no access of atmospheric oxygen.

The bottom of the alembic was protected by a stout capsule of iron, (a cast
iron mortar, for instance.) The next step was to surround it with ignited char-
coal, in a chauffer or small furnace, taking care to cause the heat to be the
greatest at the upper part. By these means, and the protection afforded by
the mortar, the ebullition of the mercury may be restricted to the part of its
mass nearest to the upper surface. Without this precaution, this metal is

40 BARIUM, STRONTIUM, AND CALCIUM.

liable to be thrown into a state of explosive vaporization, by which it is driven
out of the crucible, carrying with it any other metal with which it may be
united.

On the first application of the fire, the caoutchouchine distilled into the
receiver. Next followed the naphtha from the body of the alembic. Lastly,
the mercury of the amalgam distilled; the last portions requiring a bright red
heat, in consequence of the affinity between the metal and the alkalifiable
radical.

After the distillation was finished, the apparatus having been well refrige-
rated, the alembic was opened and the crucible removed. As soon as the lid
was taken off, some naphtha was poured between the rim of the capsule and
sides of the crucible, so as to reach the metal below. This was found adhering
to the bottom of the crucible.

When the heat was insufficient to carry off all the mercury, the metal was
found in a state somewhat resembling metallic arsenic in texture, though its
susceptibility of oxidation, and its affinity for carbon, caused it to be deficient
of metallic lustre, until the surface was removed by the file or burnisher.

Properties of the Metals obtained by the processes above mentioned.

Wither metal was rapidly oxydized in water, or in any liquid containing it;
and afterwards, with tests, gave the appropriate proofs of its presence. ‘They
all sank in sulphuric acid; were all brittle and fixed; and, for fusion, required
at least a good red heat. After being kept in naphtha, their effervescence with
water is, on the first immersion, much less active. Under such circumstances
they react, at first, more vivaciously with hydric ether than with water, or
even chlorohydric acid; because in these liquids a resinous covering, derived
from the naphtha, is not soluble, while to the ether it yields readily.

By means of solid carbonic acid, obtained by Mitchell’s modification of Thi-
lorier’s process, I froze an ounce measure of the amalgam of calcium, hoping to
effect a partial mechanical separation of the mercury by straining through
leather, as in the case of other amalgams. The result, however, did not justify
my hopes, as both metals were expelled through the pores of the leather simul-
taneously, the calcium forming, forthwith, a pulverulent oxide, intermingled
with, and discoloured by mercury in a state of extreme division.

BARIUM, STRONTIUM, AND CALCIUM. Al

By the same means I froze a mass of the amalgam of ammonium as large as
the palm of my hand, so as to be quite hard, tenacious and brittle. The mass
floated upon the mercury of my mercurial pneumatic cistern, and gradually
liquified, while its volatile ingredients escaped.

When the freezing of the amalgam was expedited by the addition of hydric
ether, the resulting solid effervesced in water, evolving ethereal fumes. This
seems to show that a portion of this ether may be incorporated with ammo-
nium and mercury, without depriving the aggregate thus formed of the cha-
racteristics of a metallic alloy.

Vil.—L

Tap CRs Ly sitar iat

Ae

G Dak BO LaRiS

ARPT C i Het v’.

Astronomical Observations made at Hudson Observatory, Latitude 41° 14' 37’
North, and Longitude 5h. 25m. 42s. West; with some Account of the Building
and Instruments. By Elias Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural
Philosophy in Western Reserve College, Hudson, Ohio. Read October 4, 1839.

Hupson OBSERVATORY comprises a central room and two wings. Exter-
nally, its entire length is thirty-seven feet, and the breadth of the centre sixteen
feet. The foundations are of hewn sand-stone, and the walls, which are of

=A
WIN

brick, are one foot in thickness. The transit room is represented upon the left
hand in the annexed figure. It is ten feet by twelve upon the inside, and seven

44 ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS

and a half feet high, having a flat roof covered with tin. In its centre is a pier _
of fine sand-stone. Its top is twenty-seven inches by thirteen, and rises twenty-

four inches above the floor. It has a slope of one inch to the foot, and descends

about six feet below the surface of the earth. It is entirely detached from the

building, and the floor is no where in contact with it. The openings for the

transit are fifteen inches wide; the side openings being closed by solid wooden

shutters, and a single trap-door covers the entire top. ‘This covering is such

as effectually to exclude the most violent rain. The transit commands an

unobstructed meridian from ninety degrees zenith distance on the south, to

eighty-nine degrees on the north.

The central room of the observatory is occupied by the equatorial, and is
fourteen feet square upon the inside. In its centre is raised a circular plat-
form, ten feet in diameter and four feet high, upon whose circumference rest
twelve small cherry columns, which help to sustain the dome. ‘The dome is a
hemisphere of nine feet internal diameter. It rests upon ten wheels of ignum
vite, five inches in diameter, placed equidistant from each other, running in a
grooved channel, and set in a wooden ring, consisting of five ares, joined by
hinges, to allow greater freedom of motion to the wheels. The dome has an
opening fifteen inches wide, reaching from the base to eight inches past the
zenith, closed by three doors, the top ane closing last, and the joints being so
secured as effectually to exclude the rain. The whole is covered with tin, and
a single person can readily revolve it by hand. The top of the equatorial pin
is twenty inches by thirty, and rises three feet six inches above the platform.
Its slope is one inch to the foot, and it descends six feet below the surface of
the ground. It is of the same material with the transit pier, and, like that, is
also entirely detached from the building.

The right hand room in the above figure, which is the west room, contains
no instruments, but is provided with a stove, and serves as a convenient ante-
room.

The instruments of the observatory are a transit circle, an equatorial tele-
scope, and a clock. The transit circle was made by Simms, of London, in
1837. It has a telescope of thirty inches focal length, with a very superior
object glass, whose clear aperture is 2.7 inches. This is supported by broad
cones, forming an axis of eighteen inches in length. The pivots are of steel,
and rest on brass y’s. It is supported by a heavy cast iron frame, which rests

MADE AT HUDSON OBSERVATORY. 45

upon the pier, and is secured immoveably to it by stout screws entering brass
sockets, which are leaded to the stone. In the focus of the telescope are five
vertical equidistant spider lines, besides the micrometer, and they are crossed
by five horizontal ones. There are three eye-pieces, one of them being a diago-
nal eye-piece, which I almost exclusively employ; and they may be slid back
and forth so as to be brought opposite either of the vertical wires. The object
end has a cap pierced with two apertures. ‘The level for securing the hori-
zontality of the axis is a rider of seventeen inches length, and is accompanied
by a small bubble at right angles. My observations make the value of the
division of the level 1’.278. I have two meridian marks, one to the north and
the other to the south; the former distant about sixty rods, and the latter
nearly a mile. The circle is eighteen inches diameter, with six radu, and is
firmly connected with another of equal size, but not graduated, separated by
an interval of three and a half inches, and between the two is the telescope.
The graduation of the circle is on platina to five minutes; and there are three
reading microscopes, each measuring single seconds. ‘These microscopes are
of the kind called Troughton’s reading microscope, and are represented in
Pearson’s Practical Astronomy, Plate X1., Fig. 9. They are screwed upon a
stout brass circle attached to the frame, and may be set to any part of the limb.
Microscope A, which carries the pointer, I have set to indicate the polar point:
microscope B at 120° north polar distance; and C at 240°. To the frame which
sustains the microscopes is permanently attached a delicate spirit level, point-
ing north and south.

The equatorial telescope, made also by Simms, is five and a half feet focal
length, with an object glass of 3.8 inches clear aperture. It has six celestial
eye-pieces, with magnifying powers from 20 to 400; a terrestrial eye-piece; an
eye-piece with five parallel spider lines, crossed by as many others at right
angles; and a position micrometer, represented in Pearson, Plate XI., Figs. 1,
2, 3. A lamp, suspended from the side of the tube, illumines the field of view,
when it is necessary to use the micrometer by night. ‘The frame of the equa-
torial is of cast iron, secured immoveably to the pin by screws entering sockets
leaded into the stone. It was made for the latitude of the observatory, and the
polar axis admits but a slight motion in altitude and azimuth, by means of
screws at its lower extremity. The right ascension circle is twelve inches
diameter graduated to single minutes, and reads by two verniers to single

vil.—M

46 ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS

seconds of time. A tangent screw, with a long handle, gives a slow motion,
and enables an observer to keep an object readily in the field of view. The
declination circle is also twelve inches in diameter, graduated to ten minutes,
and reads by two verniers to ten seconds of arc.

The clock was made by Molineux, of London. It has a mercurial pendu-
lum, the cistern for the mercury being of glass, and the cylinder is terminated
by a steel point, which indicates the are of vibration upon a fixed scale. It
loses no time in winding, an operation which I perform every Monday morn-
ing. It is regulated to sidereal time, and its rate is tolerably uniform. It is
suspended by a stout iron hook, which was inserted in the north wall of the
transit room as the building was erecting, and which passes through the oak
back of the clock case. It is rendered steady by two screws, which pass
through the back of the case, near the bottom, and enter a timber inserted in
the brick wall. The case does not touch the floor. An opening in the side
wall, between the transit and equatorial rooms, allows the clock dial to be
easily seen from the platform of the dome, and thus one clock is made to serve
two instruments.

The instruments were first placed in the observatory, September 8th, i838,
and I at once applied myself diligently to their adjustment. Having verified
the line of collimation of the transit and levelled the axis, the telescope was
brought into the plane of the meridian approximately by high and low stars,
and, subsequently, by repeated observations of Polaris, both above and below
the pole. In noting the transits of Polaris, I do not attempt, by a single obser-
vation, to estimate the time when the star is bisected by a wire. The uncer-
tainty of such an observation I have found to amount to several seconds. ‘The
star, In approaching a wire, appears to make an indentation upon it; and, also,
itself suffers a partial eclipse. After passing the wire, the indentation appears
upon the other side; and the deficiency, also, appears upon the other side of
the star. When the hght of the star is faint, as when the sun is several hours
above the horizon, the star is entirely occulted for three or four seconds. At
such times I note the instants of the star’s disappearance, and of its reappear-
ance; the mean I consider the instant of the star’s passage over that wire. At
other times I note the two instants when the star makes equal indentations upon
the two sides of the wire, or suffers an equal loss of brilliancy, taking the mean
of the two observations. For all transit observations, I take a second from the

MADE AT HUDSON OBSERVATORY. A7

clock a short interval before the transit over the first wire, and preserve the
counting by listening to the beats. Having recorded the observation for the
first wire, I look again at the clock, and so on for each of the five wires. The
equatorial intervals of the wires in their orders for stars above the pole were
found to be 18s.456; 185.419; 185.180; 18s.3'74. The reduction to the central
wire is, consequently, 0s.112 x secant of declination; positive above the pole,
and negative below.

The pendulum of the clock, as it came from the maker, was found to be
over-compensated. At three different times a portion of the mercury has been
removed, namely: about two ounces, Nov. 30th, 1838; three ounces, Feb. 12th,
1839; and five ounces, March 5th, 1839. At each of these dates the rate of
the elock was, of course, changed. I am of opinion that the pendulum is still
over-compensated, though in a very slight degree. The column of mercury is
now 6.3 inches high. Since March 5th the clock has not been stopped, nor
the pendulum touched. The inequalities of the clock’s rate, as shown in the
accompanying list of moon-culminating stars, are to be ascribed to imperfect
compensation; to a change in the adjustment of the pendulum; to errors of
observation, the rate having commonly been determined from a small number
of stars, and to other causes of a more uncertain character. Fortunately, from
the nature of the observations, the results deduced from them cannot be greatly
affected by the small uncertainty in the clock’s rate.

I. Latitude of Hudson Observatory.

For the determination of my latitude, I have made repeated observations of
the pole star, near the meridian, both directly and by reflection from the sur-
face of mercury. ‘The three microscopes were read at each observation; the
observations were reduced to the meridian by the usual method, and corrected
for refraction by Bessel’s Tables. The mean latitude deduced from sixteen
culminations, nine below, and seven above the pole, allowing each culmination
a weight proportioned to the number of reflected observations, is 41° 14' 33".7.
This is the mean of all the observations I have made, and supposes them all
entitled to equal confidence, which is far from being the case. In the first
observations the reflected image was quite indistinct, owing chiefly to the mer-
cury being placed too near the telescope; and I have reason to believe that the

48 ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS

latitude deduced from them is too small. In the later observations, the mer-
cury was removed about thirty inches from the object-glass of the telescope,
and the reflected observations were then found to accord quite as well as the
direct observations. ‘The direct and reflected observations were made alter-
nately, from ten to sixteen at a culmination, and with the following result:

Upper culmination, August 8, . . . . . 41° 14’ 39-8
se ceria cl Osea came tcam 36 °7

2 6 BO alka Pam inMviba el sseican eke 36 °8

Oe POSTOLE aean e twee aan 37 °8

ae SCAT Lop tam, Seer SaL, 40 °5

6G Ceagis 7 Mee E AR A ESS Le 36 ‘6

Mean of these six culminations,. . . . . 41 14 38:1

The latitude deduced from the upper culmination of 6 Ursae Minoris, Au-
gust 13th, is 41° 14’ 35°1; August 17th, 41° 14’ 36.2. Mean latitude by é
Ursae Minoris, 41° 14' 35.7. Mean of observations on a ard 6 Ursae Minoris,
A? 14° 37°.5.

In order to determine the error of the readings of the microscopes, the fol-
lowing observations were made August 12th. ‘The object was to ascertain if
five revolutions of the micrometer exactly measure the interval between two
divisions upon the limb. The numbers below give the excess of each micro-
scope, for a reading of five minutes, for the north polar distances contained in
the first column, being the points employed for the observations of Polaris.

North Polar Distance. A. B. Cc. Mean.
358° 25’—30’ — 1"3 + 17:0 + 2-9 + 0”87
L 30—35 —1°7 = 1 2 + 4°7 + 1:40
275 55 —60 —1°:9 — 0:2 + 5°8 + 1:23
Hie) M255 38) +04 ae, BF of + 0-97

The numbers in the last column furnish the correction to be subtracted from
the micrometer reading when this amounts to five minutes. A proportional
part is to be taken for any other reading. ‘This correction, although affecting
the latitude by only a fraction of a second, has, nevertheless, been applied to
all the observations. I assume, then, for the latitude of Hudson Observa-
tory, 41° 14' 37", and think that future observations cannot vary much from
this result.

10

11

MADE AT HUDSON OBSERVATORY.

II. Observed Transits of the Moon and Moon Culminating Stars, at Hudson
Observatory.

It is hoped these observations may furnish the means of determining the

longitude of the Observatory with some precision.

At present I assume this

element to be 5h. 25m. 42s. west from Greenwich. The table will sufficiently
explain itself. The stars observed are generally those indicated by the Nauti-

cal Almanac.

rule.

29

27
Nov. 13
29

1839.
Jan. 23

24

Feb. 19

21

Mar. 22

Star.

> Sagittarii
o Sagittarii
Moon 1 1.
h? Sagittarii
Capricorni
4 Capricorni
Moon 1 1.
y Capricorni
6 Capricorni
o Aquarii

a Aquaril
Moon 1 1.
x’ Piscium
y Capricorni
Moon 1 1,

a Virginis
Moon 21.

vy Arietis
Moon 1 1,

e Arietis
Moon 1 t.
q Tauri
A’ Tauri
q Tauri
A’ Tauri
Moon 1 t.
z Tauri

o Tauri
Moon 1 1.
o Tauri

v’ Tauri

2 Tauri
Moon 1 1.
C Tauri

x Aurige

Moon 1 1.

Vil.—N

Z
°

Wires

©

AwWNIIwnrai»°narnawnan»an»n»a Cr or ol G Ol GO GO Gr Or Or Or GH Ol OF Or Gr O1 ON

AHI LCR RP WP PE RWOWHWOWWNH WW

Meridian
Transit.

+ 2°67

— 1°39

— 1:23

1°21

+ 0°34

12 |

15

Date.

‘Mar. 23

Apr.

24

25

27

18

19

20

21)

23

24,

Star.

§ Geminorum
a? Geminorum
6 Geminorum
ao? Geminorum
Moon 1 1.

6 Cancri
6 Cancri
e Hydre
Moon 1
— Cancri
€ Cancri
q Caneri
Moon 1 t.
vy Leonis

a Leonis

1 Leonis
Moon 1} 1.
os Leonis
» Leonis

Moon 1 1.

e Geminorum
Moon 1 1.

g Geminorum
e Leonis

6 Geminorum
Moon 1 t.

6 Cancri

— Cancri

§ Cancri

§ Cancri
Moon 1 1x.

» Leonis

») Leonis

y Leonis
Moon 1 4.

xz Leonis

GOWAN HH Oo CLO ot or GL OL oT OT AAaAaIaa»a»anan»ankroaannnaa4ca«n

Meridian
Transit.

=

WOOO OO MM MO -3 5-3 GS

& ||

45-96
35-15
45:94
34-63

2°50)
53 22)
40°66

In only two or three instances is there a deviation from this

— 0-01

—

20-15

ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS,

No. 3 a1 | No. ane ,
No.| Date Star. Wires eas Date. Star. Wires eee vee
Obs. Obs ;
1839. p h. m. Ss. 1839. Oo WO Ss. S.
Apr. 24}7 Leonis 5 |il 19 53-58 Moon 1 x. 5 |13 48 42-36
21 Moon It. 5 |1l 87 53-84 (July 19|Moon 1 1. 5 |14 80 35-264 0°24
8 Virginis 5 [11 42 32:96) a? Libre 5 |14 42 33:60
o Virginis 5 |Ll 57 14-78) 20 Libre Q |14 55 15:14)
25)3 Virginis 5 |11 42 31-76) 22|a Scorpii 5 |16 20 9-07/+ 0:24
o Virginis 5 |ll 57 14:50 z Scorpii 5 |16 26 29-01
22 Moon 1 1. 5 |\12 20 47-18 Moon 1 1. 5 |17 10 29:87
ne Veneers 5 12 33 44-80 oOphiuchi | 5 [17 12 44-63
y Virginis 5 |12 46 13-48 p Sagittarii 5 |17 88 3:15)
26\y' Virginis 5 |12 83 44-12 23|Moon 1 t. 5 |18 9 40:99 + 0°53
¥ Virginis 5 |12 46 12-94 », Sagittarii 5 |18 18 40-05
23 Moon Ik. 5 |138 4 3°50 o Sagittarii 4 |18 45 55-56
o Virginis 5 |18 16 57:24 24\, Sagittarii 4 |18 18 40:00— 0-21
27) Virginis 4 |13 16 56-72 > Sagittarii 5 |18 45 54-63
24 Moon It. 5 |13 48 43-38 Moon it, 5 |19 9 43-19)
a Virginis” 5 (14°10 38-28 x’ Sagittarii 5 (19 16 6:67)
May 3/9 Sagittarii 5 |18 35 50-47 he Sagittarii 5 |19 27 32:31
o Sagittarii 5 |18 45 31-39 25\y’ Sagittarii 5 |19 16 6:91) + 0-28
25 Moon 2 t. 5 |19 14 6:81 h? Sagittarii 5 |19 27 32-81
h? Sagitlarii 5 |19 27 8-29 Moon 1 t. 5 |20 8 52-49
26 5 Moon 2 1. 5 21 17, 42°62 x Capricorni | 5 |20 18 44:26
6 Aquarii 5 |21 23 16-84 y Capricorni | 5 |20 37 11-65
§ Capricorni 4 |21 38 21-01 28\6 Aquarii 4 |22 8 58:31)/+ 0:25
25|\* Virginis 5 |13 41 22-46 s Aquarii 5 |22 22 45-38
Bi Moon J 1. 5 |14 19 27-16 Moon 2 t. 5 |22 55 8:38
a? Libre 5 |14 42 13-10 @ Aquarii 5 |23 6 36:90
26|a7 Libre 3 |14 42 13-71 x’ Piscium 4 |23 19 18°32!
28 Moon 1 1. 3 |15 8 32-69 31]5 Piscium 5 | 0 40 58:-48— 0-24
29 |June 20|Moon 1 x. 4 |18 16 41-28 Moon 2 t. 5 | 1 31 10-60
a Virginis 2 |13 17 5:08 o Piscium Dllesvaoler2
22a Virginis 5 |14 10 48-94 8 Arietis 4 | 1 46 23-40
30 Moon 1 1, 5 |14 50 7:45 Aug. 2\Moon 2 t. 5 | 3 26 48:-49— 0-17
20 Libre 5 |14 55 3°59 y ‘Tauri 5 | 3 38 32°31
v Libre 5 |15 3 27-28 20)? Sagittarii 5 |17 56 0-08\— 0-16
24|o Scorpii 5 |16 11 51-93 5 Sagittarii 5 |18 11 13-63
a Scorpil 5 16 19 58:45 Moon 1 t. 5 |18 42 46-39
31 Moon 1 1. 5 |16 36 21-31 o Sagittarii 5 |18 45 49-07
A Ophiuchi 5 |17 5 53°13 2 Sagittarii 5 |18 57 25-39
25|4 Ophiuchi 5 |17 5 55:37 21lz Sagittarii 5 |18 57 24:96|— 0-43
32 Moon 1 1. 5 |17 34 13-33 Moon 1 1. 5 |19 42 17:41
p Sagittarii 5 |17 87 54:31 c Sagittarii 5 |19 58 17-55
y? Sagittarli | 5 |17 55 55-61 s Capricormi | 5 |20 10 38-11
29\) Capricomni | 5 20 37 3°51 22'c Sagittarii 5 |19 53 17-27\— 0°54
o Capricorni | 5 |20 57 23-82 « Capricorni | 5 |20 10 37-30
33 | Moon2u. | 5 [21 28 3-44 Moon 1 t. 5 (20 40 31°75
5 Capricorni | 5 |21 38 38-98 , Capricorni | 5 [20 55 45:82
¢ Aquarii 5 |21 58 15°46 s Capricorni 5 |\21 7 21:50
July 1) Aquarii 5 |22 44 42-82 28 Capricorni | 5 |20 55 45-62|\— 0-27
34 Moon 21. 5 |23 11 45°66 s Capricorni 5 \21 7 21:16
« Piscium 2 |23 19 10-63 Moon 1 t. 5 (21 36 44-72
4\8 Arietis 5 | 1 46 15-96 8 Capricorni | 5 (21 88 40-22
35 Moon 2 i. 4 | 1 47 49-96 v Aquarii 5 |21 58 15-84
a Arietis 5 1 58 37:07 25). Aquarii 5 \22 44 43°70\— 0-29
36 17\Moon 1 x. 5 |12 58 52-92 QI] 50 Moon 2 t. 5 |23 26 8-32
a Virginis 5 |13 17 19°76 » Piscium 5 |23 34 20-70
1g|2 Virginis 5 |13 17 18-66|— 0-84] q Piscium 5 23 54 5-00

MADE AT HUDSON OBSERVATORY.

51

IIT. Observed Occultations of the Sun and Fixed Stars at Hudson Observatory.

3D OP woe

Sep. 18
Nov. 13
1839.
Apr. 19
20

STar.

Sun
a Virginis

e Geminorum
y Cancri

b Peiadum

d “é

q ‘Tauri

IMMERSION.
Sidereal Time.

h. ™m. &
14 27 26°70
11 3 51°66

) if alizieatzd
12 0 9:36

9°34
1:34

22 31
23 «1

EMERSION.
Sidereal Time.

h. m. &-

10 15 28°57
12 48 5:16
22 55 1°34
23 21 11-83

REMARKS.

Good observation.
Good observation.

Immersion good; Emersion 1s. or 2s. late. |

Immersion, good observation.

Uncertain.

|

|

& a7 \

an

ARTICLE V.

Description of an Apparatus for Deflagrating Carburets, Phosphurets, or Cya-
nides, in Vacuo or in an Atmosphere of Hydrogen, mith an account of some
Results obtained by these and by other means; especially the Isolation of Cal-
cium. By Robert Hare, M.D. Read October 18, 1839.

Upon a hollow cylinder of brass (A A) an extra air-pump plate (B B) is
supported. The cylinder is furnished with three valve cocks, (D D D,) and
VII.—o

D4 DESCRIPTION OF AN APPARATUS FOR

terminates at the bottom in a stuffing-box, through which a copper rod slides
so as to reach above the level of the air-pump plate. The end of the rod sup-
ports a small horizontal platform of sheet brass, which receives four upright
screws. ‘These, by pressure on brass bars extending from one to the other,
are competent to secure upon the platform a parallelopiped of charcoal. Upon
the air-pump plate a glass bell is supported, and so fitted to it, by grinding, as
to be air-tight. The otherwise open neck of the bell is also closed air-tight by
tying about it a caoutchouc bag, of which the lower part has been cut off, while
into the neck a stuffing-box has been secured air-tight. Through the last men-
tioned stuffine-box a second rod passes, terminating within the bell in a kind
of forceps, for holding an inverted cone of charcoal, (E.)

The upper end of this sliding rod is so recurved as to enter some mercury
in a capsule, (F.) By these means and the elasticity of the caoutchouc bag,
this rod has, to the requisite extent, perfect freedom of motion.

The lower rod descends into a capsule of mercury, (G,) being, in conse-
quence, capable of a vertical motion, without breaking contact with the mer-
cury. It is moved by the aid of a lever, (H,) connected with it by a stirrup
working upon pivots.

Of course the capsules may be made to communicate severally with the
poles of one or more deflagrators. ‘The substance to be deflagrated is placed
upon the charcoal forming the lower electrode, being afterwards covered by
the bell, as represented in the figure. By means of the valve-cocks and leaden
pipes a communication is made with a barometer gage; (see fifth volume of
this work ;) also with an air-pump, and with a large self-reculating reservoir
of hydrogen.

The air being removed by the pump, a portion of hydrogen is admitted, and
then withdrawn. ‘This is repeated, and then the bell glass, after as complete
exhaustion as the performance of the pump will render practicable, is prepared
for the process of deflagration in vacuo. But, if preferred, evidently hydrogen
or any other gas may be introduced from any convenient source by a due com-
munication through flexible leaden pipes and valve-cocks.

Having described the apparatus, I will give an account of some experiments,
made with its assistance, which, if they could have illuminated science as they
did. my lecture room, would have immortalized the operator. But, alas, we may
be dazzled, and almost blinded by the light produced by the hydro-oxygen

DEFLAGRATING CARBURETS, PHOSPHURETS, OR CYANIDES. 55

blow-pipe, or voltaic ignition, without being enabled to remove the darkness
which hides the mysteries of nature from our intellectual vision.

I hope, nevertheless, that some of the results attained may not be unworthy
of attention; and that, as a new mode of employing the voltaic circuit, my ap-
paratus and mode of manipulation will be interesting to chemists.

An equivalent of quicklime, made with great care from pure crystallized
spar, was well mingled, by trituration, with an equivalent and a half of bicya-
nide of mercury, and was then enclosed within a covered porcelain crucible.
The crucible was included within an iron alembic, such as has been described
by me, in this volume, as employed for the isolation of metallic radicals. (See
page 38.)

The whole was exposed to heat approaching to redness. In two experi-
ments the residual mass had such a weight as would result from the union of
an equivalent of cyanogen with an equivalent of calcium.

A similar mixture being made, and, in like manner, enclosed in the crucible
and alembic, it was subjected to a white heat. The apparatus being refrige-
rated, the residual mass was transferred to a dry glass phial with a ground
stopper.

A portion of the compound thus obtained and preserved was placed upon the
parallelopiped of charcoal, which was made to form the cathode of two defla-
orators of one hundred pairs, each of one hundred square inches of zinc sur-
face, co-operating as one series.

In the next place, the cavity of the bell-glass was filled with hydrogen, by
the process already described, and the cone of charcoal being so connected with
the positive end of the series as to be prepared to perform the office of an anode,
was brought into contact with the compound to be deflagrated. ‘These arrange-
ments being accomplished, and the circuit completed by throwing the acid upon
the plates, the most intense ignition took place.

The compound proved to be an excellent conductor; and during its deflagra-
tion emitted a most beautiful purple light, which was too vivid for more than
a transient endurance by an eye unprotected by deep-coloured glasses. After
the compound was adjudged to be sufficiently deflagrated, and time had been
allowed for refrigeration, on lifting the receiver minute masses were found
upon the coal, which had a metallic appearance, and which, when moistened,

56 DESCRIPTION OF AN APPARATUS FOR

produced an effluvium, of which the smell was like that which had been ob-
served to be generated by the silicuret of potassium.

Similar results had been attained by the deflagration, in a like manner, of a
compound procured by passing cyanogen over quicklime, enclosed in a porce-
lain tube, heated to incandescence.*

Phosphuret of calcium, when carefully prepared, and, subsequently, well
heated, was found to be an excellent conductor of the voltaic current evolved
from the apparatus above mentioned. Hence it was thought expedient to
expose it in the circuit of the deflagrator, both in an atmosphere of hydrogen
and in vacuo. The volatilization of phosphorus was so copious as to coat
nearly all the inner surface of the bell-glass with an opake film, in colour
resembling that of the oxide of phosphorus, generated by exposing this sub-
stance under hot water to a current of oxygen.t

The phosphuret at first contracted in bulk, and finally was, for the most
part, volatilized. On the surface of the charcoal, adjoming the cavity in which
the phosphuret had been deflagrated, there was a light pulverulent matter,
which, thrown into water, effervesced, and, when rubbed upon a porcelain tile,
appeared to contain metallic spangles, which were oxydized by the consequent
exposure to atmospheric oxygen.

In one of my experiments with the apparatus above described, portions of
the carbon forming the anode appeared to have undergone complete fusion,
and to have dropped in globules upon the cathode. When rubbed, these
globules had the colour and lustre of plumbago, and, by friction on paper, left
traces resembling those produced by that substance. ‘They were susceptible

* After the above mentioned experiments were made, I was led to believe that the compound,
obtained as above described by heating lime with bicyanide of mercury, contained fulminic acid, or
an analogous substance. ‘The mass being dissolved in acetic acid, and the filtered solution sub-
jected to nitrate of mercury, a copious white precipitate resulted. ‘This, being desiccated, proved
to be a fulminating powder. It exploded, between a hammer and anvil, with the sharp sound of
fulminating silver.

+ The compound usually designated as the phosphuret of calcium consists, according to ‘Thom-
son, of one atom of phosphate of lime, as well as two atoms of pure phosphuret. Hence it is easy
to see that the oxygen which enters into the constitution of the oxide, deposited, as above men-
tioned, upon the interior surface of the bell-glass, is derived from the phosphate.

DEFLAGRATING CARBURETS, PHOSPHURETS, OR CYANIDES. 37

of reaction neither with chloro-hydric nor with nitric acid, neither separately
nor when mixed. ‘They were not in the slightest degree magnetic.

About 1822, Professor Silliman obtained globules, which were at first consi-
dered as fused carbon, but were subsequently found to be depositions of that
substance transferred from one electrode to the other. Several of these glo-
bules were, by him, sent to me for examination, of which none, agreeably to my
recollection, appeared so much like products of fusion as those lately obtained.

Formerly plumbago was considered as a carburet of iron, but latterly, agree-
ably to the high authority of Berzelius, has been viewed as carbon holding
iron in a state of mixture, not in that of chemical combination. It would not,
then, be surprising if the globules which I obtained consisted of carbon con-
yerted from the state of charcoal into that of plumbago.

Vile?

ARTICLE VI.

Upon a new Compound of the Deuto-Chloride of Platinum, Nitric Oxide, and
Chloro-hydric Acid. By Henry D. Rogers, Professor of Geology in the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, and Martin H. Boyé, Graduate of the University of
Copenhagen. Read November 1, 1839.

1. Wuen platinum is dissolved in an excess of nitro-muriatic acid, and the
solution is slowly evaporated, a yellow powder may sometimes be seen gradu-
ally to. collect. The nature and properties of this substance we propose to
describe in the following paper.

Mode of Preparation.

2. The method by which we succeeded in obtaining the compound referred
to in quantities sufficient for the investigation of its properties and composition
is as follows:—A solution of chloride of platinum, procured in the ordinary
way, is evaporated, at a rather low temperature, in a porcelain capsule, nearly
to dryness. When it has reached this point, aqua regea, freshly prepared from
concentrated hydro-chloric and nitric acids, containing an excess of the former,
is added in small portions, the mixture being continually stirred with a glass
rod. Nitric oxide gas is given off in thick fumes, and the mixture, which is
now perfectly liquid, is allowed again to evaporate for some time, during which,
chlorine gas is evolved in numerous small bubbles. It is then transferred to a
glass vessel and cold water added drop by drop, the whole being continually
stirred while it is cooling. If these steps be properly performed, a yellow pow-

60 UPON A NEW COMPOUND OF THE DEUTO-CHLORIDE OF PLATINUM,

der, sometimes possessing a crystalline texture, is seen to precipitate.* Should
the solution, when transferred to the glass vessel, show a tendency to pass too
rapidly to the solid state, the best remedy is to heat it again on the sand bath,
when it will be again liquefied.

3. When the powder has separated, and is fully settled, the liquor is to be
decanted and again evaporated nearly to dryness, and the other steps of the
process just described repeated. The several parcels of the precipitate thus
procured are added together, and the mass filtered and pressed between bibu-
lous paper, to free it as completely as possible from the mother liquid. Still
more effectually to dry it, it is exposed, under an exhausted receiver, to the
desiccating agency of sulphuric acid.

Description and Properties of the Salt.

4. When prepared according to the process above described, the precipitate
has the form of a yellow powder, often minutely crystalline, and has a consi-
derable resemblance to the chloro-platinates of potassium and ammonium. It
absorbs water quickly from the atmosphere with deliquescence, undergoing
decomposition at the same time. In a close vessel it may be preserved for any
length of time without decomposition.

5. When water is added, an active effervescence takes place, with disen-
gagement of nitric oxide gas. That the gas thus extricated is pure nitric oxide
is proved by its giving no precipitate with a solution of nitrate of silver, and by
its being entirely absorbed by a solution of sulphate of protoxide of iron. The
solution which remains after the disengagement of the nitric oxide gas is acid;
it does not smell of chlorine, and gives copious precipitates with nitrate of silver
and. chloride of potassium.

6. Alcohol, hydro-chloric acid, and a solution of chloride of sodium, when
added to the salt, act upon it as pure water does, extricating the nitric oxide
and dissolving the chloride of platinum. A saturated solution of chloride of
platinum has no action on it.

7. Before we had estimated the quantity of chlorine in the salt, we did not
suppose any hydro-chloric acid essential to its constitution, attributing the acid

* An addition of too much water will redissolve it.

-

NITRIC OXIDE, AND CHLORO-HYDRIC ACID. 61

reaction to nitrous acid, imagined to have been derived from the nitrous oxide.
But the following experiment settled this point. A portion of the salt was
introduced into a small tubulated retort. Cold water, recently boiled to free it
from atmospheric air, was added to it, until all the nitric oxide was disengaged.
A concentrated solution of fused chloride of potassium was next added, and the
whole distilled nearly to dryness. The product of this distillation was a colour-
less liquid, first shehtly acidulated, but becoming afterwards strongly acid. It
precipitated nitrate of silver very copiously, and left, when evaporated, no resi-
duum. At no period of the process could any free chlorine be noticed.

8. Heated in an atmosphere of dry hydrogen, the salt first gives off water,
and afterwards a white sublimate of chloride of ammonium, in accordance with
the fact that hydrogen and nitric oxide gas, in contact with heated spongy pla-
tinum, form ammonia, which, in this case, combines with the hydro-chloric
acid, and forms chloride of ammonium. The reduced platinum is black, much
resembling, in appearance, the preparation of Liebvg. It ignites hydrogen, and
assumes a metallic appearance when rubbed upon a burnisher.

9. Heated by itself in a closed vessel it also gives off a great amount of

water.

Analysis of the Sali.

10. A portion of the salt was prepared by the foregoing process, and left to
dry for several days over sulphuric acid iz vacuo. It was then promptly intro-
duced into a small glass tube, sealed at its lower end. This tube was inserted
into a vessel of boiling water. Its upper end was closed by a cork, through
which were fitted two small bent glass tubes, the one connected with a tube of
chloride of calcium, and reaching nearly to the salt, the other connected with
the air-pump. By this arrangement a current of dry air could be passed over
it, while the water surrounding the tube was kept boiling. A quantity, 1.677.5
erammes, of the salt was subjected for half an hour to this process, and lost
only 0.002 grammes, or about one-tenth of one per cent.; evidently proving that
the salt parts nith all its moisture in vacuo at ordinary temperatures. A correc-
tion for this amount of water was made in calculating the results of the sub-
sequent experiments.

11. The same portion of the salt was then decomposed by the introduction
of water, and an alcoholic solution of chloride of potassium added. ‘The chlo-

ViI.—Q

62 UPON A NEW COMPOUND OF THE DEUTO-CHLORIDE OF PLATINUM,

ro-platinate of potassium thus precipitated was collected on a weighed filter,
and washed with moderately concentrated alcohol, dried at 212° Farhenheit,
and its weight ascertained. ‘The 1.701 grammes thus obtained is equivalent
to 0.6875 grammes of platinum, giving 41.08 per cent. of metallic platinum in
the salt.

12. Another quantity, 1.502 grammes of the dried salt was next decomposed
by water, evaporated to dryness, and ignited in a porcelain crucible. ‘This
yielded platinum 0.603, or 40.19 per cent.

13. Another portion, 1.580 grammes of the salt was introduced into a small
glass tube, sealed at its lower end, and heated over a spirit lamp (Berzelius’s)
until it became brightly red hot, and all volatile matters were effectually driven
out of the tube. ‘This left, of platinum, 0.655 grammes, or 41.51 per cent.

14. In order to estimate the quantity of metric oxide, a graduated tube was
filled with mercury and inverted over the mercurial cistern. A small quantity
of the salt was then weighed and promptly enveloped, as tightly as possible, in
blotting-paper. ‘This was then passed up, by aid of a fine copper wire, into
the tube, and a small portion of water, previously deprived of air, was also
introduced. A little care in the manipulation enabled the pellet containing the
salt to be kept in contact with the water. ‘The quantity of gas thus extricated
was shown upon the graduation of the tube, care being taken to preserve the
mercury at the same level inside and outside.

15. Adopting this method, 0.7875 grammes of the salt gave 33.2 cubic cen-
timetres of nitric oxide gas, at 82.25° Far. The barometric pressure being
29.46 inches at 80° Far. Applying the proper reductions for pressure, tem-
perature, and moisture, this gives 28.37 cubic centimetres, equivalent, in weight,
to 0.0382 grammes, or 4.86 per cent. of nitric oxide gas.

16. By another experiment, 1.028 grammes yielded 44.5 cubic centimetres
of nitric oxide gas, at a temperature of 79° Far., and barometric pressure of
29.81 inches at 81° Far. ‘The proper reductions for pressure, temperature, and
moisture being made, there resulted 38.81 cubic centimetres of the gas, equiva-
lent, in weight, to 0.0524 grammes, or 5.09 per cent.

17. With a view to estimate, in the next place, the quantity of the chlorine,
1.5275 grammes of the salt were introduced into a platinum crucible, and a
sufficient proportion of carbonate of potassa and water added. It was then
carefully evaporated to dryness, and ignited; after which it was repeatedly

NITRIC OXIDE, AND CHLORO-HYDRIC ACID. 63

edulcorated, first with boiling water, and afterwards with diluted nitric acid.
The filtered solutions thus derived being saturated to excess with nitric acid,
were precipitated by nitrate of silver, and the chloride of silver collected on a
filter, washed, dried, and heated to fusion, (the proper precautions with the
filter beme observed,) when it was weighed. ‘The amount thus obtained was
2.679 grammes, equivalent to 0.661 grammes of chlorine, or 43.32 per cent.

18. The platinum obtained by this process was also collected on a filter,
ignited and weighed, giving 0.628 grammes, or 41.16 per cent.

19. As 41.16 platinum requires 29.55 chlorine, to form the deuto-chloride of
platinum, and as the quantity obtained, namely, 43.32 per cent., is nearly one
and a half times 29.55, it is evident that the chlorine in the salt under exami-
nation exists in the proportion of 3 atoms to 1 atom of platinum.

It is obvious, also, from a previous experiment (7) that this one atom of
chlorine must exist in union with hydrogen as chloro-hydric acid. We,
therefore, show, that for each atom of deuto-chloride of platinum, the salt con-
tains one atom of chloro-hydric acid.

20. Another portion of the salt, 1.2976 grammes, being introduced into a
weighed platinum crucible, and there mingled with an adequate quantity of car-
bonate of potassa, a thin stratum of which should cover the mixture, it was
fused, the crucible being covered. It was then edulcorated with boiling water
and dilute nitric acid, and was otherwise treated as in the previous experiment,
(17 and 18.) Thus operated upon, it furnished 2.336 grammes of chloride of
silver, equivalent to 0.5763 grammes of chlorine, or 44.46 per cent.

21. The platinum obtained by this experiment weighed 0.549 grammes, or
42.36 per cent.

22. As 42.36 of platinum requires 30.41 of chlorine to form the deuto-chlo-
ride, and as 44.46 per cent. is nearly one and a half times 30.41, it is not less
plain from this experiment than from that already recorded, (17, 18, 19,) that
the chlorine exists in the proportion of three atoms to one. atom of the platinum
in the salt.

64 UPON A NEW COMPOUND OF THE DEUTO-CHLORIDE OF PLATINUM,

Summary.

23. Making a summary of the foregoing several experiments, we find that

the per centage of the platinum,

By experiment 11, is 41.08
“ 12, “ 40.19
“ 13, “ A151
“ 18, “ 41.16
rs 2s 42.36
5)206.30
Giving, as a mean, . 41.26
24. The per centage of the chlorine,

By experiment 17, is 43.32
# 20, “ 44.46
2)87.78
Giving, as a mean, 43.89

25. The per centage of the nztric oxide gas,
By experiment 15, is 4.86
a Oe 9.09
2)9.95
Giving, as a mean, . 4.98

26. The platinum and the chlorine have already been shown (19 and 22) to
exist in the salt in the proportion of one atom to three atoms. But, of the three
atoms of chlorine, two go to form one atom of the deuto-chloride of plati-

num, while the remaining one atom, united with one atom of hydrogen, exists
in the form of hydro-chloric acid.

NITRIC OXIDE, AND CHLORO-HYDRIC ACID. 65

27. The platinum and the nitric oxide are present, as we have shown, (23
and 25,) in the proportion of 41.26 to 4.98. "These numbers, divided by the
atomic weights of their respective substances, will give the relative numbers of
the atoms of these ingredients in the salt.

41.26
Thus the platinum = 3.345
1233.5
4.98
Nitric oxide, ——_—— = |. 32]
377.04
But, 3349:1321 = 5:2

Therefore, for every five atoms of platinum, or deuto-chloride of platinum in
the salt, mith their corresponding five atoms of chloro-hydric acid, we have tivo
atoms of nitric oxide.

28. We have no direct results establishing the proportion of the chemically
combined water in the salt. But, estimating it from the data furnished by expe-
riments 16, 20, and 21, made at the same time and with complete success, it
would amount to 7.66 per cent., or two atoms of water for every atom of deuto-
chloride of platinum.

29. Throwing these results into the shape of a formula, we have the follow-
ing convenient expression for its chemical composition.

(Pt cl*) ee ((cl H) *+(N 0?) 2 + Aq.

By this formula the compound is regarded as a simple chloride of platinum
united with a muriate of nitric oxide.

Should we, on the other hand, deny the existence of muriates altogether, we
may consider it, in accordance with the enlarged views of Dr. Hare on the
Constitution of Salts, and the convenient systematic nomenclature by which he
expresses their composition,* as a chloro-salt, consisting of a chloro-acid (chlo-
ride of platinum, or chloro-platinic acid,) and two chloro-bases. Thus viewed,
it would be a chloro-platinate of nitrogen with a chloro-platinate of hydrogen,
and expressed by the following formula :-—

[(Pt clr) *+N CP] °+[Ptce+HCl] + Aq™

* American Journal of Pharmacy, Vol. iii. No. 1.

VII.—R

66 UPON A NEW COMPOUND OF THE DEUTO-CHLORIDE OF PLATINUM, ETC.

The proportions of the several constituents of the salt, as respectively calcu-
lated, in accordance with one of the above formule, and as derived from our
experiments, will stand as follows :—

By Exper. No. of At. By Calculation.
Platinum eo OG 5 41.82
Chionine ya sn ene tS 15 45.01
Elydrosen, ger yan eae 42 5 A3
INitrier@xides | ee OS Q 5.11
Waterss 1.2) 6 eee ee er OG 10 7.63
98.21 100.00

The agreement here exhibited is as close as could be expected when we
advert to the complicated nature of the salt, and the difficulties which attend
its preparation and analysis.

In conclusion, we may be allowed to hope that the compound here described
may cast some light on the chemical nature of aqua regia, and on the question
of its mode of action in dissolving the metals.

Notr.—Since the above article was read, we have received Poggendorf’s Annalen, vol. xlvii.,
containing an interesting paper by H. Rose, of Berlin, in which he has shown that anhydrous
sulphuric acid absorbs nitric oxide, forming a neutral sulphate, in which the oxygen in the sul-
phuric acid is three times that in the nitric oxide. From this he infers that the nitric oxide acts
the part of a true base; a conclusion to which we have arrived in the present paper, where we
regard the compound examined by us as a double salt, in which nitric oxide is one of the bases.
The compound described by Rose is decomposed by water in exactly the same manner as that
here investigated.

ARTICLE VII.

On the Longitude of Several Places in the Umted States, as deduced from the
Observations of the Solar Eclipse of September 18th, 1838. By E. Otis Ken-
dall, Professor of Mathematics in the Central High School of Philadelphia.
Read November 1, 1839.

This eclipse was observed at the following places :—

Lamune. |p. Greoneich,
lis Gs ~ Be
Hudson Obs’y, Western Reserve Ree eee : + 41° 14! 37” | —5 25 47°5
Alexandria, D.C., . . F +38 49 0 /|—5 8 16:0
Washington, Capitol, . . ee e388) oo0e23) | — 5) 8) 6:0
Haverford School, Delaware County, Pa. Be et) be eb Ss +40 1 12 |—5 1 15:0
Philadelphia, State House, . . + 39 56 58 |—5 0O 39:0
| Germantown, Pa., C. Wister’s private Observatory, +40 1 59 |—5 O 41:9
Burlington, N. J..S. Gummere’s School, . . . |+40 5 10 | —4 59 30:1
Princeton, Io a5 [Nassau alleen - |+40 19 56 | —4 58 38:3
| Weasel Mountain, N. J., Station of Coast Survey, +40 52 35 | —4 57 25-7
New Haven, Yale College, . - | +41 17 58 | —4 51 47°5
| Southwick, Mass., A. Holcomb’s private ( Obs’ vs - | +42 O 41 | —4 51 16:0
| Wesleyan University, Conn., . . . 5 +41 338 8 |—450 2:0
Williamstown College, Mass. . . . ... . + 42 42 44 | —4 52 52-0
| Dorchester OLEONTAIOMN, INEEEp 6 9 59 6 0 0 6 + 42 19 11:5) —4 44 17-3
| Dover, ‘Tuscarora County, Ohio, . ae +40 30 52 | —5 25 56-2
| Brooklyn, N. Y., E. Blunt’s private Obs’ y,. a ate +40 42 0 |—4 56 0-0

When there were more observers than one at the same place, I have taken
the mean of all the observations, giving to each its proper weight. In Phila-
delphia it was observed by several persons, in different parts of the city. The
following table contains a list of the Philadelphia observations, with the differ-
ences of latitude and longitude between the places of observation and the State
House, which has been already published in the Proceedings of the Society,
vol. I. p. 36,

68 ON THE LONGITUDE OF

Ae En
48 1 Formation | Rupture of
Observer. sa i Su se Beginning. | “ o¢ Ring. iia End.
Sie |
| | gy ‘hehe
h. m h. m. h. m. h. m
3 13 4 3l 4 35 5 45
Ss. Ss.
E. J. Bean + 70’°0| — 1°70 28-4
Wm. Penn Cresson |+ 1:8} — 5:20 27°8
Ss. Ss.
Prof. W. R. Johnson ; + 1:8} — 5:20 10°7 23°5 12°2
Ss.
George M. Justice + 10:0) — 2°86 74 12-8 27°3 113
E. O. Kendall + 10-0] — 2°86 8:3 10:9 28°4 12°9
Joseph Knox + 21:0) + 1-39 12°8
Isaiah Lukens + 9-0} — 0°86 21°7
Thomas M‘Euen — 0-4] — 2:33 3:0 18:1 29°1 13-2
Prof. Roswell Park + 6:5} — 1-30 19°1 29-1
Dr. R. M. Patterson |+ 1-1} — 1:20 7:0 19+1 30:1 16°1
Wm. H. C. Riggs — 0°4| — 2:33 7:3 16°3 29°4 7:8
Samuel Sellers + 7:5) — 0:05 6:0 16-0 31:0 16-0
Tobias Wagner + 10-0} — 2°86 6:1
Sears C. Walker + 10-0) — 2°86 5°6 15:6 28:0 13-0
William Young — 21:0; + 1:39 12-9 15:0

It was considered most convenient to reduce the above local times to the
State House, which has been done by means of the formule in the Journal of
the Franklin Institute, vol. xx. p. 125, by which I have deduced the following
values of the variation of the local time of the several phases for a small dif-
ference of terrestrial latitude or longitude.

Beginning. Ring. End.
Variation for + or North 1” of terr. lat. . . . =— 0.0397 — 0.0382 — 0.0343
GG + or East 1s. of terr. lon. in time. = + 1.2600 + 1.1400 + 0.9925

Applying these values, and taking means after giving due weight to each
observation, the results for the State House are obtained as stated below.

The method used in making these reductions is that of Bessel. Astr. Nach.
No. 321. The sun’s semi-diameter there given has been employed; the other
elements have been taken from the Nautical Almanac. Bessel’s semi-diameter
of the sun is less than that of the Nautical Almanac by 1’.112. I have com-
puted the following co-ordinates for this eclipse, and would remark that the

SEVERAL PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES.

69

reduction of future observations of solar eclipses will be much facilitated by
the publication of these co-ordinates in the Berliner Jahrbuch since 1839.

Mean Time.
Greenwich.

Mean Time.
| Greenwich.

|

h
7
8
9

p = + 0-4663195

q = + 0-7566013

a | 6 | zt a! | 6’
a &- Milo wa h. m. ARs a
11 41 33.74| + 2° 57’ 14”-9|53’ 5378111 43 3°48] + 1° 50’
43 17:49 2 43 4°6 67 12°46 49 12°3
45 1-79 2 28 53 °9 56 21-44 48 14:0
46 45°75 2 14 42°6 “47 30°42 Glog illay d7/
48 29°67 2 0 31:0 °38 39-40 46 17 °4
50 13°55 1 46 19°0 °30 48°38 45 19:2
a d log g x y
h. m. ai
11 43 3:72) + 1° 49’ 59-8 | 9:9988515 |i— 0°4168225| -+ 1-2478116
12°45 COS 074 512 }-+ 0:°0247623) + 1:0022355
QT 48 7:5 510 f+ 0:4663195| + 0°7566013
29°90 yy (a i 3 511 |-+ 0.9078406| + 0°5109066
38°63 46 15:1 511 + 1°3492845) -+- 0°2651588
47°36 45 19:0 513 \}-+ 1°7906058| + 0:°0193279
Mean Time. i
Coeich. l log t L log t
h. |
2 0:5695708 | '7°6682157 | 00231215 | 7-6661003
8 6110 2210 1615 1056
9 6326 2262 1831 1108
10 6334 2311 1839 1157
11 6150 2362 1662 1208
12 5782 2410 1291 1256
T=9 T=10°

p = + 0:9078406 ¢g = + 0:5109066

Se | Sp | | ee | | |

dhe N
— 2h/119° 4’
—1 5

0 5
+1 5
an 2 5

59”°4 | 3°8527713

12-4 7696
26 °1 7672
41 °1 7713
58 °3 7893

— 25/119° 5’ 26-7 | 38527704

—1 5 41:1 7713

0 5 56 °2 7846
+1 6 15°4 8071
+2 6 42°3 8358

375

1:8046400
6936
7198
7162
6852
6258

70

ON THE LONGITUDE OF

Then, according to Bessel, calling d the longitude + East, — West of Green-
wich, we have

Where

d=d' +a: + 62+ cy

d’ = the resulting longitude, uncorrected for the errors of the tables
« = the correction of the tabular place of the moon on its orbit

¢=
n

ref!

I

be

be

6é

G6

ce

66

«on a perpendicular to its orbit

sum of the semi-diameters of the sun and moon

difference

6s

66

With these elements and co-ordinates I have computed the following values
of d' and the co-efficients a, b, c, assuming the ellipticity of the earth to be

0.00324.

Place of Observation
and Observer.

Western Reserve Coll.
Prof. Loomis.

Dover, Ohio,
J. Blickensderfer.

| Alexandria, D. (Olay
| B. Hallowell.

Washington Capitol,
R. T. Paine and
Lneut. Gillis, U. S. N.
|
Haverford School, Pa.,
J. Gummere &

S. J. Gummere.

Philadelphia,
State House,
Several Observers.

Germantown, Pa.,
Charles Wister &
Casper E. Wister.

|
|
|
|
| Burlington, N. J.,
| Prof. Hamilton.
|

py En eS Sn ae ea an SS
SPAREN SHH SSRIS RISER eRe
eoe=2)

Mean Time of
Observation.

h. m™.

2 38

Ss.

17:02

. not observed

ie

led

le

Esa coe

AL LWAARRWORBRWAKRRWORKRHWOPRR WOR A
ww
PTSG

ou FO

2 39

38°82
25°71
9°63

~F OO 3

— 4 59

40°70

52°71
45°44
59:60
59°45
24:44
29°16
16°46
38°79

3°25

2°72

2°73

1:96
12°03
13:98
13°71
17:73
37°79
38°72
40°16
39°32
40:99
40°75
38°83
36°06
24:69
28°99
29°55
30:35

SEVERAL PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES.

|

|

—

Place of Observation

and Observer.

Princeton, N. J.,
Profs. Henry §
Alexander.

Weasel Mountain, N. J.

F. R. Hassler.

Brooklyn Obs’y, N. Y.,

E. Blunt.

New Haven,
Prof. Olmsted,
E. P. Mason, &
Al. L.. Smith.
Southwick, Mass.,
4. Holcomb.

Wesleyan Uniy., Conn.,
Prof. 4. A. Smith.
Williamstown Coll.,

Prof. Hopkins.
Dorchester, Mass.,
W. C. Bond.

eS) (zs eer fas m= \

HORRORS fe Bao

Mean Time of
Observation.

h. m 5s.
8 14 43-01
4 33 11:27
. not observed
5 46 38:89
3 15 56°98
35 57-09
35 58:09
47 13:10
17 18:80
36 47°30
t observed
48 23°63

wa

Bl Oo bt bd
wa
woe.

Ts

-n

HWS

14:47
17:00

an ow

Ba

CO oe ow

_ 83 Ue Ue)
. not observed
3 28 10°9
- not observed

—4

—4

—4

71

b c d
; h. m. Se
— 0°167 | + 2:213 | — 4 58 43°69
+ 2°245 | + 3-146 43°68
— 0°174 | — 2:210 30°70
— 0:189 | + 2-211 | — 4 56 46°75
+ 6°875 | + 7-220 48°26
— 6:912 | — 7°255 49:10
— 0:187 | — 2°213 51°34
— 0°189 | + 2-211 |— 4 56 0:02
+ 5:329 | + 5.766 0:80
— 0°184 | — 2:211 231
— 0°155 | -+ 2:209 | — 4 51 47°65
— 0°199 | — 2:213 56°82
— 0°139 | + 2:208 | — 4 51 16:92
— 0°215 | — 2°214 20°16
— 0°145 | + 2°208 | — 4 50 43°62
— 0°205 | — 2°213 41°73
— 0°132 | + 2-206 | — 4 52 26°93
— 0:099 | + 2:206 | — 4 44 22°76

From the duration of the ring the following values of 2 were obtained:

At Dover, .

Alexandria,
Washington, .
Haverford,
Philadelphia, .
Germantown,

Burlington,

Weasel Mountain,

20)
(ii)
alii)
2Gv)
(409)
e(vi)
(vii)
e(viii)

= + -2:948 + 3:987 x 1’

+ 52°140
1:457
6380
6-893
5944
6.688
6831

The mean of the five last equations gives,

g

6:547

And from the equation for Washington,

,

n

Whence 2

+ 0°515
— 7:310

* It was found necessary to subtract one minute from the time of end as

and Smith.

17°600 x 7’
11-370 X 7’
1°650 X 7’
1:646 xX 7’
1°592 X 1’
1°473 X 17/
1:050 X »’

1:482 X 7’

given by Messrs. Olmsted, Mason

72 ON THE LONGITUDE OF SEVERAL PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES.

With the above value of ¢, the duration of the eclipse furnished for the

value of y,

At Princeton, ni) == — 0261 — 0-056 x 7’
Germantown, no) = — 2-255 — 0:053 x 7’
Williamstown, iii) == — 2.875 — 0:022 x 7’
Washington, q°v) == — 2-798 — 0:022 xX 7’
Philadelphia, q) == — 3534 — 0:022 x 7’
Southwick, . q¥) = — 3941 — 0°017 x x’
Weasel Mountain, Vii) = — 4-232 + 0:002 x x’
Burlington, . . qvill) = — 4-468 — 0:001 X 7’
Haverford, . nix) = — 4472 4+- 0-015 X 7’
Dover, q2) == — 4:675 — 0:074 X 7’
New Haven, ni) == — 5:409 + 0°021 x x’
Alexandria, yi) = — 6403 + 0°025 x x’

Mean of the twelve equations, = — 3760 — 0017 x 7’

Mean of first six, ae Ave Oy = — 2°611 — 0:082 x x’

Mean of two means, n = — 3°185 — 0:025 xX 7’
Whence x = — 3198

Applying these values of 2, 7, 7’ to the equations derived from the Philadel-
phia observations, and assuming d equal to — 5h. Om. 39:00s., we have

_d—d'—be—cn 8 BT

e= a = hen
And making

— : — 3198 2

d = d! — 14°782 x a— 7-310 x 6 + Je aees Se

we derive the value of d, or the most probable longitude to be deduced from
this eclipse, as given in the table above.

AU Clee VEEL

On the Patella Amena of Say. By Isaac Lea. Read March 6, 1840.

In a very able paper, published in the Boston Journal of Natural Science,
Mr. Couthouy gives an elaborate description of the animal of the Patella
Amena of Say, and places it in a new genus established by Quoy and Gaimard,
under the name of Patelloida. From the description of the animal by the
French zoologists, and the minute one of Mr. Couthouy, there can be no doubt
of the propriety of this change, though the form of the shell gives little or no
indication of the great distinction developed by the anatomy of the animal.

I agree fully with the American zoologist in the propriety of changing the
generic name of this Patella, but I do not see the propriety of retaining the
specific name Ameena, because it was first described by Miller as Patella
testudinalis. Entertaining this opinion, I have consulted the authors who have
described this shell, and now offer the following synonomy:—

Patelloida testudinalis. Lea.

Patelloidea amena. Couthouy. ost. Jour. Nat. Hist. vol. ii. p. 171.

Patella amena. Say. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sct. vol. ii. p. 223.

Patella testudinalis. Miiller Zool. Dan. p. 237. Deshayes’ Lam. vol. vii. p. 543. Fabricius
Faun. Groen. p. 385. Gmelin, p. 3718. Dillwyn, p. 1045. Wood's
Cata. No. 63.

Patella testudinaria. J/iller Zool. Dan. Kemmerer, Rudolst Conch. p. 12, pl. 2, figs. 4 and 5,

Patella tessellata. Miller Zool. Dan. vol. iii. 2868. Dr. Beck’s Letter.

Patella testudinaria Gréenlandica. Chemnitz, vol. x. p. 325, pl. 168, figs. 1614, and 1615.

Patella Clealandii. Sowerby. Extracts from the Minute Book of the Linn. Soc. vol. viii. p.
621. Heming’s British Animals, p. 287.

Vii.—T

74 ON THE PATELLA AMZENA.

Patella virginea. Miiller Zool. Dan. vol. iii. p. 2867.

Patella virginea? Gmelin, p. 3711. Dillwyn, p. 1052. Fleming’s Br. Ani. p. 287.
Patella clypeus. Mr. S. Ker’s Letter.

Lottia* Antillarum? Sow. Conch. Manual, fig. 231.

This species of Patelloida seems to have escaped the attention of Lamarck,
which surprises me the more as its geographical distribution is very extensive.
Linneus and Schroter give the habitat of Patella testudinaria as in the Nor-
wegian seas; but it is evident that these writers have confounded the two spe-
cies, the testudinaria being a southern species, while the testudinalis is a north-
ern one. Miiller says it inhabits Norway. Fabricius mentions it as being
common on the shores of Greenland. I have a suite of specimens from Green-
land, which came from the extensive cabinet of Prince Christian of Denmark.
Some very fine specimens were also sent to me from Hudson’s Bay, by Go-
vernor Simpson of the Hudson’s Bay Company; and Mr. S. Ker, many years.
since presented it to me under the name of Patella clypeus, from Greenock, in
Scotland. It is also found in abundance on the rocks at Nahant, in Massachu-
setts, and in Maine, and other parts of our northern coast.

Chemnitz and Kemmerer have both made excellent representations of this
shell; the former the most perfect. Dillwyn and other authors quote the Pa-
tella radiata Born, for this species; but a reference to his figure (pl. 18, fig. 10)
will satisfy any one who knows the shell that this is an error. Noris Dillwyn
correct in giving the P. virgata of Gmelin asa synonym. Deshayes refers to
Schroter’s P. testudinaria; but I think that Schroter had the India shell in
view when describing that species, which is very different and much larger.

* Mr. Sowerby, in his Conch. Manual, p. 59, gives precedence to Mr. Gray’s generic name of Lottia over that

of Patelloida of Quoy and Gaimard. Deshayes says (vol. vii. p. 549) that he retains the name of Patelloida as
being the first given.

ARTICLE IX.

Observations of the Magnetic Intensity at twenty-one Stations in Europe. By
A. D. Bache, LL. D., President of the Girard College for Orphans, one of the
Secretaries of the American Philosophical Society, 5;¢., 5c. Read March 6,
1840.

Tue following observations of intensity and dip were made during a visit to
Europe in 1836-7 and 1837-8, directed by the Trustees of the Girard College
for Orphans, The special objects of my journey admitted of only an occasional
attention to the observations in question, which I did not attempt unless when
time and circumstances were generally favourable to their execution. ‘The
stations are twenty-one in number; three in Great Britain, and the others on
the continent. At some of the places the magnetic elements are so well known
from numerous observations that my results can add but little to the informa-
tion already before the public; at others, few observations have been made, and
my determinations assume a higher relative importance. Those of the former
class will serve, by their accordance with the results of other observers, to give
a general confidence in the results of the latter, and will especially assist in
connecting the European stations with those in the United States, which formed
one principal object of experiments, the results of which I propose to commu-
nicate to the society in a separate memoir.

At all the places but three the horizontal intensity and dip were observed,
and at two the total intensities were, in addition, compared by the statical me-
thod of Professor Lloyd. The observations for the horizontal intensity were
made by oscillating horizontal needles in a rarefied medium, in the manner ex-

76 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

plained in a former paper, read before the society.* The dip was determined
with a six inch dipping circle by Rozsinson, which yielded quite as satisfactory
results as the instrument by GamBry, used in my observations in the United
States.| The needles for the statical method of Professor Luoyp were also by
RoBInson. f

Two needles were ordinarily used in the observations for horizontal intensity,
a cylinder of the HansTEEN model and a bar, designated respectively as C and
A in the memoir on horizontal intensity just referred to. The correction for
temperature, and also, in general, the mode of observing there recorded were
employed. 'To determine the time of beginning and ending of the oscillations,
however, five sets of observations were taken,§ and the usual mode of deducing
the mean, by comparing the five corresponding observations at the commence-
ment and close of each series, was adopted. A pocket chronometer, by FRENcH,
was used to observe the duration of the oscillations, and its rate during the ob-
servations was ascertained by comparison with an observatory clock, when such
means was at hand. ‘This watch had been selected in reference to its quality
of bearing change of position without considerable change of rate, and stood the
trial to which it was exposed reasonably well. It is my impression, however,
that when more perfect instrumental means.are used in the determinations,
greater care will be required in regard to those for ascertaining the time. The
observed correction for the rate of the chronometer is duly applied in the tables
of results. As all the observations were made between the same arcs of vibra-
tion, a reduction to indefinitely small arcs is not required.|| The correction for

* American Philosophical Society’s Transactions, vol. v., N.S., Art. xviii.

t Ibid. Art. viii.

{ They had been heated in boiling water, to discharge as much of the magnetism as could be
done by this temperature, according to the recommendation of Mr. Christie. 1 supposed, from
the result of calculations made while in Paris, that these needles lost their magnetism rapidly, but,
on farther examination, find that such was not the case, and that they lost but a small portion of
their force during more than a year, as will be found stated in a subsequent part of this paper.

§ Besides eliminating errors of observation, this has the farther advantage of correcting errors of
division of the dial plate, as noticed by Professor Forsxs, in his ‘ Account of some Experiments
made in different Parts of Europe on Terrestrial Magnetic Intensity,” &c., &c. Edinburgh
Transactions, vol. xiv., part I., p. 5.

|| The semi-ares of vibration for the cylinders were from 6° to 2°, and for the bar, from 4° to 2°.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. hile

the loss of magnetism by the needle is so fully made out, that I believe the re-
sults to be as free from error, on this score, as if no loss had appeared from
observation. The time of oscillation of the bar (A) was observed at Philadel-
phia in October, 1835; again in September, 1836, just before I set out from
home; and in December, 1838, after my return: it was observed in the inter-
mediate time at London, in June, 1837, and again in August, 1838; at Paris
in August, 1837, and in July, 1838. A curve was traced on a large scale by
the results thus obtained, the ordinates representing the relative forces of the
needle corresponding to the intervals of time from October, 1835, measured by
the abscisse. A regular curve being traced, departed very little from the points
obtained by observation, the differences between the ordinates of the mean
curve and those given by the particular observations being, in terms of the ori-
ginal force of the needle, 0.000, — 0.0005, + 0.0030, + 0.0034, and — 0.0031.
As these individual results must be affected by small errors of observation, there
can be no doubt of the satisfactory correction for loss of magnetism by using
the ordinates of the curve, and, accordingly, the correction thus obtained is ap-
plied to the results, and is entered in the tables. This needle shows a tendency
towards a permanent magnetic state, and its loss is less than half that of the
other. The diminution of force of the cylindrical needle, (B,) since Septern-
ber, 1835, has been nearly uniform, and, accordingly, the curve representing it
differs but little from a straight line. ‘The observations used to trace this curve
were obtained at Philadelphia in September, 1835, in September 1836, and in
December, 1838; and in addition at the same times and places as stated in
reference to the other needle. Although the correction for loss of force is so
much greater for this needle than for the bar, there is no reason to suppose,
from a comparison of their results, that this correction is not quite as well as-
certained as the former. ‘The differences between the observed losses of force
and those given by the ordinates of the curve are, 0.0000, 0.0000, + 0.0035,
+ 0.0051, and — 0.0042. The time of oscillation of this needle was farther
satisfactorily observed at Florence, before passing into lower Italy, and again in
returning to upper Italy; but while the general accordance of the results was
such as to show that the force had undergone no irregular change which was ap-
preciable, the time which had elapsed between the two observations was too short
to justify their use in the numerical determination of the loss of magnetism by

the needle. I have had no cause to suspect irregular changes in either of the
Vil.—vU

78 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

needles since they came into my possession. The needles were always kept
separate from each other; while travelling, they were carried about my person,
and, when stopping for any considerable length of time, were deposited as far
from iron as was necessary to their safety. From the experiments made with
these needles, both of which have been magnetised several years, and which
have been kept carefully for more than six years, I should be disposed, in fu-
ture, to adopt the plan of procuring needles of as nearly equal force as possible,*
and keeping them in pairs, which renders them much more convenient to
carry. Itis certain that permanence of force has not resulted, in these nee-
dles, from the opposite plan, and that the labour of observation and calculation
are much increased by the necessity of ascertaining and applying a correction
for the loss. In comparing two sets of experiments at a distant date, to ascer-
tain the loss of magnetism by the needle, the results are affected by the change
of dip which has taken place in the interval, and as it is not probable that this
change is produced by an alteration in the total intensity, a correction is to be
applied, which, however, except in the longest interval of my series, was
scarcely appreciable.

The magnetic dip was observed in the usual way, the poles of the needles
being reversed in each series. ‘The bar magnets for reversing the poles were
placed in the top of the box containing the dipping circle, each pair of opposite
poles being connected by a keeper. Notwithstanding this arrangement, the
bars lost much of their strength, probably from the percussion resulting from a
slight play which was allowed in the bed where they were placed; and, on my
arrival at Berlin, their magnetism was so much diminished that the dipping-
needles could no longer be charged by them to saturation. Since that time I
have always taken the precaution, after changing the poles, to oscillate the
needles within determinate ares, and when resting on the agate planes, to ascer-
tain, by the time of oscillation, that they are charged at least nearly to satura-
tion. The statement of this precaution may be of service to others, since, with
a diminished force in the needles, the liability to take up some other position
than that corresponding to the true dip is increased, and the error cannot, ne-
cessarily, be detected by discrepancies in the several readings. Of the two

* The importance of attending to these conditions appears very strikingly from the experiments
of Mr. Airy, with large magnetic bars. Royal Society’s Transactions, Part I., for 1839, pp. 196,
197. :

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE.

US)

ueedles accompanying the dipping circle, No. 2 did not give uniformly as ac-
cordant results as No. 1; but, in cases where differences appeared, I endea-
-voured, by increasing the number of observations, to reduce the amount of pro-
bable error.

In presenting these results to the society, I have concluded to give the ob-
servations at each place, in general, separately, rather than to tabulate, at once,
the whole series; this will enable me more readily to make such remarks as
may be necessary, and also to compare the results with those of other observers,
as far as I am acquainted with them, which will make the paper more com-
plete than if I had confined it merely to my own conclusions.*

The observations will be given in the following order:—Those at Dublin,
Edinburgh, London, Paris, Brussels, Berlin, Vienna, Trieste, Venice, Rome,
Naples, Florence, Milan, Turin, Chamberi, Lyons, Chamouni, the Flégieré,
Genera, Brientz, and the Faulhorn.

The observations at Dublin were made in the Provost’s garden.

DUBLIN.

They in-

cluded only the horizontal intensity, as I was not at this time provided with a

dipping-needle.

observations made in July, 1837.

The horizontal intensity is compared with that at London by

Observations for Horizontal Intensity at Dublin.

Needl D T | ime of ees eae Hor
BCC: BE empP-| No. of aes Ten Mean. Corr’n Intensit ,
Oscill’ns. Oscill’ns. Oscill’ns. for es
——————— —_——_——_ ——-—_ | ___-____|___.____| Loss of -——
Year. |Month.| D.| H.| M.| Fah. © Secs Secs. Secs. |Magn’m.} Lond. 1.
Cylinder. 1836} Nov. |21/ 4|08) 452 200 36.13 | 36.157
66 66 GG Ce a | 443 66 | 14 .168
cc oC Os | «6 | 39) 442 ot 12 .149 | 36.158 | 0.978 0.935
Bar. 1836] Nov. |19| 4 | 40) 40 200 39.77 | 39.862
Ob CC €é “| «6 154) 392 150 «74 .833
Ge GC aC 21] 4)53) 442 OG -78 851 | 39.849 | 0.992 0.938

* This is easily done through the abstract contained in Major Sabine’s interesting report to the

British Association, on the variation of the magnetic intensity observed at different points of the

earth’s surface.
ence, London, 1838.

From the Seventh Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Sci-

I have, however, referred to the originals, whenever they were accessible,

in which cases they are quoted in my paper, without other acknowledgment.

80 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

These results can add nothing to the laboured deductions of the same ele-
ment by Professor Luoyp and Major SaBine, but they are important here, as
indicating the accuracy with which the corrections for my needles are known,
an interval of nine months having elapsed between the observations at Dublin
and London. ‘The mean of the three series with the two needles gives 0.936
for the horizontal intensity at Dublin to that at London as unity, while the

mean of the determinations of the experimenters just referred to is 0.940, the
two extremes being 0.946 and 0.934.*

EDINBURGH.

The following observations were made at Canaan Park, near Edinburgh.
The instrument was much out of order, and required much time and pains to
obtain the results, which, after all, are not as accordant as usual: their number
probably makes up for the want of close agreement. ‘The numbers in the

column of corrected results are reduced for the rate of the chronometer,t as
well as for temperature.

Observations for Horizontal Intensity at Edinburgh.
Tine oF. Gorecied cece HH
ime o Co) or.
Needle. Date. ‘Temp. Number Pe Ten Mean. Correction| Intensity.
Oscill’ns sem’ DS | Oscill’ns. for
eee eee : ——_———— Loss of -
Year. |Month.}D.|H.|Fah. ° Secs Secs. Secs. |Magnet’m.| Lond. 1.
Cylinder.| 1837| Feb. | 4/23] 46 | 250 | 37.05
66 66 66 66 22 66 270 aii
oe Bt 06 “13 | 45 250 ll
se CC ou GG By 8. ce .08 37.107 | 37.107 0.986 0.895
Bar. 1837| Feb. | 2|4 | 34 248 40.70
ef OG ce | 1 4a! 83 250 -68
ee 66 “| 415 | 443 330 75 40.810 | 40.810 0.995 0.897

I do not. find in either of Major Saziner’s reports, already referred to, a com-
parison of the horizontal forces of magnetism at Edinburgh and London. Pro-

* See Report on the Magnetic Isoclinal and Isodynamic Lines in the British Islands. By Major
Edward Sabine. From the Highth Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Sci-
London, 1839. For the early receipt of a copy of this report I am indebted to the author.

+ While at Edinburgh, the main spring of the chronometer gave way, and was replaced by Mr.
Bryson.

ence.

The watch had, subsequently, a very considerable losing rate, but I preferred to submit
to this inconvenience to having frequent alterations made in it.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 81

fessor Forbes has compared Edinburgh and Paris, and gives the intensity at
the former place to that at the latter as 0.8402 to unity. My direct determina-
tion gives almost identically the same results; namely, 0.8405. Again, com-
paring Edinburgh and Paris through London, I find 0.841 for the horizontal
intensity at the former city. Farther, using my results at Edinburgh in a
comparison of Dublin and London through Edinburgh, I find 0.936 for the
relative horizontal intensities at Dublin and London, agreeing within 0.004 of
the mean result of Professor Luoyp and Major Saxsinr’s observations. All
these verifications go to show that my number for the relation of the horizon-
tal intensities at Edinburgh and London is very nearly correct.

The dip was determined, at the same time and place with those of the fore-
going observations, by Professor ForBEs, with a small three inch circle, to be
71° 47'.5. This result differs but slightly from those of Major SasBine in
September, 1836, and of Mr. Fox, in August, 1837, when reduced to this
epoch, and I have employed it in determining the total intensity. Calculating
this element from the mean of the horizontal intensities of the foregoing table,
and using the dip observed by me at London, I find 1.018 for the total intensity
at Edinburgh, that of London being unity. Major Sanine obtained, by the
statical method, 1.023. I am at a loss to explain the difference between us.
It does not, probably, depend upon an error in the dip used in my calculation,
since, taking a mean of those which Major Sanine and Mr. Fox obtained at
Edinburgh, and Major Sasine, Captain Ross, Professor Puinurrs, Mr. Fox,
and Professor Luoyp, at London, reduced to this same epoch, and using these
means with my horizontal intensity, the total intensity appears to be 1.014. If
my result is erroneous, the error must be in the determination of the horizon-
tal intensity, the numerous verifications of which render it improbable that this
is wrong to any considerable extent.

LONDON AND PARIS.

As these stations are of importance as references in connecting the magnetic
intensity in the United States with that in Europe, I bestowed great care upon
the observations, and multiplied them. They were, besides, points to which I

VIIL—vV

82 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

intended to return a second time, and which, therefore, afforded the means of
ascertaining the loss of magnetism of the needles. ‘The number of needles em-
ployed, and of observations made, may, perhaps, farther entitle these results to be
allowed some weight in the determination of the relative intensity of magnetism
at these two important European stations. ‘The instrument for measuring the
horizontal intensity was put in excellent order by Rosinson, who also furnished
the dipping circle and needles. Besides the horizontal needles which I ordi-
narily used, I employed two others, and also observed by the statical method
of Professor Luoyp. ‘The observations were made in the summer of 1837, and
again in 1838, the intervals between the respective series at London and Paris
being quite short. The place of observation at London was near Captain Ross’
former residence, at WESTBOURNE GREEN, and at Paris, in the garden of the
observatory in the Maeneric CaBinet of M. Araco.
compared, before and after the observations, with the clock of the observatory

at Paris, and with the standard of Messrs. ARNoLD and Dent, at London.

The chronometer was

Observations for Horizontal Intensity at London and Parvs.

| Time oF Corrected| Peete te
H Time of Co) orizontal
| Date. Temp. Ten Mean , :
> | No. of ony Ten Corr’n Intensity.
Place. Needle. Orcillne Oscill’ns. (Oscill’ns. Fa y
———_——_———_-———_ eee = —— Loss of -_——_—_———
| Year. | Month. D.| H.| M. | Fah. © Secs. Secs. Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.| Lond. 1.
London Cylinder | 1837 | June 2412 06, P.M. | 71 242 35.31 35.369
Oo oe GG oo} ss 1 30, 762 280 .29 .849 | 35.359 1.069 | 1.000
Bar 66 6 se | 2/49, 733 300 | 38.704 | 38.742
66 GG 66 | 66 3 10, 66 66 66 66 38.742 1.066 1.000
H.R | « | « [| 1/36, 77 | 350 | 31.23 | 31.275
GC | Se GG “| 2/01, 66 “ .29 .335D | 31.305 1.066 | 1.000
i, Be ene ice NS) S203: 723 | 350 | 25.01 | 25.029 |
66 GO. |» GG Ke 4/01, 72 400 -O1 66 25.029 1.062 | 1.000
Paris |Cylinder) ‘* | Aug. | 4 |10/58, A. M.| 69 500M facie iam eae £
6 “ “ce 6 111 | 28, 66 6c 13 66 34.286 | .9958 | 1.000 | 0.936
Bar | « | « |«(12/42,P.M.| 703 | 300 | 37.42 | « ss
ce “c ts se 1102, 70 GO -40 GG 37.560 | .9980 | 1.000 | 0.938
H. R. 66 July |13 |12 | 04, 703 350 | 30.18 | 30.305
06 | 06 so ee 34, 66 GG 16 .325 | 30.315 1.000 | 0.9388
H.Bt. | « | « |«/10/53,A.M.| 70 | 400 | 24.19 | 24.286
GO “ GG ‘6 {11} 10, 697 se &6 66 24.286 1.008 | 0.942

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 83

Observations for Horizontal Intensity at London and Paris, continued.

Time of peal See Horizontal
Date. Temp. Ten am Mean. oe. :
| Place. | Needle. a cise Ouslens: Eee: Cone Intensity.
—— —- —_-——_ | ___-___|__-——_-|_ Loss of *

Year. | Month. D.|H M. Fah. ° Secs Secs. Secs. |Magn’m.} Paris 1. | Lond. 1.
Paris |Cylinder.| 1838| July | 4| 1/07, P.M.| 732 | 350 | 34.956 | 35.076
“6 sc sc ss! 1/36, OG 326 944 .066
oe 6s &6 17|12 | 04, 72 350 -903 .026
ss 66 se Co ee 8D; 73 6s .850 | 34.971
“ ‘“ ‘6 se) 1/08, 74 66 .934 | 35.053
“e 6 be 6} 2/06, 823 66 .934 .038

se 6 oc G6) C5 1)/048) 833 CG 931 -035 | 35.038 1.000 | 0.938
Bar. ce G6 4}| 3/34, 713i 350 37.714 | 37.812
6c 66 66 66 | 06 56, 723 66 703 .805
66 OG oc itzf) OO} UGE 843 300 -763 811

oe 6c CS 6c) 6! 36, 857 es -792 .836 | 37.816 1.000 | 0.936
London|Cylinder.| “ | Aug. 15) 1/03, 65 350 | 836.232 | 36.271

66 “s 66 061) OG} 15) OC GC .239 .278 | 36.274] .9962 | 1.066 | 1.000
Bar. BC a so) 2/23, C6 350 39.032 | 39.064

‘6 “ ‘cc sc} 66/49, 6 66 -030 .062 | 39.063| .9982 | 1.068 | 1.000

The final mean of these results gives the horizontal intensity at Paris 1.066,
that at London being 1.000. By a series of observations with six needles, in
1827, Major Sabine found the same element to be 1.071: the highest result
which any one of his needles gave was 1.073, and the lowest 1.0675.

The following observations of the dip were made at the same places with the
foregoing. At Paris, in 1837, the observations with needle No. 2 were made
at such a late hour as to be unsatisfactory, from a deficiency of light; I have,
therefore substituted for them the dip given by the two needles used in the
statical method, and corrected by a comparison of their results at London with
those of the other two needles, the poles of which were reversed. Needle No.
2 was in the hands of Mr. Rosinson, for alteration, in 1838, and I have again
used the corrected results given by the statical needles. The total intensities
are calculated from the mean horizontal intensity and the observed dips.

84 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

Dip and Total Intensity at London and Paris.

Date. Dip. Mean Dip. Total Intensity.
Place. Needle.
Year. | Month.| D. Degs.| Min. |Degs.) Mins. | Lond. 1.) Paris 1.
London | 1837 | June | 16 No.1 | 69 | 18.3
2 17.4 | 69 | 17.8 | 1.000 | 1.020
Paris cs Aug. | 17 | Lloyd No.1 | 67 | 16.9
2 21.3
Mean, 67 | 19.6
No. | 23.2 | 67 | 21.4 | 0.980 | 1.000
Paris | 18388 | July | 10 No.1 | 67 | 16.4
2 16.6 | 67 | 16.5 | 0.980 | 1.000
London | <“* Aug. | 15 | Lloyd No. 1 | 69 | 12.9
No. 2 12.3
Mean, 69 | 12.6
No. 1 12.1 | 69 | 12.3 1.000_ 1.020

The report of Major SaBine on the magnetic survey of the British Islands
affords ample authentic materials for putting these results to the test. Pro-
fessor PuiLtips, who observed the dip, in May, 1837, at the same place where
my observations were made, found it 69° 20'.2; and again, in March, 1838,
69° 18'.2, which, reduced to the epoch of my observations, at the rate of a dimi-
nution of 0'.2 per month, would give (the correction being additive) 69° 20'.4.
The dip observed by Major Sapine in Regent’s Park, in July, 1837, reduced
to the same epoch, is 69° 18’.9, and by an observation in November, 1837,
69° 25'.0. That found by Capt. James Ross, at Westbourne Green, in Au-
gust, 1837, similarly reduced, gives 69° 20'.8; in June and July, 1838, 69° 17'.0;
and in December, 1838, 69° 17'4. That of Professor Luoyp, in 1836, also,
reduced, is 69° 20'.8; and of Mr. Fox, in May and June, 1838, 69° 20'.5. The
mean of all these determinations, omitting the dip of 69° 25'.0, is 69° 19'.5. I
am not acquainted with any series of determinations, at the same place, by dif-
ferent observers, and with different instruments, which agree so closely, and
consider it, therefore, as an important point in verifying my results, that the
dip observed in 1837 agrees within 1'.7 of the mean of those just referred to.
The second determination of 69° 12'.3, in 1838, is in defect 4'.8, supposing the
annual decrease of dip to be 2'.4, a difference which is admissible, since nearly

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 85

as great a one is to be found among the foregoing results. ‘The determinations
of the dip at Paris agree very well with that given by Professor ForssEs, on
the authority of M. Araco, in July, 1835,* namely, 67° 24.0. An annual
diminution of dip of 2'.8 would give, in August, 1837, 67° 18'.2, while I found
67° 21'.4; and in July, 1838, 67° 15'.6, while my result was 67° 16'.5.

It is obvious, then, that my value of the total intensity is correct or not, ac-
cording as the horizontal intensity has or has not been accurately determined.
I shall return to this, after stating the results obtained by the statical method
of Professor Luoyp. As the observations in 1837, by this method, were made
at the short interval of a month from each other, I have not thought it neces-
sary to apply a correction to them, the whole loss of magnetism, during the
year, by either needle, having amounted to less than 0.01.

Observations for Total Intensity at London and Paris, by the Statical Method.

Dip when | Dip reduced Total
Place. ce Needle. ae loaded, to August, eee
Ss Angle @. Angle &. _ COR Q
Month.| Year. Fah. ° Sui (¢ — 6)
London | June | 1837. | No. 1, | 743 | 21°} 59’.0 | 69° | 1'7’.5
Paris Aug. 6 6s 723 |24 | 47.3] 67 | 21.0] 0.979
London | June| ‘ No. 2,| 744 | 19 | 13.5
Paris Aug. |) st 723 | 22 | 48.2 0.976
London | Aug. | 1838.| No. I, | 65 | 22 | 31.3] 69 | 12.3
Paris July |, * oe 75 | 25 | 41.7| 67 | 16.2] 0.9797
London | Aug.| ‘* | No. 2,| 65 | 19 | 59.4
Paris July | * ee 77° «| 23 | 12.5 0.980t

The horizontal intensity deduced from these results by using the dip already
given, is 1.065, agreeing closely with the determination by the method of
vibrations. This latter determination rests upon 4072 oscillations at one
station, and 6426 at the other, besides the verification by the statical method.
The foregoing results are collected in the following table.

* See the paper of Professor Forbes before referred to, in the Edinburgh Transactions, vol. xiv.
p. 27.
+ A small correction has been applied for the effect of temperature, amounting to 0.003 and

0.002 in the two cases respectively.

ViII.—W

86 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

Horizontal and Total Intensities and Dip at London and Paris.

Horizontal : ; :
las ea Intensity. Total, Intensity. Magnetic Dip.
Paris. | London. ee eaniem, Paris. | London.
2 iss
June, July, Aug.| Cylinder. 1.069 | 1.000 | 0.982 | 1.000 | 67° 21’.4*| 69° 17’.8t
Bar. 1.066 0.980
H.R. 1.066 0.980
H. B. 1.062 0.976
Lloyd No. 1. | 1.067 0.980
6G “2. | 1.063 0.976
1838.
July, Aug. Cylinder. 1.066 0.980 67° 16'.5 | 69° 12’.3
Bar. 1.068 0.981
Lloyd No. 1. | 1.067 0.981
GG sé 2, | 1.066 0.980
Mean 1.066 | 1.000 | 0.979 | 1.000
2 1.000 | 0.938 | 1.000 | 1.021

BRUSSELS.

The horizontal intensity at Brussels compared with that at Paris being well
known through the observations of M. QuETELET and others, it is important to
me as a verification of my results, and as connecting stations in the United
States with those in Europe, to compare my determinations with those already
on record. The dip at Brussels is also, no doubt, accurately known from the
regular observations of M. QUETELET since 1827; and I regretted that an acci-
dent which had happened to my dipping circle at Paris prevented me from
farther putting its accuracy to the test. The observations for horizontal in-
tensity were made in the garden of the OBsERvaTory. The chronometer was
compared with the observatory clock before and after the observations.

* The mean of this result and that obtained in 1838, reduced to August 16th, 1837, allowing a
diminution of dip yearly of 2’.8, is 67° 20/.8.

+ The mean of this result and that in 1838, reduced to June 16th, allowing an annual decrease
of dip of 2’.4, (see Major Sabine’s Report on the Magnetic Survey of the British Islands,) is.
69° 167.0.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 87

Observations for Horizontal Intensity at Brussels.

£ Corrected

Time o: : é
Time of Correction Hor.
Heeena Date. Temp. Npmibes Tote Ten Mean. eae Intensity.
S Oscill’ns *| Osceill’ns. Loss of
——_._ _—— —_— _— |-— : | -—$_$—_<——_|—_—_—__—__|__—___| Magnetism.
Year. | Month. D. H. Fah, © Secs. Secs. Secs. Paris 1.
Cylinder. 1838 July 25 |2z, P.M.| 62 300 35.596 | 35.640
ce 66 Co Te 61 300 .599 .644 | 35.642 1.0026 0.968
Bar. se CG ce 133, ss 60 350 38.366 | 38.417
OC «6 «6 66 152, 86 57 350 304 .398 | 38.407 1.0002 | 0.970

The mean of these results, 0.969*, is in close accordance with the results
before referred to as given by M. QuETELET, the mean of the several series of
observations made at Brussels between 1828 and 1838 being nearly 0.964. -

BERLIN.

I am indebted for an opportunity to make this set of observations to the
kindness of Professor Encxe, who put his convenient MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY
at my disposal, and removed from it the variation magnetometer and dipping
needle which it contained: without this, I could not have observed at this sea-
son of the year. In my first attempts to obtain the dip I was unsuccessful,
owing to the great loss of force which my magnets for reversing the poles of
the dipping needle had sustained during a circuitous journey from Switzerland
to this capital. ‘The magnets were retrenched by CGiRTeEx, and the results then
obtained appear worthy of confidence. Since this time I have taken the pre-
caution to oscillate the dipping needles before observing with them after the
reversion of the poles, to ascertain that they are charged nearly, or quite, to
saturation. As the periods which elapsed between these observations and
those which preceded and succeeded them, at Paris, were not very different, I
have calculated the intensity at Berlin in reference to both the series at Paris,
applying the correction for the loss of magnetism by the needles, deduced as

* This number differs by 0.001 from the result given by M. Quetelet in the Bulletin of the Brus-
sels Academy, vol. v. p. 481. In the numbers communicated to him I had applied a correction for
the loss of magnetism of the needles which was too high by nearly this difference; which is, how-
ever, entirely unimportant.

88 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

already stated. The coincidence of the two results shows strikingly the accu-
racy with which the curve already described supplies the data for the correc-
tion of the loss of force by the horizontal needles.

The chronometer was compared with the observatory clock.

Observations at Berlin.

For Horizontay INTENSITY.

Time of Corrected : :
Date mein No aise Time of |Correction Horizontal
Needl : Fe of | No- of | oseil’ Ten for Intensity.
es Gane Oscill’ns. | “8° ®S: | Oscill’ns.| Loss of
iat) ee Go 2a ees : — -- Magnet’m.
Year. | Month.| D. H. Fah. ° Secs. Secs. Paris 1.
1837.
Cylinder 1837] Dec. |16|/2, P. M.| 374 2 690 34.966 | 35.006 1.015 0.974
1838.
0.975 0.977
1837.
Bar 1837 se sige 6 35 2 660 37.886 | 37.993 1.005 0.983
1838.
0.993 0.984
Mean, . . 0.979
For Dir.
1837, Dec. 29, Needle No. 1, 68° 06’.5
No. 2, 68 10.6 Mean, 68° 087.5.

Total Intensity compared with Paris as unity, 1.0145.

The horizontal intensities of Berlin and Paris were compared by M. Rup-
BERG, who made the relation 0.974, and by M. QuETELET,* who gave 0.975 for
the relative intensities. My result differs but slightly from these.

The dip at Berlin is very well known from a series of observations extend-
ing from 1806 to 1837, and my result can add nothing to the knowledge of this
element, but as obtained with the same instrument which was used at Paris,
the total intensity will be, probably, a nearer approximation by using it than

* Annuaire de l’Observatoire de Bruxelles pour l’an 1834, p. 266. On the next page M. Quete-
let gives 0.9886 for the relative intensities, but this is doubtless a mistake.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 89

by employing in the calculation the more accurate determination of the long
series just referred to.

Professor EncKE has determined from this series a formula by which the
dip may be calculated for any epoch, namely, ) = 68° '7'.3 — 3'.52 (¢ — 1836,)
in which 0 is the dip and ¢ the year or fraction of a year. ‘The dip in Decem-
ber, 1837, calculated from this formula, is 68° 00'.4, from which my result dif-
fers about eight minutes.

MM. Humsotpt and Gay Lussac determined, in 1809, the relative inten-
sities at Berlin and Paris to be 1.014; M. Erman, in 1828, and M. QuETELET
in 1829, 1.0165.* My determination is 1.0145.

VIENNA.

These observations were made in the Botanic GARDEN, upon the upper
platform. The chronometer was compared, before and after the observations,
with the observatory clock. ‘The time of ten oscillations and the dip are com-
pared with the mean of the observations at Paris in 1837 and 1838, in calcu-
lating the horizontal and total intensities.

Observations at Vienna.

For Horizontat INTENSITY.

(ene ee Se Horizontal
Necdl basi. Temp.) No. of |_No. of oO ven Cerr’n | Intensity.
toa Series. | Oscill’ns.)~ °°" "5: for
a Loss of
Year. | Month.| D. D.| H. Fah. ° Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.000.
Cylinder.| 1838 Menre eg . M. | 58.3 2 700 | 33.436 | 1.0076 1.084
Bar, ‘s “| 57.8 2 700 | 36.043 | 1.0023 1.096
Mean, 1.090

For Dir.

-1838, March 21, Needle No. 1, 64° 45.8.
No. 2, 53 27. Mean, 64° 497.7.

Total Intensity compared with Paris as unity, 0.989.

The only published observations of magnetic intensity at Vienna with which
I am acquainted are those quoted by Major SaBivez, in his recent report, as

* Major Sabine’s Report on the Magnetic Intensity of the Earth.
VIl.—x

90 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

made by Krtnnav and Borcx, and which give the total intensity at Vienna, as
compared with Paris, 0.983, differing from the above only 0.006.

The numbers for the horizontal intensity furnished by the two needles some-
times, as in this particular case, differ; and, in general, the greater relative in-
tensity is given by the bar needle. After an examination of various causes
which suggested themselves as likely to produce this result, I am still at a loss
to explain it. It is not due to an ill-ascertained correction for the loss of mag-
netic force, nor for temperature, nor to a want of horizontality in the magnetic
axis of the needle. The mode of observing renders the limits of error in the
separate sets of observations much below these differences. It was my prac-
tice in observing to employ the cylinder needle which has a very small cor-
rection for temperature first, and, mean while, to place the other in the shade,

so as to avoid an error from its not having acquired the temperature of the sur-
rounding air.

TRIESTE AND VENICE.

The observations at Trieste were made in the BotanicaL GARDEN, and those

at Venice in the garden of the ARMENIAN Convent, on the Island of St. La-
Zarus.

Observations at Trieste and Venice:

For Horizontat INTENSITY.

| Time of | Coeffie’t

| Date Temp Ten of Horizontal
| Place Needle ; ‘\No. of | No. of | Oscill’ns| Corr’n Intensity.
| : i Series. Oscill’ns.| at 60°. for
SSN | Cee nee a CeO - Loss of |——-
Year. | Month.| D. H. Fah. ° Secs. Magn’m. Paris 1.

Trieste| Cylinder |1838| April | 4 |102, A.M.|54.0) 2 | 700. | 82.889 1.0091 | 1.121
Bar | « | « j«|113, « |54.5/ 2 | 580 | 35,426] 1.0024 | 1.135

———————— a | |

Venice | Cylinder | 1838 | April |11 122, P. M.| 67.5| 2 700. | 32.876 1.0097 1.122
66 9

Beye | GG so) 12, 6 67.6 700 35.393 | 1.0029 1.137
Mean, 1,129
For Dip.
Trieste, 1838, April 4th, Needle No. 1, 63° 19’.1
INOS oo Mean, 63° 20’.5
Venice, 1838, April 11th, Needle No. 1, 63° 18’.9
No: 2, ¢¢ 249 Mean, 63° 21'.9

Total Intensity at Trieste, compared with Paris as unity, 0.970.
és 66 Venice, 6 6 66 “60.9715.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 91

In this table the mean time of the oscillations at Paris and the mean of the
observed dips in 1837 and 1838, is taken as the unit of reference in calculating
the relative horizontal and total intensities.

The total intensity at Trieste, compared with Paris, is given by Major Sa-
BINE, in his report before referred to, as determined by Messrs. Keinuav and
Boeck, in 1826, as 0.977; differing from the mean of my results 0.007, the
difference between us having a contrary sign from that at Vienna. M. QuE-
TELET* gives the horizontal intensity at Venice as 1.1566, which is much
greater than my number.

ROME AND NAPLES.

The observations at Rome were made at two different stations; one out of
the region of the volcanic tufa upon which the city is built, upon the calcare-
ous formation of Monte Mario, in the garden of the Villa Mellini, the other
in the temple of Venus and Rome, opposite to the Colosseum. At the latter
station a curious instance of local attraction occurred: I had selected a block
of marble, apparently free from iron fastenings of any sort, as the resting place
for the instrument, and finding results very discordant from those obtained on
the Monte Mario, I next placed the instrument in a brick niche, to examine if
the local attraction were common to the whole station. The results obtained
when the instrument was in the niche were so different from the former that I
placed it again upon the block, to ascertain if any mistake had occurred, but
found again the same anomaly as at first. There was, probably, some iron be-
neath the pavement upon which the block of marble rested, suggesting the ne-
cessity for caution in the selection of these places of observaticn.

Fearing the influence of the ferruginous nature of the volcanic tufa upon
which Naples is built,t I went to Aversa, about eight miles to the north of the

city. ‘The place of observation was in the large garden attached to the Asy-
lum for the Insane.

* Annuaire de |’Observatoire de Bruxelles pour l’an 1834.

+ I certainly did not at that time remember that M. QuereLeT had expressed his opinion that
there was no local disturbance from this cause, or I should have deferred to his authority. Never-
theless, the precaution, though attended with some inconvenience, was not amiss.

92 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

At Rome the chronometer was compared, before and after the observations,
with the observatory clock of the Roman eee and, at Naples, with that of
the Royal Observatory.

The horizontal intensity observed at Paris, for 1838, is taken as unity in the
calculations, the correction for loss of force in the needles being applied for the
same epoch. The dip which is used in calculating the total intensity is a mean
of that actually observed at Paris in 1838, and of that which would result from
applying the yearly diminution of 2'.8 to the dip observed in 1837.

Observations at Rome and Naples.

For HorizontTat INTENSITY.
Time of | Coeffic’t

= Ten of Horizontal
Place Needl ate uonyp. a No. of | Oscill’ns. |Correction | Intensity.
‘ Pera Ss or | Oscill’ns.| at 60°. for
pe eS SDA ee oh CE hee aes Cee ee eries. , Loss of a
Year. | Month.} D. H. Fah. ° Secs. |Magnet’m.| Paris 1.
Rome* Cylinder} 1888] May |18/83, A. M.| 67.3] 2 650 31.574 | 0.9935 1.223
Bar oe Ot 6G 1955. 86 67.0} 2 600 34.122 | 0.9981 1.226
Romet |Cylinder§} « Seeeins P. M.| 65.0] 1 350 =| 31.539 | 0.9935 | 1.226
dG GB |} Gb “ 166.2] 1 350 | 31.777 Rejected.

Mean, 1.225

Naplest Cylinder| 1838| May |7 | 8, A. M.|'76.2| 2 700 31.290 0.9921 | 1.244
Bar G6 Ge GOA 665 1 7/4) TL 350 33.674 | 0.9977 1.258

Mean, 1.249

For Drie.
Rome,|| 1838, May 15, Needle No. 1, 60° 137.1
lifsig 1 0 No.2, “ 14.9 Mean, 60° 14’.0.
Naples,§ 1838, May 7, Needle No. 1, 59° 04’.8
&s sc No. 25 8 0525 Mean, 59° 05’.1.
Toul Intensity at Rome, compared with Paris as unity, 0.9525.
66 Naples, 66 66 66 66 0.9380.

In taking the means for the horizontal intensity, weight is allowed in pro-
portion to the number of oscillations observed.

The observations at Rome confirm the statement of M. QuETELET, that no
effect is produced upon the needle by the volcanic tufa.

* Monte Mario. + Temple of Venus and Rome. ¢ Aversa.
§ In niche, on stone. || Monte Mario. 7 Aversa.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 93

The numbers assigned for the horizontal intensities at Rome and Naples, by
M. QUETELET, are, respectively, 1.2471 and 1.2869, differing very considerably
from my results. My total intensities agree, however, very nearly with those
found by Humsotpt and Gay Lussac, which were, for Rome, 0.945, and for
Naples, 0.938.

FLORENCE AND MILAN.

The observations at Florence were made in the BoBoLt GARDENS; those at
Milan in the garden of M. Kramer, near the Porta Nuova. 'The chronome-
ter was compared, at both places, with the observatory clock.

The same data at Paris, which were referred to under the the head of Rome
and Naples, were used in the calculations in the following table.

Observations at Florence and Milan.

For Horizontat INTENSITY.
a eI pine of | Coeffic’t i
Date. Temp.| § | %.¢ er. OF OMAO Sa
Plane: Nocdioe P ca ae Osciins Corn Intensity.
a SSS 3 |4s - Loss of |——
Year. | Month.) D. H. Fah. ° & ie) Secs. | Magn’m.| Paris 1.
Florence |Cylinder|1838) May 28 2z, P.M. | 68.2) 2 | 700 | 32.395 | .9947 1.164
Bar ce £6 WO.) See, a 67.0 | 2 ‘6 | 34.838 | .9985 1.176
| Mean, 1.170
Milan | Cylinder|1838) June |10| 1,P.M. |73.7) 2 | 600 | 33.269| .9964 | 1.106
Bar Oo OC 36/2.» OG Fi4olk | 2 CG | Bazi |) es) | Ui ily
| ——————
Mean, | 1.112
For Dip.
Florence, 1838, May 28th, Needle No. 1, 62° 06’.5
No. 2, * 04.5 Mean, 62° 05’.5
Milan, 1838, June 10th, Needle No. 1, 63° 54’.1
IN@, 2, CO bys)! Mean, 63° 54’.7
Total Intensity at Florence, compared with Paris as unity, 0.965.

oe Milan, O oe ae WB QBDrPe

The same numbers for Paris being employed as in the preceding calcula-
tions, and referring to 1838, I thought it might be satisfactory to ascertain if any
part of the differences of horizontal intensity, as shown by the two needles,
(amounting, in the results at Florence and Milan, to .012 and .011,) could be
explained by an erroneous correction for loss of magnetism. Referring the
horizontal intensities to 1837, however, when the correction has the contrary
effect from that in the table, the same difference results.

VII.—yY

94 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

Nor does this depend upon some peculiarity in the observations at Paris,
since, referring to the observations at London, and taking the horizontal in-
tensity there as unity, nearly the same difference appears.

The horizontal intensities determined by M. QuETELET at these two stations
both exceed my results, his number for Florence being 1.1830, and for Milan
1.1335. The total intensities obtained by MM. Humpoupt and Gay Lussac
were, for Florence, 0.9481, and for Milan 0.9733, both of which numbers are
less than mine.*

TURIN AND CHAMBERIL

The place of observation at Turin was in the Botanic GarpEn; at Cham-
beri, in the parK of the Count pe Boienes, a short distance only from the
town. At Turin the chronometer was compared with the observatory clock,
and the same rate was applied at Chamberi. ‘The comparison is made with
the observations at Paris in 1838.

Observations at Turin and Chambert.

For HorizontTau INTENSITY.
Time of | Coeflic’t

1 2 Z Ten of Horizontal
int
Pisce: INecdIee ate Temp, D © 2 Oscill’ns. Corr’n Intensity.
% | o= at 60°. for
- oe 3 a5 Loss of
Year. | Month.) D. H. Fah. °] 7, 2) Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.
Turin ~ |Cylinder| 1888) June |17/11, A. M. | 82.5] 2 | 600 | 33.440 | .9987 | 1.096

Bar £6 OG 6G | 1G, IY 83.0] 2 ot 36.149 | .9992 | 1.093

Mean, | 1.0945

Chamberi | Cylinder] 1838] June |21/12¢ P. M.|'78.2| 2 | 700 | 33.539 | .9989 | 1.090
Bar a ss OG es 77.9 | 2 Ue 36.235 | .9993 | 1.088

Mean, | 1.089

For Dre.

Turin, 1838, June 17, Needle No. 1, 68° 48’.8
18, 86 INOw 2 oe DDG Mean, 63° 52’.2.

Chamberi, 1838, June 21, Needle No. 1, 64° 31’.5
No. 2, “ 37.5 Mean, 64° 35’.0.

Total Intensity at Turin, compared with Paris as unity, 0.959.
66 es Chamberi, <“‘ 66 6s ‘0.979.

* The authorities for these numbers are the same as previously quoted. In the remainder of the
paper, unless the contrary is stated, the numbers are derived from the same sources, namely, the
Annual of the Brussels Observatory for 1834, or the Transactions of the Brussels Academy of Sci-
ences, vol. vi., and the Report of Major Sabine on the Magnetic Intensity.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 95

M. QUETELET assigns 1.112 as the horizontal intensity at Turin, and MM.
Humpoitpt and Gay Lussac give 0.9911 as the total intensity. The latter
number exceeds my determination very considerably.

LYONS.

These observations were made in a meadow to the south-east of Lyons, and
across the Rhone from the city. In reducing the time of ten oscillations for
the rate of the chronometer, the mean of the rates at Turin and Paris, which
differed very slightly, has been employed.

Observations at Lyons.

For Horizontat INTENSITY.
a 3 | Lime of | Coeftie’t
os 8 Ten of Horizontal
Place Naadie Dee. Hemp. nD x a Oscill’ns | Corr’n | Intensity.
5 : os 2 = at 60°. for
| S$ ——_—__-—____ 3 9 Loss of |—————__—_
Year. | Month. D. H. Fah. 9) 7 ° Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.
| Lyons |Cylinder |1838} June | 25)12z, P.M.|'75.7| 2 | 700 | 33.739 | .9991 1.077
Bar ss es CI Dare OG Wel 2 750 | 36.391 | .9995 1.079
Mean, 1.078
For Dir.
Lyons, 1838, June 24, Needle No. I, 64° 49’.5.
; No. 2, 48 .6. Mean, 64° 49’.0.

Total Intensity at Lyons, compared with Paris as unity, 0.978.

According to MM. Humpoupt and Gay Lussac, the total intensity at Ly-
ons 1s .9889.

CHAMOUNI AND THE FLEGIERE

The place of observation which appeared to me most suitable, at the time of
my visit to Chamouni, was in a field in rear of, and at some distance from, the
Union Hotel. On the Flégiére the observations were made not far from, and
about thirty feet above, the point where the cross is placed. The height of
this point above the Valley of Chamouni is, in round numbers, about 3500 feet,
and the valley itself is 3400 feet above the level of the sea.

96 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

These observations having been made in August, 1837, are compared with
those at Paris in 1837, the dip being obtained, however, as in the similar case
of 1838, by using both series of observations. The rate of the chronometer de-
termined at Geneva was used in the reduction.

Observations at Chamount and the Flegiere.

For Horizontat INTENSITY.

Time of | Coeffic’t

2 Z Ten of Horizontal
Date. emp: D ‘6-3 | Oscill’ns | Corr’n Intensity.
Place. Needle. Sf WSSU ae for
a 2 AS -- Loss of —
Year. | Month.| D. He Fah. 9 2 ° Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.
| Chamouni |Cylinder|1837| Aug. |26/ 92, P.M.|53.0| 1 | 150 | 32.902 | 1.002 | 1.088
Bar ce 66 Sais Os 29 50.0 | 2 | 300 | 36.006 | 1.001 | 1.089
| Mean, | 1.0885
——s ee Pe week Pe ee ih Se ee or SS —§_

The Flégiére | Cylinder | 1837] Aug. |26,12, M. |68.0) 2 | 650 32.768 | 1.002 | 1.097

Bat <e cr OC 122, P. M./ 69.5| 1 | 300 | 35.945 | 1.001 | 1.101
Mean, “1,099
For Dip.
Chamouni, 1837, Aug. 26, Needle No. 1, 64° 38’.7
No. 2, 64 37.7 Mean, 64° 38/.2.

The Flégiére, 1837, Aug. 26, Needle No. 1, 64° 35’.8.

Total Intensity at Chamouni, compared with Paris as unity, 0.979
ac “)y onithe Hlésiere, G60 06 COLO 71

The horizontal intensity in the Valley of Chamouni, according to Professor
Forses, is 1.076,* and to M. QuETELET, 1.0935. My result agrees nearly
with the latter. The higher station presents a greater horizontal and total in-
tensity than the lower, contrary to the general deduction from the laboured and
ingenious memoir of Professor Forszs on this subject. It is worthy of remark,
however, that the number given by Professor Forses for the horizontal inten-
sity at the Jardin is greater than that for the valley. M. QuEeTELET, on the
contrary, found a less horizontal intensity on the Mer de Glace than at Cha-
mouni. The anomaly is probably real, and adds another to the instances pre-
sented by Professor Forzss, of the difficulties of the problem of which he has

* Edinburgh Transactions, vol. xiv., part IL.

+ Annuaire de l’Observatoire de Bruxelles pour l’an 1834.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 97

successfully undertaken the solution. The dip given by Professor ForBEs, at
Chamouni, is 65° 00', and at the Jardin, 64° 58', both differing considerably
from my results.

GENEVA.

These observations were made in the garden of M. Prevost-Martin, not
far from the city; those with the cylindrical needle on the 24th of August and
1st of September, those with the bar on the first occasion; the dip was mea-
sured on the second. ‘The observations at Chamouni intervened between the
two sets at Geneva. ‘The loss of the chronometer was ascertained from the
standard near the Church of St. Peter, which is rated for the use of the watch-
makers.

The numbers for Paris used in the reductions were obtained as stated under
the head of Chamouni.

Observations at Geneva.

For Horizontat Intensity.
a wy | Time of | Coeffie’t
= g Ten of Horizontal
Date. Temp.| 4% Cae) “179 } F
Place. Needle. i iy é = ee eon a Marsan
[ee 2 A iS) Loss of
Year. | Month.) D. H. Fah. 9 fo) Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.
Geneva |Cylinder |1837| Aug. | 24) 1,P.M. | 81.2} 2 662 | 32.904 | 1.0023 1.088
Gb C6 Sept. 1} 14, * 68.5 1 300 | 33.033 | 1.0032 1.081
Bar OG Aug. 24) 12, * 82.0 2 650 | 36.048 | 1.0008 1.086
Mean, 1.086
For Dir.
Geneva, 1837, Sept. 1, Needle No. 1, 64° 52’.4.
No. 2, 47 .3. Mean, 64° 49’.8.

Total Intensity at Geneva, compared with Paris as unity, 0.984.

The horizontal intensity at Geneva, compared with that at Paris, is stated
by M. QuEeTeLeT* to be 1.0805, and by Professor Forzest, 1.071; my own re-
sult agrees best with the former. Professor Forses determined the dip, in
August, 1832, to be 65° 05’, and states that it was found, in 1825, by M. Arago,

* Annuaire de |’Observatoire de Bruxelles, &c., 1834.
+ Edinburgh Transactions, vol. xiv.

Wi

98 OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY

to be 65° 48'.5. Adopting 2'.8 as the annual decrease of the dip at Geneva, the
observations of Professor ForBrs would give, for the epoch 1837, 64° 51'.0, and
those of M. Araco, 65° 14.9,

BRIENTZ AND THE FAULHORN.

These observations were rade at places only about fourteen miles apart, but
differing in elevation 6800 feet: the lower station itself (Brientz) is about 8900
feet above the level of the sea. The Faulhorn was one of the stations of Pro-
fessor ForBEs in his Alpine observations; and Brientz is about twelve miles
W.N. W. of another of his stations, Meyringen.

The observations at Brientz were made in a field in rear of, and about a hun-
dred yards from the White Cross Hotel; those at the Faulhorn nearly on the
very summit, and as far from the chalet as the ground would permit.

The chronometer was rated at Zurich, and the rate, which differed but
little from that found at Geneva, has been applied in the following table. The
numbers already referred to for Paris, in 1837, have been used in the calcu-

lations.
Observations at Brientz and the Faulhorn.
For HorizontTau INTENSITY.
a uy | Time of | Coeffic’t
Os g f Horizontal
Bins. em ee om ions Oscill’ns. Cotta iatenety
Place. Needle. SANE nS at 60° for i
Me ! pe ted) sateen ne ae ee 20 3 a5 =) Tio —
Year. | Month.) D. H. Fah. °) 7 fo) Secs. |Magn’m.| Paris 1.
Brientz Cylinder | 1837 Sept. |22|11, A. M.| 65.0] 2 | 700 | 33.162 | 1.0056 1.075
Bar 66 OG “6 1124, P. M.| 64.8] 2 | 600 | 36.141 | 1.0020 1.082
Mean, | 1.078
The Faulhorn| Cylinder | 1837 | Sept. |20| 3 P. M. | 50.5) 2 | 700 | 33.078 | 1.0054 | 1.080
Bar se us sol | 66 43.7 | 2 | 600 | 36.082 | 1.0017 1.085
Mean, | 1.082
For Dir.
Brientz, 1837, Sept. 22, Needle No. 1, 64° 59’.5
No. 2, 65 15.0 Mean, 65° 06’.7.

The Faulhorn, 1837, Sept. 20, Needle No. 1, 65° 01’.5
No. 2, ** 01.9 Mean, 65° 01’.7.

Total Intensity at Brientz, compared with Paris as unity, 0.9869.
66 sc Summit of the Faulhorn, *§ “0.9874.

AT TWENTY-ONE STATIONS IN EUROPE. 99

The difference in the dip at Brientz, as shown by the two needles, (No. 1
and No. 2,) is very considerable, and, from the separate observed quantities,
the results by No. 2 would appear more worthy of confidence than that by
No. 1.

The two horizontal needles, oscillated by Professor Fores, on the Faulhorn,
gave 1.071 and 1.060, mean 1.065 for the horizontal intensity compared with
Paris, and the needle oscillated at the lower station, Meyringen, for compari-
son, 1.075. My results, both at the upper and lower stations, exceed these, be-
ing 1.082 and 1.078. The difference of the horizontal intensities at the upper
and lower stations appears equally from my series and that of Professor ForBEs
to have been very small; less, in fact, than the differences between two needles
at the same station.

Tam not aware that Professor Forsrs determined the dip at his two corre-
sponding stations. Using the mean dip for Brientz, the total intensity at the
lower station appears very nearly the same with that at the upper; using the
dip given by needle No. 1, it would, of course, be less; and using that shown
by needle No. 2, it would exceed the total intensity at the upper station by
only .0046.

The details given in the preceding pages appear to me essential, in order to
a just conclusion as to the character of the results, and for reference in regard
to the localities and circumstances of the observations. ‘The comparisons of
my conclusions with those of others, as far as 1 am acquainted with them, will
probably be found convenient, and, in some cases, had a specific object in
reference to these observations themselves. ‘The results being thus unavoid-
ably scattered, I have thought it best, in conclusion, to present them in a sin-
gle table, divested of particulars.

100

The results are arranged in the order of the total intensities and columns are

OBSERVATIONS OF THE MAGNETIC INTENSITY, &c.

inserted for the latitude and longitude of the places.

No.

—
Sconranawwr|

* Dip not observed.

Page 96, (in table,) column headed ‘‘No. of Oscillations,’? first line, for 150, read 350.

Latitude. Longitude

from
Place. Paris. Date.
° y 5 ,
Edinburgh. 55 |57 N.| 5 |32W.\Feb. 3, 1837.
Dublin. 53. |23 * 8 [41 “ |Nov. 20, 1836.
London. 51 |31 “| 2 \26 \June 16, 1837.
Brussels. 50 }51 “| 2 (02 E\July 25, 1838.
Berlin. 52 [32 “| 11 102 “ |\Dec. 16, 1837.
Paris. 48/50 «| 0 100 * |Aug. 17, 1837.
Vienna. 48 |13 “| 14 |02 E.|/March 23, 1838.
The Flégiere. Aug. 26, 1837.
Brientz. Septauue2 0c
The Faulhorn. Seis By 6
Geneva. EAD NANG Se IG) CONT” ey, GG
Chamberi. June 21, 1838
Chamouni. Aug. 26, 1837
Lyons. 45 |46 “| 2% (29% |June 25, 1838
Milan. 45 |28 “« 6 |51 “ \June 10, *
Venice. 45 |26 “| 10) \01 <* |April 11, <<
Trieste. 29380 c0 | ET 2 ace Arora a4 an gre
Florence. 43 \47 “| 8 (55 * [May 28, <«
Turin. 45 |04 «| 5 20 \June 17, «
Rome. 41 WOR LORS Mayne l8 sens
Naples. ~ 40 |52 «| 11 (57% (May 7, «

Horizontal Dip. Total
Intensity. Intensity.
Paris = 1) | P Panis 5 il,
0.841 * *
0.879 * a
0.939T | 69 | 16.0 1.021
0.969 as *
0.979 68 | 08.5 1.014
1.000 67 | 20.8 1.000
1.090 64 | 49.7 0.989
1.099 64 | 35.8 0.987
1.078 65 | 06.7 0.987
| 1.082 65 | 01.7 0.987
1.086 64 | 49.8 0.984
1.089 64 | 35.0 0.979
1.088 64 | 38.2 0.979
1.078 64 | 49.0 0.978
1.111 63 | 54.7 0.972
1.129 63 | 21.9 0.971
1.128 63 | 20.5 0.970
1.170 62 | 05.5 0.965
1.094 63 | 52.2 0.959
1.225 60 | 14.0 0.952
1,249 59 | 05.1 0.938

+ Mean of results in June, July, and August, 1837, and in July and August, 1838.

ERRATUM.

ARTICLE X.

Additional Observations of the Magnetic Dip in the United States. By Elas
Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in Western Re-
serve College. Read October 14, 1839.

Tue following observations were made with the same instrument, and the
mode of observing adopted was the same as described in a former paper. In
needle No. 1, I have continued to find the magnetic axis to coincide very nearly
with the geometrical. The inclination has never exceeded afew minutes. In
needle No. 2, on the contrary, this inclination has seldom been less than one
degree, and, in a few instances, has exceeded two degrees. Yet, although the
magnetic axis of this needle never coincides with the geometrical, it does not
maintain a constant position with respect to it. Ifthe reading of the needle is
at one time too great, when its polarity is reversed, in the same position of the
instrument and needle, the reading is invariably too small, showing that the
magnetic pole has passed to the other side of the geometrical. In other words,
the magnetic axis, instead of revolving 180° from a reversal of the poles, re-
volves only 175° or 178°. That this anomaly is not to be ascribed to the mode
of magnetising employed is, I think, evident from the uniformity of the effect,
and from the fact that in needle No. 1, though magnetised in the same way,
nothing similar is observed. I can only ascribe it to some peculiarity in the
material or temper of the needle. In the transportation of the instrument from
place to place by public conveyances, the level was, in several instances, slightly
deranged. This was always verified by reversal, previous to commencing the
observations, and the level readjusted when necessary. It is believed that the
instrument has sustained no injury from transportation, and that it is suscep-
tible of as great accuracy now as formerly. The observations made at Hudson,

VII.—2 A

102 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE

October 7th, 1839, afford presumptive evidence of this. In order to obviate all
danger of mistake in reversing the poles, a small dot of ink was placed upon
each needle, and the position of this mark, whether up or down, was always en-
tered at the head of the observations. The following observations are arranged
in the order of their dates :—

Magnetic Dip at Hudson, Ohio, Latitude 41° 15' N.; Longitude 5h. 26m. W.

Place of observation the same as formerly described.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Aug. 16th, 7—9, A. M. No. 1, 40) Wee Bye ek
+ “s 66 6 «6 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 42 .9
‘ ‘6 ‘6 &¢ Mean of No. 1, 80 48 .6
“e 6 “s e Ke No. 2, 40 2222
66 66 66 $6 6 No. 2, poles reversed, 40 69 .6
“ 66 Mean of No. 2, 80 45 .9
és 6 66 6 6 Mean of two needles, 160 Fey A778

The mean of the observations with the two needles is nearly the same, yet
the observations with No. 2, in its two magnetic states, differs by 47’, indi-
cating an inequality in the arms of the needle. If the needle could always be
magnetised with the same intensity, the effect of this equality would be elimi-
nated by reversing the poles; yet, as this condition is not easily fulfilled, it is
better to make the arms of the needle of equal weight. ‘The heaviest end of
No. 2 was therefore rubbed on a hone, and the observations repeated.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Aug. 18th, 8—9, A.M. |. No. 2, 40 72° 36.8
&c 66 ec 66 OG No. 2, poles reversed, 40 51.9
Us 3G 66 56 36 Mean of No. 2, 80 72°44 .4

Here the inequality is reduced to 15’. The heavy end was again applied to
the hone, and the following observations made :—

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Aug. 19th, 9—10, A. M. No. 2, 40 oe eag
86 Gd 56 “ “6 No. 2, poles reversed, 40 Bir? az
56 BG 66 36 36 Mean of No. 2, 80 72 54.8

The inequality is here reduced to 5'.8, and no farther change was made in
the needle during the whole of the subsequent observations. The mean of the

MAGNETIC DIPS IN THE UNITED STATES.

103

last 160 observations of No. 2 is 72° 49'.6, and the mean of the 320 readings,
Aug. 16th—19th, is 72° 48'.4.

Magnetic Dip at Buffalo, New York, Latitude 42° 53' N.; Longitude 5h. 16m. W.

Place of observation a few rods east of the American House.

Date.

1839, Aug. 31st,

ce

Hour.
8—10, A. M.

6s ce

Needle.

No. 1,

No. 1, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 1,

No. 2,

No. 2, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 2,

Mean of both needles,

Magnetic Dip at Oswego, New Vork. Latitude 43° 26’ N.;

Place of observation a few rods west of the village.

Date.
1839, Sept. 1st,

es ee 66

Hour.

7a—9z, A. M.

o¢ a3

“e (7

Needle.

No. 1,

No. 1, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 1,

No. 2,

No. 2, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 2,

Mean of both needles,

No. Readings.
40
40
80
40
40
80
160

No. Readings.
40
40
80
40
40
80
160

Dip.
74° 36'.3
43 .1
39 .7
37 .4
46 .2
41 .8
74 40.8

Longitude 5h. 6m. W.

Dip.
Ua? 17/083
4.8
Talo!
13 .2
at!
11.5
75 11.3

Magnetic Dip at Syracuse, New York. Latitude 43° 0’ N.; Longitude 5h. 5m. W.

Place of observation a grove, a few rods north-east of the village.

Date.
1839, Sept. 2d,

Hour.

8—10, A. M.

Needle.

No. 1,

No. 1, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 1,

No. 2,

No. 2, poles reversed,
Mean of No. 2,

Mean of both needles,

No. Readings.
40
40
80
40
40
80
160

Dip.
74° 47'.8
51 .6
49 .7
50 .2
54 .0
52.1
74 50.9

104 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE

Magnetic Dip at Utica, New York. Latitude 48° 7’ N.; Longitude 5h. 1m. W.

Place of observation a few rods north-east of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 3d, 53—73, A. M. No. 1, 40 74° 54’.0
66 OG 6s 66 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 52 .6
66 came “c “ Mean of No. 1, 80 53 .3
“ OG & 6 cou No. 2, 40 59.5
6% GB: |G 66 es No. 2, poles reversed, 40 62 .6
166 6G)" 06 66 66 Mean of No. 2, 80 61 .0
66 33, GG “é CG Mean of both needles, 160 74 57.2

Magnetic dip at Schenectady, New York. Latitude 42° 48' N.; Longitude 4h. 56m. W.

Place of observation a few rods south of the village.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 3d, 44—63, P. M. No. 1, 40 74° 40'.7
‘6 5G OC oe ae No. 1, poles reversed, 40 40 .9
6 SG GB 36 36 Mean of No. 1, 80 40 .8
OG 08 Ge ce ee No. 2, 40 24 .6
66 Co OG GC G6 No. 2, poles reversed, 40 38 .1
66 86s. G6 68 G6 Mean of No. 2, 80 Slee
“6 G3 8G Ge GC Mean of both needles, 160 74 36.1

Magnetic Dip ai Albany, New York. Latitude 42° 39' N.; Longitude 4h. 55m. W.

Place of observation a few rods north-west of the capitol.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 4th, 11, AM.—1, P.M. No. 1, 40 74° 55'.6
ce ag G6 cs ée No. 1, poles reversed, 40 45 .5
6 GS G6 6 “ Mean of No. 1, 80 50.5
oC Od Of WG Ob No. 2, 40 53.7
$6 GG 0 a6 aC No. 2, poles reversed, 40 50 .5
“e GB GG cc és Mean of No. 2, 80 BP all

a Ne Hee és a6 Mean of both needles, 160 74 51.3

MAGNETIC DIPS IN THE UNITED STATES. 105

Magnetic Dip at West Point, New York. Latitude 41° 25’ N.; Longitude 4h. 56m. W.

Place of observation on the bank of the river, near the steam-boat landing.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 5th, 3—5, P. M. No. 1, 40 73° 28/.9
és CG 6G 6 & No. 1, poles reversed, 40 OMT orl
os GGG 66 “ Mean of No. 1, 80 28 .3
a GG «6 ce No. 2, 40 22.8
ce ace ee < No. 2, poles reversed, 40 30 .0
a: O55 co 66 6 Mean of No. 2, 80 26 .4
ac OO CG ce 6s Mean of both needles, 160 83} zh oe

Magnetic Dip at New York City. Latitude 40° 43’ N.; Longitude 4h. 56m. W.

Place of observation the yard in front of Columbia College.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings, Dip.
1839, Sept. 9th, 8—103, A. M. No. 1, 40 72° 5A’.8
ot 6G) 8G “ 66 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 47 1
6 CG 6 6 66 Mean of No. 1, 80 50 .9
GG oc Gb ae Os No. 2, 40 47 1
ec a “6 66 No. 2, poles reversed, 40 59 .9
ol CG 6s oT Mean of No. 2, 80 53.5
ke oe oC & Mean of both needles, 160 TO BY 2

Magnetic Dip at New Haven, Connecticut. Latitude 41° 18’ N.; Longitude 4h. 52m. W.

Place of observation the burial ground.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 11th, § 7—9, A. M. No. 1, 40 73° 24’.0
“6 6s 6 6s 6 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 34 .6
6 6s “6 6 6s Mean of No. 1, 80 29 .3
ue us Of OC ce No. 2, 40 14.4
OG Ge & 66 & No. 2, poles reversed, 40 33 .9
“ ce oC ae C6 Mean of No. 2, 80 24 1
Me f sé OG kc Mean of both needles, 160 Vis PAS dz/

V1I.—2 B

106 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE

Magnetic Dip ai Hartford, Connecticut. Latitude 41° 46’ N.; Longitude 4h. 51m. W.

Place of observation a short distance north-west of the State House.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 13th, 93—114,A.M. No.1, 40 73° 58/.2
6 66) 86 66 ce No. 1, poles reversed, 40 52 .4
6“ és 6e es “ Mean of No. 1, 80 55.3
Yo 6a c“ « No. 2, 40 61 .0
se “6 &e GG “ No. 2, poles reversed, 40 60.8
sé &< &< BG Gh Mean of No. 2, 80 60 .9
6 oe be Gh 66 Mean of both needles, 160 73 58.1

Magnetic Dip at Springfield, Massachusetts. Latitude 42° 6' N.; Longitude 8h. 50m. W.

Place of observation a few rods east of Hampton Coffee House.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.

1839, Sept. 14th, 8—10, A. M. No. 1, 40 74° 7'.6
&e és ‘ “ “ No. 1, poles reversed, 40 8.1
“ “6 & “ Mean of No. 1, 80 7.8

“e & &e “ No. 2, 40 7 0

&< Py: ‘ és G No. 2, poles reversed, 40 5.0
“ “ ‘< ‘ ‘ Mean of No. 2, 80 6.0
6 és 66 46 Mean of both needles, 160 74 6.9

Magnetic Dip at Longmeadow, Massachusetts. Latitude 42° 2' N.; Longitude 4h. 50m. W.

Place of observation a few rods west of the village church.

Date. Hour. Needle. _ No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 14th, 3i—5, P.M. No. 1, 40 74° 6'.4
oe si a6 se “c No. 1, poles reversed, 40 4.0
ss & “s sb és Mean of No. 1, 80 bree
Mi a ut cc <c No. 2, 40 Wik Sz
a os es ss ‘s No. 2, poles reversed, 40 73 59.0
ss Ks cs oe cc Mean of No. 2, 80 Wes BS ott

ee ‘c « « cc Mean of both needles, 160 74 5.3.

MAGNETIC DIPS IN THE UNITED STATES. 107

Magnetic Dip at Worcester, Massachusetts. Latitude 42° 16' N.; Longitude 4h. 47m. W.

Place of observation a few rods west of Worcester House.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 16th, 4—6, P.M. IN@, Ue 40 74° 19/.6
te 6 66 66 6 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 26 .0
sé ‘“ “ ‘6 “ Mean of No. 1, 80 22 .8
a OG 6 6 ot No. 2, 40 Hou
4s es a de fé No. 2, poles reversed, 40 25 .5
a ce Ot OL GG Mean of No. 2, 80 18 .3
Uc be sf oe 6 Mean of both needles, 160 74 20.6

Magnetic Dip at Cambridge, Massachusetts. Latitude 42° 22’ N.; Longitude 4h. 44m. W.
§ ip § §

Place of observation a few rods south-west of the colleges.

Date. Hour. Needle. No, Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 17th, 3—5, P.M. No. 1, 40 TA2 191.2
&§ 66 Ob « as No. 1, poles reversed, 40 18 .9
¢¢ Ob ée 6< 66 Mean of No. 1, 80 1) Gi
te pice tes ce ee No. 2, 40 19 .4
ie 66 ac i No. 2, poles reversed, 40 22.7
Ob Ot OG Ke 66 Mean of No. 2, 80 21.0
64 OG ae Ke 66 Mean of both needles, 160 74 20.1

Magnetic Dip at Providence, Rhode Island. Latitude 41° 50’ N.; Longitude 4h. 46m. W.

Place of observation near the steam-boat landing.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 19th, 113,A.M.—1, P.M. No. 1, 40 73° 57’.0
OF OG se 6 Cr No. 1, poles reversed, 40 60 .6
a ce Os GG 66 Mean of No. 1, 80 58 .8
Oc Ot 6d 66 ée No. 2, 40 62 .8
BE oe ob aC Ob No. 2, poles reversed, 40 57 .9
oe OG ce a G5 Mean of No. 2, 80 60 .3
Ke Of se as 66 Mean of both needles, 160 73 59.6

108 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE

Magnetic Dip at Princeton, New Jersey. Latitude 40° 22' N.5 Longitude, 4h. 58m. W.

Place of observation an open field, one hundred rods south of the colleges.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 21st, 10—12, A. M. No. 1, 40 Vie Wy Mar
se 0G) 6B ee &s No. 1, poles reversed, 40 47 .4
66 6 “6 Ge OG Mean of No. 1, 80 47 .4
06 OG OG sf ee No. 2, 40 52 .9
és 66 Ge G6 a No. 2, poles reversed, 40 40 .8
oG te Os ce 66 Mean of No. 2, 80 46 .8
“6 ec Gi GE os Mean of both needles, 160 72 «47.1

Magnetic Dip at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Latitude 39° 57' N.; Longitude 5h. 1m. W.

Place of observation the yard in front of President Bache’s house.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 23d, 103—12, M. No. 1, 40 72° 8'.6
6 66 ke 6 & No. 1, poles reversed, 40 TTL G8}
66 6G. G6 e 6 Mean of No. 1, 80 10.0
£6 sé Ob “S BG No. 2, 40 71 58.9
66 66 6 Or 6s No. 2, poles reversed, 40 72956
& a6 56 OG Mean of No. 2, 80 Al
a6 OOS GG GG 66 Mean of both needles, 160 VR all

Magnetic Dip at Baltimore, Maryland. Latitude 39° 17' N.; Longitude 5h. 7m. W.

Place of observation the grove north of Washington Monument.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 25th, 7—8, A.M. No. 1, 40 71° 5473
a G8 «es gs No. 1, poles reversed, 40 46 .3

66 6% 66 66 66 Mean of No. 1, 80 71 50.3

MAGNETIC DIPS IN THE UNITED STATES. 109

Magnetic Dip at Washington City. Latitude 38° 53’ N.; Longitude 5h. 8m. WV.

Place of observation the yard in front of the capitol.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 25th, 3—5, P. M. No. 1, 40 Zil® OXI,
é 6 6 6 66 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 - 14 %5
& OG ce ee 6s Mean of No. 1, 80 i'7/ cel
aC oC Cl OG ce No. 2, 40 26 .4
a Ce OS Ob Gc No. 2, poles reversed, 40 PB)
OG Ob ce ee cc Mean of No. 2, 80 25 .1
iy «sg &¢ Gs UG Mean of both needles, 160 71 21.4

Magnetic Dip at Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. Latitude 40° 32’ N.; Longitude 5h. 20m. W.

Place of observation an open yard on the opposite side of Alleghany river.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Sept. 30th, 9—11, A. M. No. 1, 40 72° 44'.5
ce SCOPE oe oe No. 1, poles reversed, 40 39 .3
6 és ts o¢ OC Mean of No. 1, 80 41.9
e te ce ce 66 No. 2, 40 34 .3
“ 66 6 6 &< No. 2, poles reversed, 40 37 .6
6 &6 “ “6 és Mean of No. 2, 80 35.9
66 6s 6 66 66 Mean of both needles, 160 72 38.9

Magnetic Dip at Beaver, Pennsylvania. Latitude 40° 44’ N.; Longitude 5h. 22m. W.

Place of observation on the bank of the Ohio, near Beaver bridge.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Oct. Ist, 87—107, A. M. No. 1, 40 72° 34’.9
as Co) a6 ce oe No. 1, poles reversed, 40 40 6
6 Os Ce 6 “ Mean of No. 1, 80 37 .8
«é Forage’ BC OC No. 2, 40 40 .0
ec Senmnics a6 eC No. 2, poles reversed, 40 45 .6
“ GG CG “ 66 Mean of No. 2, 80 42 .8
66 cee & ec Mean of both needles, 160 72 40.3

Vil.—2 c

110 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE

Magnetic Dip at Hudson, Ohio. Latitude 41° 15' N.; Longitude 5h. 26m. W.

Place of observation the same as formerly.

Date. Hour. Needle. No. Readings. Dip.
1839, Oct. 7th, 1—3, P. M. No. 1, 40 72° 49’.1
6s GGG 66 66 No. 1, poles reversed, 40 45 .0
OG GB GG cs € Mean of No. 1, 80 47 .0
cs GG a6 ee No. 2, 40 43 .8
«6 Oe 0 ob oC No. 2, poles reversed, 40 46 .0
“6 86 66 6 Mean of No. 2, 80 44.9
OG Oe OG 6 Mean of both needles, 160 72 45.9

In comparing the preceding observations, some discordances will be perceived.
The difference of the readings in the two magnetic states of the needles is, by
no means, constant. When the marked end of needle No. 1 was a north pole,
the average observed dip was 4'.4 greater than when it was a south pole, show-
ing a small but real inequality in the weight of the arms. Correcting the dif-
ferences for this constant effect, the remainders are quite anomalous, and are
subject to no obvious law. Their mean value is a little less than four minutes,
and the greatest amounts to ten minutes. These anomalies may be ascribed
to various causes, such as errors of observation; erroneous entries of readings;
influence of currents of air, which, although the observations were all made
under a glass cover, are quite appreciable when the wind is fresh; dust and
moisture, and, perhaps, loose ferruginous particles collecting upon the needle,
and producing a temporary inequality in the weight of the arms: this source
of error I always endeavoured to guard against by carefully wiping each needle
before the observations, yet it is doubtful if, even with this precaution, its effect
was wholly eliminated. Dust and moisture, adhering to the pivots of the nee-
dles and to the agate supports, might also have a sensible influence; and, finally,
it is, perhaps, credible that there may have been an appreciable diurnal change
in the dip during the interval of the observations. Similar remarks apply to
the observations with needle No. 2 in its different magnetic states. The mean
results of the two needles at a single locality usually differ somewhat; and in

MAGNETIC DIPS IN THE UNITED STATES. 111

one instance, at Schenectady, the difference amounts to 9'.5; yet, for the entire
series of observations, the average excess of the results with one needle above
those with the other is only the tenth part of a minute, showing that the dif-
ferences in the partial results are accidental; and as these differences are not
very large, it is believed that the preceding observations furnish a tolerable ap-
proximation to the true magnetic dip at the places designated.

PoE

Og ah ee oa

ARTICLE XI.

On a new Principle in regard to the Power of Fluds in Motion to produce Rup-
ture of the Vessels which contain them; and on the Distinction between accu-
mulative and instantaneous Pressure. By Charles Bonnycastle, Professor of
Mathematics in the Unwersity of Virginia. Read November 15, 1840.

In a paper published by Dr. Hare in the Transactions of the American Phi-
losophical Society, of which paper he was polite enough to send me a copy, is
a description of a singular phenomenon that was observed in the destruction of
an air-vessel, under circumstances which at first appear to contradict the known
laws that regulate the motion and pressure of fluids.

The subject of the paper is “The collapse of a reservoir whilst apparently
subject within to great pressure from a head of water;” and in treating it, Dr.
Hare points out the attendant circumstances, and ingeniously shows how the
vessel may have been momentarily relieved from the pressure of the water
within, so as to make the pressure of the surrounding air efficient in producing
the collapse. He does not, however, push his inquiries to a point essential to
the full explanation. An investigation into the nature and degree of the forces
brought into action leads to results, according, indeed, with the theory of resi-
lience, but presenting, in the laws of instantaneous pressure, and m the effects
of that pressure when produced by an abrupt check given to a fluid in motion,
a branch of the subject in some degree intermediate between statics and dyna-
mics, and which has not yet been fully developed.

At the period when I first deduced the results contained in this paper, very
little attention had been paid to any of the class of phenomena to which they
belong; something further has since been done in England, but I have not seen

VII.—2 D

i14 ON THE POWER OF FLUIDS IN MOTION TO PRODUCE

any investigations that bear directly on the subject in question. My own re-
marks were drawn up immediately after the publication of the memoir above
noticed, but were laid by and neglected until my attention was again drawn
towards them by an instance of the great effect of such pressures that fell un-
der my notice a few months since. I had occasion to trace the laws of sound
propagated through water, and with the view
of readily discharging a pistol at various depths
below the surface, contrived the apparatus in
Fig. 1. I had directed the box to be formed
of cast iron, but the maker, providing a strong
support for the breech of the pistol, and meet-.
ing with delay in the casting, persuaded him-
self that thick tin plate, strengthened with
ribs, would give abundant strength to the re-

maining sides of the box. A covering of sheet

brass, an eighth of an inch thick, was subse-
quently added, and yet such is the nature of the action in question, that farther
security was necessary before this little case, which did not exceed eight inches
by five, could resist the powerful strains that tended to burst it inward when
exposed to the action of an ordinary pistol, exploded at a depth of five or six
feet below water.

This additional instance of the occurrence of those destructive and appa-
rently paradoxical strains that had attracted the attention of the eminent che-
mist above mentioned, induced me to re-examine the paper I formerly showed
to you,* and to make public, with some slight addition, the results it contained.

I had shown, in a former paper, that many problems which appear purely
questions of statics, cannot be resolved without employing the elementary mo-
tions which connect such problems with those of dynamics.t ‘The problem
before us is one of this class, and, when treated practically, is most conveni-
ently arranged as a question of statical pressures.

Practical mechanics and engineers are accustomed to view the forces with
which they have to deal, under the twofold division of the /oads which their
engines or structures bear, and the strains such loads occasion.

* This paper was addressed to Dr. Patterson.
t On the pressures produced by a heavy body when sustained by more than three supports.
Read before the R. Society of London, 1819. An. Philos., April, 1819.

RUPTURE OF THE VESSELS WHICH CONTAIN THEM. 115

The pressures that maintain the equilibrium between the load and strain
may vary incessantly from the operation of those minute vibrations that every
where render absolute rest impossible; nearly all the cases that are practically
regarded as states of rest, or uniform motion, are really examples of periodic
vibrations which escape the senses. Motions so small are often sufficient to
make the pressures pass through all degrees of intensity, and even to become
negative; but the practical mathematician, who only looks to ultimate results,
cannot take notice of this delicate and hidden machinery, and finds it conve-
nient to regard the load as invariable, and to estimate the strain, not by its
mean, but its greatest amount. These remarks will sufficiently explain the
necessity of the distinction which I have made between the pressure and the
mean pressure, or load: and I have only to add one or two farther observations,
in order to render the terms I have employed sufficiently clear and precise.
The first of these regards a species of action that occurs frequently in the
strains we are discussing, or rather, which forms a convenient limit to the
mixed strains that are met with in nature. To understand this action, let us
suppose a fluid of finite mass, as water or mercury, to be contained in a tube
of some very flexible and imponderable material; a sudden tremor propagated
in the fluid would then cause, at the point where the wave passed, a pulsation
of very limited extent, compared with the expansive power of the tube; and
which would have its single advance and single regression regulated by laws
proper to the fluid, and little involving the inconsiderable resistance of the con-
duit. Such an action we shall describe as ‘‘an exterior, or interior, vibration
of immense momentum and infinitely little extent, compared with the motions
and mass of the support.”

A clear idea of this species of force will be necessary to what follows; and
the only further observation for which we shall have occasion has reference,
not to the forces exerted, but to the nature of the structure which sustains them;
and chiefly to the distinction that must be made between elastic supports and
those which unite with this quality a large degree of flexibility. LHvery ma-
terial, it is well known, when wrought into rods or plates sufficiently thin,
loses its tendency to return to a primary, or unloaded position, and must be re-
garded as flexible. Flexibility itself is merely an elasticity, more or less per-
fect, acting according to a single axe; and flexible bodies may be allied to the

116 ON THE POWER OF FLUIDS IN MOTION TO PRODUCE

elastic by regarding them as secured at each end and drawn into an initial po-
sition by the action of an evanescent stretching force.

From which observations it is evident that if we consider the several cases
of perfect and imperfect elasticity in the directions of all the axes, and of
perfectly flexible bodies, drawn into an initial state by the action of an ini-
tial and evanescent force, we shall obtain the limits of the results that can prac-
tically happen.

The several conclusions to which I have arrived for these cases may be
stated as follows :—

1. It is convenient to distinguish between accumulative and instantaneous
loads, or between those which are gradually increased until the deflection due
to the ultimate load is obtained, and those which commence in their full effh-
cacy from the initial position of the support.

2. Within the limits of perfect elasticity, instantaneous pressure produces
twice the effect of that which is accumulative, whether the result be to pro-
duce deflection or fracture.

3. In regard to supports perfectly elastic in one direction and perfectly flexi-
ble in the other, instantaneous action at right angles to the axis of elasticity
produces a deflection which is to that of accumulative action as \/ 4 to 1, whilst
the tendencies of fracture are as 4 to 1. But, should any case occur where the
law of elasticity follows an extremely high power of the deflection, then the
singular result will follow, that the deflections are the same whether the force
be exerted from the initial state or the state of load, but that the tendency to
fracture will be immensely greater in the former case than in the latter.

4. In producing the fracture of natural substances, which all depart from
the law of perfect elasticity as we approach the limit of fracture, the ratio of
the effects of instantaneous and accumulative action will vary with the nature
of the substances, never being less, for elastic bodies, than 2 to 1, nor, for flexi-
ble, than 4 to 1, and more usually approaching 3 or 4 to 1 for the former case,
and 5 or 6 to 1 for the latter.

5. Let a vase or conduit be acted upon by a load which is alone insufficient
to break it; and let this load be partly balanced by a small exterior force. Should
the great interior force suddenly cease, the small exterior action may crush the

vase or conduit inward, its energy in such case being the sum of the interior
and exterior forces.

RUPTURE OF THE VESSELS WHICH CONTAIN THEM. 117

6. Should the interior force be a vibration of the kind already explained, and
should the exterior action be extremely feeble, and act on a very great mass,
this extremely feeble action may crush the vase inward, with a power that
shall exceed, in any degree, the enormous action of the interior and explosive
vibrations. ‘The comparison of the interior and exterior actions is best effected,
in this case, by finding the modulus of elasticity of a material spring that shall
coincide most nearly in effect with the interior tremor. For, putting e and e'
respectively for the modulus of the spring and of the support, and , and ,' for
the deflections resulting from the tremor acting alone, and the reaction as it

does act, we have —_ a or, in other words, the deflection produced by the
le)

reaction, is to the deflection that would be produced by the interior tremor
alone, in the inverse proportion of the square roots ef the moduli of tremor and
support.

7. Combining what is here said with the known laws of fluids moving in
pipes, and whereby they necessarily produce hydraulic shocks, it follows that
any vessel connected with such a train of pipes, and plunged at some little
depth in a considerable mass of water, or other heavy fluid, will occasionally
be subject to a crushing and exterior force vastly greater than the interior strain
due to the constant head of fluid.

To investigate these results, let us commence with the very simple case of a
mass m, urged by two moving forces fand — /', which tend to deflect it from

a point of initial repose. The vis viva in this case will be Sf. § fds — f'dss
where s is the distance through which the mass has moved; and as this vis
viva must be zero when the mass has attained its limit of deflection, we have
for that case

Si fas3 aids: (vy)
Now it is clear that if the forces f and — /' acted only at the position of
load, we should have simply
ye = of ‘3 (2)
and consequently if we express by « and «' the deflections occasioned by an in-
stantaneous and an accumulated load, resulting from the action of f — f' when
commencing at the initial position, and the position of load, we must determine
the first from equation (1), and the second from equation (2).
Vil.—2 E

118 ON THE POWER OF FLUIDS IN MOTION TO PRODUCE
*>

The case that we have first to consider, is when the force — /' arises from
the resistance es of an elastic support, whilst f, as ordinarily happens, is a con-
stant load. ‘The equations (1 and 2) then become

2f o = eo”

foe

whence we deduce the second of the results already mentioned, namely that
6 = Qo’,

When the elasticity is imperfect, we may reason by observing, first, that s
represents the abscissa, and e¢ s the ordinate y, of the curve of elasticity, or the
curve which expresses the relation between the deflection and resistance; and,
secondly, that the integral Sfas is equivalent to the area of this curve. Now
an area corresponding to an abscissa s is equal to s multiphed into the mean
ordinate y'; and when the curve deflects inward from the tangent, and turns
towards the abscissa, as the curve in question does when the elasticity is im-
perfect, it is manifest that the mean ordinate does not stand in the middle of
the total abscissa, but at a point which is nearer to the origin: in other words
> being the total abscissa, and «' that belonging to the mean ordinate, we shall
have in the equation o = ms’, m exceeding 2. But referring to our equations
(1) and (2), we observe them to become in this case

Fray
and

S=Y%

which gives y' = y’, or the mean ordinate of force to the deflection «, equal to
the extreme ordinate of force to the deflection «’.. And we have already seen ©
that in the equation « = m «', m exceeds 2; whence we conclude so much of the
fourth proposition as relates to bodies imperfectly elastic in the direction of the
load.

To demonstrate the third proposition, let a cord of inconsiderable mass, half
length /, and modulus e, be drawn into a horizontal position by the action of
an inconsiderable stretching force. Applying to the centre of this cord a force
that deflects it through a space s, the half length after deflection will be

2

a s pee
Vi? +s”; the extension 73 and the tension in the direction of each branch of

RUPTURE OF THE VESSELS WHICH CONTAIN THEM. 119

SP :
the cord, equal to I T° The resistance opposed to the deflecting force is there-

fas)

3 3
es ' es .
fore z ; or f must be regarded as constant, and ie as equal to Ee assumptions

that reduce the equations (1) and (2) to

é
ae pe

Cacia
a = :

which give o =«' \/4, or the deflection from the initial position to the deflec-
tion of load, as \{/4 to 1.

When the deflection, produced in either way, attains the limit of rupture «’,
we have > =.'=."; and denoting by f the force that would produce this de-
flection when acting from the initial position, and by f the force that would
_ produce the same as a deflection of load, the equation « = «' gives

ah

iy
or f = 4f; or, the force which produces rupture when acting from the position
of load, is to the force which produces fracture when acting from the initial posi-
tion, as 4 to 1; an imperfection in the elasticity increasing this proportion, as
in the former case.

And observing that when the law of elasticity is as the m‘ power of the de-
flection, these equations become

ee
e 'm
fas

we deduce for the case when mm is infinite, the conclusion of the third proposi-
tion in regard to that case.

The application of this theory to the strains occasioned by a column of fluid
moving through a pipe, and subject to checks, and separation into distinct co-
lumns, will be immediately seen. The most powerful of the interior strains of
this class must be due to those blows of the hydraulic ram which occur, both

120 ON THE POWER OF FLUIDS IN MOTION TO PRODUCE

on the first letting on of the water, and on the suddenly closing a stop-cock
when the fluid is in one of those pulses of attenuation which occur in the mo-
tion of fluids through long pipes, obstructed by enclosed air, and rendered irre-
gular by branches.

How very powerful these blows are is well known to the engineer, and we
have now only to show under what circumstances they may be reversed in di-
rection, and vastly increased in intensity.

The inverted direction will occur whenever the pipe, pressed from without
by the atmosphere, and any large mass of fluid, as the water of a well or pit
through which it may pass, is left unsupported within by the sudden separa-
tion and contraction of the fluid which follows an hydraulic blow. Such in-
version will always occasion a strain from without, more powerful than the in-
ternal strain that produced it, but the severest strains of this kind will occur
when the original force is such as we have termed an interior vibration of im-
mense momentum and infinitely hitle extent, compared with the motions and
mass of the support.

It is true that such a case is never practically attained, and that it far more
usually happens that the internal strain has an extent of motion approaching
to, or equalling that of the support; in which case the reversed pressure be-
comes the sum of the interior and exterior forces; but as this forms one limit
of the practical action, so may the explosive forces that we have described be
said to form the other; and I shall therefore consider it proper to give their
theory as connected with the subject under discussion. ‘The very instance,
indeed, which Dr. Hare describes, and that which fell under my own observa-
tion, approach this class, as will be evident in the former case, from considering
that a pipe passing through a large metal reservoir, or chamber, might have
the lateral pulses propagated in the water it conveyed, small with regard to the
expansion which the chamber was capable of enduring; and this to the greater
extent, as we speak not of the total lateral motion of the pulse, but of that
lateral expansion which it would undergo during its extremely rapid transit
through the chamber.

Such forces would nearly resemble those internal explosions that we assume ;
and as the sides of the reservoir in the case alluded to were of copper, and of
no great thickness, they will approach the remaining conditions of the problem,
partaking of the nature both of flexible and of elastic bodies, and having little

RUPTURE OF THE VESSELS WHICH CONTAIN THEM. 121

mass compared with the column of fluid within the pipe, or the body of fluid
without.

The instance of explosive forces on which I shall found their theory will be
readily understood. Conceive an elastic lamina @, of inconsiderable mass,
and small modulus e’ to be placed between two
masses m and m', both large compared to a, but of
which m’' infinitely exceeds m. Let m be attached
to a spring 0 that is retained at a distance s’ from the
point of repose, very inconsiderable with regard to
the deflections of a, but which, from the amount of
the modulus e of this second elastic body, will occa-
sion, when the retaining power is removed, an immense pressure on m, a, and

/

m'. Further, conceive m’ subject to a small constant force that urges it in
a contrary direction to this pressure.

The magnitude of e's and m’ will allow us to consider these as the only ele-
ments concerned in the generation of the first motions, and thus when @ has
attained the position of repose, or that where it has no elastic power, the vis
viva generated will be e «°; and as the motion of the mass m’, attached to 3, is
now retarded, m’' and m will separate; and the latter, after being urged to a
distance which, on account of the minuteness of the resisting force, is consi-
derable, will return to impinge on @, with the vis viva e .*; and if 6 has been
removed in the interval, this force must be destroyed by the sole resistance of a.
But the vis viva generated by @ in traversing a distance .’ is equal to e' «’; from
which it follows that when the returning strain occasioned by m’ has been
wholly destroyed, we have

or

Shey a e
6 e’

as asserted in the sixth proposition. 'The use of the mass m’ in this investiga-

tion will be readily seen by observing that it makes the velocity of the motion,

when é acts against a alone, quite independent of the mass of the latter; so

that a will stop when 6 has expanded through the extent of a vibration, and

the deflection thus attained will be «; or, in other words, the case assumed is

that of a heavy and powerful spring, acting against a light and weak one.
Vil.—2 F

122 ON THE POWER OF FLUIDS IN MOTION TO PRODUCE

I shall conclude these remarks with illustrations derived from two obvious
and simple experiments.

Thus an examination of the relative power which different filaments possess
in resisting instantaneous and accumulative loads may be conducted as fol-
lows :—

Suspend from a thread (m) of the substance examined, a weight (a) that is
insufficient to cause rupture: let a weight (a’) exceedingly nearly equal to
Fg. 3. (a) support the latter through the medium afforded by the fine
thread (7) that passes over the very delicate pulley (0). In this
state of things it is evident that (7) will merely sustain such

tension as suffices to draw it into a rectilinear position; or, in

om Other words, to bring it into the state where elasticity begins to

be exerted. Now, by the rapid lateral motion of some sharp

edge, as that of a razor, divide (m); and thus transfer, instanta-

a z neously, the whole tension of (a) upon the thread (m). ‘The

load, in this case, is that which we have termed instantaneous, and, in conse-

quence, rupture will take place under the action of a weight considerably less

than if the pressure had been made accumulative, as, by gradually raising (a’)

until (7) had obtained the deflection of load. In the instance of a thread of

fine cotton, the proportion of the weights that caused rupture in the two cases
was as 1 to 3. |

Experiments on the restricted vibrations which

we termed explosive, and which last occupied our

attention, may be conducted by means of the

very case that we chose for investigating the

theory of such forces. A massive body (m’), sus-

pended by a thread of considerable length, and

Fig,4, alowed to rest in its state of equilibrium against

the elastic rod that is to be broken, will supply

both the mass (m’) of the theory, and the weak

and nearly constant force that urged it; whilst

the smaller mass (7), set into motion by suddenly

cutting the cord (c), will continue to press against

(z) until the spring (4) has nearly attained its

= point of repose, when, no longer supported by

RUPTURE OF THE VESSELS WHICH CONTAIN THEM. 123

friction, the weight of (m) will detach it from (a), and bring (4) into such a
position as to prevent its impeding the reaction by which (a) is broken.

The sides of the reservoir, in the case which led to this investigation, we
have assimilated to (a); the brief but powerful hydraulic concussions of the in-
ternal fluid, to the action of the spring (4), and the effect of the external water
in which we suppose the reservoir plunged, to that of the mass (mm); and I
need merely add, that were the cases perfectly parallel, our formula proves
that the tendency to rupture by the reaction may amount to a very large mul-
tiple of that resulting from the mere explosive strain when the exterior pres-

sure is removed.

a vas sfios ,

ARTICLE XII.

On the Storm which was experienced throughout the United States about the 20th
of December, 1836. By Elias Loomis, Professor of Mathematics and Natural
Philosophy in Western Reserve College. Read March 20, 1840.

Bete well convinced that meteorology is to be promoted, not so much by
taking the mean of long-continued observations, as by studying the phenomena
of particular storms developed over a widely extended country, I resolved to
select some single storm of strongly marked characteristics, and trace its pro-
gress as extensively and minutely as possible. For this investigation I made
choice of the storm which occurred in the United States about the 20th of
December, 1836; not only because it seems well suited to my purpose, but
because I found ready furnished for my use a considerable number of most
valuable observations. In the eastern states this storm occurred within the
period recommended by Sir John Herschel for hourly meteorological observa-
tions, and all the phenomena of the storm were most carefully and minutely
recorded at eight different stations, namely, at Baltimore, New York, Albany,
Flushing, New Haven and Gardiner, in the United States; as, also, at Mon-
treal and Quebec, in Lower Canada. These observations, with the exception
of those at Baltimore, are published in the Report of the New York University
Register for 1837. I addressed a letter to each individual who, so far as I could
ascertain, kept a meteorological register, requesting an extract from the same
for the period in question. The result is that I have obtained barometric ob-
servations from twenty-seven different stations within the United States and

VII—2 G

126 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

the neighbouring British possessions. The situation of these stations, and the
authority upon which the observations rest, are shown in the following table:

SraTion. LatitTupDeE. LonGiTuDE. AUTHORITY.
Natches,Miss..> 2 3). © 3 Slo 342 N-/ 910 24” Wi.) Henry, Mooleys
Pensacola, Florida, . . . . . |30 28 a7 We William W. Valk, M.D.
Lexington, Kentucky, . . . . |38 6 84 18 Robert Peter, M. D.
somal OW,o o o 6 0 5 39 53 83 48 M. G. Williams.
Meme, Outs, 6 6 o oo 6 39 25 81 36 S. P. Hildreth.
Twinsburgh, Ohio, << . . . . (41 20 81 26 Rev. Samuel Bissel.
Savannah, Georgia, . ... . 32s oh iar A W.H. Williams.
Lbotinin Terry INO, 6 6 a 6 oO 24 48 80 55 Charles Howe.
Rochester, New York, ... . 43 8 "ize — fayi James W. Russell.
Wein Cio 6 oo 6 a. |as) 58) de 2 J. M. Foltz.
Sunbury, Pennsylvania,. . . . |40 53 76 50 Hugh Bellas.
Baltimore, Maryland, . . . . {39 17 76 36 Maryland Academy.
Syracuse, New York, .... |43 1 76 16 V. W. Smith.
Philadelphia, ew ne Gut oa, zh 75 11 Franklin Journal.
New York City, . . Speirs 40 43 Amen William C. Redfield.
Flushing, New Vorks Bete: 40 45 Ze. BY Prof. C. Gill.
Albany, ING SMORRS og °5 6 6 0 42 39 73 #45 Albany Institute.
Montreal, Lower Canada, . . . |45 81 773 BS John S. M‘Cord.
New Haven, Connecticut, . . . 41 18 72 +58 Edward C. Herrick.
Hanover, New Hampshire,. . . |43 41 Te 2 Prof. Ira Young.
Quebec, Lower Canada,. . . . 46 49 71 16 J. Watt.

Boston, Massachusetts, -. . . . |42 21 71 #4 Dr. Hale.
New Bedford, Massachusetts, . . 41 38 70 56 Joseph Congdon.
6c 66 1 66 66 66 Mr. Rodman.
Gardimer, Maine, . .... . 44 10 69 50 R. H. Gardiner.
Halifax, Nova Scotia, ... . 44 39 63 36 John Morrow, U.S. Consul.
Bermuda, . Showers 32 34 63 28 Col. A. Emmett.
St. Johns, Newfoundland, a to om | ele 8M! 52 38 Joseph Templeman.

I have been more successful in obtaining meteorological registers which did
not comprise observations of the barometer. ‘Through the politeness of Hon.
Elisha Whittlesey, late Representative in Congress, I have obtained a copy of
the observations made at the different military stations of the United States;
and through Mr. M. H. Webster, of Albany, N.Y., I have obtained a copy of
the observations made at the several academies in the State of New York. To
Messrs. 8S. C. Walker, KE. C. Herrick, and S. F. Plimpton, I am under parti-
cular obligations for their assistance in obtaining for me meteorological jour-
nals.

The following table shows the names and situations of the military posts
from which observations have been received.

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 127

Posts. LaTITUDE. LonecitTupe.
Fort Gibson, Arkansas, é 3 ‘ ‘ : ‘: 3 - (35° 47? N.195° 19’ W.
Fort Leavenworth, Missouri, . 2 ° 6 < : ; 39 28 95 14
Fort Towson, Arkansas, é ‘ ‘ é - : : > les) BXT 95 4
Fort Jesup, Louisiana, ‘ , 3 , i A : 31 35 93 42
Fort Snelling, lowa, . F 4 : : ; é : > \44° 53 Oe) 1p)
Fort Des Moines, lowa, . 4 c 4 : A 5 ‘i 40 21 91 38
Fort Crawford, Wisconsin, . : : 3 , i 5 es) = 2! Saad,
Jefferson Barracks, Missouri, . : 5 5 : 5 c 38 32 90 25
St. Louis, Missouri, 5 5 é b 6 : ‘ F Ss nlSBens?, 90 21
Fort Winnebago, Wisconsin, . : 6 : : : : aS) Se 88 53
Fort Howard, Wisconsin, z ‘ 3 3 é 5 A . |44 46 87 13
Fort Mitchell, Alabama, . = c ‘ ; ‘ : 5 32 20 85 16
Fort Mackinac, Michigan, . ‘ : : : . : . |45 46 84 40
Fort Brady, Michigan, . 5 : 3 : : : . 46 29 84 18
Dearbornville Arsenal, Michigan, . fs < : ‘ : 5 49 of Soiree
Fort Gratiot, Michigan, . é . 5 6 ; 42 54 82 25
Picolata, Florida, . . é . ; , 2 5 . 29199 81 56
Fort Marion, Florida, 5 ; . : A : 5 ‘ 29 48 81 35
Alleghany Arsenal, Pennsylvania, . ° : : ‘ - |40 28 SOma
Fort M‘Henry, Maryland, . : : 6 : * 39 18 76 35
Fort Monroe, Virginia, < 6 : : : ° 5 - {386 50 76 22
Fort Columbus, New York, 6 ; : A : ‘ : 40 41 A eal
Fort Wood, New York, 3 5 F z : - 5 20 Wet Al
West Point, New York, . 5 5 * 0 : ¢ 4] 25 74 O
Watertown Arsenal, Massachusetts, j : si x ‘ 5) lies 8} GALS wely
Fort Independence, Massachusetts, . E F é E 42 16 Alb AD)
Fort Constitution, New Hampshire, : f : : ye | ABE: 70 45
Hancock Barracks, Maine, : : ; 5 3 ‘ i 46 8 67 51

The following table shows the situation of the academies in New York from
which observations have been obtained.

Latirupe. | Lonerrupe. LaTitTuDeE. LoneirupDe.
Bomiret, 025. 00) 2429925" NG79° 24° Wel) Potsdam, =... |442) 409 Ni|75o OW:
Lewiston, . . . |43 9 79 10 Mel, A ee 42 16 74 58
Woncords eee 42 ol 78 50 ledges @ 6) 56 ZB & 74 55
Rochester,. . . |43 8 77°~«#O51 Cherry Valley, . 42 48 74 47
Henunetia eee 4o0 880 77 =39 Poughkeepsie, . |41 41 74 45
Palmyta;y sso) 4 5 ieelG Canajoharie, . . |42 53 74 35
Canandaigua,. . |42 50 dad Johnstown, . . 43 O 74 23
Wihacasrcmcie soe ieee, 76 30 Goshen, .. . 41 20 74 #11
Auburn) eis 3 N42 2 1761/28 Newburgh, . . 41 30 4s ee
Homer, woe 142 38 76 11 Kingston, . . . 41 55 74 2
Ellisburgh, . . |43 45 76 10 Montgomery,. . |41 32 74 #0
Onondaga,. . . |42 59 76 6 Bl atouislte ten) 44 Onis ai 73 58
Pompey, > =) = «(42,56 76 «5 Redhook, . . . |42 2 73 56
@asinovia,. . . |42 55 vias) Al Ueienee, 5g 6 40 41 73 56
Genornem, . . |44 25 75 35 Schenectady, . . 42 48 73 55
Hamilton,. . . |42 49 7) 34 Mount Pleasant, . |41 9 73 49/
Oxford, ... . « |427 28 75 32 Lansinburgh, . . |42 49 73 43
Bridgewater, . . |42 55 75 #17 Kinderhook, . . |42 22 73° 43
Whitestown, . . |43 7 75 14 Cambridge, . . 4301 73 23
Witicaaerameens «(4307 6 75 13 Granville, . . . 42 23 Wer iG
lglerinmgk, 6 6 6 42) Biz We 4! East Hampton, . 41 0 70 19

128 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

The following are the additional stations from which meteorological registers
have been received.

LartitupeE. LoneituDeE. AurTHorirty.
Baton Rouge, . . . . . . ~ | 380° 28’ N./|91° 28’ W.| Surgeon of Penitentiary.
Auoustamlllinorsse ye ee 4 ON alo, 91 6 Samuel B. Mead, M. D.
Si VOUS eNLISsOUn mre) ON S77 90 21 George Engelmann, M. D.
St. Augustine, Florida, . . . . {29 48 81 35 Surgeon of Military Hospital.
Charleston, South Carolina, . . | 32 46 79 57 Prof. C. U. Shepard.

I have also collected a great variety of observations from stations beyond the
probable limits of the storm, to which reference will be made in the sequel. I
think it unnecessary to transcribe all the above mentioned observations at large,
because they would occupy a great space, and the substance of them will pre-
sently be presented in a condensed form.

In discussing these observations, four distinct subjects of inquiry present
themselves.

I. A remarkable oscillation of the barometer.

II. A sudden depression of the thermometer.

IIt. Rain—amount—with time of beginning and end.

IV. Wind—its duration and velocity.

I. The oscillation of the barometer.

A bare inspection of the meteorological registers is sufficient to show that,
during the period in question there was every where throughout the United
States a sudden depression of the barometer, immediately succeeded by an
equally sudden rise; that the barometric minimum occurred first in the western
states, and later in the eastern, passing like a wave over the entire country,
from west to east. In order to present this fact in the most striking light, I have
projected on Plate I., Fig. 1, curves representing this oscillation of the barometer
at each station. The abscissas represent the times of observation, and the ordi-
nates the barometric heights on a scale reduced one-third; that is, a difference
of two-thirds of an inch in the ordinates of a curve is intended to show an
absolute oscillation of the barometer to the amount of an inch. It will be
observed that at most of the stations there is a striking resemblance in the
curve described, so that we need not hesitate to call it the same mave;
just as an elevation or depression of the surface of the ocean which arriyes

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 129

successively at distant stations, we call one wave, understanding, of course,
that the same wave, at successive instants, may be formed by entirely
different particles of water. ‘The same atmospheric wave, then, passed over
the continent from west to east, from the valley of the Mississippi to the
Bermudas and Newfoundland. We wish now to be able to assign the
rate of progress of this wave, and in order to institute the comparison, we
must fix upon some particular phase of the wave. We might make the com-
parison for the times of either the barometric maximum or minimum. The
latter, however, is much the best suited to our purpose, as the barometer
remained much longer near the high than the low extreme. ‘There is a diff-
culty, however, in ascertaining the precise instant of even the barometric mini-
mum. When observations are taken but two or three times a day, it is highly
improbable that the minimum should occur at the precise instant of either ob-
servation. There may, therefore, be an uncertainty in the time to the amount
of twelve hours, or more. Fortunately, however, this uncertainty is, in a mea-
sure, obviated in the present instance. The hourly observations made at Bal-
timore, Montreal, Albany, Flushing, New Haven and Gardiner, exhibit the
precise form of the barometric curve described, and the instant of greatest de-
pression. Moreover, as will appear in the sequel, this minimum was contem-
poraneous with a remarkable change of wind, and the time of this change was
noted at several stations; as, for example, at Springfield, Syracuse, Philadel-
phia, New York, and Hanover. At nearly half of the stations, then, the time
of minimum 1s certainly known; and the form of the curve at these stations
will guide us in completing the curve at the remaining stations. This conjec-
tural completion of the curves is represented on the chart by dotted lines. We
are then enabled to trace the progress of this wave with very considerable pre-
cision. J accordingly drew upon a map of the United States lines connecting
all those places where the barometer attained its minimum at the same instant.
The result is shown on the accompanying chart, which exhibits the lines of
greatest depression for every six hours from the morning of December 20th to
the noon of the 23d. The velocity of the wave appears not to have been uni-
form. ‘Thus, on the southern border of the United States its velocity varied
from seventeen to twenty-nine statute miles per hour; and on the northern bor-
ders from seventeen to thirty-seven miles per hour. No allowance is here
Vil.—2 H

130 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

made for difference of longitude, which would increase this velocity by about
one twenty-fifth part. The form of these curves for the north-west part of the
United States rests mainly upon the thermometric observations to be described
presently. The front of this wave appears, in many places, decidedly convex,
to an amount much beyond the possible errors of observation.

Having thus discovered the form and velocity of the wave, let us attend to
the amount of the depression of the barometer. The following table exhibits
the difference between the barometric minimum and the subsequent maxi-
mum, the observations being arranged in the order of latitude.

LatTITUDE. Bar. Rance. LatTitTupDeE. Bar. Ranax.

Indian Key, . . | 24° 48’ N. -26 nich. |{Twinsburgh, . . | 41 18 68 nich
Pensacolass 27. 30 28 .46 New Haven, . . |41 18 .98
INGUOINES; "6 9 6 31 34 79 New Bedford, . | 41 38 1.02
Savannah, . . ;, |/32 5 -65 Do. 63 46 97
Bermuda, . 82 34 41 IBostonsen ween P42 .92
Lexington, 38 6 .96 Albany, 42 39 1.173
Washington, . 38 53 -98 Syracuse, . 43 1 95
Baltimore, . 39 17 1.02 Rochester, 43 8 1.03
Marietta, 39 25 .98 Hanover, 43 41 1.14
Springfield, . 39 53 1.00 Gardiner, . 44 10 1.00
Philadelphia, . 39 57 97 Halifax, 44 39 52
New York, . 40 43 97 Montreal, . 45 31 1.266
Flushing, . 40 45 1.042 Quebec, - |46 49 1.57
Sunbury, 40 53 1.00 St. Johns,. . . | 47 34 85

It will be observed that the range of the barometer increases generally with
the latitude. A more particular consideration of the subject, however, is de-
ferred for the present. I come, therefore, to consider,

II. The movement of the thermometer.

The movement of the thermometer during the period in question was quite
as remarkable as that of the barometer, and generally in the opposite direction.
Thus, while the barometer was falling under the influence of the storm, the
thermometer was every where rising; and as the barometer rose the thermo-
meter fell with extraordinary rapidity.
here all the observations which have been collected. The following, being
about half the whole number, are selected as being, from their distribution, a

It is not thought necessary to insert

fair representative of the whole.

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 131

oe eeeesesSsSsSSSSeeFeEeeeeEeEeeeees

DeEcEmeBER 197TH. Decremper 207TH. DecemBer 2lsr. DeEcEemBER 22p.
Morn. Noon. Even. Morn. Noon. Even. Morn. Noon. Even, Morn. Noon. Even.
Fort Leavenworth, . BPE BO BBP. Vas Be se GL Ge 10° Scinzoe 322 32°
Fort Gibson,. . . ) AAR OMS G 12 10 10 22 20 26 42 46
Fort Snelling, . . 22 28 28 — 6 — 5\/—22 — 4 — 8\— 6 8 8
Fort Towson, . . 42 48 50 20 16 10 30 25 23 45 44
Fort Jesup, BP mage dine 43 60 58 50 34 Ne 36 28 21 48 41
Fort Crawford, . . 22° 309735 1 — 4|—16 — 8 — 6|/— 4 15 22
PRUOISt Ay ere os 23 40 39 0 — 3\—12 — 1 — 4 7 29 28
St. Louis, Spey | 33 41 40 14 6\— 1 13 10 13 33 31
INateltes:, a6 los Sis} {5i7/ 55 21 32 25 40
Baton Rouge, . . 30 53 50 60 55 21 36 30
Fort Winnebago, . L725)" 30 17 — 4\—17 —11 —I16\/— 8 13 18
Fort Howard, . . 21 29 28 38 38 4 — 5 — 8|— 6 17 20
Pensacola, .. . 43 49 54 65 62 31 37 29 22 33 35
Fort Mitchell, . . 23 56 58 69 50 30 34 38 18 29 40
Mexingion; si) .08:- 21 46 38 46 50 19 16 10 18 28 21
Springfield, . . . 10 40 34 43 47 6 11 7 1 18 17
Fort Brady, Slaps aD EW? 2a 25 36 36 8 10 0 |— 10 12 10
Fort Machinac, . . Pl 8} ONS 35 39 4 8 2\— 2 10 10
Dearbornville Arsenal, 14 30 32 38 41j— 1 4 — 4\|— 9 13 13
RortiGratione. 9... 15. 31 33 38 43 4 Uh 1\j— 1 14 15
Twinsburgh,. . . 8 38 48 12 10 0 30
IMfaniettay, ie sie vw Gel Odr/ 52 50 16 16 lL 6 22 14
Alleghany Arsenal, . 2 29 20 38 21 18 19 10 3 16 10
Poniret; 2°. 3 40 41 18 11 10 10 14 13
Rochester, . . . 30 38 20 10 9 10
Savannah, .. . 56 64 64 60 50 48 38 42 40
Sunbury, . ys 16 28 32 40 18 6 18
Syracuse, One Oe 25 41 45 36 23 10 7 20 9
St. Augustine, . . 60 68 68 64 56 48 34 50 50
Charleston, . 51 51 64 54 48 34 26 43 33
Washington, . 33 39 37 30 13 30
Potsdam, . : 36 26 10 4 12 8
“Montreal,. . . . 26 35 44. 15 9 9
Philadelphia, . . 23 36 54 32 11 18
Allbaniysy 2 laa age 49 29 15 11 20 13
DeEcEemMBER 20TH, DEcEMBER Qlsr. DrcremBer 22p. DrecEemBeER 23D.
Morn. Noon. Even. Morn. Neon. Noon. Even.| Morn. Noon. Even
Fort Monroe, . . 42 53 53 63 56 24° 220
News Works se) os. : 26 35 45 51 40 20 19
@ebec; . 32) ees Dr} Wii 33 29 3
New Haven,. . . 53 43 20 16
Efanover; . . « Te 29 od 42 47 14 3 ge 16° 16°
Indian Key, . . . 74 76 74 74 76 66 68 68 “aali 69
New Bedford, . . 28 45 42 46 50 21 14 11 25 30
Boston. cee oe 25 38 44 48 52 19 15 12 ae 31
Gardiner.) eee eat 40 47 18 10 3
Hancock Barracks, . — ji 49. Be 36 41 10 6
Elalitaxs ean os 18 30 30 38 40 30 26 4 10 12
Bermuda,, . . . |min. 58° max. 62.5.| Min. 58° Max. 63.5 | Min. 61.5 Max. 66 | Min. 53 Max. 61

St. Johns, . -. . |min.16 max. 29 Min. 14 Max. 25 Min. 26 Max. 33 | Min. 2 Max. 26

132 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

The fall of the thermometer is very sensible in all of the observations, and
the instant of change I have indicated by a dark line drawn across the table.
The observations at the military posts were made at 7, A. M.; 2 and 9, P. M.;
and the others were generally made about the same hours. It is not easy to
compare, with entire precision, the rate or amount of the depression of the
thermometer at the several stations, because the change occurring at different
hours is variously affected by the diurnal change of temperature. A correction
needs to be applied for this inequality before the observations are comparable,
and this correction it is difficult to apply with entire satisfaction. It requires,
however, but a hasty inspection of the table to perceive that the depression of
the thermometer was greater in the northern than the southern states, and
greater in the western than the eastern; that is, the fall was most remarkable
of all in the north-western states. ‘Thus, for example, at Fort Crawford, from
the morning of the 20th to that of the 21st, at the same hour, the thermometer
fell 50°; at Augusta the same, and at Fort Winnebago 49°. At Augusta, on
the 20th, the thermometer fell 38° from sunrise to 2, P. M., that is, against the
diurnal variation, which, according to observations made at the same place for
the entire month, amounts to ten degrees; making the real depression of the
thermometer forty-eight degrees in six and a half hours, the most remarkable
fluctuation I recollect ever to have heard of; and this, too, in a latitude south
of Naples.

The commencement of this depression coincided sensibly with the minimum
of the barometer. This is very satisfactorily shown by the hourly observations.
In a few instances the thermometer fell a degree or two before the barometric
minimum; but in all cases the fall of the thermometer became very rapid after
the barometer began to rise. This appears to be a well established feature of
the storm, and I have availed myself of it in tracing the progress of the storm
in regions where barometric observations could not be obtained. This was par-
ticularly true of the north-west part of the United States, and I have projected
on Plate I., Fig. 2, the observations made in this region in the same manner as
the curves on Plate I., Fig. 1, were constructed. The observations were first cor-
rected for the diurnal inequality. The curves exhibit to some extent the effect
of local causes; although, on the whole, the resemblance is quite striking, and
probably would have been still more so if the observations had been made at
shorter intervals.

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 133

In order to determine the dependence of the temperature upon latitude and
longitude, I classified the observations as below, placing the most western ob-
servations on the left and the eastern on the right, and arranging each in the
order of latitude. ‘The table shows the greatest heat observed during the storm,
and the greatest cold immediately succeeding it.

Latitupre. |Max.| Min. Latitupe. |Max.| Min.

Pensacola, . . . |30° 28’ N.| 65°] 22°] Indian Key, . . . | 24° 48’ N.|76°| 62°
Baton Rouge, . . | 30 28 60 21 || St. Augustine, . . | 29 48 68 34
Natchessie 95 fo sh 34 59 2 | SEMEMTEING 6 9) 6 1) BB & 64 38
Fort Jesup; 3 . +. | 3! 985 64 UZ a iS CUIMIGAs eset iy paler) ee 66 53
Fort Mitchell, . . 32 20 69 18 |i Charleston, . . . | 382 46 64 26
Fort Towson, . . 33 36 50 10 |i Fort Monroe, . . | 386 50 56 22
ForuGabson, 9 6) oo) 040 50 10 |} Washington,. . . | 38 53 39 3
Lexmpion,. 5.7: 58 6 50 10 |} Philadelphia, . . | 39 57 54 11
Sispoulsemesm re suelo S! maid, 41 |— | |}! New York, . . .|40 43 51 17
Marietta, . vite 39 25 52 Giisunburyye ee || tOlnos 40 6
Fort Leavenworth, . | 39 28 37 |— 7 || New Haven,. . ./|41 18 53 15
Springfield, . . . | 39 53 47 1 |} New Bedford, . . {41 38 50 15
Augusta, a) | 400e 1S 40 |—12|| Boston, . .. . |42 16 52 16
Alleghany Arsenal, . 40 28 38 B | AOS 6 oo 6 A Se) 49 11
Twinsburgh, . . |41 18 48 Oil ymeenses se a isy el 45 7
Dearbornville Arsenal, | 42 24 41 |— 9 |} Rochester, . . .|43 8 38 9
Romiretiws.. . < 42 25 4] JOM Manovier.s ny sun neni 4a 47 3
Fort Crawford, . . |43 4 35 |—16 || Gardiner,. . . . |44 10 47 3
Fort Gratiot, sa ee bel als} | iL i lleibiien, 5) 5 5 4 | 44! Bie) 40 4
Fort Winnebago, . | 43 32 32 |—17 || Potsdam, . . . . |44 40 36 4
Fort Howard, . . | 44 46 38 |— 8 |} Montreal, . . . 145 31 44 9
Fort Snelling, . . 44 53 28 |—22 || Hancock Barracks,. | 46 8 41 6
Fort Machinac,. . 45 46 39) |—) 2) \;@uebecsy 2 2s) 46 149 88) = 2B

Sis dOoms, oo o o |e Be 33 2

Horieoradyee. - 2. 46 29 36 |—10

The average of the maxima at the eastern stations is about three and a halt
degrees greater than at the western; and the average of the minima fourteen
degrees greater. It is remarkable that, with the exception of Quebec, the only
stations where the thermometer fell below zero were in the north-west quarter
of the United States, and would be cut off by a line joining Detroit and St.
Louis.

Ill. Rain—amount, &c.

The following table shows the amount of rain which fell at the different sta-
tions, with the time of commencement and termination, so far as the same
could be collected from the registers.

ViI—2 I

134

ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

Stations.

Fort Leavenworth,
Fort Gibson,

Fort Snelling,

Fort Towson,

Fort Jesup, . .
Fort Crawford, .
Fort Des Moines, .

Augusta, .

Jefferson Barracks,
St. Louis,

Do., (another register) }

Natches,

Baton Rouge,
Fort Winnebago, .
New Orleans,

Fort Howard, . . |

Mobile,
Pensacola,
Fort Mitchell,
Lexington,
Springfield, .

Cincinnati, . . . }

Fort Brady, . - - 7

Fort Machinac, :
Dearbornville Arsenal,
Fort Gratiot,
Twinsburgh,

Marietta, . :
Alleghany Arsenal, .
ROME a ope Sc
Lewiston, re

Greendale, Pa.,

Batavia, N.Y., .
Rochester,

Picolata, .
Henrietta,
Ithaca,

Savannah, 9 = 7.
Sea, near Savannah,

Sunbury,. - - .- 3

Syracuse,
Homer,
Ellisburgh,
Onondaga,
Casenovia,
Hamilton,

Oxfords ees se .}

Bridgewater,
Whitestown,

Wticaye.. e:. eats. ‘
Fort Marion,
St. Augustine, .

Charleston, .
Washington,

20th, A. M. showers, thun- 2 |
der and rain. }
20th all day.
-20 inch snow on the 19th;
| 20th, 2 P. M_ heavy rain.
Snow on 19th; rain and
snow night of 20th. } |
| Rain on 20th.
| 20th, 8 A. M. or earlier; | 20th, 6 P. M., or later.
| 20th, rain during night. |

-70 inch snow on the 20th.

.15 snow on 19th;

| .02 snow on 19th;

Snow and rain on 20th.

20th, rain during the day.

20th, rain;

20th, morning cloudy; day
rainy; evening rainy.

Rain morning of 21st.

20th, rain all day; snow of

.95 snow on 20th, and hea-
vy rain at night.
| .30 rain and snow 20th.

2Ist, snow.

day of 21st, and A. M. of
22d.
20th, P. M. rain.

, 20th, 8P.M. ae oe A.M.; snow till 10 2. 14

20th, 95 P. M. turned to snow;| Ceased YIst, 5 P. M.
20th, 5 P.M. 20th, 10 or 11 P.M. 6
Bae ee Tain through the } 21st, rain A. M. |
| 21st, A. M. rain.
| 20th, rain at night.
20th, heavy rain all night. |
Rain on 2ist.
All night of 20th; rain and |
snow morning of 21st. |
Latter part of night of 20th; | Slight snow 10 A. M. of 2lst.
2st, rain and snow.
20th, P. M., snow;
2ist, A. M., snow.
21st, A.M. rain; P. M. snow.
| 20th, P. M., snow. 2ist, all day, rain.
21st, A. M., rain and snow;
P. M., snow. }
Rain morning of 21st.
2ist, P. M., snow.
2ist, rain and snow in the
morning. }
Rain not mentioned.
2ist,4 A.M.
20th, drizzling.
| Rain morning of 2ist.

21st, all day, snow.

Qist, 10 A.M. iG

Duration.

Rain Becan. | Rain CEAsED.
|
Snow morning of 20th. |
| Snow morning of 20th.
.03 inch snow on the 19th; | .1 inch snow on the 20th.
Rain all day of 19th. | Light snow morning of 20th.
Rain morning of 20th.
Snow on the 20th.
Snow on the 20th. |
Rain in torrents 10 A. M. 2?) Nooncommenced snowing;
of 20th; iH jadied Pols BOML Ca Hl Girours:
19th, snow and rain; | 20th, rain.
19th, 3 P. M. to 20th 11 A.M.; Light snow and hail, P.M. |24 “
19th, P. M.; 20th 10 MS log «
hail and snow till 3 P.M. §)

at least 10 hours.

| 20th, 7 A.M. | 20th, 9 P. M. 14 hours.

| 20th, 9 A.M. (20th.8P.M.; at11 P.M.snow.|14 “
20th. 11 A.M Hee 9 P. M., followed by 2 «

| z rin | snow.

AMOUNT.

.06 inch.
2.10

Bis
1.10

-90
2.00

38

1.10

1.52
above J.00

1.10
if
-70

1.28

48

89

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 135
SraTions. Rain Becan. Rain Ceasep. Durarion. AMOUNT
Night of 20th 1.50; morn- .
Fort M‘Henry, . } ing of 2ist .20. } POEL
Baltimore, . | Night of 20th; 21st, 9 A.M. 98
c 2ist, A. M., snow and rain;
Hartwick, : } P.M., snow. }
Potsdam, . . | 21st, A. M., snow.
Rain 2ist, A. M., to noon;
Montreal, } 123 hail; snow to 3 P. M. } | 9 hours.
Delhi, . . | 2Ist, all day, rain and snow. 1.20
Fairfield, . : se lists AM rain; P. Mi snow.
2Ist, A. M., rain and snow;
Cherry Valley, . : } PM, aaa 1.53
Philadelphia, . | 20th, P. M.; 21st,11 A. M. 63
Ceased raining 2ist at 11,
Albany, - 7 | 20th, 10 P. M.; A.M.; hail and snow wf UG 1.235
Ua ee ye
Poughkeepsie, - . . | 21st, rain all day, AG
Canajoharie, - | 2st, A. M., snow and rain; | P. M., rain.
20th, P.M., rain; 21st, A.
Johnstown, . c M., rain and snow; P. M. 1.03
snow.
Goshen, . . | 2ist, sap all day. jyite'a 45
20th, P.M., rain; 21st, A. >
Newburgh, M., rain; P. M., snow. ce
Kingston, . | 2ist, A. M., rain. 85
Montgomery, . | 21st, rain all day. 1.04
2ist,4A.M., rain; drizzling
Flatbush, . 2 rain late in the evening >| 21st, noon. Si .30
of the 20th.
Redhook, . . |2Ist, all day rain and snow. 50
Jamaica, . 2ist,4 A.M. 2ist, 1 P.M. gy Ge 32
Schenectady, 2ist, A. M., rain. 45
Mount Pleasant, 2ist, A. M., rain.
Lansinburgh, 2ist, A.M., rain; P. M., snow. By
Kinderhook, 2ist, rain and snow all day. 1.11
Cambridge, . 2Ist, rain A. M.; snow P. M.
Granville, 2Ist, rain A. M.; snow P. M.
Fort Monroe, 20th, P. M. 70
West Point, . 20th, P. M. 21st, noon. 3.40
New York, 20th, 10 P. M.; 21st, noon. pp) As
Fort Columbus, 20th, night; 2ist, morning. 10
Fort Wood, . Rain on the 21st. 1.00
Flushing, . 21st, 45 A. M.; Qist, 121 P.M. ig « ‘34
Quebec, 21st, 6 A. M.; noon sleet; Snow till midnight. ils}.
New Haven, 21st, morning; 21st,3P.M.;7to8P.M.snow.|14 <
Hanover, . 21st, 2 A.M; 2ist,1 P.M. Tl: “6 1.04
Indian Key, . , none.
East Hampton, . 21st, A. M., rain.
New Bedford, 21st, all day to evening. 94
DGneeen a ee | COU evenings 21st, P.M. .80
Watertown Arsenal, . | 2Ist, rain all day. 1.05
Gaines canta? soon after mid- } 21st, 5 P.M. Wy « 20
Fort Independence, 2ist, rain all day. ;
Boston, oa 20th, evening; 2ist, P. M. 77
Fort Constitution, . 2ist, P.M. : 01
Hancock Barracks, 2ist, P.M. 1.20
Halifax, : 21st, 6to8 P.M.
Bermuda, 22d, sunset; 23d, evening, light rain. 95
St. Johns, 23d, A. M., snow. a,

It will be observed that rain or snow fell at every one of the above stations

except Indian Key, an island south of Florida.

The rain, then, extended from

136 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

about latitude 28° to latitude 48°, and from longitude 52° to 96°. How much
farther it extended will be a subject of future inquiry. Throughout all this
region the rain was very abundant. The average at the fifty-nine stations
where the amount is given is about seven-eighths of aninch. This, then, may
be taken as the probable average depth of the rain throughout the United
States. This amount, however, was far from being the same at all places.
The greatest amount fell at West Point; and at three other stations, Fort Gib-
son, Fort Des Moines, and St. Louis, the amount was two inches, or more.
On the other hand, at a few stations, the amount given is exceedingly small.
Thus, at Henrietta and Fort Constitution, it is stated at 0.01 inch. I think it
probable there is here a mistake in the decimal point, and that the numbers
should read one-tenth inch, or, perhaps, even one inch. I have myself con-
sulted the copy of the observations preserved at Washington, and find that the
total of rain for the month, at Fort Constitution, is greater than the sum of all
the items shown in the register. Some mistake was probably committed in
transcribing.

It may, also, fairly be presumed there was some defect in the rain-gauge
used at West Point. According to the register, the amount of rain for nine
months of the year 1836 was 73.27 inches. During the other three months
the gauge was not observed. Making, however, a proportionate allowance for
this period, we have the annual amount of rain 97.69 inches. The average
amount of rain for the state of New York, as appears by the Regent’s Reports,
is 36 inches.

The stations at which much or little rain fell appear scattered indiscriminately
over the country, so that it is difficult to say in what district rain was most
abundant. The amount at stations moderately removed from each other was
very unequal. ‘Thus, while at West Point the amount is stated at 3.40 inches,
at Montgomery, seventeen miles north-west, it was 1.04; at Newburgh, eight
miles north, it was .73 inch; at Poughkeepsie, twenty-two miles north, .46
inch; and at Goshen, eighteen miles west, .45 inch. So, also, at Fort Wood,
in New York harbour, the amount was one inch, while, at Fort Columbus, in
the same harbour, it was 0.10 inch; and at Flushing, Jamaica, and Flatbush,
(all within fifteen miles,) the amount at each place was about one-third of an
inch. Also at Fort Brady the amount was 1.10 inch, while, at Fort Mackinac,
not fifty miles distant, it was but .37 inch. These inequalities may probably,

rt Leavenworth,

rt Crawford, .
rt Des Moines, .

fferson Barracks,

)., (another register)

mt Winnebago, .

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 137

in part, be ascribed to errors of observation, to defective gauges, or improper
exposure, yet the differences are too considerable and numerous to be wholly
disposed of in this summary way.

Most of the registers are very defective in not naming the hour when the
rain commenced or ceased. Some of the accounts, however, are sufficiently
precise; and by comparing all the observations, it is believed that the limits of
the rain for any particular instant may be determined with considerable confi-
dence. I have drawn upon the accompanying chart a line representing the
limit of rain for midnight of the 20th—2Ist. The curve representing the
western limit corresponds closely to the curve of barometric minimum, but the
curve of the eastern limit differs sensibly from it. It will be observed I make
no distinction here between rain and snow. At the southern stations only rain
fell; at some of the northern only snow; while, at the intermediate points, there
fell both rain and snow. Both are probably to be ascribed to the same cause.

IV. Wind—direction and force.

The following table shows the direction of the wind at each station of ob-
servation. The letters underlined indicate strong winds. A double line indi-
cates a gale. At but a few of the stations was the strength of the wind noted.

DecEeMBER 22.

DreceMBER 18, DeceMeeErR 19, DECEMBER 20. DECEMBER 2].
S.W S.W.|S. SAN. N.|S.W. S.W\S.
N. S.W.|S.E. SIN. N.W.|N. E|S.E
W. SS. S.jN.W. N.JN.W. S.W.|S.W
Ss. S./S.E. S.EJN.W. N.W.|N.W. N.W.S.
N. NS.E. N.E. N.E.|S.
N. NS. S.JIN.W. N.W.|W. W.|N.
N.W. S.W.\S.E. S.EJN.E. N.|W. W.|W.
S.W. S.E.|S.E. S.E.|\S.E. N.W.|S.W. S.W.|S.
S.E. S.E|S. S./S.W N.W.IN.E. S.E|S.E.
A S.W. S.W,|S. s. EL N.W.|W. W.\S.
S.W. S.E. S.E|S.E. | W. —— |Sany
E. S.E. Ss. S.W.; W.; N.W.|N. E.
E. by N.E. N.E.|N. by N.E N.EJE. by S.E S.|\N. by N.E. N.W.
W S|s. S.|S.E. N.|N.W. WIE
Ss. INE
S) SS. .B.|S.E S.E.[W W.\S.E
Ss. N.
N.iE.; N.N.W NEL; N.E.; N.E.|N.N.E.; S.S.E.; S.E.JN.W N. NN.
N NIN. N E.
S.E.; S.W.
S.E S.W.IN.W. S.W.|S.E
Ww. W.S.W. S.W.S. S.EJW. S.W.
N.E. N.W.|N.E. S.E.|S.E S.E|S.W S.W.|N.W
F N.W. W. S. S.W.|S. S.JN.W N.W.|W.
earbornyille Arsenal, |S.W. W.|S-E “S.E.|S.E S.E.JW. W|S.W

vil.—2 kK

Ney
n2 Snan

a

wo
by

138

SraTions.

Fort Gratiot,
Twinsburgh,
Marietta, . . .
Alleghany Arsenal,

Pomfret, .
Lewiston, . .
Greendale, Pa.,
Batavia, N.Y., .
Rochester,

Picolata, .

Henrietta,
Palmyra, .
Canandaigua,
Ithaca, ov 0
Savannah, .. .,

Sea, near Savannah, .

Sunbury, .
Syracuse,
Auburn, .
Homer,
Ellisburgh,
Onondaga,
Pompey, .
Casenovia,
Gouverneur,
Hamilton,
Oxford,
Bridgewater,
Whitestown,
Utica, .
Fort Marion,
St. Augustine, .
Charleston, .
Washington,

Fort M‘Henry, .
Baltimore,
Hartwick,
Potsdam, .
Montreal,

Delhi, .
Fairfield, . . .
Cherry Valley, .
Philadelphia,
Albany,
Poughkeepsie, .
Canajoharie,
Johnstown, .
Goshen, .
Newburgh,
Kingston,
Montgomery,
Flatbush, . -
Redhook, .
Jamaica, . .
Schenectady,
Mount Pleasant,
Lansinburgh,
Kinderhook,
Cambridge, .
Granville,

Fort Monroe,
West Point, .

ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

DecemeBer 18.

S.E,
N.W.
S.W.
N.
Ww.
N.W.
Ww. W
N.W.
N.
N.W.
N.W.
N.W.
N.N.W
W.
Ww.
Ww.

DecEeMBER 19.

S.E.

W.S.W.

x

nA NOD
te

ZAngon
TNE

au
fm

OAR OANA OHHAn Ow
ae 22s

eR
=

DOH
4m

Bo gash a

GOORAEH ZRODAAZAD

DAT
=

2
=n

DEcEMBER 20.

S.E.

S.E.

|Z

S.E.

mM
nn wn
2 Suns

|

|

t
MN M
Henson bs
Ran4zs4s|e 2574

{

e

Ee
=

Rw
42

DM
x

Bb ey mmSS nm nnnsuln
i

2) NM

=||2 @

(07)
eke
or

co) .

4

Bos &
On
Ee

Bb aseasead 2

mn BNWIN
PAAR Hn AAA

| ae

2)

mM
Husuunsue

| %

x

BS

DEcEMBER 21.

N.W.
W.S.W.
NN.
S|S.W
Wis.
w.|W.
wfN.
S.W.|S.W.
W.|S.W.
NIN.
N.W.|W.
N.W.; N.W.|N.E.;
W.; W.N.W,|N.W.;
Ww.
N.W.; N.W,|W.;
N.W,|S.W.
N.W.|S.W.
w.|N.W.
N.W.|W.
N.W.|N.W.
N.W.|W.
S.W.|N.W.
N.W.|N.W.
N.W,|N.W.
W.|S.W.

w.|Ww

Ww. N.W.|W.

roa NIN.

N.E. NIN.

N.W.

N.W.

N.W. N.W.|N.

N.W.

N.W,|N.W.

WwW. S.w.|W.

S.W. S.W.|W.;
N.W.|S.W.
N.W|N.W.
N.W.|W.

S.W. N.W.

S; N.W.; N.W.|N.W.
S.WJ|S.W.
N.W||N.W.

N.W. W.sIN.W.

: W.\W.

W.iw.
N.W.|N.W.
S.W.|W.

W.|N.W.

WIN.

W.|N.W.

N.W. N.W.|N.W.
S.W.|N.W.
N.W.|W.
N.W.JN.W
N.W|IN.

S/S.W

N. S.WIJN.

N.W.IN.W

|

DEcEMBER 22.

N.W.
N.W.

ne Z

n
desu)2 3

4
Pl:

Az mn

24242Zn4 24%
= ndss 2 S285 S nS

zz
be S

a2 a 722)
=

Mn zzz 22 wm }
qazzassaez2 3255545

Zz

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 139

: Independence

t Constitution, .

DecemMreER 18. DecemBER 19. DecemeEr 20. DeEcEMBER 21. DecemBeER 22.

W.; W.byS.; W.|W.N.W.; S.W.; S.W.IN.E.; E.N.E.; S.S.E. S. N.W. Ww. W. W.

N. N.WIN.W. N.W|N.E. ESE. N.w.|N.W. N.W

aa TSA S.W.|N.E. N.E|S.W. W.|N.W. N.W

Ss; 5.W. N.W.|N.W.; N.N.W.
E.N.E.; N.E.|S.W.by W.; S.JW. by S.|/W. by N.

S.; S.W1W.N.W.|N.W. N.W.

S.W., N.W.; N.WS.W.; S.; W.IS.W.; S.W.; S.|S_E.; S| N.W.IW.; N.W.; N.W.

N. N.|N.E. N.E|N.E. E.|N.W. N.|N. N.E.

N.W. S.W|S.E.; S.W. N.W. N.W.

W.S.W.; W.N.W.; N.W.|W.; S.S.E.; W.IN.; S.S.E.; S/S S.E.; S| N.W.|N.W. N.W. N.W

> 5) Seo Ne Se S|S E; SHWeibyaNG| NeVVesn INIVVie smu INE
tertown Arsenal, . S.W. W.IS.W. S/S ES E. S.W. N.W.
cre SE; S| N.w.|N N.W

S.W. S.W.Is.w. S.W|S.E. TT SWiN.w N.W.

. S.W.; S.E.; S.E|S.E.; S.W.; WIWw.; W.; N.W.

Ww. N.W.IS.W. Sse ie S./W N.W.

cock Barracks, . W. N.W JS. S.E.|S.E S.EJN.W N.W
Yay AoW W.|N.W. N.W|IN,; S.; S|S.; S.; S|N.; N.; N.
SS.W. SSW. NINE; N.E; N.E|E.; SE; S.E.|S.E.; SE S.W.INs N; Sw.

SE. Ww W.N.W. W.N.W. Ps, NENGE S.S.E. icky

At Bermuda, on the 23d, the wind was N.; N.N.E.; E.N.E.; and at St.
Johns, N.N.W. I have drawn a dark line across the preceding table, repre-
senting the time of the barometric minimum. It will be observed that this
crisis was marked by an extraordinary change of wind. ‘Thus, at almost every
station in the table, the wind, for nearly a day before the crisis, blew from the
southern quarter, generally for several hours from the south-east. This south-
east wind is believed to have been more general than the table would seem to
indicate; because, not being of lone continuance, it did not, at every station,
happen to blow at either of the fixed hours of observation.. This crisis was as

uniformly followed by a wind from nearly the opposite quarter; commonly the
north-west. This sudden change of wind, then, was every where one of the
most prominent features of the storm. The wind, before the change, is cha-
fresh—very high—vio-

racterized by the terms high—strong—windy—brisk
lent—gale—severe gale. It would seem to have been most severe at New York,
and places farther east. After the change, it is characterized by the terms
high—very windy—violent—blustering—hard violent—strong gusts—strong
gale—tremendous gale—one of the most violent gales ever experienced. From
which it would appear that the wind was generally more violent after than

140 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

before the change; though, perhaps, the reverse was the case at New York
City, and throughout New England.

I have now presented the most important facts which I have been able to
collect respecting the storm in question. Its principal characteristics were as
follow :—After a cold and clear interval, with barometer high, the wind com-
menced blowing from the south. ‘The barometer fell rapidly, the thermometer
rose—rain descended in abundance. ‘The wind veered suddenly to north-west,
and blew with great violence; the rain is succeeded by hail or snow, which
continues but a short time; the barometer rises rapidly ; the thermometer sinks
as rapidly. These changes are experienced not every where simultaneously,
but progressively from west to east.

Before proceeding to analyze these facts more particularly, it may be well to
inquire for the probable mits of the storm. This question is not merely curi-
ous, but will be seen to be intimately connected with the rationale of the phe-
nomena. By inspecting Plate I., Fig. 1, it will be seen that the oscillation of the
barometer was every where quite marked, except at Indian Key. It should
be stated that the observations at this place were made with a sympiesometer,
an instrument far less satisfactory than the mercurial barometer. Here the
range was only a quarter of an inch, and the curve described bears very little
resemblance-to those at the other stations. I am inclined, however, to consider
this slight change of pressure as due to the same causes as the greater oscilla-
tion in higher latitudes. No rain fell at this station. This, then, was beyond
the limit of rain, and the barometer and thermometer were but slightly affected.
In Senate Documents, No. 300, 1838, are given observations of the thermome-
ter at Santa Cruz, Latitude 17° 45’ N., Longitude 64° 35' W., for December,
1836. ‘The mean of observations taken six times a day gave, December 15th,
76°.2; 16th, 77°.5; 17th, 78°.1; 18th, 78°.7; 19th, 77°.9; 20th, 77°.2; 21st, 77°.4;
22d, 76°.6; 23d, 75°.2; 24th, '75°.9; 25th, 74°.7; 26th, 75°.0; 27th, 74°.4; 28th,
75°.6; 29th, 75°.1.

The temperature was exceedingly uniform during this whole period, yet it
will be observed there was a slight fall of the thermometer on the 23d. This
is about the time that the cold wave which passed over the United States might
be expected to be felt there, if felt at all. No other particulars respecting the
weather are stated, except the general remark that “frequent small showers

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 141

fell during the month, but no one which continued longer than from five to ten
minutes.” Santa Cruz, then, may be considered as beyond the limits of the
storm, though, perhaps, not wholly beyond its sensible influence.

The following is extracted from the journal of the ships Mary and Susan,
bound from Calcutta to New York:—

Latitude, Longitude. Barometer. Thermometer. Wind.
Dec. 22, 8° 56’ N. 44° 36 W. 28.58 79° N.E., light and variable.

23, 9 43 45 41 59 78 EID, GC & %
24, 10 41 47 57 60 73 N., light and steady.

25, Tht vial 49 19 60 79 N. W. by W.

26, 11 12 50 8 50 79 Variable—calm.

27, 11 34 50 22 56 78 Variable—calm.

28, 12 28 50 49 60 77 Variable—calm.

It will be observed that the barometer was lowest on the 26th; and this is
about the time that the wave which passed over the United States might be
expected here, if felt at all.

I have obtained from the navy department at Washington a copy of the Me-
teorological Journal of the United States ship Peacock, for December, 1836.
The greatest height of the barometer during the month was, on the 7th, 30.00
inches. Greatest depression, on the 18th, 29.88. Total range for the month,
.12 inch. ‘The ship was on the eastern coast of the Pacific, between latitude
16° 50' N. and latitude 2°19'S. The preceding range is little, if any, greater
than the diurnal oscillation at the equator. The hour of observation is not
stated, so that we cannot decide whether the observations are affected by the
diurnal inequality. The following is an extract from the register :—

Latitude. Longitude. Thermometer. Barometer. Wind. Remarks.
8, A. M.[2, P. M.|s, P.M.

Dec. 16, | 8° 52’ N. | 969 347 W.| 78 79 77 29.90 |N.E. and East. Moderate and pleasant.
17,|7 40 96 49 79 80 79 90 be Coamersai it a a
18,;5 42 96 59 7 81 78 88 North and East. ub Ce a
Ts ies 76 80 77 90 South and Nast. © Squally, with rain.
4D WEE 98 SUG 74 75 75 90 Variable and calms. | Cloudy, with rain.
21,;4 45 Timers 717 78 76 90 ae 33 de
Ray || on 96 3 77 80 78 90 ut Gene Showers, pleasant
23,/3 11 94 23 76 77 75 90 oe Bi o squally.
24,/1 56 ST 54 74 uel 76 93 S. E. and South. Pleasant.

vili—2 L

142 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

Here is exhibited no oscillation of the barometer; but a mean depression of
the thermometer, on the 20th, of three degrees from the 19th, and 4°.7 from the
18th. This was simultaneous with the depression of the thermometer at the
most western stations of the United States. It should be remembered, also,
that although this fall of temperature was slight, it was considerable for the
latitude. On the 19th the wind was south-east, with rain. ‘The coincidence
is certainly remarkable. Although, then, it seems not improbable that the
causes which, in the United States, were operating with such energy, were
sensible even in the vicinity of the equator, still, as there was no fall of the
barometer, and the depression of the thermometer was but slight, we shall hesi-
tate to call it the same storm, and shall fix upon the parallel of 25° N. latitude
as being not far from the southern limit of our storm. I have received a copy
of the observations made on board the United States ship Erie, at Buenos
Ayres, during the month of December, 1836, but it is impossible to identify
any movement of the barometer from observations at a single station so remote.

The boundary on the west must be somewhat conjectural. At the rate with
which the storm moved across the western states, it would have travelled from
the Rocky Mountains to Fort Leavenworth in sixteen hours. The depression
of the thermometer was more sudden and greater in amount at the western sta-
tions than in any other part of its observed course. No reason, then, can be
seen why the storm should not have extended to the Rocky Mountains. But
could it pass them? ‘These mountains, in connexion with the Cordilleras, are
understood to form a continuous range from the Frozen Ocean to the interior
of Mexico, every where several thousand feet in elevation, and presenting insu-
lated peaks, which, according to Professor Renwick, attain the height of
twenty-five thousand feet above the sea. Suppose the warm south-east wind
which was felt in the United States to blow over this wall covered with per-
petual snow. The temperature of those elevated peaks during the month of
December can hardly be supposed equal to zero of Fahrenheit. This warm
current would then be suddenly cooled down to the temperature of that eleva-
tion, and its moisture be precipitated. The eastern side of the mountain would
be buried in snow. Suppose the same air to continue its course and descend
upon the other side of the range. It now comes into a warmer region; it
brings with it only the moisture proper to an exceedingly low temperature; it
is therefore a cold and dry wind, instead of a moist and warm one. Its cha-

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 143

racter is wholly changed. It would seem, then, that even if the south-east
wind could continue its course over this mountain barrier, it could carry no
rain with it. So far, then, as rain, at least, is concerned, the Rocky Mountains
must be supposed the western boundary of the storm.

I am unable even to conjecture a probable limit of the storm on the north.
By inspecting the table on page 130 it will be seen that, with certain excep-
tions to be hereafter considered, the oscillation of the barometer increased pretty
uniformly from the most southern to the most northern station. The range
was ereatest of all at Quebec. It would seem natural to infer that Quebec
could not have been south of the centre of the storm. Why should not the
storm have extended as far to the north as it did to the south of this station?
On this supposition the northern limit would be found near the arctic circle. I
have been unable to obtain observations of this date from any higher latitude
in North America. As some guide, however, to my conjectures, I have insti-
tuted a comparison between the barometric observations made by Capt. Parry,
at Melville Island in 1819-20, and similar observations made at New Haven.
The following table exhibits the times and amount of all the barometric max-
ima observed at Melville Island which reached the height of 30.2 inches. Op-
posite these times I have given all the instances in which the barometer at
New Haven rose to 30.1 inches within the ten days subsequent. I have also
added another column, giving all the instances in which the barometer at Lon-
don, by Professor Daniell’s register, rose above 30 inches within the fifteen
days subsequent.

MELVILLE IsLanp. New Haven. Lonpon.

April 27, 30.86; April 29, 30.27. Interval 2days..) May 1, 30.33. Interval 4 days.

* May as Boe “ce fs}. GC May 12, .05. Cl Ilia) CC
Jains NGS ova digi il, ae 6 5 «ss dei P.O. be Gis
Jana 2oe oS OC a OC Jan. oe .09. OC ils} GG
Dec. 30, S72) || 2 devin, We “ode ae Shea | *aaan: 9, 709s OG 10 «§
Vein 4 I Ke 15 «6
NEptaeias sau Septe won .k2. es 5) nO Sept. 9, .05. mC G
* Sept. 12, .43. CSO OW Sa.) iy, ee. “« 10 «
May 14, .41] May 16, .10. ee |) May) 21, = 132) EEG ce
May 19, .10. ve a a ;
May 21, .10. CEN ay tats
Deca 14.40) Decs 185. -25- “6 4 6
Dec. 22, ~ .20. “6 8
Jan elOn) soD) |) vaneeekon) 2.305 “6 6 « dein Ie ay 1D 4, a 4 6

Vetta 5. sre OG Su 1O) GG

144 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

Mervit_e Isvanp. New Haven. Lonpon.

Oct. 22, 30.382] * Oct. 27, 30.40. Interval 5 days.

INOVA" G30 ee oz ING She 280; 6 2 “ |* Nov. 18, 30.01. Interval 12 days.
Nov. 11, 42, C3 5 6s
Nov. 16, olla}, 66 10. =§§
April 18, .382| April 22, .25. oC 4 “ |* April 24, .54. 43 6“
April 25, LoD e TS SaMlay, iI .33. 6 11g} G6
May 23, .380| May 30, .15. 3 eee June 6, .13. CG sgh) ce
March 28, .26 March 31, «45. 6 Syessé March 29, _ —-«.08. 66 1 <
Aprile 2 0. é 5 April 3, .21. 66 6
April 4, .40. te F/G April 12, .02. SGD ws
Jan. Aaa ane U5 oh 6s 3 66 PF Jan. 9, - .59. 6 mcs
Vaio. 4k, oll 1 Omens
Oct. 18, “22 Octian 277 40. OG oy
Nov. 17, Sil Nov. 22, -70. OG 6G * Nov. 18, Ol. Od iL) 6
Nove 245 2 bz ce a 3
Nov. 19, .20 Nov. (225) 270: se 38 * |*Dec. 3, «209. Ce 7: GG
Nov. 24, -52. G6 By 6
**Nov. 29, .75. CEN
Nov. 23, .20|** Nov. 29, (75. 66 6 “ |* Dec. 3, &«09. 66 10 «6
May 26, .20 May 30, .15. 6 4 & June 6) = 213% COR aT [eC
June 1, 15. se Gass

The observations distinguished by an asterisk were the highest of their re-
spective months; those with a double asterisk the highest of the year. It will
be observed that the principal New Haven maxima follow the Melville maxima
generally at intervals of five or six days; and the London maxima follow at in-
tervals of from five to ten days. 'To identify certainly a single wave would
require simultaneous observations at numerous intermediate points; yet the
preceding facts, taken in connexion with the increase of the barometric oscil-
lation for December 20, 1836, from the southern part of the United States to
the most northern station, seem to render it not improbable that the storm in
question might have been experienced within the arctic circle.

By reference to the table on page 130 it will be seen that, with the exception
of T'winsburgh, Bermuda, Halifax, and St. Johns, the barometric oscillation
increased pretty regularly with the latitude. ‘The cbservations at Twinsburgh
being made with a wheel barometer, which, from the nature of the instrument,
is susceptible of very little accuracy, I do not hesitate to reject them from this
comparison. It will be seen that the oscillation at the three remaining stations
was only about one-half what it was at the corresponding latitudes in the
‘United States. This must be considered as evidence that the causes, whatever

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 145

they were, which produced the oscillation, were now acting with diminished
energy. ‘The diminution was about one-half in less than two days. It might
naturally be expected that the wave would go on diminishing until, by its in-
significance, it should become insensible. What law this diminution would
observe we are unable to say. For the sake of an estimate, however, let us
take a simple supposition. The loss was one-half in two days. In two days
more the last range might be reduced one-half; and again one-half in two days
more. ‘That is, in four days from St. Johns, the range would be in latitude
32°, 0.11 inch; and in latitude 47°, 0.22 inch, a fluctuation too small to be
traced with confidence. At the rate with which the wave travelled from Hali-
fax to St. Johns, in four days more it would have passed somewhat beyond the
Azores. But it will be observed that the velocity of the wave was sensibly re-
duced in travelling eastward. It had even become reduced to about one-half
in two days in the latitude of Quebec. We might then expect the wave would
become insensible before it reached the middle of the Atlantic.

But a remarkable storm was experienced over nearly the whole continent of
Kurope, about the 25th of December, and the opinion has been repeatedly ex-
pressed that this storm was identically the same with the one whose pheno-
mena I am investigating. With the view of prosecuting this inquiry, I have
collected all the European meteorological registers of this period in my power.
Observations made at St. Petersburgh and Catherinenburgh were obtained from
the library of the American Philosophical Society, by the politeness of Mr.
Vaughan, and copied for me by Mr. S. C. Walker. _ The latter place is in lati-
tude 56° 50’ N., and longitude 60° 35’ E., and is eight hundred and thirteen
English feet above the level of the sea. Observations for Brussels and Milan
were furnished me by Mr. 8. C. Walker, the latter being from the library of
the High School Observatory in Philadelphia. The observations for Geneva,
Zurich, and St. Bernard, were from the Bibliotheque Universelle, and copied
by Mr. E. C. Herrick: those for London, Chiswick, and Boston, are from the
London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine: those for Paris, from the
Comptes Rendues des Séances de l’Academie; and those for Cadiz, in Spain, I
obtained through our consul, Mr. Burton. The barometric observations I have
projected in curves on Plate 2, a difference of an inch in the ordinates of
the curves representing an oscillation of the barometer to the same amount.
A bare inspection of this chart is sufficient to show that there were, at this pe-

Vu.—2 M

146 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

riod, two distinct oscillations travelling in nearly opposite directions. One of
these minima occurred at Cadiz, in Spain, on the 24th; passed Geneva on the
afternoon of the 25th; London on the afternoon of the 26th; Boston by the
morning of the 27th; St. Petersburgh and Catherinenburgh about midnight of
the same day. The progress of this wave was almost due north, and at the
rate of about twenty statute miles per hour. This certainly was not the same
wave which passed over the United States, for the front of the latter was nearly
north and south, while the front of the European wave was directed to the
east and west, and was travelling northward.

The other barometric minimum was first experienced at St. Petersburgh on
the 21st; at Catherinenburgh on the 22d; at Boston on the 23d; at Paris, Ge-
neva, Zurich and Milan on the 24th; although at the latter place this oscilla-
tion is almost merged in the one before described. At Cadiz the wave is well
nigh lost, but is, perhaps, barely discernible on the 27th and 28th. This wave,
then, travelled nearly from north to south, inclining, however, to the west, and
at the rate of about seventeen miles per hour. It is not, perhaps, equally clear
that this wave cannot be identified with that of the United States. If we draw
upon the globe lines representing the fronts of these waves, as I have done
upon the accompanying chart, we shall find that they may be joined by a line
of no very great curvature. Nevertheless, the fronts of both of the waves are
curved, particularly the European wave, and when joined they make a curve
with at least two points of inflection, as in the Pee ape
annexed diagram; the black line on the left a a Stile
hand representing the American, and the other the European wave. ‘The ap-
pearances of the curves seems very clearly to indicate two distinct waves. If
further confirmation were needed, it may be found in the course of the winds,
which exhibited very different movements in Europe from what they did in
the United States. As, however, I have not proposed to enter into any ex-
tended investigation of this European storm, and have only alluded to it for
the sake of ascertaining whether it could be identified with that in America,
believing that the evidence already presented will be conclusive to most minds,
I think it unnecessary to adduce any further observations. I arrive, then, at
the conclusion, that the storm of December 20th did not extend to the other
side of the Atlantic.

I have made great inquiry for the log-books of vessels at this time on the

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 147

Atlantic, but with indifferent success. I have found no barometric observa-
tions, and few log-books of the common kind. The New York packet ship
Hibernia left Liverpool December 20th. The following extract from her log-
book gives some information of the weather which prevailed at that time on the
Atlantic. For the sake of comparison I have placed by the side the winds as
observed at Brussels.

Suip Hipernia. BrvussELs.
Latitude. Longitude. Wind.
Dec. 23, 50° 28’ 9° 9’ W.N.W.; N.W.; N.; showers. | N.; N.; N.; snow

24, 48 36 14 36 N.E.; N.E.; showers of hail. N.E.; N.E.; snow
25; 47 58 19 58 N.E.; E.N.E N.E.; N.E.; snow
26, 47 23 23 40 N.E ; N.N.E.; showers. N.E.; N.E.

Qe 46 56 27 30 N.E.; E.N.E.; E. N.E.; N.E.; snow.
28, 46 38 SG N.E.; E.N.E.; showers N.E.; E.N.E.; snow
29, 46 20 S333 247/ INF RSE ESE res Saks N.E.; N.E.; snow.
30, 45 55d 34 3 Calm. N.E.; N.E.

The uniformity in the direction of the winds shows that the Hibernia expe-
rienced the same kind of weather which prevailed in Europe up to the 29th of
December, when she was in the middle of the Atlantic, and the American
storm, if felt at all, ought already to have passed her. I have sought to pro-
cure some meteorological register from the Azores. The following extract, fur-
nished by our consul, Mr. Dabney, is all I have been able to obtain. It exhi-
bits the mean temperature of the respective days at Fayal.

Dec. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
63° 64° 61° 63° 62° 67° 57° 57° 57°

Here is exhibited a striking depression of the thermometer on the 29th.
This may, perhaps, be ascribed to the influence of the American storm, which
had just reached the Azores. A like depression of the thermometer, however,
accompanied the European storm; and from the above observations of the Hi-
bernia, the latter influence would seem to have been the one chiefly, if not ex-
clusively, felt. My conclusion, then, from this investigation is, that the eastern
limit of the storm of December 20th cannot be placed beyond the middle of the
Atlantic. The storm was probably sensible over seventy degrees of longitude
and forty of latitude.

148 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

Having given all the information I have been able to collect respecting the
storm, and assigned, as far as practicable, its limits, I proceed to analyze more
minutely its phenomena. Let us take, then, first, the observations of the wind.
In making this comparison, certain general principles should be borne in mind.
One is, that the direction of the wind is liable to be sensibly influenced by the
inequalities of the surface of the earth. In a shallow stream of water, flowing
over a rocky bottom, the course of the particles of water is often very devious.
An effect similar in kind, though much greater in degree, must be expected
from an elastic fluid like air. This is strikingly exhibited in the narrow and
straight streets of cities, with high buildings on each side. ‘The wind must
here blow in the direction of the streets, or not at all. So, also, a mountain
gorge; the straight bed of a river with high banks; the shore of a lake, or the
ocean; or a mountain ridge might be expected sensibly to influence the direc-
tion of the atmospheric current. ‘To this cause is doubtless to be ascribed the
fact, that at stations very moderately removed from each other, the prevalent
winds often differ sensibly in direction.

Again, the direction of the wind is exceedingly variable. I mean that its
direction varies not merely from day to day, and from hour to hour, but from
minute to minute, and from second to second. When the wind is at all fresh,
it is rare that it blows sensibly from the same direction for five successive se-
conds. I have been the more struck with this fact from having a vane attached
to a revolving shaft, to which is secured a graduated circle. The precise
amount of the oscillations is thus easily measured. I am accustomed, at each
observation, to note the extreme excursions during an interval of about five
minutes. This range of the vane may be termed a measure of the variableness
of the wind, and from an average of the year, does not differ much from fifty
degrees. In repeated instances it has amounted to ninety, and even more, de-
grees. Now, one who judges of the direction of the wind from a single glance
at a vane, is liable to mistake the mean direction by twenty-five or thirty de-
grees, because the vane, at the instant observed, may point thus much aside of
its mean position. ‘To this add the probable error of judgment when angles are
estimated entirely by the eye, and it will not appear strange if two individuals,
neither of them particularly careless in observing, should, at the same place,
and at the same hour, sometimes differ by forty-five degrees in their estimate
of the wind’s direction. Indeed, at five-sixths of the stations from which ob-

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 149

servations have been received, this appears to be the smallest fraction ever re-
corded. Add to this that the observations are generally taken but twice a day,
and the precise hour to which the observation corresponds is seldom given, and
we shall be prepared to expect considerable irregularity in comparing the ob-
servations at a hundred different stations. Finally, it is but reasonable to bear
in mind that in the table of winds which I have given there may be actual
errors of transcribing. ‘The materials from which the table was prepared are
copies, most of them at second hand, from the original records. In transcribing
such a list of unmeaning letters, where the copyist can receive no assistance
from the context to guide his judgment, slips of the pen are particularly liable
to occur.

I trust it will not be inferred from these remarks that I have a theory of
winds to which all the observations are to be made forcibly to conform, and
that whatever seems obstinate is to be pronounced an error of observation. I
wish merely to show that we should look at the general or average tendency of
the winds at the several stations, and when one observation differs essentially
from all the rest, it is not unphilosophical to regard it with distrust. That
these remarks are not uncalled for will appear evident from comparing the dif-
ferent registers kept at almost identically the same station; for example, the
two at St. Louis, and that at Jefferson Barracks; those at St. Augustine and
Fort Marion; and those at New York, and its immediate vicinity.

It may be well to enumerate here the principal known causes of wind. It
is believed that winds may commonly be referred to one of the three following
causes, V1Z:

J. Inequality of atmospheric pressure.

II. Unequal specific gravity of air.

III. Rotation of the earth.

Conceive two vertical columns of air connected by a horizontal canal. If
the weight of one column exceeds that of the other, it must preponderate. The
wind, therefore, must blow from places where the barometer is highest, towards
those where it is most depressed. Moreover, if the two columns of air sup-
posed be of equal weight, but unequal specific gravity, there will be effected a
new distribution of the particles of the two portions. The denser will flow
under and displace the lighter. ‘This inequality of specific gravity may arise
either from a more elevated temperature or an excess of aqueous vapour. Even

VH.—2 N

150 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

then, though the barometer may indicate every where the same pressure, the
wind will blow, at the surface of the earth, from the colder to the warmer sta-
tion; from the one where the dew point is lowest, to that where it is highest.
In the upper regions of the air the current will, for the same reason, be re-
versed. ‘The rotation of the earth is indirectly one of the most powerful causes
of wind. Of itself it would produce no wind. When the earth first began to
revolve upon its axis, the atmosphere, it may be supposed, would be left be-
hind, and a wind would result, blowing with the velocity of the earth’s motion.
By friction upon the earth’s surface, the air would, however, soon acquire the
same motion with that part of the earth upon which it rested, and a universal
calm would result as truly as if the earth were at rest. If authority is needed
in support of this conclusion, we have that of Laplace. The earth’s rotation,
then, is not an independent cause of wind, although some have entertained a
contrary opinion. But when one of the other named causes would alone pro-
duce a south wind in northern latitudes, the earth’s rotation converts it into a
south-west wind; and in like manner a north wind is converted into one from
the north-east. Several other causes of wind might be enumerated, but it is
believed that their action is comparatively feeble and unimportant.

Bearing in mind these preliminary principles, let us proceed to analyze the
observations of the wind on pages 187—139. To do this the more conveni-
ently, I furnish myself with a large number of small bits of paper, each having
the figure of an arrow, and spreading out before mea map of the United States,
I place at each station an arrow, representing the wind’s direction for the pe-
riod under comparison. I thus have a graphic representation of all the obser-
vations. Beginning, then, with the observations of the morning of December
18th, we find the barometer at an unusual height along the line of the Missis-
sippi river, while, in the eastern states, it was quite low, but rapidly rising.
The wind, at places east of Detroit, we find very uniformly blowing from the
west. Where there is a deviation from this rule, it 1s usually to the north-
west; and in one case only, Alleghany Arsenal, was the wind from the north.
Near the southern border of the United States the wind was from some north-
ern quarter, except at Natches, where it was east. The rise of the barometer
which was experienced in the United States was nearly insensible south of the
parallel of 28°, and hence a tendency of air in that direction. Along the valley
of the Mississippi the barometer was at its maximum; the winds consequently

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 151

were light, and their directions very various. More usually they were from
the west, the quarter from which they had blown with great strength the day
previous; but at a few stations they had already changed to the south and east,
which was soon to become the prevalent direction; for it appears there was now
a barometric minimum, not far to the west, towards which the whole atmo-
sphere soon precipitated itself with great violence. In the afternoon of the 18th
there was no change in the wind’s direction at any station east of Detroit, nor
any change of importance on the southern border. On the north-west the wind
generally veered round more to the south, the cause which I have already as-
signed becoming now more sensible in its operation.

On the morning of the 19th, the wind, at places east of Baltimore, was still
from the west. Albany furnishes the only exception to this remark, and here
the wind is from the south. On the southern border the wind still blew from
the north. At Picolata only was it from the east. In the western and north-
western states it was from the south. 'To this there was but one exception, at
Fort Brady, where the wind was north-east. ‘The more general tendency was
from the south-east. A very instructive phenomenon is here exhibited. The
barometer was ot its maximum height on a line passing north and south, nearly
through the centre of the United States, and the wind accordingly blew out-
mard trom the centre every where upon the borders. I do not mean precisely
in the direction of radii from one point, but still decidedly outward; and there
is but one palpable exception to this remark, namely, at Alleghany Arsenal,
where the wind is reported from the north. Thus, on the eastern border, the
prevalent direction was westerly; on the southern, northerly; on the western,
south-easterly; and on the northern, southerly. These currents could not be
maintained without producing a rapid drainage of air from the United States,
unless there were some means of compensation. In point of fact, the drainage
was not very rapid, as is shown by the barometric observations, and the re-
quired compensation we shall find in the upper current of the atmosphere.
The winds of which I have been speaking were surface winds, reaching to
only a moderate elevation, and above them flowed the usual upper current from
the west. This might have been safely presumed in the absence of all testi-
mony. ‘The fact was, however, observed at Springfield, Syracuse, and New
York, the only journals which noted at this time the direction of the clouds.
The drainage from the lower currents was, however, somewhat more rapid

152 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

than the supply from the upper, and the barometer began slowly to descend.
On the afternoon of the 19th the changes in the direction of the wind were
very slight. At Fort Brady the wind changed from north-east to south-east,
conforming now to the general direction of the winds in that quarter.

On the morning of the 20th the barometric maximum passed through the
eastern extremity of Maine. ‘The winds in the eastern states were accordingly
light, and exceedingly variable. At about half of the stations, however, the
wind was from the south, and at about one-half of the remainder it was south-
west. ‘The irregularity at the remaining stations I ascribe to the lightness of
the wind, and to the fact that the influence of the barometric minimum at the
west was just beginning to be felt, but had not yet had time to impress upon
the winds any strong and steady impulse. On the southern border the winds
generally continue to blow from the north. The barometric minimum now
coincides nearly with the bed of the Mississippi river. Upon the west of this
line, the wind blows from the north and north-west; upon the east side it blows
from. the east, south, and south-east. ‘The winds in this section blow with
great strength, and their directions, as might be expected, are far more regular
and uniform. By the afternoon of the 20th the line of barometric minimum
had advanced farther to the east. ‘The number of stations west of this line at
which the wind now blew from the north and north-west was increased. In
the eastern states the general direction of the winds was substantially the same
as in the morning. The wind at New Bedford and Halifax, the only stations
in this section at which, in the morning, it blew from the north, now blows from
the south. Oxford and East Hampton were the only stations, in the morning,
at which the wind blew from the north-west. At the former of these it is now
south, and at the latter south-west. On the eastern section of the storm the
wind now every where, with but a few trifling exceptions, blows from some
southern quarter.

On the morning of the 21st the barometric minimum had arrived nearly at
New York city. In all the western and middle states the general direction of
the winds is from the west and north-west. Ata few places it is north, and at
a few others south-west. But no where is it from the south, south-east, or east,
and at only one station, Jefferson Barracks, from the north-east. Even this
observation may be suspected to be a mistake, or must be ascribed to local
situation, when it is found that at St. Louis the wind was from the west. The

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 153

mean of all these directions is about N. 74° W. On the southern border, also,
the prevalent direction is north-west, although at two stations it is represented
as inclining to the east. On the east side of the line of barometric minimum,
the prevalent direction is from the south-east. As the observations were not
all made at the same hour, they are not strictly comparable; and it seems ne-
cessary to leave out of the account those which were made near the line of
minimum, because we cannot know, except conjecturally, whether they were
made before or after this line had passed. We thus obtain for the mean direc-
tion at the remaining stations about 8. 5° EK. Ata certain distance, however,
from the line of minimum the courses are very uniformly south-east. As this
line approached, the wind veers to the south, south-west, west, and north-west.
In the afternoon of the 21st, the line of barometric minimum had _ nearly
reached Boston, and the north-west wind had become the prevalent one
throughout almost the entire United States. In the extreme west the wind
had begun to moderate its violence, and at Fort Jesup it blew from the north-
east; at Fort Gibson from the east; and at Jefferson Barracks from the south-
east. ‘These are the only easterly winds recorded any where upon the west of
the line of barometric minimum. ‘The only south winds were at Pomfret and
Granville, in New York. All the other winds, eighty-one in number, were
from some point between the north and south-west; and their mean direction
about N. 70° W.

On the 22d the north-west wind was almost every where the prevalent one,
particularly in the eastern section of the United States, where it blew inva-
riably from some point between the north and south-west. On the southern
border it blew very uniformly from the north; and in the western states the
winds were becoming more light and irregular, veering round to the south and
south-east, as they had done three days previous.

From the preceding review it will be seen that, in the midst of much irregu-
larity, there was a considerable degree of uniformity in the course of the winds
throughout the entire period under examination. It blows, at first, fresh from
the north-west; this wind moderates and veers to the southward; it changes
by nearly a calm to some eastern quarter; blows fresh from the south-east, in
some places a gale; veers rapidly to the south, south-west, west, and north-
west, blowing all the time with great violence. After about a day, the north-
west wind moderates into a calm, and is succeeded by a southerly wind. In

VII—2 0

154 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

order to present these changes more palpably to the eye, I have drawn upon
the chart arrows, representing the direction of the wind for the forenoon of the
21st, the length of the arrow being intended to be proportioned to the strength
of the wind. These observations were not all strictly cotemporaneous; and
hence arises some confusion in the course of the winds near the line of baro-
metric minimum, particularly in the state of New York. It cannot, however,
fail to be perceived that, at places moderately removed from each other, the
wind blew from quarters almost diametrically opposed. At a little distance
from the line of barometric minimum, on the east, the wind was from the
south-east, while, on the west, it blew from the north-west. These were both
violent winds, whose velocity, probably, could not be estimated at less than
forty miles per hour. But how is it possible for two winds, not far separated
from each other, to blow violently towards each other for hours, and even days,
in succession? Let us make a simple numerical estimate. ‘The wind blew
from the north-west at least forty miles per hour. This gives a progress due
east of more than twenty-eight miles per hour, and is fully equal to the average
progress of the barometric minimum. This atmospheric wave, then, progressed
with not far from the velocity with which the wind was actually observed to
blow. But, in order to allow an opportunity for this onward progress, the
wind in advance of this wave must retire, and that with the same velocity
with which the north-west wave approaches. ‘There seems no other possible
supposition, unless the north-west wind flowed wnder the opposing wind. But
what was the motion of the air in advance of this wave? About six hours in
advance, it blows from the south-east; then, for three or four hours, it blows
nearly from the south, and the entire change from south to north-west occupies
only from one to two hours. The whole body of air in advance of this wave is
moving, then, in almost exactly an opposing direction; whereas, as I have
already stated, it ought to move in the same direction, in order to allow the
waye’s onward progress. ‘The conclusion is inevitable; the north-west wind
displaces the south-east one by flowing under it. I can think of but one mode
in which any one can imagine it possible to evade this conclusion. The wind
changed from south-east to north-west by the south-west. Some might fancy,
therefore, that this south-west wind might furnish the necessary vent for this
surplus air. But this south-west wind seldom blew an hour at any one place.
Now, the phenomena which I have described were occurring simultaneously

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 155

throughout the entire length of the United States, a distance of at least twelve
hundred miles, and probably much greater. In order, then, that the south-
west wind might drain off this vast torrent from the south-east, it would need
to blow continuously for at least thirty hours with the velocity observed. And
even on this supposition the south-west wind would only drain off the south-
east, so as to prevent its advancing. But we have already seen that it must
recede with the same velocity as that with which the opposing wave advances.
I might call to my aid here, if necessary, the observations of the thermometer,
but it would be superfluous. The case, to my mind, is perfectly made out,
This south-east current found its escape by ascending from the surface of the
earth. Having quit the surface, it might either flow on in its first direction
over the north-west current, or it might be entirely driven back over the south-
east current; or both of these motions might exist simultaneously. When we
come to consider the cause of the rain, we shall be able to judge of the proba-
bility of these several suppositions.

If a south-east current should pass a north-west one by blowing over it, the
wind, to a stationary observer, would seem to change its direction by a calm.
But if one were 8. S. E. and the other W. N. W., as was nearly the case in the
present instance, the wind would veer rapidly from one quarter to the other,
passing through each of the intermediate points. The two currents must ne-
cessarily influence each other to some extent. As the north-west wind ap- .
proached, the south-east would feel its influence, and begin to veer to the south.
At a certain instant the two would exert equal power; and the direction of the
particles of air would be precisely intermediate between those of the two great
currents. Presently the second current would predominate, and, in a short
time, the influence of the first would entirely disappear.

The question naturally arises, What produced this southerly wind through-
out a territory so extended? The atmosphere is always warmer in the southern
states than in the northern; why, then, should not a current always set from
the north? There is no doubt, I think, that throughout this entire region the
general progress of the atmosphere near the surface of the earth is towards the
south. Not that the wind will necessarily blow a greater number of days in a
year from the north than from the south, for the northerly winds are ordinarily
far the most violent. One cause of southerly winds is found in the upper cur-
rent, which, in these latitudes, blows from a point a little south of west. This

156 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

wind, by friction upon the lower stratum, and by gradual subsidence into it,
tends to impress upon the lower current its own direction. This accounts, in
part, for our westerly and south-westerly winds, but would not explain the
south-east wind of the storm in question. The true explanation of this phe-
nomenon is, I think, found in the fact that the greatest depression of the baro-
meter was at some point north of the United States. The greatest observed
depression was at Quebec; and it is not improbable that the absolute minimum
is to be found still farther north. We should expect a prevalent tendency of
the winds towards this point of greatest depression; that is, in the United
States, in front of the storm, we should expect a south-east wind, and to the
north of the storm’s centre, a north-east wind. I have been unable to obtain
any observations for testing the truth of this last conclusion.

I come now to inquire for the cause of the rain. Rain is always owing to
one cause, namely, a sudden reduction of the temperature of the atmosphere
below the dew point. We run no risk in always assigning this as the imme-
diate cause of rain. But how is this reduction of temperature effected? It
may occur in a great variety of ways, among which are the following :—

I. Radiation.

IJ. Warm air coming in contact with cold earth or water.

Ill. A warm current coming in contact and mingling with a cold one.

IV. Air suddenly transported into elevated regions.

It is doubtful whether the first of these causes ever produces rain, for the
reduction of temperature is too gradual. It is very common for the thermo-
meter to sink during the night below the dew point of the preceding evening,
and without any change of wind; yet not only no rain follows, but the atmo-
sphere may remain perfectly transparent the whole time. Such circumstances
produce a most copious dew, but seldom if ever rain.

The second cause is one which is often observed, but ordinarily produces
merely a fog. Thus the warm air from the gulf stream rolling over the cold
banks of Newfoundland produces the densest foes; and in winter, the air from
the sea flowing in upon the frozen earth has its moisture abundantly condensed.
Yet the reduction of temperature effected in this way 1s also so gradual, it is
believed never to produce any considerable rain.

The third cause, though very similar in principle to the second, is believed:
to be more efficient than either of the preceding, because it will produce a

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 157

more sudden change of temperature. The phenomenon, moreover, of atmo-
spheric currents flowing one over the other in different directions may be ob-
served almost every day of the year. But the fourth cause named, admitting
its existence, must be allowed to be by far the most efficient of all. For the
reduction of temperature may be conceived to be effected with almost any de-
gree of suddenness, and to any extent. ‘Thus, in midsummer, air with a dew
point of 80°, being suddenly elevated two or three miles above the earth’s sur-
face, would, from change of temperature, lose almost the totality of its vapour.
By supposing some cause which should continually renew the operation over
a limited locality, we could account for the most violent and abundant rains on
record. This case, therefore, demands particular consideration. This effect
might be produced, 1. By a horizontal current impinging upon the side of a
mountain. ‘The current might thus be forced up to an elevation, where it
would experience a very great and sudden reduction of temperature, and a por-
tion of its vapour be instantly precipitated. 2. A large body of air might be
suddenly and mechanically elevated by a volcanic eruption. The direct effects
of these two causes must, however, be quite local. If they ever influence dis-
tant stations, it must be indirectly, by means of currents here set in motion.
3. Air may be elevated by a whirlwind; for even in horizontal whirlwinds
there is ordinarily, if not always, an upward motion in the centre of the vortex.
4. When a hot and cold current, moving in opposite directions, meet, the
colder, having the greatest specific gravity, will displace the warmer, which is
thus suddenly lifted from the surface of the earth, is cooled, and a part of its
vapour precipitated. This is a cause which may operate in any locality, and
with almost any degree of energy. It is believed, therefore, to be, at least in
this latitude, the most common cause of rain. Let us now review the circum-
stances of the rain which fell during the period under examination. This oc-
curred during the winter, and with a southerly wind. We have here, then,
the second cause for the reduction of atmospheric temperature, operating under
the most favourable circumstances. Yet the precipitation arising from this
cause must begin at the surface of the earth, and proceed very gradually. But
in the present case the rain came from a considerable elevation, and poured
down in torrents. Although, then, this be admitted as a cause of rain, I can-
not regard it as the main cause, nor any thing more than a very feeble aux-
VII.—2 P

158 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

ihary. Can the third cause be the true one? We have, in the present case, a
warm current from the south, and, without doubt, a little above it, a cold cur-
rent from the west. The consequence would be, a certain amount of precipi-
tation from the partial mingling of these two currents where they came in con-
tact. ‘The whole amount of air which could be cooled in this way is very
small, and the consequent precipitation would be only a small fraction of that
which was observed. Let us, then, inquire if the fourth cause could be sup-
posed to operate. We have already shown from the observations of the wind,
without the aid of any hypothesis, that the southerly current must have
disappeared by being elevated into the upper regions of the air. This I
regard as a necessary deduction from the observations. We find, then, a
warm current suddenly cooled, and its moisture must, of course, be in
part precipitated. I find by computation, that if the entire atmosphere, satu-
rated with moisture at the temperature of 70°, be cooled 5°)

as 60 tf 7 | one inch of
i 50 és 10 peat will be
a 40 gf 16 | precipitated.
“ 30 «25 |

But the average amount of water which fell throughout the United States
was somewhat less than one inch. The cause we have assigned, then, seems
adequate to account for the phenomena. We have simply determined, as yet,
that the south-east wind must have disappeared by being lifted from the earth’s
surface. But in what direction did it continue to move? It might be sup-
posed to continue on its course towards the north-west, above the other cur-
rent, or to return towards the south-east. Being a current of more than a thou-
sand miles in breadth, we can hardly suppose it to escape either by the north-
east or the south-west. Did it, then, continue its direction towards the north-
west? We should then have a warm and moist current flowing at a great
elevation over an exceedingly cold one. The consequence would be, that its
moisture would not only be precipitated, but frozen, and would descend to the
earth in the form of snow or hail. This is conformable to observation. Snow
and. hail did fall at nearly all of the northern stations, after the north-west wind
set in. But the amount was small; much less than must necessarily result if
this entire southerly wind had flowed over the northerly, and had its moisture

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 159

precipitated by it. Still, it seems probable that a part of this southerly wind
did continue on its course, and produce the snow which was observed to fall.
{infer that the current was mainly turned back upon itself, so that the moisture,
as fast as precipitated, fell through the lower current, still blowing from the
south-east. My idea may, perhaps, be best illustrated by a diagram.

waa
tila one Silt We Gorse | Ne, : SS >
> LS ae ”" oy sing ear ee
North-west current. . _, Ni South-east current.
NY <—«

A part of the moisture of this south-east current might be frozen from the
cold of elevation, even if it were driven back in the direction from which it
came. But, falling through a warm stratum, before it reached the earth’s sur-
face it would be entirely melted. At several stations hail fell in small quanti-
ties very soon after the wind changed. This might be owing to the moisture
of the warm current suddenly condensed by contact with the cold one, and
sustained by this upward motion, until the frozen drops had acquired the size
actually observed, which in no case was very great.

Why more rain fell at some stations than at others only moderately distant
I cannot certainly say. The causes, doubtless, were local, and it would be
unsafe to assign particular reasons without a good knowledge of the localities.
Such an effect, however, might be produced by a hill of moderate elevation,
which would raise the lower current, and, consequently, the returning upper
current, to an unusual elevation, producing a corresponding depression of tem-
perature.

The observations of the thermometer on pages 131—133 are believed to pre-
sent nothing very difficult of explanation. ‘That the temperature should rise
under a southerly wind was to be anticipated. ‘The wind blew from a southern
quarter more than twelve hours, in which time it probably travelled nearly five
hundred miles, or, making allowance for the obliquity of its course, between
four and five degrees of latitude. 'The difference of temperature corresponding

160 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

to this difference of latitude, for winter, in the United States, is about ten de-
grees. But the temperature of the air generally rose more than this number
of degrees above the mean. Moreover, there prevailed in the northern states a
vast body of snow and ice, which rapidly absorbed the caloric of this southern
current. ‘The explanation, then, is insufficient. We shall find an additional
cause for this elevated temperature in the abundant precipitation of aqueous
vapour. When vapour becomes reduced to the liquid state, it gives up a large
amount of latent heat, which will, of course, be taken up by the surrounding
air. ‘The temperature of the eastern states was found to be a little greater than
that of the western. At the former, the southerly wind came from the ocean,
which, in winter, has a higher temperature than the land. It is not clear,
however, that more rain fell in one section than the other.

That the north-west wind was cold is not remarkable. It came from a high
latitude, where the prevalent temperature is, probably, far below zero. _ Its se-
verity, however, became somewhat tempered in its progress, the mean of the
minima at the eastern stations being fourteen degrees higher than at the
western.

I come now to the phenomenon probably the most difficult of all to be ex-
plained, namely, the oscillation of the barometer. For the movements of this
instrument various causes have been assigned, some of them so unphilosophi-
cal that it is really astonishing that they could ever have been seriously pro-
posed by intelligent men.

1. The oscillations of the barometer have been ascribed to the destruction of
large masses of air in the higher regions by electricity. ‘The supposition is too
gratuitous to deserve serious consideration.

2. They have been ascribed to the diminished pressure resulting from the
loss of rain. But the amount of rain which fell in the case under considera-
tion would be balanced by a column of mercury about one-fifteenth of an inch
in height.

3. Heat, by expanding a column of air, causes it to ascend to a greater
height, and thus changes its centrifugal force arising from the earth’s rotation.
This cause is too insignificant to produce the effect in question.

4. They have been ascribed to the attractions of the sun and moon. La-
place estimates the greatest oscillation of the barometer due to this cause to be,
at the equator, 0.025 inch.

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 161

5. Leslie ascribes them to the centrifugal force arising from violent winds.
But, in the case of a hurricane, this would not produce an oscillation of the
barometer amounting to the thousandth part of an inch.

6. The opposition of winds. This might produce a small movement of the
barometer. We shall presently inquire whether this cause operated in the
case under consideration.

7. The barometer has frequently been observed to fall under the influence
of a whirlwind. But in the present case there was no whirlwind.

8. These oscillations have been ascribed to sudden changes in temperature
and in the amount of aqueous vapour. An elevation of temperature of the
entire atmosphere could not directly affect its pressure, for, in proportion as
its density is diminished, its height will be increased. But if, by any means,
a portion of hot air can be made to displace an equal bulk of cold air, the
weight of the column must be diminished. It is obvious that this cannot be
a state of permanent equilibrium; yet it is worthy of inquiry whether it may
not temporarily exist under the influence of winds. On the 20th of Decem-
ber, 1836, the air over nearly the whole of the United States became unu-
sually heated, and its specific gravity was, of course, diminished. [f, then,
the height of the atmosphere remains invariable, a diminution of pressure
ought to be the consequence. But, although a fall of the barometer is usually
accompanied by an elevation of temperature, the reverse is sometimes the
case. Thus the fall of the barometer in Europe, which I have represented
on Plate 2, and which, at most places, amounted to more than an inch,
was accompanied by a steady fall of the thermometer. The barometer, in
this case, fell in spite of the increased specific gravity of the air. We may
naturally presume, then, that a change in the specific gravity of the air pro-
duces only a secondary effect on the oscillations of the barometer.

9. A wind blowing upward or downward would affect the pressure of the
air. ‘This is a cause whose existence we have proved in the case in question.
Its effect upon the mean pressure of the air in the equatorial regions is une-
quivocally maintained in the Instructions for the British Scientific Expedi-

‘tion to the Antarctic Regions, recently prepared by the President and Council

of the Royal Society, causing the barometer at the equator to stand perma-

nently lower than in latitude 30°, by about a quarter of an inch. The as-
VII.—2 Q

162 ON THE STORM EXPERIENCED THROUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES

cending current of December 20th could not, however, exert any direct influ-
ence upon the barometer, except near the centre of the storm. To account
for the entire oscillation, I think, we must admit another principle quite dis-
tinct in its operation.

10. Let a wind blow ever so violently over the earth’s surface, and the
diminution of gravity arising from the centrifugal force must be inconsidera-
ble. But, imagine the different parts of the current to travel with unequal
velocity, and there will arise a mechanical condensation, or rarefaction. When
air-is at rest, or in motion, with a uniform velocity, its particles are main-
tained at a constant distance from each other. But let the velocity of one
section be increased beyond that of the succeeding, and the same particles of
air are forced to fill a greater space. Such is the principle of the undula-
tions which produce the sensation of sound. It appears to me that a similar
effect must have been produced in the storm of December 20th. ‘The south-
east wind which accompanied the rain moved with an accelerated velocity.
The particles, therefore, of air at one extremity of the current must have
left those of the other extremity at an increased distance. Hence a mecha-
nical rarefaction, and, of course, diminished pressure.. The reverse effect
must have taken place after the storm had passed. A north-west wind sets.
in with great violence. A vast body of air is precipitated towards the south-
east. The partial vacuum which at first existed is very soon supplied. Yet,
though the first impelling cause has ceased to act, the momentum of the
excited current still urges it onward. The front of the wave is impelled by
the momentum of the mass in the rear, and a mechanical condensation re-
sults, bringing, of course, increased barometric pressure. The cause, how-
ever, which produces this extraordinary rise, being temporary in its nature,
soon ceases, and the barometer falls. ‘The causes which I have here assigned
for the oscillation of the barometer appear to me to be such as are known to
be true, and that they are sufficient to account for the phenomena.

I have thus analyzed the phenomena of this somewhat remarkable storm,
and given such explanations of them as have appeared to me most satisfactory.
It is a most interesting and important inquiry, how far the conclusions at
which I have here arrived may be safely generalized. I have already made
some progress in this investigation; but as the present paper has. now

ABOUT THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1836. 163

grown to an unexpected length, I reserve my remarks upon that point to
some future opportunity. I trust it will not be inferred from my silence with
respect to the labours of others in this important field, that I am wholly igno-
rant of them, or am insensible of their value. I have availed myself of the
labours of others as far as was in my power. ‘To have credited every sugges-
tion to its original author would have been inconvenient, and generally super-
fluous, being found in most treatises on meteorology. I am happy, however,
to express my particular obligations to the labours of Messrs. Redfield, Espy,
and Col. Reid, and shall esteem myself well repaid if the present communica-
tion shall contribute something to the progress of that science which they have
done so much to promote.

SLOT

Si hee
2 Rees

ake its at hone: sore |
ieloataie he 85836 eh

ARTICLE XIII.

Observations on Nebule with a Fourteen Feet Reflector, made by H. L. Smith
and E. P. Mason, during the year 1839. By E. P. Mason. Read April 17,
1840.

1. AuTHoueH a period of nearly fifty years has now elapsed since the re-
searches of the elder Herschel exposed to us the wide distribution of nebulous
matter through the universe, we are still almost as ignorant as ever of its nature
and intention. ‘The same lapse of time that, among his extensive lists of double
stars, has revealed to us the revolution of sun around sun, and given us a par-
tial insight into the internal economy of those remote sidereal systems, has
been apparently insufficient to discover any changes of a definite character in
the nebule, and thereby to inform us at all of their past history, the form of
their original creation, or their future destiny. At the same time, the detection
of such changes is in the highest degree desirable, since no other sources of
evidence can be safely relied upon in these inquiries. That the efforts of as-
tronomers have thus far ended, at best, im vague and contradictory conjectures,
is principally attributable to the great difficulty of originally observing, and of
describing to future observers, bodies so shapeless and indeterminate in their
forms, with the requisite precision. For, we cannot doubt, authorized as we
are to extend the laws of gravitation far into the recesses of space, that these
masses of diffused matter are actually undergoing vast revolutions in form and
constitution. ‘The main object of this paper is to inquire how far that minute ©
accuracy which has achieved such signal discoveries in the allied department
of “the double stars,” may be introduced into the observation of nebule, by

VII—2 R

166 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULZE

modes of examination and description more peculiarly adapted to this end than
such as can be employed in general reviews of the heavens. The observations
which are detailed in this paper are brought forward in illustration of this
inquiry.

2. It will conduce to a clearer understanding of our object to point out, ge-
nerally and rapidly, the distinctions between our own theory of observation
and that commonly adopted. It consists not in an extensive review, but in
confining the attention to a few individuals; upon these exercising a long and
minute scrutiny, during a succession of evenings; rendering even the slightest
particulars of each nebula as precise as repeated observation and comparison,
with varied precautions, can make them, and confirming each more doubtful
and less legible of its features by a repetition of suspicions, which are of weight
in proportion as they accumulate; and, lastly, when practicable, correcting by
comparison of the judgments of different persons at the same time.

Thus much for observation—for rendering the idea of the object as perfect
as may be in the mind of the observer. For the most unimpaired communi-
cation of this idea or perception, the theory of the process adopted is briefly,
ist. To form an accurate chart of all stars capable of micrometrical measure-
ment in and around the nebula. 2d. From these, as the greater landmarks, to
fill in with all the lesser stars, down to the mznumum visible by estimation,
which, with care, need not fall far short of ordinary measurement. 3d. On
this, as a foundation, to lay down the nebula. After this preparation, subject
to no material distortion, except such digression from the original perception
of the observer as the difficulties of accurate representation by a shaded ground
and subsequent copying and engraving may cause. Lastly, the process in-
cludes the adoption of a method of representing nebule, intended to remove
the formidable and acknowledged difficulties just named, and at the same time
to introduce a numerical precision in the manner of expressing on paper their
various features; thereby transmitting the best impressions of observation with
almost unimpaired fidelity, and entailing only the necessary defects of original
vision. It is not supposed that this process, as more fully to be illustrated in
its application, is the best adapted to meet the end in view, for greater experi-
ence and reflection would certainly suggest particular modifications, if not ge-
neral alterations; nor is it intended as a description of what has been done in
the present instance, but rather of what might be done, with more time, and

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 167

under more favourable circumstances, by observers of greater skill and longer
practice.

3. The observations presented in the following paper are a portion of a series
undertaken in the summer of 1839. The range of objects which at that time
passed under inspection was considerably more extensive than the present list;
but many of these were examined in a desultory manner, and the rest of those
excluded are not favourable specimens of the style of observation which it is
intended to exemplify. The telescope employed was of the Herschelian con-
struction, with an aperture of twelve inches and a focal leneth of fourteen feet.
A short description of its construction and powers will not be uninteresting,
and may serve to show what degree of confidence is warranted in results ob-
tained by its aid. Although much inferior in size and light to some of the
gigantic reflectors of the Herschels, it yet is entitled to some distinction as the
largest telescope on this side of the Atlantic. The instrument was first planned
and begun in the summer of 1838, by my friend and classmate, Mr. H. L.
Smith. A tolerably good metal was cast, after several failures, and the specu-
lum was finally polished near the close of the summer. Mr. Smith and Mr.
Bradley shared the expenses attending the formation of the mirror and erection
of the telescope, and divided the long labour of grinding the speculum, and I
united with them in the less tedious task of giving the mirror its final polish
and figure. An account of its performance in some of our first rough trials of
its figure is furnished in a note on the 174th page of the XXX Vth volume of
Silliman’s American Journal of Science. It has since been frequently and
perseveringly repolished by Messrs. Smith and Bradley; the test objects men-
tioned in that note, however, have been about the limit of its separating power.

4. The mode of mounting the telescope was similar to Ramage’s, but ruder.
The base consisted of three beams, forming a triangle, which revolved on a
circular ledge of plank, by means of rollers at the angles, and which was
guided truly in its circuit by a cross-piece, through which rose a central bolt,
firmly driven into the ground. From the angles of this base rose three beams,
meeting at a height of sixteen or seventeen feet from the ground, and a rope
passed through a pulley fixed at this height, and sustained the weight of the
upper part of the telescope. ‘The lower end, containing the speculum, rested
on a small platform at one of the solid angles of the base, and revolved with
the frame. The quick motion in altitude was by means of the rope just men-

168 : OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULAE

tioned, which passed down to a windlass at the base, while a slow motion was
gained by an apparatus very similar to that described and figured in Pearson’s
Astronomy as attached to Ramage’s telescope—a combination of ropes within
the immediate command of the observer. In azimuth the whole frame could
be wheeled about by a single person, and a slower motion was obtained by
simply swinging the telescope by the hand, which could be done by the ob-
server, in following a star, with perfect steadiness. At very high altitudes, the
system of ropes was not available; but the weight of the upper end of the tele-
scope was then so little that the observer could grasp the tube in his arms,
steadying them by contact with the converging beams, and carry on his work
nearly as well as before. This method of directing a large telescope is much
ruder in description than in practice.

A light frame-work of steps, detached from the main frame, served to sup-
port the observer in his elevated situation. Against this the tube of the tele-
scope could be steadied at any moderate elevation, by means of a simple con-
trivance; this, however, was never necessary unless in high winds. The tube
was, at first, of wood, but was afterwards replaced by sheet iron, on account of
its superior hghtness and portability; it was painted outside and inside, and
protected, during bad weather, by oil-cloth, the speculum at such times being
taken out.

5. It was our intention, at first, to have availed ourselves of the power and
light of this instrument in a meridional review of a portion of the double stars
* of the younger Herschel’s catalogue. But a short experience convinced us
that its large surface was much better adapted to observations on the fainter
nebule than its power of separation to the examination of close double stars.
And an imperfection in the casting,* which, in spite of the most patient endea-
vours in renewed and frequent polishing, seemed to vitiate a portion of the

* Tt is exceedingly difficult to obtain a good casting of so large a speculum. The metal, in
itself, is of a composition that presents obstacles of no ordinary difficulty, while, from the compa-
rative ignorance and unskilfulness of many of our workmen in this department, those facilities are
not afforded for overcoming these obstacles which scientific interest in Great Britain and the older
countries of Europe has conferred. For a telescope considerably less in size I have had more than
fifty specula cast before I could obtain one free from imperfections, and susceptible of a very ex-
cellent figure. In the present case, the general figure of the speculum, except in the neighbour-
hood of the flaw I have spoken of, seemed to be excellent.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 169

speculum near it, although it did not prevent a very perfect definition of the
discs of large stars, was yet apt to throw around them flitting rays and burrs
of light, sometimes hiding very close or faint companions. By a skilful appli-
cation of diaphragms, these might be so far annihilated as to afford a good
separation of such stars as o Corone Borealis, § Orionis, u* Bootis, y Virginis,
4 Ophinchi, and others of less than 1” in distance, but the loss of light by this
mode of proceeding was a serious inconvenience. On objects as ill-defined as
nebule, however, the full light of the telescope could be employed to the ut-
most advantage. It was not long before a strict scrutiny revealed to us many
particulars concerning the nebule of the elder and younger Herschels, which
it was obvious that they had not noticed, and in some instances spaces of nebu-
lous matter of great extent, connected with well known nebule, but altogether
overlooked by former.observers. ‘These considerations decided the application
of the instrumental power we had obtained to this interesting field of inquiry.

6. The nebule which are the subjects of the present paper are 1991, 2008,
2092 and 2093 of Sir J. F. W. Herschel’s large catalogue, (Phil. Trans. 1833.)
These are, in reality, but three, since 2092 and 2093, as will be shownrin this
paper, are but parts of one very extensive nebula, united by a long, irregular
band of very faint nebulous matter. These three nebule are among the most
interesting objects in the heavens; perhaps, with the exception of Nebula
Orionis and Nebula Andromede, the most so. They are represented in Plates
IV., VL., and VII., with the stars in and near them, visible in the fourteen feet
telescope. The number of objects examined is small, in order that the utmost
accuracy in the delineation of the peculiar features and minutie of these ne-
bule, attainable by protracted scrutiny, might be aimed at. This must still
be limited by the unavoidable errors of judgment and the power of the tele-
scope. It is hoped, however, that by this means something has been done to
supply, in the examination of these nebule, the place of measurement in that
of double stars, and to put in our possession data by which future changes, if
there be any, can be recognised and detected in at least a few of these wonder-
ful sidereal systems.

7. The first intention was to intrust entirely to careful estimation the copy-
ing of the stars which were to form the ground-work of the nebula, since no
means of measurement were then at hand. The following is a sketch of the
course of procedure adopted in pursuance of this plan. The limits of the

VII.—2 s

170 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

nebula were traced as far as long and close examination could discern them,
and a rough chart was made of the principal stars within it. This preparation
was indispensable, because, in the consequent mapping down of all the visible
stars in the nebula, it was necessary to use a light out of doors, and the object,
of course, became invisible. ‘The distance between any two conspicuous stars,
favourably situated in the nebula, was then chosen as a standard of reference,
and from this as a base, a kind of triangulation was carried out by the eye to
all the stars in the neighbourhood, and these were successively marked on a
sheet of paper at the time; their magnitudes were also affixed to each according
to a fictitious scale, for which a few stars, conveniently situated, furnished
standards of reference as to size. A lamp was close at hand, whose light could
be cut off at pleasure; an almost direct comparison was thus instituted between
the stars in the field of view and those on paper, and corrections made where
any distortions in the latter were observable. As the work advanced from
night to night, the reference to the lamp was necessarily less and less direct,
since a longer exclusion of light was necessary to see the fainter stars. Finally,
the nebula itself was drawn upon the map by the guidance of the stars already
copied; and although only an occasional and unfrequent reference could be
made to a lamp, the stars within it had become so familiar by their constant
recurrence, that the memory could, as easily as before, retain its estzmatzons of
distance and direction, until mutual comparison could be made between the
map and the heavens.

The assistance which is rendered to the faithful description of these remark-
able objects by thus laying a groundwork of stars, may be well illustrated by
the familiar expedient of artists, who divide any complicated engraving which
they would copy, into a great number of squares, their intended sketch oceu-
pying asimilar number. ‘The stars, which are apparently interwoven through-
out the whole extent of the nebule, furnish a set of thickly distributed natural
points of reference, which, truly transferred to the paper, are as available as
the cross-lines of the artist in limiting and fixing the appearance of the future
drawing.

8. In nebule of great extent, however correctly estimated may be the stars
immediately around the standard of reference, those in the distant parts of the
nebula are liable to suffer from an accumulation of errors of nearly the same
kind as that arising in an extended trigonometrical survey. But if the places

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 171

of the larger stars are well settled by fixed instruments, there will be far less
room for error in estimations which spread, as from so many centres, over the
remaining intervals. It was extremely desirable, in the present case, to ensure
accuracy by such a course; although it would have been preferable, had the
means existed, to have resorted to it in the first instance. The opportunity
was, however, fortunately afforded at a late period of this research, by the un-
expected arrival of an excellent micrometer from England, belonging to Yale
College, and adaptable to the ten feet Clarke’s telescope in the observatory of
the institution. I was enabled, by the kindness of Professor Olmsted, to avail
myself of this instrument, and, during the fall of 1839, took repeated measures
in right ascension and declination of so many stars in each nebula as would
serve to determine, within a very small quantity, the places of those which
were utterly too faint for any measurement. An abstract of these measures is
contained in this paper. By these means the places of all the stars were
brought to such a degree of exactness that it was thought expedient to throw
them into the form of catalogues, especially as a direct reference could thus be
made to any particular star, and, through it, to any portion of each nebula,
without the necessity of encumbering the map with multitudes of letters or
numbers. ‘These catalogues, which are contained in Articles 37, 38 and 39,
will be referred to constantly in this paper, and from them the star correspond-
ing to any number in the catalogues will be easily found on the maps.

9. There must be a very considerable, though partial dependence, after all,
upon the eye of the observer and the delicacy of its judgments. And as, in
the use of any instrument, we feel unsafe and distrustful until aware of its
errors and their probable amount, so in this kind of estemation by the eye, a
knowledge of its liability to error is necessary to command the confidence either
of the observer or of others in the results obtained by this means. To ascer-
tain the liability of these charts to error from this source, I frequently drew a
set of triangles upon paper, and after estimating their angles and the compara-
tive lengths of the sides, measured the same. From the mean of a great num-
ber of trials, I found my average error in such estimations to be less than two
degrees upon angles, and ,, or ;> in comparative distances. A fairer allow-
ance may, perhaps, result from estimated angles of position and distances of
double stars. JI have a record of a considerable number of such, observed on
the meridian during the summer of 1838, thirty-six of which are comparable

172 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

with standard catalogues. The mean error of these estimations in position is
4°, in distance .09 of the whole. As these estimations were of absolute dis-
tance, and included stars ranging from € Libre and 4 Ophinchi to such as
were several minutes asunder, it may be inferred that the errors of merely
relative distance in the drawings will be considerably less.

A still better test is afforded by the comparison of the star-charts as first
copied from the heavens by simple est¢mation, with the projections afforded by
later micrometrical measurement. ‘The latter were laid over the former, and
the discordances between the two are given in numbers in Article 34. By
taking from that table the mean of the errors of estimatzon on each star, we find
that, where they were made in the most careful manner, their average error in
right ascension is about 0.°4, and in declination about 63”. ‘These were ina
space of 20' diameter; the spaces included between the settled, or standard
stars, are generally much smaller than this, and, of course, diminish the lia-
bility to error. Although the mean errors named above show that careful estz-
mations need not, in small spaces, be in error to so great an amount as 5” or 6’,
(an accuracy not very far from that of actual measurement,) yet it may be well
to add, that some portions of the larger nebule were more hurriedly and less
accurately observed, as explained in Article 34. From all these sources a
tolerably correct idea of the probable error of judgment, so to speak, may be
deduced.

10. I will here speak of a method that I hit upon for the exact representation
of nebule, which has essentially contributed to the accuracy of the accompa-
nying delineations; the one referred to in Article 2. It was first suggested by
the method usually adopted for the representation of heights above the sea-
level on geographical maps, by drawing curves which represent horizontal sec-
tions of hill and valley at successive elevations above the level of the sea, that
is, by lines of equal height; and it is the same in its principle. It is obvious,
that if lines be imagined in the field of view winding around through all those
portions of a nebula which have exactly equal brightness, these lines, trans-
ferred to our chart of stars, will give a faithful representation of the nebula and
its minutie, and of the suddenness as well as of the amount of transition from
one degree of shade to another. I cannot better illustrate my idea than by a
reference to Plate II., the lines of which were transferred directly from the
field of view to the paper in this way, and will be immediately recognised as

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 173

identical with the nebula of Plate 1V. The lines marked 5 were traced in the
telescope among the stars, and imagined to surround all those portions of the
nebula which are of uniform brightness, and brighter than any other part.
The first perceptible gradation or diminution of light is bounded by the lines
marked 4, and so on, successively, to the line 3, which represents the utmost
bounds of the visible nebula. All these limes were first traced carefully by the
eye, in their windings among the stars in the field, retraced by the pencil upon
a map of the stars at hand, and finally corrected by repeated and mutual com-
parison.

11. If we suppose in Plate V. the faintest perceptible tint to be laid over all
the space included within the line 3, and upon that, another layer of shade
bounded by the line 1, such that the gradation shall be just perceptible, and so
go on, increasing in depth of shade, till the last tint laid on within the lines 5
shall represent the brightest portions of the nebula, we have at once a repre-
sentation of h.* 1991, giving, in its fullest perfection, the original idea of the
observer, as formed with the object under his immediate and minute inspection.
The great errors which are likely to arise in drawing and shading such deli-
cate objects are done away. In the usual mode, a slight pressure of the pen-
cil, or even the inequalities of the paper, may give a different impression of the
particular features of the object from that which the observer intended; and
where the gradations of shade to be represented are so extremely delicate, it
cannot go through the process of engraving without still farther suffering in
accuracy. In the method here proposed these sources of error are annihilated,
for these lines can be drawn and corrected out of doors, with the native object
in view, and can be transferred to the engraved plate without appreciable
alteration.

12. In strictness, we should further suppose that these tints shade off into
each other at their boundary lines, or that the lines should be drawn at infi-
nitesimal intervals from each other, as exact theory must require, and con-
formity with the gradual decrease of light in the objects themselves. But, in
practice, it is only necessary to draw the lines so that the spaces between them
shall represent the least equal gradations of light visible to the eye, as has been

* The reference to Sir J. F. W. Herschel’s catalogues is here, and elsewhere, by means of the
small letter h, according to his own notation. So, also, Sh refers to ‘‘ Herschel and South’s Cata-
logue,” 1824.

V1I.—2 T

174 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

done in Plate V. Farther than this, of course, it would be useless to multiply
lines; and these express the rate of condensation as well, and in much the same
way as a series of points distributed at very small, equal intervals serve to de-
termine the curve in which they are situated.

This method may be designated as a method by lines of equal brightness, in
analogy with the terms “cotidal lines,’—“ lines of equal magnetic intensity,”
&c., to which modes of expressing facts it is nearly allied.

13. In the double nebula, (Plate V.) the southern member of which is the
very remarkable and well known nebula divided into three portions by dark
rifts, and having a triple star in the centre, and the northern member, one
hitherto overlooked, and surrounding the bright star in its neighbourhood, the
lines of equal brightness enable us to recognise at once particulars such as these:
that the portion of the é77fid marked A suddenly shades off, almost to darkness,
on the side towards the triple star, as is indicated by the closeness with which
the lines succeed each other, while the transition outward is very slow and
gradual; that the three nuclei of the southern portion, running up to shade 5,
are perceptibly brighter than that of the northern, whose brightest portion is
only within the line 4; and others of a similar description. It is evident, at
once, that all such particulars concerning a nebula as are expressed, in the
younger Herschel’s nomenclature, by the terms “gradually,” “suddenly,” and
“very suddenly—brighter in the middle,” are indicated in this method by a
greater and greater proximity and crowding of the lines; while the distinction
between such terms as these, “suddenly brighter” and “suddenly much
brighter—in the middle,” are marked by a greater number of these lines inter-
vening in the latter case than the former. It will be easy to conceive how all
other particulars concerning a nebula, except, perhaps, its resolvability, and
the like, can be at once embodied in the simplest form of diagram at the time
of observation.

14. The half lines serve to show strongly suspected gradations of shade; for
instance, within the space enclosed by the line 14, the nebula is suspected to
brighten up a little, dividing the rift a into two branches. Many minute par-
ticulars are perfectly and readily distinguished at a glance in Plate V., but far
less easily and definitely in Plate IV. And even Plate IV., as well as the other
shaded drawings, owe much of their minute accuracy, in the hands of the en-
graver, to drawings similar in design to Plate V. They are, in fact, copied

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 175

from such, by the artist, in a way somewhat resembling the imaginary process
I have described in Article 11, of laying upon them successive tints of shade.

15. It will be observed that but one nebula is represented in the figures by
this method of lines. It was deemed expedient to adopt, at present, the com-
mon mode, that the drawings might be better understood. ‘The originals by
lines, however, are preserved, and are considered more accurate sources of
reference.

16. I will now proceed to the immediate observations on the nebule, only
premising that less care was taken to keep records of them in the form of a
journal than to embody them in drawings. From these drawings the plates
accompanying this paper have been principally compiled. I regret that I have
at hand no notes of Mr. Smith’s observations distinct from my own, and can,
therefore, furnish only such scattered remarks of his as I have happened to re-
cord at the time. This deficiency is of little real consequence, since it was the
constant practice for each of us to verify the observations of the other. Indeed,
in all cases where there could be any doubt, no particular was considered as
any thing more than a mere suspicion, whose existence had not been fully and

independently corroborated by the other’s testimony.

OBSERVATIONS WITH THE FourRTEEN Fret REFLECTOR.

17. Nebulah. 1991.

1839. July 12.—Saw the triple nebula in Sagittarius. The three clefts which divide it
were made out without difficulty, although the whole nebula was extremely faint. Rather
low in the horizon.

lug. 1.—Observed the trifid nebula of Herschel. The double star is certainly not as
figured in the Phil. Trans., 1833, but rather adhering to the left of the three divisions. (A
diagram was made, exhibiting this peculiarity.) The star was not seen triple.

Alug. 7. NebulaIV.41. The nebula much brighter than I have seen it before. Mr.
Smith and myself both remarked that the large star (22) immediately adjoining was sur-
rounded with a very distinct nebula, not far inferior in brightness to the trifid. It was
scarcely to be overlooked, and was seen at the first glance into the field. Its limits are
nearly as great as those of the trifid nebula, with which it is nearly, or quite, in contact. On
looking over Herschel’s observations on this nebula, it was very evident that this is to be

176 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

classed among the Novex, although immediately contiguous to one of the most remarkable’
and frequently observed nebule in the heavens.

‘lug. 9.—Figured some half dozen of the stars of the trifid nebula. I see distinctly the
star near its centre triple, but a ray or burr of light from the larger star nearly obscures
the faint companion, so that I can scarcely tell whether the difficulty of the small star con-
sists in its closeness or faintness. Estimated-distance of AB 10”; of AC 5”, but the last may
easily be in error from the cause just mentioned. The triple star is certainly not central, but
involved in the skirts of the division marked A in the diagram, and also is north of the point
where the three clefts meet, being in the cleft y. The division B runs up at the junction
towards, or into the opposite cleft @ a little way, shading off, at the same time, so gradually
that, at first sight, the rift « seems to proceed more directly from the triple star than it really
does.

“lug. 10.—Finished figuring the stars in Nebula Trifid. There is scarcely a visible. star
in the nebula above the triple star.

Figured the nebula. There is a peculiarity about the cleft « which had been suspected on
the night of the 9th. It shelves off suddenly to the north with a pretty well defined boun-
dary, which I can trace nearly up to the star (2;) if I mistake not, it divides in two, leaving
an extremely faint nebulosity, or fourth portion, isolated from the rest. Mr. S. saw the sud-
den turn of the cleft northwards, but could not satisfy himself as to its division into two,
which must therefore remain uncertain.

Peculiarities of the lower nebula.—There is a large, but indistinct vacancy, or gap, north,
or below its central star, where the nebula is decidedly less bright, while, on the left hand
of this vacaney, is a small portion brighter than the rest of the nebula. “TI think the va-
cancy runs up past the central star, though narrower there.”—S. In my own observation,
I think it does not quite reach the central star, so that it remains doubtful whether the star
in the centre is not somewhat isolated from the surrounding nebula. I saw the same appear-
ance described by Mr. Smith, but considered it the effect of the brightness of the star in
effacing the impression of the nebula in its immediate neighbourhood. Our estimates of the
utmost extent of the lower nebula nearly agreed, although its boundary was very indefinite.

“lug. 14.—The nebula IV. 41 again examined; the moon at first troublesome, but setting.
I tried, this evening, a plan for better delineating this nebula by lines which represented
equal gradations of shade. I find it more convenient and direct, and, I believe, much more
accurate. I think I can thus take a copy of the nebula with as much exactness as I can see
it. To settle the angles of position of the triple star, lines were drawn on the star-chart, re-
presenting their apparent directions as referred to other stars in the nebula. The nebula, as.
delineated by lines, was compared by Mr. Smith, and verified; some slight alterations were
suggested by himself, nearly all of which a re-examination confirmed, and some others added,,

which are better expressed in the drawing than by description.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. Lia

18. Nebulah. 2008.

1839. Aug. 1.—Observed nebula M. 17. Nearly all the parts figured by Herschel in
the Phil. Trans. are distinctly and beautifully seen. The night has evidently improved.

The two knots which Herschel describes in the appendix to his paper are well seen, but
the upper one not resolvable; the lower one is seen by Mr. Smith and myself oval, and ex-
tending downwards. I think there is a small branch at the angle of the nebula, in a down-
ward direction towards a coarse collection of large stars just below. A careful diagram made
of this and other particulars.

Aug. 3.—The curved part of this nebula is certainly smaller in proportion to the bright
following branch than is represented in Herschel’s figure. The extremely faint preceding
branch neither of us are able to see, although guided by Herschel’s figure.

Aug. 7.—There is a coarse collection of stars below this nebula, in which I have once or
twice suspected faint nebulosity. The branch before spoken of as extending downwards
from the smaller of the two knots, seems to pass to the right hand part of this cluster, and,
perhaps, running through it, to rise again, returning to the bright arm of the nebula, near the
star (29.) This is but a bare suspicion, for an assemblage of stars often gives a deceptive ap-
pearance of nebulosity among them.*

«“ There is, I think, a faint ray from the internal angle of the nebula, towards the upper
star of Herschel’s figure (25 of Plate VI.)”—S. This observation of Mr. Smith’s it was
too late for me to verify.

Aug. 10.—Messier 17. Figured the stars in this nebula, amounting to upwards of thirty;
also the principal features of the nebula. The bright following branch is remarkably devoid
of large stars; it is, however, thick set with extremely small stars, just beyond the limits of
distinct visibility; the places of three of these, after long attention, I have succeeded in fixing,
and, with time and patience, could obtain more, but have little of either to spare; the fatigue
of the eye, moreover, is extreme.

The observation made by Mr. Smith, on the 7th, of a faint ray towards the star (25) is, in
a great measure confirmed; I see certainly the upper boundary of such a ray, but think it
melts into, or joins with, the bright branch of the nebula below, being like a thin veil, or

gauze of light, drawn up from the bright nebula, and stretched from the star to the internal

* It is scarcely to be supposed that this very common illusion is due to the sympathy of the neighbouring parts
of the retina, which is only adequate to account for the usual aberration, or irradiation, of stars. If I might
hazard a conjecture, I should, perhaps, attribute it to the same optical effect by which Sir J. Herschel (Mem.
Ast. Soc., Vol. II., p. 490) is inclined to explain the apparent recession of the nebula Orionis from the stars of
the trapezium situate within it; contrast with their strong light blotting out the nebula in their vicinity. So the
diffuse starlight, which always redeems the sky from perfect blackness, may, perhaps, among many large stars,
be faintly revealed by contrast with the portions effaced in the immediate vicinity of the stars. This is, at best,
a very doubtful explanation, and principally thrown out for the purpose of calling attention to the phenomenon.

ViI.—2 U

178 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

angle, where lies Herschel’s resolvable knot. And, if I mistake not, all the space from this
star to the vertex of the bend is filled up with extremely faint light. The knot is isolated
from the rest of the nebula, and the vacancy in which it is situated is closed in on the right
and left hand, but, I think, not above and below, or, at least, above. . . . . The nebula
at the external angle stretches much farther towards the north preceding than in Herschel’s
figure, but with a faint shade. Mr. Smith confirms my view of his ray.

lug. 14.—Finished the delineation of the nebula 17 of Messier by the mode of lines.
The larger knot stretches faintly upwards to a second nucleus, or rather star, just above.
With close attention, I am almost satisfied it is a very small star. The curve of the bright
following branch is much as in Herschel’s drawing; I think the curve of the faint bend dif-
fers more materially.

Aug. 19.—Attempted some observation on Messier 17, but the moon interferes. It is too
late for the star seen on the 14th, in Herschel’s knot, to be verified by Mr. Smith. Farther
re-examination was desirable upon this nebula, and the places of the stars it contained, but

such is now impracticable.

19. Nebula h. 2092 and 2093.

1839. July.—(There were several observations of little importance during the month of
July, in which these two nebule were noted as separate, and the peculiarities of Herschel’s
description recorded as being “ well seen.’’)

‘lug. 1.—The faint band suspected between V. 14 and 2093 of Herschel’s catalogue is
fully confirmed by this evening’s observation. Mr. Smith and myself were both able to
trace the nebula continuously from one to the other, and the reverse, so that these are now
satisfactorily ascertained to constitute one immense nebula, stretching through several fields
of 30' diameter. From the right ascensions and declinations of these two nebule, as given
by Herschel, the whole cannot well be less than 2° or 3° long. ‘The double star mentioned
by Herschel is seen, as also the trapezium near the bifurcation, but the latter is evidently
somewhat distorted in his figure. The peculiar characteristic of the upper portion of the
nebula cannot be mistaken. I can think of no comparison as good as that which Herschel
gives it, that of a network, or interlacing of nebula. The stars follow the disposition of this
network very perfectly, and their real connexion with the nebula is as obvious as the testi-
mony of the eye and of common sense can make it. It is almost impossible that the pheno-
menon can result from a mere superposition of stars; indeed, the chances against the suppo-
sition of their independence of each other must be very nearly infinite.

Aug. 3.—Attempted a triangulation among the principal stars in the great Nebula Cygni,
to assist in exactly copying the nebula. Thirteen were thus taken, their angles of position
with each other, and comparative distances carefully estimated and called out by one of us,

while the other recorded. The power used was the ordinary observing power of 80.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 179

Aug. 7.—Nebula Cygni. The method of fixing the places of the stars adopted on the 3d
was found much too slow and tedious. I therefore fixed a lamp just beneath my feet, on the
ladder of steps, and found I could, by this means, easily copy the stars from the field on a
sheet of paper. I think this method is as exact as that of the 3d; I can thus correct and re-
correct as long as my eye perceives any difference between the original and the copy. It is,
moreover, much more rapid; I have recorded and corrected fifty-eight stars in the course of
three or four hours, and affixed their magnitudes with equal care.

The nebula is, at the trapezium of stars, divided as in Herschel’s figure, but just below this
the larger branch forks again, or, at least, is fainter along the middle than at the edges. Mr.
Smith and myself noticed this independently of each other, and without previous notice of
each other’s views. The brightest part of the nebula is at the bifurcation near the trapezium;
the next brightest, though considerably fainter, is situated in the interlaced portion, and lies
along the two stars (133) and (162.)

ug. 9.—Figured one hundred and thirty-four stars in the same way as on August 7th;
about ninety of these are new. The time occupied was about six hours. These complete
all within the network portion of the nebula. All the stars down to the minimum visibile
are put down, which are near the brighter portions of the nebula; in some excessively faint
branches and convolutions, winding away to a greater distance, only those more easily seen
are recorded. The scale of magnitudes is an artificial one, from 1 to 12, the star (187) being
of magnitude 1, and the “ minima visibilia”’ (149) and (156) being of the 12th. Care has
been taken to set down every star in the dark hollows left by the interwoven nebula, and
the “wonderful phenomenon” described by Herschel becomes, in this way, very apparent;
for a tolerably correct representation of many of the windings of the nebula in the heavens
may be obtained by simply following, on the star-chart, the courses marked out by the stars
themselves. On the complete map of the stars the future nebula already strikes the eye.

In the lower part of the nebula, for convenience sake termed “the bifurcate,’’ (while the
upper may be called “the network portion,’”’) the same faint division was seen as last night.
With 220, faint stars were seen in each division of the great branch. Mr. Smith suspected
another branch, turning off to the right hand, towards the bright star (8.) I am of the same
opinion. There is a chain of stars, consisting of three loops, or more, which hang, festoon-
like, from the preceding side of the nebula, and which seem to be mixed with nebulosity in
the same way as in the network portion. If this is so, the branch noticed by Mr. Smith
forms the beginning of one of those loops. But there is great liability to error where nebu-
losity is suspected among a congeries, or chain of stars; and especially is this the case in the
present nebula, on account of the wonderful peculiarity already mentioned.

‘lug. 10.—The stars along the bifureate portion of the nebula were recorded this evening,
twenty-five of which, out of between fifty and sixty, were new. On this evening, and on
former evenings, the lowest power of about 80 was employed in taking all tne stars down to

the ninth or tenth magnitude of my scale; and a higher power of 220 was employed to ob-

180 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

tain the fainter stars of the eleventh and twelfth magnitudes, where such were deemed de-
sirable. The nebula itself was decidedly fainter with 220 than with 80, and on this account,
as well as from its great extent, the nebula was examined and figured principally with the
lowest power. (These remarks apply also to the powers commonly used on the other
nebulee. )

I think the nebula terminates near a pretty bright star (1;) I cannot certainly trace it far-
ther. Two bright stars of my first magnitude, or rather higher than any magnitude of my
scale, lie a little to the left hand of this extremity. Much of the nebula was roughly figured
last night; the figuring to-night completed in the network portion—also, in the faint band
down to the bifurcation. The character of this band seems to change as it approaches the
network, beginning to break up into windings and hollows, as if it partially partook of the
strange peculiarity of that portion in its approach thereto. The other end of the nebula
seems disposed, if I may so speak, to break up into rifts and branches nearly parallel, and is
certainly very different in its characteristics from the upper portion.

Aug. 19.—Nebula Cygni. Thirty or forty stars were added to the extreme lower por-
tion, of which not one-half are new. The description of the nebula by lines begun. I am
still uncertain about the three loops mentioned on the 9th. If they are as suspected, there is
reason to believe the same in many places all around. Indeed, the whole back-ground of
the heavens around the network, and in some places below, seems intersected with loops of
suspected nebulosity; it is certainly different in appearance from other portions of the hea-
vens. The loops and lace-work, which are certainly visible, probably fade off into such as
we cannot see, or, at least, can but suspect.

I am not entirely certain of the subdivision into two of the larger bifurcate branch, first
noticed August 7th. With 220, two or three minute stars are set down in each of the sup-
posed branches, which certainly add to the effect, if they do not produce it. But, with con-
siderable attention, the division seems to exist above and below the place where these minute
stars are, the nebula between the two minor branches being not much inferior to either of
them in brightness. The other division, that of Herschel, is tolerably black, and very dis-
tinct. On the whole, I think the existence of a second division is confirmed.

Aug. 20.—The description of the Nebula Cygni by lines completed. The stars in the
extreme lower part of this nebula are not so accurately placed as at the bifurcation and in the
network, nor do they descend to as definite and equal a limit in the scale of magnitudes.
But such care is obviously of less use in this lower diffuse part.

The star (83,) at the bifurcation, was suspected to be a nucleus. With 220 it appears
somewhat blotty, and different from other equal stars in the vicinity. It is in the very
brightest portion of the nebula, at the principal bifurcation. With long attention, I am still
uncertain whether this be a nucleus or a kind of nebulous star. To determine this point
must require a telescope of greater light, or, at least, a bettereye. Mr. Smith had no oppor-
tunity of examining this point.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 181

The various particulars in the figured nebule were confirmed by Mr. Smith on different
evenings; and such points as he did not confirm are considered as uncertain.*

MicroMETRICAL MEASURES OF THE STARS IN THE NEBULZ.

20. The instrument with which these were taken was the ten feet telescope
of G. Dollond, belonging to the philosophical department of Yale College.
The aperture of this telescope is five inches; and its defining power is such as
to resolve & Libre, o Corone Borealis, and other double stars of between 1” and
2” distance, and to exhibit the division in the ring of Saturn with ease. The
micrometer is also of Dollond’s most recent construction; a parallel wire mi-
crometer, with screws of about one hundred threads to the inch, each revolu-
tion of the screw being subdivided into 100ths upon graduated heads. Farther
subdivision, when desirable, is easily made by estimation. The wires are, I

* The fourteen feet telescope used in these observations was taken down in the latter part of August. On the
graduation of the class in Yale College to which Mr. Smith and myself had belonged, the reflector became wholly
the property of Mr. Smith, and was removed to Ohio City, Ohio. It has already been remounted there, and in a
better frame, and with more perfect adjustments than before, as an extract from a recent letter of his will show:

“The stand,” he writes, “‘is precisely similar to the engraving, in the Philosophical Transactions, of the one
erected by Ramage at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. It is full twenty feet high, and has a sliding gallery
that will hold, with convenience, four persons. The telescope swings between two parallel beams, about six feet
apart; up and down these the gallery can be raised or depressed by one person easily. The telescope is con-
atructed to roll forward, so that the mouth may be at a convenient distance from the gallery. After observing,
ihe tube can be let down into a tight box, and locked up; the whole is supported by four iron rollers, and can be
turned by one person in any direction. The apparatus for slow motion in altitude is the same as in New Haven;
Ihave been making some arrangements for a slow motion in azimuth.” Mr. Smith farther writes that he hag
been prevented from making any observations of importance by the continuance of unfavourable weather. He
thas, however, lately fitted an excellent micrometer to his telescope, the work of an American artist, and will soon
be prepared for fresh labours. From his zeal and activity, with so valuable an instrument, we cannot but expect
the most interesting results. By the same letter [ am furnished with a note of his observations on the 16th of
July, 1839, which I insert as favourably exhibiting the power and capability of the telescope about the time it
was employed on the foregoing nebule. . . . . “July 19,8,P.M. Saw 7 Virginis with 400 and 700, the
latter a single lens, very beautifully; the same evening, 10, P.M.,saw a Ophinchi distinctly separated, and at
11, P.M., € Bootis triple.” The latter I have never seen with this telescope, nor 4? Lootis, which Mr Smith
ways he has “frequently seen,’ but adds “ that he could never separate » Corone Borealis.’’ These afford good
tests of the defining power of the instrument.

But few of the common tests of light have been observed. Favourable specimens of its “‘ minimum visibile"’
are, however, (149) and (156) of the large Nebula Cygni, already instanced, besides two or three of the smallest
stars in each of the other nebule. By an entry in the rough journal of observations, it appears that &. 250, or
the ‘‘ Polarissima”’ of Herschel, a nebula almost exactly at the pole, was, if certainly seen, a fair example of its
himit of visual power.

‘VIIL.—2 Vv

182 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULZE

believe, of platina; with the present telescope, they are each 2’.28 in thickness:
their number and arrangement, as also the construction of other parts of the
micrometer, is very similar to that of TTroughton’s spider-line micrometer, as
described in Pearson’s Practical Astronomy.

21. The illumination, however, is different, and resembles that employed by
Frauenhofer to render visible his lines on glass. ‘The light falls on the wires
at right angles to the optical axis of the telescope, thus illuminating them upon
one side, while the rest of the field is dark. ‘This arrangement possesses con-
siderable advantages in rendering visible small stars, which it would be other-
wise extremely difficult to measure, if, indeed, they could be seen at all in an
illuminated field. I found this property of great use, since nearly all the stars
I wished to measure were below the tenth or eleventh magnitude. The chief
faults of the present construction were two. The scale of teeth in the field of
view, which marks the number of whole revolutions, is illuminated only edge-
wise by the light; it was in all positions difficult, and in many impossible to
be read off. Great loss of time, and sometimes impaired accuracy, was the
necessary consequence. ‘The other defect was in the size of the wires; this
made the line of illumination needlessly broad, and prevented small stars from
being seen near or on it, unless too faintly lighted for accuracy. Neither of
these faults are necessary to this construction, and both might be remedied
without difficulty.

22. The telescope, being mounted with an altitude and azimuth motion,
which, moreover, was quite unsteady and liable to tremors, was ill-adapted to
micrometrical observation. ‘The mode of managing the micrometer was ne-
cessarily peculiar, and its essential differences from the common and more
regular employment of the instrument I shall briefly describe. The circle of
the micrometer was turned until the stars in the field ran parallel to the two
moveable wires. ‘Their transits across the fixed wire, which then represented
an hour circle at that point of the heavens, were noted blindly in a book at
hand, no other way being practicable with a succession of stars at intervals of
a few seconds. each, or occasionally of less than a second. These furnished
differences of right ascension. Those of declination were obtained by bringing
the moveable wires over the two stars whose difference was required. No
measure was considered good in which some star, brought on one of the wires
for that purpose, was not completely bisected during the whole run across the

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 183

field; and at each new bearing of the telescope, preparatory to a fresh run, the
circle of position was altered accordingly. But in this way many measures
were necessarily rejected. ‘The farther end of the telescope was steadied by
contact with a double opening window-shutter, which gradually yielded to the
azimuthal motion, yet with sufficient resistance to maintain the stars in the
field at perfect rest.

In declination, on account of the defects before mentioned, and others of
minor importance, more than one measure could seldom be obtained during a
single run across the field, and that not cotemporaneously with the transits.
In addition to this, the frequent necessity of entire disadjustment of the micro-
meter, in order to read off the scale within the field, caused a great waste of
time; so that the measurement of the stars in the nebule, though of less im-
portance than the observations with the reflector, occupied very much more
time and labour. And it will not be surprising, after this very incomplete
statement of the difficulties which it was necessary to encounter, and of the
numerous sources of error thence arising, if the following measures should, in
a few cases, offer somewhat greater discordances than those which occur in
observations with a steady instrument, moving in the parallel of the star, and
employed in measuring objects that can bear direct vision and full illumi-
nation.

23. Reduction of the Measures. 'The value of the screm, since the field would
scarce include the sun’s diameter, was determined entirely by passages of
known stars over a given interval, a number of which were observed nearly
every evening on which any measures were taken. It was subject to a very
slight fluctuation, depending on changes of temperature and minute differences
of focal adjustment; and hence it was checked by a comparison of the measures
of the largest differences of declination on different evenings. One revolution
of the screw at its mean state was equal to 17’.640.

The zero error was always measured by daylight, and was applied as a cor-
rection to the intervals of passage on all stars which were taken to determine
the value of the scale, and to all measures in declination. During the fall
months it increased gradually and uniformly from + 1°.57 to + 3’.83.

There is evidently no allowance necessary for the thickness of the wires, on
account of their partial illumination, in any of the different uses to which the
micrometer was applied in the present instance.

184 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

24. A correction remains to be noticed, which is due to difference of refrac-
tion in any two stars whose apparent differences of R. A. and Decl. have been
measured. ‘This becomes of considerable importance from the construction of
the observatory, which was such as to limit the range of the telescope to com-
paratively low altitudes, for the stars of the nebule were observable only during
the last two or three hours of their diurnal circles. The altitude of the object
at the time of observation was therefore noted; at first, roughly, by means of a
rude quadrant, or by estimation from the bearing of the telescope; afterwards,
when the importance of this correction was fully known, and especially in the
Nebula Cygni, where the distances measured were considerable, by recording
the sidereal time of observation, from which the hour angle, and thence the
altitude of the object is easily deduced. The altitude being -known, the ob-
served measures were corrected for refraction by the following equations:

If A’ and D' = the observed differences of R. A. and Decl. between any two
stars in the field, reckoned with their usual signs, and in
minutes of space,

and A and D = the true differences, “ es ss ‘ a « 5
- ¢ = difference of refraction for 1' at the known altitude, always
positive,
v = the angle of variation of the hour circle in the field of view,
reckoned from the vertical around to the right hand,
and 6 = the declination of the nebula,
we have these three equations:
(1.) D = D' +7 D' cos’. v.
(2:) A= A'+2,r7D'sin. v cos. v sec. 6.
(3.) A= A'=7r A' sin? v.

The first two are applicable to observed differences of Decl. and R. A. be-
tween two stars in the field of view; the last to observed passages of a single
star between two wires, in determining the value of the scale. These equa-
tions are not such as they would be for an instrument mounted equatorially :
they express the condition, that the stars in the field shall, at all altitudes, run
on a parallel to one of the wires, which was, in the present instance, the only
practicable mode of conducting observation.

For the three nebule observed the values of 7 cos®. v (eq. 1,) and 2 7 sin. v.
cos. » sec. 6 (eq. 2) were calculated for every observable degree of altitude, and

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 185

their logarithms to two places tabulated. Its application to each individual
measure thus becomes very easy.

25. The first column of the following series of measures contains the date of
observation. In the second are the numbers of the measured stars, as referred
to the catalogue. The sign — between them indicates differences of right as-
cension or declination; thus, in Art. 26, 1 — 9 stands for Decl. of star (1) —
Decl. of star (9.)

The third column contains the observed difference of right ascension (A',) or
of declination of (D'.) The fourth shows the altitude or sidereal time of ob-
servation. In the fifth is the correction for refraction due to such altitude, for
declination 7 D' cos®. v, and for right ascension 2 7 D' sin. v cos. v sec. 6, ac-
cording to the formule above given. By the addition of this correction to the
observed differences in the third column we are furnished in the sixth with
the true differences, (A) and (D.) ‘The seventh column contains the number
of measures, of which the observed difference in the third column is the mean,
and the eighth shows the probable error of each single measure, or the average
difference from the mean of the set; these are respectively designated by x
and e.

Nebulah. 1991.

26. DIFFERENCES OF DECLINATION.

Date. Stars. D' Altitude. perect fon D nn} ¢é - Remarks.

Oct. 3] 1 — 9+ 905.4) 19°...18° |-+ 2”.0/+ 9077.4) 4/1”.2|-Very liable to be affected by slight
UG) Ge 905 .4 13 3.4] 908 .8} 4/0 .4| errors in pos. of wires.

Nov. 2 OC 897 .6/84..7..6..5] 9.5} 907 .1/13/2 .5\—Low, but clear.
se 4 ‘s 899 .9| 10... G 7 4 907 .3/15]1 .3

Oct. 5) 2—9 216.0) 17...16 0.6} 216.6} 6/2 .2
6 8 ce |- 215 6) 15...14 |+ 0.7/4 216 .3) 8/0 .7
« =§6h} 8B —I— 8.1 no corr. |\— 8.1] 6/0 .8
0 8 Gi OG no corr. |— 9.6) 8/0 .7
«6-419 —9-+4 60.4) 20...19 |+ 0.1/+ 60 .5| 9/4 .4-Star (19) invisible near the wire.
& 8 fo 65 .9| 17 ...16 0 .2 66 .1| 8/2 .0-Wire made as faint as possible;
“« 5/21 — 9 240.0) 19...18 0.5; 240.5) 6/0 .5| measures decidedly better on
ss 8 se 237 .7| 13...11 1.0 238 .7/ 8/0 .5| this account.
OC 122 — 9| 447 .9| 18 ...16 1.1 449 .0| 3|1 .5)
ae 3 se 449 5 21 0.8 450 .3} 2/0 .7|
GT) ¢ |4 450.8) 15...14 |+ 1 .4)+ 452 .2) 810 .4
«924 — 9\— 70 .2) 20...18 |— 0 .2|\— 70 .4) 6/3 .0|-Excessively difficult to measure.
cc 4/25 — 9/4 112 .4,19...17 |4+ 0 .3|-4 112.7) 8/2 .5| Probably not very accurate.
cS “¢ |+ 112 .5) 20...17 |+ 0 .3|+ 112.8} 9/1 .2—Wire made faintly visible; this
9/28 — 9i— 270 .2| 22 ...20 |— 0 .5|— 270 .7| 9/0 .6| certainly adds to accuracy.

Vil.—2 w

186

Date.

Oct.

66

Stars.

66

24 —9
25 —9
Pi} — Oye

SCOEOPROORE OR WE KRwWOR OUR CH ODP Oe

1 — 9}— 285.98

OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULZ

27. DIFFERENCES oF Ricut ASCENSION.

28. DIFFERENCES

Correction

Al Altitude. Coon A n e Remarks.
21°...19°|-+ 0s.11/— 28°.87| 6 | 08.29
28 .8 22 0.08} 28.72/sing.| meas.
29 .04/22 ...14 0.20) 28.84). 7 | 0.47
28 .84/17 ...13 | 0 .25),— 28 .59) 5 |0.51
8 .25/20 ...19 |+ 0.03\— 8 .22) 2 | 0 .45|-Not seen within 1s of the wire.
8 .8 22 0 .02 8 .78|sing.| meas.|-A second in error!
7.77/22 14 0.05 7.72} 9 | 0.22
7 8 20 0 .03 7 .77\sing.| meas.|-Wire made very faint.
7.10/19 ...13 |-+ 0 .06 7.04, 7 |0.19|-Wires made just visible.
0.52] no corr 0.52) 5 |0.03
0.5 Ke ‘© |= (0 .50\sing.| meas.
Died 66 6+ 6570] « ‘¢ |—Star invisible near the wire.
GEOG) < ee 6 .66| 5 | 0 .44|-Star tolerably well seen, though
7 45/20 ...19 |-++ 0.04 7.49} 2 |0.35] difficult.
7.1 22 0.03 7 .13\sing.) meas.
8 .20/20....13 0 .08 8.28 2 ,0.30
9.1 20 0.04 9 .14)sing.| meas.|-Probably the wrong second.
8 .40/21 ...19 0.05 8.45) 3 | 0.20
8 .85)14 ...12 0.15 9.00; 2 |0.15
8.9 21 0 .04 8 .94\sing.| meas.
8.71/19 ...13 }+ 0.11 8.82; 7 | 0.21
11.60) no corr. 11.60) 2 |0.10
ih yy Mb 11 .20\sing.|meas.—Too faint to be measured with
11.8019 ...12 | 0.02) 11.82) 8 |0.52| much accuracy.
18 .10|19 ...13 |— 0.06/-4+ 18.04; 9 |0.19
Nebula h. 2008.

oF DECLINATION.

Remarks.

some of these measures are
very probably of (6) and (4,)
or of a point between (6) and
(4,) but nearer (6.)

f Se (4) and (6) so faint that

Date Stars. D: Altitude. for Refr. D n
Oct. 511 — 21/+ 3337.9/17°...15°|+ 0”.8|+ 334”.7] 7/1
OG 8 OG 334 .2|19 ...18 0.6 334 .8} 8/0
Ot 5/16 — 21 404 .0)18 ...17 0.8 404 .8] 6)0
66 8 OG 404 .1)17 ...15 0.9 405 .Q| 8/0
“ 5} 6 — 11 232 .8|14 ...13 0.7 233 .5] 6/0
‘Nov. 6 OG 225 .8/16 ...13 0.6 226 .4|11)/4
Of 8 66 236 .0 13 0.7 236 .7| 6/2
of 2} 9 — 21 251 5/10... 8 1.5 253 .0} 7/1
56 4 66 252 .5)10 ... 6 1.9 254 .4) Sil
Oct. 5/14 — 21 443 .2/15 ...14 1.2 444 .4) 6/1
Nov. 614 — 11 108 .3|18 ...16 0 .2 108 .5} 8/0
66 8)20 — 11 397 .718 ...17 0 .8 398 .5/12/1
66 8/23 — 21 55.9 16 0.1 56 .0} 3/1 .
86 8|25 — 21\+ 216 .2 15 + 0 .6/+ 216 .8} dil.

—-Low; stars invisible near the
wires, and badly measured.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 187

Correction

Date. Stars. D Altitude. for Refr, D n e Remarks.
Oct. 26 31 — 21 — 305’.6)17°...15°|\— 0”.7 |— 306.3} 8 |0’.4
Nov. 28 Ge — 303 .7| 7° 55’ |— 2 .2|— 305 .9\sing.|meas.
Oct. 26 31 — 30 + 6.0} no Corn) 6) .0)) 915) |0).6
6 28 ue + 5.8 ‘ ss + 5.8) 4 {1.0
Noy. 26 30 — 21 — 309 .2 9 —1.7|\— 310 .9} 2 |0 .5+
Sreed at — 313 .3} 7° 30’ |— 2 .4/— 315 .7\sing.|meas.
aS 33 — 21 + 12.2} no corr. |-+ 12.2] 3 {1.7 |-Inaccurate on ac-
Oct. 28 33 — 31 + 311 .2/17...14 |+ 0 .8/+ 312 .0} 4 |0.8 count of the great
Nov. 6 37 — 30 176.1) 72 1.4) 177 .5jsing.|meas.| difference of R. A.,
OG i «6 176.1) 14 0.5 176 .6; 2 {1 .8 and faintness of star.
Oct. 28 37 — 31 169 .2/22 ...19 0 .2 169 .4| 14 |0 .9
Nov. 26|v Sagittarii — 30} 678 .9) 6° 30’ 6.4} 685 .3/sing.|meas.
“ 27\v Sagittarii — 21 375. .6| 7° 30’ 2 .8 378 .4) ‘* OC
OG 2 ye\ oC 376 .2| 7° 55’ 2 .6 378 .8] Oe
GS 8 36 — 21 + 336 .2| 9 ...62 |+ 2 .5/+ 338.7] 3 [0.3

29. DirFERENCES oF Ricgut ASCENSION.

Correction A

Date. Stars. A’ Altitude. for Retr. nN € Remarks.

Oct. 5) 6—11/— 48.08) 21°...11° {+ 03.07/— 48.01] 12 | 0°.53)2 The discordance of
GG 66 3.15} 20...18 4+ 0.04 3.11) 5 |0.18 ‘ these sets arises
«9 9 — 11j— 0.52} 20...18 —0.0l|K— 0.53) 5/0.10 from the proximi-

® ty of the two ver

« 5114—11/+ 6.80 ye 3 meas. 4 .03/+ 6.83] 4] 0.10) faint stars (4) and

23 (6.) (See Art. 28.)
ce 9 66 6.58) 20...18 0.02 6.60) 4 | 0.32 ;
3116 — 11 8.2 20 0.01 8 .21/sing.|meas.
46 4 ce 8.08) 20...17 Ot 8.09) 4 /0.04
EG 5 Be 8.61) 22...19, 11 36 8 .62) 11 | 0.32
ae 9 “ 8.20) 20...19 Ob 8.21] 7 | 0.49

‘Nov. 8 Ge 7.93 zDD 0.10 8.03) 3 /0.11

6 8/20 — 11} 16.43 Zl Cones + 0.56} 16.99) 4 | 0.38

\Oct. 4/21 —11} 20.80} 20...17 — 0.06} 20.74) 4 |0.25
ES 5 oe 20.70) 22 ...20 0.05) 20.65) 4 /0.50
“6 9 Ge 20 .2 20 0.05} 20.15) 2/0.10
« 430 — 11] 46.82) 20...17 0.13} 46.69) 4 | 0.62
uf 9 Of 46.73} 21...18 0.12} 46.61) 6 | 0.67
CY 4131 — 11) 51.87) 21...18 0.13) 51.74) 4 | 0.38
CoS) (eae 51.60) 20...17 —0.12) 51.48} 5 | 0.38
ce 136 — 11]-+ 68.30} 20...19 -+- 0.01/-+ 68.31) 3 | 0.40
«4 6 — 16/— 12.5 19 0 .03\— 12 .47\sing. meas.

«114 — 16— 1.6 19 0.01l|j— 1.59) « Ke
“63 — QIj+ 4.30) 15...14 0 .02|+ 4.32| 3 | 0.20)2 Very faint and diffi-

Nov. 27/25 — 23 3 .20 9 0.11 3.31} 2/0.10 : cult; not seen very

\Oct. 9/30—21} 27.17) 18...13 0.08} 27.09) 9 | 0.29 near the wire.

ING Ol 26 .7 Vz 0.33) 26 .37\sing. meas.

BB Bs) Of 28 .20 82 0.25} 27.95} 2 | 0.50

Oct. 9/31 — 21}; 31.97) 18...13 0.08} 31.89} 6 / 0.33

se 633 — 21] 36.45 no corr. 36 .45| 6 | 0.68

188

OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

Date. Stars. Al Altitude. Porrection A | n | c Remarks.
Oct 9 36 — 21 485.48 18°,..18°/-+ 0s.09 4838.57 8 | 0s.55
OG “se 37 — 21 62 .10 14 ...138 |j— 0.05 62 .05 2 \0.40
Nov 6 31 — 30 5.8 no corr. 5.80 _|sing-|meas.
66 8 66 5 sa 66 66 5 .30 66 66
«26, 27, 28 ‘ 5.04 «< ‘6 5.04 5 0.44
GG 6, 8 37 — 30 33 .90 7... 6 |+ 0.30 34 .20 2 |0.40
a6 26, 27 es 34.05 8 ...63 0 .26 34 .31 2 |0 .45
66 28 66 + 34.0 8 + 0.21 + 34.21 2 |0.380
es 6v Sagittarii — 30/4 15 0™ 315.2; 727 |+ 0.74)+ 15 0™ 31s.94\sing.|meas. BA a ion eae
OC 26) 68 sc te 32 .6] 6 ...30 0 .87 85°68 BBY Gee} GS 66 way jarred between the
“ 27] “ ee PCC ESQ 5] (7 830) |) OF69| 0 Wee Ce B aT TIO| | ee” ecm Mobrenwetions:
06 28) 06 + « & 33.3) 7...55 |+ 0.63/-+ * 33.93) “* st
Nebula hh. 2092 and 2093.
30. DIFFERENCES OF DECLINATION.
Nov. 27|114 — 66/+ 5887.3)2h 2h 164+ 0’.3/+ 588”.610/0 .8
sc 66113838 — +66 983 .312 25... 40 0.7 984 .0) 9/2 .2 4
se 628) 47 — + —~66 1092 .113 48 ...4 2 6.1 1098 .2| 8/1 .7
Dec. 5 0G 1094 .9)1 57 2 10 0 .5 1095 .4) 9\2 .3
sc 610 66 1093 .3/2 32... 37 0.8 1094 .1| 5/2 .3
Nov. 8187 — 66 1599 .2| 30°...14° 1 .4 1600 .6)14\4 .6
Dec. 13 OG 1593 .1/2h 20™... 35m 1.0 1594 .1| 4/2 .6
Nov. 8|176— 66 1565 .0} 30°...14° 1.3 1566 .3| ‘7/7 .2
Dec. 10) 47 — 133 109 .9)2h 50™...3h 12m 0 .2 110 .1} 9/3 .1
Nov. 27/187 — 133 614 .212 45.4.8 5 0 .6 614 .8)15/5 .0
ce 661176 — 133 57642 DD eed) 105 0.7 577 .1| 3/3 .0
Dec. 10/103 — 133 1681 .0\2 15... 24 1.0 1682 .0) 6/1 .3
Nov. 11/103 — 187 1073 .0 30°...27° 0 .4 1073 .4| 6/1 .7
se 28 66 1072 .9.25 12m... 49m 0.7 1073 .6/18)\2 .4
GG 41190 — 187 191 .3) 338°...30° 0.1 191 .4] 8)1 .0
By = bs + 190 .4/4> 12m... 19m)4+ 2 .5/+ 192.9] 4/0 .4
Dec. 13/176 — 187,— 34..1/4 10... 14 |\—0O.3/— 34.4] 5/05
Nov. 27|193 — 187|\— 1415 .1/3 30... 4 1 |—6 .2|— 1422 .0|10/3 .5
Dec. 16/121 — 187|-+ 379 .7l2 40 50 |-+0.5|/-+ 380.2] 4/1 .0
Nov. 6/190 — 103|\— 879 .7| 32°...30° —0O.3\|— 880.0) 50 .5
Dec. 161121 — 103\— 695 .2/3h .3h Q25m\— 1 .0/— +696 .2| 9}1 .9
Nov. 6) 24 —103/+ 707 .4| 25°...23° +0 .4|+ 707 .8) 6/1 .2
Dec. 5)|130 — 108 794 6/2 48m, 57m 0.7 795 .3| 7/0 .6
Nov. 6) 40 — 103 1823 .0} 16°...13° 3.3 1826 .3} 7/|1 .9
| Go en be 1822 .5) 25 ...23 1.0 1823 .5} 4/1 .0
Dec. 10 ce 1824 .5/2238m,,. 44m 1 .4 1825 .9] 4/1 .8
66) 118} se W828) 1SR2) 3) eb 2 .0 1830 .1| 4/1 .2
Nov. 6] 65 — 103 410 .5| = 23°...20° 0.3 410 .8/10/0 .9
sc se} G2 — 103 488 .8} 19 ...17 0 .6 489 .4) 6/0 .6
‘628/101 — 103 1231 .1|/22 45m 55m La 1232 .2)13\1 .8
‘Dec. 10/1830 — 24/+ 90.63 15 32 |+0.2\/+ £90 .8)10/2 .0

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR.

189

Date Stars. Dr bs gare pitt Comecion D n e Remarks.
Nov. 6 24— 40 |—1121".9} 29°... 26°|— 0’.5|— 11224) 8 | 1.1
ao Be) 0G 1119 .5/38 5™... 20m) 1.7 1121 .2} 8 {1.3
Dec. 5 cc 1125 .4/2 38... 45 0.9 1126 .3} 4 | 1.4
GS) 65— 40 141] .2/38 15... 33 2.6 1413 .8) 5 {2.4
“« 613) «=862— 40 1331 .8/3 35... 40 3.7| 1385 .5/sing.jmeas.|-Single mea-
OS NY 1— 40 |— 415.94 0... 12 \|—3.1/— 419 .0)14 | 1.8 sure, but
Nov. 28} 31— 40 273 4/4 19... 21g) 3.5/4+ 276 .9' 3 |1.8 excellent,
Dec. 13)183 — k Cygni/+ 1339 .7/22 7™... 44° |4+ 0 .6|-+ 1340 .3/sing.|meas.
« 131 66—kCygni] 372.914 1.. 30] 2.3| 375.2] « | «
“« 16 «“ + 369 .5|2 33 +0.5|+ 370.0) « | «
31. DirrerENcEes In Ricut AscENSION.
| Date | Stars. a’ Altitude, or |Correction| ail oe |) manne,
Nov. 4 103 — 187\— 799.06) 28°...14° |-+ 0°.20\— 785.86) 6 | 0°.40
Dec. 13 oe 79 .1 |2h 42m 0.17 78 .93/sing.| meas.
Nov. 4 121 — 187 65 .36| 28°...14° 0.07 65.29; 8 |0.17
Ce ee 129 — 187 59.81} 28 ...18 |-+ 0.06 59.75) 4 | 0.35
‘s ee 133 — 187 58 .48) 24...18 |—0.11 58 .59} 3 | 0.67
sc 8 < 57 .64| 27 ...12 0.13 57.77) 8 |0.54
Dec. 25 ae 58 .6 |2h 24m 0 .07 58 .67|sing.| meas.
OG 3 Oo 57.7 |2 42 —0.10 57 .80) <“ s¢
Nov. 4 144 — 187 53 .65| 24°...14° |+ 0.18 53 .47| 2 | 0.45
SPaatouss 162 — 187 42 .80} 24...16 |—0.11 42.91) 2 |0.46
Co 8 ce 42.70} 27 ...12 0.13 42 .83) 8 |0.24
Dec. 5 ee 43 .7 |2h 24m 0 .07 43 .77\sing.| meas.
OG. 118} ce 42.5 |2 42 — 0.10 42 .60] * cc
Nov. 4 176 — 187 25.08} 28°...14° — 25 .08) 8 | 0.238
be 8 a 25 .20| 27 ...12 ———— 25 .20| 7 |0.43
Dec. 13 06 — 24.90/25 42m ——|— 24 .90)sing.| meas.
Nov. 4 190 — 187|+ 0.59) 28°...14° |+0.04/+ 0.63) 9 |0.16
rae « |4 0.58] 27...12 |+0.05/4+ 0.63! 6 !0.16
e nf 66 — 187 — 101.49} 27...12 |—0.39|\— 101.88} 5 |0.50
Dec. 5 Gs 101 .4 [2h 24m 0.20} 101 .60\sing.| meas.
CO nis) OC 100 .72\2 18 ...40 0.21 100 .93} 3 | 0.37
Nov. 8 84 — 187 90.05) 25°...12° 0 .38 90 .43} 6 |0.34
Dec. 5 cc 90 .3 |25 24m 0 .20 90 .50/sing.| meas.
“138 Ot 89.7 |2 18 0.19 89 .89} * Oo
Nov. 8 98 — 187 82 .25) 27°,..12° 0 .32 82 .57/ 6 |0.31
ie os 114 — 187 72 81) 25 ...12 0 .26 73 .07| 6 | 0.37
Dec. 5 Ob 73.1 |2h 24m 0.14 73 .24/sing.| meas
Le ee 66 — 133 43.702 0 & 30) 0.13 43 .83) 2 |0.30
oe L 84 — 133 33 .81/2 O & 30} 0.13 33 .94; 2 |0.06
eit 47 — 133 67 .43;2 O ... 30) —— 67 .43) 3 |0.38
oc “1104 & 110 — 133\— 19.052 15 & 30) —\— 19.05} 2 | ———|-One rough mea-
pararse: e ie mea” eS
ea 162 — 133/+ 14.9012 15 & 30] ——j+ 14.90] 2 |0.10] tween them ta-
“ « 183 — 133] 50.732 0 ... 30| 0.07]. 50.66, 3 |0.13|
“oe 193 — 133/+ 62.902 0 ... 30/1 0.10/+ 62.80] 3 |0.26
iNov. 8 40 — 103,— 51.41} 10°...7° |4+ 1.65— 49.76] 4 |0.52

Vil.—2 x

190 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

Date. Stars. Ar Altitude, or Correction A

Sid. Time. for Refr. @ e Remarks.

Dec. 10} 40 — 103 50°.8038 42™,., 52m) 15.28 49°.52| 2 | 08.27

“« 13) « 49.453 33... 38] 0.82 48 68) 2 |0.16

Nov. 8] 62 — 103 28 .87| 10°...8° 0.40 28.47) 4 |0.29

Dec. 10) 29 0638 29™,,, 52™! 0.27 28 .79| 3 |0.48

“ 1g} se =. | 9829518 38i..0 (S8ll4- 0. 23he se L252). 2 EKO. we

Nov. 16|-65'—1103) © |=) )) 23825|) 102) 48cm) Wier 0734) ="5 ig go0) Oil pe0129

Dec. 10 “ 24 .20'3h 29m,,, 52m) 0.24 23 .96| 4. |0.50

“« 18 “ — 23.80.33 ... 38). 0.20 |7, 423760). 2. |'0 :69

Nov. 8/180 — 103 + 17.6 Ma 0 .94)+ 18 .54/sing.|meas.

Dec. 10 “ aE 18 .12/3h 29™,,, 52m) 0.43/41 18.55| 4 10.07

cc) Weconten03 le GES “ 0.24 65.59} 3 | 0.05

CO NG} ES GL Si “ +0.34 61.53) 3 |0.53

GWE) —S 108) ice 21.142 39... 42 I~ 0:26/4 20 .88) 2 | 0.57

GG GONG 3108) ae 36 .17 “ — 0 .26|+ 35.91) 2 |0.89

Nov. 8101—103 |— 2.4! 10°...7° si Ss 0.9 | — | ——[No transits noted, because
« «! 31— 40 9.44 a LO © 999) 94) 0. 49\ coon Gueiieseee eae
“28 “ 9.85/44 19™,,, 22m] 0 .62 OB/OB) Spee Moana sane
Dec. 10 66 9.00/4 6... 12 |+ 0.40 8.60) 2 |0.23) R.A. depends on this re-
cc Et) 40 68 .20 cs — 0.60 68-80) 2.1.0 43] eee hy see (103) in
66 “| 10— 40 ee 36 .25 66 — 0 .53/— 36.78) 2-10.38) R.A. means has several
Dec. 13] 66 —k Cygnil+ 107 39.7 |2 7 & 4 1 |+.0.23/+ 10™ 39.93) 2 |0.70] before. =
“« 16,“ + « 39.0 |2 33 & 355 |+ 0.20/+ « 39.20] 2 |0.85

32. In the farther reduction of the foregoing observations, where several sets
of measures have been obtained between the same two stars, they have been

combined by assigning to each a weight proportioned to the value of a with

some restrictions where either 7 or e are so small as to render the weight very
minute on the one hand, or immensely large on the other. And wherever, as
is frequently the case, measures have been taken through a series of stars by
different steps and intervals of progress, so as mutually to check each other,
the most probable results have been deduced from their combination by the
method of minimum squares, and are given below. |

The first column contains the numbers of the stars in the catalogues, Arti-
cles 37, 38, and 39; the second and third, the differences of right ascension and
declination between the several measured stars and one assumed as a zero.

Nebula h. 1991.

Stars. Diff. of R. A. Diff. of Decl. Stars. Diff. of R. A. Diff. of Decl.

1— 9 | — 0m 285.81 | + 15’ 77.6 22 —9 |+ 0 8.77/ + 7'31”.8
Do GG? CI SPS) SY 5 = |epadeeeace “ 11.47| —1 10.4
Cyan 2h OREO 25 — é6 11-82 || -- 1 52:28
18, — Fe «6 126 2391) 1 5.0 98 — + | 1+ -18 .04| —4 30 .7
Dime ea eeto6O0)| 15 59) 5

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 191

Nebula h. 2008.

Stars. Diff. of R. A. Diff. of Decl. Stars. Diff. of R. A. Diff. of Decl.

6 — 21 | — 02 Om 238,75 | + 9’ 28.5 25 — 21} + 0h 0™ 7.63} + 3’ 36’.8
Orr “ & 90.53 413.7 30)——1 ss se ee 26 94) —5 12.1
li — *§ CO OrOO 5 34.6 31 — * sce 631.84] —5 6.3
14— « Cae is ye 7 23 6 33 — “ ee SO)-40) |e E OMG O
Gps 66 ee 41 72 6 44.9 36 — “§ sce 648.47) +5 38.7
OY OG ES |) AS TI 1s) il a7 —, 66 Ce | 1 .23| —2 16.9
23— «| tee 4,32) + 0 56.0 v Sagittarti— “ | +10 06.35) +6 17.5

Nebula h. 2092 and 2093.

Stars. Diff. of R.A. | Diff. of Deel. Stars. Diff. of R.A. | Diff. of Decl.
k Cygni — 187|— 12™ 21°.12|— 32’ 357.5 103 — 187\— 1™ 18°.87|+ 17’ 52”.7
1— “« 3 16.76/+ 41 19 .7 (104) + (110) 66 “ 16.80
10— « 2 44.74 A aloe i
at Sa tel (at oa Se Wee eo ae SO Lorie vane
24— «| <« 20.20\4 29 38.7 Td oe! fer We lant
Fi) EtG | eCOMTIB CA bene EiaG USO PS eae Or sets 31) 8A
fst «“ 7 964+ 48 18 .7 B29 SE O).89, 200
Pes lly: Pe ANE ati a cee ae 133— «| « 57.75|—10 11 .2
62— «| 1 47 43/426 2.2 Hegre cee
Se Sad es lel 17%6— «| « 25.091 0 34.6
s4— «| « 30.70 ; Hey ona ae ee
9g— «| « 99 597 190— «|+« 0.63/4+ 3 13 .4
ffi Cllkey Lane Sa eee ee 19g — «|4« 5.05\—23 42 .0

Catalogues of Stars in and near Nebule h. 1991, 2008, and 2092-3.

33. The right ascensions and declinations in the following catalogues depend
on the three stars A. 8. C. 2063, v Sagittarii, and & Cygni respectively. Their
places for A. D. 1830.0 have been assumed as follows:

A.S. C. | Name of Star. Mag. R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0

2063 6 | 17> 51™ 36°51 | — 22° 45’ 58.5
2251 | 46 v Sagittarii| 5.6 |19 11 59.09|—16 15 54.9
—— | 52 k Cyeni 20 38 38.70|/+30 6 17.0

The two first only are to be found in the Catalogue of the Astronomical So-
ciety of London. Having no other standard source of reference within my
reach, I have adopted for the place of # Cygni that incidentally given by Sir
J. Herschel, in his description of nebula h. 2088, Phil. Trans. 1833. No. 1 of

192 : OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

h. 1991, in my catalogue, corresponds to A. S. C. 2063, and is in the same field
with the nebula. The places of the stars of h. 1991 may therefore be regarded
as tolerably accurate. The intervals between the other two nebule, and the
respective stars to which they were referred, were much larger, the one occu-
pying 1", the other 12™ of sidereal time; and, of course, as great exactness was
not attainable by the means employed. The necessity of selecting a calm —
evening, and of maintaining perfect stillness in the observatory during these
long intervals, on account of its height and the unsteadiness of the telescope,
yet, at the same time, of correcting the uncompensated clock which was em-
ployed, by coincident observations with the transit instrument, rendered these
comparisons less frequent than they otherwise would have been. The small
uncertainty which this circumstance introduces into the absolute right ascen-
sions of the stars is a constant error, and is of slight importance, since the
places of the standard stars, as assumed above, would alone give rise to uncer-
tainty of the same nature.

The reduced differences in Article 32 were made such as they would have
been at the epoch 1830.0. The measured stars, previously arranged in the
form of a catalogue, by means of the three already mentioned, were projected
on paper, and compared with the original charts described in Article 7, by
pricking the stars through from one upon the other.

34. To form some idea of the amount of necessary error involved in the pro-
cess of estimation described in Article 7, the differences of R. A. and Decl. be-
tween the measured and estimated places in h. 1991 were carefully measured
by a scale and vernier. ‘They are as follows:

Error in

R.A. Decl.

Wy) UBS |) BRatae/
2 | 0.4 14 5
8 | 0.10] 0.9
9 | 0.00} 0.0
18 | 0.26; 0.0
21 | 0.17 1 .4
22 | 0.68; 3.8
24 | 0.42 | 19.5
25 | 0.23} 0.0
28 | 0.03} 0.9

It is to be noticed, that star (24) was excessively difficult of measure-
ment, not being seen on or very near the wire. The large errors apparently

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 193

belonging to it are probably not those of estimation, but of rough and difficult
measurement. ‘The errors of star (1) are on account of its distance from the
nebula, without any intermediate stars recorded; and the remainder, except
(2,) are all within very close limits.

It may be farther remarked, that the errors in h. 2008 were generally about
four times as large as in h. 1991; also, in h. 2092-3 they were three or four
times as large at similar distances, and in some instances on the remote con-
fines, much larger. More time and pains were spent on the first of the three,
partly in order to ascertain how much error was necessarily included in the
method of estimation. ‘

35. The places of the following stars, h. 1991, 24; h. 2008, 6, 9, 23, 25; h.
2092-3, 129, 144, differ in a slight degree, in the catalogues, from the results
of measurement. ‘These are cases in which the measures are rendered some-
what uncertain on account of extreme faintness, and are afterwards found to
disagree with the original chart. The general closeness with which the esti-
mations coincide with good measures authorize, in these few instances, an
equal, or greater confidence in the former.

36. The artificial scale of magnitudes mentioned in the observation of Aug.
9th, Article 19, was converted into the common nomenclature by comparison
with various stars, incidentally noticed by Sir J. Herschel in this respect. The
magnitudes assigned, in his several catalogues of double stars, to the three in-
dividuals of the triple star in h. 1991, and those of six stars described by him
as forming a trapezium, or oval, at the bifurcation of the Nebula Cygni, (see
Article 59,) are principally relied on.

The first column in the following catalogues contains the number of the star
in order of right ascension; the second, its magnitude; the third, its mean right
ascension; and the fourth, its mean declination, at the epoch A. D. 1830.0.

The right ascension is given to the nearest tenth of a second of time, except
that of the stars measured by the micrometer, which are distinguished from
the rest by the addition of a second decimal. So the declination is in even
seconds for the estimated, and descends to tenths for the measured places.

Norr.—It appears to the committee that the coefficient 2 in Mr. Mason’s formula for correcting
the observed difference of right ascension should be omitted, and this correction be made only half
as great as Mr. Mason’s. The error from this source does not, on the average, amount to more than
0°.1 in time in the following catalogue.

VII.—2 Y

194.

OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

— 23°

— 16° 9’

Decl. 1830.0

iY i
co On28

2008.

Decl. 1830.0

9.6

GC, BL AD a3

Decl. 1830.0

mh BIO Te Oe

oC 1S 248)
eG
30 10 30

37. Catalogue of the Stars in the Nebula h. 1991.
| No.| Mag R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0 No.| Mag. R. A. 1830.0
1| 6.7 | 17" 51™ 362.51 | — 22° 45’ 58”.5 16] 14 | 17 52™ 95,7
2| 11.12 “57.83 “© 57 30.4 | 17| 14.15 “ 10.6
3| 16 58.7 23 0 38 18| 16 5 Tes}
4| 16 “59.7 “1 46 19 | 12.13 “11.67
A) Mis | ese OG 22 59 46 20 | 14.15 “12.6
6| 16 sb 953 23 2 10 21/11.12 «13.19
7| 14.15 (0) 446 2252022 22| 9 “© 14.07
8} 9.10 i BB) BR NIB) 23| 15 “14.8
| 9! 8.9 “5 28 ai Ge) 24 | 12.13 “16.5
PO 12 G3) 68) os TL Zoi ele celica
in| 5 B70 22 59 55 26 | 14.15 “21.9
(12) ale GST 77 als DL a ait 27 | 14.15 “21.9
13| 15 686 22 59 17 28| 12 «23 31
14] 15 «9.5 ‘ 55 18 29 | 14.15 28.7
15 | 14.15 OO) sri “ 50 56
38. Catalogue of the Stars in and near the Nebula nh.
| No. |: Mag R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0 No Mag. R. A. 1830.0
1 | 14.15| 18" 10™ 28.9 | — 16° 13’ 47” 20) 11 | 182 10™ 55s.05
2| 14.15 «© 28.9 “ 11 36 21/ 10.11 “58 .56
3| 14.15 “ 29.3 @ i183 Wi OM TG 8 TN ih
4| 18 © 32.9 «12 24 23 | 12.13 “2.88
5| 14 “33.3 “13 51 24| 14 “6.1
6 | 12.13 “34.74 “11 45 25| 12 “« 6.19
Zales «“ 35.8 “12 48 26| 16 BG cy?
8| 15 “ 36.5 “ 11 50 27| 14 “ 8.3
9| 12 “38.51 3) sili7p 63 28| 16 Go Fl Thagll
10| 15 “38.5 “13 23 29| 12 “ 20.3
i) A “ 38.56 “15 44,4 30| 9.10 «25 .50
12 | 14.15 “422 OG iF 31| 9.10 « 30.40
13| 14 “ 43.3 “ 16 15 S2iale “33.3
14| 12.13 “45 3 “ 13 58 9 33] 11 «35.00
15| 16 “ 46.0 “ 13 30 34| 14 BBY ori
1G} ell “46.84 “ 14 36.0 35| 12 “© 37.9
(17 | 14.15 AT 3 C224 36 | 11.12 “© 47 .03
18| 16 « 50.8 “13 33 Oi “ 59.79
19 | 12.13 “ 54.0 “ 9 387
39. Catalogue of the Stars in and near Nebula h. 2092 and 2093.
| No. | Mag R. A. 1830.0. Decl. 1830.0 No Mag. R. A. 1830.0
| 1 | 10 | 20% 47m 435,14] + 31° 20’ 16”.4 6| 12.13 | 204 48m 55.6
2 | 12.13 “47 2 “17 52 7| 12.13 «6.5
3 Mie! 4s 0.8 “14 14 8| 10.11 “ 10.8
412.18 CONS eA) “14 36 9| 10.11 “12.3
VB up 08 a) ANS as 1183 Mk? 10| 11 “15.14

31 21 18

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 195

Mag. R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0 No. Mag. R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0
13 | 20> 48m 185.8 | + 31° 8/18” 66) 10 | 204 49m 18s,09 | + 30° 12’ 19’.3
12.13 “ 21.3 “ 10 49 67) 13 “ 18.6 “ 59 48
12.13 “ 23.4 “« 10 9 68) 14.15 “« 19.4 “ 98 44
14 “ 23.9 30 26 17 69} 12.13 “ 20.2 MG zl
13 “ 24 2 31 13 26 70| 12.13 “21.5 30 9 41
12.13 “ 26.8 “« 18 14 71) 14 “22.0 “« 8 33
Da} “ 28.4 “ 11 34 Py) We “24-5 “ 22 16
12.13 “& 98.5 “© 20 42 73| 14.15 “ 24.9 G8 P32 4
13 “ 29,1 “« 8 49 74| 16 “ 24.9 31 4 23
10.11 “33.7 SOmevanliy 75| 12.13 “ 295.1 30 8 36
10.11 “ 635 .36 31 4 10 76) 15 “& 25.9 31 5 46
13 “ 35.6 30n 15208 Wail 1 “© 25.9 30 23 21
10 * 37.5 “ 867 49 78| 16 “ 26.1 31 6 16
10.11 “ 39 43 31 8 34.8 79| 12 “ 26.6 30 25 21
13 “ 40.3 “ 11 56 80) 13 “26.7 6 27 25
12.13 “40.7 30 7 32 81] 12.13 “26.7 “ 59 54
12.13 ‘© 40.7 31 14 14 82| 14.15 “ O74 31 4 9
13 “ 41.3 30 16 6 83} 15 “ 28.4 a3) ey
12 “6 41.5 « 20 9 84] 10.11 “© 28.90 30 12 26
12 “ 41.7 31 15 35 85| 12 “ 29.0 “ 15 22
8 “ 43.04 “ 31 51.7 86) 14.15 « 29.2 “ 33 44
11 “ 45 3 om OQ MeS i 87/ 12.13 «& 99.5 “ 57 35
16 “ 48.6 “« 9 10 88} 13 “6 29.6 ao 8)
16 « 49.1 “« 10 9 89] 15 “ 30.4 “ O27 44
11 “ 49.1 “ 4 49 G0} 12.13 “ 31.4 “ 56 34
14 & 49 2 30 25 11 gl) 14 “© 31.9 31 8 40
15 “ 49.3 “ 24 35 92) 12.13 “32.5 30.10 4
2.13 “ 49 9 31 10 55 93] 14 “ 33.4 eae
12 “ 50.5 30 28 4 94| 14 “ 33.6 GO 5 Th 63
8 “ 51.94 BW are IIe) 7) 95) 13.14 “36.7 30 58 13
16 ss 52.6 “ 8 53 96) 15 “ 36.8 GO BG
12.13 “6 52.7 30 16 52 97| 12.13 “ 36.9 “« 8 33
15.16 “ 53.0 31 10 7 98] 10.11 “ 37.03 “ 15 21
11 “ 53.9 “© 15 45 99) 14.15 “ 37.6 “ 18 36
12 “ 654.2 30 25 31 100} 12.13 “ 38.8 “ 14 25
12.13 CO BYE (8) “« 31 26 101] 10.11 “ 40.1 31 17 20.4
11 “© 54 .50 “ 30 35.5 102| 10 “ 40.9 30 3 17
14 “ 56.6 “ 22 33 103} 10 “ 40.89 “ 56 48.1
12 “ 57 2 a i @ 104) 11 “© 41.5 « 29 16
12.13 “ 57.8 G il sp 105) 15 “ 41.6 «© 28 25
14.15 “ 58.1 “« 9 28 106] 13 “ 43.2 “ 32 35
15 “ 58.4 “« 9 39 107) 15 “ 43.3 “ 26 29
13 59 8 30 10 4 108} 12.13 “ 43.4 BF) i7/
12.13 49 0.3 “ 30 32 109, 12 “ 43.5 ro Ol 718}
12.13 “ 0.8 oC Ti YF 110} 11 “ 44 6 “ 28 43
12 Co YD 31 11 47 aS «“ 45.0 “ 20 29
12 “ 3.2 “ 12 14 112] 12.13 “ 45.3 as ly 7h
14.15 Go A BY) & 113) 14 “46.4 “ 23 16
12.13 Co Tes “« 9 58 114, 11 “© 46.52 GS oP 8
13 “« 9.0 “ 10 32 115! 12.13 “ 48.2 « 19 22
12.13 “« 10.3 “. 93 55 116) 12 “ 48.3 20 16
10.11 “12 38 31 4 57.9 Un) 12 “ 49 2 “6 52 20
12.13 “ 13.4 30 9 27 118) 12.13 “« 51.8 “ 20 30
13 “14.5 ae P| 119} 13 “ 53.0 “ 84 26
10.11 Gi Neh ofa Dil 9.8) 68} 120| 14 “53.5 “ 93 14

196 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

Mag. | R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0 No.| Mag. R. A. 1830.0 Decl. 1830.0

121; 10.11 20h 49m 543,41 + 30° 45’ 12.8 159) 14 | 205 50™ 15s.38 | + 30° 40’ 23”.
122) 12.13 54.9 © 49 24 160) 12.13 (UG OL “ 51 35
123) 15 se 55.5 250 «G6 161} 13 ss 16.6 se 40 41
124) 12.13 “87.7 “6 82) 8 162) 10.11 GB NG o7iz 6 28 56
125) 15 “658.1 ‘6 23 52 163} 12 G15) oll * 43 13
126} 14.15 “e658 4 GG) a 164; 14 “ 618.5 ce 26 50
127| 14.15 “ 658.9 “630 33 165} 14 G3 1S} 6) se 41 56
128) 14 G8 BY) 024 “ 42 53 166) 12.13 so 19.4 ‘ 34 14
129) 10.11 se 659 .46 “47 138 167) 13 AY) (oP 266
130} 10.11 se 669 .48 31 10 3.6 168} 14 ‘6 621.4 « 633 «(13
131}14.15] * 50 1.6 30 27 26 169} 18 ce 24.0 “6 29 38
132| 14.15 6G ll og “6 31 26 170) 13 ‘6 26.6 se 33 «(12
133) 10.11 cor) 1-89 se 628 44 .0 171) 14.15 ce 29.2 ‘6 17 26
134) 12.13 GG of) “¢ 53 40 172} 14 CG oP 4 ia) cc 628 «(18
135) 14 CB 0) sc 31 45 173) 12.13 se 82 22 ‘6 16 24
136) 12.138 6 2G 31 4 19 174) 12.138 «33 38 O50 NS}
137) 14.15 CG Bh 30 23 10 175) 14 “6 634.6 se 34 24
138) 13 CG oth 31 0 59 176; 10 “6 34 .58 ‘38 20.3
139) 12.13 ic) fe) TLE 177; 138 se 35.0 a
140) 14.15 “ 66.1 30 42 52 178} 14 “6 35.7 OB ae Iz)
141) 10.11 “66.1 “ 11 46 179} 12 “38.7 “13 34
142) 14 «6 «66.6 Oy ifs} Ul 180) 12.13 a ied « 33 (4
143) 14 “ - 6.9 “ 40 36 181} 14 so 44 8 “6 39 53
144) 11 Card ere, “6 52 39 182} 12.13 se 49 4 « 35060
145) 15 "2 os) se 32 «630 183) 10.11 “6 52 .49 SONS). NS)
146) 12 GH ts) a4 “6 49 26 184) 12 “653.6 sce Oem
147| 12.13 (eeSieo “23 63 185} 12.13 “ 56.9 se 32 «36
148] 14.15 «684 “6 42 52 186) 13 “57.0 C2 Sel
149} 16 CO ORO “¢ 622 40 187} 8.9 “«« 659 .66 ‘© 38 (54.6
150, 15 CON se 629 49 188) 12.13 “« 659.8 s¢ 20 54
151) 14.15 1) Bw) 189| 14 51 0.1 se 21 30
152] 13 « 610.3 se 22 52 190} 9.10 “ ~=60. .30 “« 42 8.0
153} 13 GT UTE gs} sc 23 ~=«5 191° 11 OG) 3 at £28, a9) |
154) 14.15 GG DN otf “29 23 192) 11 WS 8} “6 629 30
155) 12 6 “© 54 12 193} 10.11 “4 62 (OVO RZD
156} 16 SB) 23 OG ys} 13} 194) 11 “ 10.8 SS OMA)
157; 14 “ 6128.6 SOLSiols 195) 12 “21.3 cc T8046
158] 14 «614.0 ‘6 625 «650 196} 11 G3 23 off NS Bz

40. Of these three catalogues the first is probably the most correct. The
stars in nebula h. 2008 are less determinate. This is chiefly due to the some-
what hurried completion of the map of that nebula in the month of August,
the moon becoming troublesome sooner than was altogether convenient. And
for the purposes of correction, only two or three stars exist in, or very near this
nebula, of a magnitude as great as the eleventh; so that it was necessary to
place reliance on the extremely difficult measures of the twelfth and thirteenth
magnitudes.

But one set of measures in Decl. were taken of star (193) in the large nebula,

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 197

and this was found to differ considerably from the original map. The number
of even revolutions of the micrometer screw may possibly have been read off
wrong; and, if this is the case, some eight or ten stars in its neighbourhood
will be affected by its error. But these are out of the direct course of the
nebula. In general, the relative places are well determined by these right as-
censions and declinations.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.

41. By far the greatest obstacles to the successful comparison of modern ob-
servations on nebule with those which own, at least, a brief antiquity, exist
in the want of precision with which the labours of former observers have been
conducted; and hence all attempts to trace the slow progress of their changes
end in uncertain conjectures and conflicting probabilities. I shall not, there-
fore, incur the charge of unnecessary minuteness in endeavouring to render,
by every means, our knowledge of the present form and state of at least these
few nebule, as far as possible, standard, and, although laden with the neces-
sary imperfections of original observations, yet free from adventitious and un-
necessary vagueness in the communication of them. In order to supply, to
any future observer, those slight particulars which a chart cannot easily urge
upon the notice of any but the original compiler, and, farther, to indicate the
degree of certainty with which different features of the nebule were recognised,
it 1s thought proper to bring under this head the enumeration of various facts
not expressed in the journal of observations. These are divided into “ things
certain,” “nearly certain,” strongly suspected,” and “ slightly suspected.”

42. 'The plates are such as to distort, as little as possible, the relative posi-
tion of the stars, since the development of the spherical surface is by projection
on a plane tangent to the centre of each nebula. —

The nebule are in the position in which they appear in a Herschellian re-
flector, when on the meridian; “south” being uppermost in the present cases,
and the preceding, the right hand portions. The letters s, p, n, f, on the plates,
serve as ready references where these terms are used in description.

In plate V., where one of the nebule is represented by lines of equal bright-
ness, (Article 12,) the half lines serve to indicate suspected gradations of shade,
while the even numbers mark those that are more certain. Thus, the lines 1

VIIl.—2 Z

198 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULE

are the utmost limits of nebulous light perfectly and certainly visible, while
the line 3 is about as far as it is suspected to extend. The line 12 also encloses
a space suspected to be a little brighter than the surrounding parts.

Nebula h. 1991.

43. Things certain.—l. A large nebula surrounding the star 22, not hitherto
noticed. (See Art. 17, Aug. 7 and 10.)

2. A slight diminution of its ight within the pentagon formed by the stars
15, 20, 27, 26 and 22. (Art. 17, Aug. 10.)

3. It is more extensive on the northern than southern side, but its gradation
or concentration is evidently from all directions toward the bright star 22.

4. (In the trifid nebula.) The particulars concerning the attachment of the
triple star to the skirts of the part, A, and of its eccentricity in other respects,
as mentioned in Art. 17, Aug. 1 and 9.

5. The rift a suddenly shelves outwards and to the north, forming a tole-
rably definite boundary, as is indicated by the comparative closeness with
which the lines succeed each other. (See Art. 17, Aug. 10.)

6. This boundary is convex inwards, or towards the stars 3 and 5.

7. The gradation from light to darkness on the inner boundary of the portion
A., is somewhat more sudden than on that of the other two.

8. And in all three, it is more sudden, on the inner, than on the outer boun-
daries.

44. Nearly certain.—1. The portion B extends down to the stars 2 and 21.

2. It also runs up a little into the cleft @, fading off very imperceptibly,
(Art. 17, Aug. 9.)

3. The boundary of A. running down from the triple star, turns faintly off
at an obtuse angle at the star 19, while a portion of somewhat less intensity,
encompasses the star 25. ‘This fact is expressed in Plate V., by the bending
of lines 2 and 3 at that point, and their proximity; the line 1 diverging from
them to the star 25.

4. The upper extremity of A, between the stars 12 and 28, runs up to a
pretty sharp angle.

5. (In the northern nebula.) A slight increase of intensity on the right
hand of the vacancy; it is enclosed by the line 4. (Art. 17, Aug. 10.)

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 199

45. Strongly suspected.—l. A slight brightening up of the nebula where
enclosed by the line 13, as if beginning to break up into a still farther subdi-
vision. This, if real, subdivides the dark branch a, into two, in its outward
course. (Art. 17, Aug. 10.)

2. The filling up of the clefts with faint nebulosity.

3. The same between the northern and southern nebula, faintly uniting the
two.

46. Slightly suspected—1. The angular irregularity on the south and fainter
side of the part C, rendering it not unlike a shell with a sub-angular margin.

Nebula h. 2008.

47. Things certain.—1. The “resolvable knot” mentioned by Herschel
(Art. 58, Phil. Trans. 1833,) near the star 18, is isolated, or nearly so, from
the rest of the nebula. (Not seen resolvable by us. See Art. 18, Aug. 10.)

2. The smaller knot is apparently not affected with this peculiarity.

3. Of the faint bend or loop at the right hand, the following half is brighter
than the preceding.

4, The bright branch fades gradually away to the left, terminating near the
star 36; it is convex upwards.

5. The external angle of the nebula stretches down from the star 17, towards
the north, preceding much farther than in Herschel’s drawing. (Art. 18,
Aug. 10.)

6. The bend in the drawing of Sir J. Herschel is too large, especially in a
vertical direction, when compared with the bright following branch. (Art. 18,
Aug. 3 and 14.)

48. Nearly certain.—1. The bright branch is more definitely bounded on its
upper or southern side, than upon the lower.

2. From the larger knot at the internal angle of the nebula, a faint ray
proceeds as far as star 25. (Art. 18, Aug. 7 and 10.)

3. The upper margin of this ray is tolerably definite, and thence it spreads
downwards till it mingles with the brightness below. (Art. 18, Aug. 10.)

A. The “resolvable knot” of Herschel has either a second nucleus, or in-
volves a faint star (18) in its upper margin. (Art. 18, Aug. 14.)

5. The partially vacant space in which it is situated is closed in by the ne-

200 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULAE

bula on the right and left, and perhaps beneath, but is more open upward.
(Art. 18, Aug. 10.)

6. The star 11 is too far down the preceding limb of the bend in Sir J.
Herschel’s figure; it should be nearer the vertex.

7. A slight protrusion from the upper curve of the bend involves the star 9.

49. Strongly suspected—1. Very faint nebulosity stretching across from star
25 to star 9, filling all the mternal angle of the nebula. (Art. 18, Aug. 10.)

2. Faint nebulosity extending from the stars 6 and 4 to or beyond star 2.

3. A considerable, but faint diffusion of the nebula at the external angle
towards the north preceding.

4. The fainter knot stretches still more faintly a little way downward. (Art.
18, Aug. 1.)

5. Just above star 16 is a portion a little brighter than the rest of the bend.

50. Shghtly suspected —1. An extension of the appearance mentioned in No.
4 of Art. 49, downwards, past stars 19 and 20. (Art. 18, Aug. 1 and 7.)

2. A bare suspicion of nebulosity among a coarse cluster of stars between
11™ and 11” 30%, and in about—16° 8' or 10’ Decl. (Art. 18, Aug. 7.)

Nebula h. 2092 and 2093.

51. Things certain.—1. The brightest accumulation of nebulous matter is
within the triangle formed by stars 69, 83 and 93.

2. Not much inferior to this in intensity is the portion included between the
bright stars 133 and 162. (Art. 19, Aug. 7.)

3. The brightest loop of the network portion isa figure not altogether unlike
a Greek v, turned thus ¢, and containing No. 2, just described. The first or
upper bend of this figure contains two curious triplets of stars, very similar
in position and magnitude; the south following angle has in it a quintuple or
sextuple star, of which two individuals, 149 and 156, are about the munma
visibilia of the 14 feet reflector. (Art. 19, Aug. 9.)

4. These two, No. 1 and 8, are the two great nuclea of the nebula.

5. From the north following angle of the v, at the star 162, a branch pro-
ceeds southward, of brightness little inferior to that of the v; for the sake of
shortness, I call this , though possessing no resemblance to that letter.

6. All the other loops and branches in this region except the v and W are
extremely faint.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 201

7. The obtuse angled parallelogram, preceding the », certainly exists.

gs. All, or nearly all, the visible stars in its neighbourhood are as certainly
arranged along its course in apparent intimate connexion with it. (Art. 19.
Aug. 9.)

9. It is, without doubt, connected to the v, in the way represented in the
figure. '

10. The loop which parts from the v at the quintuple star, and passing out-
wards by the stars 157 and 142, rejoins it near the double triplet of stars.

11. That this loop sends out a very faint branch towards stars 171 and 174,
is more than “nearly certain,” though not absolutely so.

12. The same may be said of a slight nebulosity in the region of the stars
183 and 184.

13. That the stars in this neighbourhood are, to a certain extent, disposed in
the same order as the nebulous matter, forming rude chains, or loops, coincident
with those of the nebula, is certain. This feature is most strongly developed
in the v, and in the parallelogram No. 7 of Art 51, and though less striking, is
certainly recognisable in the circuits Nos. 3, 8, 9 and 10 of Art. 52, and in the
branch No 1, of Art. 53. (Art. 19, Aug. 1 and 9.)

14, (Proceeding downwards now towards the triangle of bright stars on the
parallel of 30° 40’;) the faint band connecting h. 2092 and h 2093, branches
from the > near the star 166, and taking the conspicuous stars 176, 121, 129,
and 103, in its course, brightens at last into the very considerable intensity
mentioned in No. 1. This connexion undoubtedly exists. (Art. 19, Aug. 1.)

15. The faint branch starting from this band near its connexion with the J
towards stars 177 and 180, is about as certain as that of No. 11.

16. The faint branch in the opposite direction, starting from the » at stars
166 and 168 towards star 119,—is certain.

17. (In the bifurcate portion.) Of the two main branches into which it
forks, the upper or s p, is far the widest and most conspicuous. They are
much too nearly equal in the drawing of Sir J. Herschel.

18. The f branch extends but little beyond the double star 56, 57.

19. The sp branch reaches much farther, fading away in diffused nebu-
losity nearly or quite as far down as star 1. (Art. 19. Aug. 10.)

52. Nearly certain.—1. The long faint trace of light, No. 13 of Art. 51, ap-
pears, at first sight, a band of nearly uniform breadth and light, and tolerably

VII.—3 A

202 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

straight. But with long attention, the irregularities represented in the figure
are pretty certainly made out. ‘The narrow winding part differs in intensity
from the rest of the band too minutely to be at all represented in an engraving,
unless much exaggerated, as in Plate VI. The chief irregularities are at-
tended with httle doubt, and are as follows:

2. (Beginning at the upper end;) it bends outward so as to involve the
the bright star 176, fading off very diffusely in the concavity on the opposite
side. .

3. It forms an ill-defined, and scarcely complete loop around the stars 163,
165, 161, 159, 143, 128; it being faintest and most imperfect on its p or n p
side. It is at this point, that, in tracing the nebula from north to south, it first
begins to assume the remarkable peculiarity of interweaving with stars in
loops or network. (Art. 19, Aug. 10.)

4, Turning from the bright stars 121 and 129, it bends, perhaps more than
in the drawing, towards the stars 146 and 160 on the following side, involving
the former and the pretty bright star 144 in its course.

5. Bending back to the preceding side, it very nearly reaches, and per-
haps involves, the bright star 103.

6. On the opposite side, it faintly diffuses itself to a considerable distance,
fading away nearly or quite as far as the stars 188 and 139; the space be-
tween these and 155, 134 being, however, quite vacant.

7. After crossing the parallel of 30° 0’, it soon grows brighter, and passes into
the bifurcate portion.

8. (In the network portion.) A very faint loop, whose extremities are the
branches Nos. 11 and 15 of Art. 51, and which takes in its course No. 12 of
the same, is either “nearly certain” or “strongly suspected.” Its course, be-
ginning from the south, is along the stars 174, 183, 184, 188, 189, 194, 191,
192, 180, and 177.

9. The extension of branch No. 16 of Art. 51 as far as star 119.

10. This branch also sends off a subdivision towards or along stars 145, 135,
132 and 127.

11. The part of the v about the double triple star brightens up a little,
making a kind of feeble third nucleus with Nos. 1 and 2 of Art. 51.

12. (In the bifurcate portion.) The broad s p division forks again into two,
one branch of which passes, as near as can be judged, over star 32, the other be-

/

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 203

tween stars 32 and 24. The space between them is very little less nebulous
than the branches, rendering their separate courses indefinite and somewhat
uncertain. The stars of the 15th and 16th magnitudes, namely: 51, 52, 45
and 34, are in the lower, and 33, 41 are in, or just beneath, the upper of these
two subdivisions. These stars prevent this from being classed in Art. 51.
(See Art. 19, Aug. 7, 9, 10, 19.)

13. A diffuse and faint nebulosity fills up all the space in the principal rift.

14. The p division pretty certainly involves the double star 56, 57, in its
northern margin; not as Hershel describes and figures it, passing clear of it to
the south.

15. At the point of bifurcation, the nebula runs up to a
dense nucleus of somewhat definite outline, the figure of
which, as referred to the stars in that quarter, is, by a careful
comparison of the drawings of two evenings, as in the margin.

The fork originates very near, or at the star 78.

53. Strongly suspected—1. The faint. branch of nebula, starting from the
upper end of the v, along the bright stars 98, 84, and 66, and spreading
through the cluster 97, 92, 75, 71, 70, 63, 60, 59, 55, 53. It is very faintly
described in the engraving. Stars clustering thickly are so apt to deceive in
this respect, that what would otherwise be considered as certain, is, in this in-
stance, only “strong suspicion.”

2. From the south preceding angle of the parallelocram No. 7 of Art. 51, a
faint branch is believed to extend to star 14, or beyond. It is very slightly,
marked in the engraving.

3. The branch No. 9 of Art. 52 probably completes the loop by joining the
» at the two bright stars 104 and 110.

4. The branch No. 10, of Art. 52, also probably extends to the v. It is
pretty definitely bounded on its preceding, but fades diffusely on the following
side, filling nearly all the vacancy between it and the with vague nebulosity.

5. The seems to be barely disjoined from the v at and near the star 162, as
if it were in the act of breaking away by the force of contrary attractions.
This may very possibly be owing to the effect of the bright star 162 in appa-
rently effacing the nebula in its immediate vicinity.

6. From the northern extremity of the parallelogram, No. 7 of Art. 51, near
Stars 54 and 47, the loop faintly marked in the engraving probably curves
round and joins the loop No. 3 of Art. 53, near the stars 106, 119.

204 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULZ

7. The loop No. 10, of Art. 51 1s very indefinite on its inner margin, and
perhaps very faint nebulosity fills all the interior.

8. The star 83, in the bright portion No. 15 of Art. 52, is believed to be pe-
culiar,—blotty or nebulous. (Art. 19, Aug. 20.)

9. A branch curves off from the principal division of the bifurcate portion
along the stars 24, 19, 11, 8. This would be certain but for the reason men-
tioned in No. 1 of this article. (Art. 19, Aug. 9.)

54. Shghtly suspected.—1. Nebulosity in the three loops of stars mentioned
in the observations of Aug.
9 ancl WO. AveG, IO, Aine |
run in the direction repre-
sented in the margin, and a |
portion of them are also
faintly traced in the plate
of the nebula. The stars
oa oe 1 Belews,
and 1, constitute but

the several starting points,
or origins, of these connect-

ed series of stars.

2. From the s p angle of No. 7, Art. 51, near the stars 45, 61, faint ne-
bulosity extending among the stars 48, 29, 42, 28, 22, perhaps joining the clus-
ter in No. 1. of Art. 53.

3. Some straggling interlacing of nebulous matter and stars to some dis-
tance s f the v, towards stars 179, 193, 196.

4. A possible extension of irregular rings and branches of nebulosity,
spreading down from the parallelogram No. 7 of Art. 51, and its proximate
branches, to the loops of No. 1, as above. (Art. 19, Aug. 19.)

5. The surface of the sky around is broken with almost visible wisps, and
imaginings of nebulous matter,—for I can somewhat express by these terms
that troubled appearance of the heavens, which continually suggests the idea
of nebulosity, yet disappointing all closer scrutiny. (Art. 19, Aug. 19.) I have
little doubt that, with a telescope of not much greater power, the range of this
nebula might be considerably extended, and hope, at some future time, to

have the means of doing so, or to see the conjecture investigated by others at
an earlier date.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 205

Former Observations of these Nebule.

55. All the light which we can obtain on the past history of these nebule
becomes of great moment in the inquiry, ‘Whether their present form and
character are now sufficiently well determined to be a standard for the future?’
I have therefore collected into one group in order of time such scattered notices
of each as I have been able to find; the collection of which, as independent
observations, differing greatly in point of time, is of considerable interest in
detecting some important errors, and in ascertaining the probable stability of
the nebule. And, furthermore, the distinguishing characteristics of that mode
of observing and describing the nebule, which it is a chief object of this paper
to explain, will be more distinctly illustrated by a comparison of former with
the present observations.

56. At the time of pursuing these inquiries with the 14 feet Reflector, the
great catalogue of Sir J. Herschel, (Phil. Trans. 1833,) was the only one with
which Mr. Smith and myself were acquainted; the common abridgment of the
Philosophical Transactions previous to 1800, contains of the elder Herschel’s
catalogues, only a very full preface and explanation of the observations, with
the unfortunate omission, however, of the observations themselves,—an arrange-
ment not very well adapted to the convenience of future observers. Recently,
however, having access to the greater part of the original papers, I am enabled
to extract from them:

H. V., 10, 11, 12; H. IV., 41; A. 1991.*

40 of the 145; Sh. 379.+

57. Sir William Herschel; First Catalogue of 1000. Phil. Trans. 1786, Pari II.

Cl.| No. | Date. Star. | Diff. of R.A. | Diff. of Decl. | NO of Remarks.
10 July ily, | | Uitee nepultes frinly joined, form @ trian-
. . oo TIC. a
V.}< 11 5 (i) Sagittarii | Foll. | 2™ 42°} North|0° 49’| 1 oy (al onal aeeeent aan i aa
12| 1784
* Synonyms of the nebula. t Synonyms of the triple star in its centre.

V1ll.—3 B

206 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

Sir William Herschel; Second Catalogue of 1000. Phil. Trans. 1789, Part II.

Cl. |No.| Date. Star. Diff. of R.A. | Diff. of Decl. | No of Remarks.
May 26, A double star with extensive nebulosity of
: Dg ° ) ifferent intensity. About the double star
IV.| 41 14 Sagittarii | Prec. | 11" 58°|South|1° 15’) 1 isa black opening resembling the nebula
1786. in Orion in miniature,

Str William Herschel; ‘‘ On the places of 145 new Double Stars.’ Mem. Ast. Soc., Vol. L.,
Part I, 1822.

(40.) 566 sweep. May 26,1786. A double star within neb. IV. 41. 14 Sagittarii prec. 11™ 58°,
south 1° 15’; R. A., 17 49™ 30s; P. D., 113° 1’

Sir William Herschel; Astronomical Observations relating to the Construction of the Heavens, ar-
ranged for the purpose of a critical examination, gc.” Phil. Trans. 1811, Part If. Under the
11th division “ of treble, quadruple, or sextuple nebula,” the example adduced is that of this nebula,

as follows:

Among the treble nebule there is one, namely, V. 10, of which the nebulosity is not yet separated.
‘“‘ Three nebule seem to join faintly together,° forming a kind of triangle; the middle of which is less nebu-
lous, or perhaps free from nebulosity*; in the middle? of the triangle is a double star of the second or third

class; more faint nebulosities are following’.”

‘“« Mr. Herschel’s and Mr. South’s Observations of the apparent Distances and Positions of 380 double
and triple Stars.’—Phil. Trans. 1824, Part II. In the “ Supplementary Catalogue of Twenty,”
less perfectly measured than the rest, on account of uncommon difficulty, d-c., is a measure of the
central star:

No. CCCLXXIX. R. A. 17 52"; Decl. 22° 58’ 8. AQ of the 145.
Double; 9th and 10th * magnitudes.
July 11, 1828. Five feet Equatorial.
Position = 61° 45'+ sp; Distance = 10”. 952+ single measures. South.”

May be easily measured in the 7 feet, but in its present place it cannot be directed to it.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. “An Account of the Actual State of the Great Nebula in Orion, compared
with those of former Astronomers.” Mem. Ast. Soc., Vol. II., Part IJ., 1826. In a note on p. 490
he says: :

“‘ However, in the nebula R. A. 175 52%, N. P. D. 118° 1’ in Sagittarius, which belongs to the same
class of objects as that in Orion, the idea of an absorption by the double star in its middle is very forcibly
suggested. This nebula is broken into three parts, and the three lines of division meet in a vacancy’*, in
the midst* of which is situated the double star. This curious object has, perhaps, a proper motion.

@ Art. 17., Aug. 1 and 9; Art. 43, 4. ¢ Art. 45, 2. 4 Art. 61. ° Art. 36.

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 207

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. Second Catalogue “of 295 new Double and Triple Stars, discovered in the
course of a series of Observations with a twenty feet Reflecting Telescope. Mem. Ast. Soc., Vol.
TIT., Part I., 1827.

| ‘
No. R. A. 1830.0 | N. P. D. 1830.0} Angle. | Quadrant. | Dist. | Mags. | Remarks.
A most curious and interesting object; a double star
—— | 17° 527 19.5} 118° 2’ 2” 60° s p 10” 9, 10° placed exactly in the central (a) vacuity of a large
irregular nebula, which appears to have broken up

into three portions by three rifts, or cracks, extend-
ing from its centre to its circumference, and whose directions meet (b) at the double star. Twice observed in R. A., and three
times in P. D. AR. A. =7.1. Diff. of greatest and least P. D.= 84". H.and 8S. 379. (61° 45* s p, 10’'.952.)

Sir J. F. W. Herschel, in the prefatory remarks to the same paper, says:

The curious double star R. A. 17" 52™ 1s.5, so remarkably situated “‘where three ways meet,” in the
midst of a very large and conspicuous nebula, affords a striking instance how easily the latter class of ob-
jects may be overlooked in the usual mode of conducting astronomical observations within doors, with
lights burning and the field illuminated. Mr. South measured this star in the five feet equatorial, but the
nebula which formed so very striking an appendage to it escaped his notice entirely, &c.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. ‘“ Fifth Catalogue of Double Stars observed at Slough, in the years 1830 and
1831, with the twenty feet Reflector, §-c.” Mem. Ast. Soc., Vol. VI., 1833.

No. h. R. A. 1830.0 N. P. D. 1830.0 Pos. Dist. Mag. Remarks. | Sweep. | Reference.
218°.0 10” 8, 9.10¢ i i el
h5]m 3 oy} ” 0 Beautifully triple. In nebula IV. 41, =)
(lv 51™ 56%.9 | 118° 1’ 29 22)40)\0 13.185 £0 [Daylight observation; nebula not observed.| 275 |
} Sh. 379.
} 216 .4|14 ___ |Position, mean of 216°.0, 217°.1, 216°.2. 276
[ === 20 +) 5t —____ |friple. Before the close star could be mea-| © y

=o sured, it clouded.

Position from diagram. If oe rosa se measure of Sh. 379 could be relied upon, the star B must have varied in position greatly.(f) C over-
looked by my father, and by S 1.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. ‘“ Observations of Nebule and Clusters of Stars, made at Slough, with a
twenty feet Reflector, between the years 1825 and 1833.” Phil. Trans. 1833, Part I.

| No. | Synonym. A. R. 1830.0 N. P. D. 1830.0. Description and Remarks. Sweep.

1991 | IV. 41. | 175 51™ 56s.9 | 113° 1’ 29” | The double star S h. 379 in the centre? of the trifid| 275 |
nebula IV. 41. (See my 5th catalogue of double
stars. Mem. Roy. Ast. Soc. and fig. 80.)
62.4 0 41 | A careful drawing taken, but the nebula is not clear| 32
from twilight and clouds. (N. B. This drawing
is unfortunately Jost, and that engraved in fig. 80
is constructed from mane less elaborate sketches,
aided by memory.)
64 3 0 6 | Very large; trifid, three nebule with a vacuity in the] 30
midst‘, in which is centrally situated? the double
star S h. 379, nebula = 7’ in extent. A most re-
markable object.
Sey YS 0 43 |Seen in its place, but clouds prevented observation. 31

> Art. 17, Aug. 9; Art. 43. 4. f Art. 62.
* There is an erratum here in the Mem. Ast. Soc. For “819 4 45’,” read “61° 45’.”

Should it not be 276? There is an erratum either here or in the catalogue referred to, since against ‘sweep
275” in that catalogue is the remark “ Daylight observation; nebula not observed.”

208 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULA

M. 17; h. 2008.

58. Sir William Herschel. ‘‘ On the Construction of the Heavens.” Phil. Trans. 1785, Part I. M.
17 is included in the enumeration of seven “very compound nebule, or milky ways,” which “ cannot

be otherwise than of a wonderful magnitude, and may well outvie our milky way in grandeur,” as
follows:

The seventh is a wonderful, extensive nebulosity of the milky® kind. ‘There are several stars visible in
it, but they can have no connexion with that nebulosity, and are, doubtless, belonging to our own system
scattered before it. It is the 17th of the Connaissance des Tems.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. ‘Observations of Nebule and Clusters of Stars, made at Slough, with a
twenty feet Reflector, ge.” Phil. Trans. 1833, Part II.

No. | Synonym. A. R. 1830.0 N. P. D. 1830.0 Description and Remarks. Sweep.

2008.| M. 17 | 18" 10™ 445.2 | 106° 17’ 55" |The principal star* in the preceding arc of the| 163
horse-shoe-like portion of the nebula M. 17.

See fig. 35.

46 8 14 5 |The small, insulated, resolvable knot® in the fol-| 274
lowing® strait branch of the nebula.

51.8 14 19 |The same knot. See description of-this nebula in| 358

the Appendix. See also the figure.

15 48::|A most curious object, not unlike the nebula in| 38
Orion, (as it used to be figured, like a Greek
capital omega, 2.) There is in it a resolvable
portion, or knot, distinctly separated from, and
insulated in the rest, as if it had absorbed the
nebula near it, (A figure carefully drawn.)
(The P. D. inaccurate", being much past meri-
dian.)

15 27::| A large extended nebula. Its form is that of aj 48

Greek © with the left (or following) base-line

turned upwards. The curved (or horse-shoe)

part is very faint, and has many stars in it. The

preceding base-line hardly visible*. The follow-

ing, which is the principal branch, occupies nearly

half the field, (74’.) Its light is not equable, but

blotty. Strong twilight.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. ‘ Notes on the List of Figured Nebule,” in the ‘‘ Appendix” to the above
paper.

Fig. 35, Mrss. 17.—The figure of this nebula is nearly that of a Greek capital omega, 2, somewhat dis-
torted, and very unequally bright. It is remarkable that this is the form usually attributed to the great
nebula in Orion, though in that nebula I confess I can discern no resemblance whatever to the Greek let-
ter. MessrEr perceived only the bright following* branch of the nebula now in question, without any of
the attached convolutions which were first noticed by my father.!| The chief peculiarities which I have

g Art. 18, Aug. 10.

h The north polar distances of these two points are, as given here, on the average, about 2’ larger than mine.
i Art. 47. 1; Art. 48. 4, 5. k Art. 49. 2.
1T have not been able to find Sir William Herschel’s notice of these; and perhaps they are not published, since

Sir J. Herschel, in another part of this paper, refers to his father’s “ observations of Mrssizr’s nebule, (which,’”
he adds, “are not included in his catalogues,) &c.”

* Two errata occur here in the Phil. Trans. In both instances, for “ preceding ” read “ following.”

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 209

observed in it are, Ist, the resolvable knot in the following portion of the bright branch, which is, in a
considerable degree, insulated from the surrounding nebula; strongly suggesting the idea of an absorption
of the nebulous matter!; and, 2dly, the much feebler and smaller knot at the north preceding end of the
same branch, where the nebula makes a sudden bend at an acute anglem, With a view to a more exact
representation of this curious nebula, I have, at different times, taken micrometrical measures of the rela-
tive places of the stars in and near it, by which, when laid down as in a chart, its limits may be traced
and identified, as I hope soon to have better opportunity to do than its low situation in this latitude will

permit.

V. 19; h. 2092 and 2093.

59. Sir William Herschel. ‘On the Construction of the Heavens.” Phil. Trans. 1785, Part I.

> which “cannot be otherwise

The 2d and 3d of the seven “very compound nebule, or milky ways,’
than of a wonderful magnitude, and may well outvie our milky way in grandeur,” both belong to this

extensive nebula:

The second° is an extremely faint milky ray, above # of a degree? long, and 8 or 10’ broad?; extended
from north preceding to south following. It makes an angle of about 30 or 40 degrees with the meridian,
and contains three or four places that are brighter than the rest. The stars of the Galaxy are scattered
over it in the same manner as over the rest of the heavens. It follows ¢ Cygni 11.5 minutes of time, and
is 2° 19’ more south.

The third‘ is a branching nebulosity of about a degree and a half in right ascension, and about 48’ ex-
tent in polar distance. ‘The following part of it is divided into several streams, which, after separating,
meet each other again towards the south. It precedes ¢ Cygni 16™ in time, and is 1° 16’ more north. I
suppose this to be joined to the preceding one; but, having observed them in different sweeps, there was
no opportunity of tracing their connexion.

Sir William Herschel; First Catalogue of 1000. Phil. Trans. 1786, Paré II.

No. of

Cl. | No.| Date. Star. Diff. of R. A. Diff. of Decl. Onset Remarks.
Sept. 5, Brancding nebulosity, extending in R. A.
5 a 5 9 ) near 13°, and in P. D. 52’. The following
14 52 (k) Cygni| Foll. |11™ 24s| North | 0° 44 2 part divides into several streams, uniting
1784. again towards the south, (1)

Sir William Herschel. ‘“ Astronomical Observations relating to the Construction of the Heavens, ar-
ranged for the purpose of a critical examination, §c.” Phil. Trans. 1811, Part II. Under the first
of the many classes into which he had arranged them, we have:

1. Or Extensive Dirrusep Nrsunosiry.

The first article of my series will begin with extensive diffused nebulosity, which is a phenomenon that

m Art. 47. 2; Art. 49. 4; Art. 50. 1.

n In Sir J. Herschel’s present drawing, the places of at least four or five stars seem to have been settled by
measurement. ° Corresponding to h. 2092; Art. 64.

? I should think over-estimated. a & x Corresponding to h. 2093; Art. 64.

VIL.—3 C

210 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULEZ

hitherto has not been much noticed, and can, indeed, only be perceived by instruments that collect a great
quantity of light.
* * * * * * * * * Ok
The description of the object I shall select is of No. 14 in the 5th class, and is as followss :—“ Extremely
faint branching nebulosity; its whitishness is entirely of the milky kind, and it is brighter in three or four
places than in the rest; the stars of the milky way are scattered over it in the same manner as over the
rest of the heavens. Its extent in the parallel is nearly 14 degree, and in the meridional direction about

52 minutes. ‘The following part of it is divided into several streams and windings, which, after separating,
meet each other again towards the south.” See figure 1.

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. “ Observations of Nebule and Clusters of Stars, made at Slough, with «
twenty feet Reflector, gc.” Phil. Trans. 1838, Part IT.

No. | Synonym. A. R. 1830.0 N. P. D. 1830.0 Description and Remarks. Sweep.

2092} V.14 | 20549" 195.1 | 58°57’ i” | Place of the southern and brightest star of a trape- | 199
zium south of the bifurcation of this nebula. The
nebula is extremely faint, very long, and strag-
ling, extending at least four fields (= 1°). Its
direction is (by diagram) about 20°_n p tos f,
and near the middle it forks into two chief
branches. (See fig. 34.) In the trapezium (or
oval) above spoken of are 6 stars, 1 = 11m;
2= 10m; 3 = 12m; 4= 14m;5= 15m; 6=
12m°*. The northern branch of the fork is the
principal", and passes south of a double star
(7) Ww,

22.7| ------ The same star in the same nebula V. 14. The | 198

‘ nebula is of great extent, passing obliquely
through and rather under (to the north* of) a
small constellation, being densest where under
it; but it is extremely faint, and only to be seen
with an eye well prepared, and in a very clear
night. ‘The whole neighbourhood seems affect-
ed with wisps, or cirro-stratus-like masses of ne-
bula.*

2093; Nova. | 20 50 4.4] 60 26 6 ¥| (See figure 82.) A most wonderful phenomenon. 8
A very large space, 20' or 30’ broad in P. D.,
and 1™ or 2™ in R. A., full of nebula and stars
mixed. The nebula is decidedly attached to the
stars, and is as decidedly not stellar. It forms
irregular lace-work marked out by stars, but
some parts are decidedly nebulous, wherein no
stars can be seen.” A figure (from which the
drawing for the engraving was copied) repre-
sents general character, but not the minute de-
tails of this object, which would be extremely
difficult to give with any degree of fidelity.

s Art. 64. * Certainly over-estimated, even by the testimony of his own drawing.
u [t is not so in his drawing. Also, see Art. 51.17; Art. 52. 12. v Art. 52. 14.
w I cannot conjecture to what this “ (7)”” refers. x Art. 19, Aug. 19; Art. 54. 4. y Art. 65.

z Ayt. 19, Aug. 1 and 9; Art. 51. 8, 13.

* There seems to be an erratum here in the Phil. Trans. For “to the s. of,” read “to the n. of.”

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 211

Sir J. F. W. Herschel. ‘ Notes on the List of Figured Nebule,” in the “ Appendix” to the above
paper.

Plate XVI. Figs. 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, represent nebule which offer some remarkable peculiarity of situ-
ation with regard to stars. Of these the most singular are IV. 41, (fig. 80,) and that of fig. 82. The lat-
ter, however, is very imperfectly expressed in the drawing. Indeed, it would be excessively difficult to
execute a drawing of such an object with any pretensions to correctness. In this, general resemblance
and character only has been aimed at, enough to express the peculiar feature of the object, which is a net-
work or tracery of nebule following the lines of a similar network of stars. It is an extremely faint and
difficult object, and only once observed; but I do not think it possible I could have been deceived as to the
reality of the phenomenon,’ especially since the brighter parts of the nebula are stated in the observation
to have been distinctly seen.

60. A number of interesting results are deducible from the comparison of
these observations with each other, and with those embodied in this paper,
some few of which I shall point out.

61. The large nebula surrounding star 22 of h. 1991, appears to have escaped
the eyes of both the elder and younger Herschels. Unless we construe the
remarks of Sir Wm. Herschel in his paper of 1811, that “more faint nebu-
losities are following,” asa notice of this nebula. But, had Sir Wm. Herschel
actually seen the nebulous companion, which, surrounding a bright star at so
short a distance from the principal triple nebula, at once renders the whole
system one of the most wonderful and instructive in the heavens, it is in the
highest degree improbable that he would have passed over, with so light a
comment, a fact more highly illustrative of his peculiar views than any of the
instances he has so laboriously collected. His remark, which seems otherwise
inapplicable as a description of this object, more probably refers to some
smaller and very faint nebulosities, at several fields distance; one or two such
were marked by us as Nove, having no synonyms in the younger Herschel’s
catalogue, but for want of proper instrumental means, their places could not be
settled.

62. Measures of the triple star. The lines drawn on the star chart to mark
the directions of the components of the triple star, (see Art.17; Obs. of Aug. 14,)
were transferred to the corrected maps, and, measured by an accurate pro-
tractor, gave the following results: A B,=211°.5; A C,=15°.5, the latter not well
seen. Again, from the measured right ascensions and declinations, we have

212 OBSERVATIONS ON NEBULZ

for AB, 218°.6, though, from the nature of the deduction, not much to be de-
pended upon. An observation with the micrometer also occurs in the Journal,
as follows: “Oct. 4. Two measures of AB, s p 52°30’, and 55° 30'” the mean
of which = 216°.0. Arranging all the measures of this star in order of time, we
have er Curran emma

Position. Distance.
Herschel and South, 1823.5 61° 45’, s p = 208° 15’ |10”.9 |
Sir J. Herschel, 1827 60 sp = 210 (est.) | 10 (est.)
i ieeyi 218.0 | 10 (est.)
?

216 .4 14 (est.)
215 .4 10 1

The conjecture of Sir J. Herschel with regard to the change of position of
this star (see Art. 57, “‘ Fifth catalogue of double stars,”’) seems, therefore, not to
be confirmed.

63. The nebula IV. 41, and V. 10, 11, and 12, of Sir Wm. Herschel’s cata-
logues are identical. Sir J. Herschel seems to have recognised only the former.
And it appears that Sir Wm. Herschel supposed them different nebule, from
his assigning to them two different places in his catalogues.

64, The observations on fh. 2092 and 2093, by former observers, are in oreat
confusion znter se. Of the two “compound systems or milky ways” in Sir
Wm. Herschel’s first quoted paper, the “second” answers to the defurcate, and
the “third” to the network portion of this nebula. If the descriptions there
given did not show conclusively that this was the case, the places assigned
would remove all doubt. Again; in his first catalogue of 1000, he repeats the

escription of the third milky way, under the title of V. 14, which must there-
fore correspond to the network; and the place he assigns, when reduced, be-
comes R. A. 20° 50” 0, Decl. + 30° 50’, which exactly coincides with the
brightest point of this portion. Sir J. Herschel seems to have overlooked or
mistaken some of these observations, by applying the synonym V. 14 to the bi-
furcate portion, and calling the network “ Nova,” whereas both these suppo-
sitions the above comparison shows to be unwarrantable.

There is also some reason to believe, from the description in his paper of
1811, Art. 59, that the elder Herschel saw the faint band which I have shown
connects these two portions, or, in other words, traced out the whole nebula; the
“figure 1,” however, to which he refers so immediately, exhibits no trace of
resemblance to the object, as seen by us, nor is the difference such as could be
caused by any difference in telescopes. Nor is it at all in favour of this belief,

Mean of the above, 1839.7

WITH A FOURTEEN FEET REFLECTOR. 213

that he quotes from his catalogue under the title of V. 14, which I have shown
corresponds to the network only,—and assigns, as in that catalogue, an extent
of 52’ ina meridional direction, a quantity entirely too small to include the
whole nebula, especially when we consider that in other particulars of
dimension he has rather over, than under estimated. lam therefore unable to
decide this point. At the time of our own observations, and until quite
recently, I did not know that there was any ground for attributing to the
elder Herschel a full view of the whole nebula; and the remarks of the younger
Herschel, show conclusively, that he was not aware of their being united, nor
so understood his father’s observations.

65. It will be seen, by reference to the figured nebule of Sir J. Herschel,
that his figure 34 represents that portion of our largest nebula, included be-
tween the parallels 30° 55’ and 31° 20’ in Plate VII. Figure 82 represents the
general character of the portion between 30° 10’ and 30° 40’.

66. The N. P. D. of h. 20938, as given by Herschel, is 60° 26’ 6”, or in decli-
nation -+- 29° 34’. A reference to the map or catalogue will show the brightest
portion to be about + 30° 28’ 40". The place assigned by Sir J. Herschel is
therefore nearly a degree in error. I was led on this account, in early obser-
vations, to attribute to the nebula a greater extent than actually belongs to it.
It does not much exceed a degree in declination, and it is between 3™ and 4™
broad in right ascension. It would be very absurd to account for the error in
Herschel’s place, by supposing that not this, but some nebula about a degree
farther south, and unseen in our observations, is the one recorded by him. I
think it probable that the confusion I have above alluded to in the synonyms
of different portions of the whole nebula is chiefly owing to this mistake
Wh Je 1D),

VIIL—3 D

fees

if 3 *

—— “ St
—— ——= \\
WW :

if
i
x
ii apa |

ARTICLE XIV.

Engraving and Description of an Apparatus, and Process, for the rapid Congela-
tion of Water, by the explosive Evolution of Ethereal Vapour, consequent to the
combined influence of Rarefaction and the absorbing Power of Sulphuric
Acid. By Robert Hare, M.D. Read May 15, 1840.

In a verbal communication to the society, made in December last, I alluded
to my having previously published a notice of a process for freezing water by
the vaporization of ether; in which the congelation was expedited by the em-
ployment of sulphuric acid to absorb the ethereal vapour. I afterwards pro-
ceeded to state that, by the interposition of a vessel previously exhausted of
air, with which a communication could be made by opening a cock, the pro-
cess had been still farther improved, so as to cause a vaporization of the ether,
and a freezing of the water, so rapid as to project the resulting ice against the
upper internal surface of the containing vessel with a violence quite audible,
as well as visible, to a large audience of my pupils.

216 APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR THE RAPID CONGELATION OF WATER.

I now submit to the society, for publication in their Transactions, an en-
eraving and description of the apparatus employed agreeably to the recent
modification to which I have adverted.

The retort (A) contains water covered by a stratum of hydric ether, com-
monly called sulphuric ether. ‘The vessel (B) holds a stratum of sulphuric
acid, of which the depth, at the deepest part, is about two inches. Into the
tubulure in the side of this vessel the beak of the retort is ground to fit air-
tight, and is made to receive one end of a recurved tube, of which the lower
end descends about half an inch below the surface of the acid. A mercury
bottle, (C,) of which the mouth is closed so as to be air-tight, is furnished with
two cocks, one of which communicates, through a pipe, with an air-pump, the
other, in like manner, with the vessel (B.) This bottle is previously ex-
hausted, and kept in a state of exhaustion by closing both of the cocks. The
pump being put into operation and the cocks opened, the power of the acid in
absorbing the vapour, co-operating with that of the pump, and the vacuum in
the bottle, in exhausting the air and vapour from the retort, causes an explo-
sive vaporization of the ether and a rapid congelation of the water. It is upon
the novelty of the last mentioned phenomena, and of the means employed in
their production, that I rest the pretension of this brief communication to a
place in a volume of the society’s Transactions.

ARTICLE XV.

On the Insufficiency of Taylor’s Theorem as commonly investigated; with Ob:
sections to the Demonstrations of Poisson and Cauchy, and the assumed Gene-
rahzation of Mr. Peacock; to which are added a new Investigation and Remarks
on the Development and Continuity of Functions. By Charles Bonnycastle,
Professor of Mathematics in the University of Virginia. Read May 15, 1840.

SEcTIoN I.

Development of Functions.

In another place I have pointed out the errors and conflicting views result-
ing from the vague manner in which mathematical writers have usually con-
ceived the ultimate object of their peculiar logic.

This discussion is only incidentally connected with the present paper, but
it will conduce to clearness if I state so much of the construction and object of
modern analysis as we shall have occasion to refer to in what follows.

1. Numerical logic may be regarded as divided into two great branches—
the body of connected arrangements and rules, to which writers have given
that most awkward name “the calculus,” and the operations whereby all the
relations of quantity are reduced to its influence, and developed by its esta-
blished principles.

2. The first of these branches, for which we have remarked a new name is
so much wanted,* consists, Ist, of arithmetic—which any good calculating ma-

* See note 1.
VIl.—3 E

218 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

chine might conveniently replace—and, 2dly, of algebra, elementary and
transcendent, which prepares and reduces complicated relations for the ap-
plication of arithmetic, or, in other words, brings them within reach of the
machine.

3. The applied branch of numerical logic—nearly as ill named as that which
is pure—has for its object to reduce all the relations of time and space, and
such moral relations as admit the notion of definite aggregation to relations of
number; or, more correctly, to reduce all modes of exact aggregation to the re-
lations of that particular arrangement of number which constitutes the branch
preceding.

4. As I cannot persuade myself to use a term so ill adapted to its purpose as
“the calculus,” I must employ, in its place, the circuitous definition of “ the
known and connected algebraic arrangements,’ and shall then observe that,
throughout this paper, any expression composed of the known and connected
algebraic arrangements is termed a function of numerical logic, as any ex-
pression which relates to modal aggregation, unreduced to relations of num-
ber, is termed @ modal function.

5. The two great instruments which numerical logic employs in reducing
the unknown to the known are equalities and developments. In the present
mode of considering the subject, nearly all developments are derived from
those which are equalities, by the simple process of omitting the remainder;
so that, denoting a development by the sign 4/, either of the propositions

t) 1 2 3 m
Wh es A SL Ge 4 oP ae ges 5 a ok IR a)
or
0 0 11 22 a3 mm
Ch Uy SS Wie Se CE NE 6 Wy SS Ik @)
may be said to involve the proposition
1) 1 2 3 m
u7-u,u,uU...uU @)

6. A variety of instances, more general than these, might be given, but our

present object is limited to the manner in which the third proposition arises
0 1 2 m
from the second, and to that form of the “classifying functions” v, v, Vv... Vv,

which gives rise to the differential and the integral calculus.
To conceive the first of these neatly, we remark, that many developments
are not only definite, or such as can be found by fixed rules, but also prame, or

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 219

such as admit of only one form, and that always give the same terms when the

function operated upon is varied in any way that does not affect its value.
x 0 i,
Hence, if such a form can be found for v—the. general term of v, v, v; as,

within specified limits of some of the variables that enter u—shall make any
one of the terms in (2) greater than all which follow—including R—the

functions
a 0 0.0 Lei 0 0 pee Di
WV, UV~-UV, UV+uUV+UYV, &c.,

will be osculates of the more complicated, and less known, function u, or, in
other words, will agree with it more nearly than any other functions of the
same peculiar form and simplicity can agree.

The success of the method obviously depends on our obtaining known and
manageable functions for the derived terms, or, rather, for those partial sums
of them which we have above enumerated.

The great importance of such osculates will be felt when we consider that
not only tangents, tangent planes, circles of curvature, motions in these lines
and planes, and other similar geometrical and dynamical elements, are merely
osculates to the function they are intended to trace, but that every physical
hypothesis stands in the same relation to the function which it represents; as
may be well perceived in the Newtonian law of gravity, which is merely re-
garded as a convenient and /inzte osculate to the law of nature.

Recent analysts, and especially LacrancE and FourtrEr, have greatly added
to this method of investigation, by the introduction of those very simple tran-
scendental osculates which give finite osculations with any required portion of
a function, and which thus enable us to separate the parts that belong to the
problem in hand from those which would merely embarrass the investigation.

Having thus pointed out the manner in which the differential calculus pro-
ceeds, it may not be amiss to notice that of its converse, whereby we shall
throw farther light upon the nature of the developments we are considering.
These two branches of numerical logic are, indeed, so imperfectly explained
in our elementary works, and have been viewed by writers of the eminence of
Caucuy and Mr. PEacock in a manner so much at variance with what I re-
gard as their true principles, that I found this little preliminary sketch essen-
tial to the clear understanding of the principal subject of this paper.

220 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

Supposing, then, a numerical function P developing in a known series
0 1 2

P,P, PoP ae
and a modal function Q developing, modally, in a similar series

OuOHO. .OUu acer (6)
it is evident that if we can so determine P that any corresponding terms in
these developments shall agree—as, for example, that P shall be the numerical
representative of Q, the relation which exists among the terms, and whereby
we pass from term to term, in either direction, along the series, will immedi-

ately determine the connexion of P and Q, of P and Q, or of any other of these
related functions. A single example, the method of determining areas, will
render this abundantly clear, and as the subject is elementary, and well known,
we may dismiss it in a few words:—The modal function Q is, in this case, the
increased area; the related, or derived functions Q, Q, Q, &c., are the unin-
creased area—the parallelogram that composes the largest part of the increase
—the right lined triangle that stands on this parallelogram, and soon. Now
any one of these derived terms, the first excepted, is easily expressed algebra-
ically, and thus, by the converse of the process that derives a term from that
which precedes it, we are enabled to repass, backward, along the developments,

(4)

and to determine the relation of Pp and Q.

It is very remarkable that mathematicians employing extensively the theory
described above, and which depends on the use made of that remainder R, con-
cerning which so much has been said, should have entertained notions in re-
gard to this last that were far from correct. The nature and magnitude of R
is manifestly an inquiry essential to the proofs, both that the development is
possible and that it is prime, and which is again referred to in that part of the
application wherein any term of the series is said to exceed all the rest of the
development, D’ALEmMBERT and LacRaNcEe were thus led to compute the
value of a term on which so much depended; but, proceeding in a vicious cir-
cle, their analysis assumed the development which it was meant to demon-
strate, as we shall presently show.

Caucuy, perceiving this error, but not distinguishing between developments

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 22]

and equalities, and having apparently an obscure notion of that most valuable
part of analysis, the theory of correlations, was led to remodel the differential
calculus, and to discover R by a detailed investigation of each special case.
Such a process led to rules that seemed to multiply infinitely; the unity and
power of analysis became frittered away into—the limited propositions—the par-
tial clearness—and general obscurity of synthesis; and yet so great was the in-
fluence of this clever writer, that the injury done to science may be traced
even in the works of analysts the most profound,* and greatly disfigures the
works of many continental writers of less reputation. The extent of this in-
jury having been seen by Mr. Peacock, he was led, in opposition, to assertions
that err in a contrary direction, laying down as a law, of which he regards
himself as the discoverer, that not only is every development an equality, but,
proceeding farther in this method of regarding the subject, that every proposi-
tion of numerical logic, once established as true within limits, is thenceforth to
be looked upon as universally trae—an assertion which would reduce all ar-
rangements to one arrangement, and deny to correlation the power of restrict-
ing, or of referring propositions not conveniently grouped together, to distinct
classes.

We trust that, after the preceding remarks, it will be clear that both of these
views are erroneous; that developments considered per se, as, for example, in
the theory of generating functions, involve no idea of equality between the
members of the proposition, and are even, in many cases, independent of con-

nexion between the terms, as in the ee
3

PAS P, P Lede ee ete ae
an independence that does not ievont the equality between the numbers of
the original development
P= Pko¢ Pk 4 Pke4.. Pk. 4 R

whence the preceding may have been derived, from having its use in tracing
the nature of the latter, or regulating its applications.

The development whereon the differential calculus is founded requires that we
should keep these remarks in mind. The great analysts to whom that method
of reasoning is due perceived that, treating F (x + Hy) as a generating function,

F x becomes as first term of a series of functions P, P, pee . having

* The second edition of Poisson’s Mechanics may be cited in proof.
VIL—3 F

222 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

important properties, and which enter as coefficients of the development

P 4 Ph’ + Ph? + Ph’... Ph... +R,
that possesses the property, already oationed of permitting one term to be
rendered greater than all the remainder.

To prove the generality of such an expansion became, therefore, a problem
of moment, and as, in attempting to solve it, Lacrance had fallen into a ma-
terial error, Potsson resumed the subject in a memoir, the substance of which
may be found in the large work of Lacroix.

It was soon felt, however, that Poisson’s demonstration proved too much;
it was seen that his results, if demonstrated at all, should be true of every spe-
cies of function, and that deviations from truths so established would not be
exceptions, but anomalies. ‘The force of these objections was increased by a
discovery, partly his own, that, in a similar case, the expansion for sin n x,
mathematicians, by adopting such loose reasoning, had fallen into considerable
mistakes. And these doubts were again re-enforced when it was found that, in
that celebrated development used by Lapuace to investigate the theory of the
planets, as well as in the case of the numerous periodic series that began now
to be employed, these vague methods of development had introduced uncer-
tainty into the most profound inquiries, and thrown doubt upon results of the
highest importance.

Hence arose both Caucuy’s laborious reinvestigation of the higher analysis,
and those numerous attempts which we have recently seen made, to demonstrate,
in a more exact manner, the fundamental expansions of the science.

Among these it must be acknowledged that one of the most elegant and
happy is Porsson’s investigation, given in his Traite de Chaleur, of Fou-
RIER’S ‘I‘heorem for periodic developments. And yet, even here, it must be
allowed that a demonstration is still wanting that shall, at the same time, be
more simple, and connect the result more readily with the elementary arrange-
ments of numerical logic.

That such is the case with regard to the theorem that forms the subject of
this paper is, I have no doubt, generally felt; and to that theorem I now
return.

LacRancg, after an unsuccessful attempt to prove that fractional powers do
not enter the development, commences his demonstration by assuming an ex-
pansion of the form

F(x +h) = F (x) + h.P;

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 223

which Poisson changes to
BiG =) ahs) eB
but with what justice we shall now consider.
The development
F @ +h) =F @) + RG, h)
ne (Gc 1) OR Es
h=0
is merely an analytical expression for the hypothesis that h is independent of
x, and therefore unquestionable. But, without venturing so far as the suppo-
sition of R (x, h) containing a factor which is a power of h, what right have we
to assume that it contains a factor which is even a pure function of h? or, in
other words that
R (x, h) = & (h). Q (x, h);
{E (h) = 03?

h=0
It may be answered that in no other form than as a multiple could h destroy
terms containing the independent variable x. But how much is here assumed
1
will be perceived by considering that, in such simple functions as x *, or log.

eo bh that vanish when h = 0, we do not immediately see that hz enters as a

factor; and although it might be demonstrated that h is so involved, yet what
are we to say in regard to the extension of the assumption to that host of tran-
scendental functions, the varying and almost capricious relations of which
analysts are only beginning to understand?

Even in the simple vanishing function log x, we know that x* cannot be
said to enter as a factor, unless we admit that a is infinitely small; and other
cases might be found still more perplexing.

A geometrical illustration will, however, suffice for this purpose. Thus,
representing graphically three functions of the form

y= he
fy= €.h =0}
ty = $ (x, h)=03 ;

the first is seen to be continuous and parabolic; and, consequently, if the two
latter partake of the same degree of continuity, we may conclude that a could

* This notation denotes the function to vanish when h = 0.

224. ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

be so assigned as that when h was very small, the other two functions should
sensibly degenerate to he. Such a conclusion would probably command the
assent of the mind; but in what sense could this osculation be understood if the
functions & and @, expressed throughout their whole extent—series of uncon-
nected points—broken portions of lines infinitely small, arranged at infinitely
little intervals—denticulated—serpentining in waves such as are presented by
what is termed in art a perfectly polished surface—subject to finite changes in
infinitely small distances—or, in short, subjected to any of those numerous va-
rleties of discontinuity which the modern analysis embraces. So far from the
osculation being, in such cases, axiomatic, I believe that few analysts, however
skilful, will venture, without much investigation, to assert its existence; and
even then, their acquaintance with the infinitely small variations of functions
would rather be due to a knowledge of 'Taylor’s Theorem than drawn from the
algebraic arrangements which precede it in the calculus. ‘The changes which
the second function permits might, indeed, cause it to osculate, or become iden-
tical with the third for any given value of x; but still, in this instance also,
where the assumption is so far less arbitrary and restricted than Potsson’s, it
could scarcely be allowed; since, should x be changed, by what principle can
we assume that the function &h, which osculated with @ for the former ab-
scissa, continues to agree with it for the new point of osculation?

Mr. Murpny, in one of his excellent memoirs on definite integrals* has
given the name of transient functions to a class of expressions analogous to
some of those already mentioned. ‘The expression

; (a AG lo
On (aon) nee 2
h=1
is of this class, vanishing for every value of t excepting that in which t is zero,

when the value of the function becomes infinite; and were we to rest the argu-
ment merely on functions of this kind, we might very well ask whether it can
be at once asserted, as axiomatic, that all the great variety of such functions
admit of being developed by powers of t?

Sir W. Hamitton and Caucuy have both taken the function
1

2
e x

as presenting anomalies and difficulties which cause it to violate two of the
received laws of analysis. The last of these authors, indeed, considers this

* Cambridge Phil. Trans., Vol. V., p. 347.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 225

function is alone sufficient to overthrow the customary demonstrations of Tay-
lor’s Theorem, and rests the necessity for his own method of proceeding upon
the evidence it affords. It is yet manifest that every transient function must
possess the same “apparent”? anomaly of making the function itself, and all its
differential coefficients, vanish for a given value of x; and, indeed, the whole
doctrine of what Caucuy has termed szngular integrals rests upon the same
foundation. The anomaly observed by the first of the authors we have cited
consists in the fact that, whilst the function vanishes for x = 0, it cannot be ex-
panded in a series proceeding by the powers of x.

Mr. Peacock, having adopted the maxim that all developments may be re-
garded as universally true, is led to hope, in noticing this function, “that more
enlarged views of the analytical relations of zero and infinity, and of the inter-
pretation of the circumstances of their recurrence, as well as of the principles
and applications of Taylor’s series, may enable us to explain these and other
anomalies.”* Without doubt, they are very easily explained in the present
instance; and it may be matter of surprise that neither Sir W. HamiiTon nor
Mr. Peacock have noticed the explanation. I have not, indeed, at present, the
Irish Transactions by me, and am, therefore, obliged to restrict myself to the
analysis and remarks contained in the work here quoted, but which, I presume,

are drawn from the original memoir.t ‘The method used is to put the theorem
1
e @=Axe+Bx44Cx7 + &e.
under the form

1
~@

ee es AE Be Olek oe) (a)

; 1 :
When, assuming y = = expanding
ae a
fx) “el ET) ey * Oe?

under the form

A —— ae

YP te a reer + &¢,, (b)
and observing that when x = 0 or y = o,, this series is infinite, it is concluded
that the left hand member of (a) must be zero, and consequently A = 0; a re-

* Third Report, p. 346.
tI have since found this surmise correct, having received the Transactions in the interval that
elapsed in going to the press.

VlI.—3 G

226 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

sult which it is concluded would follow, in like manner, for all the other coeffi-
cients.

But here it will be at once seen that the expansion (b) which is unexception-
able whilst y is small, cannot, except on Mr. Pracock’s principles, be assumed
as holding good where y is infinite; and that, even assuming this expansion, it
may happen that @ is infinite, a result which would reduce an infinity of the
first terms of (b) to zero, and thus cause the series to have both numerators and
denominators infinite, and consequently render it capable of a finitesum. That
such is really the case may be readily shown, for, writing

e* = ( ae),
and putting

Cai exe
we have

ex =X ior.
and consequently

1 “i

oy ye) (= 3) x? (— 2 log x + log — 1)
x2
a

1
1

x x (log x — # log — 1)

II

or

but putting x = : we have

1 Saree y?

x? log x log y

and as y”, when y is infinite, is infinitely greater than log y, we have

1
Sve ae']

x—0

whence we conclude that if the function in question is expanded in a series of
the kind proposed, the lowest power of x must be infinite. And as log x is, in
like manner, a function that expands by infinitely small powers of x, it would
appear that we might take, as the classifying functions whereby developments
can be arranged, the simple expressions

Kee ea (log x)”.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 227

With these remarks I may close this preliminary outline of the subject,
which, I trust, will not be considered as without interest or unnecessarily pro-
lix by those who bear in mind the great importance of the development to
which it relates, and the erroneous views of it which analysts of the first rank
have taken.

The same observations will apply to another subject, which has, indeed, been
only touched upon incidentally by any of the writers with whose works I am
acquainted; I allude to the continuity of functions, and the division of this con-
tinuity into classes. D’ALEmMBERT and Lacraneg, in their discussions con-
cerning the vibrations of a musical cord, and, more recently, Fourter, in his
admirable theory of the propagation of heat, have given us some examples of
that species of arrangement which they term discontinuous functions; and
Poisson, in resuming the inquiry treated by the two former, has shown that
the theories of the musical cord require that it should every where have that
species of continuity which gives a single tangent to each point. And I may
add that Mr. Murpuy, in the first of his Memoirs on the Inverse Method of
Definite Integrals, has divided functions according to the number of their breaks,
giving analytical expressions for each class. But, as all these writers have re-
garded functions wherein the condition mentioned by Poisson is not fulfilled, as
discontinuous, I have to add here some remarks on that subject.

Section II.

Continmty of Functions.

The observations which I intend to make on this head will, perhaps, be con-
veniently inttoduced by quoting from a small pamphlet containing some ele-
mentary views of this kind, and which I had printed, but without publication,
during the course of last year.

‘Continuous functions we should suppose to be such as, in increasing from
one grandeur to another, passed by insensible gradations through every inter-
mediate value; but this must be understood with considerable limitation, since
the degree of continuity which serves, at present, as the type of that quality
in the theory of number is the continuity possessed by the ordinary functions

228 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

of the science. The elementary functions of this class are x", a‘, sin x; and

their converses x~*, x 5, log x, sin~’x; and the complex are such as can be
formed from these by any of the operations which were used in forming these
functions themselves, certain restrictions being required when those operations
compose an infinite series.

Now if we assume as our unit a number «, no otherwise assignable than as
being less than any number we use in the course of the inquiry, and as being
capable of indefinite diminution, the natural scale of numbers will become

J Qe, —— We Oles WeeN 2 er dies thl Re oe
where each term exceeds the preceding by the indefinitely small portion «.
Such a scale is, in fact, employed by Lapiace, under another form, at the com-
mencement of the Mec. Celeste, and, adding clearness to discussions concern-
ing infinitely small variations, will be used throughout this paper, wherein we
shall term it the natural scale to the untt «.

But, substituting for x, either in the preceding elementary functions or their
converses, the successive numbers of this scale, or making the same substitu-
tions in any of the less complex functions that are obtained from these, our
knowledge of such functions assures us that the results would be one or other
of these three kinds, namely: 1. Real numbers, positive or negative, and in-
creasing and decreasing continuously; 2. Imaginary symbols of the form
v + w ¥—1, where v and w continuously increase or decrease; and, 3. Eix-
pressions of the form —— where w being exceedingly nearly equal to v, the
continuous increase of w may cause the expression to become plus infinity; and
this increase continuing, and causing w to exceed v by a quantity infinitely
small, will make the value of the expression pass at once from plus infinity to
minus infinity.

Such, at least, then, are the degrees of variation that we must admit under
the notion of continuity, if we would regard the ordinary functions of algebra
as continuous; and we find that our elementary writers have, accordingly, in
speaking of continuous functions, limited themselves to these cases, framing a
rule that, in such functions, a number never passes from plus to minus without
having previoxsly passed through zero or infinity.

ail
The very simple expression y = tan 1 _ will, however, show us that
a— Z

such a rule is not exact, since, by making z respectively equal to a + ¢ or a —e,

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 229

. . 1 1 5
or, which is the same, y = tan~'> and — tan~';, we observe that z, in

#?
passing through the value a, changes y, at once, from + = to —.-

The great abruptness of such changes might lead us to suppose. their extent
of discontinuity not subject to any rule, but further inquiry will not warrant
us in this conclusion; through all their changes, these functions have a con-
nexion that admits of measurement, and which, as we have before remarked,
is even made the standard of comparison for other changes; so that in the lan-
guage of algebra, variations of no greater extent than these, are reckoned as
within the limits of continuity, whilst changes more abrupt are regarded as
transcending those limits.

But, although mathematicians may adopt this definition, it would evidently
be more correct to say that continuity is divided by such writers into orders:
geometrical continuity of the highest order may cease with the introduction
of imaginary signs, whilst analytical continuity admits such symbols of corre-
lation as indicative of a grouping of related problems. The expression, for
example, y = a + Vb? — x® ceases to be geometrically continuous with the
value x = b; but this is far from being the case with the analytical function,
wherein that value indicates a mere transition to a second problem of the same
sroup. All functions y = Fx, of numerical logic, or which are expressed in
terms of those unbroken arrangements of “the calculus” that lead to the rules
of arithmetic—rules by which, as by a machine, the numerical values are com-
puted—will thus constitute series of continuous terms; but it would seem that
analytical writers carry this notion further, and regard every arranged series,
whether reduced or not to the known arrangements of the calculus, as pos-
sessed of some continuity.

The functions arithmetically direct, or that merely represent additions, to-
gether with all those which, in passing from one value to another, pass through
all the intermediate values, form the functions of the first degree; a continuity,
it may be observed, best understood by considering the branches which func-
tions admit.

I have, in another place, proposed to denote functions as monoramic, or mul-
turamic, according to their division into branches. And these divisions, when
applied to geometry or physics, would have again to be subdivided by their
quality of being real or apparent. The circle, or the common lemniscate, for

Vil.—3 H

230 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

example, manifestly consists of a single branch, whilst the hyperbola, with its
two opposed and separable branches, is as clearly multiramic; and still more
justly, perhaps, may this quality be predicated of the figure represented by the
equation y* — ax? = 0, which consists of two distinct right lines. These ex-
amples serve to distinguish a vea/ geometrical division into branches, from that
apparent division which belongs to the analytical function representing the
curve, and which owes its multiramic character not only to the nature of the
latter, but to the place of the origin, and the directions of the co-ordinates, as
will be sufficiently apparent by considering the different branches under which
the circle and lemniscate appear when expressed by means of linear co-ordi-
nates.

Curves really monoramic, and possessed of the first degree of continuity,
would thus either return into themselves, or continue to infinity, or terminate
abruptly at one or both of their extremities; the last of which conditions ap-
pears to require transcendants of a higher order than those elementary func-
tions which are usually alluded to when we speak of the continuity of fune-
tions, or, as might be more accurately expressed by saying—when we speak
of functions having a continuity of the first and second degree.

The variations admitted into this latter class have been illustrated by the
examples with which we commenced this section; and we have there also re-
marked that its peculiar character is, that any one point of the same branch
of such a curve can only have a single tangent. It is this property, therefore,
which includes the ordinary definition of continuity; and as it has been found
of some importance in the theory of vibrating cords, and of some other parts
of applied mathematics, and as we also perceive it to form a well marked cha-
racter in the arrangements of continuity, it may not be amiss to give this pro-
perty an analytical, in place of a geometrical form: to effect which it will be
sufficient to design the general algebraic function of the first degree

y=Hax+ b,
as a linear function, and to say that every function Fx has a continuity of the
second degree, when each distinct branch of it has, for any given value of x,
a single linear osculate.

The singular points exhibited in the annexed figures will afford an evident
illustration of these remarks: the first, although determined by the usual rules
for points of reflection, owes its peculiarity to the mere position of the axe of

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 231

the co-ordinates, and may occur in a curve having a continuity of the first de-
gree; the second and third, which are the only points of reflection usually

1 2 3 AL

iS a hee a
given, appear in continuities of the second order; whilst the fourth, which,
viewed independently of the arbitrary arrangements of analysis, seems to present
no greater breach of continuity than the second or third, is yet, from admitting
two tangents at A, not regarded as a continuity by our analysts, and can only
appear in those transcendants which we have described as possessing continu-
ities of the third order.*

This last division falls, therefore, under the class which mathematicians
have termed discontinuous, and which we propose to designate as continuities
of orders lower than the second. With regard to such functions, which phy-
sical problems every where present us, and which now act so important a part
in mathematics, some confusion appears to exist. Most authors, and Fourier
and Poisson in particular, have endeavoured to reduce their analytical expres-
sions to that connected series of arrangements which I have described as con-
stituting the arranged functions of numerical logic, and which is generally
known as “the calculus.”

Mr. PEacock, in a report to which I have frequently alluded, proposes, as,
indeed, had been informally done before, to introduce a sign of discontinuity
*D* ; which amounts to an agreement that in such an expression as

y=Aloex+Bsinx (6)
the coefficients A and B shall not be absolutely constant, but that A shall be
unity and B zero between the limits x = — infin. and x =n; whilst, on the

contrary, these coefficients are to interchange those values from x = n to
xX = + infinity.

This method of proceeding, which has been often used, differs from the ver-
bal statement of the proposition in no other way than as agreeing upon some
common symbol which expresses that statement in the shortest manner. It
affords, therefore, no assistance towards reducing y to the arranged functions
of the science, and, consequently, never leads to the remarkable expressions

* The branches are supposed to terminate at A, otherwise this would merely be a multiple point,
and what is said above would not be true.

232 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

ogo (x—n

1 )
invented for this purpose. As o*, 4™. 0°, or e “8” , which last has the

properties assigned to A.

Our equation (6,) in short, by whatever signs of mere agreement we express
the coefficients A and B, amounts really to the two equations

ty slog xs
$y = sin x}

and has no other advantage than results from uniting these two equations in
one.

Simple expressions connecting, with the ordinary arrangements of algebra,
the different orders and kinds of breaks to which continuity is subject, are still
wanted; expressions that should perform their work as simply as the various
series and formule used for interpolation. Those functions to which Mr. Mur-
pHy has given the name of transient functions serve well enough for most of
the cases where such connexion is not wanted. Of these transient functions,
expressions of the class

x—a
a—a
are the most simple; and I presume that most analysts have long used them to
express such breaks of continuity as are represented in the function
Qe ee ee Ge
xX—a x—b

But, notwithstanding the necessity which thus exists for retaining expres-
sions that shall possess, independently of agreement, the properties in question,
it seems to me that advantage would accrue from uniting these methods; and
that not only some convenient notation should be agreed upon to represent
these semi-constants that change per saltum at limits, but that the simplest
class of periodic variables should be dealt with in the same manner, and made
types of reference to which all periodic quantities could be reduced.

With this view I have elsewhere recommended that any given function F x
should be made periodic between the limits 1 and ~ by annexing the symbol
@,; so that

Q, F(x)
would represent, geometrically, a series of waves formed by the continued re-
petition of the same portion of the given function.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 233

The expression
@.x
would, according to this notation, express an abscissa that, resularly increasing
from 0 to 7,* recommences with the latter value, until it has again increased
to the same amount; whence it follows that whatever may be the form of F,

we should have
@Fx+F.@x.

It would be out of place to repeat here the deductions which I have else-
where drawn from this and similar equations; and my only object in now no-
ticing them is to remark, that were such conventions agreed upon, every spe-
cies of discontinuity might be reduced to a class, and rendered a continuity of
an inferior order, the connexion with the other arranged functions of the cal-
culus being established by seeking expressions for such simple periodic ele-
ments as we have here denoted by @ x.

I shall not insist further on this subject, having said enough to render clear
all that I have to urge in regard to the principal topic discussed in this paper.
It has appeared to me that much confusion has arisen from the vague notions
entertained concerning modal functions; functions of the calculus, or of nume-
rical logic; continuous functions, and discontinuous functions; and having, in
the preceding section, illustrated the real distinction between the two former,
I trust | have said enough in the present section to show, not only that the dis-
tinction between the latter is merely that of a superior and inferior continuity,
but also that when we assume with Potsson every function of the form

‘EF Gs h) = 03

h=0
to contain a factor h*, we must, at best, form our conclusion on a very limited
class of mathematical expressions.

Section III.

Functions arranged in the Order of their Magnitudes.—-Taylor’s Theorem.

Functions X, X, X, &c., of x, that vanish when x = a, are said to be ar-
1 2 3

ranged in the order of the evanescent magnitudes which they assume for x = a,
when for every value of n we have

* x is uséd to denote any period, the symbol 7 being left for the common period of trigonometri-
cal functions.

VII.—s3 I

234 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

§ xX
aa ‘
n—1 x=a
The order of magnitude of such a function will, therefore, evidently be that
of the lowest term it contains; as it would be that of the highest term, if the
function, in place of vanishing, became infinite for x = a. And it will equally

follow from the definition, that very different functions may have the same

x

order of magnitude; as, for example, the function x, sin x, i , which, for
x

x = 0, are all of the same order, and may be reduced one to another by omit-
ting parts that are of the higher orders.

An equation,
PX+PX+4&.=QZ+4+QZ +4 &c. (7)
Lae 2 2 ae 22
between two series of such terms can be shown to be impossible, unless the
lowest terms are of the same magnitude. Tor, if not, we might suppose either
term, as that on the left hand, to be the greater, and as by division we should
have

12 IP & =Q14+Q24&
2 — @.
Upitiee sb (G} ; 5 ¢

and as this for x = 0 would reduce to.
P=0

1
the lower terms would disappear until the required equality of magnitude is

obtained.
It will be readily seen that we cannot regard the terms X, X, Z, Z, &c., of
1 2 1 2

the serzes as if they individually consisted of a single term; since, even when
that is the case, we might always substitute for X or Z equivalent expressions

that contained more than one term; and thus, to speak clearly, we must dis-
tinguish the total function, or term of the series, from the secondary functions
or terms, which, together with their corresponding primary function, constitute
X or Z; and we must bear in mind that however this primary function is

changed by expanding X or Z, or by substituting equivalencies for them, it
n n

always remains of the same order; a condition which is not requisite in the

secondary terms, which are, moreover, always of higher orders than their

primaries, which last express the order of the whole function, or term of the

series.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 235

When this is borne in mind, it will be readily understood that if the secon-
dary terms are not of the same magnitude with any of the terms in the series;
in other words, if we have classed all the secondary terms of the different func-
tions that may happen to agree with the primary term of X or Z, as a part of

the latter, it will follow that our equation (7) cannot subsist unless we have
separately
; PX=QZ
for every value of n. ‘
The restriction here supposed, however, will be unnecessary when the equa-
tion is of the form
PX+PX+&c.=0
ee 2 2
since the result P = 0, already demonstrated, will also lead to P = 0, and
2

thence, generally to
=10
which is true for every value of n.
The two great forms of arranging terms which algebra employs are drawn,
in common with nearly all its arrangements, from arithmetic, and are simply
series connected by the operations of addition, or of multiplication; whence,

OF den 22
denoting by &, S, &, prefixed respectively to the general term of a series U, the

three arrangements

Ure a 0), We ncce: a)
0 1 2 3 x
U+U+U4+U+&c...U...&e @)
0 1 2 3 x
Wiss UW Se WW Sob) Bete Wise ersten (2)
0 1 2 3 x

we shall have a concise notation for all the principal arrangements or develop-
ments of which it will be necessary to speak.

The operations of every branch of analysis consist, in a great degree, of find-
ing equivalencies between the two last of these arrangements, and of thus,
either by the species of correction employed between the terms, or by the na-
ture of the classifying function U, suiting our analysis to the problem in hand.

Taylor’s Theorem is one of the transformations of this kind, and perfectly
to comprehend it, and especially to connect it with the elementary operations
of the science—a task quite as important, we must consider not only such terms
as enter into the series (2,) but also those which compose series of the class (3;)

236 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

or, in other words, the factors, and especially the przme factors, into which any
given function may be divided.

That any function may be made an “apparent” factor of any other function
is evident, since we have only to write

19 (02) 3 1x. wt = fx9 (x)

in order to make fx act the apparent part of a factor of Fx. The existence of
such an error, however, if made unintentionally, would become manifest on
substituting for x the value a that caused fx to disappear, since such a substi-
tution would render $x infinite, whilst, on the other hand, the substitution of
a value b that caused fx to become infinite would cause @ x to disappear.

When Fx is an algebraic function consisting of the sums of powers of x,
and which, therefore, can be actually produced by multiplying together factors
of the same kind, we have the most exact idea of the nature of these last, but
the same is not the case when Fx and its factor are functions of different
kinds; it might even be shown that

{Fx}
Mage:

or Fx with x varying from a to b, and F x with x varying from c to d, may
be distinct functions, having distinct systems of factors; and thus, in speaking
of an equivalence

Fx=P. Q
as expressing the more correct proposition
{F x=P.x Qi

x=a...b
we omit a factor R, which acts in these expansions by products, the part of a
remainder in the expansions by sums, and which has the property of being
unity between the values x =a...b, and of being variable, and, perhaps,
even infinite for other values.
These remarks will be sufficient to show that Fx vanishing when x = a,
fx may be considered as a factor of {F x}* — provided that we have

a—e...ats
fa=0
Fa : 4
—— not ite;
fa infinite

* < is a quantity which may be infinitely small, or, in general, as small as may be required in
the proposition wherein it occurs.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. V7

and as two factors P and Q might justly be regarded as prime when they con-
tained no common factor, we might define prime factors in this way; as, how-
ever, it is not always easy to find these common measures, we shall prefer a
definition that is equivalent, and say that factors P and Q of any given func-

tion F x, are prime when all the values of x that make P = 0, make G vanish,

P
whilst all the values that make Q = 0 make Q infinite.

The relative magnitude of functions that vanish when z = a must evidently
depend upon the nature of their factors; and it will, therefore, be convenient

to lay down as a definition that functions which are not prime
0 1 P83} x
UU UU re Ul See:
are said to be arranged in the order of their magnitude when the fraction
x+1

?

x

U
formed by dividing any one of the functions by that which precedes it, is equal
to zero for the value of z that makes each of the factors vanish.
Proceeding to the development of a function into a series > U, of functions

more simple than itself, we observe that for any value a, of the independent
variable z, that renders the function finite and definite, we must have
By 7 alee Re

where R vanishes for z =a. The nature and magnitude of R will depend al-
together on that of F z; it may deviate either slowly or rapidly from the vanish-
ing value when z departs from the value a; and it may even become infinite
for an infinitely small alteration in z, or it may cease altogether to exist (as in
the theory of conjugate points)* when z takes any other value than this of the
single existence zero.

* The imaginary values of an ordinate, when the function is illustrated by geometry, serve very
well to exhibit this distinction between y as absolutely non-existent and y as merely equal to zero,
a distinction on which the whole theory of conjugate points depends; but I have elsewhere re-
marked that when we regard the problem as one of pure numerical arrangement, and not as
illustrated by geometry, this advantage is lost, and we are left without a symbol to express a rela-
tion of so much importance.

The reader will readily perceive that y = 0, and y =a / — 1, considered geometrically,
differ in their degree of non-existence; since adding b to both, in other words, shifting the origin

Vll.—3 K

238 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

But, notwithstanding all these various changes through which R may pass,
we may always write
| Fz=Fa+Qfz

hae One

since, whilst we assert nothing more concerning fz than is contained in the
second of these equations, we merely express in algebraic terms the truism
that Fa = Fa. It will be observed, however, that if we assume fz to have
the form & (z —a,) and much more if we assume it as expressed by (z — a)”,
we depart as much from the limited condition represented, as if we assumed

fz to be log =; or sin (Z —a,) or any other function that has the property of

vanishing when z = a.

This function fz is the prime factor of F z — F a that vanishes when z =a;
but its form, far from being a matter of arbitrary assumption, must be deter-.
mined by a strict analysis, which will terminate in proving that for all func-
tions which have a certain degree of continuity, and with the exception of cer-
tain values of a, fz may be assumed as any function of z —a that has the same
evanescent magnitude as z — a itself.

A similar analysis with regard to Q would prove

1 1

O) a 1 (Gy) oe cya
and continuing this decomposition, and writing x in place of a, we arrive at
the theorem

1 2 1 n
Bz Px Poxfz DEX. fz 6 éce. 2, Otlz
n

of the co-ordinates, we derive y = b, a real existence, from the first, and y = b +a Vie ih
from the second; which last value of y is as completely imaginary as y = a V — 1.

This distinction, and its loss when the geometrical illustration is departed from, will be seen in
the annexed figure, where, as there are no points of the curve ex-
isting between the conjugate point A and the vertex of the branch B,
the squares, or any other functions of such non-existent co-ordinates, F\ Ay B
must be wholly imaginary. Representing these co-ordinates, how-
ever, by y =a VY — 1, their squares become real; and thus it is evi- x
dent that in applying algebra to geometry we do, usually, superadd to imaginary quantities, or to
such quantities when used in certain ways, the condition that no functional operation is to be re-
garded as removing the absurdity. It is this property for which a sign is wanted, in order to com-
plete the theory of correlation, and thus to remove all difficulty which has arisen from regarding
/ — 1 as a sign of perpendicularity.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 239

1 2
where not only fz, fz, &c., vanish for z = x, but they are composed of factors
f,z.fz, f.z.fz.fz, &c., each of which vanishes when z is equal to x.
Viewed analytically, it will thus follow that

£9: ty, Pn) SCCq ae Q
are functions arranged in the order of their magnitude, although we could not
thence conclude that, in all cases, these functions form a converging series
when z was taken infinitely near to a.
To examine this question, and to show under what circumstances fz, be-

comes of the form e, (z — x,) it will, perhaps, be most convenient to substitute
h for z — x, or to examine when F (x + h) expands under the form

1 1 2 2 n on
ioc of Tires, (S)n Se hee, $210) B14 35 Oe YS (In). 8)
And with this purpose we must commence with the expansion

F(x +h)=Fx+R

where R is a function of x and h that is merely limited to vanish when h = 0.

Now, we observe that if Fx possesses a continuity of the first order, or if it
possesses such a continuity between the limits x = a — ne and x =a-+ ne,
we can apply to it the idea attached to a rate of increase, and can ascertain
when this increase is fastest or slowest; to illustrate which further, we remark
that, if the function was expressed geometrically, the portion in question would
evidently be a continuous curve, osculating with some straight line, and in-
creasing faster or slower with the position of the latter; but, as the appeal to
geometry is justly considered foreign to the subject, and does not apply to ima-
ginary functions, where we must consider separately the increase of the real
and of the imaginary part, we must use, in place of this illustration, the nume-
rical expression of the function by means of tables.

Let its form be

tO) ath

then if, when we substitute for z the successive values a + ¢,a + 2¢, &c., P
and Q are found to approach to some definite rate of increase as «is taken
smaller and smaller, or, at least, if they so far approach to a definite rate of
increase that we can assert the alterations to be faster or slower in one part of
the portion than in another part; or, again, that such rate is the same through-
out the whole portion, in either of these cases the portion has a continuity that
is finite and of the first degree.

240 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

Denote by a the value of z corresponding to that part of the portion where
the alteration of one of the terms P or Q is not exceeded in slowness by the
values of P or Q either there or at any part of the portion, and assume

Eh=F(a+h)—Fa,
it is then clear that
F(x+h)—Fh
F(a+h)—Fa
can never become infinite between the required limits, supposing, as is always
done, that h does not exceed the small values employed in estimating the rates
of increase above mentioned.
We thus prove that &h isa factor of the function
SF (x +h)— Fx}

X>=a—é...a+4¢6

and, consequently, that we may write
1) (Gee In) 10 54 ks (QE In
But it will follow from this equation that whatever function Q is of x and h,
it must also, between the required limits, have a continuity of the class which
we have assumed for F (x +h). As will be seen by considering that a finite
and definite increase of F (x + h) will require a finite and definite increase in

il
Q. &(h) or R, and that as & (h) has been so assumed as to increase in this man-
ner, Q must do so likewise.

1 2
By this reasoning we therefore establish that all the functions £h, eh, &c.,
are continuous functions of the first order, and may be taken not to contain x;
whence it appears that the development (8) is just; that it constitutes a con-

verging series when h is sufficiently small; and that Q is of less magnitude
than any of the terms which precede it, and may be made as small a portion
of the whole as we please by taking h within proper limits.
Having thus established the equation
1 1 2 2
MIN (Ge SE In) SS 1 xe SE Bly (Ge) IE 2 lng LY (os) PS CeO, oo INE

for all functions that have between x and x a continuity of the first order, and

excluding from such continuity all serpentine forms that have infinitely small

periods,* we proceed to investigate some of the simplest of the series
1 2 3 ,

E(h), &(h), & (h), &c.

* The rates in such forms would not become definite as « was decreased.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 241

Now, repeatedly substituting x + h for x, we obtain

F(x -nh)=F(x)¢né (bh). Fx¢R
and, on the contrary, by putting nh for h in the expansion of F (x + h,) we
also deduce

F(x ¢nh)= F(x) +£(nh) Fx+R.
Whence the right hand members of these two equations may be equated;
and as each is arranged in the order of its magnitude, we must have, by what
has preceded, the first terms of the same magnitude, and consequently only
differing by functions of magnitudes higher than their own. And from this,
again, it follows that, by removing from the first to the higher terms in either
series, magnitudes that shall leave the order undisturbed, we may render the
first terms in the two series identical. Whence, writing k for nh, making h

constant, and denoting 5 by c; and finally, representing, still, by &k what ¢k

becomes after removing the terms in question, we have
GIS (alk,
And as the constant c may be taken from &k, and made a factor of F Si pit
appears, at length, that we have ;
‘F(x +h) =Fx+h.F.x4R2

xX=X...XE
N “

=

h=¢...¢€

where <¢ and ¢ are quantities as small as may be necessary.

1

Denoting F x, according to the usual notation, by d F x, or, more simply, by
d F., the equation
x 1

ee ©)

manifestly suffices to establish all that is commonly taught in our text books
concerning first differentials, as well as so much of the theory of the higher
differentials as regards them merely as the differentials of differentials, and not
as the superior terms in Taylor’s Theorem.

The nature of these last might now be investigated by a method very similar
to that which Porssoy employs for the same purpose, but the process may be

VII.—3 L

242 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

shortened by having recourse to the differential calculus as establishing in the
expansion (9)*
Thus it is shown in all our elementary works that
d= (x+h)=d* F(x +h):

and we may also show that when terms are arranged in the order of their mag-
nitude, their differential coefficients have the same arrangements—propositions
that will suffice for the investigation in question.
To prove the latter of these propositions we remark—that if @x and Wx are
functions arranged by their magnitude
ENG
px
x=0

for every value of x that makes x = 0; but

a ee ee

d.@x (x+h)—ox (h)—O oh

Xi——10)
h=0

where the order of the successive substitutions x = 0, h = 0, is indicated by
their symbols below the right hand bracket.

To apply these propositions to the investigation of E h, th, éc., denote the
latter by i, Hi, é&c., and write
We Gn) im nee HEP. ene ec ieoewee RE
when we shall have ;

d Wad Fede .enpaop! i gueiocd ip

1 Py 2
dW=dF4dHP 4d HP +&e....d R:
h x h h h
and as these terms are arranged in the order of their magnitudes, the equation
i al
hd?F 4 &.=d HP + &c.
Xs h

will have the first term on the right hand, of the same magnitude with that on
the left: whence it follows that by removing parts of these terms that do not

* T owe this remark to Mr. Z. P. Powurs, who supplied the proof that the differential coeft-
cients of terms arranged in the order of their magnitude, are also themselves arranged in the order
of their magnitude.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 243

change their order, and by annexing these parts to terms higher in the series,
we might at length render

1 1
hid= hd Hae;
x h
and by cancelling these equal terms, and reasoning in the same manner, arrive
ultimately at the equation

n—l n— a on
Hd P=d.HP.
x h
The first of these two equations is satisfied by the functions
1 he

and the second by

whence we conclude that
n—1l1

Te ey a oe al

Ge eit

and that one of the prime developments of F (x + h) is
Fijeroplibiligh gtea ides Het Bccrpst

A very common, and, it appears to me, a universal error committed in demon-

strating this theorem, consists in regarding the function bu — as the only

classifying function by which such an expansion could be made; whereas not

onlyis > Ah’,* a function that equally satisfies our differential equations,

z=n|0

but, as we have already remarked, those very equations are unessential to the
problem, since any function of the order h” could have been made to supply its
place. This error, it appears to me, lies not so much in a want of knowledge
of the fact here stated, as in a total omission of that fact in the demonstrations
of the theorem, whereby it necessarily follows that such demonstrations are
made to prove too much.

In concluding this part of my subject, I may, perhaps, be permitted to detain
the attention of the reader for a moment, by referring him to an error somewhat
similar in the usual extensions of Newton’s Binomial Theorem. This ex-
pansion, when confined to integral and positive indices, expresses merely
that special case of the equivalence

n n—1 ASS 1 0
*Ahn+ Ah + &e.... Aht + A.

244 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

2 1 Z
> (x—r= = iy Xe ct

z=c|n z zZ
wherein all the factors are equal. Such an equivalence we know is just for
every value of the variable, whereas when, by analogy, or any other species
of proof, we extend the like proposition to negative or fractional indices, the re-
mainder must now be taken into account—or otherwise the proposition must

be limited to values of x that make the right hand member converge, when
one equation becomes

xX=—X...-42X
N \

The same error, of course, occurs wherever remainders are neglected ; neither
is the error here exactly of the kind that I have been noticing in Taylor’s
Theorem; but I have instanced it as a very familiar case in which, also, our
usual demonstrations prove too much.

That whatever functions are used in Taylor’s Theorem in place of the

n

classifying function on —, they must be of the same order with the latter,
will be seen by considering that the form arrived at was deduced by such
mere transpositions of secondary parts as did not alter the arrangement of the
several terms.

And having thus shown that this celebrated development is truly the de-
velopment of monoramic functions of the first order of continuity, and accord-
ing to the prime factors of their several parts, I shall now proceed, in a few
words, to consider how far the expansion is prime. This condition is essential
to all the applications of the theorem, and yet no other notice of it is taken in
our text books than such as relates to the terms obtained by integration, or
those on the left hand of a given term, when the development proceeds from
the latter, and with regard to which an omission is always made.

That the series derived from the left hand to the right is prime, immediately
follows by the usual reasoning employed to show that series are identical. For,
if F (z + h) would expand in two series > Pp h?, and > Q h*, we should have
the equation

2 1
* = expresses a series of factors, as » or = does of terms.

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 245

which, by what we have already shown, would give

le (Quy,
But if we suppose the development to commence with one of the terms of
the expansion, as d" F (x), and thence demand the most general form of the

terms on the left, we shall observe that the investigation of Lacrance fails in
generality, and that the consequence deduced from it, that only a constant can
have all its differential coefficients equal to zero for the same value of x, 1s
neither just in itself, nor so great a paradox when violated as Mr. Peacock
seems to suppose.*

Indeed, including in modal functions of the first order of continuity such as
have a portion absolutely rectilinear, and which depart thence into a curve by
insensible gradations, it is clear that if we can find a numerical representative
F x of such a modal function, Taylor’s Theorem would hold throughout its

whole extent, and that consequently Fx, a function which is not a constant,
would yet fulfil the equation

for every value of n.

The very simple function =. Fx. tan.~! (0)*~* is constantly zero from
x =—a to x =a, and constantly equal to Fx from x =a to x = a; and
thus affords an elementary case of a function fulfilling the equation (10): but
it should be remarked that as the transition takes place in an infinitely small
interval, this function does not fall under the first order of continuity.

This example I have taken from the pamphlet before mentioned, and all
that it is necessary to say further on the subject, may be taken from the same
source.

“We see therefore,” it is remarked, “that with proper limitations, which, too,
are only necessary in regard to functions of a low order of continuity, we may
assert that a constant is the only function that can give the first differential
zero; and this granted it is easily seen that ax + a’ is the only function that
can give the first differential a constant. For, let @x be any other function
that also gives d @ (x) = a; we have

d {ox—(ax+a')}=0,;

* See what has been already said on the functione ™
VIL—3 M

246 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR’S THEOREM,

whence
@x—(ax+a)=c
or
@ Xda) Xana) NC) aXe a
And, in like manner, if @x 1s a function that has its third differential coeffi-
cient equal to zero, we may write

de Ok (xe Sb gee a’) } =0

d {ox — (ax? +an +a")? =e
ox—(ax*+ax+a“)=cx+c¢
(xe = Bore 1b aoe 45 By
whence it appears that ax? + a’x + a‘ is the only function, excepting those of
the class already mentioned, which has its third differential coefficient equal
to zero. And, proceeding in like manner, we find
> a Sooo ze x2

z=0|/n—1
to be the only function which has its n“ differential equal to zero, the exception
above mentioned being still kept in mind, and which is removed by substi-
tuting for each of the constants, functions that are constants between the limits
assumed, and of arbitrary values beyond those limits.
Now suppose
d®Fx=d*@x
we can divide @x into two parts, F x and yx, and write
d° Fx =d; (Fx + x);

but this equation gives
whence we conclude that

ikea dK Sy Ce eax

z=—0|n—1
is the only function that can give the equation
da px = di F (x)

or the terms to the left of d® F x in Taylor’s Theorem become prime on add-
ing the customary function, and substituting for the constants it contains, func-
tions of the class we have described.”

The occasion of Taylor’s Theorem failing for special values of x is mani-
festly by such values destroying M in a term

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 247

Mal

M+Néh
that enters the remainder, and thus introducing a new term an The manner
of obtaining the coefficients of such terms, and of thus extending the expansion
beyond the monoramic functions of the first order of continuity, must now oc-
cupy our attention.

And on this point we may remark, that if in place of h" we use for our

classifying function any expression that fulfils the equation

D. fh = 0 (11)
for all values of m that exceed n, and which is unity for m = n, we shall im-

mediately obtain the coefficient sought by performing the operation D on both
sides of the equation.

This operation, D, is supposed to be of that class which makes the operation
performed on the sum of any number of terms equal to the sum obtained, by
performing the operation on each separately; a condition conveniently ex-
pressed by the notation

DZ=zD.
Now suppose F x the function expanded; F the same function diminished

by subtracting all the terms of the expansion up to the n™; and fx the classi-
fying function: in other words, let there be
aa Py 3 nn
Fx=Pfx+P.fx+P.fx...P fx...

F = P £x + S&C.
and it will follow, if fx fulfils the equation (11,) that

P=DF.

In the instance before us the function to be expanded is F (x + h;) and the
classifying function h*, where m may be positive or negative, whole or frac-
tional; and all these cases will be included by supposing the values of n to

constitute the series
Bade oh iokay 2nd See

D5 3h

(dk Cae,

Now, supposing u to be the least number which is divisible by all the deno-
minators, and denoting the quotients by w', wu", &c., it is clear that an opera-

tion D which fulfils the equation (11) will consist in substituting k“ in place

248 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM,

of h, multiplying by k’’’, differentiating n times, and making k equal to zero.
Whence
Pe ee a Ge eke) (12)

1.2....n
k=0

We have already remarked that the expansion of Iz by powers of z — x seems

to be more truly the algebraic development, than the form which this expan-
sion assumes when presented as Taylor’s Theorem—the one is the develop-
ment of a general monomial, the other a general trinomial function—and it
seems a more natural order to deduce the latter from the former, than to fol-
low a converse process. The substitution of z — x for h does affect the coeffi-
cients, and thus we may write
ka > @ ames di. ee F(x + ke) 5. (13)
pias 45)

where p' is minus, the numerator of the least value of n, supposed always to be

zero unless n is negative—and wis the least number divisible by the denomi-
nators of n.

I shall not increase the size of this paper, which has already extended itself
to such undue limits, by exemplifying the use of this theorem, in determining
the values of vanishing fractions, or in general of functions at their critical values;
but I may remark here the light which it throws on fractional differentials.

The proposition

P(x th) =2@F (x). 5
is certainly that from which we obtain our only notion of a differential coeffi-
cient; and thus, were we to embrace Mr. Pracock’s theory of the permanence
of equivalent forms, it would follow that d? F x was the coefficient of the n™
term in the expansion of F (x + h) whether n was positive or negative, whole
or fractional; and, consequently, that in all but a certain class of transcendents
d2 F x was zero whenever n was other than whole and positive. Such a re-
sult would be at variance with the received theory of fractional differentials, as
would likewise happen with the values given by that theory and the formula
(12) in those cases where the fractional powers appeared in the expansion.

I do not mean to deny that artifices and conventions can be made, and arti-
fices and conventions that are perfectly allowable, whereby these seeming dis-
crepancies would be reconciled; but I hold that such a process belongs to the
doctrine of correlations—a doctrine greatly misunderstood by the writer in ques-
tion. It is the office of correlations to group together by means of such conven-

AS COMMONLY INVESTIGATED. 249

tions as are here mentioned, problems otherwise distinct; but it is equally its
office to assign what groups of problems are to be separated—and to give to
every form that exact limit of permanence, which will ensure a union of gene-
rality with despatch and clearness.

It would add greatly to the precision of mathematical science, if the received
arrangements that compose the branch commonly designated as the calculus,
and which I have called the received arrangements of numerical logic, were
kept perfectly distinct from those which are yet subjects of inquiry. The lat-
ter are proper matters of investigation for the pioneers of the pure science, but
their theory should form a distinct department of analysis, to which no appeal
should be made in the reduction of modal relations. And in this class of doubt-
ful and incomplete generalizations, which it may hereafter be advisable to re-
ject or admit, it appears to me that we must place fractional differentials, en-
cumbered as they are with an infinite series of arbitrary corrections.

A single additional remark, arising from the development we have been
contemplating, may perhaps be permitted me before I close this paper. I al-
lude to the error which several recent and distinguished writers have made, in
regard to the nature of the remainder involved in such expansions. The
formule very commonly used to express such remainders, give nearly the sum
of the developable portion of the function, reckoned from the n™ term to infinity,
whilst it is evident that to answer the purpose for which these formule are
employed, they must include, not this portion alone, but more especially that
which will not develope in the required form. An instance will render this
remark sufficiently clear.

Assuming hte *“~? for h in Taylor’s Theorem, and hte —'“— for h in
1—h
1—h
PE fieode a s
Qn 1—hte —8/=1"

the expansion of we have evidently

F (x + h?e®/-1) dé
0|2x
for the value of the remainder from the n™ term to infinity, but it is equally
evident, that such an expression does not comprehend the negative or fractional
exponents, or in short, any of those which cause Taylor’s Theorem to fail; yet
numerous expressions of this kind are given without this limitation, and among
Vil-—2> N

250 ON THE INSUFFICIENCY OF TAYLOR'S THEOREM, ETC.

others, | may mention one readily deduced from the above which that excel-
lent analyst Mr. Murpuy has given in the Philosophical Transactions.
The theorem above given may be conveniently put under the form
ee en =a
1 Ge F k 8/=1) dé
Ped Sm any Coe nee

0|27
where the limitation is that 2 shall be less than unity, and h and k each suffi-

ciently small to make F (x + h) and F (x + k) converge.

NOTE.

While this paper was going through the press, the ingenious and distinguished author fell a
victim to a disease under which he had long suffered ; his death occurring on the 31st of October,
1840. ‘The first proofs only were subjected to his examination, and he was then so ill that some
apology may be necessary for errors of the press in the earlier, as well as the later parts of the
paper. Mathematicians will be struck by the circumstance that the formule are printed in Roman
instead of Italic letters,—a deviation from the usage which was not observed by the author until it
was too late to have it corrected.

ARTICLE XVI.

Notice of the Oolitic Formation in America, mith Descriptions of some of tts Or-
gamc Remains. By Isaac Lea. Read May 15, 1840.

Baron Humspotpt, in his “ Geognostical Essay on the Superposition of
Rocks in both Hemispheres,” mentions having met with the Jura Formation
(Oolite of English geologists) in Venezuela and other districts of Colombia, as
well as at Zacatecas, in Mexico; but I am not aware of any organic exuvie
having been described from this formation in the western hemisphere.

Some years since, my friend, Dr. Gibbon, was appointed to attend a public
mission to Bogota, and, at my solicitation, kindly undertook to collect such
specimens in geology and zoology as he should think might interest me.
Among many other objects brought by him, I was very much surprised to
find several specimens of well characterized fossils of the Oolitic series, not
being then aware of any one having observed any part of that geological epoch
in our hemisphere. Other more pressing occupations have caused me to defer
the final examination of these interesting specimens until recently. On com-
parison with the fossils of the Oolite in my cabinet, from England, I find the
mass possessing the same mineralogical characters, being argillo-calcareous,
accompanied, occasionally, by sulphuret of iron, and the organic forms to be of
the same genera. The well known genus T7yzgonza presents several species,
one of which has a close resemblance to Tyigoma clavellata, which, in Kurope,
is distributed through many different beds of this group. The Ammonites,

252 NOTICE OF THE OOLITIC FORMATION IN AMERICA,

also, seem to prevail, as in the mass of the same period in England, there being
at least five species among the few specimens brought by Dr. Gibbon.

The extent of this formation in Columbia was not observed by Dr. Gibbon,
nor were any observations made as regards the dip of the strata, or its direction.
The labels accompanying the specimens stated that they were taken up in the
road between Popoyan and Bogota, chiefly between La Messa and Tocaima.
Specimens thus collected could scarcely be expected to be found perfect, and
it is to be regretted that these are not better characterized. Such as they are,
I have ventured to describe them, with a hope of drawing the attention of
some geologist who may pass through that country and observe the deposit
with attention. The mineralogical character of the specimens are very uni-
form, consisting of a dark slate-coloured argillaceous carbonate of lime, occa-
sionally accompanied by crystallized sulphuret of iron.

In these few imperfect specimens we have an illustration of the importance,
nay, the absolute necessity, of a knowledge of the geo-zoological characteristics
to establish the age of the masses after a certain period. Zoological evidence
is the unerring guide to designate the different epochs. ‘The importance of
this is established in a paper on the Age of the Limestones of South Devon,
recently read by Mr. Lonsdale before the Geological Society of London. In
this paper we are informed that Captain Smee and Captain Grant had recently
brought to England, from Cutch, and the desert east of it, suites of fossils from
‘a series of beds unquestionably of the age of the Oolites of England, the fos-
sils agreeing, in their general characters, with those of that geological epoch”’
in that country, and “‘being, in many instances, specifically undistinguishable ;”
thus establishing the fact of the deposits of the Oolitic period being immensely
extended, and proving, with the specimens now produced, that the unity of the
zoological existence of that period extended nearly, if not entirely round the
globe.*

In Dr. Troost’s Fifth Geological Report to the Legislature of Tennessee
(p. 6) he mentions a limestone of “an Oohtic structure” as existing near the
Cumberland Mountains. He states that the Oolite of the English geologists
is of “a more recent group,” and that his Oolitic limestone is invariably found

* Professor Vanuxem informed me recently that he picked up, some years since, a fossil Trigonia near
the ruin of a building in the city of Mexico. It had evidently been part of the structure, and probably car-
ried from some distance, as the rock over which the city is built is entirely volcanic.

WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME OF ITS ORGANIC REMAINS. 253

beneath the coal strata. It is characterized by Pentremites, a fossil which has
not been, I believe, observed above the carboniferous limestone.*

-Ortuocera Humpouptrana. Plate VIII, Fig. 1.

Testa recta, elongato-conicd, subcylindraced; articulis transversis, subdistantibus.

Shell straight, elongately conical, nearly cylindrical; joints transverse, rather distant.

Found in the Province of Velez, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

Remarks.—Unfortunately, I received only an imperfect fragment of this
Orthocera. It is important in connexion with these fossils, as it proves them
to belong to the lower series of the Oolitic group. De la Beche mentions one
only, O. elongatum, as being found in the Oolitic group, and that in its lowest
member, the, Lias, while below that, asfar down as the Transition Limestone,
they are common. I propose the name of the distinguished American traveller
for this species.

Ammonites Tocaimaensis. Plate VIII, Fig. 2.

Testa orbiculari; aufractibus planulatis, transversim costulatis; costis planulatis; peripheria minuté
sulcatd.

Shell orbicular; whorls flattened, transversely ribbed; ribs flattened ; periphery minutely furrowed.

Found on the top of a mountain between Tocaima and La Messa, in New

Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

* Since the completion of this paper I have received the beautiful work of Von Buch on some of the fos-
sils taken to Hurope by Humboldt, from New Granada. I owe to the kindness of the author the opportune
acquisition of this volume. His Trigonia aleformis may be identical with T. Tocaimaana (nobis.) In
other cases the specific forms seem to differ.

Von Buch takes a different view from Humboldt as regards the age of these organic remains, placing
them rather higher, and in the chalk formation. They certainly do not resemble the forms common to our
chalk fossils, nor do they seem to me to be allied to those of England, so far as [am acquainted with them.
Notwithstanding the arguments deduced by the author, I still am of opinion that the fossils brought by Dr.
Gibbon from New Granada, and herein described, are properly members of the Oolitic group.

VII.—3 oO

254 NOTICE OF THE OOLITIC FORMATION IN AMERICA,

Remarks.—A small portion only of a whorl of this species was received. It
differs from A. Gzbbonianus in being more flattened, and in having a very mi-
nute furrow, being little more than a mere impressed line.

Ammontres Grpponranus. Plate VIII, Fig. 3.

Testa orbiculari; aufractibus compressis; costis elevatis, carinatis, remotiusculis ad peripheriam.

Shell orbicular ; whorls compressed ; ribs elevated, carinate, somewhat distant at the periphery.

Found between Tocaima and La Messa, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

Remarks.—A small section only of this large species was brought by Dr.
Gibbon, after whom itis named. ‘The few characters which can be seized in
such a specimen render a description very meager and doubtful.

AMMONITES occIpENTALIS. Plate VIII., Fig. 4.

Testa orbiculari, utrinque umbilicata; aufractibus rotundatis, transversim costulatis; peripherid ro-

tundd, sulco circulari destitutd.

Shell orbicular, umbilicate on both sides; whorls round, transversely ribbed; periphery round, being
destitute of a circular furrow.

Found in the Province of Velez, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

Remarks.—A single imperfect specimen only was brought by Dr. Gibbon.
One of the chambers has been removed without injury to the other parts. It
is destitute of a carina and furrow.

Ammonites VAnuxeMensis. Plate VIII., Fig. 5.

Testa orbiculari, utrinque umbilicatd; aufractibus convexo-cylindricis, transversim crebrissimeque

costulatis ; peripheria rotunda, sulco circulari destitutd.

Shell orbicular, umbilicate on both sides; whorls convexly cylindrical, transversely and thickly ribbed :
periphery round, being destitute of a circular furrow.

WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME OF ITS ORGANIC REMAINS. 255

Found in the Province of Velez, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

Remarks.—A small species with numerous ribs, which are alternately dupli-
cated on the outer part of the whorl. It is destitute of a carina and furrow.
I name it after my friend Professor Vanuxem, the distinguished geologist.

Ammonites Americanus. Plate VIII., Fig. 6.

Testa orbiculari; aufractibus subplanis, obliqué costulatis ; peripherid sulcatda.
Shell orbicular; whorls somewhat flattened, obliquely ribbed; periphery furrowed.

Found on the mountains between Tocaima and La Messa, in New Gra-

nada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.

Remarks.—A portion only of a single whorl of this species is before me, and
the description is necessarily imperfect. It is distinct from the other species
which accompanied it, in being furrowed. The furrow is not very distinct,
and an imperfect carina seems to be connected with it.

Triconia Gigpontana. Plate IX., Fig. 7.

Testé ovato-trigond, multicostata ; costis transversis, sub tuberculato-asperis ; areé carinata.

Shell ovately triangular, many ribbed; ribs transverse, somewhat roughly tuberculate; posterior slope

carinate.

Province of Velez, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.5, Length 2, Breadth 2 inches.

Remarks.—In outline and size this species resembles Parkinson’s figure of
T. spinosa, (Vol. IIl., Pl. XII., Fig. 7,) which is described by Lamarck as T.
scabra. Neither of the two specimens in my possession are very perfect. The
tubercles on the ribs of the larger and broken specimen are more observable.
In these tubercles it has some resemblance to T. dedalea, Sow. and Park.

256 NOTICE OF THE OOLITIC FORMATION IN AMERICA,

Triconia Tocaimaana. Plate IX., Fig. 8.

Testa trigond, posticé productd, inflata ; costis transversis, levibus.

Shell triangular, produced behind, inflated; ribs transverse and smooth.

Found between Tocaima and La Messa, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.5, Breadth 1.3 inches.

Remarks.—Both the specimens received of this species were, unfortunately,
quite imperfect. In both, the posterior angle is deficient. Judging from the
curves of the margin, I presume that this species is produced like the T° ah-
formis. (Parkinson, Pl. XII, Fie. 9.) It resembles it, also, in outline, and
in the position and direction of the ribs.

Trieonta Honpaana. Plate IX., Fig. 9.

Testa ovato-trigond, inflata, multicostata; costis transversis, tuberculato-nodosis; ared posticd ele-
vata, crebrissimad nodosa.

Shell ovately triangular, inflated, with many ribs; ribs transverse, furnished with tubercles; posterior
slope elevated, with numerous tubercles.

Found between Guaderus and Honda, New Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 2.3, Length 3.3, Breadth 3.2 inches.

Remarks.

This is larger than any species which has come under my no-
tice. A single; rather imperfect, specimen only was brought by Dr. Gibbon.
In its general outline and appearance it resembles T. Gzbboniana, herein de-
scribed, and may prove to be only an old and very large individual of that
species.

—=

Narica Gissonrana. Plate IX., Fig. 10.

Testa ovatd, ventricosd; spird productiusculd; aufractibus quinis, subplanulatis ; apertura contracté,
elongata.

WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME OF ITS ORGANIC REMAINS. 257

Shell ovate, inflated ; spire rather produced ; whorls five, rather flattened; aperture contracted, elongate.

Found on the top of a mountain between Tocaima and La Messa, in New
Granada. Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.3, ‘ Length 1.5 inches.

Remarks.—This is the only spiral species brought by Dr. Gibbon among
the fossils from Colombia. It is the more interesting, as the Oolitic formation
is the first in which this genus appears in Hurope. Mr. Smith, in his “ Strata
Identified,” figures, on his plate of the “ Coral Rag and Pisolite,” an Ampulla-
ria, (Fig. 2,) which resembles, in form, this Natsca; and I think that De la
Beche means this when he quotes Natica arguta., Smith, as existing in the
Coral Rag, as Woodward does also.

SPATANGUS Conompranus. Plate IX., Fig. 11.

Sp. ovaio-cordatus, gibbus, convexus, anticé planulato; ambulacris quinis, lanceolatis, transversim
punctatis.

Sp. ovately cordate, gibbous, convex, flattened before; ambulacra five, lanceolate, transversely punc-
tured.

Found in the mountains between Tocaima and La Messa, New Granada.
Dr. Gibbon.
My Cabinet.
Height .9, Length 1.4, Breadth 1.3 inches.

Remarks.—A single specimen only was received, and it seems to be differ-
ent from any which has been described.

THE OOLITE OF CUBA.

Witkin a few years I have received specimens of organic remains from two
friends in Cuba. On examination I found part of them to belong to the Ooll-
tic group, and, most probably, to the higher members of it. Those from near

VII.—3 P

258 NOTICE OF THE OOLITIC FORMATION IN AMERICA,

Havanna were from Mons. Poey, under whose charge the Botanic Garden has
been placed; those from Matanzas were from my friend Louis Vanuxem, Esq.,
and are from deposits of a more recent formation, being of a white limestone.

It is evident that Baron Humboldt had this formation in his mind in making
the following observations:—“I thought I recognised in the equinoctial zone
of, America the Jura formation in several whitish limestones, partly lithogra-
phic, with a fracture smooth and dull, or very flat conchoidal. ‘These are the
limestones of the cavern of Caripe, (S. E. of Cumana,) the shore of Nueva
Barcelona, (Venezuela,) the Isle of Cuba, (between the Havanna and Bata-
bano; between Trinidad and the boca del Rio Guaurabo,) and the central
mountains of Mexico, (plains of Salamanca and the defile of Batas.”’)

The specimens now described and figured are not all from the same group,
and with so small a number it would be difficult, if not impossible, to arrange
them correctly in their exact superposition. ‘These are, however, sufficient to
confirm the impression of the distinguished traveller that the Jura formation
(Oolite) existed in Cuba. In another paper I have shown that the lower mem-
bers of the Oolitic group are identified in New Granada. Future observations,
with more extended means than a few specimens of a small number of species
affords, will, I have little doubt, enable the geologist to make out the whole
Oolitic group in America to be similar in its characters to that of Europe. In

the few specimens under examination it will be perceived that the generic
- forms coincide with those found in the Oolite of England; and it is a matter
of doubt with me if the specific characters of some be not identically the same.
Thus the Terebratula, which I propose to call Cubaensis, seems to me so closely
to resemble a Terebratula of which I have specimens from Dundry, in Eng-
land, that I should not now propose a separate place for it, but that it may be
the more readily distinguished and referred to. The fracture of a Belemmnite
among the specimens received presents no characters which can be observed
different from those of the Oolite of England, and, therefore, will not be far-
ther noticed.

De la Beche on the Geology of Jamaica (Geol. Soc. Trans., Vol. Il., New
Series) mentions a “compact white limestone formation” containing “ organic
remains, generally casts,” which he places, with some doubt, with the “ Supe-
rior, or Tertiary Rocks.” Among the forms, he gives, in his list, the Nautzlus,

WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME OF ITS ORGANIC REMAINS. 259

Cerethium, Terebratula, &c. From the white limestone of Matanzas I have some
of the same generic forms, and have no doubt of their common origin.

In regard to this white limestone, I should agree with De la Beche,
certainly, in not placing it below the Tertiary period. At the same time, we
must not confound the rock containing these “casts” with the rocks contain-
ing the shells of the genera Terebratula, &c. These latter are, I think, of a
different origin.

For the casts in my possession I propose the following names :—

Nautilus Cubaensis. Plate X., Fig, 15. Cast of the chamber.
Arca Sillimaniana. Plate X., Fig. 16.
Cucullea dubia. Plate X., Fig. 17.
Chama tortuosa. Plate X., Fig. 18.
Cardium globosum. Plate X., Fig. 20.
“* — depressum. Plate X., Fig. 21.
Conus. latus. Plate X., Fig. 19.

TEREBRATULA T'ayLortana. Plate X., Fig. 12.

Testa triangulari, sulcis longitudinalibus impressis ; valvd inferiore in superiorem reflexd ; margine
biplicato.

Shell triangular, with impressed longitudinal furrows ; the inferior valve reflected into the superior one;
margin doubly folded.

Found near Havanna, Cuba. Mons. Poey.
My Cabinet.
Diam. .7, Length 1, Breadth 1.2 inches.

Remarks.—This is an interesting species, and so much like one (name un-
known to me) which I have from the Oolite of Dundry, England, that it can
scarce be said to differ from it. It seems, however, to be a larger species, and
the great flexure of the margin is more oblique. The very bad figure, Pl.
VIIl., Fig. 15, of Young’s “ Geological Survey of the Yorkshire Coast,” has
some resemblance to it. As, also, Dr. Fitton’s fine figure of Terebratula con-
veza. “Strata Below the Chalk,” Pl. XIV., Fig 12. I name this after R.
C. Taylor, Esq., the Geologist.

260 NOTICE OF THE OOLITIC FORMATION IN AMERICA.

TerepraTuLa Poryana. Plate X., Fig. 13.

Testa elongato-ovatd, levi, inflata; nate productd, incurva; foramine submagno.

Shell ovately lengthened, smooth, inflated; beak produced, incurved ; hole rather large.

Found near Havanna, Cuba. Mons. Poey,
My Cabinet.
Diam. .6, Length 1.1, Breadth .8 inches.

Remarks.—This species very much resembles some of the species of the
Green Sand of New Jersey, as well as of the same deposit in England. Dr.
Fitton’s figure of Terebratula prelonga, Pl. XIV., Fig. 14, “Strata Below the
Chalk,” is somewhat like this shell, but it is longer, and has a furrow which
does not exist in the Poeyana.

TeLLinITES Humponptiana. Plate X., Fig. 14.

Testa scalenid, inflatd, anticé truncata; striis transversis, elevatis, remotiusculus, rotundatis.

Shell scaleniform, inflated, truncate before ; strie transverse, raised, somewhat rerhote, rounded.

Found near Havanna, Cuba. Mons. Poey.
My Cabinet.
Diam. .7, Length .7, Breadth 1.1 inch.

Remarks.—This shell resembles very closely the Telhnites problematicus,
Schlotthewm, from Solenhofen; and they may both, perhaps, belong to the same
period.

ARTICLE XVII.

Observations to determine the horizontal Magnetic Intensity and Dip at Louis-
ville, Kentucky, and at Cincinnati, Ohio. By John Locke, M. D., Professor
of Chemistry in the Medical College of Ohno. Read May 15, 1840.

Tue following observations were made to determine the relative horizontal
magnetic intensities at Louisville, Kentucky, and Cincinnati, Ohio. The ap-
paratus used was that invented by Professor Bache, in which the needles are
made to oscillate in a rarefied medium. ‘Two of the needles used (Nos. 1 and
2) were of the model of those of Professor Hansteen; the third (No. 3) was flat,
with lozenge points.

HorizonTau INTENSITY.

Cincinnati, March 7, 1840. Latitude 39° 06’ N.; Longitude 84° 27’ W.

No. of Time of Duration of Calculated duration) Square of the

i
Mean Temp. | 509 Vibrations. at 60°. Time. Observations.

Needle. | Commencement.

No. 1) 112 10™ 05:.6 | 56° 64' F. | 25.6666 Min. | 25.6777 Min. | 659.34428 Cloudy; sprinkles of rain.
2/11 47 04.4158 00 25.3733 25.3808 644.18500} do. do. do.
3/12 36 05.6/60 00 20.6160 20.6160 425.01945| do. do. do.

Cincinnati, March 14, 1840.

No. 1} 11" 33™ 593.2} 48° 5’ F.| 25.6600 Min. | 25.6954 Min. | 660.25358 | Beginning to rain.
2/12 16 03.2/45 O 25.3600 25.4151 645.9273 1 | Raining.

3/12 54 59.2/45 5 20.6066 20.6239 425.34525 | do.
Louisville, Ky., March 10, 1840. Latitude 38° 03' N.; Longitude 85° 30' W.

No. 1| 11> 44™ 0.24|59° 60’ F.| 25.3333 Min. | 25.3363 Min. | 641.77777 | clear; brisk N. W. wind.
2\12 20 58.8/57 50 25.0200 25.0290 626.45084| do. do. do.
3/ 1 18 00.0/57 10 20.3333 20.3368 413.58540| do. do. do.

Louisville, March 11, 1840.

No. 1/115 40™ 045.8|;39° 5’ F.| 25.3000 Min. | 25.3622 Min. | 643.24119 Clear; wind moderate.
2\12 14 04 41 0 24.9733 25.0421 627.10677| do. do. do.
8/12 48 03 .2/48 20.3200 20.3400 413.71560| 40. do. do.

ViI.—3 Q

262 HORIZONTAL MAGNETIC INTENSITY AND DIP

By comparing these double suites of experiments made at each of the places,
Cincinnati and Louisville, I obtain the following ratios of horizontal intensity :

Cincinnati, March 7th, and Louisville, March 10th, 1840.

Lou. Cin.

By needle No. 1, : : : : 5 4 - : : 1: 0.9733

« ~6No. 2, 6 ‘ é 5 0 ; i é 3 1: 0.9723

COMING Os: ee yy M cee Meghan JG pete 4 Gale | ee areca eNO ROS O
Cincinnati, March 7th, and Louisville, March 11th.

By needle No. 1, : 5 . 6 : : 5 5 5 1: 0.9755

“6 6ONo. 2, . 6 9 6 ; 5 : . 0 1: 0.9735

‘s¢ SONo.. 8, ; 6 : : 5 ‘ 2 a ; 1: 0.9734
Cincinnati, March 14th, and Louisville, March 10th.

By needle No. 1, 1: 0.9720

“« ~=6No. 2, 1: 0.9698

5 IN@s eh 1: 0.9723
Cincinnati, March 14th, and Louisville, March 11th.

By needle No. 1, 1; 0.9742

G3 INS Bs 1; 0.9709

« ~6SoS No. 8, 109726

Mean, : 9 : 5 A US. Ot 747/

We have, then, the horizontal intensity at Louisville to that at Cincinnati
as 1 to 0.9727.

Maenetic Dre.

Cincinnati, March 6th, 1840, 2h. 20m., P. M. Longworth’s Garden.

By needle No. 1,
NOs 2

70° 27'.25
70 27 .8125

Mean, i ; 5 : 3 70 27 .53812

AT LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, AND CINCINNATI, OHIO. 263

Cincinnati, March, 3h. 30m., P. M., at my own house, in the garden.

By needle No.1, . ‘ : . : : : ; 3 70° 24.25
SCPNO. 25.5.2 c : : s 5 : . 0 70 22 .8125
Mean, é F 3 : ZAD 483 fae iP?

Mean dip at Cincinnati, 70° 25’.5312*

Louisville, March 10, 8h. 13m., 4. M. Jacob’s Woods.

By needle No. 1, . : : : F : 6 s i 69° 55/.25
BIN, Baye C : - ‘ ‘ ; dj 3 69 51 .375
Mean, 5 é A . 6 69 53 .3125

Louisville, March 11, 6h. 23m., 4. M. Jacob’s Woods.

By needle No. 1, . 5 A ; 6 : “ : : 69° 57’
Bo INO Bye é A C c : : : . 69 56.75
Mean, F vl é : 69 56 .875

Louisville, March 11th, 5h. 27m., P. MM.

By needle No.1, . : 4 : : : : : : 69° 55’.125
CH INIT, 5 NS é - : : < - < - 69 53.75
Mean, 3 : : ; 69 54. 4375

Mean dip at Louisville, 69° 54’.8750.

The relative total intensities at Louisville and Cincinnati, calculated from
the preceding elements of dip and horizontal intensity at the same places, are
as 1.0000: 1.0031.

The following experiments were made to determine the correction for tem-
perature of these needles.

A stove and pipe of copper were introduced into a room in my house, fifteen
feet square, and having no unusual quantity of iron about it. Opening the
room on the morning of the 22d of March, the apparatus was cooled down to
38° F., and the time of five hundred vibrations observed. It was then heated
as rapidly as possible by means of the copper stove to 91°.4, and the time of
five hundred vibrations again observed and noted. The constant coefficient

“ The dip determined at Longworth’s garden since this period, namely, 21st of April, 1840,
was, by Needle No.1, . 3 j : , : ? ; : : 5 : . 70° 29’.68
eee NON Cee . ¢ : : : : 5 : : : : . 70 28

Mean, . : : : - 70 28 .84

264 HORIZONTAL MAGNETIC INTENSITY, ETC.

was then deduced by Hansteen’s formula. Similar experiments were made
with the other needles, as below.

Min. Sec.

March 22d, 1840. Needle No.1. ‘Temperature 38°. 500 vibrations in 25 34.8
Temperature 91.4.‘ ce 25 44.8

Coefficient deduced, 0.000117

March 25. Mean temperature 37° 36’. Needle No. 1. 500 vibrations in 25 33.8

Mean temperature 91. 5 30 GG ee Go 25 44
Coefficient deduced, 0.000122
Mean for No. 1, 0.000125
March 24. Mean temperature 50. Needle No. 2. 500 vibrations in 25 18.8
86.12 £6 es sé ce 25 26.8
Coefficient deduced, 0.000145
March 25. Mean Temperature 48. Needle No 3. 500 vibrations in 20 34.6
90 66 66 66 66 20 37.6
Coefficient deduced, 0.000058

This last needle, the flat one with lozenge points before referred to, seems
very little affected by temperature.

It may, perhaps, excite surprise, and, possibly, some doubt as to the accu-
racy of my observations, that the dip given above for Cincinnati is so much
less than that which I obtained in November, 1837, the latter being 70° 45’.75,
and the former 70° 25'.5312; and that the dip at Louisville, August 31, 1839,
should have been 70° 08', and on March 11, 1840, only 69° 54’.4375, or, as a
mean, 69° 54'.8750. It is probable, from an experiment recorded in Major
Long’s expedition, making the dip at St. Louis, in 1819, 70° 30’, and, by my
own observations, in 1839, making it, at the same place, only 69° 31'.4, the in-
terval being twenty years, that the dip at this part of the earth is diminishing
at the rate of about 3’ per annum. ‘This will account for part of the change
observed at Cincinnati. The remainder is probably produced by the seasons,
which Hansteen allows to have an influence to the extent of 15’. Allowing
7' for the annual diminution of the dip since November, 1837, we have for the
change produced by the seasons,

70° 25'.5312 4+ 7° + 2 = 70° 45'.75, and
x = 70° 45'.75 — 70° 25'.5312 — 7' or
x = 13 288 = the above named change.

ARTICLE XVIII.

Observations upon the Meteors of August. By C. G. Forshey, City Engineer of
Natchez, and late Professor of Mathematics and Civil Engineering, Jefferson
College, Mississippt. Read August 24, 1840.

Aueust is doubtless more prolific of meteors than any other month im the
year; and this fact had called my attention more particularly to the character
of these meteors than of others; when, in May, I think, 1838, I first met the paper
of Mr. EK. C. Herrick, calling the attention of observers to the night of the 9th annu-
ally. ‘This fact appears to have been first noticed, and attention to have been spe-
cially called to it by Quetelet, of Brussels, to whom we are indebted for annual ob-
servations in reference to it since 1836. Upon reference to my register of August,
1837, I found this memorandum for the night of the 6th: “ An unusual number
of brilliant meteors, with long trains, chiefly from about Cassiopeia.” But
from this date we had near a week of cloudy, rainy weather, preventing further
observation, till the night of the 14th. ‘This evening I find a similar note, with
a more minute description of a very large meteor passing from Cassiopeia to
Aquila. On the night of the 16th a similar note, with particular description
of two extraordinary ones. Several succeeding evenings exhibited brilliant me-
teors, but originating variously, and observing no common direction nor radiant.

This apparent continuation of the display, which has its maximum about the
10th, agrees with the observations of the two succeeding years, as will appear
below. ‘The above observations were made at Jefferson College, Mississippi,
Latitude 31° 36’ 42”, Longitude 91° 20’.

vVil.—3 R

266 OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

At the suggestion of Mr. Herrick, I prepared for observation about the 10th
of August, 1838; but in the gloom of a sudden and overwhelming bereavement,
which had just deprived me of the companion of all my studies, I entirely forgot
my appointment, until the morning of the 11th. At half past 2 o’clock, A. M.,
I was startled from my revery, over the fresh earth that covered my lost companion
by a blaze of light, that, in the face of a full moon, near mid-heavens, lighted up
the landscape with intense brilliancy. I did not see the meteor, but its light re-
called the date of the expected display, and I immediately commenced obser-
vation. |
The light of the moon, one of the clearest nights in the pure atmosphere of
Iowa, obscured all stars below the second magnitude. Indeed, very few stars
were visible in the heavens. After some fifteen minutes’ observation, in which I
saw ten meteors, all having trains, and radiant, with one exception, from near
Cassiopeia, I awoke a friend, to aid me in observing. In so doing, about fifteen
minutes were lost. But from that time till dawn, we watched closely as great
a field as could be seen by two observers, one looking northwardly and the
other southwardly, in an open prairie. At 4 o’clock, day-break in the east and
the moon in the west concealed all the stars and terminated our observations.

In the mean while we had counted sixty-five meteors, including those first above
noticed. Of the whole number seen, more than three-fourths had trains, chiefly
of a pale purple colour, which remained, in several instances, a second or two
after the body disappeared. Doubtless, the great number seen with trains
is properly accounted for from the consideration that the larger meteors
are generally attended by trains, and none but the larger ones were visible on
this occasion. Their apparent velocity was by no means constant. While some
passed through an arc of 40° in a second of time, others occupied 3” in passing
the same distance, and then left trains of 2” duration. In several meteors I
was confident of having observed a retardation of velocity, before the bodies
disappeared. This I attributed to the resistance of the earth’s atmosphere,
which, I did not doubt, many of the bodies penetrated. Subsequent obser-
vation has led me to doubt the latter presumption, and consequently the cor-
rectness of the observations upon their retarding motion. I would invite the
careful attention of observers to this inquiry, as its results will furnish the best
evidence in regard to their entering the earth’s atmosphere. No noises were
heard, nor was a single explosion witnesssd—a phenomenon by no means un-
usual in common meteors and in the November displays.

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST. 267

Notes were not kept while observing, nor was the precise time or track of
any one meteor preserved. But my efforts were immediately and continuously
made to locate a radiant point, should such be discoverable. I had no know-
ledge of the probable existence of such radiant, but took the hint from the his-
tory of the November meteors.

A radiant region, if not a radiant point, was soon perceivable. The paths
traced back, excepting of about five meteors which were not conformable, passed
through a circle, described from the sword clustre of Perseus as a centre, and
with a radius of 2°. Of this I sufficiently assured myself by tracing back the
lines of distant ones the moment after their disappearance, though unable to
find a concurrent pont for all the tracks. In truth, these paths would not meet
am acommon point. ‘The circle given, however, would have received nearly
every one of the sixty conformable meteors’ paths.

Considering our favourable position for observation, I think we saw every
visible meteor over one-third of the canopy. With this estimate, there were
about one hundred and eighty visible meteors per hour, or three per minute.
Add to this at least four invisible ones below the second magnitude for one that
reached it, (the fairness of which estimate will appear below,) and we should
have seven hundred and twenty meteors obscured by the moon, making about
nine hundred per hour for a clear moonless night.

These observations, for 1838, were made at Rock Island, in the upper Mis-
sissippi, three miles above the mouth of Rock River; Latitude 41° 44' 7.5”; Lon-
gitude 13° 30' west from Washington, D. C.

In 1839, circumstances were much more favourable for observation, there
beimg no moon, and the weather peculiarly clear. I copy from my travelling
diary.

“Sr. Louis, Missouri, August 9, 1839.

* * * A passenger from a coach which came in late, told me that he saw a
great number of meteors during the evening; and on being questioned for
their direction and locality, said, that all that he saw went from about the pole
star toward the Great Bear. Doubtless his position in the coach was such as
to expose only that field to his view; and all meteors observing the usual origin
for this shower, and passing near Polaris, must have travelled in that direction.

“ Aucust 10th.
as a AS * This was the night for

the recurrence of the shower, and I was on the look-out. Before the twilight

268 OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

closed, I saw one meteor with a train, and afterwards saw them repeatedly
during the evening; but a previous engagement prevented my constant obser-
vation, till 20 minutes before 11, P. M.

My position for observing was at the intersection of two streets, where at
least 15° of the whole horizon were obscured by the buildings. In the lapse
of one hour I counted fifty meteors, and about ten were reported to me by others.
The field of observation was the constellations about the divergent point, that
it might be the more accurately ascertained. It was interesting to observe the
identity of their origin. Yet that origin was not a point, but was in the
vicinity of the sword cluster, in the right hand of Perseus. All the lines traced
back of those observing the common law, would intersect within two degrees,
at most, of that cluster. About one in every ten crossed the paths of the rest;
but these were very different in their appearance, having no trains, and shining
with a red, or yellow light.

‘There appeared, occasionally, a very splendid meteor, three times the size
of a star of the first magnitude, but usually they were smaller than the first,
and many were smaller than the third magnitude. Of the fifty seen by myself
forty left trains, several of the largest 40° in length. The angular velocity of
these was very great. ‘The colour of the meteors was nearly uniform, being of
a pale white, and as they faded, assuming a purple tinge. The trains, in a
few cases, remained after the body disappeared, and faded from either extremity,
growing deeper and deeper purple, till they mingled with the colour of the skies.

My field of view embraced, probably, one-seventh of the heavens; and if so,
the number visible per hour, in the whole heavens, was about three hundred and
fifty, or more than five per minute. ‘The whole display resembles very much
that which I saw a year since at Rock Island, with a difference of intensity
in favour of the present.

“T am making my notes at half past 12, and still I see them flash past my
window with about the same frequency as before.”

August 11th.

On the morning of this date I left St. Louis, in a steamer, for Peoria, on Illinois
river. I continue the extracts from my diary, as giving my views at the times,
unmodified by subsequent observation.

* * “At 81, P. M., we entered the mouth of the Illinois river, and
at 9 I was on deck to look out for a continuation of the meteoric display, and
was soon gratified by the appearance of several very splendid ones. Their

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST. 269

origin was ‘such as to leave no doubt about their connexion with the shower,
and I induced two fellow passengers to aid me in observation. We stood on
deck, and divided the heavens by three vertical planes, from the zenith to the
horizon, and commenced observation. In the space of forty minutes we reported
respectively nine, eleven, eight meteors, 7 or 8 of which did not observe the com-
mon radiant. ‘The remainder were, in all important respects, like those described
last night. On the presumption that we saw half the visible meteors, the
number per hour would be about seventy-three to seventy-five, or one for every
five that were visible 23 hours previously.

The convergency of their lines traced back was manifestly the same as last
night, but confirmed the impression I have entertained from the first, that they
do not meetin a common point, but in a radiant region, or circle, which has the
sword cluster for rts centre, nith a radius of 2° of a great circle.

“T should not omit to mention the notice of two or three meteors from the com-
mon radiant, whose light, both of body and train, was of a fiery colour, (differing
very much from the remainder in this respect;) and these seemed to falter in
their course, and to be retarded till they expired. Are not these evidences of
the correctness of my suggestion last year, that these meteors penetrate the
atmosphere of the earth? And may not their light and velocity have been
modified by atmospheric resistance ?

They were still visible at a late hour. Weather clear, day hot, evening

pleasant, and perfectly calm.
“ August 12th.

Watched the heavens during the evening, and saw several, but fewer than
last night. Nearly all originated as before. Perhaps the centre of the neigh-
bourhood of radiation was a little more eastwardly. Several were very splendid,
but nothing I saw seemed to require me to observe longer than to satisfy myself

that the display presented no new phases.
“ August 13th.

* * At night took an altitude of Polaris, for the latitude of Peoria,
Illinois; and while observing, I saw two meteors with trains, having the usual
radiant. I continued watching sufficiently long to be satisfied that the display
still continued, but was very much diminished in intensity. One observer could
see about six conformable meteors per hour.”

August 9th, 1840.
On the afternoon of this date I arrived in Philadelphia; and, after some dif-
ficulty in search for observers, found Mr. 8. C. Walker and others at the obser-
VIIl.—3 S

270 OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

vatory of the High School, looking at the moon and planets through a telescope.
I was courteously received by these strangers, and my proffered aid, in looking
out for meteors, kindly accepted by Mr. Walker.

Some sixteen meteors were incidentally noticed before observation commenced.
All these, with one exception, moved in directions which would converge between
Cassiopeia, and the head of Perseus, two originating in the head of Perseus.
Three of these meteors were twice as large as Jupiter, six were as bright as
Jupiter, and the remainder above stars of the 3rd magnitude, or they must
have been obscured by the brightness of the moon. Several had trains, say
10° visible at once. Five were visible from 1’ to 1.5’ after the bodies dis-
appeared. ‘There were no explosions.

At 10, P. M., mean time, our observations commenced for the night. The
following is condensed from the minutes.

From 10h. 7m. to 12h. 18m. C. G. Forshey observed, S. M. Hamilton recorded.

“© 12h. 18m. to 13h. 56m. S. C. Walker. “c 66 66
“ 14h. Om. to 16h. 6m. C. G. Forshey observed and recorded.

From 10h. 7m. to 12h. 18 m., mean time, I observed the meteors, and Mr.
S. W. Hamilton recorded. In this interval of 2h. 11. m., by bright moonlight,
I saw twenty-four meteors, of which eighteen were conformable, and fifteen of
these had trains. Of the six unconformable, four had no trains. For further
particulars, see the table below, No. I.

From 12h. 18 m. till the moon set, at 13h. 56 m., Mr. Walker observed me-
teors, and Mr. Hamilton recorded. ‘The minutes, which have been kindly
placed at my disposal, show that in 1h. 38 m., 28 meteors were seen, of which
only 3 were unconformable.

Messrs. Walker and Hamilton retired at 14/., and I resumed observation
just after the moon set, and continued till 16. 6m., an interval of 2h. 6m.
Daylight terminated my observations at this time. Meanwhile I saw one hundred
and three meteors, and in several places noted that half the time was lost from
observation, in making my notes. Of these meteors only nine were unconform-
able, and they inferior ones. From moon-set to daybreak, an interval of 92 mi-
nutes, I recorded eighty-one of the one hundred and three meteors, and have no
doubt that the time lost in recording was sufficient to have increased the number
to one hundred and fifty. On the usual estimate, that one observer can watch
one-sixth of the heavens, the whole number of meteors that fell during that
time was about nine hundred, or nearly ten per minute. ‘This result is nearly

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST. 271

equal to the estimate for the night of the 10th, 1838. Probably we had the
good fortune to witness the maximum intensity of the shower.

Permit me here to remark, that in all the published notices of August meteors
I have seen, no one has hinted at the extreme difference in character from the No-
vember meteors. This should be borne in mind. The former are very uniform,
and are sufficiently described above. The shower of Nov. 12, 1833, I witnessed
in all its magnificence, at West Point; and after my first surprise at the grand
illumination itself, the most striking feature I observed was the great number
of explosions. I listened carefully for the noises, but heard none; nor do I be-
lieve that any could be heard, though they frequently burst into many blazing
fragments, very much like sky rockets to the eye. The colours of the meteors
were very various, from deep red, to bronze, yellow, and white. No meteors
fell between my eye and the mountains, which rise near fifteen hundred feet
within three miles. The trains of many meteors assumed a curling, nebulous
form, and vanished very slowly, several remaining visible from five to ten mi-
nutes, and one, which has been so much noticed, though far below Capella at
West Point, remained some fifteen minutes.

TABLE I.

Tabular Description and Classification of Meteors of August 9, 1840.

~ es a S 3 3
ie) Noy .
qe [eee So eee pe
es |Sea| gf | Ba | 3 a
Meiosis Eiectlieae e
do |sea | Os )| eso bo ies
Comparative Macnitupes. or os n ED Be 8 ea €¢
ah | wae] Ss Sg Os 2)
Be (S21 BSW ee y cats
SS |3es |] ea 22 7S r= |
ao |&S5| 28 | SR | s Bp
S s 2 2> 4 3 s oO
© = a i=) A 4
ee
= . 5 . ° 5
Three times the size of Jupiter. 1 1 40° | 48.5 | 18.7 | 20°
Twice 66 < 6 0 a) 1 BO WD | i063
Equal to se “ 12 2 Vos) 2/50) O) ots) jj ley
‘6 « First magnitude. We le AD hy Oo ten)
‘6 66 Second “% 32 17 12 1.2/0.5 5
6¢ eT hird ce D 33 7 |0.9) 0.4 4
Below “ 6 none) 36 6 0.6/0.4) 4

In order to locate the radiant with precision, at different times, in the pro-
gress of the display, the following results have been obtained by projecting the
paths of the meteors, from our minutes, upon a map of the heavens. In
observing and noting, we recorded the points of appearance and disappear-
ance of each conformable meteor, as well as the line in Cassiopeia or Perseus
through which its path traced back would pass. ‘This was done on the instant,

272 OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

while the path was fresh in the memory. Care was also taken, in commencing,
to refresh the recollection by an inspection of the map, which was kept open
at hand during the observations. It is probably owing to our having observed
and recorded three points of their direction, that we found the probable error
of a single observation, as well as of the pomt of convergence, so much less,
(as will appear in the table below,) than the results of the European observa-
tions of 1837 and 1839. Our mode of observing has caused a greater number
of the meteors seen to be rejected from the tables as unconformable, in proportion
to the whole number seen, than is reported in the European observations.
This had its effect upon the final result of the computations.

An inspection of the table will show, that at Philadelphia, the radiant had
a tendency towards the 8S. EH. ‘This apparent motion of the radiant is in con-
formity with my memoranda, made last year, on the 10th and 11th of August.

For the European results in this table, as well as for the statement of the
conclusions derived from the same by Mr. Erman of Berlin, (Nos. 385, 390
and 404, Schumacher’s Astr. Nachr.,) I am indebted to Mr. Sears C. Walker.
The Philadelphia observations show an apparent motion of the radiant in the
heavens at variance with the conclusions of Mr. Erman, namely, that the
motion of the radiant should be in a westerly direction, at a rate not exceeding
0.1° of a great circle in an hour.

TaB.e II.

Table of Right Ascension and Dechnation, of the Points of Convergence, of the
apparent Paths of the Meteors of August 9, 10, 11, 2m the Years 1837, 1839,
and 1840, from Observations at various Places.

eleeece S
PLacrs OF OBSERVATION, AND Dates. Apparent {OTA 25 oH ee

a oy
1837, Berlin, August 10, . . . . | 217°.18| —57°.26| 46 | $20.1 | + 2.96
OG . Breslow Ge gg oe .8o 221 .76 | — 51 .41 | 200 | = 19:5 | = 1.38
1839, Berlin, |“) 394.0. Gahey 4s 224 e86r—-150, si 50m suhON nines
OG 09 CON PHAN: Ue SU Arey Malte 223 .88 | — 52 .389)| 48 28 116%3) |) 22 LB P2
66 66 Son Pe.) Sones de emake 218 .45;— 51 .05) 43 | £13.5 | £2.06
‘© Koningsberg, August 10, . . | 214 .85|— 55 .59|) 75 | $21.0 | £2.42
« «“ ce Tons cl |e 5e2 ON 7a en ale eee
1840, Philadelphia, << 92105 57™ 216 .14|/—55.76| 12 | t 2.38 | £0.67
« z eG 13) 4 4| O14 a noe to) Mba een oat 05
« ‘6 “9 15 6 219 625 "55 121) 29) a2 | 0122

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST. 273

Taste III.

Table of the Difference (E.) of the single Results from the Mean adopted for the
Position of the Point of Convergence of the Paths of the Meteors of August
9th, 1840, at Philadelphia, in Parts of a great Circle.

First Group, Sreconp Group, Tuirp GrRoovp,
BY BY BY

Mr. ForsHey. Mr. WALKER. Mr. Forsnry. |
a Ui |\~-- H—___, YY |“ _—_~ ~
18 0.40 49 0.5 82 0.33
19 0.50 50 0.6 70 0.50 |
24 0.60 64 1.1 71 0.55 |
17 1.25 48 1.3 — 0.57 |
22 1.40 46 2.1 86 0.70 |
21 1.50 62 2.2 85 0.85 |
23 | 2.10 51 2.3 77 | 0.95 |
29 2.20 49 2.4 78 1.08 |
27 2.90 42 “3.4 79 1.25 |
24. 3.00 54 4,1 95 1.45 |
25 3.50 45 7.9 73 1.50 |

55 8.5 72 1.53

52 9.0 76 1.55 |
60 9.3 74 1.57 |
61 13.8 75 1.60 |
142 1.60 |

81 1.80 |

83 1,90 |
88 1.95 |

84 1.97
132 2.00 |
137 2.12 |
136 pis |

133 2.22

135 2.40

133 2.50

— 2.79
-— 2.75
-—— 3.05 |

The annual periodicity of this phenomenon, its duration, and the manifest
convergence of the paths of the meteors, would accord well with the hypothesis
of a revolving belt or zone of meteors, whose centre is the sun, and whose orlii
passes very near to the orbit of the earth, piercing the plane of the ecliptic in the
signs Aquarius and Leo. The plane of its orbit, according to the computations
of Mr. Erman, is quite beyond the limits of the zodiac, being inclined to the

Vil.—3 T

274 OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

ecliptic by an angle of not less than 56°* The minimum velocity is fifty-five
hundredths, taking that of the earth for unity. This gives them a period of
one hundred and twenty-eight days. ‘Their greatest possible velocity, by the
same computations, would be one hundred and forty-three hundredths with a
period indefinitely great. It is desirable that observers should keep a careful
watch for the semiannual return of the August meteors. I have observed,
for the past two years, about the 6th of February, but have seen nothing
worth reporting. Nor do I much expect they will be visible to the naked
eye, at the February node; yet an examination of the discs of the sun and
moon, with a powerful telescope, may detect the transit of these meteors
over them. Success in this examination, it is plain, would determine whether
the February node be within or without the earth’s orbit, and furnish another
element for the exact determination of the orbit.

It adds no little interest to the occurrence of these meteoric showers to find
that there have been several striking coincidences between their dates, and
those of shocks of earthquake. A notice has recently passed the rounds of the
newspapers, of a shock which was felt in various parts of New-England, on the
9th of the present month, the date of our observations at the High School, as
detailed above. It occurred to me to examine how frequently such coincidences
of date might be found in history, and although I could discover very little
written on the subject of earthquakes, and that little deficient in precise dates,
yet the search has not been wholly unavailing. I have reduced to the tabular
form below, what I have been able to collect, and would respectfully invite
the attention of philosophers to the consideration of this interesting matter.
Should future observation and research into the past demonstrate that in the
revolution of the cometary bodies which produce our meteoric showers, their
proximity to the earth produces waves in her surface, by their attraction, great
plausibility will thereby be conferred upon the geological hypothesis of the in-

* Jn the explanation of the November displays of meteors, should we not need far less of hy-
pothesis than Prof. Olmsted has called in, to connect them with the zodiacal light, by assuming,
somewhat as in the August showers, that they are a flock of meteors, forming a cometary body,
less than an entire zone, whose period of revolution around the sun is about thirty-three years, whose
perihelion is near the orbit of our earth in Pisces, and whose length is sufficient to require about
one fifth of its entire period, in passing the node?

The returns of this display, I believe, have entirely ceased, and it will, perhaps, be invisible till
about the year 1865; and in 1866 we may possibly have another maximum. My observations upon
the phenomena of the zodiacal light, do not accord with the requirements of Prof. Olmsted’s theory.

August.

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE METEORS OF AUGUST.

279

ternal fluidity of the earth. Much may be done in the solution of this inquiry
by careful observations upon the tides, from the 5th to the 15th of August,
from the 5th to the 15th of February, yearly; and from the 10th to the 15th

November, of those years in which the November meteors appear.

The

waters, it is plain, should first, and most palpably, exhibit the effects of the

presumed local attraction.

TAaBLe LV.

Tabular View of Earthquakes, coincident nith Dates of Meteoric Showers.

February. | November.

uncer.

Year.

Localities.

Adina.
Calabria.
Bina.
Vesuvius.
Alps.

Manosque and Santoni.

Vesuvius.

Rome.

Philippoli, Romania.
Naples.

Amsterdam.
Sumatra.

August. | Iebruary. |November.
4 5 to 15
6
17
7 to 20
11
3
4
uncer. 12
12 6 22
16
13
9

Year.

Localities.

Zante.
; Constantinople.
New England.
Vienna and Presburg.
Isle of Santorini.
Batavia.
Vesuvius.
Riobamba, S. A.
/Etna—Charleston.
Vesuvius, Paris.
Malia.
Vesuvius.
New England.

i
te
4

x

Sen agin

ARTICLE XIX.

On the Change effected in the Nitrates of Potash and Soda by the limited Appl-
cation of Heat, mith the View of obtaining pure Oxygen, by which they are
only partially convertible into Hypo-nitrites: also on a Liquid and a gaseous
ethereal Compound, resulting from the reaction of nascent hypo-nitrous Acid
mith the Elements of Alcohol. By Robert Hare, M. D., Professor of Chemis-
try m the University of Pennsylvania. Read July 17, 1840.

Ir is well known that when either nitrate of potash, or nitrate of soda, is
subjected to heat, as is usual in the process for obtaining oxygen, the first
portions of gas extricated are nearly pure. When the fire is carefully regu-
lated, the residue, after cooling, is a white indurated mass. If this mass be
dissolved in as much boiling water as its solution requires, a large deposition
of crystals of nitrate will take place after the resulting liquid becomes cool.
On boiling down the solution, a further portion of crystals of the same nature
will be obtained.

The mother water being evaporated to a certain point, begins to yield crystals
of hypo-nitrite. ‘Thus the superior solubility of the hypo-nitrites of potash and
soda renders it practicable to separate either of them from the nitrate having
the same base. Of course repeated crystallization is requisite to obtain either
of the salts in question free from the other. It is inexplicable that about a third
of the salt employed should be reduced to the state of hypo-nitrite, while the
remainder is not decomposed. It would seem as if there were a reaction be-
tween the nitrate and hypo-nitrite, which, having co-operated to expel a portion

Vie :

278 ON THE CHANGE EFFECTED IN THE NITRATES OF POTASH AND SODA

of the contained oxygen, afterwards restrains the evolution of a further portion,
until the heat is raised to a point capable of effecting such a decomposition as
to evolve the nitrogen and oxygen in a state of mixture.

Having, in obtaining large quantities of oxygen, for my experiments in
fusing platinum, collected a great quantity of the indurated compound of hy-
po-nitrite and nitrate by the process above mentioned, I was induced to substi-
tute these salts for nitrate of potash, or nitric acid, in the evolution of.the liquid,
commonly known as nitrous, or nitric ether. When, for this object, nitric acid,
or, what amounts to the same thing, when a nitrate and sulphuric acid are em-
ployed, so as to bring free nitric acid into contact with alcohol, there must be
an excess of two atoms of oxygen for each atom of hypo-nitrous acid which en-
ters into combination with the elements of the alcohol.

This causes a wasteful decomposition of a proportionable quantity of the
last mentioned material, and the generation of some impurities. This view of
the subject led me to infer that, to obtain pure hypo-nitrous ether with the
greatest economy of materials, a hypo-nitrite should be employed, with a re-
agent capable of liberating hypo-nitrous acid, in lieu of a nitrate or nitric acid
being distilied with alcohol. The result of an experiment made under this im-
pression justified this inference. By subjecting alcohol, mingled with a con-
centrated solution of a hypo-nitrite, to diluted sulphuric acid, I obtained an
ether, which differs from the ether ordinarily known as nitric, or nitrous ether,
in having a more bland and saccharine taste, milder odour, and greater vola-
tility. It boils below 65° F., and, by its spontaneous evaporation from the bulb
of a thermometer, produces a cold of 15° below zero F. Touched with the
finger, or tongue, it hisses as does water with a red hot iron.

If, after havine boiled for some time, it be allowed to stand for awhile at a
temperature below its boiling point, the boiling will recommence at a lower
temperature than that which was indicated by the thermometer when the boil-
ing ceased.

This seems to arise from the partial resolution of the ether into an ethereal
gas; which appears to be formed by the materials by which the liquid ether is
generated, even when refrigerated below the freezing point. I have collected
this aériform ether in large quantities in bells over mercury. When subjected
to great pressure, it condenses, more or less, into a yellow liquid, which pro-
duces, when allowed to escape into the mouth or nostrils, the same impression

BY THE LIMITED APPLICATION OF HEAT. 279

as the liquid ether. I have conjectured that this ether might be a compound
of the liquid ether with nitric oxide gas, or that it may be isomeric with the
liquid ether. Notwithstanding many efforts to obtain a liquid ether not re-
solvable partially into this gas, I have never succeeded. Hence the boiling
point is extremely variable, as I have seen bubbles escaping below forty de-
grees, from the liquid ether, when recently condensed after distillation.

In the production of cold by mixture with solid carbonic acid, Dr. J. K.
Mitchell found this ether more efficacious than that commonly known as sul-
phuric ether, more properly called hydric ether.

When the new ether, as it is first evolved, is distilled from powdered quick-
lime, this earth imbibes an essential oil, which, with the aid of water, 1s yielded
to pure hydric ether. Of course it is easy to remove this solvent by evapora-
tion or distillation.

The odour of this oil seems to be an ingredient in that of ordinary nitric
ether. Possibly the hypo-nitrous ether may resolve itself gradually into this
oil and the gaseous ether; so that its boiling point may be probably varied by
this chemical change. I suspect that the essential oil in question is one of the
impurities which causes the boiling point of the ether generated by nitric acid
and alcohol to be higher than the boiling point of that obtained, as in my pro-
cess, by nascent hypo-nitrous acid.

When the heat is raised, after the volatile ether ceases to come over from the
materials above mentioned as producing it, ethereal products are distilled, of
which the boiling point gradually rises as the process proceeds. Mean while,
the product thus obtained becomes more and more acrid, till at last it is ren-
dered insupportable to the tongue, as respects the after taste. On mingling
these liquids with a solution of green sulphate of iron, the ether is all absorbed;
but an acrid liquid, which causes the after taste, is not absorbed, and may be
separated by hydric ether. The ether being vaporized by heat, the acrid l-
quid remains. The smallest drop of this liquid is productive of an effect upon
the organs of taste and smell like that of mustard or horse-radish.

The new ether, when secured in a glass phial, by means of a well ground
stopper, does not undergo any change by keeping in a cool situation for several
months. A phial was suspended about fifteen feet below the surface of the
ground, in a cistern of water, for about five months; another was left in a coo!

280 ON THE CHANGE EFFECTED IN THE NITRATES OF POTASH AND SODA

cellar for a longer period, without any apparent change of properties. In this
case pressure prevented the escape of the ethereal gas as above mentioned.

When the ingredients for generating the new hypo-nitrous ether are refrige-
rated below freezing, and left to react, the ether begins to be formed as soon
as the temperature rises, and if the aggregate be included in a bottle with an
air-tight stopple, a stratum of ether will soon form and swim upon the surface
of the mixture. ‘The quantity which can be thus obtained is much less than
that which ensues from the employment of the same quantity of materials with
a retort and refrigerated receiver; because the elaboration and condensation re-
quire a greater difference of temperature than can be imparted, conveniently,
to the different portions of a bottle, especially where the upper is required to
be the colder portion.

In order to obtain a quantity of ether in a summary way, I resorted to this
process last winter, employing about a gallon of the mixture. After I had de-
canted the ether which formed in the course of a night, the residue, although
surrounded by snow, continued to give out the aérial ether for at least a fort-
night. The gaseous ether seems to be formed in innumerable invisible bub-
bles throughout the mass, which, on this account, presented the singular phe-
nomenon of an elastic liquid. On inserting the stopple, the liquid in the neck
of the bottle would subside in the most striking manner, and on removing the
stopple, an opposite movement was observable.

All the ethereal compounds formed by the reaction of the oxacids of nitrogen
with alcohol appear to be decomposable by green sulphate of iron. Under
these circumstances, according to Berzelius, a malate of iron is formed from
common nitric ether.

Concentrated sulphuric acid absorbs the elements derived from the alcohol,
and liberates nitric oxide gas, which 1s, it is well known, rapidly absorbable by
the green sulphate above mentioned. Let there be three cylindrical glass jars,
Nos. 1, 2, and 3, of such a ratio to each other, in size, as to allow two inter-
stices of about half an inch between the second, or intermediate jar, No. 2, and
the outer, No. 1, and innermost jar, No. 3; likewise, let two bell-glasses be
provided, of such a size as that one of them, (A,) may enter the inner inter-
stice, while the other, (B,) will cover (A,) and descend into the outer inter-
stice. Let a wine-glass containing the ether be placed in jar No. 3, and let

BY THE LIMITED APPLICATION OF HEAT. 281

No. 1 be supplied with green sulphate of iron, the other two with concentrated
sulphuric acid, and let the bells be put in their respective places.

Under these circumstances the ether will be gradually vaporized, and the
alcoholic elements, with some oxygen, will be absorbed by the acid, while
nitric oxide, being liberated, will pass into the sulphate, and be, consequently,
absorbed.

From the new ether my young friend, Mr. Boye, who was, at the time, one
of my operative pupils, succeeded in evolving alcohol by digestion with slacked
lime, and subsequent distillation. 'The lime was found to be in the state of a
hypo-nitrite, giving a precipitate with the nitrate of silver.

When, into a bell-glass containmg some of the aériform ether, a globule of
potassium was introduced, and touched with a red hot knob which formed the
termination of an iron rod, ignition took place, and the gas seemed to have
changed its character. I had not, however, leisure to examine it eudiometri-
cally. ‘There was an odour produced which reminded me both of that of fish
and soap.

VIlL.—3s V

RERPTOR GV

ARTICLE XxX.

Descriptions of new Species and Genera of Plants in the natural Order of the
Composit#, collected in a Tour across the Continent to the Pacific, a Residence
an Oregon, and a Visit to the Sandwich Islands and Upper California, during
the Years 1834 and 1835. By Thomas Nuttall. Read Oct. 2, 1840.

Tribe I. VERNONIACE A.

Vernonia *spheroidea, pubescent; leaves lanceolate, serrate, beneath vil-
lous; corymb compound, many-flowered, flowers small; involucrum subglo-
bose, scales short and equal, tomentose and reflected.—Has. Prairies of Ar-
kansas.

Oxss.—Remarkable for the reflection of the scales of the involucrum, which
are all short, equal, and densely tomentose at the base and margins. ‘'

Vernonia Arkansana, (DEcaND.) nearly smooth and herbaceous; leaves
linear-lanceolate, very long, serrulate; corymb simple; flowers large, nearly all
pedunculate, hemispherical; leaves of the involucrum lanceolate, terminating
in very long, filiform, leafy, and spreading points.—Has. Plains of Arkansas,
near Red River.

Oxss.—Remarkable for the great size of the heads of flowers, more than twice
as large as in any other of our species, and also singular in the great length of
the squamose points of the leaflets of the involucrum, which are a little pubes-
cent. The leaves are very long, narrow, and smooth. Achenium somewhat
pubescent. Pappus double, as usual.

See

= AN
he

284 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Tribe Il. HUPATORIACE/. (Lessing, Decand.)
LIATRIS.

Liatris brachystachya. (Nurt.) Arkansa; also in the prairies of Missouri,
common. Liatris pychnostachya? Micu. Vol. IL, p. 91.

Iiatris oppositifoha (Nutt.) is a species of Kupatorium.

Liatris virgata, (Nurr.) nearly smooth; root tuberous; stem often paniculately
and virgately branched; the flowers sometimes upon short, but usually on long
pedicels; involucrum subhemispherical; fifteen to twenty flowered; scales oval,
nearly all equal and imbricate, somewhat acute or obtuse; pappus rather short,
slightly plumose; receptacle naked, or bracteolate—Haz. In the pine forests of
Georgia, and near Newbern, N. Carolina. Very peculiar in its great tendency
to branching; the branches slender. Leaves linear, sublanceolate, not remark-
ably unequal; erect, or reflected; smooth, or somewhat ciliated. One speci-
raen, which I cultivated at Cambridge, Mass., had a bracteolate receptacle, with
a foliaceous scale to each floret; in this individual the leaves were reflected,

I give the following apparently new genus of VerNoniace®, allied to Vernonia, collected by
the late Doctor Baldwin on some part of the Pacific coast of South America, and from its curious

honey-combed receptacle, I have called it
* SYMBLOMERIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, homogamous; the florets tubular and deeply five-cleft, with linear
obtuse segments, the exterior series subpalmate. Receptaculum pitted with angular cavities like
a honey-comb, in which the turbinate villous achenium is almost wholly immersed, (as in Bald-
winia.) Involucrum hemispherical, imbricate, and somewhat squarrose, in several unequal series,
the scales adnate at their base. Stigmas with the branches filiform and pubescent, acuminate.
Pappus double, and, in several series, the outer whitish and much shorter, all paleaceously bristly.—
A shrub eight or ten feet high, with alternate, lanceolate, acuminate, entire, smooth leaves; capi-
tuli rather large, axillary and terminal, pedicellate and corymbose (florets apparently white, judg-
ing by the dried specimen.)

Symblomeria Baldwiniana.
A branching shrub with terete somewhat cinereous puberulous branches and young shoots.
Leaves about three inches long, an inch to an inch and a half wide, acuminate at each end, Ca-

pituli a little larger than those of Vernonia noveboracensis.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 285

and usually ciliate at base, with the leaves of the involucrum more obtuse.
Others, differing in no other external character, had a naked receptacle! The
Carphephorus pseudohatris of Cassini is, then, nothing more than a true Liatris;
and I therefore retain the name I gave to the Alabama specimens, of Latris
squamosa; but it may, perhaps, with others, form a section CARPHEPHORUS,
to which, however, our plant cannot be referred, as the chaff-bearing plant is
scarcely even a permanent variety.

Iiatris *levigata, root tuberous; in every part very smooth; radical leaves,
long and linear, with smooth margins; stem somewhat attenuated, with very
short, almost filiform leaves; involucrum filiformly pedicellate, smooth, of
about two series of obovate, acute, coloured scales; florets about five, or more;
pappus short, barbellate; achenium villous.—Has. In Florida and Georgia.—
Allied to the L. gracis of Pursh, but the capituli are not at all globose, nor
the pedicels spreading, but erect, and without any proper bractes. Stem three
or four feet high, attenuated, and sparingly scattered with almost filiform, subu-
late leaves; radical ones near a foot long, pungently acute and coriaceous.

Inatris resinosa of Decandolle is apparently the L. punctata of Hooker, as
the pappus is merely scabrous, or barbellate, in L. resenosa. ‘The L. punctata
appears intermediate with L. squarrosa and L. cylindracea.

Inatris heterophylla appears, usually, to have the stem pubescent, and not
smooth.

Subgenus.—* Leptociinium. Suffruticose, branching; leaves opposite; capitu-
lum attenuated at the base; receptaculum very small. Achena acutely conic,
ten to twelve striate. Pappus barbellate, elongated in several series, and, as
well as the florets, purple.

Inatris fruticosa, (Nutt.) suffruticose; leaves opposite, above alternate, small-
er, cuneate-oblong, entire; branches corymbose, naked towards the summit;
capituli coarctate.—Has. Collected in Hast Florida by Mr. Ware. Capituli in
smallish terminal clusters, upon slender pedicels; sepals lanceolate, acuminate,
loosely imbricate in about three series, the innermost much the longest; florets

VII.—3 Ww

286 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

purple, as well as the pappus, which is as long as the florets. Corolla wider
at the summit, rather deeply cleft.—The habit of this singular species is much
more that of Kleinia or Eupatoriwm than that of Liatris, with which, however,
the flowers best agree.

EUPATORIUM.—Section I. CytinprocrrHata. (Decand.)

Eupatorium * calocephalum; herbaceous, somewhat scabrous and pubescent;
leaves opposite, narrow-lanceolate, oblong, denticulate, three-nerved and sub-
petiolate; flowers paniculate, corymbose; capituli cylindric-ovate; involucrum
closely imbricate; scales three-striate, oblong-obtuse, the innermost purple;
florets fifteen to twenty.—Lviatris oppositifoha, (NUTTALL,) in Silliman’s Jour-
nal, Vol. V., p. 299. A species so remarkably distinct from the other group
of the United States as to have led me into the error of referring this species
to the genus Liatris: better specimens have now proved it to be an Eupatorium
of Decandolle’s first section. ‘The stem somewhat scabrous, slender, twiggy,
and herbaceous, about two feet high, the upper branchlets terminating in tri-
chotomous flowering corymbs. Hach capitulum pedicellate; scales of the in-
volucrum chaffy, striate, and with a coloured, slightly foliaceous tip, mostly
purple; florets scarcely exserted; pappus short, slightly scabrous; achenium
smooth, five-striate. Receptacle naked.

Eupatorium occidentale, 3. subroseum. In the Rocky Mountains, toward the
waters of the Columbia, and in the Blue Mountains of Oregon.

Eupatorium Oregonum, slightly scabrous; leaves opposite, above alternate,
petiolate, ovate, acute, entire; corymb sub-coarctate, few-flowered ; involucrum
twelve to fifteen flowered, scales almost in a simple series, acute, pubescent;
achenium five-striate.—Has. In the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of
the Malade of the Oregon. Nearly allied to the preceding. A very dwarf
species, about six inches high. Leaves about an inch long, somewhat three-
nerved. Flowers pale pink.

BULBOSTYLIS. (Decand.)

Bulbostylis * microphylla; suffruticose low, viscidly pubescent, villous and
much branched; leaves alternate, ovate, subserrate, on the branches numerous

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 287

and small, nearly entire; panicle few-flowered, subfastigiate; capituli pedicel-
late; scales of the involucrum linear lanceolate, acuminate; pappus white.—
Has. On the shelving rocks of the Blue Mountains of Oregon.

Oxss.—A very remarkable species. Perennial, forming rigid dwarf suffruti-
cose tufts of very branching stems, scarcely a foot high, viscid, with a bitter,
highly aromatic resin. The larger leaves roundish-ovate, about an inch long,
those on the branches and upper part of the stem (as in some Asters) diminish-
ing to a fourth of that size, and numerous. Involucrum ovate, squarrose at

base. Flowers white?

BRICKELLIA. (Elhott.)

Eupatorium, but with the involucrum ovate, or hemispherical, of several se-
ries of loosely imbricated, usually striated scales, the inner scariose, the lower
spreading, with subulate leafy points. Florets ten to fifty. Achenia subcy-
lindric, with ten strie. Pappus pilose, barbellate, or scarcely scabrous. Re-
ceptacle naked.—Leaves opposite, and alternate above. Corolla purple or

white. Flowers corymbose, or clustered.

Section I. Eusrickeni1a.—Involucrum squarrose at base; the scales nith four
prominent stri@ on each.

Brickellia cordifolia, (EuutotT,) leaves opposite, cordate, acuminate, dentate,
triply-nerved, pubescent beneath, above alternate; corolla and pappus more or

less purple; achenia pilose above—Has. In Georgia.

Brickelua grandiflora, leaves alternate, deltoid-cordate, acuminate, incisely
dentate towards the base, entire at the point, smooth on both surfaces, and co-
vered beneath with resinous atoms; flowers in fastigiate clusters, the upper
part of the stem branching; inner scales of the involucrum linear-lanceolate,
acute; pappus white, achenia smooth.—LHupatorium? grandiflorum. Hoox.
Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 26.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, by streams, in gravelly places, and
west, to the lower falls of the Columbia.—Perennial. Stems many from the
same root, about twelve to fifteen inches high. ‘The whole plant almost per-
fectly glabrous. Leaves alternate, sometimes almost opposite, approximate, on
longish petioles, deltoid-cordate, acuminate, coarsely and deeply toothed to-

288 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

wards the base, smooth and green, but shining, with a coating of yellow resi-
nous atoms having a heavy aromatic scent; stem branching above; branches
terminating in corymbulose clusters of subsessile flowers, about five capituli
in each. Florets straw-yellow, inclining to white, cylindric and smooth, the
border connivent. Stigmas exserted, smooth, thicker toward the extremity.
Achenium cylindric, ten-striate. Pappus of a single series of twenty to twenty-
four scabrous hairs. Receptacle naked, flat.

Brickelha * oblongifolia, leaves alternate, oblong-lanceolate, acute, nearly all
entire, scabrous, viscid, and shortly pubescent; stems subdecumbent, branched
above; flowers corymbose, subsessile; inner scales of the involucrum long,
linear, and acute; pappus barbellate, white, twenty to twenty-four rayed.—
Has. Gravel bars of the Columbia and tributary streams, and along the Wah-
lamet, common.

Ozs.—Perennial, viscid, aromatic and heavy-scented; many stems from the
same perennial root, scarcely a foot high. Involucrum at length spreading out
flat, the inner sepals longer than the long, almost plumose, pappus. Lower
sepals lanceolate, a little spreading. Receptacle naked. Achenium cylindric,
ten-striate, somewhat pubescent. F'lorets thirty to forty, yellowish, narrow and
inconspicuous; stigmas but little exserted, thickened at the extremity, and
smooth.—Flowery in August and September. Apparently a species of Clavi-
gera, but the achenium is pubescent, and deeply ten-striate.

NARDOSMIA. (Cassini.)

Nardosmia palmata, leaves reniform-cordate, unequally seven-lobed, incisely
toothed; female liguli minute, stigma bifid. Twusselago palmata, (Atr.)—Has.
Maine.

NN. *Hookeriana, leaves cordate, not very deeply palmately lobed, the divi-
sions angular and toothed, beneath tomentose. NV. palmata! Hooxer. Bor.
Am., Vol. L., p. 308. Wizp. Sp. Pl. 1. ¢., Pursn in part. Dercanp, Vol. V.,
p- 206, not of Aiton. Closely allied, if, mdeed, sufficiently distinct from NV.
corymbosa.

Nardosmia * speciosa, dioecious, flowers and leaves coeval; leaves cordate-reni-
form, cireular, about nine-lobed, not deeply cleft, divisions angularly toothed

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 289

and mucronately denticulate, beneath more or less tomentose; scape tall, with
numerous leaf sheaths; thyrsus many-flowered, smooth.—N. palmata? Hooker.
—Has. Shady forests of the Oregon and Wahlamet, by streams.—May. A
very showy species; easily confounded with the true N. palmata, though
wholly distinct, being a larger plant, with the leaves more numerously lobed,
and not so deeply cleft. Leaves a foot high, six or more inches across, the
outline circular, with denticulations as well as angular indentions. Thyrsus
eighteen inches to two feet high, fastigiate. In the female, the capituli twenty
to twenty-five, large and conspicuous; the liguli white, exserted, very nume-
rous, linear-oblong, the style filiform and undivided! pappus white, moderately
copious.—Quite an ornamental species, with fragrant flowers.

ADENOCAULON. (Hooker.)

Adenocaulon *integrifoium; primary leaves ovate, or subelliptic, the rest
deltoid or subcordate, nearly entire, almost all radical— Has. Shady woods of
the Wahlamet, near its confluence with the Oregon. A smaller species than
the A. bicolor, which it greatly resembles, but the leaves are not lobed, the cor-
date ones only are a little repand at times near the base. Perhaps not suff-
ciently distinct from the A. Chilense.

Tribe II]. ASTEROIDE. (Less.)
Subtribe AsTERINE.

CORETHROGYNE. (Decand.)

Capitulum radiate, many-flowered, the rays sterile, in one series, destitute of
achenium and pappus; discal florets tubular, shortly five-toothed, glandular.
Sepals of the involucrum similar, imbricated in three to five series, more or
less herbaceous and reflected at the points. Receptacle flat, alveolate, and
naked. Branches of the stigma exserted, filiform, terminated by hirsute
tufts of pubescence. Achenium turbinate, silky. Pappus of unequal length,
in several series, scabrous.—Perennial herbaceous plants of Upper California,

tomentose; stems branching; branches one or few-flowered, fastigiate; leaves
Vil.—3 x

290 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

linear entire, the radical and lower ones spathulate, serrate towards the apex.
Liguli conspicuous, purple; disk yellow. Pappus rufous. Allied to Hete-

rotheca, but with the rays neuter, the pappus simple, and the flowers hetero-
chromous.

Corethrogyne *incana., arachnoidly tomentose, leaves oblong-lanceolate, or
linear, acute, amplexicaule, nearly entire; branches slender, one or few flow-
ered, fastigiate; involucrum viscidly pubescent, of about four series of acute
sepals, the lower ones squarrose; rays about twenty, as long as the disk.—
Has. Near St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in May. Rays of a fine,
light bluish purple. Stems numerous, about twelve to eighteen inches long,
very leafy, branching above; branches slender, one to three-flowered; lower
leaves somewhat three-nerved. Capitulum about the size of the common
Daisy; the involucrum viscid, and sometimes the extreme branchlets; sepals
linear-lanceolate. Rays tridentate, without any distinct germ or pappus. C.
Californca? Decanp. Diplopappus incanus, Linp: Aster? tomentellus? (Hoox.
and Arn. Bot. Beechy.) With the heavy aromatic odour of some Gnapha-
hums.

Corethrogyne * filaginifoha, arachnoidly tomentose, radical leaves spathulate,
serrate, those of the stem linear, or spathulate, acute, entire, sessile; branches
one-flowered, fastigiate; involucrum in about three series of lanceolate, very
acute, erect sepals; rays twenty to twenty-four, bidentate, scarcely as long as
the disk. Aster? filaginifolius. Hook. and Arn. Bot. Beech.—Has. Around
St. Barbara, Upper California.

Ozss.—A smaller flowered, more slender species than the preceding, with a
smaller and not viscid involucrum, the leaves more whitely tomentose.—In
neither of these species have we observed any palez on the receptacle, as de-
scribed by Decandolle, and, in consequence, they were referred to Aster by
Hooker and Arnott.

ASTER. (Linn.)

Aster * Andinus, root-stock slender and creeping; stems several, decumbent,
above pubescent, mostly one-flowered; leaves entire, smooth, radical spathu-
late, sublanceolate, cauline sublinear, acute, usually wider at the base and am-
plexicaule; scales of the involucrum linear, nearly smooth and mostly acute,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 291

ciliate; rays numerous, rather long, three-toothed; achenium nearly smooth.—
Has. On the highest summits of the Rocky Mountains, near the line of per-
petual snow, in 42°. About ten thousand feet above the level of the sea. Near
the summit of Thornberg’s Ridge, where we made an ineffectual attempt to
cross the Northern Andes, in August, still deeply buried in snow. Allied ap-
parently to the A. repens of Humboldt and Bonpland.

Root pérennial, creeping, wiry and slender, sending up small clusters of de-
cumbent stems, three or four inches high, each mostly terminating in a single
capitulum, about half the ordinary size of that of A. alpinus. Radical leaves
very smooth, and somewhat coriaceous, rarely with two slight denticulations,
stem leaves three or four, lanceolate-linear, amplexicaule and acute, usually
somewhat ciliate. Capitulum hemispherical, involucrum of two series of nar-
row linear acute, herbaceous sepals, strongly pubescent on the margin, rather
shorter than the disk. Rays feminine, about forty, narrow linear, mostly
three-toothed, purplish-blue. Pappus scarcely scabrous, purplish; the hairs
slender.—F lowering in August. In one specimen the leaves are longer, sub-
lanceolate, slightly serrulate, and the sepals more acute.

Aster *glacialis, stem erect, one-flowered, pubescent above, rather naked;
leaves entire, smooth, somewhat three-nerved, the primary ones spathulate-
oblong, the rest lanceolate, acute, scabrous on the margin, cauline small, very
acute, amplexicaule; involucrum of nearly a simple series of linear, acuminate,
glandularly pubescent, brownish sepals; rays rose-purple, three-toothed; pap-
pus barbellate; achenium pubescent.—Has. With the preceding, which it
much resembles.—Root perennial, not creeping, the stock rather thick and
undivided. Leaves wholly smooth, except the scabrous margin, after the first
spathulate ones, acute, attenuated below; stem often as naked as a scape. The
calix quite viscid; the sepals much acuminated, of an uniform brown and
herbaceous colour, about the length of the disk. Rays oblong, broader and
shorter than in the preceding, about forty, somewhere about equal with the
disk. Pappus paler, much shorter than in the preceding, and distinctly bar-
bellated.

Aster *integrifolius, stem pubescent, simple, erect, and with the involucrum
glutinous above; leaves entire, radical lanceolate, long petiolate, all acute; cau-
line oblong-lanceolate, scabrous, pubescent on the margin, dilated and amplex-

292 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

icaule at the base; capituli large, subcorymbose, about three to five, on short
and nearly naked peduncles; involucrum loosely imbricated, sepals nearly
equal, linear-lanceolate, acute, somewhat spreading; achenium rather villous.—
An alpine species growing with the above, but at a lower elevation. Root
creeping; stem robust, about a foot high; terminating in a short raceme, or
small corymb, glutinous pubescent above, as well as the sepals, which are
leafy. Lower leaves spathulate-lanceolate; those on the stem few and rather
remote, the lowest nearly half a foot long, the uppermost scarcely an inch, and
cordate-lanceolate, amplexicaule; one or two small leaves on the peduncle,
which is scarcely an inch long; leaves of the involucrum about equal with the
disk, about two series. Rays bluish-purple, as long as the disk, fifteen to
twenty-five, the terminal capitulum much larger. Pappus brownish, scabrous,
rather long and abundant.—F lowering in August. Evidently allied to Pursh’s
A. peregrinus, but the stem is pubescent below and viscid above, and the leaves
amplexicaule.

+

Aster * pauciflorus. Involucrum hemispherical, sepals very viscid, acumi-
nate, nearly equal, about two series, foliaceous, and somewhat spreading;
rays few, pale purple. A genuine alpigenous Aster, no Tripolium. Alhed
to the preceding, but a small, slender plant. Tripolum pauciflorum, (NEES.)
—In the Herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia.

Aster * denudatus, stem erect, at length almost scapiform, pubescent above;
radical leaves lanceolate or spathulate, rarely subdenticulate, smooth and cori-
aceous, scabrous on the margin, ciliate at base; stem leaves very small, linear-
lanceolate, amplexicaule; branchlets usually one-flowered, fastigiate, forming
a wide corymb; involucrum short, imbricate, outer sepals foliaceous, oblong,
obtuse, the inner somewhat acute; achenium nearly smooth, acute at base.—
Has. In arid and dry grassy plains in the Rocky Mountains, near Lewis’
River, about latitude 42°, not uncommon. Root creeping. Stem twelve to
sixteen inches high, clothed more or less to the base with small leaves; branches
of the corymb elongated, leafy, mostly one-flowered, margins of the leaves very
rough, ciliate with minute hooked bristles; radical leaves mostly lanceolate, on
the suckers spathulate and obtuse. Capituli about the size of those of Erzge-
ron alpinum. Involucrum shorter than the disk. Rays rose-purple, thirty
to forty. Pappus bright brown, scabrous. Achenium compressed, a little
pubescent, almost stipitate at the base! .

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 293

G. * cithatifolius, leaves distinctly ciliated, stem not denuded and scapiform,
leaves more proportionate, upper part of the stem pubescent; sepals of the in-
volucrum similar, brownish, ciliate and subacute.

Has. With the above; probably a distinct species, but my specimens are not satisfactory.

Aster ramulosus. inp. in Hooker, Flor. Bor. Am. II., p. 13. Common
in the Rocky Mountain region, along the plains of Lewis’ River. Flowers
pale purple. Radical leaves lanceolate, entire, attenuated into long petioles.
It bears not the most distant affinity with A. brennis, (A. encanus, Pu.,) which,
in fact, resembles Amellus more than Aster, and constitutes a distinct genus.

Aster * campestris, somewhat minutely and viscidly pubescent, leaves linear-
oblong, subacute, entire and amplexicaule, obscurely three-nerved, radical,
lanceolate serrulate; capituli in narrow racemose panicles, the branches mostly
one-flowered; involucrum spreading, viscid, the sepals linear and very acute.

Has. With the above, which it closely resembles, but differs in being every where somewhat
pubescent and viscid, with a strong scent, and particularly in the distinctly veined, serrulate
radical leaves, and the obtuse, instead of the attenuated extremities of the stem leaves. Stem about

a foot high. Achenia nearly smooth; pappus brownish, scabrous.

Aster * bracteolatus, stem pulverulently pubescent, leaves linear or oblong-
linear, acute and sessile, entire, radical... .; flowers racemosely paniculate,
branches leafy, mostly one-flowered; involucrum smooth and leafy, spreading;

sepals oblong, somewhat acute, the lower series similar with the branch leaves.
Haz. With the above, to which it is nearly allied, but remarkable by the smooth leaf-like invo-
lucrum. The radical leaves are unknown; flowers lilac-purple, rather large. Stem and branches

much more leafy than in the two preceding; the leaves nearly all similar.—July.

Aster Douglas. Common in inundated tracts, and along the low banks of
the Columbia and Wahlamet. Scarcely distinct from some of the varieties of
A. Novi-Belgii, or A. luxurians, though in a large collection, that of the Schwei-
nitzian Herbarium, I find nothing exactly similar.—F lowering in August and
September.

Aster * asperrimus, minutely hairy and very rough; stem elongated, subde-
cumbent, terminating in a few-flowered corymb; leaves entire, nearly similar,
oblong, obtuse, amplexicaule, lower ones spathulate; branches long and leafy,
the lateral one-flowered; the capituli large; involucrum loosely imbricate,
squarrose; rays elongated; achenium pubescent.

Vil.—3 Y

294 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. In Georgia, (Dr. Baldwin and Leconte,) near Chapel-Hill, North Carolina, (Schweinitz.)
—A remarkably distinct species, diffusely subdecumbent, with slender wiry stems and branchlets,
terminating in one or a few (three to five) large capituli, very similar to those of 4. surculosus,
near which it ought to range. Exceedingly rough, (particularly when dry,) with minute, tubercu-
late, hooked bristles. Rays large, and of a purplish-blue. ‘The imner leaves of the involucrum

somewhat viscid at the tips.

Aster * amethystinus, pubescent; stem usually erect, villous, racemosely pani-
culate, many-flowered, branchlets subfastigiate; leaves entire, lanceolate-linear,
acute, auricularly dilated and amplexicaule at base; involucrum loose, or squar-
rose, the sepals acute or acuminate; achenium villous; rays numerous, azure.

Has. In Massachusetts, near Cambridge and Salem; rare. A well marked and ornamental spe-
cies, somewhat allied to 4. graveolens, intimately to 4. Nove-Angliz, but from which it is en-

tirely distinct, the flowers not half the size, pale blue, very numerous, and disposed in a panicle, &c.

Aster graveolens, suffruticose, divaricately branched, minutely and viscidly
pubescent; leaves oblong-lanceolate, amplexicaule, entire, very acute, radical
ones narrowed at the base; branches usually one-flowered, fastigiate; involu-
erum squarrose, loose, leafy; sepals linear-lanceolate, acuminate; achenium

smooth, ten-ribbed.
Has. On shelving rocks, near the banks of the Arkansa; also on the banks of Kentucky River,

near Lexington, (Dr. Short.) On comparing the plants anew, I find the present and following

from Missouri, distinct species.

Aster oblongifolius, herbaceous, stem, and linear-oblong, obtuse leaves mi-
nutely scabrous, amplexicaule; stem divaricate, flowers fastigiate; involucrum
foliaceous, loose; sepals linear-oblong, acute.

Has. Banks of the Missouri, in arid, argillaceous and denudated places. Not viscid or strong-

scented, as in the preceding, to which, at the same time, it is much allied.

Aster *Sayianus, stem simple, terminating in a leafy corymb, above, and
branchlets with the involucrum glandularly pubescent; leaves crowded, lanceo-
late, acuminate, distantly serrulate, amplexicaule, and scabrous on the margin,
those of the branchlets ovate, entire; sepals of the involucrum spreading, nearly
equal, acuminate; capitulum hemispherical, the rays blue; achenium smooth,

ten-striate.
Has. In the forests of the Rocky Mountains and the Oregon plains. Nearly allied to 2. mo-
destus, and proximately to 2. Nove-Angliz.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 295

Oxss.—About a foot high; stem below minutely pubescent. Leaves about three inches long,
less than an inch wide, scabrous towards the margin, elsewhere nearly smooth and rather shining.
The corymb composed of fastigiate, mostly one-flowered, (sometimes two or three,) leafy branch-
lets; occasionally, from luxuriance, the branchlets are more compound, producing a rather irregular
corymb; the points of the leaves long, and very acute; sepals about two series, nearly equal, her-
baceous and viscid. Rays styliferous, rather numerous and narrow, pale blue. Pappus whitish,
moderate, scarcely scabrous. Achenium almost perfectly smooth, compressed, ten-striate. This

species has much the habit of a Galatella.

Aster * cihatus, branches one-flowered, fastigiate ; leaves entire, linear-oblong,
acute, above lanceolate, very scabrous and ciliated on the margin, above nearly
smooth, beneath minutely hairy and hirsute; involucrum foliaceous; leaflets

lanceolate, very acute, margined with long cilize; achenium smooth.
Has. In Louisiana, v. s., in Mr. Durand’s herbarium, of Philadelphia. Closely allied to 4.
montanus, with the same achenium, but the upper leaves lanceolate, and the pubescence at vari-

ance with the section to which it belongs.

TRIPOLIUM. (Nees.)

With the flower of Astrr, but the involucrum erect, of two unequal series of
oblong or ovate, obtuse, short sepals. Achenium compressed, margined,
nearly smooth, without strie, with a minute basal circle of bristles, Flow-
ers corymbose. Oxss.—To this genus, properly restricted, nothing yet be-

longs but the T. vulgare. (Aster Tripohum, Liv.)

Subgenus (or, perhaps, more properly a section of Aster.) *ASTROPOLIUM.

With the flower of Aster. Sepals of the involucrum mostly subulate, or
acute, imbricated loosely in several unequal series, more or less herbaceous.
Pappus slender, scarcely scabrous. Achenium nearly smooth, compressed,
four or five striate-—Smooth, divaricately branching herbs, mostly with entire,
narrow, or subulate, somewhat fleshy leaves. Growing commonly in saline
soils or alluvial grounds.

Tripohum flexuosum, sepals lanceolate, subulate, very acute, scariose, erect;

stem low and flexuous, stem leaves subulate.
Has. Along the sea coast, New Jersey, &c.

296 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Tripolium * Oregonum, stem rather tall, flexuous, and divaricately branched ;
cauline leaves long, linear, sublanceolate, nearly equal, acute, entire, scabrous
on the margin; sepals linear-lanceolate, imbricate, slightly acute, herbaceous;
rays narrow.

Has. On the inundated banks of the Wahlamet; flowers very inconspicuous, somewhat fas-

tigiate.

Tripolium *divaricatum, stem rather naked, slenderly and divaricately
branched; radical leaves spathulate, or lanceolate, subdenticulate; stem leaves
above, very short and subulate, clasping; sepals subulate, acuminate, scariose,
imbricate, and somewhat equal; achenium smooth, with four strie.

Has. Inundated banks of the Mississippi, and in Louisiana, not uncommon. Very smooth, the
radical leaves thick, flowers rather conspicuous, rays blue. Remarkable for its divaricate and

naked branches. A plant very similar occurs on the coast of Cuba.

Tripolium * occidentale, stem nearly simple, few-flowered, flowers large and
corymbose; leaves all linear, subulate amplexicaule, here and there incisely
serrate; involucrum loosely imbricate; sepals subulate, subherbaceous, nearly
equal; rays as long as the disk, (pale blue;) achenium nearly smooth, scarcely
striate, compressed.

Has. By the margins of muddy ponds in the Rocky Mountains, seven thousand feet above the
level of the sea. Root creeping, slender; stem slender, four inches to a foot high, often only one
or two-flowered, seldom more than five or six. Leaves long and narrow, linear, entire, or with
one or two pair of deep, incise serratures, almost approacing to a pinnatifid division; branchlets
slender, one-flowered. The flower as large as a daisy, with a simple series of pale blue, or pink
rays. An alpine species, approaching the true Tripolium in the fruit being almost destitute of

striation.

Tripohum * frondosum, stem much branched, leaves linear, entire, amplexi-
caule, rather obtuse; capituli fastigiate; sepals linear-oblong, loose and leafy,
rather obtuse; rays numerous, very small and slender; achenium nearly smooth,
about four-striate.

Haz. By muddy ponds in the Rocky Mountains, near Lewis’ River of the Shoshonee; rare.
Growing partly in the water and mud. Apparently biennial, succulent, with very inconspicuous

flowers, and an entirely leafy, nearly equal involucrum of about two series of leaflets.

Tripohum subulatum. Allied to the preceding by its numerous small rays.
Achenium slightly pubescent, compressed, with five strie.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 297

Tripolum conspicuum, also comes in this section; remarkable for the great
inequality of the sepals, which are coloured at the tips. Achenium scarcely
compressed, pubescent, very slenderly five-striate.

Tripohum *imbricatum; like the preceding, but with the long, linear, am-
plexicaule leaves distantly serrulate; branches somewhat corymbose; involu-
crum turbinate, closely imbricated in four series of acute, oblong sepals, pale
below, and coloured or herbaceous at the tips; rays narrow and short. Ache-

nium subcylindric, five-striate.
Has. In Chili, near Valparaiso, (Dr. Styles.) Allied to the preceding, but with a very differ-

ent involucrum and much larger capitulum.

* XYLORHIZA.

Capitulum radiate, rays feminine, fertile, the liguli in one series, rather large,
toothed at the point; florets of the disk five-toothed, hermaphrodite, fertile.
Apex of the stigma conic-lanceolate, narrowed. Involucrum widely hemi-
spherical, sepals nearly equal, herbaceous, imbricated loosely in two series,
acuminated, the inner ones with membranaceous margins. Receptacle flat,
alveolate. Achenia subterete, silky, not marginated. Pappus of several se-
ries, unequal, scabrous.—Herbaceous subalpine plants, with woody roots,
sending out numerous dwarf, simple stems, terminating in one, or a small
corymb of large flowers. Leaves linear, entire; disk yellow. Ligule rose-
coloured, or pale purple.—(So called from gvA0y, wood, and pigor, a root. The
root only being woody.)

Oxss.—Allied to Calimeris, which it represents, differing somewhat in habit,
and wholly in the fruit. From Aplopappus it differs in its heterochromous
flowers, and more slender, not paleaceous pappus, as well as in habit.

Aylorhiza * glabriuscula; base of the stem and primary leaves only pubes-
cent; leaves oblong-linear, or lanceolate-linear, acute, coriaceous; peduncles
solitary or corymbose, three to five; sepals lanceolate, much acuminated.

Has. In arid, argillaceous tracts in the Rocky Mountains, and on rocks toward the sources of
the Platte. Flowers large, the rays pale rose-colour. Root thick and stout, woody, sending up
elusters of low, simple stems, terminating in one to five flowers; leaves about two inches long, two

VII.—3 Z

-

298 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

lines wide; rays oblong, slightly three-toothed; peduncles short and naked. Stem about a span

high. Pappus bright brown, barbellated.

Xylorhiza * villosa, softly villous; leaves oblong-linear or sublanceolate, mu-
cronulate; stem mostly one-flowered ; sepals of the involucrum lanceolate, very
acute, nearly all equal; flowers large.

Has. With the above, but less abundant. Very similar to the preceding; root equally large and
woody. Flower as large as that of the garden marygold. Rays wide, and longer much than the
disk, pale red. Involucrum pubescent, nearly equal. A showy plant, well deserving of cultiva-

tion. Achenia very silky, as in the preceding.

* HUCKPHALUS.

Capitulum radiate, styliferous rays, fertile; liguli of one series (seven to fifteen ; )
hermaphrodite florets of the disk fertile. Stigma slender, filiform, acumi-
nate, nearly smooth. Involucrum ovate, imbricate, of three or four series of
nearly similar ovate, carinated scales. Receptacle flat, alveolate, fimbrillate.
Achenia angular, pubescent (or smooth in C. alba.) Pappus about two se-
ries, scabrous, simple and clavellate-—Herbaceous perennials with nearly
simple stems, the summit, or the fastigiate branches, corymbose. Leaves
entire, the radical rarely serrulate. Disk yellow. Liguli pale purple or
white.—Plants with the habit of Galatella, and the pappus of Sericocarpus.

(The name alludes to the elegant appearance of the calyx.)

+ Achenia pubescent, flovers purplish.

Eucephalus * elegans; minutely scabrous; stem attenuated; leaves all entire,
linear-lanceolate, sessile, acute, the lower three-nerved; flowers in a short, un-
equal, contracted corymb; sepals purplish, ovate, acute, one-nerved, pubescent
on the margin; rays purplish, about six or seven.

Has. Oregon plains and the Blue Mountains of the west. Flowering from September to Octo-
ber.—A very elegant species, with a stout ligneous root, sending up a cluster of simple stems, two
to three feet high, thickly clad with erect leaves, becoming smaller towards the summit, one to two
inches long, by a quarter to half an inch wide, scabrous towards the margin; branchlets about an
inch long, one-flowered; capituli eight to twelve in number. Involucrum of four series of very
elegant, purplish, ovate, acute, appressed, carinated scales, conspicuously pubescent along the

margin. Rays three-toothed, about six to seven, rather narrow and distant, pale purple; tubular

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 299

florets fifteen to twenty. Pappus exserted beyond the involucrum, as long as the florets, of two
kinds, one bristly, the other clavellate, or wider towards the extremity. Receptacle alveolate,

alveole with elevated, lacerated margins, much more distinctly so than in any Sericocarpus.

t t Achenia smooth, flowers white.

Eucephalus albus, leaves lanceolate linear, scabrous on the margin, remote, en-
tire, radical ones denticulate, lanceolate; corymb few-flowered; rays fourteen
to fifteen, white.—Chrysopsis alba, Nutr. Gen. Am., Vol. IL., p. 152. Hele-
astrum album, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 264. Certainly not a congener with H.
paludosum, which (notwithstanding the variation of pappus) is a true Aster.
Involucrum of three series of greenish carinated scales.

+ ¢ ¢ * Lacarea.—lInner scales of the involucrum longer; pappus scarcely
clavellate.

Eucephalus glaucus; smooth and glaucous; leaves linear-oblong, acute, sub-
amplexicaule, entire; stem branching above; flowers racemose, corymbose;

scales of the involucrum oblong-ovate, obtuse.

Has. Towards the sources of the Platte, and in the Rocky Mountains. Rays purplish, nar-
row, about fourteen. Pappus slender, nearly or wholly equal; tubular florets, about fifteen to
twenty. Flowers fastigiate, but sometimes racemose on the branchlets. Stem twelve to eighteen
inches high. Leaves two to three inches long, smooth and somewhat coriaceous, reticulately
veined, a little scabrous on the margin, less than half an inch wide. Scales of the involucrum

about three series, the innermost longer, thin and acute.

Eucephalus *ericoides; a small alpine, cespitose plant, canescently hirsute and
glandular, with appressed short hairs; leaves subulate, minute, channelled, ci-
late and acute, almost imbricately approximate, erect; branching from the

base, branches one-flowered ; rays white, about fifteen; achenia smooth.

Haz. Towards the summit of the Rocky Mountains. Collected by Dr. James. Jnula? eri-
coides, Torrey, Lyceum Nat. Hist., N. York, 1. c. Chrysopsis ericoides, Eaton’s Manual, |. c.
About four or five inches high, with leaves about the size of those of Juniperus virginiana, and
nearly as much imbricated as the younger leaves of that tree, about a line long and half a line wide,
white, with appressed hairs, nearly smooth on the upper side and pointed with a bristle, the lower
ones strongly ciliate. Involucrum ovate, campanulate, imbricated in two unequal series of appressed,
lanceolate, acute scales, membranous on the margin. Rays apparently white, or purplish, with
exserted, filiform, smooth stigmas. Stigma in the discal florets pubescent. Pappus of rather few.

scarcely scabrous, slender white rays. No double pappus.

300 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
*DIETERIA.

Flower radiate, rays styliferous, fertile? liguli one or two series, broadish, those
of the disk hermaphrodite, fertile. Stigma filiform, hirsute and exserted.
Sepals of the involucrum, for the most part, closely imbricated in two to four
series, scariose and carinate, the tips usually reflected and herbaceous. Re-
ceptacle flat or convex, alveolate, the alveole deep, with toothed and lace-
rated margins. Achenium obovate, subcylindric, ten to fifteen striate, pubes-
cent. Pappus of several series, scabrous and unequal, that of the ray shorter
and less copious.—Annual or biennial, (in one anomalous species perennial, )
divaricately branching herbs, more or less pubescent; leaves nearly entire,
incisely serrate or pinnatifid, the points often pungently mucronulate. Flow-
ers fastigiate. ‘The disk yellow. Liguli red or purple.—Allied to Aster,
but with the involucrum regular; the achenia convex, distinctly striate
when ripe; the receptacle deeply alveolate; the pappus of the ray different
from that of the disk; the leaves incise or pinnatifid, and the duration only
to the first period of flowering. ‘They are also allied to the first section of
Heterotheca by the deficient pappus of the ray, but that of the disk is simple,

and the rays are purple. The whole plant bitter to the taste.—(So called
from their biennial duration. )

+ Involucrum subovate, of three or four series of scales.

Dieteria canescens; leaves entire, linear, sessile, radical spathulate; stem low
and much branched, canescently villous, as well as the involucrum; flowers
fastigiate ; rays about eighteen to twenty; pappus very slender.

Has. On the denuded banks of the Missouri. .@ster canescens, Pursu, Bor. Am., Vol. IL., p.
547. Not in the least allied to Aster multiflorus. 4. biennis, Nutr. Gen, Am., Vol. II., p. 155.

1 doubt if the leaves are always entire, a fact so contrary to all the rest of the genus to which it is,
in all other respects, so intimately allied.

Dieteria * pulverulenta; minutely pubescent, leaves linear sessile, below here
and there incisely serrulate, above entire; stem divaricate; flowers fastigiate,

upon rather naked branchlets; involucrum almost hemispherical; rays eight to
twelve.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 301

Has. Arid plains towards the sources of the Platte. Rays short, pale purple, obscurely toothed,
almost entire. Nearly allied to the preceding. Scales of the involucrum about three series, acute.

Dieteria * diwaricata; pulverulently pubescent, radical leaves spathulate or
lanceolate, repandly and incisely serrate, above smaller, linear, sessile and
nearly entire; stem divaricate, branchlets subracemose, or one or two flowered,
fastigiate; sepals about four series, reflected; rays twelve to sixteen, about as
long as the disk.

Has. Denudated plains of the Rocky Mountains, and Oregon, common. Rays short, pale blue
or purple. Pappus fulvous or white, (the white shorter and less copious, perhaps the mark of a
different species;) branches rather naked, with small leaves spreading out into a compound corymb.

About a foot high.

Dieteria * viscosa; pulverulently pubescent, and more or less glandular and
viscid; leaves all linear or lanceolate-linear, pinnatifidly or incisely serrate, acu-
minate, uppermost entire, sessile; stems simple, racemosely and corymbosely
branched; scales of the involucrum acute, reflected at the tips, imbricated
closely and equally in about five series; rays eighteen to twenty, about as long
as the disk.

Has. With the above, particularly near Scott’s Bluff, on the Platte. Rays longer than in the
preceding, purple. Stem simple, attenuated, often very viscid, and exhaling the strong, heavy
scent of Aster graveolens or Gnaphalium Americanum. Scales of the involucrum very numerous,
lanceolate, acute. Leaves sometimes nearly pinnatifid or runcinate. Pappus fulvous, that of the
discal florets about thirty-five to forty unequal rays, that of the radial female florets much shorter,

of about twenty-four rays.

Dieteria * sessiliflora; viscidly pubescent; stem simple, flowers sessile, in ax-
illary and terminal clusters; leaves linear or sublanceolate, incise or subpinna-
tifid, acutely acuminate, sessile; sepals in about four series; rays ochroleucous,
twelve to fifteen, about the length of the disk.

Has. With the above. About a foot high, stem mostly unbranched, scales of the involucrum
very glutinous. Nearly allied to 4plopappus spinulosus, (Decanp.) to which I applied the name_
of Sideranthus in Fraser’s catalogue ; that plant is, however, perennial. Closely allied to the pre-

ceding species, but differing much in the pale yellow rays; the pappus of the rays is, also, nearly
equal with that of the discal florets. Flowers smaller than in any of the preceding.

t + Root perenmal. Flowers wholly yellow. (SiDERANTHUS.)

Dieteria spinulosa. Aplopappus spinulosus. Decanp. Vol. V., p. 347. This spe-
vil.—4 A

302 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

cies, though with yellow flowers, ought to find place in this genus, rather than
the polymorphous one of Aplopappus, to which it is not allied.

Subgenus.—Pappocuroma. Annual or biennial. Capitulum hemispherical.
Receptacle nearly naked. Involucrum loosely imbricated, of about three
series of nearly equal, narrow sepals, spreading towards the points. Pappus
of the disk and ray equal. Achenium obovate, villous, with fifteen strie.

Rays purple, longer than the wide disk. Leaves pinnatifid and bipinnatifid.

Dieteria *coronopifolia; pubescent and viscid, branching from the base,
branches fastigiate one-flowered; lower leaves bipinnatifid, the upper pinna-
tifid. Chrysopsis coronopifoha, Nutr., in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol.
VIL, p. 34.

Has. From the Platte to the sources of the Missouri, and throughout the Rocky Mountain tract,
in arid, denudated places, by streams. Flowering from July to August. A very showy and orna-
mental plant, with hemispherical heads nearly as large as the garden marigold. Sepals linear-
lanceolate, acuminate, nearly equal, scarious and cartilaginous towards the base. Rays eighteen
to twenty, wide and long, of a fine red purple. Achenia turgid, rather large; stem about a foot
high, somewhat spreading.

SERICOCARPUS. (Nees.)

Ozss.—Pappus unequal, scabrous, the longer rays clavellate. Liguli short
and few.

Sericocarpus rigidus. (3. *levicauls, leaves cuneate-oblong, or spathulate ;
rays shorter than the pappus.

Has. Round Fort Vancouver, common. Leaves usually obtuse.

Sericocarpus * Oregonensis; leaves lanceolate-oblong, entire, and, as well as
the involucrum, glandular beneath, above scabrous; stem smooth, corymb com-
pound; inner scales of the involucrum acute; rays longer than the pappus.

Has. With the above, which it much resembles, but appears taller and stouter. Stem attenu-
ated. Pappus distinctly scabrous, the inner row obviously clavellate, less distinctly so in 8. rigz-
dus. The discal florets are also exserted beyond the pappus. Stigmas filiform, acute, nearly
smooth, glandular. In both these species the pappus is unusually long and silky white.

Sericocarpus Collinsii. With the whole aspect and pubescence of S. torte-
folius, but the leaves cuneate and serrate at the summit. Scales of the invo-
lucrum fewer. Aster Collinsii, Nurr. ast Florida. (Mr. Ware.)

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 303

Oss.—AsTER gracilis is a true Aster, nearly allied, indeed, to A. surculo-
sus and A. spectabils. The receptacle is naked, the achenium nearly smooth,
with five striz, scarcely, however, compressed; the pappus, pale brown, is sca-
brous, but not thickened. The floral rays are long and blue; the involucrum
at length somewhat squarrose.

HELEASTRUM, (notwithstanding the slight difference of pappus,) ought, I
think, to be reunited with Aster. The achenium is quite similar to that of
Aster gracilis, to which section, and A. surculosus, it evidently belongs.

Biotia. We have but two well marked species. Of B. corymbosa I have
seen two varieties, which insensibly lose themselves in each other, on an ex-
tensive comparison, in nature as well as in the herbarium. The B. commizxta
is the corymbosa, when grown in dry or rocky situations; in moist grounds the
heart-shaped leaves are best developed. ‘The lowest leaves in B. commuzta are
also cordate.

The B. glomerata appears to be a species, though it approaches B. commizta.
In the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia it is
marked by Mr. Schweinitz under the name of Aster thyrsodeus, and was ob-
tained near Bethlehem, in Pennsylvania. It is distinguished by the shortness
of the rays and the brevity of the. pappus.

GALATELLA. (Cassini.)

§ *CaLianTHus.—Liguli in one series, styliferous, elongated; discal florets
tubular, five-toothed, hermaphrodite. Receptacle naked, flat, and punc-
tate. Involucrum short, imbricated, sepals unequal, herbaceous, narrow
and acute, in about three series. Stigmas exserted, clavate, pubescent, in
the ray filiform. Achenium obovate, subcylindric, smooth and glandular,
with seven to eight strong strie, or ribs; pappus copious, slightly scabrous.—
Perennial plants of wet marshes, more or less scabrous; leaves entire, lanceo-
late, crowded, glandular punctate; corymb of few flowers, the branchlets
almost naked, like peduncles and squamose, the scales gradually passing into
those which compose the very regular involucrum. Rays lilac or reddish.—

Nearly allied, in habit to Diplopappus. hnariefolius, less so to Aster, from

304 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

which the achenium differs; also to Calotheca, but wholly different in the
involucrum and pappus. Of the true Galatella we have no species. In our

section the flowers are larger, fewer, and scarcely corymbose.

Galatella nemorals, Nees. Ast. 173. Dercanp. Prod., Vol. V., p. 257. @.
rubella, smoother, with narrower leaves, a pink red flower, and a white pappus.
Haz. In sphagnose swamps, from New England to Canada. 8. Quaker Bridge, New Jersey.

Flowering in September.

Galatella gramumfola. Hook. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 15. Aster gra-
minifolius, Pursu, Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II, p. 545. Ihave not had an op-
portunity of examining this plant, but, from its near affinity to the preceding,
believe it to belong to the present section.

DIPLOPAPPUS.

Diplopappus alpinus; cespitose and low; stems simple, one-flowered, villous,
many from the same root; leaves sessile, erect, crowded, entire, oblong, apicu-
late, scabrous, with a cartilaginous margin; upper part of the stem terminating
in a naked peduncle; involucrum villous; scales very acute; rays numerous,
longer than the disk. Chrysopsis alpina, Nurr. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad., Vol. VIL., p. 34.

Has. In dry prairies along the borders of Flat-Head River, in the Rocky Mountains. Flower-
ing in June. A very elegant and distinct alpine species, still proximately allied to D. linarizfo-
lius, of which it has the purple flower. Stems three to four inches high. Flowers large. Leaves
oblong and linear-oblong, smooth, but very scabrous, rigid. Involucrum rather short and loose, of
about three series of linear-lanceolate, appressed scales, membranaceous on the margin. Pappus

scabrous, copious, the external crown white. Achenia silky villous.

TOWNSENDIA. (Hooker.)

Tonnsendia sericea; cespitose; leaves narrow linear, acute, scarcely half a
line wide, canescently sericeous; capituli sessile on the caudex; scales of the
involucrum numerous, very narrow and acuminate.—Achenium as in the rest
of the genus, obovate, margined, and flatly compressed, sericeous, with a nu-
merous connate series of white, silky pappus, almost plumosely barbellate, and
remarkably attenuated above.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 305

Has. On the Black Hills, (an alpine chain toward the sources of the Platte.) Flowering pro-
bably in April. By the achenium, this genus makes some approach to Calimeris, though totally
unlike in habit.

Townsendia *incana; whitely canescent; many-stemmed, cespitose; leaves
linear-spathulate, somewhat acute, scales of the involucrum lanceolate, ciliate ;
pappus of the rays short.

Has. With the above. Flowering in June. Stem very short, depressed and dichotomous.
Flowers sessile. Rays pale lilac. Florets numerous. Pappus of about twenty-four almost plu-
mose rays, connected together in a ring, broad below, and attenuated gradually above. Rays about
twelve; three-toothed, with a short, nearly equal, barbellate pappus, similar to that of the herma-
phrodite florets, except its shorter length. Stigmas of the rays slender, filiform, smooth, of the
tubular slightly five-toothed discal florets included, lanceolate, a little hirsute, (as in ster.) Ache-
nium flat and margined, thinly clothed with glandular hairs.

Subgenus.—* URoPHoRUS.

Pappus of the rays and disk equal, acuminate, and plumosely barbellate, connected
into a ring above the base, deciduous.—Perhaps a genus?

Townsendia * spathulata; cespitose, many-stemmed, canescently and softly
tomentose; leaves spathulate obtuse; scales of the involucrum lanceolate-oblong,
fimbriate.

Has. With the above. Perennial, like all the preceding, also equally cespitose, with the
leaves in dense clusters, forming circular tufts; the flowers, also, equally solitary and sessile. The
whole dwarf plant has much the aspect of the one-flowered variety of Gnaphalium supinum; flow-
ers very inconspicuous; the capitulum almost imbedded in the clustered leaves. The leaves are
broader than in the preceding, the liguli but little longer than the pappus, and scarcely exserted
beyond the involucrum. Achenia oblanceolate, margined, slightly pubescent on the disk, and usu-
ally naked by the escape of the deciduous pappus, which is not the case in any of the preceding.
Though the habit is wholly similar, the present plant probably constitutes an allied genus. By
the pappus and achenium this small tribe of AstrroipE% seem to approach the CarDUINES.

Subgenus.—* N anop1a.t

With the rays infertile or neuter, flat and exserted, usually three-toothed.
Pappus of the infertile ray very short, even; that of the discal florets scarcely

deciduous. Receptacle flat, alveolate-punctate, fimbrillate. Achenium com-

t In allusion to its dwarf appearance.
Vil.—4 B

306 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

pressed, flat, oblanceolate, marginate, the disk glandularly pubescent.—
Dwarf alpine annuals, with depressed, divaricate stems, branching from the
base. Strigosely and canescently pubescent; leaves linear, entire. Flowers
sessile, terminal, somewhat corymbose, large for the size of the plant. Invo-
lucrum imbricate, scales lanceolate, membranous on the margin, which is
lacerately ciliate. Rays longer than the disk, lilac, or rose-purple. Some-

times presenting a rudimentary style, but the achenium always imperfect.

Tonnsendia * strigosa; stem depressed, branching from the base; flowers
fastigiate, subcorymbose; leaves linear-spathulate, much attenuated below; se-
pals lanceolate-ovate.

Has. On the Black Hills, (or eastern chain of the Rocky Mountains,) near the banks of the
Platte.—Flowering in June. Rather softly strigose, with short, appressed, whitish hairs. From
two to four inches high, the branches spreading, dividing usually into a sort of leafy corymb of
sessile flowers, from one to five on a forked branch. Capitulum the size of the common daisy,
with much the aspect of an Aster, but the sepals all erect, closely imbricated, broadly membranous
and lacerate on the margin. Rays twelve to fourteen, rose-red; discal florets pale yellow. Stigmas

acuminate, somewhat pubescent, scarcely at all exserted.

Tonwnsendia * grandiflora; stem canescent, divaricately branching from the
base, branches one or few-flowered, leaves linear-sublanceolate, very acute,
nearly smooth, or minutely pubescent, green; capitulum hemispherical; invo-
lucrum of three series, the sepals lanceolate, filiformly acuminate, minutely

fringed; rays twenty-eight to thirty, or more, bidentate.

Haz. With the preceding, which it resembles wholly in habit, but with the flower as large
nearly as that of the China Aster, (Callistephus Chinensis.) Branching from the base, and spread-
ing out sometimes from six to ten inches along the ground. Leaves linear, much attenuated below,
and very acute, when green rather succulent, and appearing smooth, though somewhat pubescent
beneath, (seen through a glass.) Sepals elegantly imbricated, perfectly lanceolate, much acumi-
nated, scariose, except the centre, which is green, the margin minutely lacerate-ciliate. Rays pale

lilac, longer than the disk.—A plant which well deserves cultivation, from its large, showy flowers.

ERIGERON. (Linn.)

§. Pappus mostly single, or ith the external, very minute, rays numerous.

Erigeron glabellum.—Rocky Mountain plains. Radical leaves sometimes
more or less serrate. Pappus rather long and persistent, single, of about twenty-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 307

four slightly scabrous rays. Capituli sometimes as many as nine. The pe-
duncles and upper part of the stem, from the smallness of the leaves, appearing
almost naked. More or less puberulous.

Erigeron purpureum.—Oregon and Upper California, common.

GB. *attenuatum; stem elongated and slender towards the top, very hairy at
base; radical leaves spathulate-lanceolate, dentate; flowers white, the rays not
much longer than the disk.

Haz. In Oregon and Arkansas Territory. Flowers white, and smaller than in £. purpureum,

the whole plant more hairy. Perhaps a species.

Erigeron pumilum.
Has. Rocky Mountains of the Platte. Stems one to four-flowered, heads fastigiate. Pappus

single, of about twenty rays.

Erigeron *bellidiastrum, ©; stem leafy, corymbosely branched, hirsute; leaves
entire, linear-oblong, sessile, scabrous on the margin, attenuated below, the
radical ones slender; involucrum hemispherical, sepals lanceolate acute; rays
about the length of the disk.

Has. On the borders of the Platte, within the Rocky Mountains. About a foot high, the leaves
thickish and rather smooth, one to two inches long, two to four lines wide. Rays pale red, about
as numerous as in the common daisy, rather short. Pappus simple, very deciduous, of about ten
rays! ‘The natural situation of this species is in the section Olygotrichium, but the pappus is
simple; and hence it appears that the pappus does not define the natural limits either in this or

many other genera of Composit.

Evigeron *cespitosum; cespitose, hirsute, and almost canescent with short
hairs; stems decumbent, many from the same root, mostly one-flowered; leaves
linear-sublanceolate, somewhat obtuse, those on the stem sessile, all entire; se-
pals lanceolate acute; rays longer than the disk; achenium elongated, smooth.

Has. On the summits of dry hills in the Rocky Mountain range, on the Colorado of the West.
Flowering in August. Nearly allied to 2. Andicola. Equally hirsute, with close white hairs.
Leaves about one and a half to two inches long by two lines wide, those of the root clustered; on
the slender low stems few; stems occasionally two-flowered; involucrum short and hirsute. Rays
forty to fifty, rather wide, often three-toothed, white or pale rose. Pappus simple, of about twenty
scabrous, slender bristles. An alpine species, with the flower as large as a daisy.

308 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

§. + Rays of the capitulum not very numerous, pappus mostly simple.
(ASTEROIDEA. )

Erigeron * filifolium; canescently villous and somewhat hirsute; root woody,
sending up many low, erect stems; leaves long and filiform, flowers corym-
bose, white; sepals acute, short; floral rays about twenty-five; achenia smooth.

Diplopappus filifolius? (Hoox. Flor. Bor., Vol. IL, p. 21,) but the rays are not
yellowish.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, in Oregon. Stems about eight to twelve inches. Leaves
two to three inches long, narrow as those of the pine, on the young or infertile branches crowded.

Rays about the length of the disk, few. Pappus simple, the bristly rays about twenty-five. Al-
lied to E. Montevidense, but not shrubby.

Erigeron radicatus. Wooxer, l. c.
Has. Blue Mountains, Oregon. A very dwarf, almost cespitose species, with a short hirsute

involucrum, and very short, white rays. Pappus simple, of about ten to twelve, very slender,
scarcely scabrous bristles.

_Erigeron *nanum; dwarf and hirsute, leaves linear subspathulate, stem one-
flowered, nearly naked; sepals lanceolate, hirsute; rays white, shorter than the

disk; achenium pubescent; rays of the pappus barbellate, about fifteen.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains. Resembles the preceding, but has hirsute leaves, and a differ-
ent achenium and pappus.

Erigeron * pedatum; smooth, cespitose; primary leaves simple or trifid, after-
wards pedate, unequally five-cleft; petioles elongated, strongly ciliate; scapes
numerous, one-flowered; capitulum small, sepals acuminate, linear, a little hir-
sute; rays about the length of the disk; achenium pubescent.

Has. On the gravel bars of small streams to the east of Walla-Walla, in Oregon. Nearly allied
to E. trifidus, but very glabrous, and somewhat succulent; the flowers, also, numerous, and less
than half the size, with the involucrum nearly smooth. Rays pale rose. Achenium somewhat
sericeous; pappus of about twenty very slender, almost entire rays.

+ + Rays rather few, pappus double in rayand disk.

Erigeron corymbosum; minutely pubescent, somewhat canescent; many stems
from the same root, erect and low, terminating in a few-flowered corymb; leaves
lanceolate-linear, sessile, entire and acute; sepals hispid, acute; rays blue, a
little longer than the disk, (about thirty ;) achenium nearly smooth, and striate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 309

Has. Rocky Mountains, towards the Oregon. A very elegant and peculiar species, bearing
some affinity with Z. speciosum. Covered with a short, dense, pubescence, and with the margins
of the leaves scabrous. Stem six to eight inches high. Corymb of three or four capituli. Pap-

pus brownish, the exterior of white and slender palee.

Erigeron * decumbens; somewhat glabrous below; root creeping; stem leafy,
somewhat decumbent, many from the same root; leaves long and linear, acute,
scabrous on the edge, attenuated below, the upper ones somewhat pubescent;
flowers in a corymb; branchlets one-flowered, slender, and often leafy; sepals
acuminate, hirsute; rays white, about fifty, twice as long as the disk; external
pappus minute.

Has. With the above, of which, at first glance, it appears a variety, but differs in the numerous

rays and minute external pappus, as well as general habit.

Erigeron * ochroleucum; subcespitose; stem pubescent above; radical leaves
linear-sublanceolate, entire, crowded, smooth, those of the stem narrower, short,
and sessile; stems one-flowered, scapoid or corymbose, and few flowered, the
branchlets long; sepals tomentose, canescent, lanceolate, acute; rays numerous,
about the length of the disk, (ochroleucous,) achenium pubescent.

Has. Plains of the Oregon. August. Allied to the preceding, but with much larger flowers
and rays; remarkable for the clustered root leaves, which, in the scapoid variety, resemble a tuft of
pine leaves, ordinarily three to four inches long, by about a line wide, smooth and thick, much
like those of an Armeria. Stem about a span, branchlets three to five, one-flowered, forming, in
stout plants, an irregular corymb. Rays of the pappus, in both ray and disk, very obviously dou-

ble, the external ring white and shining, internal, of about fifteen bristles.

Erigeron * fohosum; rather hirsute and somewhat scabrous; stem simple,
erect, terete, attenuated, the summit corymbose; leaves oblong-linear, sessile,
entire, acute, crowded; sepals lanceolate, pubescent, acute, in about two series,

and nearly equal; rays short, red, about thirty, achenia subhirsute.

Has. Near St. Barbara, in Upper California. Flowering in May. A very remarkable species;
the stem terete, full of leaves, one and a half to two inches long, and about two lines wide, diminishing
in size with the attenuation of the stem. Sepals lanceolate. Pappus double, the outer small, the
inner of many brownish rays. Stigma exserted, smooth, and nearly equally filiform in the ray;
obliquely truncate and slightly pubescent in the discal florets. The rays narrow, about the length
of the involucrum, of a full purple red. This species appears to be considerably allied to Core-
throgyne, but it has the achenium of Erigeron, somewhat prismatic, with three or four longitudi-
nal brown lines or nerves; but the obtuse stigma appears to be an anomaly in the genus. The as-
pect of the plant is much that of an Aster. (My specimens are too young to be satisfactory.)

vir.—4 c

310 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

+ + Leaves dissected. Achenium not striated, rays rather numerous. Pappus
double, the sete barbellated. ('TRIDACTYLIA.)

Erigeron compositum. (Pursu, Vol. II., p.535.) Pappus double in ray and
disk, the outer short, entire, the inner of eighteen to twenty barbellate, decidu-

ous rays.
Has. Kamas prairie, in the Rocky Mountains. Flowering in June.

§. Puanactis, (Stenactis in part.)—Pappus persistent and scabrous, of fif
teen to twenty-four sete, external minute pappus simple; achenium com-
pressed, with three to five strie, radial florets very numerous.—Perennial,
with entire leaves.

Evigeron speciosum, (DEcaAND., Vol. V., p. 284.) _OBs.—Pappus double both
in ray and disk; the exterior short and subulate. Stenactes speciosa, (Lin.
Bot. Reg. t. 1577.) Common on the plains of the Oregon.

Erigeron macranthum; smooth, lower leaves spathulate-oblong, obtuse, at-
tenuated at base; stem leaves elliptic-ovate, or ovate, abruptly apiculate, sca-
brous on the margin; peduncles few, one-flowered, corymbose; rays a little
longer than the disk; sepals narrow and acuminate, glandular.—Erigeron
grandiflorum, Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Vol. VIT., p. 31, not of Hooker.

Has. Sources of the Missouri and the plains of the Platte. Flowering in August. Allied to
the preceding. Rays numerous, blue. About eighteen inches high. Flowers four or five on a

stem.

Erigeron *hisprdum,; stem erect, corymbose, above scabrous and hispid; leaves
entire, ciliate and scabrous on the margin, radical spathulate, cauline sessile,
acuminate; peduncles elongated, one-flowered; sepals of the involucrum hoary,

hispid, very hirsute, much acuminated; rays very numerous.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Nearly allied to #. speciosum, from which, however, it
is very distinguishable by its exceedingly hirsute involucrum, and hispid, naked, elongated pedun-
cles; the leaves appear, also, broader, and scabrous towards the points. Rays blue, more nume-
rous than in spectoswm, and not so long. Pappus double in ray and disk; rays twenty to twenty-

four, persistent.

Erigeron *maritimum; stem pilose, decumbent, branching from near the base ;
leaves thick and entire, spathulate-oblong, sessile, obtuse, the lower narrowed
at base; branches several, one-flowered, flower large, rays very numerous; in-~
volucrum lanuginous as well as the margins of the leaves, sepals acuminate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. sll

Has. On the sea-coast of the Oregon and Upper California. A large, rather succulent leaved
plant, sending up several stems about a foot high, with leaves and flowers very similar with those
of Erigeron bellidifolius. Stem and uppermost leaves softly hairy, somewhat three-nerved.
Flower very large, rays pale red. Achenium angular, with four or five brown strie. Pappus
double, rays of the pappus twenty to twenty-four, about the length of the discal florets, and not
deciduous.

Annual or perennial. Leaves entire or lobed. Pappus double in ray and disk,
the inner of eight to fifteen, short, deciduous, somewhat scabrous rays. OLyY-
GOTRICHIUM; (STENACTIS in part.)

Erigeron *divaricatum; © hirsute, stem branching from the base; branchlets
one-flowered, rather naked, fastigiate; radical leaves spathulate, the rest linear,
sessile, acute, attenuated below, all entire; inner pappus of about eight sete;

rays very numerous, narrow, white.
Has. In the Rocky Mountains and the plains of Oregon. About one foot high, at length very
much branched, the leaves an inch or more long, about a line wide. Pappus double in ray and

disk, the inner of remarkably few rays, very deciduous.

Erigeron tenue, (GRay.) EE. quercifolium, Nutr. and Decanp., not of Lam.,
pappus double in ray and disk, the inner of about twelve short deciduous
bristles.

Evigeron strigosum @. gracile; stem leaves and involucrum pubescent,
branches fastigiate.

Has. Oregon plains.

Erigeron *occidentale, » ; hispid with a short pubescence, corymb compound,
irregular; lower leaves oblong-lanceolate, obtuse, subserrulate, upper linear en-
tire; sepals lanceolate, acute, scarcely hirsute; rays very numerous, red; inner
pappus of about twelve rays; the outer very distinct.

Has. In Oregon. A low perennial species, with broadish leaves on the lower part of the stem.

Allied to Z. strigosum, but scarcely the same, with red flowers and broad leaves.

§. TrimorpHzaA. (Decand. Vol. V., p. 290.)

Erigeron * nivale; stem subcespitose and hairy at the base, mostly with one
capitulum ; radical leaves spathulate, cauline lanceolate, acuminate, subamplex-~
icaule; summit of the stem and involucrum glandularly pubescent; sepals linear

312 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

and acuminate, (not hirsute;) pappus longer than the linear, elongated, some-

what pubescent achenium.

Has. In the central chain of the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the Colorado of the
West, on the limits of perpetual snow, (lat. 42°.) Allied to #. alpinus, but with semiamplexi-
caule leaves, widest at the base. Pappus longer than the involucrum. Rays?.... A few fili-

form female florets outside the discal ones. Achenium long and linear, compressed, slightly silky.

Erigeron * racemosum; lower leaves spathulate, smooth; petioles ciliate; se-
veral stems from one root, simple, racemose, peduncles or one-flowered branch-
lets usually elongated; cauline leaves somewhat hirsute, sessile, long and linear,
subacute; sepals few, hirsute acute; rays very numerous, scarcely exserted be-
yond the pappus, (tubular styliferous florets none;) pappus more than twice
the length of the linear pubescent achenium. @. *angustifolum; radical leaves
linear-spathulate, peduncles contracted. E. glabratus, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am.,
Vol. Il., p. 18, not of Decandolle, (as a variety of E. alpinus.) Allied to the
E. elongatum of Ledebour.

§. Cznotus. (Nutt.)

Erigeron canadense, Linn.
Has. In Oregon common; also in the Sandwich Islands at Ouau, or a variety of it.

* ASTRANTHIUM.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays about one series, ligulate, neu-
ter, or sterile. Discal florets tubular, hermaphrodite, five-toothed. Recep-
tacle conic, alveolate. Involucrum hemispherical, the sepals lanceolate and
very acute, membranaceous on the margins, imbricated in two to three
series, and nearly equal. Achenia obovate, compressed, narrowed at
the apex, somewhat scabrous, without any prominent margin, and desti-
tute of pappus.—Divaricately branching annual plants; leaves alternate
spathulate, or linear, entire. Rays numerous, pale red. Flowers terminal,
fastigiate.

Astranthum integrifoium. © Bellis integrifoha, (Micu. Flor. Am., Vol.

II., p. 131. In Tennessee and Arkansa. This genus appears to be much
more allied, by the fruit, to Eckpta than to Bellis.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 313

Division II].—CurysocomeE2z.

Receptacle naked. Capitulum wholly yellow, with or without rays, rays neu-
ter or feminine. Pappus paleaceous or pilose, rarely wanting; similar or
dissimilar in the ray and disk. In the section Chrysopsedee double, the ex-
terior short and chaffy.

BRACHYRIS.

Bracuyris Euthame.
Has. In the Rocky Mountains, towards the upper branches of the Platte. Suffruticose.

Brachyris * divaricata; suffruticose, glutinous, corymbosely and divaricately
branched; leaves narrow linear, acute; flowers nearly all pedunculate; involu-
crum turbinate, the scales ovate, rays about six, discal florets about seven or

eight, pappus of the ray somewhat shorter, the rest elongated.
Has. With the above, in the Rocky Mountains, to which it is nearly allied, but with larger and
seldom sessile flowers. Very resinous and heavy-scented.

*AMPHIACHYRIS.

(Decanp. Vol. V., p. 313, as a section of BRacHyYRIS. )

Character nearly that of Bracuyris, but with the involucrum obovate and
bracteolate, scales few and obtuse, not herbaceous at the points. Recepta-
cle deeply alveolate. Rays feminine, eight to ten, oval. Discal herma-
phrodite florets twenty-five to thirty, small. Pappus of the discal florets
united at base, dividing into about six entire sete. Radial florets, with a
very minute crown of scarcely visible sete.—A very distinct genus, allied to
Hemiachyris, but wholly different in the pappus, which scarcely differs from
that of Grindelia, but it is united at base, and quite persistent.

Amphuachyris dracunculoides. (Decanpv., under Brachyris, Vol. V., p. 313.)
I collected this plant in 1818, on the aca of ponds, near Salt River of Ar-
kansas. Flowering in September.
vil.—4 D

314 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

GRINDELIA. (Willd.)

GRINDELIA * robusta; herbaceous, smooth; leaves cordate-oblong, obtuse, am-
plexicaule, coarsely serrate, scabrous on the margin, the upper ones acute,
nearly entire; capituli corymbose, involucrum squarrose and leafy at base; re-
ceptaculum paleaceous near the margin, pappus of two sete.

Has. St. Pedro, Upper California. Flowering in April. A very stout and robust species, about
eighteen inches high, apparently biennial, very smooth; leaves about an inch broad, an inch and a
half long. Rays forty to fifty, flowers very large, more than twice the size of those of G. squar-

rosa, which this species much resembles, but the leaves are broadest at the base. Stigma hirsute,
pointed, but little exserted.

Grindeha *virgata; smooth or pubescent, herbaceous, (biennial;) stem vir-
gate, cylindric, tall and slender, branching towards the summit, branches
mostly one-flowered, fastigiate; leaves linear-oblong, or oblong-lanceolate, very
acute, entire; or serrulate, semiamplexicaule; involucrum glutinous, the lower

sepals filiformly attenuated and spreading; rays neuter, pappus of two to three
sete.

Has. Forests of Oregon, near Fort Vancouver, &c. Nearly related to the G. integrifolia, but
the leaves are narrow, not ovate, and resemble those of a willow. Stem slender, twiggy and
tough, three to four feet high, terminating in about five or six flowers, about the size of those of
G. squarrosa. Leaves about three inches long, half an inch wide, above, all entire, diminishing
much in size on the branchlets, pungently acute. Radical leaves spathulate-linear. Allied to G.
stricta, Decanp., but with a squarrose involucrum.

Grindeha *nana; perennial, smooth and glandularly punctate; many low,
decumbent stems from the same root, terminating in a single flower, or in a
few-flowered corymb; leaves narrow lanceolate or oblong, sessile, narrowed be-
low, serrate, those of the branches near the flower often minute, entire; sepals
with short, reflected tips, which descend to the branch; rays few, (sixteen,)
scarcely styliferous; pappus of about two sete.

Has. With the above. Nearly allied to G. humilis of Hoox. and Arn. 8. *integrifolia; leaves
nearly entire, involucrum globular, squarrose to the base.

Oss.—Searcely a foot high, usually decumbent, or assurgent. Lower leaves
often incisely serrate, linear-lanceolate, narrowed below. Rays a little longer
than the disk; involucrum glutinous. In the entire leaved variety the leaves

are smooth on the margin; perhaps a distinct species; allied to G. integrifoha
of Decandolle.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 315

Grindelia * discotrdea; herbaceous, perennial, smooth and resinously punctate ;
branches one or two-flowered, fastigiate; leaves oblong-linear, acute, sessile,
minutely serrulate; involucrum glutinous; reflected points of the sepals short;
flowers discoid; pappus of two sete.

Has. On the banks of the Oregon. A genuine species of the present genus, though devoid of
rays. Stigmas pointed, pubescent. Capitulum rather small. Leaves about one and a half inches
long by two to three lines wide, the serratures very delicate and minute. Stem about a foot high,

several from the same root.

Grindeha *cuneifoha; smooth, leaves entire? cuneate-oblong, obtuse, or
linear-oblong, acute, amplexicaule; capitulum sessile, somewhat glutinous,
squarrose; stigmas very long, acute, pubescent.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Of this I have seen only two small branches, the lower
leaves may be different. The capitulum like that of G. glutinosa, of which it is, perhaps, a va-
riety. The stigmas very long and exserted. Leaves pellucidly punctate. Pappus of five or

more sete.

HETEROTHECA. (Cassini.)

HETEROTHECA * grandiflora; villous and pilose; lower leaves oval, sparingly
serrate, petiolate, upper leaves sessile, entire, lanceolate, acute; stem densely
pilose below, the summit paniculately corymbose, glandular, as well as the
narrow, acute sepals; rays linear; pappus double, the outer dimidiate; achenia
obovate-compressed, sericeous. Dzplopappus scaber? Wook. Flor. Bor. Am.,
Vol. IL, p. 22.

Has. On rocks near the sea, round St. Barbara, Upper California. A very showy, large flow-
ered species. Stem about eighteen inches high, covered with long, softish hairs, diminishing to-
ward the summit, which becomes glandular. Peduncles rather long, and, as well as the narrow
linear sepals, clothed with a short, glandular, darkish pubescence. Pappus very copious, bright
brown, the outer nearly the same colour, not very distinct; radial achenia naked, triangular, nearly
smooth. In the H. scabra the pappus is about half the length of the present, (as is the capitulum,)
searcely half as copious, and the outer, very conspicuous pappus, is silvery white. This plant I
have never seen in Oregon or in California.

CHRYSOPSIS. (Nutt.)

Chrysopsis Lamarcku. (Heterotheca Lamarckiu, Cassini. C. divaricata, Ev-
“ioTT.) Certainly no Heterotheca, there existing an uniform double pappus;

316 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

the outer chaffy crown, is, however, very short, and best seen in an early stage
of growth.

Chrysopsis laspida. (Diplopappus hispidus, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II.,
p- 22.) In this species, so much allied to C. vallosa, there are numerous aro-
matic, resinous glands spread over most part of the plant; the quantity of this
resinous matter, however, varies, but is never wholly wanting. The involu-
crum is rarely at all smooth, more or less slenderly pilose, and sometimes glan-
dular. Perennial, often somewhat decumbent, six to eight inches high, fasti-
giately branched; the rays deep yellow, pappus brownish, scabrous. Radical
leaves spathulate, long petiolate. Achenium silky. Outer short pappus chaftfy,
white, very distinct.—In C. villosa the outer pappus is far less distinct, and
much more slender than in the present plant.

Chrysopsis * folosa; %, sericeously villous, and more or less canescent, the
margin and lower surface of the leaves scabrous; flowers fastigiate, corymbose ;
leaves entire, oblong or oblong-ovate, subamplexicaule, crowded, acute, ciliate
below; scales of the involucrum linear, acute, villous; achenium silky; pappus
scarcely scabrous, outer pappus slender, dimidiate.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain plains, near the banks of the Platte. Flowering in August.
About a foot high, sending up many hairy stems from the same root. Nearly allied to C. villosa,
but far more pubescent and hoary, with the leaves widest at the base. In some specimens quite
hoary, the hairs feel as soft as silk, but on removing this clothing, the under surface is covered
with numerous scabrous elevations. A very showy species.

Chrysopsis * mollis, 2L; sericeously villous, leaves entire, spathulate-oblong,
the lower narrowed below, the rest oblong and sessile, mostly obtuse; corymb
few-flowered ; involucrum villous; the scales lanceolate, acute; achenium silky,

the outer pappus minute.
Has. With the above, which it much resembles, but the leaves are more oblong, not in the least
scabrous nor any where ciliate; the stem, also, softly villous.

§ I. Subgenus. *Puytuopappus.t Receptacle alveolate. Involucrum, sepals in
about two series, subequal, flat. Outer pappus of about twenty paleaceous,
hinear-lanceolate, eroded scales, the inner of about twenty-five scabrous sete.
Annual, with the lower leaves incisely serrate.

t From the exterior pappus being leaf-like.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. Sy7

Chrysopsis pilosa, ©; very softly pubescent and hairy; leaves elongated,
linear-lanceolate, acute, the lower ones incisely serrate, scales of the involu-
erum linear-lanceolate, acuminate, nearly equal; achenium with ten ribs; (a
character common to the fruit of other species of Chrysopsis when perfectly
mature.) C. pelosa, Nutt., Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VII., p. 66.
(Small specimens, in which the leaves often occur entire.)

Subgenus.—*PuyiiotHEca. Rays feminine, nith rudiments of stamina or fila-
ments. Stigmas of the ray very long, filiform, and smooth, those of the disk
pubescent at the apex, and somewhat lanceolate. External paleaceous pappus
minute, the inner pilose and scabrous; tnvolucrum wmbricate, and bracteolate or
folaceous.

Chrysopsis * sessiliflora; 4%; viscid and pubescent, leaves oblong acute, en-

tire, sessile; branches fastigiate, with one to three sessile capituli.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in April. Possessing a heavy aromatic odour
and bitter taste, almost like that of some Gnaphaliums. ‘The whole plant more or less hirsute
_ and viscidly glandular; leaves about an inch long, three or four lines wide, linear-oblong, rather
crowded, narrowed below, sessile. ‘The capitulum surrounded by leaves at its base, like those of
the stem, only narrower and longer. The outer pappus scarcely visible. Rays narrow and elon-

gated, deeply toothed, about thirty.

* PITY OPSIS.+

Flowers heterogamous, rays feminine; florets of the disk five-toothed, tubular.
Stigmas slenderly filiform, equal and obtuse, in the ray smooth, in the disk
hirsute. Receptacle alveolate, dentate, naked. Involucrum imbricated in
several unequal series; scales carinate, rigid, membranaceous on the margin.
Achenium slender, cylindric-fusiform, internally angular, even, and ten-stri-
ate, contracted and rostrate at the summit, acuminate below; pappus double,
each in a single series, the external short, slender and paleaceous, the inner
pilose and scarcely scabrous, (of forty to forty-five rays. )—Perennials, with

alternate, entire, filiform or grass-like leaves, naked, or more usually clothed

t P. pinifolia having leaves resembling those of the pine tree, and hence the allusion.

Vil.—4 E

318 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

with a very long, flaky, silk-like, more or less deciduous pubescence! flow-
ers in corymbs, simple or paniculate; rays rather broad and few, yellow, as
well as the disk. Pappus very slender, fulvous, the external chaffy kind,
also, nearly of the same colour. Achenium very remarkable for its tenuity
and acumination at either extremity, black or brown when ripe, and some-
what sericeous; the striatures not elevated above the surface into ribs, and

very slender.

Pityopsis pinifoha; smooth, leaves crowded, very long and filiform; branches
one-flowered, corymbose; scales of the involucrum in three or four series, cari-
nate, pubescent at the tips; achenium pilose, with a very distinct rostrum.

Has. In Georgia, on sand hills, between Flint and Chatahoochee rivers.

§ I. SrricoppytLtum.—Leaves gramineous, clad with flakes of a long, somewhat
deciduous, appressed silky pubescence. Achenium with a shorter rostrum.

Pityopsis falcata; deciduously sericeous, subdecumbent; corymb simple, pe-
duncles or naked branchlets one-flowered, axillary and terminal; leaves short,
linear, sessile, falcately recurved, acute; achenium sericeous, distinctly rostrate.

"Has. In barren pine woods, near Quaker-Bridge, in New Jersey, where alone I have ever seen
it. Aehenium.rostrate and acuminate at base; pappus brownish, at first white, the external very
slender.

Pityopsis graminifolka. Oxss.—Involucrum and upper branchlets glandu-
larly pubescent. Achenium slender, attenuated at either extremity. Chry-
sopsis graminifola, WiutoTr. Decand., Vol. V., p. 326.

Pityopsis argentea.—Involucrum pubescent, not glandular. Achenium near-
ly black when mature, acuminated at each extremity. Chrysopsis argentea,
Euxiorr. Decand., Vol. V., p. 326.

* WRICAMERITA.

Capitulum few-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, three to six, short and
oblong, three-toothed, sometimes bilabiate; discal florets about seven to nine,

campanulate, five-cleft. Stigmas very long and slender, acuminate, pubes-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 319

cent, in the ray smooth. Receptacle naked, alveolate, dentate. Involucrum
imbricate, the inner scales membranaceous on the margin, below passing in-
sensibly into the minute leaves of the branchlet. Achenium smooth, or
somewhat hirsute, linear, angular and striate. Pappus pilose, scabrous, sim-
ple, unequal. Flowers wholly yellow?—Dwarf, often resinous shrubs, re-
sembling heaths, exceedingly branched, branches very leafy; leaves minute
and subcylindric, acerose and semipervirent, crowded; flowers small, in a
contracted, leafy corymb, or solitary and terminal.—(So named from a re-

semblance to the genus Evzca in the minute sempervirent leaves.)

Ericameria * microphylla; not viscid, leaves terete, distichally imbricated in
the axils; rays three or four; achenium smooth; scales of the involucrum
obtuse. <Aplopappus ericoides, Decanv., Vol. V., p. 346.

Has. On rocks in a mountainous situation, near St. Barbara, Upper California. Six to eight
inches high, much branched from the base.. Leaves three to six lines long, half a line wide, nearly
cylindric, obtuse and rigid, at first, as well as the young branches, tomentose, at length smooth.
Flowers crowded into an unequal corymb, the branchlets one-flowered, full of leaves to the sum-
mit; scales of the involucrum in about three series, the outer leafy and acute, the inner obtuse.
This cannot be, in any respect, a congener with Aplopappus ciliatus, or the genuine Chilian

species.

Ericameria *nana; smooth and somewhat glutinous, densely branched;
leaves linear acerose, acute, channelled; branchlets one to three-flowered ; flow-
ers terminal, fastigiate; scales of the involucrum similar; rays about four;

achenium subhirsute.

Has. On shelving rocks on the Blue Mountains of Oregon. A shrub scarcely a span high, ex-
ceedingly branched and very brittle, somewhat resinous from exudation. Leaves no thicker than
those of the pine, half an inch to an inch in length, somewhat narrower at base, sessile. Discal
florets about eight, not deeply toothed, and, as well as the rays, yellow. Achenium nearly the
length of the brownish pappus, linear, somewhat oblong, slightly hirsute when mature, somewhat

angular and com pressed.

Ericameria * resinosa; every where glutinous, smooth; branches numerous,
slender, corymbose; flowers pedicellate; scales of the involucrum acute, the
base microphyllous and squarrose; leaves subulate, acute; rays about six, often
bilabiate! discal florets about twelve, all ochroleucous, five-cleft.

320 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. With the above, for which I had at first confounded it, but the flowers are larger and not
perfectly yellow, the branches more slender and open, the leaves somewhat longer, and a little
broader. Involucrum turbinate, receptaculum narrow. ‘The rays often, but not always, with two
lower, strap-shaped, narrow segments, opposed to the bifid tipped liguli. The same thing, though
less distinct, occurs in the preceding species. Discal florets deeply cleft, campanulate; anthers and
stigmas much exserted, filiform, acuminate, hirsute. Achenium, when young, hirsute, and appa-
rently almost cylindric. This species is so glutinous as to stick to the paper, and leave its im-
pression behind.

Ozss.—A very remarkable genus, altogether peculiar in habit, resembling
some microphyllous shrub of the Cape of Good Hope.

*TSOCOMA.

Capitulum homogamous, many-flowered, (twenty;) florets subcampanulate,
deeply five-toothed. Branches of the stigma with an ovate apex, pubescent
externally. Receptacle alveolate, dentate. Involucrum imbricate, inversely
conic, scales membranaceous on the margin. Achenium subterete, serice-
ous; pappus pilose, copious, scarcely scabrous.—A stout perennial or suffru-
ticose plant of California, with the aspect of a Vernonza, but the flowers yel-
low, in terminal corymbose clusters. Leaves alternate, cuneate-oblong,
sharply serrate, rather small and crowded.—(So called from its equal
flowers. )

Isocoma * Vernoniordes.

Has. In marshes near the sea, at St. Barbara, Upper California. Common. Flowering in
April and May. One to two feet high, smooth, except the upper part of the stem, which is some-
what tomentose. Leaves about an inch long, by two to three lines wide, crowded in the axills,
rather succulent, linear-oblong or cuneate, acute, sharply serrate, the serratures ending in bristly
points; flowers terminal, conglomerate, in sessile or pedunculated clusters, bright yellow. Al-

lied to Lessingia, but with the florets wholly similar. Also to the section Aplodiscus of Aplopap-
pus, in Decanp., Vol. V., p. 350, yet the stigma appears to be wholly different.

* ERIOCARPUM.

Capitulum homogamous. Florets tubular, four to five-toothed, closed. Stig-
mas lanceolate, hirsute. Involucrum hemispherical, imbricate, the scales

unequal, rigid, membranaceous on the margin. Receptaculum flat, alveo-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 321

late, producing small, membranaceous, not exserted scales. Achenium obo-
vate, compressed, densely lanuginous; pappus short and unequal, pilose, bar-
bellate—A low subalpine perennial, with a ligneous root, sending up many
stems; leaves alternate, cuneate, serrate, the serratures ending in bristles;
capituli corymbose.—Allied to Aplopappus, but very distinct from the true
Chilian species, both in the absence of rays and the nature of the pappus.
Allied to the preceding genus, but with a different involucrum, receptacu-

lum and stigma, &c.—(So called from its lanuginous fruit.)

Eriocarpum * Grindeliordes.

Has. On shelving rocks in the Rocky Mountain range, Oregon. Stems about six inches high,
pubescent, as well as the under side of the leaves. Leaves about one to one and a half inches
long, by three to four lines wide, ciliate, serrate, cuneate-oblong. Florets scarcely exserted be-
yond the fulvous pappus, pale yellow, the teeth never expanding, and the summits or cusps of the

anthers exserted and conspicuous. Pappus scarcely longer than the achenium.

* AMMODIA.

Capitulum homogamous, many-flowered, florets tubular, five-toothed; stigmas
elongated, slenderly filiform, equal and pubescent. Anthers not bisetose.
Receptacle naked, alveolate. Involucrum loosely imbricate, scales acute,
flat, one-nerved, membranous on the margin, gradually shorter. Achenium
oblong-linear, compressed, pubescent, slenderly striate, acuminate at base;
pappus pilose, copious, slender, scarcely scabrous.—An inconspicuous flow-
ered perennial, with entire, alternate, oblong, narrowish leaves. Capituli in
an irregular compound corymb; involucrum obconic, florets very numerous,
pale yellow, upper part of the stem and involucrum glandular.—Allied ap-
parently to Inula, but the anthers not bisetose, and the ray wholly wanting.
Yet, at first glance, the plant might readily be mistaken for Inula viscosa, in
which the anthers are furnished with basal sete, or the I. ammophila, £.
salsoloides of China!—(The name given is in allusion to its predilection for

sandy places.)

Ammodia * Oregona.
vil.—4 F

322 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. On the sand and gravel bars of the Oregon and its tributary streams; common. Flower-
ing in August. Many stems from the same root, about a foot high, more or less hirsute; the
leaves nearly smooth, scabrous on the margin, oblong, acute, sessile, rather numerous; flowers in
an irregular, paniculate corymb, very inconspicuous, of a pale yellow, the florets nearly hid in the
pappus, which is white and very slender, as in Inula, Achenia almost fusiform. Scales of the
involucrum lanceolate, acute, in about four series. Florets fifty, or more. ‘The whole plant pos-
sesses a heavy aromatic odour.

*MACRONEMA.+

Capitulum heterogamous, or homogamous, many-flowered, rays few or none, fe-
minine, often with the rudiments of stamina; florets of the disk tubular-cam-
panulate, five-cleft at the apex. Branches of the style very long, equally
filiform, exserted, acute, and hirsute. Involucrum subimbricate in two
nearly equal series, the inner rigid and membranaceous on the margin, the
outer bracteolate or foliaceous. Receptaculum alveolate. Achenium linear-
oblong, compressed, very long, obscurely striate, smooth or pubescent. Pap-
pus pilose, copious, scabrous, unequal.—Low, viscidly pubescent shrubs,
with many stems and much branched; branches one-flowered, fastigiate ;
rays and disk yellow; leaves alternate, entire.—Allied to Aplopappus, though

remotely, having a different pappus and involucrum, &c.

Macronema * suffrutecosa; minutely and viscidly pubescent, leaves oblong-
linear, acute, numerous, rays six to eight.

Has. On the sandy and gravelly banks of the Malade, a stream of the Oregon, near the Blue
Mountains. A rather elegant low shrub, woody towards the base, about six to eight inches high,
sending up numerous slender, simple, mostly one-flowered branches, from the summit of the low,
woody stem; leaves about one to one and a half inches long, by about two lines wide, rather
crowded. Capitulum large and hemispherical, containing thirty or more florets, with about eight
linear-oblong, three-toothed rays, having often the same pubescent stigmas with the discal florets,
and not unfrequently the rudiments of stamens. Pappus fulvous, exserted beyond the short invo-
lucrum, nearly as long as the florets, yet not longer.than the elongated achenium. Stigmas ex-
ceedingly long, almost as in the Eupatoriums, sometimes trifid.

§ * Kucymna.—Flowers discoid, acheniwm glabrous.

Macronema * discordea; glandular pubescent, shrubby; young branches to-
mentose, leaves cuneate-oblong, obtuse; rays none, achenia smooth.

t In allusion to the long filiform styles, (uaxpos, Jong, and vyjua, a thread.)

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 323

Has. Banks of Lewis’ River, and other streams of the Oregon. Allied to, but very distinct
from the preceding, with the same elongated, hirsute stigmas. A low, branching, somewhat spiny
shrub, about half a foot high. Leaves about an inch long, two to three lines wide. Scales of the
involucrum lanceolate-linear, part of the outer series resembling the leaves as in the preceding spe-
cies: florets about twenty-five ; achenia very glabrous, slightly striated, linear-oblong.

BIGELOWIA. (Decand.)

Oxss.—Involucrum three to four-flowered; branches of the stigma short,
scarcely exserted, ligulate. the apex sublanceolate, puberulous.—Low herbs
with large radical leaves and scapoid, almost naked stems; branches corymbose.

Bigelowia nudata and B. virgata.
Has. On the borders of sandy, shallow ponds, from Virginia to Florida. The B. nudata as

far north as New Jersey.

*CHRYSOTHAMNUS.

BieeLowi, but with the receptaculum naked. Capitulum five to eight-fiow-
ered; branches of the stigma filiform, cylindric, exserted, acute, pubescent
_ nearly their whole length —Very branching shrubs of the western interior
and Rocky Mountain plains, with entire, equal, linear leaves, and fastigiately
clustered flowers. Most of the species more or less resinous, and with a
heavy aromatic odour.—{Named from their affinity to Chrysocoma, and bril-

lant golden yellow flowers.)

Chrysothamnus *pumilus; shrubby, dwarf, smooth or pulverulently pubes-
cent; leaves narrow linear, acute, partly three-nerved; involucrum about five-

fiowered.

Has. On the borders of Lewis’ River and the Rocky Mountain plains. A low shrub, much
branched from below, about six inches high; flowers in terminal, fastigiate clusters. Involucrum
smooth or glutinous. 8. *Huthamioides: involucrum ovate, the scales ovate and short. Perhaps
a distinet species.

Chrysothamnus * speciosus; shrubby and virgately branched; leaves narrow,
linear, acute, more or less tomentose; capituli in dense, conglomerate, terminal

clusters, five-flowered; style hirsute, elongated: pappus copious, scarcely sca-
brous.

324 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. In the Rocky Mountain plains, near Lewis’ River, common: Flowering in August.
“albicaulis; stem densely and whitely tomentose; perhaps a distinct species. Showy shrubs,
three or four feet high, with numerous virgate branches, like the common Broom. Leaves one-
nerved, scarcely half a line wide, one and a half to two inches long. Flowers abundant, brilliant
yellow.

Chrysothamnus dracunculoides. Bigelonia dracunculoides, Decanv., Vol. V.
p. 329.
Has. Rocky Mountain plains, near the banks of the Platte and Missouri. A shrub three to

five feet high, with a heavy, unpleasant, though somewhat aromatic odour.

Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus. Crinitaria viscidiflora, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am.,
Vol. IT., p. 24. With this plant 1 am unacquainted, but it agrees well with
the present genus.

+ Capitulum siz to erght-flowered; stigma hgulate.

Chrysothamnus lanceolatus; shrubby, nearly smooth; leaves linear-lanceolate,
acute, three-nerved, somewhat glutinous; capituli corymbosely clustered, six

to eight-flowered; stigma ligulate, pubescent at the apex.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, toward the sources of the Platte, and on the banks of Lewis’
River of the Oregon. A moderate-sized shrub, with broader leaves than usual, one to one and a
half inches long, by three to four lines wide, slightly puberulous. Involucrum of about four series
of ovate, concave, acute scales. Stigma exserted, flat, with an ovate puberulous apex, something
like that of the true Bigelowias. Pappus white, not abundant, scabrous, Florets pale yellow.

CHRYSOMA.
(Nurr., Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL., p. 67.)

Capitulum heterogamous, about five-flowered; liguli feminine, one to three,
short and oval. Receptacle narrow, naked, alveolate, the central point ele-
vated. Involucrum imbricate, the scales carinate, the inner ones longer.
Achenium oblong, compressed, smooth, or somewhat pubescent. Pap-
pus simple, pilose, scabrous, the rays numerous.—Shrubby, suffruticose or
perennial? plants, with entire (or serrated) rigid, lanceolate leaves, opaque,
or pellucidly punctate. Flowers in fastigiate, corymbose clusters, wholly
yellow.—Allied to Bigelonia, but distinguished by the presence of liguli; to
Euthamia, but the liguli only about two; from Solidago in the same manner,
and also by the whole habit.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 325

Chrysoma soldaginoides; shrubby; leaves oblong-lanceolate, obtuse, entire,
pellucidly punctate; involucrum angular, rays one or two, achenium pubes-

cent. Sohdago semiflosculosa, Micu., Vol. II., p. 116.
Has. East Florida. (Mr. Ware.) A shrub apparently four or five feet high, with stout, smooth
branches. Leaves almost coriaceous, semipervirent? Branchlets slender, paniculate, fastigiate.

Discal florets three; rays one or two.

Chrysoma * pumila; root woody, stem slender, simple, corymbose, the flow-
ers in subsessile clusters; leaves rigid, somewhat coriaceous, linear-lanceolate,
acute, entire, three-nerved, attenuated below, sessile; rays two or three; ache-

nium smooth.

Has. In open situations, on shelving rocks towards the western declivity of the Rocky Moun-
tains. The whole plant about a span high, more or less viscid and resinous, with clusters of
stems from the same woody root. Leaves two to three inches long, about a quarter of an inch
wide, rather coriaceous, (sempervirent?) corymb regular, composed of sessile clusters by threes.

Involucrum subcylindric, somewhat viscid. Discal florets three; rays usually two.
Chrysoma unihgqulata; leaves lanceolate, at either end acuminate, serrate;
panicle compound, many-flowered; involucrum narrow oblong, five-flowered ;

ligula one. Brgelowia? umligulata, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 329.
Has. In New Jersey, (probably near the sea-coast.) (Mr. B. D. Greene.)

KUTHAMIA.

(As a section of Sohdago, Nutt., Gen. Am., Vol. II., p. 162. Dercanp. Prod.,
Vol. V., p. 341.)

Flowers heterogamous; liguli minute, twice as numerous as the discal, sub-
campanulate florets. Capituli small, oblong or ovate; involucrum imbri-
cate, the scales agglutinated. Receptacle deeply alveolate, fringed. Ache-
nia oblong-ovoid, villous, contracted at the summit; pappus comose, consist-
ing of a small number of scabrous hairs.—Perennial, much-branching herbs,
with entire linear leaves; flowers corymbose in sessile clusters, yellow.—
Allied to Nidorella and Brachyris, rather than to Solidago.

Euthamia graminfola; angles of the stem and veins of the leaves minutely

hirsute; leaves lanceolate-linear, three to five-nerved; corymb compound; dis-

cal florets eight to ten; liguli fifteen to twenty, shorter than the disk.
Has. From Canada to Florida.

Vii.—4 G&

326 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Euthamia tenuifola; smooth, upper part of the stem angular; leaves narrow-
linear, mostly one-nerved, minutely punctate, somewhat rough on the margin;
corymb diffuse, flowers solitary and sessile, in threes; discal florets five to six,
liguli about the length of the disk, ten to twelve. 8. microcephala; leaves very
slender, capituli generally pedicellate, smaller. y. glutinosa; capituli turbi-
nate, pedicellate, resinously agglutinated.

Has. From New Jersey to East Florida. p. Alabama. y. East Florida.

Euthamia * occidentale; very smooth and virgately branched, the branches and
stem terete, or scarcely angled; flowers large, in simple, terminal, contracted
clusters; leaves lanceolate-linear, narrow, scabrous on the margin, mostly one-
nerved, or obscurely three-nerved; discal florets about fourteen to fifteen, radial
twenty-two or more.

Has. Banks of the Oregon and Wahlamet, and Lewis’ River, in the Rocky Mountains;
chiefly on the sand and gravel bars, as well as islands. A tall, very smooth species, bearing very
few large flowers, chiefly in small, contracted, terminal clusters, and seldom, if ever, in threes,

rarely corymbose. Scales of the involucrum linear-lanceolate, acute.

SOLIDAGO. (Linn.)

* Racemes secund.

Solidago canadensis.
Has. On Wappatoo Island and the Banks of the Oregon and Wahlamet.

Solidago procera. 2. * sahictfoha; leaves linear-lanceolate, subserrate, smooth,

scabrous on the margin, obsoletely three-nerved, flowers larger.
Has. With the above.

Solidago serotina.
’ Has. With the above. Achenium smooth.

Solidago * Pitchert, (Nutt. in Acad. Nat. Sci., Vol. VIL, p. 101.) Very
smooth and robust, leaves cuneate-elliptic, or cuneate-oblong, acute, sharply
serrate, three-nerved, above lanceolate; racemes secund, contracted, pyramidal
or corymbose; scales of the involucrum linear-lanceolate, somewhat obtuse;
discal and radial florets about ten each; the liguli shorter than the disk; ache-
nium pubescent.

Haz. On the banks of the Oregon and Wahlamet; in Arkansa, (Pitcher;) also near Salem, N..

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 327

Carolina. A stout species, three to four feet high, allied to S. serotina, but with a cuneate leaf,
and pubescent achenium.

Sohdago * elongata; stem puberulous; leaves oblong-lanceolate, cuneate,
acute, sparingly and irregularly serrate, scabrous on the margin, below ob-
scurely three-nerved; panicle elongated; racemes erect, or somewhat recurved ;
rays narrow, as long as the disk, ten to sixteen; achenium pubescent. @. Leaves

longer, and the racemes more secund.

Has. Wappatoo Island and the plains of the Oregon. Remarkable for the great elongation of
the panicle, often half a foot long, narrowly pyramidal, three to four inches wide in the widest
part. Rays very narrow, numerous, two-toothed; discal florets eight to twelve; pedicels and
rachis pubescent. Receptacle deeply alveolate. It has the aspect of S. puberuwla, but the stem is
very slenderly and minutely pubescent.

Solidago Missouriensis; (NutT. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Vol. V., p. 7.)
Rocky Mountains. From specimens which I obtained since publishing this
species, I find that it belongs to the first section of the genus, having the lower
leaves three-nerved, often distantly serrulate, and the whole plant, with its
thickish polished leaves, perfectly smooth, though a little scabrous on the mar-
gin. Discal florets about twelve, rays ten, shorter than the disk. Achenium

slightly pubescent.
Has. Missouri, Arkansas, the Rocky Mountains, and near Chapel-Hill, North Carolina.

Solidago radula; (Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL. p. 102.)
Arkansa. ‘This species has some affinity with S. rugosa, but the leaves have
no rugosity, and are cuneate-oblong, above ovate-lanceolate, the lower serrated
distantly towards the apex. Scales of the involucrum oblong-ovate, very
smooth and brownish. Rays about six, the length of the disk. Nearly allied
to the S. scabrida, DECAND.

* & Racemes erect.

Sohdago hirsuta; (Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Vol. VII., p. 103.) Very
similar to S. bzcolor, but the rays are yellow and smaller, and the leaves lanceo-
late or oblong-lanceolate.

Sohdago *nana; somewhat cinereous and pulverulently pubescent, dwarf,
many stems from the same root; lower and radical leaves spathulate, obtuse,
entire, or subserrulate at the apex, stem leaves linear, narrowed below; ramuli

328 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

fastigiate, subcorymbose; bractes linear; involucrum nearly smooth, scales

ovate; rays about seven, oblong, as long as the disk; achenium pubescent.
Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, near Lewis’ River of the Shoshonee. About a span high,

with a large, black, almost woody root. Stem leaves small, radical ones about one and a half

inches by half an inch wide; scales of the involucrum unusually broad, pubescent on the margin,

rays conspicuous. Apparently allied to §. nemoralis, though very distinct and alpine.

Solidago *Cahfornica; villous and cinereous; leaves nearly all equal and
somewhat crowded, oblong-lanceolate and acute at each end, near the apex
sometimes very slightly serrulate; panicle elongated, nearly equal; scales of
the involucrum lanceolate, acute, somewhat pubescent; rays about nine; ache-
nium pubescent.

Has. Near St. Barbara, in Upper California. ‘Two to three feet high. Discal florets about
nine, as well as the rays. Allied to the preceding, but softly villous and acute leaved; the stem

leaves are also nearly as large as the radical ones, about an inch or an inch and a half long, by less
than half an inch wide.

Solidago * glutinosa; smooth; above, as well as the involucrum, viscid, with
a yellow resin; stem angular; leaves oblong-lanceolate, sessile, narrowed below,
serrulate, acute, scabrous on the margin; panicle spiciform, simple or com-
pound; scales of the involucrum ovate-oblong; rays about ten, oblong, biden-
tate and conspicuous; achenium pubescent.

Has. On the plains of the Oregon and Wahlamet rivers, not uncommon. Allied to 8S. Virga-
Aurea, which it resembles in habit; also to the S. stmplex. About two feet high, with a brown
stem, angular above; lower leaves three or four inches long, by about half an inch wide, the radi-
cal ones attenuated into long petioles. Upper part of the stem, bractes and involucrum indued
with an orange, varnish like resin, of a strong aromatic and rather unpleasant taste. Rays about
eight to ten; discal florets about five or six; pappus of the rays a little shorter.

Solidago limonifolia. A narrow leaved variety.
Has. Coast of Upper California, near St. Barbara.

Solkdago multiradiata; v.s. in Herb Schweinitz, from Labrador. It appears
to be a depressed specimen of S. lecocarpum, Decanp. ‘The only important
difference is that the sepals are somewhat wider; the achenium is equally
smooth.

Sohdago * corymbosa; lower leaves oblong-lanceolate, serrated somewhat at
the apex, scarcely ciliate, the cauline leaves (very few) entire, ovate-amplexi-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 329

caule, acute; stem smooth, except towards the summit; flowers in an irregular
corymb; rays about ten to twelve, as long as the disk; scales of the involucrum

linear-lanceolate, smooth; achenium pubescent.

Has. The central chain of the Rocky Mountains, in forests. S. multiradiata, Hoox., Vol. Il.,
p. 5, not of Aiton. Closely allied to 8. multiradiata, for which it appears to be taken by Hooker
in Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 5, but is, in fact, nearer to some varieties of S. Virga-urea, having

pubescent achenia.

* PRIONOPSIS.

(ApLopappus. Section]. Lertacuenium, Decand. in part.)

Capitulum hemispherical, many-flowered; rays numerous, (two or more series, )
entire, feminine. Discal florets slender and cylindric, mostly abortive. Stig-
mas of the ray smooth and very slender, scarcely exserted ; those of the disk
pubescent, rather short, filiform and obtuse, somewhat compressed. Recep-
tacle slightly alveolate, flat. Involucrum imbricated, of many series of some-
what agglutinated, squarrose sepals, with leafy points. Achenium short and
smooth, cylindric-ovoid, contracted at the summit; pappus rigidly setose,
longer than the florets, scabrous, unequal, about ten of the sete longer and
thicker; pappus of the ray shorter and of fewer rays, deciduous.—A stout,
herbaceous biennial, with the habit and entire aspect of Grindela glutinosa ;
leaves alternate, ovate, obtuse, very conspicuously and distinctly serrate-
ciliate; flowers wholly yellow, large, fastigiate; branchlets one-flowered.—
(The name from apiar, a sam, and ous, resemblance, in allusion to the ele-
gant serratures of the leaves.)

Prionopsis cihata. Donia cihata, Nutt. Aplopappus ciliatus, DEcaND., Vol.

V., p. 346. When the fruit is mature the pappus is so deciduous that the

achenium may be supposed naked, it being thrown off, or nearly so, by the
enlargement of the fruit, with which it does not progress in growth.

APLOPAPPUS. (Cassini.)

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; liguli feminine, in one series; discal florets
hermaphrodite, fertile, five-toothed, tubular. Receptacle rather flat, foveo-

vil.—4 H

330 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

late, or alveolate, and fringed. Involucrum, scales loosely imbricate, subli-
near, acute. Achenia oblong, somewhat terete, or turbinate, densely serice-
ous. Pappus setose, of several series, unequal; that of the liguli shorter,
with the rays less numerous.—South American shrubs, or undershrubs,
usually with alternate, sharply serrated, or bristly toothed leaves. Capitu-

lum terminal, often pedunculate. Flowers wholly yellow.

Aplopappus cespitosus; puberulous, stemless; leaves in rosulate clusters, cu-

neate-oboval, ciliately serrate, serratures bristly ; scape elongated, one-flowered.

Has. Chili, (Dr. Styles.) Leaves about an inch long, half an inch wide. Scape half a foot
long. Capitulum large, hemispherical; rays about forty; pappus bristly, scabrous, brownish;
achenium densely sericeous and shining. Sepals linear, acute. Root-stock woody.

Aplopappus *cuneifolius; suffruticose, smooth and viscid, dwarf; leaves cune-

ate, obtuse, serrate, serratures without bristles; stem short, scapoid, one-flow-

ered; sepals very unequal, linear, acuminate; rays about twelve. di

Has. With the preceding, (Dr. Styles.) A much smaller species. Peduncle two to three
inches long. Pappus bristly, scabrous. Achenium densely sericeous and short. ;

§ *Gymnocoma. Flowers discoid; corolla not dilated; stigmas filiform, acute,
hirsute.

Aplopappus * pinnatifidus; stemless, smooth and glandular; leaves rosulate,
linear, pinnatifid, seements bristly ; scape very long, with small subulate leaves;
sepals with bristly, acuminate points; florets numerous, discoid.

Has. Chili, (Dr. Styles.) Achenia silky. Root-stock woody. Allied to Eriocarpum, but
with a different stigma and habit.

* HOMOPAPPUS.

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered, obovate or hemispherical. Rays
feminine, about a single series, rarely infertile; discal florets slender, tubu-
lar, five-toothed, closed, fertile. Stigmas filiform, acute, hirsute. Recepta-
cle alveolate, flat, dentate. Involucrum imbricate, in several series, scales
more or less agglutinated, oblong, or ovate, with foliaceous, spreading tips.
Achenium linear, angular, subcylindric, mostly smooth, (pubescent in the

doubtful sections ActinapHoria and Myriantuus.) Pappus setose, scabrous,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 331

nearly equal, and similar in the rays.—Perennial, dwarf herbs, of an inele-
gant aspect, with alternate, nearly entire, or sharply serrated, spathulate,
rigid, coriaceous leaves; capituli mostly sessile, terminal, and clustered in
the axills of the leaves, rarely fastigiate. Flowers wholly yellow, and rather
large, as in Chrysopsis. Allied to Sokdago, particularly to S. confertiflora;
and S. spathulata, of Mexico, appears to be a genuine species. From Aplo-
pappus it differs much in habit, involucrum, achenium, &c.—('The name is

given in allusion to the similarity of the pappus in the ray and disk.)

Homopappus * paniculatus; smooth, leaves spathulate-lanceolate, acute, cau-
line amplexicaule, rarely here and there subserrulate; branches subfastigiate ;
capituli in subterminal clusters, sessile; involucrum obconic; rays eight to ten,
about twice the length of the disk; achenium slightly hirsute at the summit;
scales of the involucrum ovate-oblong, obtuse.

Has. Plains of the Oregon, not far from Walla-Walla, particularly the prairie called the Grand
Ronde. About a foot high, growing in considerable quantities in wet places. Leaves three to
four inches long, by half an inch to an inch wide, the radical much attenuated. Florets twenty-
five or thirty, the pappus about their length; scales of the involucrum closely imbricated in
three or four series, the scales rigid and membranaceous on the margins, with green, foliaceous,
subsquarrose tips. The involucrum almost resembles that of a Pferonia. Pappus brown and

rigid; achenium rather long.

Homopappus * glomeratus; smooth; leaves spathulate-lanceolate, very acute,
generally entire, cauline amplexicaule, linear-lanceolate, or oblong; capituli
axillary, and clustered towards the summit of the simple stem, or its branches,
sessile, roundish and subcylindric, glutinous and squarrose; rays about eight
to ten; achenium very smooth, subcylindric.

Has. With the above, to which it is closely allied, but the involucrum is nearly round, and the
achenium perfectly smooth, pale and shining, linear and subcylindric, somewhat compressed, and
narrowed at each extremity. Sometimes (perhaps when the stem has been injured at the summit)
it branches fastigiately, but it usually presents an interrupted spike, with leaves interposed between

the clusters, which are about three together.

-Homopappus * argutus; smooth; leaves spathulate-lanceolate, subacuminate,
sharply serrate, cauline amplexicaule; capituli clustered, sessile, axillary and
terminal; scales of the glutinous involucrum subsquarrose, lanceolate, acute;
rays ten to twelve; achenium smooth.

332 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. With the above, and on the plains of the Oregon. About a foot high, very similar to the
preceding, but with the leaves strongly serrated. Pappus rufous, very rigid; involucrum obconic.
These three species have a strong resemblance to Grindelia, are all more or less glutinous and
resinous, so as to have a bitterish taste; the leaves in the present species are often sprinkled with

resinous atoms.

Homopappus? spathulatus. Solidago spathulata, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 339.
I have not seen this plant, but from the character given, and the large number
of florets, it appears to belong to this genus. Is the pappus setose?

Homopappus? squarrosus. Aplopappus squarrosus, Hoox. and Arnov. Bot.
Beech., p. 146.

§ I. *Myrianruus.—Capitulum nearly spherical, with many narrow rays; dis-
cal florets all fertile; pappus barbellate towards the apex, persistent; achenium
compressed, angular; involucrum foliaceous.—W ith the habit of the preceding.

Homopappus *racemosus; smooth, summit of the simple stem and involu-
erum pubescent; leaves lanceolate, serrate, acute; above oblong-lanceolate, am-
plexicaule, often nearly entire; capituli few, racemose, (three to seven); scales
of the involucrum oblong, leafy, rather obtuse, sometimes lanceolate; rays fif+ -
teen to twenty; achenium subsericeous.

Has. Plains of the Wahlamet. About twelve to eighteen inches high. Leaves coriaceous,
smooth, except the uppermost, narrow lanceolate, or oblong-lanceolate, acute, attenuated below in
the radical ones. Serratures pungently acute. Flowers pedicellate. Involucrum hemispherical,
scales imbricated in about three series. Pappus rigid, scabrous, fulvous, somewhat barbellated to-
wards the extremities. Achenium as in the preceding, but smaller, (as well as the plant,) shining,
pale testaceous, covered with sparse hairs, which do not conceal the striatures.

Homopappus unflorus. Dona uniflora, Hooker, Vol. II., p. 25, t. 124.
Rays apparently about twenty-five.

Subgenus.—* AcTINAPHORIA.+

Rays numerous, fertile or infertile. Stigma filiform, acuminate, pubescent.
Achenium linear-oblong, subsericeous; pappus of one or two series of sca-

brous hairs, often barbellate towards the tips, some of them thinner and

} From axzw, a ray, and opepra, sterile, in allusion to the infertile rays.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 333

shorter than the rest.—Perennial, alpine, tuberous rooted plants, with some-
what the habit of Arnica. Stem and lanceolate, serrated leaves smooth or

lanuginous, the former one or few-flowered, subracemose.

Homopappus *Inuloides; leaves lanceolate, subserrulate, softly lanuginous;
stem one or few-flowered; sepals nearly equal, lanuginous; rays three-toothed,
forty to fifty; achenium subsericeous.

Has. In the moist, open, grassy plains of the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the
Platte. From three or four inches to a foot high. ‘The root a dark, turbinate tuber, clad, at the
summit, with numerous fibrous, reticulated vestiges of former years’ growth. Leaves lanceolate,
often sparingly cartilaginously serrulate, the primary ones smooth; the rest of the plant, as well as
the involucrum, softly lanuginous with a long, white, loose, woolly pubescence. Stem leaves ses-
sile, the lower much attenuated below. Capitulum hemispherical the involucrum flat, and its
sepals nearly equal. Rays oblong, three-toothed, shorter than the disk, between forty and fifty;
the discal florets one hundred and twenty, or more, small, tubular, shortly five-toothed; style ge-

nerally included. Leaves two to four inches long, a quarter to half an inch wide.

Homopappus *multiflorus; stem and petioles deciduously lanuginous; flowers
racemose, branchlets one or few-flowered; leaves lanceolate, serrate, acute, al-
most coriaceous, the cauline linear, small and sessile; capituli hemispherical,
pedicellate; sepals oblong, in about two rows; rays twenty to twenty-five;
achenium subsericeous. Donia lanceolata? Hoox., Vol. I1., p. 25.

Has. Prairies on the east and west side of the Rocky Mountains. From six inches to two feet
high. Allied to the preceding, but much larger, the leaves at length, or from the first smooth,
sharply and pungently serrulate; rays oblong, slightly three-toothed, longer than the wide disk.
Involucrum almost flat, slightly pubescent, a little leafy externally, shorter than the pappus, which
is slender. Flowers about the size of a Daisy. Several stems from the same root, with leaves
sometimes so small as to appear almost as naked as scapes. Radical leaves four to five inches
long, attenuated into long petioles. Root tap-shaped, crowned with numerous fibrous vestiges of
former leaves. Stem sometimes only three-flowered, sometimes with many one to two-flowered

branches, from near the base to the summit; occasionally subdecumbent.

PYRROCOMA. (Hooker.)

Pyrrocoma *radiata; smooth, leaves spathulate-obovate, cauline ovate-lan-
ceolate, apiculate, serrate, amplexicaule, radical attenuated, entire, as well as
the lower ones; flowers few, very large, fastigiate, axillary and terminal, sub-

ViI.—4 I

304 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

corymbose, sometimes glomerate and sessile; rays about twenty-five; discai
florets very numerous,

Has. Plains of Oregon, near Walla-Walla. A low, robust plant, about twelve to eighteen
inches high. Leaves rigid and coriaceous, four or five inches long, the lower one and a half to
two inches broad. Capituli nearly as large as those of Inula Helenium. Involucrum almost ex-
actly like that of Liatris sphexroidea, foliaceous, scarcely at all squarrose, the sepals ovate, acute,
the lower bracteoles serrate ; rays narrow; discal florets narrow tubular, not expanding nor ex-
serted beyond the pappus. Stigma obtuse, flat, pubescent. Rays very narrow, shorter than the
disk. Pappus rufous, shining, stiff and bristly, distinctly barbellate and thickened at the extremi-
ties, in two or more series, somewhat unequal, persistent, very like that of the genus Pteronia.
Achenium very long, about the length of the pappus, oblong-linear, somewhat narrowed at each

end, smooth, pale and shining, convex externally, internally somewhat angular.

*STENOTUS.

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered, hemispherical or ovate. Rays in a
single series, rather distant. Discal florets tubular, cyathiform, border five-
cleft, spreading. Branches of the stigma filiform, flat, puberulous, exserted.
Receptacle alveolate, dentate. Involucrum imbricate, scales ovate, erect,
rigid, with broad membranaceous margins, (rarely bracteolate.) Achenium
oblong, compressed, sericeous. Pappus setaceous, shorter than the florets,
unequal, scabrous.—Low alpine perennials, with almost woody roots, and
alternate, linear, entire, coriaceous, mostly smooth leaves; stems numerous
from the same cespitose caudex, dwarf and scapoid, one to three-flowered;
flowers often large, wholly yellow. Although, in the general character, this

genus approaches the preceding and Aplopappus, the habit is peculiar and
wholly different from either.—(The name from otevorns, narrowness, in allu-
sion to the narrowness of the leaves, &c.)

Stenotus acaulis; very dwarf and cespitose; leaves: lanceolate-linear, pun-
gently acute, scabrous and almost cinereous, three-nerved; scapoid stem one-
flowered ; involucrum hemispherical, scales membranaceous, acute; rays about
twelve; achenium sericeous. Chrysopsis acaule; Nuvv. in Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., Vol. VIE., p. 38, t. iii., fig. 1.

Has. Near the borders of Little Godin River, in the Rocky Mountains. Flowering in June.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 335

A small, tufted alpine, only three or four inches high. Stems like scapes, bearing one or two small

leaves.

Stenotus cespitosus; somewhat cespitose or tufted; leaves linear-sublanceo-
late, smooth, three-nerved, scabrous on the margin; stems scapoid, one to four-
flowered; involucrum hemispherical, the membranaceous scales ovate, acute;
rays about twelve; achenium sericeous. Chrysopsis cespitosus; Journ. Acad.,
Vol. VIL., p. 34.

Haz. Towards the sources of the Missouri and the Platte, in the range of the Rocky Mountains.
More than twice as large as the preceding. Root somewhat ligneous. Leaves very acute, those
of the stem two or three in number, wide, sessile, and somewhat lanceolate; peduncles very long.
Pappus white; achenium brightly and closely sericeous, linear-oblong. Stigmas much exserted.
Very nearly allied to the preceding.

Stenotus * Armerioides; sormewhat cespitose or tufted, caudex ligneous; leaves
linear, slightly lanceolate, more or less glutinous, as well as the involucrum,
scabrous on the margin; stems almost wholly naked, scapoid, one to three-
flowered, peduncles very long, scales of the short involucrum broadly mem-
branaceous, oval, obtuse; rays about twelve; stigma lanceolate; achenium dense-
ly sericeous, about the length of the short white pappus.

Has. Towards the sources of the Platte, in the Rocky Mountain range, on shelving rocks.
About a span high, with a large, distinctly woody root, of great length. Leaves three or four
inches long, little more than a line wide, rigid and coriaceous, resinously viscid, in a slight degree
three-nerved, all linear, about two leaves on the stem; peduncles two to three inches long; the
stems appearing entirely like scapes. Involucrum imbricated in about two series, much shorter
than the florets. Stigma unusually thick and large, puberulous. Achenium very thickly covered
with silky hairs, as in the true species of Aplopappus. ‘The plant, at first glance, has much the
appearance of an Armeria. Allied to the preceding, but perfectly distinct.

§ I. * Oonorsis.—Jnvolucrum small, ovate; achenium linear, pappus fulvous.

Stenotus * multicaulis; dwarf, subcespitose, many-stemmed; leaves linear,
radical obtuse, cauline acute; stems slender, one to three-flowered ; flowers ses-
sile; involucrum ovate, lanuginous, scales acuminate; rays about eight; ache-
nium pubescent, linear.

Has. On rocks, on the western declivity of the Rocky Mountains. A remarkable species, forming
dense tufts, with leaves two to three inches long and about a line wide, the primary ones obtuse,
the rest acute, the upper ones pubescent. Stems many, scarcely rising more than an inch above the

leaves, slender like peduncles, terminating in one to three fastigiate flowers, which are sessile, or

336 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

immediately seated upon the uppermost leaf; involucrum small and ovate, composed of two rows
of ovate, acuminate sepals, the tips somewhat herbaceous and projecting. Rays oblong, about
eight, feminine, slightly three-toothed, longer than the narrow disk; discal florets tubular, cyathi-
form, the summit five-cleft. Stigma lanceolate, pubescent; achenium narrow, slightly pubescent

when mature, linear-subcylindric? Pappus short, scanty, scabrous, brownish.

* PENTACH ATA.

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered, hemispherical. Rays feminine in
two or three series, oblong. Discal florets tubular, oblique, ringent and five-
cleft at the summit. Receptacle punctate, naked, convex. Involucrum
loosely imbricate; scales linear, flat, acute, with broad membranaceous mar-
eins, in two or three series. Achenium turbinate, angular, hirsute; pappus
consisting, in ray and disk, of five scabrous bristles, united at the base, which
is not deciduous.—A small and slender annual of Upper California, branch-
ing from the base, branches divaricate, one-flowered, fastigiate. Leaves al-
ternate, entire, nearly glabrous and filiform. Flowers wholly bright yellow ;
the rays slightly three-toothed.—(The name alludes to the pappus of five
bristles. ) |

Pentacheia aurea.

Has. In dry plains near the sea, in the vicinity of St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in
April. A very elegant, though often minute plant, from two or three inches to a foot high, branch-
ing usually from the base in an umbellate manner, the branches one-flowered. Leaves, on their
margin, as well as the upper part of the stem, somewhat sparingly pilose, the hairs rather long and
soft. Flower about the size of a Daisy, almost orange-yellow, with twenty to fifty rays, much
longer than the disk. Involucrum that of the true Aplopappus, the scales exactly similar with
each other, linear-lanceolate and sharply acuminate, membranaceous, and somewhat lacerate on the
margin, the centre green and one-nerved. Anthers without sete at base. Discal florets somewhat
curved and ringent, or deeper cleft above. Stigmas filiform, very hirsute, acute or acuminate, at
length much exserted. Stigmas of the rays long and smooth; the ray simple, or not labiate. In
habit this plant appears to approach some of the Chilian species of Chetanthera. It seems, also,
though remotely, allied to Chetopappa, but is wholly distinct from all the other Curysocoms#, with
which it is associated. Allied to the Muristacr%, but with the stigma of Aster.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 337

Subtribe.—BACCHARIDE:

Baccuanis *salicifolia; shrubby, smooth, branches angular, leaves mostly ob-
long, or oblong-lanceolate, subdenticulate, uppermost nearly linear, entire, vis-
cid; capituli sessile, clustered, involucrum ovate, as well as the smooth scales.

Has. Banks of the Arkansa, nearly allied to B. glomeruliflora. More or less resinously punc-

tate. Leaves very obscurely three-nerved, attenuated into a petiole.

Baccharis pilularis; Ducanp., Vol. V., p. 407.

Has. Near St. Diego, Upper California, and Monterrey. In my specimens of the fertile plant
the leaves are often strongly denticulate, three-fourths of an inch long, by half an inch in width;
the capituli solitary, or by threes, at the ends of the branchlets, and sometimes, also, aggregated
into a considerable panicle. Achenia smooth, with ten grooves, the pappus of moderate length.
A shrub three or four feet high. It appears to be subject to the attack of some insect, which causes

excrescences on the branches, and hence, I suppose, arises the specific name.

Baccharis Pingrea; Drcanp., Vol. V., p. 159.
Has. In the vicinity of St. Diego, Upper California. Young leaves and branchlets somewhat

glutinous. Achenium with very few striatures.

Subtribe—_TARCHONANTHE Zi:

*DIAPERIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous, flowers all tubular, the rays femi-
nine, slender, in several series; discal florets two or three, masculine, with a
crenate, four-toothed border. Receptacle flat, wholly paleaceous, the palea
obtuse, exterior chaffy, the interior lanuginous, separately involving the dis-
cal florets. Involucrum consisting of mere leafy, irregular bractes. Ache-
nium compressed, oboval, smooth, and without pappus.—A small, tomentose
annual, with entire, sessile leaves, the stem simple, branching simply from
the base, or terminating in a proliferous capitulum; the involucrum irregu-
lar; flowers in sessile clusters, made up of conglomerations of five capituli,
imbedded in a dense cottony tomentum, interspersed with leafy bractes;
capituli cylindric-ovate.—(The name from Ava@epua, to pass through. In
allusion to the proliferous inflorescence. ) |

Vil.—4. K

338 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Diaperia prohfera. Evaz prohfera; Nutr. in Decanp., Vol. V., p. 459.

Has. On the banks of Red River, near the confluence of the Kiamesha. About two to four
inches high. Stem mostly simple, though sometimes branching from the summit of the root.
Primary capitulum one half to three-fourths of an inch in diameter, sending out from its disk one
to three branches, each terminating in a similar smaller capitulum, ‘There appears to be no pro-
per involucrum, the outermost scales presenting the slender, filiform, female florets. The ache-
nium seems similar with that of Evax pygmea.

Diaperia? multicauls. Evax multicauls; Decanp. Prod. V., p- 459. This
plant I have not seen, but imagine it may belong to the present genus.

* STYLOCLINE.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; flowers all tubular; radial feminine,
in many series, filiform, (with a mere vestige of corolla,) mostly concealed
in a central cleft of the subcarinated, concave, chaffy scale of the receptacle;
central masculine florets three or four, four-toothed, minute. Receptacle
naked, slender, columnar, wholly bracteolate, the apex producing a few
long, chaffy hairs. Involucrum imbricate, of a simple series of (about five)
concave, dilated, ovate scales; fructiferous scales broad ovate, membranace-
ous, with an herbaceous centre, the back and base below densely laniferous.
Achenium minute, oblique, cylindric-oblong, very acute at the base, smooth
and shining, (apparently a naked seed!?)—Annual herbs of Upper Califor-
nia, with the whole aspect of Gnaphalium ; decumbent and diffusely branched
from the base, canescently lanuginous, with small, linear, entire, sessile
leaves. Flowers in axillary and terminal sessile clusters, of a yellowish
white, the scales diaphanous and shining. Seeds, or achenia enclosed in the
base of the scales, which are deciduous.—(The name from o7vA0s, a column,
and yun, a female; in allusion to the very singular columnar receptacle. )
Stylochine * Gnaphaloides.

Has. Near Monterrey, Upper California. Stem much branched, diffusely spreading, decum-
bent, about six inches high, branching from the neck of the root, more or less canescently tomen-
tose. Leaves small, oblong, linear, sessile, three or four lines long, about a line wide. Flowers

in terminal sessile clusters, partly sheathed by a number of approximating leaves. Capitulum
ovate, made up of imbricated, rhomboidal-ovate, concave, receptacular scales; the involucrum of a

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 339

very few similar, empty scales. Scales membranaceous, diaphanous, shining, yellowish-white,
with a greenish oblong centre, internally with a cleft fold, usually enclosing the greater part of the
floret, and always the seed, on the back, at and towards the base, densely tomentose. The recep-
tacle, from which the fruetiferous scales readily become detached, appears to be a narrow punctate
cylinder, or rachis, like that of a spike, round which the scales are imbricated. Stigmas bifid, fili-
form, very slender. Of the floret it is difficult to detect more than a mere hyaline rudiment. Seed
(rather than achenium) dark brown, minute, cylindric-oblong, somewhat compressed, obtuse,
smooth and shining, very acute at base, with only a single thin integument and its lining, as in a
naked seed. Somewhat allied to Evax and Micropus, but at the same time very distinct.

MICROPUS. (Linn.)

Capitulum few-flowered, heterogamous, flowers all tubular; rays about five,
feminine, filiform; discal florets three to five, masculine, five-toothed. Invo-
lucrum about five-leaved, conspicuous or minute. Receptacle small, brac-
teolate, except the centre, the bractes at length cartilaginous, folded inwards
closely over the achenium, gibbous and compressed at the sides, (sometimes
rostrate,) tomentose. Achenium obovate, flatly compressed, naked, without
pappus, and deciduous with the bractes.—Small annuals of Europe and
North America, arachnoidly tomentose, resembling Filago or Gnaphalium.
Leaves alternate, capituli clustered. The presence of an involucrum, and

the supposed involucrum being bractes, this genus approaches Evaz.

§ II. * Rayncnoteris.—Involucrum five-leaved, paleaceous, fructiferous scales
rostrate, with chaffy points.

Micropus *angustifolius; © erect, simple or branching from the base, tall and
slender, tomentose; leaves linear, acute, above linear-lanceolate; clusters of
flowers lateral and terminal, densely lanuginous; discal florets about five, mas-
culine three to five.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Six to eight inches high, leaves erect and somewhat
crowded, about an inch long and a line wide. Stem often simple. ‘The capituli like dense, round
masses of wool. Female florets almost obsolete. Stigma scarcely exserted. Achenium smooth
and compressed. |

340 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

.* PSILOCARPHUS.

Capituli many-flowered, heterogamous; flowers all tubular; rays in several se»
ries, filiform, feminine; discal florets hermaphrodite, sterile, about five. In-
volucrum none, or mere foliaceous, irregular bractes. Receptacle convex,
elevated, bracteolate, except the centre, bractes gibbous, subcylindric, reti-
culately membranaceous, folded inwards over the female florets and achenia.
Achenium cylindric-oblong, smooth and shining, loosely infolded and decidu-
ous with the bracteoles—Dwarf annuals of North-Western America, with
the whole aspect of Micropus, diffusely branched, and canescently tomen-
tose; flowers glomerate, lateral and terminal.—(The name from qos, slen-

der, and xapos, chaff. In allusion to the membranous bracteal scales. )

Psilocarphus * globiferus; canescently tomentose, beneath more densely;
prostrate and diffusely branched, leaves oblong-linear, the floral ones broader,
obtuse; capituli lateral and terminal; female florets twenty-five to twenty-eight;
masculine five to eight; scales of the receptacle gibbous, rostrate, involute.—
Micropus globiferus? Decanp. and BertERo, Vol. V., p. 460.

Has. Round St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in April. Not an inch high, spread-
ing out five or six inches, beneath covered with a long, soft, white wool, above less densely canes-
cent, centre of the receptacle naked, convex and elevated; masculine florets very minute. Fruc-
tiferous scales reticulately membranaceous, not in the least rigid, subcylindric, gibbous, with a
short rostrum.

Psilocarphus *brevissimus; canescently and very softly tomentose; stem
minute and very dwarf, producing mostly a single capitulum; leaves oblong-
lanceolate, acute; female florets about eight; fructiferous scale ovate-oblong,
without beak; achenium almost linear.—Micropus minimus? Decanp., Vol. V.,
p-. 461.

Has. Plains of the Oregon River, in inundated tracts. Extremely dwarf, (perhaps not always
so.) About four lines high, the solitary capitulum, though rather large, sessile on about the third
set of leaves, and so downy as to look like a pellet of cotton, the fruit-bearing scale nearly quite
straight, scarcely gibbous, larger than usual; the achenium narrow, but longer than in the pre-
ceding, to which it, in fact, is closely allied. It does not appear to branch at all, and therefore is

scarcely the Micropus minimus; which, however, as well as the M. globiferus, no doubt belongs
to the present genus.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 341

Psilocarphus * Oregonus; every where canescently tomentose, procumbent,
and diffusely branched; leaves linear, acute, with minute sphaceolous tips; fe-
male florets about twenty-five; masculine five; fructiferous scales uncinate.

Has. In inundated places near the Oregon and outlet of the Wahlamet. Nearly allied to
[2. globiferus, but with much narrower leaves, and none of the long arachnoid hairs of that species

so conspicuous on the under side; the scales of the receptacle are also smaller.

Psilocarphus *tenellus; ascending, slender and much branched, below smooth;
leaves spathulate-linear, narrow; capituli mostly terminal, subtended by ap-
proximating, canescently tomentose, spathulate-oblong, acute leaves; feminine
florets about twenty-five; masculine about five; achenium minute, the scales

with uncinate tips.
Has. Near St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in April. About two inches high, slen-

derly and diffusely branched. Very distinct from the preceding, having very narrow, smooth
leaves below, and almost an involucrum of broader canescent leaves above. Flowers minute.

Tribe IV.—_SENECIONIDEL.
Division II.—Si.PHtex.

SILPHIUM. (Linn.)

Silphium *radula; exceedingly scabrous; stem terete, leaves alternate, cor-
date-ovate, acuminate, semiamplexicaule, the lower ones subserrate; flowers
few, corymbose, rays about thirty; outer sepals ovate, the inner wide, ovate,

obtuse; wing of the smooth achenium very wide, the awns confluent.
Has. Plains of Arkansa. Allied to S. Asferiscus. Three or four feet high, leaves three or
four inches long, by one and a half inches wide. Capitulum large, the larger sepals three-fourths

of an inch wide.

Slphium * speciosum; stem terete, grooved, smooth and glaucous; capituli
corymbose; leaves opposite, the uppermost alternate, cordate-ovate, acuminate,
amplexicaule, the lower subserrate, above, as well as the outer sepals, lanceo-
late, or ovate-lanceolate, the inner broad ovate, acute; rays about twenty-eight

to thirty ; wing of the smooth achenium very wide, the awns confluent.
Has. With the above, to which it is nearly allied, though distinct in the leaves being strictly
opposite, the stem glaucous, &e. A very showy species, as large, or larger than the preceding.

Silphium * lanceolatum; stem terete, above hirsute, somewhat scabrous;
leaves opposite, lanceolate, acuminate, shortly petiolate, repandly dentate,

vil.—4 L

342 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

above nearly entire and sessile; corymb few-flowered, contracted ; outer sepals
lanceolate, acute, the inner ovate; rays about twelve.

Has. Near Millidgeville, Georgia. (Dr. Boykin, who favoured me with the specimen.) Leaves
three to four inches long, about an inch wide, much acuminated. Allied to S. Asteriscus.

Silphium reniforme; radical leaves reniform-cordate, acute, repand, smooth,
beneath very scabrous; stem naked, divaricate; sepals oval, obtuse, smooth’;

rays about eight.—S. reniforme; RaFinesque. Nearly allied to S. terebinthi-
naceum, but with different leaves.

BERLANDIERA. (Decand.)

§ I. * SILPHIASTRUM.

Discal florets sterile, with a simple clavate stigma. Achenium subelliptic,
compressed, externally convex and angular, entire at the summit, and with-
out winged margins or pappus.—Perennial, herbaceous plants of the south-
ern states. More or less softly tomentose or villous; leaves deeply toothed,
or sinuately pinnatifid, alternate; capituli solitary or corymbose; liguli yel-
low, bifid at the apex, externally puberulous, with a very short tube, about
ten-nerved, with smooth, elongated, bifid, ligulate, obtuse stigmas. Ache-
nium villous on the inner side——With the whole aspect of Silphium, but

the achenium like that of Encelia compared with that of Helianthus.

Berlandiera * longifolia; stem and peduncles lanuginous; leaves ovate-lan-
ceolate, dentate, shortly petiolate, beneath softly villous, not canescent; corymb —
contracted; capituli pedunculate; involucrum imbricated in nearly a simple
series, the sepals ovate; rays eight.—Szlphium reticulatum? Pursu, but nothing
certain can be ascertained from his description.

Has. On the plains of Red River, Arkansa; rare. About two feet high. Leaves three to four
inches long, an inch ahd a half to two inches wide, rather coarsely toothed, acute, approximate.

Sepals leafy, broad ovate. Rays about eight. Peduncles and stem clothed with dense, long and
soft hairs, but not canescent or tomentose. Nearly allied to B. Texana.

Berlandera * pumila; stem and leaves beneath canescently tomentose; leaves
short, cordate-ovate, crenate, sessile, somewhat obtuse; fastigiate branches and
summit of the stem corymbose; peduncles long and naked; involucrum in two

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 343

series, the inner dilated, ovate, obtuse; rays about twelve, deeply bifid.— Sit
phium pumilum; Micu. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 146. Eighteen inches to
two feet high; leaves about as wide as long, an inch to an inch and a half long,
whitish beneath. Stem perfectly white and softly tomentose, the pubescence
matted and appressed. Primary corymb about four or five-flowered, the pe-
duncles naked, three to four inches long; several branches near the summit of
the stem, and two or three from the base of the first corymb. Rays about
twelve, twice as long as the disk, deeply bifid, with ten discoloured, longitudi-
nal lines or nerves. Achenium at first villous at the summit, the tufts extend-
ing like minute scales, but there appears to me no awns at any time, and the
summit of the achenium is entire.

Berlandiera tomentosa; stem low and. simple, subdecumbent, not canescent,
terminating in one, two, or few flowers, above naked; leaves petiolate, oblong-
ovate, and cordate-ovate, slenderly crenate, beneath tomentose; rays about
eight, more than twice the length of the involucrum, slightly bifid; involucrum
in about two series, villous.—Sz/phium tomentosum; Pursu., Vol. IL., p. 579.

Has. West Florida, near Tallahasse. Flowering in March. Less than a foot high, very few
leaves on the stem, (two or three,) though softly villous beneath, the leaves are strongly reticulated.
Stem terminating in two or three flowers. Sometimes a lateral flower comes out at a later period.

Achenium villous and entire, without any vestige of awn.

Berlandiera subacaule; decumbent, stem very short, one or few-flowered,
peduncles very long; leaves oblong, pinnatifidly lobed, obtuse, below attenu-
ated, slightly hirsute, scabrous on the margin; involucrum puberulous, imbri-
cated in about two series, inner sepals dilated and obtuse; rays about eight,
not much longer than the disk, slightly bifid.

Has. East Florida. About eight to ten inches high; the peduncle more than a span long.

Scales of the receptacle very narrow. Achenium villous internally, entire, scarcely angled on the
back. Discal stigmas entire, minute; two inner palea adnate to the base of the achenium, with

which they secede.
ENGLEMANNIA. (Gray. MSS.) _

Englemannia * pinnatifida.

Has. The plains of Red River. Hirsute and scabrous, radical leaves bipinnatifid, cauline pin-
natifid, semiamplexicaule, lower segments longest, linear-lanceolate, dentate, acute, the uppermost
nearly entire and small. Stem tall, terete, considerably branched, scabrous; flowers paniculate,
numerous, corymbose. Scales of the involucrum diminishing in size to the peduncle; peduncle

344 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

long and slender. Scales or sepals yellowish-white, rigid and cartilaginous, strongly ciliate, those
which embrace the achenium subcarinate, and splitting at length in the centre down to the base;
points of the scales abruptly terminating in narrow, bracteolate, leafy, hirsute, spreading points.
Rays eight, about twice the length of the disk, mostly entire, the tube short and narrow. Stigmas
of the ray long, ligulate, smooth, bifid. Achenium blackish, convex and strongly carinated on the
back, oboval, scabrous and hairy towards the summit, without any vestige of winged margin,
crowned by a minute cup, terminated on either side by two very small and hairy awns. Ache-
nium falling off with the scale to which it is attached, and to each of which adheres two recepta-
cular palea, with the stalk like rudiments of the male flowers.

Division V.—AmsBrosigez. (Decand.)

Amprosta bidentata.

Haz. Arkansa plains. The uppermost leaves frequently four-toothed on either side, near the
base; male involucrum entire, six to eight flowered, with a projecting caudate segment.

Ambrosia trifida.

Has. Arkansa; in inundated places.

Ambrosia * longistyls; scabrous, stem (apparently) simple; leaves pinnatifid,
segments oblong-linear, bractes entire; female flowers axillary, conglomerate,
with exceedingly long styles, (about an inch;) fruit cornute, spiny at the sum-
mit; male flowers about thirty, in a slightly toothed involucrum; the recepta-

cle filiformly paleaceous; cusps of the anthers filiform.
Has. Rocky Mountains. ©. Allied to Franseria.

FRANSERIA. (Cavan.)

Franseria *bipinnatifida; 21, herbaceous, decumbent and diffusely branched,
canescent and sericeous; leaves bipinnatifid, ultimate segments linear, short,
obtuse and confluent; male calyx ten to twelve-cleft, many-flowered.—F’. Cha-
missonis, 3. bipinnatisecta? Lessine, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 524.

Has. Sea-coast of Upper California, (St. Barbara, St. Diego, &c.,) common. Stem diffuse,
spreading in a circle of two or three feet, solid, but not woody, brownish. Male florets about
thirty; fruit in clusters or racemes, very spiny and pungent, the involucrum pyramidal-ovate ;

spines flat, often brown, or yellowish. Stigmas filiform, rather long and acute. Anthers, (in the
manner of the genus,) with filiformly acute tips.

F ranseria *pumila; 21, sericeously canescent, root creeping; stem erect; very
low and short; leaves tripinnatifid, ultimate segments short, linear-oblong, con-
fluent; male calyx about five-cleft; spines of the fruit not exserted.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 345

Has. Near St. Diego, Upper California. Not more than six inches high, very softly and co+
piously pubescent; segments of the leaves crowded. Stem slender, simple, scarcely extending
beyond the bosom of the radical leaves; male spike about two inches long; involucrum about ten
or twelve-flowered, five-toothed; receptacle with linear palea, pubescent at the tips.

Franseria * discolor; 2%, root creeping; leaves interruptedly bipinnatifid,
above nearly smooth, canescently and closely tomentose, segments subovate,
acute, confluent in the wide rachis; stem short, with the lateral branches de-
cumbent.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, near the Colorado of the West. A very remarkable and dis-
tinct, as well as elegant species. Stem about a span long, slightly pubescent; leaves on long pe-
tioles, with a lanceolate outline, acute, about six inches long, white beneath, green above, the pin-
natifid segments lanceolate, the rachis incisely toothed. Male florets rather numerous; receptacle
with narrow, pubescent palea; involucrum about five or six-toothed; female flowers few, fruit

spiny.

Franseria * cuneifolia; 1, softly sericeous and somewhat canescent; stem
simple, decumbent, pilose; leaves cuneate-oval, dentate, long petiolate, three to
five-nerved at base; male florets very numerous, the scales hirsute at the tips;
spines of the fruit rigid, sublanceolate; male involucrum ten to twelve-toothed.
—F. Chamissonis? Lesstne, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 524.

Haz. Outlet of the Oregon, near the sea. A very remarkable species. Stem succulent, about
two feet long, many from the same root; leaves about an inch wide, two and a half to three inches
long, the peduncle as long as the leaf. Fruit axillary, crowded, and, as in &. bipinnatifida,
glandular, with resinous atoms. Achenium large, oblong-oval.—In all the preceding species the
corolla is five-toothed.

§ * AmBrosipIuM—© Palea of the receptacle very slender and deciduous.

Franseria * montana; ©, scabrous, and somewhat canescent with appressed
hairs; stem branching, flowers paniculate, racemes lateral and terminal; leaves
bipinnatifid, confluent towards the summit, segments oblong or subovate, ab-
ruptly acute; involucrum five to eight-cleft, naked, about ten to twenty-flow-

ered; fruit ovoid, thickly covered with long, smooth, flat spines.
Has. In the Rocky Mountains, near the Colorado of the West. One to two feet high; stem
scabrous, leaves softish to the touch, with closely appressed hairs; chaff of the involucrum decidu-

ous, or wanting, rachis of the leaves wide.

Franseria Hookeriana. Ambrosia acanthocarpa; Hook. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol.
I, p. 309. Distinguished from the preceding chiefly by the few linear seg-
vil.—4 M

346 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

ments of the leaves, which are nearly smooth above, all of them linear, with
the fruit lanceolate, acute, and having much fewer spines; there are only ves-

tiges of palea on the receptacle; most part of the plant is clothed with sparse,
white hairs, wholly absent in the preceding.

Division VI.—Ivex. (Decand.)
Iva cehata.

Has. Arkansa. The old plant becomes extremely scabrous; achenia turgid, oboval.

Iva axillaris; leaves mostly alternate, somewhat carnose, linear-oblong, or
cuneate-oblong, obtuse, nearly smooth, one-nerved; capituli solitary, axillary,
nutant; involucrum of about five nearly separate, ovate sepals. Hook. Flor.
Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 309, t. 106.

Has. On the borders of the Platte and Missouri.

Iva * foliolosa; lower leaves opposite, the upper alternate and smaller, all, as
well as the stem, more or less appressed pilose, three-nerved, lanceolate or ob-
long-lanceolate, subacute; flowers towards the summit of the stem, solitary, ax-
illary, nodding; involucrum campanulate, five-lobed.

Haz. On the Rocky Mountain plains. J. axillaris, 8., Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 309.
Probably Pursh’s description is made up of both these species, though on the Missouri I saw only
the preceding, of which a specimen was communicated to the Lambertian Herbarium. The pre-

sent plant has a very different leaf and involucrum, and often presents, as it were, a leafy spike,
as mentioned by Hooker.

Iva angustifolia.

Has. Arkansa. Capitulum minute, about four-flowered, three masculine, one feminine. Flow-
ers in a paniculated, leafy spike.

Iva * microcephala; slender and virgately branched, very smooth; leaves nar-
row linear, almost filiform, entire and fleshy; capituli axillary, very small; se-
pals about five, distinct; florets about six, three of them female.

Has. In Florida. (Dr. Baldwin.) A remarkable species for the minuteness of its flowers and

leaves, the latter about half an inch long, half a line wide. The capitulum not much larger than
an ordinary pin’s head.

§ I. * Picrotus.

Flowers dioicous, one plant producing masculine flowers only with minute ru-
diments of fruit, the other with monoecious capituli, the radial florets with-

out corolla, the stigmas exserted, slender and filiform. Receptacle naked.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 347

Achenium oboval, compressed, but somewhat turgid.—Tall annuals with

opposite, ovate, serrated leaves, hirsutely canescent beneath; the flowers in

terminal, naked, spiked panicles; in the fertile plant the spikes are filiform

and interrupted.—AIlmost intermediate with Ambrosta and Iva.—(‘The name

from mixpotys, bitterness; in allusion to the qualities of the plant.)

Iva * paniculata.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, by streams, in alluvial wastes. A rather tall annual, with long,
petiolated leaves; the stem simple, terminating in a naked, branching, pyramidal panicle of green-
ish, inconspicuous flowers. Involucrum about five-leaved, obtuse; male capitulum about fifteen-

flowered, with minute rudiments of female flowers; in the fertile capitulum the female flowers are

about eight.

Iva xanthifola; ©, leaves lanceolate-ovate, serrate, acuminate, long petio-
late, appressed pilose, and canescent beneath; capituli somewhat spiked; se-
pals ovate, acuminate.—Nutr. Gen. Am., Vol. II., p. 185. Dercawnp., Vol.
V., p. 529. Nearly allied to the preceding.

Division.—PARTHENIES.

*BOLOPHYTA.

Capituli many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine in one series, about five,
ligulate, nearly tubular, very short, truncated and crenulate; radial florets
tubular, five-toothed, masculine, with a simple stigma. Involucrum hemi-
spherical, biserial, external scales ovate, internal suborbicular. Receptacle
conic, paleaceous, the palea sheathing, wider and pubescent at the summits.
Stigmas of the ray short, smooth and obtuse. Achenium compressed, some-
what obcordate, with a cartilaginous margin, to which it is ingrafted on
either side with the two anterior palee, and with which, and the contiguous
scale of the involucrum, it is at length deciduous. Pappus none, the ache-
nium crowned with the small, persisting ligula.—An alpine, cespitose, stem-
less, small perennial, with a long, almost ligneous root, crowned with dense
and numerous vestiges of former leaves, based by tufts of hairs; leaves spathu-
late-linear, narrow and entire, canescent with appressed, strigose hairs; flow-

ers solitary, sessile, or short pedunculate, scarcely arising beyond the sum-

348 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

mit of the root, and hid among the leaves—Nearly allied to Parthenum,
though of the most dissimilar habit, and perfectly distinct.—(The name from
Bwaos, a clod, and @vtov, a plant; in allusion to the depressed and cespitose
growth.)

Bolophyta alpina.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range; latitude about 42°, and seven thousand feet above the level
of the sea. On shelving rocks, on the summit of a lofty hill, near the place called the ‘“ Three
Butes”: by the Canadians, towards the sources of the Platte. Flowering inJune. Root fusiform,
stout and very long, sending off several closely-matted crowns of leaves. Leaves about an inch or
an inch and a half high, scarcely a line wide, linear and acute, attenuated below, coming out in
rosulate clusters, equally pilose on either side, without any visible vessels but the mid-rib, so that
the leaf appears nearly the same on either side. Capitulum sessile, or upon a very short and thick
peduncle, somewhat larger than that of Parthenium integrifolium, but still very similar. Scales
of the involucrum ten, five external, ciliate and pubescent at the summit; receptacular scales simi-
lar but narrow, also pubescent at the tips, each enfolding a male floret, with the five-toothed sum-
mit visible. Anthers dark brown, united, enclosing a very small style, with a simple, obtuse,
scarcely pubescent stigma. Radial florets ochroleucous, (as well as the discal) short and tubular,
appearing truncate, the border a little spreading and slightly crenulate, with scarcely any anterior
cleft. Stigmas not exserted beyond the short ligula. Achenium black when ripe, with a whitish

border.

Parthenium integrifolium. | \
Has. In Arkansa.

Subtribe Il—HELIANTHE. (Less. Decand.)

Division I.—HerniopsipEx. (Decand.)

Zinnia * grandiflora; y%? dwarf; leaves linear lanceolate, connate, scabrous
on the margin; stem much branched from the base; rays (yellow) very large,
orbicular-oval; scales of the involucrum rounded; palee fimbriate; discal fruit

with a single awn. |

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, towards Mexico.—A very distinct and splendid species, appa-
rently perennial. The only specimen I have (presented me by my friend, Dr. Torrey,) is scarcely
more than five inches high; the stem somewhat hirsute; leaves about an inch long, two to three
lines wide, three-nerved below; branches one-flowered; involucrum of about three series of di-
lated, roundish scales. Rays yellow, orbicular, or widely oval, appearing cordate at base, and
there plaited, three-fourths of an inch wide; style of the ray filiform, smooth, exserted, bifid. Disk
apparently orange.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 349

BALSAMORHIZA. (Hooker, under HEuIopsis.)

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, ligulate, in one series,
with infertile filaments of stamens; discal florets hermaphrodite, tubular, the
summit five-cleft, reflected. Involucrum imbricate in two or three series,
foliaceous, longer than the disk. Receptacle convex, the palea lanceolate,
foliaceous, pungently acute, subcarinate, and embracing the fruit. Ache-
nium subquadrangular, in the ray compressed, smooth, wholly naked, with
a small epigynous disk. Stigmas filiform, hirsute, subobtuse.—Low, robust,
perennial herbs of the western alpine steppes, and plains of Oregon and Cali-
fornia. Leaves entire, or pinnately dissected, nearly all radical. Stems
scapoid, one or few-flowered, the lower pair of small leaves opposite; above
alternate; capituli wholly yellow, resembling that of Hekanthus. Nearly
allied to Heliopsis, but without proper stems, and wholly dissimilar in habit.
Root fusiform, stout, black, and very long, terebinthine, internally darkish.
Used by the aborigines of the west as an article of diet, after subterraneous

stoving, when it acquires a sweet flavor, like that of the parsnip.

§ I. Husatsamoruiza.—Leaves ‘pinnatifid, scapes or stems one-flowered; rays
ten to fourteen.

Balsamorhiza Hookerii; softly and almost sericeously pubescent; leaves more
or less bipinnatifid and incise, segments linear; involucrum subtriserial; sepals
narrow-lanceolate, acuminate, loosely imbricate, external ones spreading. He-

hopsts balsamorhiza; Hooker, Flor. Bor. Am., p. 310.
Has. Plains of the Oregon, common. Twelve to eighteen inches high. Summit of the cylin-
dric, naked tap-root surrounded by long, brown, membranous bud sheathes. ‘The root, when cut,

exuding drops of a very limpid resin.

Balsamorhiza terebinthacea. Helopsis terebinthacea; Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am.,
p. 310. With this, if more than a variety of the preceding, I am unacquainted.
The leaves of the preceding vary sufficiently.

Balsamorhiza * hirsuta; somewhat hirsute, not canescent; leaves all bipinna-
tifid, except at the summit; segments oblong, incise, margin very scabrous;
vil.—4 N

350 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

scape hifoliate; capitulum large, subglobose, imbricated in about four series,
lanuginous at base; sepals lanceolate, acute, ciliate; root clad with persistent

fibres.

Has. Dry plains east of Walla-Walla, near the Blue Mountains, and in the Grand Ronde prai-
rie. Nearly allied to the preceding, but with a very different pubescence; also a more robust and
dwarf plant, with a much larger capitulum. I have not seen it in flower, only in seed. Leaves
about a foot long, two to three inches wide, very lanuginous at the base of the petiole, which is very
flat. Sepals nearly all equal, closely imbricated. Florets of the ray very numerous. Stigmas
long and hirsute. Leaves green, not at all canescent and soft, as in the preceding.

Balsamorhiza *incana; canescently tomentose; scape scarcely longer than
the leaves, bifoliate at base; leaves deeply pinnatifid ; segments oblong or ovate,
entire or denticulate externally ; involucrum densely tomentose, bi or triseriate.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains. About six to eight inches high. A beautiful and very showy
species, with flowers as large as Inula Helenium, of a deep yellow, the whole herbage white
with soft down. The leaflets oblique, often bilobed. Rays twelve to fourteen; with infertile fila-
ments, as in the preceding species. Scales of the receptacle very short. Stigmas hirsute, filiform,

and exserted.

Balsamorhiza * macrophylla; smooth; scape about the length of the leaves,
bifoliate at base; leaves deeply pinnatifid, confluent above; segments sublan-
ceolate, acute, entire, or with one or two large teeth at base; involucrum about
triserial; sepals lanceolate, the lower ones leafy and reflected; palee nearly
equal in length with the florets.

Has. Towards the sources of the Colorado of the west, in the Rocky Mountains; rare. Re-
markable for its large, smooth leaves, scabrous on the margin, and scattered with glandular atoms.
Petioles very long, with the leaf near a foot in length, segments three inches long, half to three-

fourths of an inch wide.

§ IT. * Artoruiza.—Leaves entire, deltord or cordate; involucrum very leafy at
base; rays numerous. Receptacle fiat.

Balsamorhiza sagittata. Buphthalmum sagittatum? Pursu., Vol. IL., p. 564.
Espeletia sagittata; Nutt, in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 39.
Canescently tomentose; stem low, about one to three-flowered; radical leaves
cordate-ovate, entire, somewhat three-nerved at base; cauline leaves linear, at-
tenuated below; external leaves of the involucrum longer than the inner, spread-

ing, lanceolate, densely tomentose; rays numerous, (twenty to twenty-four. )
Has. In the Rocky Mountains, by Flat-Head River, towards the sources of the Oregon.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 351

Flower large and showy, about three to four inches in diameter, while the scapoid stem is not

more than a span high. Stigmas very hirsute, filiform. Rays feminine, with infertile filaments.

Balsamorhiza helanthoides. LEspeletia helianthoides; Nutr. in Journ. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VII, p. 39. Certainly not congeneric with Humboldt’s
genus. Allied closely to the preceding, but with a different pubescence and
closely imbricated, lanceolate, acuminate sepals. Rays with infertile filaments,
about fifteen.

Balsamorhiza * deltordea; slightly hirsute and puberulous; leaves deltoid-cor-
date, acuminate, somewhat undulate; stem one to three-flowered, upper leaves
alternate, linear-oblong ; sepals linear-lanceolate, the outermost longest and leafy,

spreading; rays twelve to twenty.

Has. Near the outlet of the Wahlamet, common, in wet, open places. Flowering in June.
Much like an Helianthus, and nearly allied to the preceding, but not tomentose, wholly green, and
the leaves more triangular, two to three inches across, four or five inches long, on very long pe-

tioles. Stem leaves small, oblong, scarcely opposite, long petiolate. Rays with infertile filaments.

WYETHIA. (Nort., Journ. Acad. Philad., Vol. VII., [1834.] )

Auarcontia, Decand. in part.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays numerous, feminine, with rudi-
ments of stamens, (filaments;) radial florets tubular, the summit five-cleft,
revolute. Stigmas ligulate, filiform, hirsute on the under side, not conic at
the apex. Involucrum hemispherical, foliaceous, loosely imbricated in two
or three nearly equal series, longer than the disk, the inner leaves wider.
Receptacle convex, paleaceous, the palea foliaceous, carinate, embracing the
fruit. Achenium subquadrangular, striated or grooved, in the ray com-
pressed. Pappus a small, cartilaginous, multifid, unequal crown, naked, or
with one to four stout awns arising from the angles.—Dwarf or robust, He-
lianthoid plants, with long tap roots, and simple, mostly one-flowered, leafy
stems, the leaves large. Flower large, ray and disk yellow.

Wyethia Hehanthoides; very dwarf, somewhat hirsute, one-flowered; stem
leaves and sepals ciliate; leaves lanceolate, entire, scabrous on the margin, at-
tenuated below into a petiole; outer sepals of the involucrum linear, the inner

352 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

lanceolate; pappus scales obtuse, with or without a single subulate awn; ache-
nium grooved, hirsute at the summit; stigma slender.

Has. In the Kamas plains, near Flat-Head River, towards the sources of the Columbia, and in
the plains near the Blue Mountains of Oregon. About aspan high. Stem simple, one-flowered,
smooth below, almost lanuginous at summit; sepals lanuginous and ciliate on and near the margin.
Seales of the receptacle lanceolate, hirsute, pungent, nearly the length of the discal florets, some-
times with a short tooth on either side. Achenium angular, but so much grooved as to appear
nearly terete. Pappus variable, the multifid crown pubescent, of eight or ten unequal segments,
always present; in others there is, besides, on one of the angles, aslender awn. Rays eighteen

to twenty, entire, pale yellow, with infertile filaments.

Wyethia *angustifolia; very dwarf, softly pubescent; stem one-flowered;
sepals pilose, ciliate, the outer broadest, lanceolate; leaves spathulate or spathu-
late-lanceolate, entire; pappus scales acute, lacerate, with a single awn at one
of the angles; achenium quadrangular, nearly even, smooth; stigma very long,
flat and revolute. Alarconia angustifolia; DEcanp. l. c.

Has. Round Monterrey, Upper California. A dwarf species like the last, with a dispropor-
tionately large capitulum; the rays deep yellow, about twelve, distinctly three-toothed, with fila-
ments of stamens. Stigmas remarkable for their length, ligulate, smooth above, hirsute below
with golden hair. Radial floret contracted at base. About a span high, lower part of the stem,
near its base, smooth.

Wyetha * robusta; somewhat scabrous and pubescent, particularly the base
of the stem, which is one-flowered; leaves all lanceolate, acute, radical subser-
rate, stem leaves sessile; sepals nearly all equal, lanceolate or linear-lanceolate,
acute; achenium quadrangular, nearly even, with one to four unequal awns;
stigma long and flat.

Has. Plains of the Oregon, near the confluence of the Wahlamet, common, in wet places.
Flowering in June. Eighteen inches to two feet high; always with a single flower. Radical
leaves a foot long, attenuated, and very hairy on the petiole, as well as more or less so on the
mid-rib, nearly entire, or irregularly serrate, acute. Rays twelve to eighteen, twice as long as the
disk, and exceedingly like that of an Helianthus. Achenium sharply quadrangular, even, except
a groove on one side, slightly pubescent at the summit; crown of pappus in eight or ten divisions,

lacerate, often presenting from one to four awns, unequal, but not all of them on the angles. Re-
ceptacle convex.

Wyethia amplexicauhs; smooth, shining, and somewhat glutinous; leaves
lanceolate, acute, entire or subserrulate, cauline ones amplexicaule; stem three
to five-flowered, flowers axillary and terminal, pedunculate; sepals broad ovate ;

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 353

achenium subquadrangular or triangular, grooved; pappus acute, one or two
of the segments carried out into awns. Lspeletia amplexicaulis; Nutt. in
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL. p. 38.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains. Flowering in June. Since publishing an account of this plant
in the seventh volume of the Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia, I have,
myself, met with it in the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the Platte, from which speci-
mens I find that, though differing some in habit, it belongs to the genus Wyethia. Stem some-
times two or more feet high, robust, and very smooth even to the margin of the leaf; the lower,
or radical leaves, at length coriaceous, attain a foot in length, are attenuated below, and, though
often entire, are sometimes serrulate; lower stem leaves sessile, the upper semiamplexicaule ;
flowers in a sort of short, approximating raceme; sepals very broad; rays ten to fifteen; achenia

and palea smooth. Stigmas slender, hirsute externally.

§ I. Atarconia. Pappus without awns.

Wyethia Helenioides. Alarconia Helenioides; DEcAND., Vol. V., p. 537. Col-
lected in Upper California, by Douglas. Nearly allied to W. Calkfornica, but evi-
dently a much larger plant. Oss.—The leaves of all the species are alternate.

HELIOPSIS. (Persoon.)

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays ligulate, feminine, in one series;
florets of the disk hermaphrodite, tubular, five-toothed. Stigmas slender,
filiform, pubescent at the summit, and terminating in a smooth, acute cone.
Involucrum somewhat biserial, shorter than the disk; sepals foliaceous at
the summit, cartilaginous, closely imbricated and coalescent below. Recep-
tacle conic, palea membranaceous, embracing, much shorter than the florets.
Achenium quadrangular, smooth, without pappus, but with a raised border,
and a small, epigynous disk.—Tall perennial herbs of North America, with
ovate, opposite, petiolate, dentate leaves. Capituli solitary, pedunculate;
flowers yellow, with elongated rays.

Hehopsis scabra.

Has. Arkansa; common. With the stem sometimes nearly smooth.

Hehopsis * gracihs; smooth, leaves oblong-ovate, at either end acuminate, in-
cisely serrate; peduncles very long and slender; involucrum subsquarrose;

sepals lanceolate, pubescent on the margin.
vil.—4 o

304 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. In Georgia. (Dr. Juet.) Flowers pale yellow, small. Nearly allied to H. levis, but
as distinct as H. scabra, and differing from both in the involucrum.

Division RuUDBECKIEE.

Ecuinacea palhda. . angustifoha; Drecanp., Vol. V., p. 554. Rudbeckia
paluda; Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad:, Vol. VII, p. 77.

Has. In Arkansa. Flowers pale rose, almost white.

Echinacea atrorubens. Rudbeckia atrorubens; Nutr. in Journ. Acad. Philad.,
Vol. Vil. 80:

Echinacea * sanguinea; hirsute, but not canescent; stem mostly one-flowered,
scabrous below, smooth above, sometimes branching from near the base; radi-
cal leaves elliptic, the rest lanceolate, acute, petiolate, mostly entire; flower
very long pedunculate; sepals oblong-lanceolate; rays narrow and dependent,
shortly bidentate.

Has. The plains of Red River, near the confluence of the Kiamesha. A very elegant and dis-
tinct species, with dark red rays. Allied to #. pallida, but the leaves less whitely hirsute, the
rays narrower and deep coloured, &c. Lower part of the stem leafy, leaves moderately attenu-
ated below, three-nerved, narrow lanceolate, apparently entire. Rays about fifteen. Capitulum

hemispheric, but not conic. About two feet high; the naked part of the stem, or peduncle, about
two-thirds the whole length.

RUDBECKIA. (Cassini.)

RupBECKIA * strigosa; %. Stem hispid, somewhat smooth above, branching
from below, the branches one-flowered, fastigiate; leaves sessile, amplexicaule,
ovate sublanceolate, below oblong serrulate, softly strigose with appressed
hairs, and somewhat cinereous; peduncles elongated; rays about eight, oblong,
rather short; sepals spreading, in two rows, oblong-lanceolate; disk hemi-
spherical.

Has. Alabama. (Dr. Juet.) A rather remarkable species, almost hoary with a close clothing
of softish, appressed, and rather long hairs; the serratures minute, except on the lowest leaves.
Allied to R. hirta and to R. mollis, of Elliott, but the rays are broad and short, not more than
eight. Chaff of the receptacle linear, rather obtuse.

Rudbeckia * maxima; smooth, robust and glaucous, very tall; leaves all en-
tire, very broad and large, radical ovate petiolate; lower stem leaves obovate,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 355

abruptly acuminate, subserrate; upper ones broad ovate, amplexicaule; stem
one or few-flowered; peduncle very long, sulcate; rays reflected, numerous,

(fifteen to twenty ;) disk columnar.

Has. On the open plains of Red River, near the confluence of the Kiamesha. Flowering in
June. A gigantic plant, growing in extensive masses, with large, glaucous, somewhat coriaceous
leaves, but little inferior in size to those of the Cabbage, in its wild state. Leaves somewhat oval,
three to four inches wide, except the upper ones, which diminish to a quarter part the size of the
lower ones: its whole aspect and clasping leaves appear very similar to that of Dracopis. Six to
nine feet high! and all the parts (the flower not excepted) of the same gigantic dimensions, al-
though growing in a poor and exhausted soil. Rays oblong, nearly entire; discal column one and
a half to two inches long, three-fourths of an inch wide. Palezw oblong, sheathing. Leaves of the

involucrum in nearly a simple series, foliaceous.

Rudbeckia globosa, Nutr. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VII., p.
79, is Obehiscaria Tagetes of Decandolle. Rudbeckia Tugetes, James, which
name has the priority.—OBELiscaria appears to be almost a mere section of
Rudbeckia. The O. pinnata is indeed closely related to Rudbeckia digitata,
if, indeed, the latter be any thing more than a variety of R. laciniata. The
distinguishing character of a compressed achenium is merely comparative, and
glides insensibly into the unequal quadrangular one.

§ * Axosmia.t—Rays wanting; pappus a minute, crenate cup; receptacle elevated,
conic.

Rudbeckia * occidentalis; smooth and robust; leaves ovate-lanceolate, acumi-
nate, entire, or repandly toothed, sometimes irregularly lobed, scabrous on the
margin, three-nerved; uppermost sessile, lanceolate, entire; flowers few, long
pedunculate, without rays; disk conic; sepals lanceolate, acuminate, in nearly
a single series.

Haz. Rocky Mountains and woods of the Oregon, particularly in the Blue Mountain range, by
small streams. Allied to R. laciniata, of which it has almost the achenium and palee. About
three feet high. Leaves four to six inches long, much acuminated, the upper sometimes irregu-
larly two-lobed, two to three inches wide, attenuated below, but sessile. Disk dark purple; palex
linear, sheathing, somewhat obtuse; achenium quadrangular. The only western species we have
seen.

t From oxosos, without ornament; in allusion to the want of rays.

356 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

* HCHINOMERIA.

Capitulum hemispherical, many-flowered, homogamous or heterogamous; rays
neutral, (yellow,) spreading, rather short, (about eight;) discal florets herma-
phrodite, with the border five-cleft, the tube contracted, shorter than the bor-
der. Involucrum in about three series, the sepals nearly equal, lanceolate
and discoloured, similar with the palea. Receptacle convex, alveolate, den-
ticulate, paleaceous, the palee lanceolate, carinate and embracing, acumi-
nate, and deciduous, about as long as the florets. Branches of the stig-
ma subulate, hirsute. Achenium tetragonal, compressed, crowned with a
minute, deciduous, chaffy pappus, two of the angles somewhat toothed.—
A perennial, opposite-leaved herb, with the aspect of an Hehanthus. Stem
very hairy below, almost naked and scapiform above, one-flowered; capitu-
lum blackish-purple, mostly without rays, which, when present, are yellow.
(The name in allusion to its affinity to the genus Ecuinacea.)

Echinomerta apetala. Rudbeckia apetala; (Yates and Torrey.) Notv. in
Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 77. Helianthus apetalus; Lz-
CONTE, 1n Herb. Schweinitz.

Has. In the pine barrens of Georgia, near ponds and pools. Perennial. Radical leaves wide-
ly ovate and short, sessile, somewhat hirsute, three-nerved and denticulate. eaves opposite,
crowded towards the base of the stem, which is very hairy; the rest of the stem, for about two
feet, nearly smooth, and like a scape, almost leafless; one or two upper minute leaves linear and
alternate, a lower pair lanceolate, opposite and sessile. Capitulum hemispherical, resembling
almost wholly that of Helianthus atrorubens, but mostly without rays.’ Sepals in three rows,
nearly equal, lanceolate, acuminate, nearly smooth, dark purple, faintly three-nerved; palez acu-
minate, narrow lanceolate, mostly with a narrow, acute tooth on either side. Achenium with two
obtuse angles, rather rough, with pale spots, at first with the rudiments of four unequal, blunt
teeth, and an inner, irregular crown of pilose, minute, unequal palee, all of which disappear with
the ripe fruit, when the two obtuse angles only present short, obtuse dentures. It is difficult to
say whether this plant more resembles Helianthus or Echinacea, it is so entirely intermediate with

those genera; the aspect is that of the latter, but the pale are not pungent, and the rays yellow.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 357

Continuation of Mr. Nuttall’s Paper. Read December 18, 1840. ++

ENCELIA. (Adanson.)

Encetia * Cakfornica; suffruticose, erect, and much branched; branches
elongated, one-flowered, puberulous; leaves ovate-lanceolate, acute, entire, or
coarsely toothed towards the base, nearly smooth, three-nerved, rather crowded,

scabrous on the margin; involucrum villous, triserial.

Has. On dry hills, near St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in April; common. A
rather showy, low, brittle shrub, with the flowers of an Helianthus; the rays neuter, fifteen to
twenty, three-toothed, and somewhat plaited. Leaves alternate, attenuated into a marginated pe-
tiole; young stems and shoots canescent with an almost pulverulent pubescence; peduncle rather
long. Stigmas lanceolate-ovate; palea membranaceous, sheathing; the achenium, which is flat,
obconic, without pappus, slightly emarginate and sericeous on the summit and margin. Florets of
the disk dark brown, smooth. ‘The whole plant possesses the odor of Gaitlardia bicolor.

Division CorropsipEx. (Less.)

COREOPSIS. (Liyy.)

To Decandolle’s description of the genus I may remark that the palee of
the receptacle are deciduous.

EKucoreopsis.—Achenium flatly compressed, ninged, apex bidentate.

1. Coreopsis dephinifoha; Lamarck. 2. Coreopsis tenuifolia; HHRET, WILLD.
Sp. pl. lc. 3. Coreopsis Wrayi; Nutr. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol.
VIL, p. 76. Nearly allied to C. dephinifoha.

CHRYSOMELEA.—Achema suborbicular, bidentate, winged, at length convex and
encurved.—Leaves entire or pinnately dissected.

+ Leaves entire or auriculate.

3. Coreopsis lanceolata; Linn. 4. Coreopsis crassifolia; Arron. 5. Core-
opsis integrifolia; PorreT. (C. Gimleri; Exxior.)
vil.—4 P

358 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

6. Coreopsis auriculata; Linn. ‘7. Coreopsis diversifolia; Decanp., Vol. V.,
p. 571.

t t Leaves pseudopinnate.

8. Coreopsis grandiflora; (Nutt. MSS. Sent by that name to Mr. Barclay.)
Has. Banks and plains of the Arkansa. C. longipes; Hooxsr, Bot. Beech. 1. c. .

9. Coreopsis * heterophylla; 21, smooth; stem erect, branching, grooved;
radical leaves entire, spathulate-oval or trifid; stem leaves opposite, sessile, ci-
liate at base, biternately dissected, above three-parted; segments narrow linear,
entire; peduncles elongated, one-flowered; external sepals lanceolate, shorter
than the inner; rays unequally four-lobed; achenium suborbicular, winged,
shortly toothed.

Has. With the preceding, to which it is intimately allied; the flower smaller and the leaflets

narrower. Achenium, as in the preceding, with an internal tubercle at the summit and base
within.

10. Coreopsis * Boykiniana; 2%, smooth and erect, the summit trichotomous;
stem angular and grooved; leaves opposite, entire, linear-lanceolate, long pe-
tiolate, acute, one or two upper cauline pair unequally trifid and petiolate;
peduncles one-flowered, very long; external sepals lanceolate, acute, about half

the length of the inner; rays four-lobed; achenium even, with a broad wing,
shortly bidentate.

Has. Near Millidgeville, in Georgia; collected by my friend, Dr. Boykin, after whom I have
great pleasure in naming it. Achenium very similar to that of the two preceding, and internally
bituberculate with a broader winged margin. Flower large, rays eight. Involucrum enlarging
with the fruit; palee narrow and deciduous. A distinct species, though allied to the preceding.

§ *GyROPHYLLUM.—Rays entire, or slightly toothed. Achenium oblong-com-
pressed, straight, winged, often with an obsolete, minute, chaffy crown, scarcely
bidentate when mature.—Leaves trifid, mostly equal, and appearing verticil-
lated or stellate. |

11. Coreopsis senifolia; Micuaux. 12. Coreopsis stellata; Nutt. in Journ.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL., p. 76.

13. Coreopsis rigida; Nutr. Gen. Am., Vol. II, p. 180. Smooth, or nearly
so; leaves equally trifid, or sometimes with the central segment also three-cleft;

leaflets lanceolate-linear, entire, scabrous on the margin; outer sepals of the
involucrum linear, about twelve!

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 359

14. Coreopsis palmata; Nutr. Outer sepals linear, about twelve ; rays eight,
nearly entire. Achenium oblong, flat, alated; in an immature state with two
minute teeth. A strict congener with the preceding. 15. Coreopsis tripteris,
Linn. Chrysostemma tripteris; Lessinc. Syn. 227. Drcanp., Vol. V., p. 567.—
Peramisus of Rafinesque is thus far, to me, a nonentity !

§ * EustepHaris.—Achenium oblong-compressed, straight, carinated, with a
cthate-serrated callous margin and base, the apex with two short awns, scarcely
longer than the serratures; rays three-lobed, the middle lobe longer.—Leaves al-
ternate, entire, hnear; corymb unequal, dichotomal. Probably a genus?

16. Coreopsis gladiata; WALTER.
Has. Georgia and Fayette, North Carolina. Outer involucrum short; radical leaves spathulate-

oblong, obtuse, somewhat fleshy ; cauline narrow linear, remote and few ; flowering branches nearly
naked.

§ * RaspocavLis.—Achenium linear-oblong, straight, compressed, minutely culated
on the margin, with a pappus of two erect, somewhat scabrous bristles. Rays
almost equally three-lobed.—Leaves entire, opposite and alternate; outer involu-
crum small.

17. Coreopsis angustifoha; Arron. Leaves alternate, the radical lanceolate,
long petiolate, carnose, cauline linear, remote; corymb dichotomous, few-
flowered.

18. Coreopsis hmfolha; Nutt. From a specimen collected in Alabama by
my friend, Dr. Juet, I find that the lower oblong leaves are alternate and re-
mote. ‘The flowers disposed in an irregular corymb; outer involucrum about
one-third the length of the inner. Inner sepals ovate-lanceolate, acute. Rays
about eight, deeply three-lobed. Achenium linear-oblong, straight, compressed,
minutely ciliated on the margin, with a pappus of two erect, long, equal bris-
tles. ‘The plant three to four feet high. Stem leaves opposite, linear, about a
line wide, one to two inches long, and very remote, so that the stem appears
almost like a naked twig. Flower conspicuous, yellow, with a brown disk.

19. Coreopsis nudata; Nutt. Awns of the achenium pubescent, very short;
stigmas obtuse, pubescent at the extremity. ‘The whole plant almost destitute
of visible leaves.

360 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

§ CaLLiopsis.—Achenium compressed, flat, naked, incurved; stigma trun-
cated, the tip only pubescent. Exterior involucrum very short. Rays two-
coloured; leaves bipinnately dissected.

20. Coreopsis tenctoria; Nutt. 21. Coreopsis cardaminifoha; DEcAND. (un-
der Cauuiopsis.) 22. Coreopsis Atkinsontiana; Hooker.

23. Coreopsis rosea; smooth, stem trichotomous; leaves linear, narrow and
acute, opposite, entire, rarely trifid; rays unequally three-toothed, (rose-red ;)

peduncles slender, rather long; achenium immarginate, entire, naked, curved.
Has. New Jersey, near the sea-coast. Stigmas truncated, scarcely pubescent.

*DIODONTA. (Coreopsis of authors.)

Coreopsis, but with the outer involucrum as long, or longer than the imner,
from eight to twenty-four leaved, the inner about eight-leaved. Achenium
cuneate, compressed, flatly four-sided, immarginate, with two cornute, acute,
hispid, but not retrorse teeth. Rays nearly entire—Annuals or biennials,
usually with pseudopinnated, opposite leaves, mostly serrated, rarely entire.
Intermediate between Coreopsis and Bidens, andwith much the habit of the

latter.—(Named in allusion to the pappus.) -

Diodonta coronata. Coreopsis coronata; Linn., (fide Gray.) Coreopsis tri-
chosperma; Micu. Awns as long as the discal florets, pilose with erect hairs.

Diodonta mitts. Coreopsis mitis; Micu. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II., p. 140.
Coreopsis ambigua; Nurr. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., VIL., p. 76. Awns

short, scarcely exserted.
Has. In Alabama.

Diodonta aurea. Coreopsis aurea; Arr. Hort. Kew., Ed. 1, Vol. III, p. 252.

Diodonta aristosa. Coreopsis aristosa; Micu. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. IT., p.
140. Awns very long and divaricate.

Diodonta * leptophylla; smooth, erect, dichotomously branched; leaves pseu-
dopinnate, with few, linear, and mostly entire segments, the terminal one elon-
gated; peduncle dichotomal, very long; achenium short, cuneate, scabrous,
with two short, rather smooth horns.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 361

Has. Georgia. (Dr. Baldwyn.) A small species, about a foot high, with long, narrow, linear
entire leaflets, sometimes with here and there a distant gash. Flower rather small, rays nearly

entire.

§1. *MepusEx.—Outer involucrum very long and squarrose, of twenty to
tmenty-four leaves! the inner erght-leaved. Achenium ciliate, terminated by
two very short teeth.

Diodonta involucrata. Coreopsis involucrata; Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., Vol. VII., p. 74. Very remarkable for the singular involucrum,
which, while all the other parts of the plant are smooth, has its segments
stronely ciliated with rigid hairs. I have not seen the mature achenium.

§7 1. *HETERoDonTA.

Bmens, but with the outer, foliaceous involucrum three to four-leaved, the
inner about six-leaved, elongated. Rays two or three, very short, not ex-
serted. Stigma smooth, with a small conic point. Achenium linear, flatly
compressed, without angles at the sides or summit, hirsute, immarginate.
Pappus of two long, diverging, hispid bristles, with the hairs erect, not re-
trorse! radial, abortive fruit, with very short awns.—A dwarf, much branched
annual? with opposite, lanceolate-linear, incisely serrated leaves, attenuated
at each extremity. Flowers solitary, terminal; scales of the involucrum
yellowish. Discal florets shorter than the awns, campanulate with a very
slender tube.—(The name in allusion to the erect, instead of reverted bris-
tles of the teeth of the achenium.)

Diodonta * Badentordes.
Has. The vicinity of Philadelphia? With entirely the aspect of the dwarf variety of Bidens
cernua, but with the capitulum almost obconic-oblong. Height two or three inches, spreading out

five or six inches; léaves attenuated into long petioles, somewhat connate at base.
A second species of this section, or rather genus, occurs in the south-west, and will be described

by Mr. Gray.

*COSMIDIUM. (§. Cosmipium of Coreopsis, GRay.)

Coreopsis, but with the discal florets long, tubular and campanulate, deeply
five-cleft. Achenium subcylindric, usually tubercular and indurated, with
vil.—4 Q

362 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

two wide, acute, concave, foliaceous teeth, retrorsely ciliated on the margin.
Palex of the receptacle oblong, membranaceous, embracing the fruit.—Pe-
rennial, smooth herbs, with capillary, or linear, opposite, pseudopinnated
leaves, and few-flowered, dichotomal branched stems; flowers few, long pe-
dunculate, yellow, with a brown disk; the ray in the second species said to

be wanting.

Cosmidium filifoium. Coreopsis fihfolha; HooKEr.

Has. In Arkansa plains, near the outlet of the Kiamesha, Red River. Flowering in May. Pe-
rennial and very smooth, about two feet high, with a rather slender, terete stem. Leaves oppo-
site and fasciculate, petioles connate at base, pseudo-bipinnate, with long, linear, capillary, grooved
segments ; secondary divisions and uppermost leaves trifid, ultimate pairs simple; branches tricho-
tomal, uppermost dichotomal; the flowers few, upon very long peduncles. Outer and inner calyx
each eight-leaved; exterior segments linear-lanceolate, acuminate, a little shorter than the inner,
which are lanceolate-oblong. Rays about eight, almost equally three-lobed, sulphur yellow, neu-
ter. Discal florets dark brown, with a slender tube, the upper part campanulate, and cleft nearly
to its base, in five linear, reflected segments, the tube of anthers brownish-black, and exserted,
with distinct ovate cusps. Stigmas hirsute with golden hair, each terminating in a slender conic
point. Achenium subcylindric, pale brown, somewhat curved, tubercular or rough, somewhat
carinated internally, indurated into a nut, with a thickish shell, almost as in Sclerocarpus, with
here and there a few scattered hairs, terminated above in two sublanceolate, concave, large teeth,
edged with golden yellow, reflected hairs; the proper seed with its integuments within the indu-
rated envelope. Pale wide, oblong and membranaceous, obtuse, with a dark rib in the centre,

and embracing the back of the achenium, but not extending over the front.

Cosmidium gracile; glaucous; leaves pinnately dissected in five divisions,
segments narrow linear, entire; capituli discoid? bractes scarcely one-third the
length of the involucrum. Bzdens gracilis; Torrey, in Ann. Lyceum, New

York, Vol. I., p. 215.
Has. Rocky Mountains. (James.)

LEPTOSYNE. (Decanp.)

Coreopsis, but with the rays stylferous. Receptacle conic, paleaceous; pale
oblong, obtuse, flat, three-nerved. Achenium obovate, compressed, some-
what curved, scabrous, with at length a broad, fungous margin and centre,

the centre terminated by a minute, entire cup; the radial fruit imperfect, and,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 363

nearly smooth. Stigma abrupt, pubescent, terminated by a minute cone.

Rays about twelve to fourteen, retuse, and almost equally three-toothed.—

A nearly smooth, stemless biennial, with opposite, pseudopinnate, almost

capillary leaves; scapes or peduncles one-flowered, very long. Ray and disk

yellow.

Leptosyne Californica.

Has. Near St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in the beginning of May. About a foot
high; scapes numerous, terete. Outer involucrum eight-leaved, linear, pubescent at base, as long
as the inner, of which the divisions are ovate, and likewise eight. Rays about twelve to fourteen,
styliferous, shortly three-lobed, the stigmas filiform, smooth; with an imperfect, flat, and smooth
achenium. Receptacle elevated as the fruit becomes mature; palee flat, oblong-oval, or ovate,
obtuse, membranaceous, deciduous, three-nerved in the centre; the achenium at first rather thin,
scabrous, and scattered with short, glandular hairs, at length curved, with a thick, spongy margin,
and often a similar, enlarged centre; the seed itself narrow-oblong. Allied to the section Chryso-
melea of Coreopsis; but the peculiar character of the achenium and styliferous rays remove it.

* TUCKERMANNIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, fifteen to twenty,
fertile; discal florets hermaphrodite, tubular, five-toothed. Stigmas ex-
serted, the summit flat, beneath pubescent and obtuse, terminating in a very
short cone. Receptacle paleaceous, flat; the pale oblong, membranaceous
and nerveless. Involucrum double, the exterior shorter, leafy, six to eight-
parted, the interior eight to ten-parted. Achenia elliptic, alated, flatly com-
pressed and naked, smooth, without pappus, and, as well as the wing, dark
brown.—A succulent, perennial plant of Upper California. Leaves alter-
nate, bipinnatifid, smooth and fleshy; the segments linear and divaricate.
Stem one to three-flowered, scapoid, the pedicel very long and naked.
Flower large, resembling that of a Si/phiwm; disk and ray yellow. Rays
three-toothed at the apex, longer than the disk.—(Named in respect to Mr. E.
Tuckerman, Jr., who has devoted his attention to the neglected Cryptoga-
mous plants of the United States. )

Tuckermanma * maritima.

Has. On shelving rocks, near the sea, at St. Diego, in Upper California. A very showy and
curious plant, Flowering in May. After the period of flowering it remains for a month or two

364 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

in a dormant state, shedding its leaves, and appearing like a tuberous or bulbous plant, inert.
Cultivated in Philadelphia, it flowered both in the spring and autumn. Leaves nearly all towards
the root, lucid and thick; the scape, or peduncle, a foot or more in length, with (generally in a
wild state) but a single flower, three or four inches in diameter. Rays about fifteen to twenty, or
more, with filiform, smooth stigmas, three-toothed at the apex; chaff of the receptacle composed
of oblong, membranaceous, flat and pointed scales. Rays, and several rows of the discal florets,
fertile. Discal florets smooth, cylindric, and, as it were, articulated at the commencement of the
tube; the teeth acute and flaccid. Stigmas exserted. Achenium dark brown, with the empty or
winged margin of the same colour.—Remotely allied to Coreopsis, particularly the section Calli-
opsis, but with numerous fertile rays, minutely three-toothed, and a conspicuous, receptacular
chaff, &c.; also to Leptosyne, but with perfect fruit in the ray, a flat receptacle, and a very differ-

ent achenium, &c.

ACTINOMERIS. (Nutt.)

ActinomMERIs nudicaulis. Helianthus aristatus; Kuutort, Vol. Il., p. 428.
Decanp., Vol. V., p. 591. Leaves opposite, sessile, oblong or oval-lanceolate,
scabrous, subserrulate, obtuse; flowers in a trichotomous panicle; calyx
short, biserial; rays ten to twelve, lanceolate, entire; awns of the achenium

rather short, the winged margin narrow.
Has. In Georgia.

§ *AcnaTa.—Anns of the achenium none; pappus a shallow, elliptic cup.—
Leaves opposite, decurrent, corymb few-flowered; rays three or four, with rud-
mental achenia.

Actinomeris pauciflora; (NurTT.) hirsute, leaves elliptic, obtuse, decurrent;
peduncle two-flowered, very long.
Has. East Florida. (Mr. Ware.)

LEIGHIA. (Cassini.)

Leigha uniflora; shortly pubescent, herbaceous; stem mostly one-flowered,
terete; leaves below opposite, oblong-lanceolate, acute, sessile and narrowed
below, entire, three-nerved, above alternate; flower large, long pedunculate;
involucrum hirsute, squarrose, foliaceous at base; palee obtuse.—Hehanthus
uniflorus; Nutr. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 37.

Has. Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the Missouri. Flowering early in June, (9th.)
Perennial, stem simple, generally one-flowered. Leaves three to four inches long, and, as well

as the stem, hirsute with short, appressed, soft hairs, scabrous on the margin, one or two pairs

AND GENERA OF PLANTS: 365

opposite, the rest alternate ; lower sepals foliaceous, squarrose, the inner linear-lanceolate. Rays
fifteen to twenty, twice as long as the disk, two-toothed at the tip, wholly abortive, pale yellow;
discal florets cylindric, narrower below, with five erect, blunt, pubescent teeth. Stigmas some-
what ovate, with a short pubescence. Achenium obovate, compressed, ciliated, with two to four
subulate, rather wide awns from the angles, and about four minute, intermediate, obtuse squa-

melle; the awns scarcely as long as the achenium.

Leighia * lanceolata; herbaceous, nearly smooth; stem terete, grooved, about
three or more flowered; mtermediate leaves opposite, above and below alter-
nate, lanceolate, acuminate at each extremity, entire, petiolate, three-nerved;
inyolucrum foliaceous, subsessile; sepals linear-lanceolate, squame retuse;
achenium short, obcordate, with two to three slender, persistent awns, twice
its length, the intermediate squamelle minute.

Has. Rocky Mountain plains and Upper California? Perennial; stem twelve to eighteen inches
high, smooth below; lower leaves six to eight inches long, an inch broad, a little pilose. Rays
about twelve to fourteen, pubescent beneath, twice as long as the disk, deep yellow. Palez retuse,
pubescent at the tip. Achenium compressed, alated, smooth, (not ciliated,) short and obcordate,
with two or three very long, slender, scabrous, awns from the two compressed angles; squamelle
minute, acute, (in the germ appearing like mere hairs.) Mature seed not seen, in the young state

it somewhat resembles that of Actinomeris.

Leighia? Hookeriana. Hehanthus Hookeritanus; Drcanv., Vol. V., p. 590.
H. longifolus; Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. I., p. 313, non. Pursu. Nearly
allied to the preceding, but with obtuse leaves, and broad, lanceolate, ciliate
sepals. The pappus apparently almost the same.

Leighia longifoha. Helianthus longifohus; Pursa, non. Hooker. Interme-
diate squamelle of the achenium minute, mixed with a terminal tuft of hairs;
the rest of the fruit smooth.t

+ To complete the history of this genus I will add the following species, collected in some parts
of South America, by the late indefatigable Doctor Baldwin.
Leighia * Baldwiniana; herbaceous and scabrous, (apparently decumbent;) leaves crowded,

linear-oblonge

g, entire, acute, sessile, three-nerved, the nerves running contiguous to the revolute

margin; panicle few-flowered, subcorymbose; sepals linear-lanceolate, acuminate, imbricate and
squarrose, somewhat triserial; achenium villous.
Has. South America; much like Helianthus angustifolius. Rays ten to twelve, twice as long as the disk. Stigma

pubescent, thick and obtuse. Pappus of two awns, and about six pilose, narrow, indistinct scales.
Leighia* debilis; herbaceous and decumbent; stem terete, slender, and scabrous, as well as sparsely
pilose, above, to the base of the involucrum, hirsute; leaves sessile, opposite, linear-lanceolate, serrate,
Vil.—4 R

366 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

HELIANTHUS. (Linn.)

Hehanthus lenticularis. DEcaNp.
Has. Banks of the Platte and the waters of the west, generally.

Helianthus *tntegrifolus; ©, more or less hirsute with appressed hairs;
leaves nearly entire, below opposite, above alternate, ovate, or ovate-lanceolate,
three-nerved, petiolate, obtuse or acute; stem few-flowered; sepals lanceolate-
oblong, or ovate, acute, closely imbricated; rays about twelve, rather short;
achenium villous. (. gracils; leaves denticulate, scarcely three-nerved; se-
pals acuminate.

Has. With the above, a small and rather dwarf species, sometimes slender, at other times robust,
leaves on long petioles. Stem sometimes almost simple (perhaps a different species;) in others
branching from the base. Capitulum pedunculate, about one and a half inches in diameter, or
smaller. Rays sometimes styliferous, with abortive fruit, bearing three awns; palee of the recep-

tacle ovate, abruptly acute; young achenium almost silky; disk brown. Allied to H. petiolaris,
particularly 8. gracilis, but with short peduncles and opposite leaves.

Helianthus * silphioides; 24, hirsute and scabrous; leaves petiolate, broad
ovate, subcordate, dilated, serrate, acute, below opposite, alternate above; up-
per part of the stem naked, paniculate, subcorymbose; sepals oval, obtuse,
closely imbricate; squame of the receptacle acute, somewhat three-toothed;
achenium smooth, pubescent at the summit; rays acuminated.

Has. In the plains of Arkansa, three or four feet high, androbust. Leaves nearly as wide as
long, about three inches. Capituli in a branching corymb, branches two and three-flowered. Rays
about twelve, acuminated, longer than the brown disk. Achenium spotted, subquadrangular, two

awned. Discal florets cylindric, rather narrower at base.—Allied to HZ. atrorubens, but a much
stouter and broader-leaved plant.

Helianthus * pumilus; 21, hirsutely pilose and scabrous; leaves ovate-lanceo-
late, opposite, attenuated below, subpetiolate, nearly entire, and three-nerved,
upper leaves lanceolate, alternate; involucrum hoary, hispid; sepals imbricated,
lanceolate, acute, as well as the receptacular palee; achenia smooth.

acute, scabrous and somewhat softly pilose; peduncle one-flowered, terminal; sepals in nearly a
simple series, oblong, acute.

Has. Maldonado, (Dr. Baldwin.) Stem slender and wiry, about a foot long, sending off a few one-flowered
branches towards the summit. Rays about ten to twelve, rather short. Achenium nearly smooth, with two awns,

and numerous smooth squamelle. Receptacular palee linear-lanceolate, acuminate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 367

Has. Rocky Mountains and plains of the Platte. A low, perennial, simple stemmed species,
about a foot high, leaves two to three inches long, about an inch wide. Capituli about three to five
(apparently) sessile. Rays about sixteen, longer than the disk, paleee somewhat obtuse, hirsute at
the summit, scales of the achenium rather large and wide.

Hehanthus *crassifolius; 14, stem simple, herbaceous, subscabrous; leaves near-
ly all opposite, lanceolate, acuminate at either end, serrate, above smooth, beneath.
very scabrous, and, as it were, shagreened; stem naked, one to three-flowered,
with a few small, linear leaves; involucrum closely imbricated, the scales ovate,
slenderly and finely ciliate; achenium subquadrangular, with sometimes four

scales, the two central ones smaller.

Has. Plains of Arkansa. About two feet high, the lower part of the stem very leafy, above
nearly naked from the sudden diminution in the size of the leaves, the plant here and there scat-
tered with drops of resin. Leaves half a foot long, or more, about an inch wide, very thick and
coriaceous. Rays about twenty, bidentate. Achenium pubescent above; with small scales from
the inner angles; discal florets as usual, enlarged and pubescent towards the base. Alliedio H.

pauciflorus.

Helianthus * squarrosus; 7%, robust and gigantic; stem scabrous, grooved ;
leaves lanceolate, or ovate-lanceolate, scabrous at either end, acuminate, sessile,
beneath softly villous and somewhat canescent, below opposite and three-nerved,
above alternate, margin remotely subserrulate; capitulum upon a long pedi-
cel; calyx squarrose, very widely spreading and coarsely foliaceous; rays nu-
merous, (fifteen to twenty;) palea subtridentate; achenia smooth. H. tomento-
sus, ELLIOTT, non. Micwavx.

Has. In Georgia near Columbus: six to eight feet high: flowers three to four inches across.
Rays pale yellow, rather narrow. Disk brownish. Leaves aspan long, one and a half to two inches
‘wide. A very showy species, and remarkable for its very leafy calyx, inner leaves linear-lanceolate,

the outer sometimes half as large as those on the stem.

Hehanthus * debils; 2, stem prostrate, nearly glabrous; leaves alternate,
long petiolate, deltoid-ovate, repandly serrulate, glabrous, three-nerved; invo-
lucrum closely imbricate; sepals lanceolate acuminate, nearly equal, and al--
most smooth; capitulum long pedunculate, solitary, terminal; achenium
smooth; disk dark brown.

Has. The sea-coast of East Florida. (Dr. Baldwin.) In the Herbarium of the Academy of Nat.
Sci. Philad. as H. prostratus, by Schweinitz, but very distinct from that species, having also the
two deciduous pappus scales of the genus without any intermediate squamelle, therefore not a
Vigueria. Several spreading, prostrate stems, probably from the same root. Stem brown, terete,
about a foot long, petiole more than an inch longer than the leaf, which is acute. Rays ten to

twelve.

368 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Hehanthus Missouriensis; (ScHwetn1tz, MSS.,)-extremely scabrous; leaves
atenuate, radical spathulate, serrate, cauline oblong obtuse, uppermost linear,
acute; stem dichotomous, the branches diverging, one-flowered; sepals ovate,

minutely ciliate, closely imbricate; stigma lanceolate, hirsute, golden yellow.
Has. Plains of Missouri. Closely allied to H. pauciflorus.

Division IV.—Bipentipex. (Lessing. Decand.)

BIDENS. (Linn.)

BIDENS quadriaristata. (@. * dentata; leaves remotely dentate, serrate, outer

involucrum about five-leaved, longer than the oval rays.
Haz. Wappatoo Island, at the outlet of the Wahlamet, Oregon.

Bidens Californica.
Has. St. Diego and St. Barbara, Upper California; common, ©. Also in Chili. Rays nearly

white, inclining to yellow, often wanting.

§. CampyLoTHEcA.—(Genus CaAmMpYLOTHECA, Cass. Decand.) Achenium linear,
sometimes curved or contorted, linear and compressed; anns two, small, or
wanting.

Bidens * mutica; very smooth and herbaceous; leaves ternately or pinnately
divided; leaflets ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, serrate; panicle trichotomous; ex-
terior involucrum a little shorter than the inner; rays about five, twice as long
as the disk; achenium straight, sparingly pilose, without awns.

Has. Ouau, Sandwich Islands. Less than a foot high, the lower leaves quinate, the uppermost
nearly simple. Flowers yellow, rather small; the inner and outer involucrum each about five-
leaved. Disk dark brown; tube of the florets nearly the length of the border. Branches of the
stigma terminated by short conic appendages. ‘The achenium smooth, or with a few scattered hairs,
transversely striated, sometimes with a single awn, but mostly without any; branchlets of the panicle

about three-flowered, the capituli on long pedicels.

Bidens * gracilis; smooth and herbaceous; leaves ternately or pinnately di-
vided, leaflets lanceolate, acuminate, serrate; panicle slender, trichotomous;
exterior involucrum a little shorter than the inner; rays about five, scarcely
longer than the disk; achenium somewhat curved, with two short awns, having
a few retrorse bristles towards the extremity.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 369

Has. With the above, which it closely resembles, but is a more slender plant, with smaller
flowers; terminal leaflet largest, the lateral often small. Achenia a little bristly, sometimes with

only one awn, or even without any, im the same capitulum with most of the others possessing awns.

Bidens * angustifolia; very smooth and herbaceous; leaves pseudopinnate,
in two or three pairs; segments narrow-lanceolate, acuminate, serrate, the low-
est leaflet sometimes divided; panicle trichotomous, contracted; sepals nearly
equal; rays about five, longer than the disk; achenium ciliate with erect bris-
tles, two-awned, the awns retrorse at the summit.

Has. With the above, from which it differs in the narrow and pinnated leaves; the fruit has,

also, longer awns, and the pedicels are short. ‘The stem twelve to eighteen inches high. Awns

of the achenium sometimes unequal, or of different lengths in the same capitulum.

{ BipENs proper.

Bidens * hirsuta; herbaceous, and more or less hirsutely pubescent; stem
quadrangular, grooved, trichotomous; leaves pseudopinnate, in two or three
pairs, the uppermost sometimes ternate, segments lanceolate, acuminate, in-
cisely serrate, lateral divisions with the base obliquely attenuated; rays none;
involucellum eight-parted, shorter than the involucrum; achenium subquad-
rangular, with a wide, circular, basal areole, the angles hirsute or scabrous

above; awns three, unequal, strongly retrorse barbellate.

Has. In Atooi. Two to three feet high, with a thick, hirsute, quadrangular stem, oppositely
branched. Leaves much like those of Agrimonia Lupatoria; hence, I suspect it is closely allied
to B. Wallichii. It is, however, destitute of rays. Outer involucrum with the segments connected
together at the base; the inner, also, about eight-leaved. Achenium linear, straight, smooth, except
the upper edges of the angles, which are ciliate with tubercular, short bristles; awns about three, a
third the length of the fruit, with strong, barbellate bristles their whole length. Hairs of the stem
broad, flat, membranaceous and acuminate. Branches of the stigma with long, acuminated, slender

points.

* MICRODONTA.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine in a single series,
(about five,) many-nerved. Discal florets hermaphrodite, tubular-campanu-
late, five-toothed, the tube short and slender. Receptacle flat, paleaceous;
palea oblong, similar with the inner involucrum. Involucrum double, the
outer six-leaved, foliaceous, the inner about five-leaved, discoloured, some-
what scarious. Achenia flatly compressed, those of the ray elliptic, mi-

ViIl.—4 §

370 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

nutely bidentate, those of the disk oblong, with two short teeth, and a mi-
nute intermediate, paleaceous crown; one or two central florets, with two
minutely retrorse bristly awns as long as the floret. Branches of the style
terminated by a small abrupt cone.—A dwarf annual of Peru. Stem ap-

parently simple; leaves ternate and opposite, trifid or three-lobed, ciliate.

Flowers terminal, yellow.

0 .
Microdonta * nana; ©.

Has. Near Arequipa, Peru. (Mr. Curson.) The whole plant about two inches high. Stem
simple, pilose above, terminating in a single flower. Leaves petiolate, the petiole and a line down
the stem ciliate and pilose; the simple leaves oval, three to five-toothed, segments of the trifid leaves
narrower, also three-toothed. Segments of the outer involucrum linear-oblong, distinct to the base,
longer than the inner, hirsute. Inner involucrum, like that of Bidens, the segments nearly smooth,
oblong-oval, many-nerved like the rays. Rays five, oblong, truncate, shortly three-toothed, about
twice the length of the inner involucrum, many-nerved, with a rather long narrow tube, stigmas
slender, not thickened at the extremity as in the discal florets, and nearly smooth. Discal florets,
as well as the rays, yellow, subcampanulate above, the tube contracted rather more than a third the
length of the upper part of the floret. Palea flat, very similar to the inner inyolucrum, and equally
wide. The achenium of the ray largest and most perfect, elliptic, truncate, minutely bidentate,
naked; those of the disk narrower, but not rostrate, with short, smooth teeth, and a row of minute,
intermediate, slender, chaffy scales; one or rarely two, of the central florets producing the usual two
awns of a Bidens, but scarcely as long as the achenium, and minutely barbellated with retrorse
bristles. I have described from two specimens. ‘The flower, rather large for the diminutive size
of the plant. A remarkably distinct genus in the BipENTIDEm, the rays being more perfect than
the discal florets, and without awns; the attenuation of the discal fruit above, without being pro-
perly rostrate, would seem to ally our plant to Cosmos, from which, however, it is wholly distinct.

Division V.—VERBESINEE. (Lessing.)

§ 1. Leaves not decurrent.

VERBESINA *villosa; herbaceous, stem terete, pubescent, leaves alternate,
lanceolate, sessile, at both ends acuminate, entire or repandly denticulate, above
scabrous, beneath softly villous; corymb compound; rays about three, (white;)
sepals softly pubescent, linear, acuminate; achenium subpubescent, without
winged margin. |

Has. Plains of Arkansa. Resembles V. virginica, though perfectly distinct, and much nearer
to VY. acuminata. A stout, tall plant; leaves half a foot long, two inches wide, cuneately narrowed

below, upper part of the stem and peduncles densely villous; flowers clustered; achenium cuneate,
without any sensible wing, the two awns slender and somewhat pilose.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 371

Subtribe IV.—TAGETINE.

* RIDDELLIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterosamous; rays feminine, three to five, coria-
ceous, persistent, dilated, equally and obtusely three-lobed, six-nerved; discal
florets hermaphrodite, tubular, five-toothed, the dentures glandular. Stig-
mas subcapitate, obtuse, minutely pubescent. Involucrum cylindric, com-
posed of eight ingrafted leaflets. Achenium slender and conic, prismatic,
smooth. Pappus paleaceous, five or six-leaved, segments lanceolate, acumi-
nate, nerveless, similar inthe ray. Receptacle naked, minute.—A slenderly
branching, aromatic herb, with alternate, oblong-linear, subtomentose leaves;
branchlets corymbose, three to five-flowered; persistent rays apparently yel-
low, (reddish-orange after inflorescence;) involucrum densely sericeous with
long hairs.—(Named in respect of Professor Riddell, a botanist, who has
explored the interior of Texas.)

Riddelha * Tagetine.
Has. The southern range of the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the Platte. A very
elegant plant, with the habit of a Zinnia, but having the involucrum formed of a single series of

united sepals. The rays are very remarkable, appearing as rigid as parchment, and remain per-
fectly flat after inflorescence, as in Zinnia.

* SOLENOTHECA.

Capitulum few-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, very few and small,
(two or three.) Involucrum an entire, even, cylindric tube, with a short,
five-toothed border. Receptacle naked. Achenium fusiform, compressed,
somewhat four-sided, partly stipitated at the base, pubescent. Pappus pa-
leaceous, palee elongated, setiform, of equal length, but unequal thickness,
ciliated, and almost plumose on the margin.—A small annual of Peru, with
slender, spreading branches; leaves opposite and alternate, pinnatifid. Flow-
ers terminal, fastigiate; liguli few and very small. Nearly allied to Tagetes,
but with a very different pappus, and a peculiar habit—(Named from oad,
a tube, and @yxn, a sheath, in allusion to the cylindric calyx.)

372 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES:

Solenotheca * tenella.

Has. Near Arequipa, in Peru. (Mr. Curson.) Annual, with a simple, slender root. The
whole plant three to four.inches high; very smooth. Leaves below opposite, above alternate,
deeply pinnatifid; segments two or three pairs, linear, serrate, or merely three-toothed at the sum-
mit, less than half a line wide; branches terminating in one or two flowers; capituli pedicel-
late. Involucrum smooth and cylindric, about half an inch long, a line wide, and a little ventri-
cose towards the base, five-toothed, the teeth shallow. Rays two or three, scarcely exserted, the
border somewhat round, greenish-yellow. Tubular florets about five, five-toothed, the dentures
connivent. Stigmas ending in a slender, pubescent cone. Pappus longer than the long and slen-
der achenium, very shining, somewhat yellow, achenium subsericeous.

Subtribe V—HELENIE/. (Cassini.)

Division I.—GaAtLLARDIE.

GaiLLaRpIA pulchella; (DECAND.)

Has. Arkansa plains; common.

Gallardia aristata; (PuURSH.)

Has. Arkansa Plains.

Batpwinia uniflora; (NutT.) Stem sometimes three-flowered.

LEPTOPODA. (Nutt.)

Lepropopa *pinnatifida; (Herb. Schw.,) radical and lower leaves incisely
pinnatifid, with remote segments, cauline sessile, narrow-linear, subulate,
smooth; stem fistulous, pubescent, one-flowered ; sepals nearly in a single series,
very short; rays about twenty, linear; achenium pubescent, palee of the pap-

pus obtuse and awnless.
Has. East Florida. (Dr. Baldwin.) About a foot or eighteen inches high, somewhat slender,
with very narrow and rather numerous leaves; upper part of the stem naked; flower small; rays

about half a line wide, terminating in three small teeth.

Leptopoda Helenium; smooth; leaves entire; radical, oblong-lanceolate, denti-
culate, lower stem leaves lanceolate-linear, attenuated into long petioles, mid-
dle stem leaves only decurrent; naked portion of the stem long; stem one to_
three-flowered, the apex, before flowering, tomentose; involucrum shorter than
the disk; achenium smooth, the pappus slightly lacerate.

Has. West Florida. Sepals short, lanceolate and unequal; rays more than twenty, wedge~
shaped, trifid at the summit, sometimes very wide.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 373

Leptopoda *denticulata; smooth; leaves linear-sublanceolate, denticulate,
acute, attenuated at the base, cauline broadly decurrent, uppermost sessile,
acuminate; sepals as long as the disk, lanceolate-linear; achenium smooth, pap-

pus deeply lacerate.

Has. In Georgia. LZ. Helenium; Decanp., Vol. V., p. 653. Leaves almost all equally nar-
row. Flower larger than the preceding. Rays more than twenty, broad cuneate, trifid and quad-
rifid. The peduncle conically enlarged under the capitulum.

Leptopoda * brevifola; smooth; radical leaves spathulate, subsessile, cauline
spathulate, denticulate, obtuse, slightly decurrent, uppermost lanceolate, en-
tire, acute; stem smooth, one-flowered; achenium pilose, turbinate; pappus
slightly lacerated.

Has. In South Carolina. A remarkable species, clothed distantly with leaves nearly to the
summit; radical ones very short, about an inch, nearly sessile, cauline leaves about two inches
long, half an inch wide. Flower large and showy, the rays few, (about twelve,) and much dilated.
Sepals lanceolate, shorter than the disk. Discal florets dark brown. Achenium covered with

brown, chaffy hairs.

BAHIA. (Decand.) TRricHopHyLtium. (Nutt.)

Baha integrifolha; (DECAND.)
Hass Oregon and the Blue Mountains. Pappus about ten-leaved, nearly equal.

Bahia multiflora. Trichophyllum multiflorum; Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 35.

Bahia lanata; herbaceous and erect; lower leaves often bipinnatifid, segments
linear, equal, beneath and the stem canescently tomentose, above greenish;
flowers loosely corymbose, peduncles of moderate length. Tyrichophyllum lana- _
tum; Nutt. Gen. Am., l. c.

Has. With the above, of which it may be, perhaps, only a variety. The stem and leaves are
more slender, and the latter not so tomentose above; the peduncles are also fastigiate, and form a
loose corymb; in the preceding the peduncles are very long andfew. Pappus unequal. The speci-
mens described by Hooker, according to one sent from the author to Schweinitz, are weak ones,
in which the bipinnatifid leaves are not developed.

Baia tenmfola; (Decanp.) Very nearly allied to B. lanata. Perhaps only
a variety, with narrower leaves and shorter pedicels.
Has. Common on the banks of the Oregon, in rocky places.
vil.—4 T

374 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
+ Shrubby species, with alternate leaves.

Bahia confertiflora; (DECAND.)

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. A low, branching shrub, about a foot high, with the stem,
involucrum, and leaves beneath whitely tomentose. Leaves somewhat ternately pinnatifid, am-
plexicaule at base, about one to one and a half inches long, the segments about a line wide. Flow-
ers at length loosely pedicellate, at first, when in flower, in sessile clusters. Primary leaves some-
times simply trifid, divisions usually about two long lateral ones, with the terminal ones short.

Flowering in April.

Bahia *trifida; leaves small, cuneate, amplexicaule, trifid at the summit;
corymb contracted, many-flowered; pappus eight-leaved, alternately narrower

and longer; stem and under side of the leaves whitely tomentose.
Has. With the preceding, which it nearly resembles, but the leaves are smaller and rather
crowded. Rays and sepals five to seven; stem densely, and, at the summit, often arachnoidly to-

mentose.

Bahia stechadifoha; (DecanD.) Oss. Radical leaves sparingly pinnatifid,

upper leaves linear, entire, obtuse.

Has. With the preceding. A very low shrub, leaves linear, crowded below, two inches long,
about a line wide, whitely tomentose beneath; corymb contracted. Perfect flower not seen. Pap-
pus eight-leaved, the four at the angles of the fruit narrower and longer. Receptacle deeply

alveolate.

Bahia artemisiefoha; (Less.)
Has. St. Francisco, Upper California.

“HYMENOPAPPUS. (L’Heritier.)

Hymenopappus tenuifolius.
Has. Plains of Red River and Missouri.

Hymenopappus jilifolus.

Has. Plains of the Oregon. In my specimens the pappus is rather conspicuous.

Hymenopappus *luteus; canescently tomentose; stem slender and dwarf;
leaves bipinnatifid, ultimate segments or lobes very short, linear, obtuse; se-
pals rounded, about twelve; florets yellow; panicle few-flowered, subcorymbose;
pedicels moderate; achenium densely lanuginous; pappus short.

Has. Rocky Mountains, towards the Colorado of the West, particularly on Ham’s Fork. Usu-
ally less than a foot high. Leaves short, with crowded segments, resembling Milfoil; for the most
part whitely tomentose, sometimes nearly green. Root-stock thick, almost woody, very woolly
between the leaves. Stem about a span, slender, three to five-flowered, somewhat dichotomal ;

capituli fastigiate, florets yellow, the border narrower and less deeply cleft than usual. Stigmas

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 375

pubescent, with a thick, obtuse extremity, ending in a minute cone. Achenium short and striate,
eovered loosely with long, soft hairs; pappus scales white, lacerated, obtuse, about twenty, scarcely
exserted beyond the down.—Nearly allied to Chenactis, but with the florets all regular.

CHAANACTIS. (Decand.)

Capitulum many-flowered, homogamous; florets tubular, funnelform, the ex-
ternal series with the border dilated, ringent or palmate, five-cleft or five-
toothed, with the tube smooth and the dentures pubescent. Involucrum
campanulate, composed of two series of erect, linear sepals, (twenty to thirty, )
not membranaceous (or scarcely so) on the margin. Receptacle naked, al-
veolate, the margin sometimes paleaceous, the palee similar with the invo-
lucrum. Branches of the style hirsute, subulate, (without the conic apex.)
Achenia linear-tetragonal, attenuated almost into a pedicel at the base, pu-
bescent with appressed hairs. Pappus of four or five? lanceolate, acute,
membranaceous palez, in the ray shorter and obtuse —Californian annuals,
with the habit of Hymenopappus. Leaves alternate, pinnately divided, with
narrow, entire, linear lobes; branches often naked at the summit, monoce-

phalous. Flowers yellow. Anthers naked at base.

Chenactis * tenuifoha; annual or biennial; at length smooth, much branched,
flowers fastigiate; leaves bipinnately dissected, segments narrow-linear, or
linear-oblong; rays funnel-formed, expanding longer than the disk; achenium
nearly smooth; pappus four-leaved; sepals pubescent, linear, acute; margin of
- the receptacle paleaceous.

Has. St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in May. About afoot high. Leaves very si-
milar to those of Hymenopappus filifolius, alternate, the young shoots a little tomentose. Involu-
erum hemispherical, many-flowered, somewhat viscid; pedicels rather short. Style hirsute, subu-
late. Florets minutely pubescent; the flowers bright yellow. Stem about a foot high. Pappus
of the rays shorter and obtuse.—Nearly allied to C. glabriuscula, but the rays are not palmatifid.
In this species the margin of the receptacle is foliaceous, the radial florets being situated between

the outer and inner series of the sepals.

Chenactis Stevioides; (HookER and ARNOTT.)
Has. In the Snake country. The rays palmatifid. Pappus four-leaved. Achenium four-an-
gled, nearly smooth.—A slender, few-flowered annual. Sepals oblong-lanceolate, nearly smooth,

about fifteen. Very nearly allied to the preceding. Flowers yellow?

376 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

* MACROCARPHUS.

HyMENOPAPPUS, but with the leaves of the involucrum linear, numerous,
(fifteen to twenty,) equal, in nearly a single series, and almost without mem-
branaceous margins. Receptacle naked. Florets tubular, the shortly five-
cleft border pubescent; the outer series somewhat ringent, but not spread-
ing. Branches of the style hirsute, filiform, thicker towards the extremity.
Achenium linear, conic, subcylindric, villous, attenuated below; with a
chaffy, nerveless pappus of about ten to twelve unequal, lacerated, oblong,
obtuse leaflets more than half its length; the pappus of the outer florets
shorter.—Biennial herbs of the north-west coast of America, and the Rocky
Mountains, with tomentose, bipinnatifid, alternate leaves. Stems dichoto-
mous, corymbose. Capitulum many-flowered, the florets rosaceous, or nearly
white, with the tube of anthers exserted, their cusps linear and acute, the
base naked.—Intermediate between Chenactis and Hymenopappus; differ-
ing from the former in its nearly equal florets, filiform, and not subulate
stigma, nearly terete achenium, and a pappus of many long, obtuse leaflets;
from the latter in the narrow-leaved involucrum, long leaves of the pappus,
and the form of the florets, which are merely tubular, not campanulate.—

(Named in allusion to the great length of the pappus.)

Macrocarphus Achilleefolius; canescently tomentose; branches corymbose,
leaves bipinnatifid, lobes short, oblong-obtuse; sepals canescently tomentose,
about twenty; chaff of the pappus nearly the length of the elongated, villous
achenium. Chenactis Achilleefoha; Hoox. and Arn. Bot. Beech., 1. c. ‘

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, on Ham’s Fork of the Colorado; common. Flowering in
July and August. Capitulum large, the florets pale rose-red. Robust, biennial, about four to six
inches high; the leaflets and lobes crowded, as in Milfoil.

Macrocarphus Douglasiz; deciduously and slenderly tomentose; stem branch-
ing, corymbose; leaves pinnatifid, lobes entire or subdivided, oblong, obtuse;
sepals glandularly and minutely pubescent; radial achenium glandularly sca-
brous, slightly pubescent, with a nearly equal pappus about half its length.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. BY A

Hymenopappus Douglas, Hoox., Vol. 1., p. 316. Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL., p. 30.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, towards the sources of the Missouri and the Platte. Allied to
the preceding, but a much smoother and more slender plant, and with a different pappus and ache-
nium. The florets, like those of the preceding, are pale rose-coloured. Radial florets with a

shorter pappus, and a scabrous, slightly hairy achenium; the central fruit villous.

PotyptTeris. Oss. Involucrum biserial, equal, subcampanulate. Sepals
greenish-white, oval, obtuse, with broad, membranaceous margins, (as in Hy-
menopappus;) tube of the floret filiform, as long, or longer than the campanu-
late, deeply five-cleft border, the segments of which are smooth, linear and
revolute, (and appear to have been white, or ochroleucous.) Stigmas filiform,
equal, hirsute, much exserted. Achenium angular, acute below, black, slightly
scabrous; pappus of ten to twelve lanceolate, brownish, membranaceous leaves,
with a strong mid-rib carried out to a terminal, shortly awned point, the rib
externally hirsute. Flowers disposed in corymbose, pedunculated clusters.

*STYLESIA.

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered; rays in a single series, (six to eight, )
oblong, entire, feminine; discal florets hermaphrodite, the border five-cleft,
campanulate, the tube glandularly pilose. Stigmas obtuse, pubescent, re-
volute, short, terminated with a minute cone. Involucrum turbinate-cam-
panulate; sepals eight, in a single series, ovate, obtuse, membranaceous
on the margin, distinct at the base. Receptacle small, naked. Achenium
linear-turbinate, narrowed below; when mature, flatly four-sided. Pap-
pus a small chaffy crown, of about eight obtuse, somewhat lacerated, nerve-
less scales.—Suffruticose plants of Chili, with opposite, multifid leaves, and
corymbose, pedunculated flowers, with the rays white and the disk yellow.
Allied apparently to Hymenozys, but with a very different habit to Bahza.—
(Named in honour of Doctor Styles, who made a very interesting collection
of Chilian plants, now mostly in the Herbarium of the Academy of Natural
Sciences in Philadelphia.)

Stylesia Ambrosioides; upper part of the stem and involucrum villous and
glandular; leaves ternately bipinnatifid, petiolate, seements oblong, obtuse;
vil.— 4. U

378 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

flowers corymbose; sepals oblong or lanceolate, longer than the disk; ache-
nium linear, elongated, pilose, more than twice as long as the pappus.—Bahia
Ambrosioides; (Lacasca.)

Has. Chili. (Dr. Styles.) A small under shrub, more or less gray and puberulous; leaves
opposite, trifid, or twice trifid, the segments oblong and incise; flowers corymbose, with the rays
longer than the disk. ‘The discal florets and involucrum almost that of Hymenopappus, to which
it is intimately related. Flowers by threes, six to nine in a corymb.

Stylesia * puberula; minutely pubescent; leaves ternately bipinnatifid, petio-
late, segments oblong or cuneate-oblong, somewhat obtuse; flowers corymbose;

sepals ovate, glandularly pubescent; achenium obconic, scarcely longer than
the pappus.

Has. Chili. (Dr. Styles.) Nearly allied to the preceding. A shrub, with rather stout branches,
the stems very full of leaves in the axills. Flowers corymbose, probably white? Rays five or
six. The involucrum nearly hemispherical. Pappus brown, shorter than in the preceding; the
achenium, also, not more than half the length of that species. Leaves in three principal divisions,
the lowest segment pinnatifid, the upper and terminal merely bifid or trifid.

ACTINELLA. (Persoon.)

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered ; rays feminine, cuneate, three-toothed.
Involucrum hemispherical or subcampanulate, biserial, shorter than the flo-
rets; sepals nearly equal. Receptacle naked, convex or conic; discal florets
short and tubular, five-toothed, villous at the summit; anthers included.
Stigmas revolute, obtuse, externally hispid, inappendiculate, in the ray fili-
form and smooth. Achenium turbinate, subcylindric, striate, densely pilose.
Pappus of about five to twelve membranaceous, aristate pale, eroded on
their margins.—Herbaceous or suffruticose plants of North and South Ame-
rica. Stemless or branching ; leaves entire, incise, or pinnatifid; flowers pe-
dicellate, solitary, mostly yellow.

+ Stem herbaceous, leafless, scapoid; the leaves radical, and mostly entire.

Actinella acauhs; Nurr. Gen. Am., Vol. IL, p. 173. Galardia acaulis;
Pursn, Vol. Il., p. 748. Cephalophora acaulis; Decanp., Vol V., p. 663.
Leaves softly and sericeously villous, canescent, in cespitose tufts. Root long,
thick and fusiform; scapes sometimes, though very rarely, with a single leaf.

Rays ten to twelve. Receptacle convex.
Has. Hills towards the sources of the Platte, in chalky soil.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 379

Actinella scaposa. 3. * linearis; slenderly villous; leaves narrow-linear, sub-
lanceolate, much attenuated below, all entire, with dark punctures; scape very
long and slender, with one capitulum; sepals linear-oblong, obtuse, twenty or
more in two series.

Has. Texas. (Professor Riddell.) Rays about twelve, twice as long as the disk; pappus five-
leaved, white and thinly membranaceous, nerveless, oblong, abruptly apiculate ; achenium slenderly

villous. Receptacle convex. Probably a distinct species, as the leaves are never apparently pin-
natifid, as in the true #2. scaposa.

Actinella * glabra; leaves narrow-linear, sublanceolate, attenuated below,
broadly sheathing and ciliate at base, covered with dark, impressed punctures;
scape one-leaved, one-flowered; involucrum campanulate, biserial, lanuginous,

sepals about twelve, ovate, obtuse; receptacle conic.

Has. Missouri, (near the Shawnee villages.) Ihave only seen a single specimen, after flowering.
It appears to be much allied to the preceding species, but with a different involucrum and recep-
tacle. Root perennial, with persistent vestiges of leaves, growing probably in tufts. Scape witha
slender linear leaf about half way up to the flower.

Actinella * Torreyana; densely cespitose; leaves linear, punctate, sparsely
pilose, but green, and darkly punctate, with a callous, rather obtuse point;
axills, scape and involucrum very loosely lanuginous; sepals oblong-ovate, ob-
tuse, with membranaceous margins; pappus five-leaved, hyaline, and slenderly
apiculate; receptacle conic. Actenea integrifoha; 'TorREY, in Annals Lyceum
Hist. Nat. N. York., Vol. IL, p. 213, non Kunru.

Has. On the lofty hills or mountains, called the ‘‘ Three Butes ” of the upper Platte, on shelving
rocks. Flowering in June. An alpine species of very dwarf stature, two to three inches high.
Rays ten or twelve deeply three-toothed, strongly veined, rather wide and large.

Actinella * lanata; densely cespitose; leaves linear, subacute, softly and co-
piously pilose, as well as the axills; scape and involucrum nearly impunctate;
the primary leaves oblong-spathulate, coriaceous; outer sepals lanceolate, or
lanceolate-ovate, without membranaceous margins; pappus five-leaved, scales
lanceolate, with long and distinct awns; receptacle conic.

Has. With the above, which it very closely resembles, but is much more pubescent, with longer
awns to the pappus and a different involucrum.

+ + Caulescent; leaves pinnatifid, filiform.

Actinella Richardson; caulescent, nearly smooth; leaves alternate, petiolate,
pinnatifid; segments few, filiform-linear, rigid, punctate; branches mostly one-

380 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

flowered; sepals ovate, the outer series coalescent at the base; pappus about
five to seven-leaved, aristate; receptacle conic.

Has. Upper Canada, Carlton-House, on the Sascatchewan. A strict congener with the pre-
ceding, of which several species have also the pellucid bitter resinous glands on the corolla.
Picradenia, Richardsoni, Hooxer, Flor. Bor. Am., p. 317, t. 108.

Oxs. Actinella heterophylla, the type of the present genus, which we can
by no means join with Cephalophora, is a suffruticose, somewhat minutely hir-
sute, much branched, apparently decumbent plant; the leaves linear, alternate,
rather crowded, some of them irregularly and incisely lobed, the lobes seldom
more than a single pair; they are also covered with impressed, globular glands,
which communicate to the plant, as in Picradenia, an intense bitter taste; the
branches terminate each in a single, long, pedicellated capitulum; the invo-
lucrum is very short, consisting of a double series of tomentose, narrow sepals,
the outer lanceolate. Receptacle convex. Achenium turbinate, subcylindric,
covered with dense and shining brown hair. The pappus a crown of ten to
twelve narrow-lanceolate, membranaceous scales, each with a strong, brown,
central nerve going out into along, slender awn. Rays numerous, cuneate,
three-toothed, apparently ochroleucous, or white, externally brownish, as in the
flowers of Gaillardia. A branch of this plant almost wholly resembles a spe-
cimen of the A. scaposa; the genus differs from our plants only in the greater
number of its pappus scales, which, in Pzcradenia, are, however, five to seven.

BURRIELIA. (Decand.)

Burrieha gracits; ©, above minutely hirsute; below smooth; stem often
branching from the base; flowers fastigiate; leaves long and linear; rays and
sepals ten to fourteen, the rays longer than the disk; achenium minutely sca-
brous.

Has. Near St. Barbara, Upper California. Six inches high, branched both below and above.

Pappus scales four, lanceolate, with long awns; achenium of the ray flattened, with two aristate
pappus scales. Receptacle conic.

Burrieha * longifolia; ©, leaves long, linear, and very narrow, smooth; stem
branching from the base, few-flowered; sepals and rays ten to fourteen, the
latter oval, shorter than the disk; achenium nearly smooth.

Has. With the preceding, to which it is closely allied. Leaves scarcely half a line wide, two
inches Jong; rays much shorter than in the preceding. Pappus four-leaved, awned, that of the

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 381

ray two. Four to six inches high, nearly smooth, except the young shoots and involucrum.
Receptaculum conic.

Burrieha * parviflora; somewhat pubescent; very much branched and many-
flowered; leaves long and almost filiform; rays and sepals about eight; rays
oblong, very short; achenium minutely scabrous.

Haz. With the above. Leaves scarcely a quarter of a line wide. Stem much branched from
the base; peduncles slender and very long. Involucrum smooth, divisions lanceolate. Receptacle
conic. Pappus three or four-leaved, long-awned, in the ray two-leaved and similar. Obs. In all
these species the discal florets are campanulate with a narrow tube, the border with five acute
erect teeth, scarcely, if at all, pubescent.

§. 1. * AMPHIACHZENIA.—Pappus none.

Burrieha * hirsuta; erect, hirsute; leaves very long, linear and acute, some-
times here and there incise; peduncles elongated; sepals and rays ten to twelve;

rays oval, as long as the disk.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Achenia compressed and scabrous. Six to twelve inches
high, below smooth, with the radical leaves very narrow. Stem leaves, about two inches long,
and a line wide. Scarcely distinguishable from B. gracilis, except by the absence of pappus.

*PTILOMERIS.

Capitulum heterogamous, many-flowered; rays feminine, elongated, slightly
three-toothed. Involucrum subcampanulate, many-leaved, in nearly a sim-
ple series, (ten to fifteen.) Sepals lanceolate, embracing the radial ache-
nia. Receptacle conic, naked or villous. Achenium slenderly conic, an-
cular, hirsute, attenuated at base. Pappus extremely various, many-leaved,
paleaceous, (eight to twelve,) or none! apex awned or obtuse, fimbriate; in
the ray smaller, formed simply of a short, multifid crown, or with the addi-
tion of one or two awns. . Discal florets hermaphrodite, campanulate, five-
toothed, externally, as well as the tube, glandularly pubescent. Stigma ob-
tuse, short, reflected, and pubescent.—Annual herbs of California; much
branched; leaves opposite, once or twice pinnatifid with long, capillary seg-
ments; flowers terminal, pedicellate, golden yellow. The whole plant
clothed with a slender, soft, glandular pubescence, which is aromatic. Al-

Vil.—4 v

382 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

lied to Burrielia in habit, but with the pappus in a numerous series, and the
leaves plumosely torn; also to Lasthenta, but with conspicuous, regular
rays, and an involucrum of separate sepals. It likewise approaches the
Manpiez#, by the embracing sepals, but the marginal achenia are provided
with pappus. The most paradoxical character the plants of this genus pre-
sent, however, is in the absolute conformity, or nearly so, of all the species
with each other, while they differ in the receptacle and in the pappus, or by

its total absence !—( Named in allusion to the slender feather-like foliage.)

Ptilomeris * aristata; palee of the pappus eight to twelve, awned; the ray
with two awns and a small crown of minute leaflets; receptacle conic, naked,
and alveolate.

Has. Near St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in April. Every part of the plant minutely
and glandularly pubescent; branching from the base, sometimes, in weak specimens only towards
the summit, branches few-flowered, flowers fastigiate. Leaves opposite, once or twice deeply
pinnatifid, the rachis alated and rather broad towards the base, segments almost capillary, long and
acute, (often an inch or more) and as fine as in Fennel. Involucrum ten to fifteen leaved, rays
the same number; sepals lanceolate, acute, equal, foliaceous; rays as long as the disk, oblong,
slightly two or three-toothed, the middle tooth smaller. Flowers bright yellow, a little smaller
than those of the common wild daisy. This, and the rest, from their abundant bright flowers, are
very ornamental, and of easy cultivation. In a green-house, in Philadelphia, I had this and the

following species to grow and flower luxuriantly, but they have since been lost through neglect.

Ptilomeris * coronaria; palea of the pappus eight to twelve-awned; the ray
generally without awns, and with a small crown of diminutive, awnless leaflets;
receptacle conic, densely villous and alveolate.

Has. With the preceding, from which it can only be distinguished by the specific characters.

a

Piilomeris * mutica; palee of the pappus six to eight-leaved, obtuse and fim-

briate at the summit, that in the radial florets smaller; receptacle conic, sparsely
pilose.

Has. With the preceding, from which it can only be distinguished by the pappus. ‘The rays,
as in the whole genus, are embraced by the sepals.

§. 1. * PriLopsis.—Pappus none.

Ptilomeris * Anthemoides; pappus none; epigynous disk very minute.
Has. With the above, and in no way, apparently, distinguishable from the preceding but by the
achenium, If any thing, the involucrum in this is a little more campanulate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 383

* DICH ATA.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, oblong, two-toothed.
Discal florets hermaphrodite, five-toothed, with a campanulate summit,
smooth. Stigmas subcapitate, obtuse, pubescent. Involucrum subcampa-
nulate, five to twelve-leaved, in a single series; sepals ovate, ciliate, the same
number with the rays. Receptacle conic, narrow and elevated, papillose.
Achenium narrow and acutely conic, angular. Pappus in ray and disk
similar, of about eight obtuse, small, fimbriated scales, and two, rarely three
or four, intermediate, separate awns.—Annuals, with opposite, entire, or
laciniately pinnatifid leaves; flowers terminal, pedicellate, yellow, almost
exactly like those of Burrieha, but the plant subaquatic, and with a very
different pappus.—(The name from the intermediate pappus of mostly two

awns. )

Dicheta * tenella; erect, stem simple, pilose; leaves linear, mostly entire, the
lower ones somewhat laciniated; rays and sepals five to eight.

Has. On the margins of ponds and wet places. St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in
April. A slender, diminutive plant three or four inches high. Leaves an inch or more long, about
a line wide. Rays scarcely as long as the disk.

Dicheta *ulginosa; decumbent and branching; stem, peduncles, and often
the involucrum hairy; leaves laciniately pinnatifid, with a broad rachis, the
segments linear; rays about eight to twelve, shorter than the disk.

Has. With the above, but a much larger plant, and almost aquatic. Awns of the pappus

sometimes three or four. Leaves two to three inches long with a broad rachis, sending off very un-
equal, linear, narrow, acute segments.

LASTHENIA. (Cassini.)

§. Honocymne.—Rays oblong, conspicuous, as long as the disk. Achenia
compressed, linear-oblong, glandularly scabrous, and without pappus.—An-
nual, subaquatic, or terrestrial herbs, with opposite, entire, linear leaves.

Flowers yellow, terminal, pedicellate.

Lasthenia glabrata, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 665. Decumbent or erect, and
branching from the base; smooth, except the pedicels; rays twelve to fifteen,

4

384 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

oval, bidentate, as long as the disk; sepals united into a hemispherical cup,
toothed at its margin; receptacle conic, papillose.

HELENIUM. (Linn.)

Helenum *grandiflorum; glabrous; leaves elliptic-lanceolate, acute or acu-
minate, widely decurrent, the lower ones subserrate; stem branching at the
summit; pedicels very long and fastigiate; the linear, acuminate sepals nu-
merous, and as long as the large, globular disk; rays flat, three to four-cleft;
pappus white, fimbriate, awned, half the length of the discal florets.

Has. Banks of the Oregon and Wahlamet; common. A stout plant, with very large, yellow flow-
ers, much like H. autumnale, but never growing so tall, seldom exceeding a foot to eighteen inches,
with leaves one to two inches wide, and three to four inches long, very irregularly serrated, often
entire; with the rays longer than the disk, and never tubular. Achenium striated with strigose
hairs on the ribs, the pappus white, with long awns, and lacerated or fringed at the sides. Re-
markable for its large flowers, dwarf size, and very long pedicels meeting in a sort of corymb.

Stigmas exserted, smooth. Rays very long, and pubescent externally.

Helenium * montanum; minutely pulverulent, pubescent; leaves lanceolate,
decurrent, subserrate; flowers corymbose, on short pedicels; sepals linear,
shorter than the disk; rays flat, mostly three-toothed; pappus acuminate, long-
awned, half the length of the floret.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, on the borders of Lewis’ River, &c., twelve to eighteen
inches high, the upper part hoary with pubescence. It has much the appearance of a dwarf variety
of H. autumnale, but is more pubescent, smaller flowered, and with a much longer awned pappus.

Helenium *parviflorum; smooth; the stem much branched and divaricate,
slightly angular; leaves lanceolate, or oblong-lanceolate, here and there subser-
rulate, scarcely decurrent; involucrum shorter than the disk; sepals filiform;
rays flat, three-toothed, narrow; achenium rather smooth; pappus awned, half
the length of the floret; flowers scattered, solitary or by pairs.

Has. In Georgia. A very distinct and well marked species, scarcely at all bitter to the taste.
Flowers scattered, not fastigiate, scarcely half the size of those of H. autumnale, to which this

species has an affinity, the leaves are also generally entire and scarcely decurrent. Rays slightly
pubescent externally.

§. 1. TErropus. (Decand.) Discal florets four-toothed.

Helenium * nudiflorum; glabrous; leaves remote, above small, lanceolate, de-
current, entire; stem tall, the summit divaricate and almost naked, few-flow-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 385

ered; involucrum shorter than the globular, dark brown disk; rays few, flat,
three-toothed ; pappus lanceolate, brown and awned, about one-third the length
of the discal floret. .

Has. The plains of Red River, Arkansa. A very elegant species, with deep orange or dark
purple brown rays, pubescent externally. Stem three or four feet high, spreading and somewhat
naked at the summit, pedicels long and grooved, involucrum a little pubescent.

Helenium *micranthum; nearly smooth; radical leaves narrow, linear-lanceo-
late, entire; lower leaves oblong-lanceolate, sparingly denticulate, decurrent,
upper ones lanceolate, entire; stem slender, dichotomous; branchlets one to
two-flowered, peduncles moderate; involucrum hirsute, shorter than the sphe-
rical, brown disk; pappus about a third the leneth of the discal floret, hyaline,
apiculate; rays three-cleft, flat.

Has. South Carolina. Allied to H. nudiflorum, but the capitulum about half the size, and the

rays shorter, as well as the pappus, which is white, smaller and not awned. In H. quadridentatum
the radical leaves are bipinnatifid.

Helenium Mexicanum. (H. B. and Kuntu.)
Has. Louisiana. (‘Teinturier.)

Division IJ.—Gatinsocem. (Decand.)

*PTILONELLA. (BLEPHARIPAPPUS in part.)

Capitulum few-flowered, radiate; rays about three, ligulate, feminine, dilated
and deeply three-lobed. Discal florets tubular-campanulate, five-toothed,
hermaphrodite, the centre ones sterile. Branches of the style short, obtuse,
rather smooth and exserted, the style hirsute; those of the rays smooth. Re-
ceptacle small, paleaceous, palea half-embracing, membranaceous. Involu-
crum subcampanulate, about eight-leaved, equal, the sepals half-sheathing,
oblong. Achenium turbinate, villous, crowned with a short circle of plu-
mose or ciliated pappus about a third its length; abortive central achenia
narrow-linear, with a pappus of fewer and less divided rays; (rays filiform,
from eighteen to twenty.)—An annual, much-branched, aromatic, slightly
hirsute and scabrous-leaved plant. Stem smooth. Leaves alternate, nar-
row, crowded, linear, entire. Flowers lateral and terminal, fastigiate, whzte,

vil.—4 w

386 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

with dark purple anthers and stigmas. Allied, though remotely, to Blepha-
ripappus, which ought to be referred to the Mapirm.—(Named from its mi-
nute, feathery pappus. )

Ptilonella scabra. Blepharipappus scaber, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. L.,
p. 316.

Has. The prairies of Oregon, east of Walla-Walla. Erect, about a foot high, towards the
summit dividing into numerous filiform, virgate branches, somewhat corymbose at their sum-
mits. Leaves numerous, minutely scabrous, linear, somewhat obtuse, attenuated below, sessile,
from a quarter of an inch to an inch long, scarcely half a line wide. Stem smooth and shining.
Involucrum and upper leaves glandular and viscid. Sepals oblong-lanceolate, a little hirsute.
Rays two or three, white, widely dilated, about as long as the involucrum, with filiform, smooth
stigmas. Discal florets about eight, also white; anthers and stigmas blackish purple. Infertile
achenium nearly smooth, empty and barren, with a coarser pappus of about twelve filiform fim-
briate scales. Radial florets sheathed by the sepals to their summits.

Ozs. As this plant is wholly at variance with the published generic and specific character of

Blepharipappus glandulosus, 1 have presumed to separate it as a genus.

-

Division I1].—Mapte#. (Decand.)

MADIA. (Molini.)

Madia sativa.

Haz. In the plains of Oregon towards the sea, particularly on Wappatoo Island, at the outlet of
the Wahlamet.

Madia * capitata; very hairy and viscid; leaves linear, amplexicaule; flow-
ers mostly in terminal clusters.
Has. With the above, and in the Rocky Mountains, of which, except the inflorescence, it ap-

pears little more than a variety. Achenium black, smooth, granulated, rather flat, and somewhat
four-sided. Rays trifid, rather conspicuous. .

MADARIA. (Decand.)

Madaria *racemosa; stem simple, erect; flowers axillary, racemose, on ex-
serted pedicels; leaves narrow-linear, sessile, hirsute, radical serrulate; above,
with the involucrum, pilose and glandular. .

Has. Plains of the Wahlamet, near the falls. Nearly allied, apparently, to J7. corymbosa, but
the flowers are not in a corymb, though sometimes fastigiate. Rays about fifteen, yellow, often
with a dark brown spot at the base of each, deeply trifid, twice as long as the disk. Sepals

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 387

sheathing, with the summit free and foliaceous; discal florets dark brown, masculine. Receptacle
convex, villous.

* MADORELLA.

Mania, but with the achenium compressed, and without angles, or nearly so.
Rays pubescent at the base, trifid, as long as the involucrum. Discal florets
subcylindric, with a pubescent tube. Stiemas filiform, acute, slenderly and
elandularly pubescent. Receptacular palee in a single series.—Biennials,
with slender, virgate stems; capituli subglobose, naked, pedunculate; leaves
entire, linear. Flowers pale yellow.—Nearly allied to Madia, but with a

different habit and stigma.

Madorella * racemosa; hirsute, the involucrum also glandular; leaves linear,
acute, the lowest ones opposite, radical ones only subserrulate; flowers axillary

and terminal, racemose.

Has. On the banks of the Oregon, near the estuary of the Wahlamet. Stem slender, rigid and
twiggy, involucrum of about twelve carinate embracing sepals, with leafy tips. Rays rather long,
irifid, their styles filiform, nearly smooth, and equal. Discal florets five-toothed, pale yellow,
numerous, all fertile: a single row of leafy scales outside the discal florets, the rest of the receptacle
naked. Achenium smooth, finely granulated as in Madia.

Madorella * dissitiflora; hairy and viscid; stem slender, virgately branched ;
flowers axillar}, lateral and terminal, shortly pedicellate; leaves linear sessile,

on the branches very short.

Has. In the Blue Mountains and plains of the Oregon. A slender, often much branched twiggy
plant, with naked flowers, and a very viscid, almost spherical involucrum. Achenium granulated,
flat, slightly and obsoletely angular. Rays small, trifid, pale yellow.

* MADARIOPSIS.

Maparia, but with the discal florets fertile, and a very strongly tuberculated
achenium in both ray and disk; that of the ray curved, and unequally three-
sided, with a small, oblique rostrum and an acumination at base; the central
achenia unequally five-sided, compressed, the surface without the granular
lines of Madia. Several rows of exterior discal florets, with a curved tube.
Rays white, or ochroleucous, at length red, with a pubescent tube scarcely
longer than the disk.

388 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Madariopsis * Chilensis; biennial, glandular and hirsute; leaves linear, entire,
sessile; flowers disposed in an irregular, small corymb, or raceme.

Has. Chili. (Dr. Styles.) Probably near Valparaiso. Apparently biennial; twelve to eighteen
inches high. Stem simple. Radical leaves very hirsute, those of the stem are also thickly clothed
with glanduliferous hairs; sepals embracing the fruit, the summits free, very hirsute on the back as
well as glandular, villous on the margin, twelve to fourteen, with the same number of trifid rays.
Interradial involucrum shorter than the outer, composed of separate lanceolate leaves. ‘The habit
is exactly that of Madaria racemosa, or nearly so, but the achenia are black, and remarkably
tubercular; those of the disk numerous, the exterior ones curved. Stigmas short, slightly pubescent,
and somewhat acute.—lI introduce this plant to complete, as far as I am able, the history of the
section Mapizz. :

* ANISOCARPUS.

Capitulum many-flowered, heterogamous; rays feminine, about twelve, ligu-
late, flat, exserted, smooth, the apex dilated and trifid. Discal florets smooth,
hermaphrodite, sterile, five-toothed, campanulate. Stigmas filiform, acute,
hirsute, exserted. Involucrum subglobose, the sepals in a single series, cari-
nate, embracing the fruit, the points free and acute. Receptacle flat, smooth,
with a single row of scales between the ray and disk, the centre naked.
Achenium of the ray compressed, granulated, naked, without angles; those
of the disk abortive, linear, crowned with a small, chaffy pappus of five to
eight short, lacerated, or fimbriated scales.—Hirsute, perennial herbs, with
linear leaves, entire or denticulated, below opposite, above alternate. Flow-
ers yellow, rather conspicuous, in a paniculated, few-flowered corymb.—
Nearly allied to Madarza, of which it has entirely the aspect, but the flow-
ers less conspicuous. Approaches Calycadenia by the fruit, but very differ-
ent in habit, and with the rays of Madia.—(The name from ’anwos, wnequal,
and xaprs, fruct. Alluding to the different characters of the achenium in
the ray and disk.) |

Amisocarpus * Madioides.

Has. On the banks of the Oregon, among rocks, in shady forests, at the outlet of the Wahlamet;
rather rare. Hirsute with long and short hairs, the stem and involucrum also glandular. Radical
leaves oblong, linear, or oblong-lanceolate, remotely serrulate, rather crowded, three or four inches
long, about half an inch wide. Stem simple, most hairy at the base. Stem leaves linear, sessile,
entire, acute, diminishing in size upwards; the stem above attenuated, about eighteen inches or

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 389

two feet high; the flowers racemose, and in strong plants corymbose or with fastigiate few-flowered
branches. Involucrum that of madaria; rays shorter, deep yellow, rather showy. Achenium
black and smooth, similar to that of Madaria, but without angles. Pappus of the central florets
almost like that of Bahia, obtuse and fringed.

* HARPASCARPUS.

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; rays feminine, in a single series, about five
to eight, truncated, very short, and two-lobed, scarcely as long as the filiform
style. Discal floret one! tubular, five-toothed, hermaphrodite, fertile. Style
scarcely exserted, short, nearly smooth, and somewhat obtuse. Involucrum
spherical, five to eight-leaved, the sepals carinate, closely investing the ache-
nium, and falling off in connexion with the mature fruit. Receptacle very
narrow, containing within the ray a foliaceous, pubescent, and glandular
involucrum of five wholly united leaves, surrounding the single hermaphro-
dite floret! Achenium of the ray compressed, smooth, falcate and granu-
lated, produced at the base and summit; central achenium nearly straight
and somewhat angular, naked.—Hirsute annuals of Oregon. Stem simple,
corymbosely paniculate. Capituh long pedicellate, glandular; flowers mi-
nute, yellow. Leaves linear, entire, the lower ones opposite. A very dis-
tinct genus, though still closely allied to Madza; but the falcate achenia fall
off invested by the deciduous sepals; and the only hermaphrodite central
floret, like a true proliferous flower, is entirely separated by an involucrum
similar to that of the ray, and united into an entire, five-toothed cup. The
whole plant of an aromatic odour.—(The name from ’apay, a sickle, and

xapios, fruit; in allusion to the form of the fruit.)

Harpecarpus Madarvoides.

Has. On Rocky plains in depressions, at the outlet of the Wahlamet. Common; flowering in
May. From a few inches to two feet high. Hirsute with rather long hairs. Leaves about a
line wide, one to two inches long, acute, entire, except the radical ones, which are sometimes
slightly denticulate. Capitulum glandular, depressed spherical, somewhat smaller than a grain of
black pepper. Pedicels various, in the fruiting state two to three inches long, in other smaller

specimens the flowers are nearly sessile, except the terminal ones. Flowers pale yellow.

Vil.—4 x

390 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
* AMIDA.

(A transposition of Madza, in allusion to its affinity to that genus.)

Capitulum heterogamous or homogamous, few-flowered; rays none, or one or
two, irregular, very small, ligulate, three-toothed. Discal florets hermaphro-
dite, cylindric, one to five. Stigma included, small and obtuse. Recepta-
cle naked, very small. Involucrum oblong or ovate, of two to five oblong,
or lanceolate sepals, embracing the deciduous fruit. Achenium oblong,
compressed, four-sided, naked, and granulated; in the radial florets sheathed
with the sepals.—Viscidly glandular annuals, with entire leaves, the lower
ones opposite; flowers small, in terminal clusters, bracteolate, bractes and
sepals covered with conspicuous, pilose glands. Allied to Madia, and re-

markable for its singular depauperation.

Amida * gracils; hirsute and scabrous, with close-pressed hairs; sepals con-
vex, very glandular.

Has. Rocky Mountain plains and prairies of the Oregon. ‘The whole plant fragrant from glan-
dularexudation. About afoothigh. The stem simple, sometimes branching towards the summit,
slender and rigid. Leaves narrow-linear, rather crowded, hirsute, and scabrous, the hairs close-
pressed. Flowers small, yellow, in irregular axillar and terminal clusters; involucrum sometimes

with only one or two flowers, at other times with five. Rays often wanting.

Amida *hirsuta; hirsutely pilose with spreading hairs; leaves linear, sca-
brous, and ciliated on the margin; sepals hirsute and glandular, carinated.

Has. With the above, from which it is distinguished by its pubescence and larger capituli with
broader sepals. The rays are also larger and more regular in their association.

* LAGOPHYLLA.

Capitulum few-flowered, radiate; rays feminine, about five, ligulate, flat, di-
lated, three-lobed, externally pubescent. Discal florets hermaphrodite, ste-
rile, five to six. Stigmas hirsute, filiform, equal. Involucrum five-leaved,
similar with the leaves, lanceolate, flat, closely sheathing the fruit, the apex
free. Receptacle minute, with a verticil of five leaves within the ray,
and surrounding the sterile florets. Achenium cuneate, convex externally,

and carinated within, perfectly even, (without any granulations,) the rudi-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 391

ments in the central florets merely filiform.—An exceedingly branched herb,
with a smooth stem. Leaves alternate, small, linear-oblong, imbricately
crowded on the branchlets and around the capitulum, remarkable for their
abundant, soft, white, silky hairs, thickly spreading from the margin, so as
to resemble almost the foot of a hare. Capitulum terminal, sessile among
the leaves. Rays wide and conspicuous, three-lobed, very evanescent, and
convolute when withered. Allied to Madia, but with a very different habit
and distinct achenium, almost exactly like that of Parthenium.—(Named

from the leaves being clad with long, soft hairs.)

Lagophylla * ramosissima; x?

Has. In the prairies near Walla-Walla, in Oregon. Stem two or three feet high, exceedingly
branched; smooth and shining, brownish. Leaves deciduous from the lower part of the stem and
branches; upper branchlets very numerous, alternate, short and one-flowered, crowded with small
linear-oblong leaves. Leaves about a third of an inch long, less than a line wide. Rays pale
yellow, and large, but very evanescent, only expanding, apparently, in the sun-shine. Achenium
black and shining, three-sided by an internal carination, without any of the elegant granulations

visible on the seeds of Madia. Slightly bitter from minute glands on the surface of the leaves.

HARTMANNIA. (Decand.)

Haritmannia * glomerata; ©, hirsute; leaves alternate, pinnatifid, sessile,
upper ones entire; stem branching above; flowers in terminal clusters; rays
about five, dilated oval, trifid at the summit; achenium gibbous, muricate and
rugose, in the ray naked, in the disk infertile with a six to eight-leaved, acute,
paleaceous pappus.

Has. St, Pedro, Upper California. Common; flowering in April. Involucrum viscid and
fragrant, as well as the bractes and upper leaves. A very elegant species with abundance of bright
yellow flowers, in dense clusters; sepals and bractes lanceolate, acute; sterile flowers six to eight,
surrounded by a nearly entire pentangular involucrum. Pappus six to eight, acute, lacerated
scales, nearly half the length of the floret. The plant six to eighteen inches high, and more or less

hirsute.

*OSMADENIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; rays feminine, about five, long tubular,
with the border equally three-cleft to its base. Discal florets hermaphrodite,
tubular and attenuated, the border deeply five-toothed and glandularly pu-

~

392 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

bescent, the teeth linear and acuminate. Stigmas exserted, hirsute and fili-
form, subacute. Involucrum ovate, five-leaved, sepals lanceolate, embracing
the achenium. Receptacle naked, alveolate, excepting a verticillated, pent-
angular, five-toothed cup, interposed between the ray and disk. Achenium
of the ray obovate, three-sided, rugose and naked, with a minute rostrum;
that of the disk turbinate, crowned with a pappus of four or five long, sca-
brous awns, and the same, or a smaller number of intermediate, minute, ob-
tuse, fimbriated scales—An elegant and delicate annual, of a powerful, and
most agreeable odour; stem divaricately branching -from near the base,
branches almost capillary; flowers solitary, terminal, fastigiate, white in
both ray and disk; involucrum viscidly glandular, subtended by three acerose
bractes. Leaves alternate, linear, hirsute, entire. Allied to Calycadenia,
but with the discal florets perfect, the palea of the receptacle united, and the
pappus double.—(The name from oon, odour, and adyy, a gland; in allusion

to the fragrance of its glandular exudation. )

Osmadema * tenella.

Has. St. Diego, Upper California. Flowering in May. Root simple, tap-shaped, slender.
Radical and lower stem leaves crowded, somewhat hirsute and strongly ciliate, two or three inches
long, less than half a line wide, end revolute on the margin. Branches very divaricate; upper
stem leaves rather distant and acute, rigid, almost acerose. Stem six inches to a foot high, nearly
smooth and brown, spreading out usually more than its height. Three or four leaf-like narrow
bractes usually beneath the involucrum. Sepals lanceolate, shorter than the internal leaf-like invo-
lucrum. Rays about the length of the involucrum, flat, cleft into three lanceolate segments down
to the base, the tube very slender, about the length of the border, nearly smooth. Stigmas of the
ray very long, filiform, equal and smooth. Stamens yellow. Achenium of the ray without pappus,
black, smooth, and shining, rugose, obovate, short, and three-sided, with a minute, projecting
epigynous disk, and a prominent narrow cicatrice at the base. Discal florets six to eight, the
achenium cylindric, turbinate, thinly villous, crowned with a pappus of four or five acuminated,
thick, scabrous, rigid awns, twice its length, between which are interposed alternately, and in-
ternally as many, or a fewer number, of obtuse fimbriated scales, less than a fourth their length;
the florets longer than the pappus, narrow tubular, with remarkably long, linear, acuminated,
glandular teeth; the stigmas exserted, long filiform, hirsute, rather acute.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS: 393

MADAROGLOSSA. (Decand.)

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; liguli feminine in a single series, the apex
trifid. Discal florets hermaphrodite, tubular, five-toothed, pubescent. Stig-
mas filiform, hirsute, acuminated, at length exserted. Receptacle naked,
villous, with a single row of palee between the ray and disk. Involucrum
hemispherical, sepals lanceolate, in a single series, (eight to twelve,) the
base embracing the achenium, the summit free and foliaceous. Achenia
of the ray smooth, linear-oblong, externally convex, acute, almost stipitate
at base, without granulations, crowned with a circular, areolar cicatrice;
those of the disk numerous, villous, acutely conic and narrow, crowned with
a paleaceous-pilose, subscabrous pappus, simple, or plumose towards the
base, of eighteen to twenty-five sete.—Herbaceous, annual or biennial, usu-
ally hirsute plants, with alternate, pinnatifid, or incise, linear leaves; branches
one-flowered, fastigiate, the apex naked or pedicellate. Flowers yellow, or

parti-coloured yellow and white in the ray, disk yellow; anthers dark brown.

Madaroglossa * elegans; decumbent, somewhat hirsute, much branched from
the base; radical leaves pinnatifid, linear-lanceolate; stem leaves amplexicaule,
incise, the uppermost entire; pedicels somewhat glandular and villous; rays
ten to twelve, (apparently) of one colour; receptacle villous; pappus of eighteen

to twenty sete, densely plumose towards the base.
Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. Nearly allied to M/. heterotricha; but in that species the

leaves are entire.

Madaroglossa * carnosa; ©, stem decumbent, pilose towards the summit, as
well as the involucrum; leaves linear-oblong, succulent and smooth, incisely
dentate; capituli subsessile, solitary; sepals linear, obtuse, softly pubescent;
rays very small; achenia pubescent in both ray and disk; pappus loosely plu-
mose, of about eighteen to twenty sete.

Has. St. Diego, Upper California. A dwarf, inconspicuous flowered species, three or four
inches high, with thick, somewhat succulent leaves. Rays two or three-toothed, minute. Sepals
about twenty, in two series; the rays between the two series, with the achenium included in the
sepals, and without pappus. Achenium linear, villous, attenuated at base, subquadrangular. An-
thers with black, acute, linear cusps. Stigmas hirsute, subulate, a little exserted, spreading. Pappus

aay

394 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

as long as the florets. A very distinct and peculiar species, and apparently rare, growing in the
sands of the sea-coast, Flowering about May,

§. CaLLicHRoa. (Genus Catiicuroa, Fisher and Meyer.)

Receptacle flat, villous, or fimbriliferous. Pappus of about twenty-five setaceous,
scabrous palee in a single series.

Ozs. So nearly are these plants allied to the preceding section, or true Ma-
daroglossa, that it is nearly impossible to distinguish M. hirsuta from M. ele-
gans in any way but by the pappus.

Madaroglossa * hirsuta; hirsute, decumbent, much branched from the base;
radical leaves pinnatifid, linear-lanceolate; stem leaves amplexicaule, incise,
the uppermost entire; pedicels somewhat glandular and villous; rays eight to
twelve; pappus simple, subhirsute, shorter than the achenium.

Has. St. Barbara and Monterrey, Upper California. Spreading sometimes one or two feet on
the ground, with decumbent, ascending branches. Rays longer than the disk, the extremities white,
the base yellow. ‘The whole plant has an aromatic scent, somewhat similar to that of the garden

Marygold, (Calendula.) Achenia of the disk sericeous, with a rigid pappus nearly its length;
the floret also pubescent, and partly hirsute on the border.

Madaroglossa * angustifoha; subhirsute and glandular, nearly erect; leaves
linear, incisely pinnatifid, sessile, above entire; pedicels glandular and villous;

rays elght to twelve; pappus simple, subhirsute, as long, or longer than the
achenium.

Has. With the above, which it greatly resembles, but is smaller, with narrower leaves and a
different pappus. Rays also partly white and yellow at base,

Subtribe VI. ANTHEMIDE/Z.

Division 1. EvANTHEMIDEH. (Decand.)
AcHILLEA lanulosa, Nutt. in Journ. Acad., 1. c.

Has. Frequent in the valleys and plains of the Rocky Mountains, and in Oregon.

Division 11. CHRYSANTHEME. (Decand.)

Keietes Arkansana. Leucopsideum Arkansanum, Decanp., Vol. VL, p. 43.
Has. Banks of the Arkansa. This plant appears to be wholly congeneric with Z. Domingensis:
differing principally from that species by the greater length of the rays.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 395

VENEGASIA. (Decand.)

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; rays feminine, numerous, fertile. Discal
florets hermaphrodite, tubular-campanulate, five-toothed, the tube glandu-
larly hirsute. Stigmas obtuse, puberulous, terminating in an obscure and
very short cone. Receptacle naked, punctate, the margin paleaceous. In-
volucrum loosely imbricated in about two series of large, rounded, foliaceous
sepals. Achenium of the ray and disk similar, naked, without pappus, ob-
long, grooved, scabrous and four-sided.—An undershrub of Upper California,
with all the aspect of a Szlphiwm. Puberulous; leaves alternate, deltoid-
cordate, dentate; branches one-flowered, leafy ; flowers yellow.

Venegasia Carpesioides, Decanv., Vol. VI., p. 43.

Has. In rocky situations near the sea, around St. Barbara, &c., Upper California. Lower part
of the stem shrubby, the upper part considerably branched, puberulous, and scattered with nume-
rous small, shining glands, of a slightly bitter taste, and with something the aroma of the garden
Marygold. Petioles about aninch long. Leaves deltoid-cordate, mostly serrate, acute, (sometimes
nearly entire,) with three principal, slender, spreading nerves; about two inches long, and two to
three wide. Involucrum very similar to that of a Silphium, composed of two or three series of
‘ dilated, roundish, cordate leaves, somewhat spreading, but closely imbricated at base, which,
internally, is covered with a matted tomentum. On the margin of the receptacle there occurs one
or two rows of large, oblong, partly membranaceous palee, somewhat torn on their margins. Rays
about fifteen, oblong, entire, longer than the disk; the whole flower about two inches in diameter,

with both ray and disk yellow. Achenia about the size of Caroway seeds, black, with a rather
large and prominent epigynous disk.

Division 111. CoTuLEz. (Lessing.)

* AROMIA.

Capitulum many-flowered, discoidal, heterogamous; rays feminine, minute,
truncated, (five or six,) bidentate; discal florets very short and rather round,
about a third the length of the achenium, glandular, minutely five-toothed,
closed. Stigmas short, subcapitate or obtuse. Receptacle naked. Involu-
crum subhemispherical, of a single row of angular, oval, imbricated sepals,

about five in number. Achenium subhirsute, linear, obconic, compressed,

396 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

partly four-sided. Pappus paleaceous, formed of a small crown of twelve;
or more, linear, obtuse segments, partly united at base.—A very aromatic
annual or biennial plant of Upper California, branching from the base; leaves
alternate, ternately dissected, the segments almost filiform. Flowers corym-
bose, yellow, without any projecting rays. Upper part of the plant clutinous
and aromatic, the scent something like that of the officinal Chamomile, but
more agreeable—(The name from apwua, aroma; in allusion to the agree-

able and powerful odour of the plant.)

Aromia * tenuifoha.

Has. Near the coast of St. Diego, Upper California. Smooth, but glutinous above, bitter to’ the
taste; when luxuriant, branching from the base, at other times more towards the summit, stems
and branches fastigiate. Leaves filiformly linear, rather long petiolate, mostly trifid at the summit,
some partly pseudopinnate, with a few shorter segments than the terminal ones; uppermost leaves
entire. Capituli numerous, small and inconspicuous, yellow, rather less in bulk than a grain of
black pepper, roundish-obovate, or narrower at the base, nearly sessile; corymb trichotomous.
Rays, or feminine florets minute, not at all exserted, and scarcely distinguishable from the discal
florets, but by the projecting stigmas. Receptacle narrow. Diseal florets ten totwelve. Pappus
about a third the length of the achenium, which is about a line long. Flowering in the month of
May. Stem six to ten inches high. Leaflets about as narrow as those of Pinus strobus, two to
three inches long.—Although artificially placed in this section, the present plant presents no
affinity with any genus included in it.

* LEPIDANTHUS.

Capitulum homogamous; florets tubular, minute, three to four, rarely five-
toothed, the tube alated. Receptacle naked, acutely conic, higher than the
involucrum. Involucrum hemispherical, biserial; sepals oval, obtuse, broadly
scariose, and nearly equal. Stigmas exserted, short, filiform, obtuse. Ache-
nium naked, subquadrangular, flattened at the summit, with a large epigy-
nous disk.—A somewhat decumbent, much-branched annual, with alternate,
pseudobipinnate, linear leaves, the terminal segments trifid; branches one-
flowered. Involucrum with all the sepals scariose; disk conic, elevated
above the involucrum. Allied to Pyrethrum by the alated tube of the discal
florets, but distinct in other respects.—(The name alludes to the scaly ap-

/

pearance of the involucrum. )

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 397

Lepdanthus suaveolens.

Has. In Oregon. Generally in open wastes, or by the banks of streams. Santolina suaveolens,
Poursu, Vol. II., p. 520. Decanp, Prod. Vol. VI., p. 37. Tanacetum matricarioides, Luss.
Syn. Gen. Compos. Artemisia matricarioides, Less. in Linnea, Vol. VI., p. 240. Tanacetum?
suaveolens, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. I., p. 327. Pyrethrum breviradiatum, (Herb. Schweinitz,
from Leprzovr,) from Unalashka, where it was also collected by Cuamisso. These specimens
are apparently depauperated with very few sessile flowers.—For several years it came up as a
weed in the garden of the late Mr. M‘Mahon, near Philadelphia, where it was raised from seeds
brought by Captain Lewis.

Division v.—ARTEMISIEZ. (Lessing, Decand.)

ARTEMISIA. (Linn.)
Section 1. DRacuncuLus.

Artemisia Nuttalhana, (Besser.) A. cernua, Nort. Gen. Am., Vol. IL, p.
1438, (1818.) A. Dracunculus, Pursu, Vol. II., p. 521. A. Dracunculoides, DEM.
in Suppl., Vol. II., p. 742.

Has. Common in the open prairies, from the immediate vicinity of St. Louis to the Rocky
Mountains.

Section 11. SERIPHIDIUM. (Bess.) Receptacle naked; capitulum homogamous.

Artemisia * Plattensis; h; leaves softly and sericeously villous, cinereous,
filiform-linear, revolute on the margin, simple and trifid towards the summit;
capituli very small, tomentose, ovate, nodding and pedicellate, disposed in a
loose and regularly simple-branched panicle.

Has. Upper plains of the Platte, and nearly to the Kansa agency. A whitish silky leaved
shrub, three or four feet high, much branched, the branches slender and virgate. Flowers very
small. Sepals ovate, unequal, none of them scariose. The scent similar to that of 4. Abrotanum,

nearly allied to 4. filifolia of Torrey, but the flowers are loosely paniculate.

Artemsia * foliosa; 2; leaves covered with a very short, dense tomentum,
green or canescent, filiform-linear, revolute on the margin, simple and trifid
towards the summit; axills leafy; capituli roundish, tomentose, sessile, clus-
tered in a narrow panicle with an angular rachis; scales oval or round, the

inner scarlose.
Has. Common round Monterrey, in Upper California. Nearly allied to the last, but distinct in its
inflorescence. Leaves about one and a half inches long, the undivided part resembling a petiole,
vil.—4 Zz

398 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

rather longer than the trifid summit; axills full of small leaves, at least before the flowering period;
branches long and virgate. I have only seen winter vestiges of the flowers; these are apparently
five or six in a capitulum. Leaves rather rigid. A shrub four or five feet high.

Artemisia *trifida; h, canescently sericeous; leaves linear, trifid towards
the summit, flat and obtuse, the upper ones entire; panicle simple, leafy; flow-
ers sessile, conglomerated; capitulum small, cylindric-ovate; outer sepals lanceo-
late, pubescent, the inner oblong and scariose.

Has. Plains of the Rocky Mountains and Oregon. A very dwarf species compared with the
preceding, six or eight inches high; the leaflets are also broader, the flowering branches also cy-
lindric, and the capitulum smaller, but still larger than in 2. Plattensis. From the plains of
Lewis’ River, in the Rocky Mountains, I have a variety, 8. *rigida, in which the leaves are

shining and silky, rigidly three-forked and acute; but of this I have no flowers. It is, perhaps,
a distinct species.

Artemisia * arbuscula; dwarf and shrubby; canescently sericeous; leaves
short, cuneate, trifid; segments oblong-linear, obtuse, flat, the lateral lobes
sometimes bifid or trifid, uppermost simple; capituli racemose, globose-ovate,
closely sessile, erect, solitary, or in three-flowered, pedicellated clusters;
branches slender, outer sepals tomentose, the inner oblong and scariose; florets
about ten, smooth.

Has. On the arid plains of Upper California, on Lewis’ River. A very diminutive shrub, four
to six inches high, with a rather thick, woody stem; branches yirgate. Allied to the preceding,

but very distinct; the capituli twice as large, the leaves short, the limb longer than the undivided
base, and the divisions much broader, &c. Allied to 2. mendozana.

Artemisia * tridentata; hk; canescently tomentose; leaves cuneate, three-
toothed at the summit, upper ones entire and obtuse; flowers paniculate; capi-
tulum sessile, ovate and tomentose, small; inner sepals scariose, linear-oblong.

Has. Plains of the Oregon, and Lewis’ River. A low, but rather stout shrub, white with a
close tomentum. Leaves rather more than an inch long, about two lines wide, more or less deeply
three-toothed, sometimes entire, the upper ones always so. Panicle much branched, the flowers

small. (I have not seen them in a perfect state, and therefore class this species by its apparent
affinity with the last.) Somewhat allied to 4. Chinensis.

Artemisia Columbiensis, (Nutt. Gen. Am.;) k; canescently tomentose ; leaves
long and acute, lanceolate-linear, all entire, not revolute, and equally pubes-
cent; panicle simple, subracemose; capituli ovate, erect, small, sessile; sepals

tomentose, the outer lanceolate, the inner oblong, obtuse, scariose on the mar-
gins; florets five to six, smooth.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 399

Has. On the plains of the Missouri, and along the Platte to the mountains. Certainly distinct
from the .2. cana of Pursu.

§. * Tanaceum.—Receptacle convex, pilose or lanigerous. Achenium acutely
costate, terminated by a membranaceous, somewhat lobed margin.—Shrubs,
with trifid or twice trifidly-pinnately dissected leaves. Capituli as in Abro-
tanum.

Artemisia Fischertana, and variety @. vegetior (of BrssER,) probably a dis-
tinct species.

Has. The Bay of St. Francisco, Upper California. If the variety 6. agrees in the character of
the receptacle with the species to which it is referred, I have not seen the plant.

Artemisia * abrotanoides; »; canescent and pulverulently pubescent; leaves
pseudopinnate towards the extremity, with a few (two pair) of filiform seg-
ments; upper leaves entire; panicle simple; capituli hemispherical, large,
nodding, on bracteolate pedicels; sepals oval, broadly scariose on the margin.

Has. Near St. Barbara, Upper California. Receptacle somewhat pilose. A shrub with much
the appearance of 4. Abrotanum. Common. Branches whitely canescent.

§. m1. ABRoTANUM. (Bess., Decand.) Flowers heterogamous, all fertile.

Artemisia * pedatifida; very dwarf and suffruticose, somewhat canescently
tomentose; leaves towards the summit trifid, or more or less subdivided into
bifid, or trifid, linear, and very narrow segments; stems numerous, subcespi-
tose, simple, terminating in a short, few-flowered spike; capituli ovate, sessile,
subtended by simple or trifid leaves; inner scales scariose; florets smooth, about
ten.

Has. Arid plains of Lewis’ River, Rocky Mountains. Flowering in August. A very distinct
and peculiar species, with a stout, woody, exfoliating root, sending out tufts of low stems, about
three or four inches high, terminating in spikes of from about four to ten flowers; capituli towards
the summit, conglomerated by threes; leaflets almost filiform-linear, but flat, often only trifid, but
also with the lateral lobes bifid or trifid.

Artemisia * pumila; herbaceous, very dwarf; leaves linear, sublanceolate,
nearly smooth or pubescent, tomentose beneath, trifid or incisely subpinnatifid
with few apiculated segments; axills pseudostipular, the stipules simply subu-
late, or two or three-cleft:; flowers in a simple, leafy spike, sessile, axillary,
solitary, or in clusters of two or three; capituli roundish-ovate; inner segments
of the involucrum oval and scariose; flowers polygamous.

400 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, Lewis’ River, by ponds, or in depressions. About six or eight
inches high. Leaves about a quarter of an inch wide, the upper ones simple, all acuminate; an
inch or more long. Raceme few flowered; flowers sessile, exterior sepals ovate. Some plants
with the flowers apparently all feminine, others all masculine, and a third set have about ten tubular,
hermaphrodite florets, and three or four female ones, all smooth.

Artemisia longifoka, (Nutt. Gen. Am.) In this species, which is wholly
herbaceous, the leaves are long, linear and acuminate, revolute on the margin,
tomentose beneath; though often entire, they are also as often trifid, or forked
towards the summit, the central segment, also, now and then subdivided; the
segments all linear, about half a line wide; the simple leaves not apparently
nerved.

Artenusia Ludoviciana, (Nutt. Gen. Am.)

Has. Along the plains of the Platte, to the Rocky Mountains. From half a foot to three or four
feet high; herbaceous, whitely tomentose on both sides; the lower leaves laciniated, lanceolate,
upper entire; capitulum roundish-ovate. jp. */atiloba; leaves tomentose, whitely so beneath, the
lower dilated and pinnatifidly lobed, the upper trifid and cuneate, uppermost, oblong-lanceolate,
rather acute; flowers in a close, narrow panicle, sessile; capituli globose-ovate, tomentose, the
inner scales scariose ; florets numerous, smooth, apparently polygamous.—Hazs. With the above,
in the Rocky Mountains: if not the @. cana of Pursh it may perhaps prove new. I have seen a

second specimen in Dr, Torrey’s herbarium, which differs in being less tomentose above.

Artenusia * heterophylla; stem stout, and herbaceous; capituli and the upper
surface of the leaves smooth; leaves long lanceolate, acuminate, irregularly and
sparingly laciniate, above entire, beneath whitely tomentose; capituli com-
poundly and closely paniculate, cylindric-ovate, and small; sepals oblong, sca-

riose, few-flowered.
Has. In the Rocky Mountains, by streams. A tall plant, somewhat allied to 2. vulgaris, but
still more to 4. integrifolia. Remarkable for its small, sessile, erect capituli, which are very

numerous; the plant is also gigantic, three or four feet high.

Artemisia *incompta; herbaceous; smooth, except the under surface of the
leaves, which is a little tomentose; leaves almost simply pinnatifid, trifid or
laciniate, sessile, the segments rather broad, linear and acute; flowers panicu-
lated; capituli subglobose, pedicellate, erect; sepals ovate and scariose; florets
numerous, smooth.

Has. In the central chain of the Rocky Mountains, in Thornberg’s Pass, near the great passage
to the plains of the Oregon. At first sight it somewhat resembles some variety of 4. vulgaris,

but is very distinct. Remarkable for its smoothness. Height one to two feet; segments of the
leaves a line wide.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 40]

Artemisia biennis, (WILLD.)

Has. On the plains of the Platte, and in the Rocky Mountains.

Artemisia pychnostachya, (Decanp.;) herbaceous, every where softly and
canescently lanuginous; leaves pseudopetiolate, bipinnately dissected; seg-
ments fastigiate, oblong, acute, simple, or partly subdivided; panicle racemose,
very long, and of nearly equal breadth, many-flowered; capitulum sessile, sub-
globose, erect, about ten-flowered ; sepals lanceolate, all lanuginous.

Has. On the sea-coast of Monterrey, Upper California. A species with almost the foliage of #2.
Absinthium, but very soft and lanuginous with somewhat spreading hairs. Perennial, with a

running root. Panicle two or more feet long; branches short, the flowers clustered. (I have only
seen the winter vestiges of this curious species.)

Artemisia * Pacifica; herbaceous, soft, and canescently sericeous; leaves
pseudopetiolate, bipinnately dissected, the segments often trifid, oblong or
linear, acute; stem leaves pinnately dissected, pseudostipulate on the infertile
shoots; stem and ovate, pedicellate capitulum, smooth.

Has. Shores of the Pacific, at the outlet of the Oregon, in sandy places. Considerably allied to
A. canadensis, but more tomentose, with broader and fewer segments to the leaves, the radical and
lower leaves very much as in the last species. Perhaps 2. desertorum, y. Scouleriana of Hoox.
Flor. Bor. Am., p. 325.

TANACETUM. (Lessing.)

Tanacetum Huronense, Nutr. Gen. Am., Vol. IIL, p. 141. TT. Douglasii,
Decanp. Prod., Vol. VI., p. 128. Omalanthus camphoratus, Hoox. Flor. Bor.,
Vol. L., p. 321. O. camphoratus? Less.

Has. Coast of the Pacific to California; common. Rays and disk pale yellow, the former
scarcely exserted.

Tanacetum * boreale; softly hairy; leaves and segments also bipinnatifid,
apiculate, rachis leafy, the leaflets pinnatifid; corymb few-flowered, (four to
five;) sepals lanceolate, the inner with brown, scariose margins; rays conspl-
cuous, three-lobed.

Has. Arctic America, (Hooxer.) Apparently not the 7. pauciflorum, in which the flowers are
said to be all hermaphrodite, and the plant very smooth.

* SPH EROMERIA.
Capitulum many-flowered, discoid, heterocamous; florets all tubular, the radial
feminine, (about five,) truncate, two or three-toothed; discal florets herma-
phrodite, shortly five-toothed; style bifid, stigmas truncate, and minutely

VII.—5 A

402 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

fringed at the apex. Receptaculum papillose, naked. Involucrum round-
ish-ovate, imbricate; sepals from five to ten in a single or double series, ob-
tuse, and broadly scariose on the margin. Achenium turbinate and smooth,
three to five-angled, with a vesicular testa, terminated with a small, paleace-
ous, unequal cup of three to five, or more, acute scales.—Low alpine, cespi-
tose or suffruticose perennials, canescently tomentose, with simple scapoid
stems, terminating in a single spherical, or somewhat round lobed cluster of
capituli. Leaves alternate, cuneate, pseudopetiolate, once or twice trifid,
with the segments linear and entire; florets yellow. Allied to Artemisia,
and with the same aroma, but with a different habit.—(The name in allu-

sion to its capitate inflorescence.)

Spheromeria * capitata; dwarf and cespitose, canescently sericeous; leaves
once or twice trifid towards the summit, sheathing at the base, seements linear-
oblong; leaves of the scapoid stem simple; capituli conglomerated into a sphe-

rical head; involucrum about five-leaved.

Has. On a high hill, near the Red Butes of the Platte, towards its northern sources on the
Sweet Water. Flowering in June. Growing on the summit of a rocky hill, in round tufts of
densely matted herbage, soft, silky and hoary with pubescence; scapes or scapoid stems slender,
three or four inches high, the spherical cluster about the size of a small cherry. Scales of the in-
volucrum oval, coneave, hairy on the margin. Radial florets short and truncated, two or three-
toothed, becoming enlarged and indurated at base. Discal florets about eight or ten, mostly
infertile, with rudimental achenia. Style of the ray bifid, obtuse, cleft half way down, minutely
pencillate at tip. Achenium somewhat three-sided, the angles terminating in a minute crown of
acute pappus. ‘The seed (at least in a young state,) enveloped in a utricular loose testa. The
odour of the plant agreeable, almost like that of chamomile.

Spheromeria * argentea; suffruticose and somewhat cespitose, whitely and
closely tomentose; leaves cuneate, entire, or three-cleft at the summit, the up-
permost also minute and undivided; stem simple, terminating in a single, rather

round cluster of capituli; involucrum biserial, ten-leaved.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, near the sources of the Platte, and Colorado of the West.
Flowering in July.—A very elegant and diminutive shrub, with the taste and odour of wormwood,
but more agreeably aromatic; the flowers bright yellow. Leaves about half an inch long, one to
two lines wide. Stem about four inches high, very slender, like a leafy peduncle, terminating in
a round, or hemispherical cluster of three to five capituli. Outer scales of the involucrum ovate.
Radial florets about five. Achenia about five-angled, with an unequal pappus of five or more
parts, longest on the angles; testa loose and utricular.. Receptacle papillose. Discal florets nume-
rous. Stigma truncate, and minutely pencillate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 403

SOLIVA. (Ruiz and Pavon.)

Sotiva *daucifoha; hirsute, diffuse, dichotomous; leaves long petiolate, bi-
pinnately divided, the lobes mostly three-parted, segments linear, sublanceo-
late, acute; capituli sessile in the forks of the stem; achenium obovate, sca-
brous, slenderly margined, convex externally, and minutely bidentate at the
sum init. .

Has. On the dry grassy downs within the limits, and in the immediate vicinity of St. Barbara,
Upper California. Annual, at first smooth ; involucrum and upper leaves very hirsute, the former
about five-leaved. Stigma filiform, distinctly bifid. Plant about two inches high, extending four
or five inches; the persistent style or rather its sheath, extending out like a rigid spine.

GNAPHALIUM. (Linn.)

Gnaphahum Californicum; ©, Decanp. Prod., Vol. VI., p. 224.
Has. Common round St. Barbara, Upper California. Flowering in April and May. It appears
to have a near affinity to G. decurrens, but with a different pubescence.

Gnaphahum Sprengel? ©.

Has. Near St. Barbara. Of this I have seen but a single specimen. It is nearly allied to the
preceding, but has occasionally a thin tomentum spread over the leaves in addition to minute
glandular hairs. The scales of the involucrum are also pale purple. As a variety, I would dis-

tinguish it as B. *erubescens.

Gnaphalium luteo-album; 8B. *occidentale, a much larger plant than the Eu-
ropean species. ‘The lower leaves inclining to be decurrent; capituli also

larger.
Has. Wappatoo Island, and the banks of the Oregon, &c., also in Upper California and Chili,
(according to a specimen from Dr, Styles.) It is probably the G. Vira-vira of Molini.

Gnaphahum * palustre; ©, softly, floccosely lanuginous and canescent; stem
much branched; leaves oblong, or oblong-linear, acute, subamplexicaule; flow-
ers in somewhat hemispherical, very woolly, bracteolate or foliaceous clusters;

scales of the involucrum white or brownish, linear, and rather obtuse.

Haz. Rocky Mountains, Oregon, California and Chili. A very branching plant, allied to G.
uliginosum, but with broader leaves, and a looser cotton-like tomentum; the involucrum also
nearly white, with narrower scales, and nearly all of them tomentose to near their summits. In
an advanced state it becomes exceedingly lanuginous and almost like loose flocks of cotton. The
receptacle flat and naked; the size exceedingly variable, being from an inch to a span high.

Gnaphahum * gossypinum; ©, white and floccosely lanuginous; stem nearly
simple? erect; radical leaves spathulate-lanceolate, acute, cauline crowded,

404 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

linear, acuminate, sessile, narrower towards the base; capituli conglomerate,
sessile, terminal; involucrum ovate, the scales yellowish, oval or oval-oblong,
_ obtuse.

Has. On the shores of the Pacific, at the estuary of the Oregom: rare. It has almost exactly
the appearance of Helichrysum graveolens, is heavy-scented, and somewhat glandular beneath the
copious pubescence. About twelve to eighteen inches high. Leaves one to two inches long, one
to two lines wide, acute or acuminate; scales of the capitulum pale yellow. (I have seen but two

specimens in a young state: it may, probably, branch at a later period.) It possesses several rows
of feminine florets, and is therefore a true Gnaphalium.

Gnaphahum filaginoides, (HooxER and Arnot, Bot. Beechy.) A slender,
often simple-stemmed species; radical leaves nearly smooth, or smoother, the
rest whitely tomentose and apiculate. Stem simple. Flowers in sessile, sub-
terminal clusters; capituli sharply ovate, yellowish, with the floral leaves
broader, and more whitely and densely tomentose.

Gnaphahum * microcephalum; suffruticose? densely and whitely lanuginous;
stem erect, simple; leaves lanceolate, apiculate, sessile, narrower towards the
base, nearly all similar; capituli conglomerate, in a short spike, ovate; scales
scariose, acute, white.

Has. St. Diego, Upper California: rare. About a foot high, the stem rather woody beneath

the dense white tomentum. Leaves one to one and a half inches long, two to three lines wide,
white on both sides, with a blackish apiculate point. Flowering clusters confluent in a short spike
or mass about two inches in length, involucrum very floccose at base, white and silvery, herma-
phrodite florets about five. Somewhat allied, apparently, to G. lanuginosum, but it strongly resem-
bles some of the species from the Cape of Good Hope. (I have seen but a single specimen.)

Gnaphahum spicatum.

Has. St. Barbara, Upper California. ‘The upper surface of the leaves green, but somewhat
deciduously tomentose.

Gnaphahum sylvaticum.

Has. In Labrador. (Herb. Schweinitz.) ‘The low form, with dark scales to the involucrum.

Gnaphahum * ustulatum; 2, herbaceous, erect; stem simple, terete; the whole
plant whitely tomentose; stem somewhat floccosely pubescent; leaves oblong-
spathulate, obtuse, mucronulate, the upper ones narrower, sessile, (not decur-
rent;) capituli oblong, aggregated in the axills of the upper leaves into a dense,
continuous, short, oblong spike; scales of the involucrum lanceolate and linear,
acute, brownish towards the points.

Has. On the plains of the Platte, towards the Rocky Mountains, and near St. Barbara in Upper
California. Nearly allied to G. spicatum, but without the decurrent leaves, which are whitely

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 405

tomentose on both surfaces, and the lanuginous tomentum somewhat spreading, or flocculent.
From G. sylvaticum it may be distinguished by the form of its leaves, and particularly by the scales
of the involucrum, which in that species are lanceolate, and oblong obtuse, with the margin in
place of the tips brown.—Perfect florets three or four.—It appears to be nearly allied to G. falcatum
6? of Decanp., Vol. V., p. 233, which, probably, does not appertain to that species.

Gnaphalum * depressum; canescently lanuginous, stemless, and cespitose;
‘leaves linear, obtuse, the primary ones smooth; capitulum solitary, sessile, cam-
panulate; scales of the involucrum brown, oblong, acute; achenium villous.

Has. The summit of the mountain, Pichincha, South America, (Dr. Jamieson.) I introduce
this curious alpine plant, on account of its near relation to our section OmaLtoTuEeca. It would
readily be overlooked for a stemless individual, of O. swpina, from which it is only distinguishable
by the largeness of the capitulum, which, moreover, contains several rows of female florets, with
only four or five hermaphrodite or sterile ones, and is therefore a true Gnaphalium.

s

§. OmaLotTHEcA. (Genus of Decand. and Cassini.)

* HETEROPHANIA.—Diozcous; the sexes of different forms.

Gnaphahum *dimorphum; white and lanuginous, stoloniferous; stem fili-
form, one-flowered; leaves linear, obtuse; in the female spathulate, in the male
narrow-linear and attenuated below; scales of the involucrum in the male lan-
ceolate acute, brownish; in the female very long acuminate!

Has. On the Black Hills of the Platte. Flowering in the beginning of May. The male plant
has a very stout, creeping, almost woody root, sending out thick, lanuginous, short stolons. Stem
like a slender leafy peduncle, the leaves about an inch long or more, and about half a line to a line
wide. Involucrum rather large, and somewhat campanulate, the scales pale brown; florets about
fifteen, infertile, though apparently hermaphrodite, twice as large as in O. supina; but for the rest
the plants could scarcely be told apart, in the depauperated individuals of the latter.—In the female,
the leaves are spathulate, about an inch long, and two or three lines wide! the involucrum is also
larger, with very long points to the scales! Notwithstanding all these curious discrepancies our
plant is inseparable in genus from Gnaphalium supinum. It is not an Antennaria, as the threads of
the pappus are all slender and equal in the male.

FILAGO. (Tournefort.)

Filago * Californica; ©, stem erect, branching from the base; leaves spathu-
late-linear, apiculate, below nearly smooth, the upper ones and the stem arach-
noidly tomentose; capituli few, paniculate, in lateral and terminal clusters,
sometimes almost in spikes; scales of the involucrum tomentose at base, above

vil.—5 B

406 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

scariose and smooth, sublanceolate, acute.—@. * tomentosa; leaves crowded and
tomentose, flower clusters approximating in spikes.
Has. Near St. Barbara, Upper California. Nearly allied to #. montana, but with larger

eapituli, &e., in g. the scales of the involucrum are brownish and purple. A much branched annual,
about a span high. External florets, without pappus.

ANTENNARIA. (R. Brown.)

Antennaria plantaginea.

Has. On the plains of the Platte to the ‘* Black Hills.” A one-flowered variety of this species
sometimes occurs, as in the .2. monocephala, of Decandolle, which is also, probably, a similar
variety of .2. alpina. Specimens have been sent to me from Louisiana by Professor Carpenter,
and more recently they have been found on the Wishahickon, by Mr. ©. Lea, Junior, of Phila-

delphia. In these specimens the solitary head of both sexes is unusually large, and the leaves very
broad.

Antennaria * parvifolia; subcespitose, with procumbent sarments; stem sim-
ple; lower leaves spathulate, or spathulate-linear, the upper linear, all whitely
tomentose; flowers conglomerate; scales of the involucrum oblong-ovate, eroded,
yellow.

Has. On the Black Hills and plains of the upper part of the Platte. A dwarf species, spreading
out in canescent tufts with very small leaves, which are about half or three quarters of an inch
long, and about two or three lines wide; the flowers in an irregular, somewhat round mass, not
a circular corymb, with the scales of the corymb sulphur yellow, and very conspicuous. Radical
leaves somewhat rhomboidally spathulate. The pappus of the male flower is very conspicuously
clavellate: the female flower has purple oblong-lanceolate scales to the involucrum, and a filiform
pappus. A specimen of this sex from Altai has a near resemblance to our plant, but is larger in all
its parts, and is the .2. hyperborea of Don.

Antennaria * Labradorica; canescently tomentose; sarments procumbent,
flowering; stem simple; radical leaves spathulate-linear, cauline linear, sessile,
at length nearly smooth; capituli pedicellate in a cyme of three to five; scales
of the involucrum ustulate and brownish, lanceolate and long acuminate, mem-
branaceous.

Has. Labrador. (Herb. Schweinitz.) Apparently a very distinct species. At first glance
resembling .2. alpina, but more nearly allied to 2. plantaginea; itis, however, a much smaller plant,
the leaves not three-nerved; the scales of the involucrum brown, and as it were soiled at the tips,
which are very much acuminated; the achenium is also perfectly smooth; with the pappus thick-
ened at the base, somewhat scabrous, and yellowish white.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 407

ARNICA. (Linn.)

Arnica angustifolia, Vani. A. fulgens, Pursu, Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. II.,
p. 527.

Has. On the plains of the Platte to the Rocky Mountains. Labrador, (Schweinitz!) from which
locality it appears to be the 2. plantaginea of Pursh.

Arnica * lanceolata; stem leaves about three pairs, semiamplexicaule, lanceo-
late or oblong-lanceolate, three-nerved, acute, irregularly dentate-serrate, nearly
smooth, with the margin and stem pubescent; capituli about three, pedunculate ;
involucrum longer than the disk; sepals about twelve to fifteen, lanceolate, acu-
minate, hirsute and glandular, as well as the peduncle; achenium also hirsute;

pappus nearly plumose.

Has. On the White Mountains of New Hampshire, at the elevation of four thousand five hundred
feet, (according to the observation of my friend Charles Pickering.) A very distinct species, allied,
apparently, to 2. Chamissonis. About a foot high, leaves two to three inches long, one to one
and a half wide, of a thin consistence, and nearly as large at the summit as at the base of the stem;
the lowest leaves somewhat cuneate, sessile. Stigmas much exserted, clavately thickened at the
summit, and pubescent below the point; those of the ray long and filiform, much exserted: the ray
without any rudiments of stamina, two and three-toothed at the extremity.

Arnica * fohosa; pubescent and minutely glandular; stem leaves three to
five pairs, lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, subacute, the radical and lower mostly
long petiolate or attenuate, often subserrate; capituli three to five, long pedun-
culate; involucrum about the length of the disk, the sezments linear-lanceolate,
subacute and pilose at the tips; rays scarcely longer than the involucrum, with-
out abortive filaments; achenium pubescent.

Has. On the alluvial flats of the Colorado of the West, particularly near Bear River, of the lake
Timpanagos. A species of somewhat variable aspect, allied to 2. angustifolia, but very distinct;
the rays much shorter, narrower, and sulphur yellow. In the slender form the stem is about a
foot high, with the radical leaves narrow lanceolate, mostly entire, and attenuated into a long
petiole, the two or three upper pairs sessile and semiamplexicaule. In another variety, which I
call B. * andina, the radical leaves are ovate-lanceolate, and usually subserrate, with a shorter stem,
and more numerous flowers; sepals somewhat biserial, about fifteen or sixteen, more or less hirsute,
not acuminate ; point of the stigma thickened, with a somewhat conic point. This variety appears
to be allied to 4. Chamissonis, but the achenium is less hirsute than in 4. montana, and the
sepals rather obtuse than acuminate, &c,

Arnica Menziesiiz, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., t. 111.

Has. In the Rocky Mountains, in the central chain, where it is sometimes diminished in size

408 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

to four or five inches in height. ‘There are no infertile filaments in the ray, and the pappus is
almost perfectly plumose.

Arnica * macrophylla; slightly pubescent; stem about three-flowered, with
three pairs of leaves; radical and lower petiolate stem leaves, cordate, acute, the
radical often obtuse, irregularly and somewhat incisely dentate, uppermost pair
small lanceolate, semiamplexicaule, acuminate; pedicel elongated, bracteate ;
sepals linear-lanceolate, acute, about twelve, hirsute at the base; rays without
filaments.

Has, In the valleys of the Blue Mountains of Oregon. Stem about twelve to eighteen inches
high; the leaves distant from each other, the lowest two to three inches wide, and about the same
in length; the petioles longer than the leaves, which with the lower part of the stem are more or
less pilose. Rays pale yellow, about twice the length of the involucrum. Discal florets with the
dentures hirsutely pilose at the tips. Achenium subcylindric, hirsute; the pappus nearly plumose.
Veins of the leaves coarsely reticulated.

Arnica *amplexicaulis; nearly smooth; many stems from the same root;
leaves five or six pairs, approximate, ovate, acute, amplexicaule, denticulate;
capituli three to five, lateral and terminal; sepals about twelve, linear-lanceo-
late, acuminate; rays without filaments; achenium hirsute.

Haz. On the rocks of the Wahlamet, at the Falls. About a foot high, and very leafy; the leaves
nearly all equal, except the uppermost floral pair: lateral branches leafy, one-flowered; rays longer

than the involucrum, nearly linear, three-toothed, the teeth small; tips of the involucrum purple.
Pappus nearly plumose.

SENECIO. (Lessing.)
+ Discoidal species.

Senecio *debilis; %, glabrous; lower leaves upon very long petioles, radical
spathulate-oval, obtuse, entire, or incisely toothed at base, cauline few, amplex-
icaule, pinnatifid; segments oblong, remote, entire or sparingly toothed, the
upper ones with a tuft of down at the base; corymb simple or compound; in-
volucrum minutely bracteolate; sepals about twenty, not sphacelate; florets
with the teeth glabrous; achenium smooth.

Has. Plains of the Oregon, near the Wahlamet. Nearly allied to S. elongatus, of Pursh.
Lower leaves with petioles three or four inches long, the primary ones quite entire and obtuse, at
length toothed, and finally pinnatifid, with clasping auricles; umbell usually twice compounded,
the umbells with three to five heads, the proper pedicels rather short; florets bright yellow. Lower

leaves often greatly resembling those of Barbarea vulgaris, the pinnatifid ones remarkable for the
remoteness and shortness of their lobes, which are mostly entire.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 409

Senecio *rapifolus; smooth; stem nearly erect, angular and striated, leafy;
leaves spathulate-obovate, acute, the radical ones petiolate, cauline amplexi-
caule, the uppermost lanceolate or ovate, all sharply and unequally dentate,
the base sometimes runcinate; corymb paniculate; involucrum cylindric, small,
about fifteen-flowered; sepals linear-lanceolate, about eight to ten; pedicels
bracteolate to their summits; achenium smooth and angularly striated; pappus

shorter than the florets.

Has. Towards ihe Rocky Mountains, along the upper branches of the Platte. Allied in habit
and affinity to §. cacaliaster, which is also sometimes without rays. Ons. The root tuberous,
stout and perennial. Many stems from the same radical crown, somewhat decumbent, about a
foot high, every where quite smooth and shining. The leaves very much like those of Sonchus
oleraceus, sharply toothed, their outline pretty much that of Brassica rapa, inclining to be
lobed or incise near the base, four or five inches long, by two or three wide; the lower leaves of
the stem with broadly alated petioles; upper part of the stem branching,, the branches all corym-
biferous; umbellets with three to five or six capituli; the pedicels with several subulate bractes,
a few of which also approach the base of the involucrum; sepals membranous on the margin, a little
pubescent, but not sphaceolous at the tips.—(In my herbarium this species was first marked by the
name of S, * arguius, which I have changed for the present, as more applicable.)

t + Capitul radiate.

Senecio * Andinus; smooth; stem erect, angular and grooved, very leafy;
leaves elongated, linear-lanceolate, acute, sharply serrulate, corymb compound,
paniculate; pedicels long, bracteolate, smooth; involucrum turbinate-cylindric,
of twelve to fifteen sepals, sphacelate at the tips; bractes beneath the involu-
crum rather numerous, subulate; flosculi about twenty; rays six to eight, about

the length of the involucrum; achenium smooth, pappus as long as the florets.

Has. In the valleys of the highest of the Rocky Mountains or Northern Andes, at an elevation
of about six thousand feet above the level of the sea. Flowering in July. Very nearly allied to
S. sarracenicus, which extends to the Altaic Mountains. About a foot high, and full of leaves,
three to five inches long, by half to three quarters of an inch wide; the corymb often very irregular,

made up of many slender, fastigiate flowering branchlets; the flowers small.

Senecio integerrimus, (Nurr. Gen. Am. and Decanp., Vol. V., p. 482.)

Has. On the plains of the Platte, towards the Rocky Mountains. My specimens differ some-
what from those of the Missouri, in not affecting wet places; the upper part of the stem in these
is occasionally sprinkled with a few soft hairs. The stem twelve to eighteen inches high, nearly
terete, and simple; the lower and radical leaves frequently oblong, or oblong-lanceolate, sometimes
denticulate, the stem leaves narrow-lanceolate, amplexicaule, acute, or acuminate, diminishing so

rapidly upwards as to give the stem much the appearance of a scape. Corymb small and con-

Vil.—5 Cc

410 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

tracted, five to eight or ten-flowered, the pedicels and involucrum bracteolate; sepals linear, acute,
about twenty, often with dark purple sphaceolous points. Rays about eight. Pappus shorter than
the florets; achenium smooth. Considerably allied to S. pratensis, but nearly smooth, also

to the S. papposum. ‘There is a specimen very similar to our plant from Altai, sent to Dr. Schwei-
nitz, but without any certain name.

Senecio * megacephalus; 21, stem low, densely lanuginous at base; leaves de-
ciduously lanuginous, oblong-lanceolate, entire, cauline amplexicaule, linear-
lanceolate, acute; corymb of three to five bracteolate, large capituli; involu-
crum pubescent, of twenty to twenty-four linear, acute sepals, tipped with tufts
of hairs; rays pale yellow, ten to twelve, scarcely as long as the involucrum;
achenium smooth, with about ten striatures; dentures of the florets papillose.

Has. On the plains of the Platte, towards the Rocky Mountains. Nearly allied to S. alpestris.

About six to eight inches high; the leaves perfectly entire, more or less pubescent beneath, lower

leaves with long petioles. Capituli very large, for the size of the plant, about as large as those
of the common bur, (rctiwm lappa.)

Senecio * fastigiatus; 24, nearly smooth, or somewhat arachnoidly tomentose ;
stem erect, simple, grooved, the summit compoundly corymbose and fastigiate ;
leaves lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, entire or distantly serrulate, acute, the
radical long petiolate, cauline few, sessile, linear, attenuated below, the upper-
most amplexicaule; branches of the corymb two or three-flowered, pedicels
elongated, bracteolate; involucrum turbinate, nearly naked, sepals twelve to

fifteen; rays oblong, nearly entire, about eight, longer than the involucrum;
achenium smooth.

Has. The plains of Oregon, near the Wahlamet. A tall, rather slender species, two to three
or more feet high, with a running root. Lower leaves with their petioles more than a span long,
not more than half to three quarters of an inch wide. Leaves of the stem very small and distant,
giving the plant a remarkably naked appearance. Sepals yellowish, linear, and acuminate. Rays
long, (often twice as long as the involucrum,) few, and bright yellow, linear-oblong, slightly
toothed, attenuated below, and sometimes tubular. ‘Tubular florets, about twenty, the teeth ovate,

acute, nearly smooth, exserted beyond the pappus. A few irregular slender bractes beneath the
involucrum.

Senecio *exaltatus; 2%, more or less hirsute with white hairs; the radical
leaves nearly smooth; stem tall, robust, nearly cylindric and grooved; lower
leaves oblong-lanceolate, unequally and glandularly serrate, rather broad and
long petiolate; upper leaves small and amplexicaule, incisely, and sometimes
deeply serrate; corymb compound, many-flowered, fastigiate ; involucrum cam-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 411

panulate, sparingly bracteolate; sepals about fifteen, linear, carinate, not spha-
celous; rays oblong, short, six to eight, about the leneth of the short involu-
erum; achenium smooth; pappus much shorter than the florets.

Has. The plains of Oregon, near the outlet of the Wahlamet. A remarkably tall and robust
species, from three to five feet high, above nearly naked and without a branch, except the sub-
divisions of the corymb, which may contain from forty to fifty capituli, all in one fastigiate cluster.
Involucrum brownish, short and rigid, the sepals with pubescent tips. Alhed to S. lugens, but
with smaller and more numerous capituli, and fewer rays, the upper stem leaves are also those
which are most divided, instead of being entire. ‘The stem and upper leaves are sometimes almost
hoary with rough white hairs, never arachnoidly pubescent.

Senecio * cordatus; 24, more or less hirsute, particularly the lower part of the
stem; stem tall and robust, subcylindric, and angularly grooved; corymb many-
flowered, nearly simple; lower leaves cordate-ovate, nearly entire, or repandly
serrulate, obtuse, long petiolate; stem leaves lanceolate, amplexicaule, serrate ;
involucrum campanulate, rather small; sepals linear, carinate, about fifteen,
with black, pubescent, sphacelous tips; rays five or six, oblong, about the
length of the involucrum; achenium smooth, pappus a little shorter than the

florets.

Has. Alluvial situations in Oregon, near the outlet of the Wahlamet; rather rare. With the
preceding: flowering in June. About two and a half to three feet high. The capituli comparatively
small, twenty to thirty in a slightly divided corymb; pedicels and base of the involucrum sparingly
bracteolate; involucrum smooth. ‘The stem appearing naked from the sudden diminution of the
leaves: the radical two to three inches broad, by three to four long, sometimes nearly entire, at
other times very regularly crenate. Allied to the preceding, but with a smaller and nearly simple
corymb, and the leaves at the base of the stem nearly as broad as long.

Senecio *hydrophilus; 21, very smooth and robust, erect; stem cylindric,
fistulous and grooved; leaves lanceolate, nearly entire, or repandly denticulate ;
cauline amplexicaule, acuminate; capituli bracteolate, paniculate; branchlets
subfastigiate, the corymbuli contracted, thyrsoid; involucrum small, subcam-
panulate; sepals about twelve, linear-lanceolate; rays about six, narrow, shorter
than the involucrum; achenium smooth; receptacle deeply alveolate, fim-
brillate. ;

Has. By the margins of ponds and springs in wet places, in the Rocky Mountains, by Ham’s
Fork of the Colorado of the West. Leaves very smooth and rather thick, very much like those of
Solidago limonifolia. Stem about two feet high. The root presenting an abrupt crown with
circles of thick fibres. Lower leaves narrowed below, with wide sheathing bases, an inch to one
and a half inches wide, the petiole six to seven inches long; stem leaves gradually becoming smaller;

Al2 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

the inflorescence six to eight inches long, the lateral branches terminating in thyrsoid clusters +
tubular florets twenty to thirty.

Senecio * Purshianus; x, softly and whitely tomentose, subcespitose; leaves
lanceolate-oblong, entire, cauline amplexicaule, lanceolate, incisely dentate at
base; corymb irregular, simple, few-flowered, the pedicels elongated, bracteo-
late; rays about eight; sepals about twelve, linear-lanceolate; receptacle convex!
achenium smooth, pentagonal, ten-striate; pappus as long as the florets. Czne-.
rarva integrifola, PursH, non WILLD. Senecio integrifolius, Nutr. Gen. Am.,

Vol. II., p. 165.
Has. Rocky Mountains (banks of the Platte,) also the banks of the Missouri. Allied to LZ.
tomentosus, but in that, besides other differences, the achenium is hirsutely ribbed. Nearly allied _

to §. canus, but with a different achenium, and stem leaves.

Senecio subnudus; (DEcanp., Vol. VL., p. 428;) 2%, smooth; stem erect, simple,
with one capitulum; lower leaves long petiolate, cuneate-spathulate, obtuse,
denticulate, cauline sessile, the upper sublanceolate, incisely dentate at base;
upper part of the stem scapoid and nearly naked; capitulum subhemispherical,
slightly bracteolate; sepals about twenty, acuminate; rays twelve to fifteen,
longer than the involucrum; achenium smooth, pappus as long as the florets.

Has. The Cascade Mountains on the Oregon; (the late Dr. Gairdener, from whom I received
the only specimen I possess.) It appears to be somewhat allied to 8. Cymbalaria of Pursh.
Petiole longer than the leaf; the leaf less than an inch long, scarcely a quarter of an inch wide, the
uppermost reduced to slender subulate bractes. Stem eight or nine inches high, and in all the

specimens I saw with a solitary capitulum.

Senecio * Cymbalarioides; 24, very smooth, except the axills of the leaves,
which are arachnoidly floccose; radical leaves cuneate-oval, very long petiolate,
serrate; cauline oblong, incisely serrate or subpinnatifid, narrowed below, the
base amplexicaule, uppermost leaves very small; corymb simple, four to eight
flowered; peduncles elongated, nearly naked; involucrum naked, turbinate,
short, of fifteen acuminate, smooth, linear-lanceolate sepals; rays about eight,
oblong, longer than the involucrum; achenium smooth, angular, ten-striate;

pappus as long as the florets.

Has. In Oregon. Allied to S. balsamitx, but with the radical leaves shorter, entire at the base,
on very long petioles, and with the capituli larger and fewer. Lower leaves about an inch long by
three quarters of an inch wide, appearing short, oval, and are mostly cuneate and entire at base;
petiole two or three times as long as the leaf; at the very base within, is seen a tuft of loose

floccose down; the leaves themselves are exceedingly smooth and lucid.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 4138

Senecio * Schweinitzianus; 21, smooth, stem grooved; lower and radical leaves
long petiolate, cordate, obtuse, or acutely cordate-ovate, coarsely or sharply
toothed, incise at base; cauline pinnatifid, auriculate and amplexicaule, the
auricle deeply cleft; umbell loose and subcompound; pedicels very long and
mostly naked; a few minute bractes under the base of the involucrum; in-
volucrum smooth, the sepals acuminate, about twenty; rays about twelve,

longer than the disk; achenium smooth; pappus nearly as long as the florets.

Has. In Arkansa, and, according to Schweinitz, in Carolina, marked S. Caroliniana in his
herbarium, but not, apparently, the plant of Sprengel. About a foot and a half high, perfectly smooth,
except a slight down, in the axills of the radical leaves. Radical leaves with the petioles four or
five inches long, the lamina of the leaf two to three inches long, by one and a half to two broad;
umbell compound, with as many as twenty capituli.

Senecio * Plattensis; 4%, somewhat pubescent; base of the stem arachnoidly
tomentose; leaves all pinnatifid, the radical petiolate, cauline amplexicaule,
lobes oblong, denticulate, the centre lobe sublanceolate; corymb nearly simple;
involucrum subcampanulate, minutely bracteolate; sepals about twenty, acute;
rays usually twelve, oblong, a little longer than the short involucrum; ache-
nium puberulous; pappus about the length of the florets.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, and in Arkansa. About ten to fourteen inches high; stem
simple, striated. Corymb nearly simple, with ten to twelve heads of flowers, pedicels one to two
inches long, slightly bracteolate. The Arkansa specimen is taller and more slender, with the
primary small radical leaves entire and smooth, the leaves more elongated, and less denticulate.
The whole habit of the plant, as well as the flowers, are very similar to S. tomentosus, at least the
smoother variety, but the achenium is less pubescent.

Senecio *coronopus; ©, smooth, dichotomously branched from the base;
leaves all pinnatifid, auriculately amplexicaule; the rachis wide, with few acute
segments, segments of the upper leaves denticulate; branches few-flowered,
fastigiate, pedicels elongated, naked, the summit beneath the campanulate in-
volucrum minutely bracteolate; sepals about twenty, smooth and carinated,
with acute, reflected, sphacelous tips; rays about fifteen, oblong, longer than
the involucrum; achenium cylindric, ten-ribbed, the ribs strigose; pappus about
the length of the florets.

Has. In Upper California, near St. Barbara. Flowering in May. A very distinct species,

allied, though remotely, to S. Californicus. The capituli, though fastigiate, are not in a corymb,
but terminate the forked branchlets. Flowers bright yellow. Stem much branched, six to eight

- VII.—5 D

A414 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

inches high, somewhat angular. Nearly allied to S. coronopifolius: may it not be a variety of that
plant introduced by accident? It is not, however, glaucous.

Senecio * fikfohus; %, stem leafy, striated, and, as well as the leaves, arach-
noidly tomentose; leaves pseudopinnate, sessile, segments linear, almost fili-
form, about two pair, the margin revolute; corymb few-flowered; involucrum
smooth, minutely bracteolate, subcampanulate; the sepals obtusely carinate,
acuminate, about twenty; rays few and revolute; achenium hirsute, pappus
copious, as long, or longer than the florets.

Has. The banks of the Missouri, towards the Rocky Mountains. With much the aspect of
some of the species from the Cape of Good Hope. Leaves a good deal like those of S. abrotanifolius,

but whitely tomentose, and divided into a very few simple segments, about an inch long, and a
quarter of a line wide. (I have seen but a single small specimen.)

CROCIDIUM. (Hooker.)

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; rays feminine, in a single series, (eight to
twelve.) Involucrum in one series, subimbricate, eight to twelve-parted,
the divisions ovate, somewhat spreading, at length reflected, the margins of
the inner series membranaceous. Receptacle conic, elevated, naked, mi-
nutely papillose. Branches of the stigma very short, lanceolate, acuminate,
slightly pubescent, not exserted, in the ray very short. Achenium subcy-
lindric, pentagonal, the intervals of the ridges densely squamellose at the
summit, appearing almost like an external pappus. Pappus deciduous, bar-
bellate, almost plumose, very white, and little more than the length of the
achenium; the radial achenia wholly similar, (not compressed,) but without
pappus.—A remarkably distinct genus, approaching more to the ANnTHE-
MIDE# than the present section, but, in fact, a new type, and a stranger in
each of the present orders.

Has. On the shelving rocks of the Oregon, at the confluence of the Wahlamet; common. A
very elegant but fugacious annual, six to eight inches high, sending up numerous simple branches
from the base, each terminating in a single clear yellow flower. Radical leaves spathulate, incisely
indented, the cauline small, linear, acuminate or subulate, sessile; pedicel very long, naked.
Axills of the leaves floccosely lanuginous. Involucrum smooth and greenish. Rays oblong, nearly

entire, twice as long as the involucrum. All parts of the capitulum, except the persisting invo-
lucrum, caducous. Border of the discal florets campanulate, deeply five-cleft, the divisions linear-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. Al5

lanceolate. Stamens and stigmas not exserted, very short.—This plant appears to have no relation
to Senecio. The general appearance of the flower is much like that of Chrysanthemum segetum.

TETRADYMIA. (Decand.)

Capitulum homogamous, four-flowered. The involucrum of four biserial, foli-
aceous, oblong, obtusely carinated sepals, the inner membranaceous on the
margins. Receptacle naked and narrow. Corolla tubular, deeply five-cleft, |
the lobes linear. Branches of the stigma nearly terete, the apex obtuse and
hirsute. Achenium turbinate, densely villous with simple hairs. Pappus
copious, in many series, the sete all equal, rather rigid and barbellate.—
Canescent, much branching, and sometimes spiny shrubs of the plains of
the Rocky Mountains or Northern Andes. Leaves alternate, sessile, fasci-
culate in the axills, entire and linear. Capituli in terminal fascicles or ra-

cemes, pedicellate. Flowers deep yellow.

Tetradymia canescens, (DEcanD.;) leaves mucronate ; capituli racemose.

Has. Oregon; (Douglas.) I have never seen this species, and think it more probable to be a
native ef California, or the Rocky Mountains. Certainly not along the plains of the north-west
coast.

Tetradymia *inermis; shrubby, much branched, and canescently tomentose ;
leaves oblong-linear, slightly acute, somewhat clustered; capituli in terminal
clusters of three to five, upon short peduncles, the central ones often sessile.

Has. On the dry barren plains of the Rocky Mountains. Common, particularly near Lewis’
River, of the Shoshonee, but not in the plains of Oregon. A much branched shrub, two or three
feet high, whitely canescent with a close soft tomentum, which is also spread over the branches;
the branches studded with the cicatrices of former buds. Leaves about three-quarters of an inch
long, often obtuse, slightly apiculated. Sepals oblong, obtusely carinated, connected at base.
Achenium thickly clad with long simple hairs, beneath which it is entirely hid; the pappus very
copious and long, at length longer than the florets, becoming pale brown, the sete rather slender,
and all similar; at length growing out to the length of half an inch.

Tetradymia spinosa; canescently tomentose, shrubby and much branched;
axills spinescent; leaves linear-oblong, obtuse or acute, clustered, at length

nearly smooth; capituli in terminal clusters, pedunculate.
Has. With the above, on the dry plains of Lewis’ River, and on Ham’s Fork of the Colorado of
the West: common. Flowering in July. A very elegant and singular shrub, growing in tufts,

Al6 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

two or three feet high, in the manner of the Furze bush of Europe, (Ulex.) Spines half an inch
to three-quarters of an inch long, sharp and somewhat curved. From under the flowering clusters
come out often tomentose branches, entirely clad with alternate spines, in two rows, in the axills
of which are formed buds, which afterwards produce leaves. Capituli on long peduncles; the
sepals distinctly carinate, oblong-lanceolate, receptacle entirely naked. ‘The leaves thinly tomentose,
almost green. ‘The villous hairs of the achenium shorter than in the preceding; bristles of the
pappus slender, and all similar.

* LAGOTHAMNUS.

TETRADYMIA, but with the capitulum five-flowered, the involucrum subcampa-
nulate, of five (or rarely six) flat, oblong sepals in a single series. Recepta-
cle naked, alveolate, dentate. Branches of the stigma subterete, obtuse, the
upper part, as well as the summit, pubescent. Achenium oblong, thickly
clad from the base with long, slender, fastigiate, minutely serrulate hairs of
the same height with the true pappus, which consists of about twenty stout
and rigid barbellated bristles.—A decumbent, canescent, much branched,
spiny shrub. Leaves clustered in the axills of preceding slender spines, en-
tire, linear, minute, thick, almost acerose and smooth. Flowers solitary,
axillary, terminating small branchlets; the pedicels bracteolate, appearing,
from their situation above each other on the branch, to form a raceme;
branches and involucrum white and densely tomentose.—(‘The name alludes

to the soft, tomentose clothing of the plant.)

Lagothamnus * microphyllus.

Has. On the arid plains of the Rocky Mountains, and near Lewis’ River, as well as Ham’s Fork
of the Colorado of the West: common. Flowering in July and August. A much branched,
spreading shrub, three or four feet high, with the young shoots, as well as their spines, soft and
whitely tomentose. Leaves clustered, oblong-linear, somewhat convex, perfectly smooth at all
times, scarcely more than two lines long, by half a line wide. Capituli mostly nodding, numerous;
the florets bright yellow and large, deeply cleft, with smooth, linear, acute segments. Cone of
anthers exserted, the cusps linear and acute. Stigmas rather small, pubescent below as well as at
the summit. Involucrum conic-campanulate, three of the divisions oval obtuse, two other smaller
and acute. About twenty of the bristles which immediately surround the floret are about as stout
and as much barbellated as in Tetradymia. The most singular part of the plant is the pubescence
of the achenium, the hairs of which are very slender, and as much serrulated as in the true pappus
of Senecio, which they wholly resemble; they appear also nearly all of a length, and come up
nearly even with the few bristles of the true pappus.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 417

Lagothamnus * ambiguus; with the whole aspect and character of the pre-
ceding, but with the divisions of the involucrum all obtuse; the false pappus of
the sides of the achenium more copious, and the inner true pappus so slender

as to be scarcely distinguishable.
Has. With the above.

Appendix to SenectonipEz. Subtribe MELAMPODINE.
Division 1. MinLericz?

* PICROTHAMNUS.

Capitulum monoicous, heterogamous, few-flowered; rays feminine, (three to
five,) tubular, truncated, two or three-toothed; discal florets masculine, with
abortive styles, (five to ten,) globose-ovate, five-toothed, teeth triangular, and,
as well as the rays and achenium, copiously clothed with long flaccid hairs,
the tube very slender. Receptacle naked, very small. Involucrum hemi-
spherical, imbricate, about five-leaved, the leaves rounded. Style bifid,
stigmas terete-cylindric, with a minutely pencillated summit, nearly smooth.

-Achenium obconic, turbinate, subcylindric, without pappus, sending off, up-

wards, numerous long, tortuous hairs. Discal florets without any rudiments
of fruit.—A low, much-branched, inelegant, spiny shrub, somewhat softly
lanuginous. Leaves alternate, twice trifid. With the habit of an Artemisia;

capituli in short, leafy racemes, the rachis of which, at length, becomes a

long spine. Florets pale yellow.—(The name from aixpos, bitter, and Paros,

a bush; in allusion to its bitterness. )

Picrothamnus * desertorum.

Haz. Rocky Mountain plains, in arid deserts, towards the north sources of the Platte. Root
woody, much branched and very long, covered with numerous fibrous vestiges of bark. Stem
from four inches to a foot or more, woody and branehed from the base; the whole plant hirsute
and grayish canescent. Leaves twice trifid, pseudopetiolate, the segments short, oblong, and entire.

A plant of very doubtful affinity, allied in some respects to Clibadiwm, and therefore to the division
MitteriE&. It is also allied to the Ivem; but the tube of anthers are united.

VIlL._—) E

A18 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Tribe V. CYNAREZE.
Subtribe CARDUINE A. (Lessing.)

CARDUUS. (Gertner.)

6.1. *Leprocuzta.—Rays of the pappus slender and few; anthers bisetose at
base, the sete lacerate.

Carduus * occidentalis; 21, dwarf; leaves deeply pinnatifid, above nearly
smooth, beneath canescently tomentose, segments subpalmate, ultimate divi-
sions lanceolate, terminating in short spines, and spinosely serrulate; involu-
crum subglobose, arachnoidly tomentose; divisions lanceolate, erect, termi-

nating in stright spines, the innermost scarlose, spineless and acuminate.

Has. Round St. Barbara. Stem tomentose, six inches to a foot high. Leaves four or five
inches long, about three-quarters to one and a quarter inches wide, with a lanceolate outline, softly
tomentose beneath, the lower petiolate, cauline amplexicaule at the base, divisions somewhat
palmate, in three or four unequal segments, the spines short. Capituli two or three, terminal,
subsessile, pale purple; florets very slender, subringent or unequally cleft. Anthers distinctly
bisetose and lacerate at base; pappus scanty, more slender than in most European Cardui; some-
what scabrous, the whole habit of the plant similar to that of Circiwm discolor. 'The pubescence
of the involucrum quite as remarkable as in the Cob-web Sempervivum, spreading from one seale
to another in right lines.

CIRCIUM. (Tournefort.)

Oss. To the character of this genus I would add, that in all the species which
I have examined, indigenous to America and the old world, the anthers are
very distinctly caudate at base, with this appendage generally torn or cleft
more or less deeply at the extremity. Erythrolena and Chamepeuce are,
therefore, mere sections in the present genus, distinguished principally, and
almost solely, by habit and the form of the involucrum.

§. 1. ERiotepis. (Cass., Decand.)

Circium * Hookerianum; arachnoidly tomentose; stem nearly simple; radical
leaves deeply sinuately pinnatifid, beneath canescently tomentose, the segments
sublanceolate, unequally bifid, spiny at the points, and ciliately spinulose; stem
leaves narrow lanceolate, slightly decurrent, rigidly spiny, the summit merely
toothed, with the segments bifid and very short; capituli few, axillary and ter-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 419

minal, subsessile; involucrum subglobose, densely and arachnoidly tomentose,
the seoments lanceolate, terminating in erect rigid spines, the inner series
merely acuminate; pappus conspicuously clavellate. |

Has. In Arctic America. (Hooker.) According to the specimen which he transmitted to the
herbarium of the late Mr. Schweinitz, now in the Academy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia,
marked as ‘‘ Carduus discolor,”’ it appears to be also the C. discolor of the Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. L.,
p- 302. The specimen seems to be about sixteen inches high, without a branch, with one
terminal flower, and three axillary buds: the involucrum would almost be mistaken for that of C.
lanceolatum; the flowers are apparently pale purple: the stem leaves four to four and a half inches
long, and less than three-quarters of an inch wide, excluding the spines, with a slender arachnoid
deciduous pubescence above, and a white tomentum beneath; the radical leaves are more than a
foot long, the lateral segments two to two and a half inches long, linear-sublanceolate, slenderly
ciliate with minute spines. Florets unequally cleft, the segments narrow and glandularly thickened
at the extremity, cauda of the anthers deeply lacerate. Pappus plumose, rather short, and bar-
bellated.

Circium Douglas. (Hoox.) Ozs. This species, which I collected near Fort
Vancouver, on the Oregon, is scarcely, if at all distinct from the C. wndulatum.
The flowers are unequally cleft, as usual, the segments linear and acute; cusps
of the anthers linear and acuminate; the caudate process deeply lacerate in
several threads, the outer row of florets produce almost a simply barbellated,
strong, rigid pappus, the inner florets a soft, plumose pappus, with slender cla-
vellate tips. The capituli, when fully developed, are nearly naked and globu-
lar. Flower pale purple. ‘The leaves on both sides are white, more so be-
neath, and very softly pubescent; they very much resemble those of the com-
mon Artichoke.

Circrum * stenolepidum; stem branching, naked above, and, as well as the
upper surface of the leaves, somewhat pilose and hirsute; flowers fastigiate,
somewhat corymbose; leaves deeply pinnatifid, sublanceolate, beneath tomen-
tose, segments deeply and almost equally bifid, spinosely ciliate and spinose at
the points, somewhat decurrent and amplexicaule at base; capitulum nearly
naked, slightly arachnoid, tomentose; divisions of the involucrum very long
and linear, terminating in short, continuous, erect spines, the inner series much
acuminated and unarmed.

Has. In the plains of Oregon. A tall and stout species, with the leaves somewhat resembling
those of C. discolor. Capituli large and globular, somewhat clustered or corymbose, the branches
fastigiate, sometimes producing two capituli. Flowers purplish, very remarkable for the narrow-
ness and great length of the sepals, which are nearly an inch long, and less than half a line wide,

420 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

except the base, the form linear-lanceolate, with very long points, all nearly attaining the same
common height. Pappus plumose, as usual, and clavellate; the florets unequally cleft, and the
anthers caudate at base.—Nearly allied to C. remotifolium.

Circium * canescens; 4%, dwarf and slender, canescently tomentose; leaves
lanceolate, decurrent, pinnatifid, undulated segments oblong, bifid, spinescent,
and with spiny serratures; capituli few, (three to five,) conglomerate, sessile;
involucrum slightly pubescent, the scales lanceolate, with rigid, erect spines.

Has. In the arid deserts of the Platte. The root creeping as in C. arvense. Stem about eight
to ten inches high, and, as well as the leaves, arachnoidly tomentose and canescent. Leaves three
or four inches long, about an inch wide, nearly white on both sides, most so beneath, decurrent,
with narrow spiny margins. Flowers few; the capitulum somewhat hemispherical, the spines
stout and rather broad. Florets pale rose, unequally cleft. Anthers caudate at base, and lacerate.
Pappus plumose and slenderly thickened above.

Circium * edule; annual or biennial, nearly smooth; stem pubescent, angular
and grooved; leaves lanceolate, amplexicaule, moderately pinnatifid, seements
obtuse, almost equally two-lobed, spinescent and spinulosely ciliate; capituli
terminal, conglomerate, sessile, by three and five together; involucrum subglo-
bose, arachnoidly tomentose, the scales linear-lanceolate, terminating in short,

erect spines.

Has. The plains of Oregon and the Blue Mountains: common. ‘Three to four feet high, robust
and somewhat succulent; flowers purple, nearly the size of those of C. lanceolatum, growing in lateral
and terminal clusters, corolla unequally cleft, anthers caudate, appendage lacerate; cusps of the anthers
lanceolate, filaments, as in all the preceding, pilose and hirsute. Pappus plumose. Allied to C.
foliosum. The young stems, stripped of their bark, are commonly eaten raw by the aborigines,
and have a somewhat pleasant and sweetish taste.

Circium *scartosum; 24° dwarf and robust; stem and mid-rib of the leaves
above and beneath softly and copiously pilose; leaves narrow lanceolate, be-
neath whitely tomentose, amplexicaule, pinnatifid, seements lanceolate, termi-
nated and ciliated with long spines, uppermost leaves and bractes linear, very
spiny; capituli conglomerate, sessile, roundish; involucrum somewhat arach-
noidly tomentose, the scales lanceolate and acuminated with rather slender
spines, inner scales terminating in scariose, lanceolate, fimbriate, reflected
points.

Has. The plains of the Rocky Mountains. Stem stout, about nine inches or a foot high, leafy:
the leaves about half an inch to an inch wide, and four to six inches long, the segments of the stem

leaves very short, ending in long spines; capituli three to five; two or three series of inner,
scariosely appendaged scales. Corolla unequally cleft, ringent; anthers lacerately caudate; pappus

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. _ 421

plumose; achenium smooth and even. ‘The inner divisions of the involucrum, and, in fact, the
whole aspect of our plant is very similar to that of Echenais carlinoides, which is also a true
Circium, without any vestige of generic character, or even habit, to separate it; for, on examining
the fruit when mature, I find it smooth and even, without any striatures whatever.

Circium *megacanthum; glabrous, robust and gigantic; capituli round, ag-
gregated in clusters towards the summit of the stem; leaves deeply pinnatifid
and somewhat decurrent, segments lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, terminating
in stout spines nearly their leneth, the margin ciliate-serrate; capituli bracteo-
late, involucrate, the bractes and upper leaves exceedingly spiny; scales of the
involucrum lanceolate, acuminate, erect, acicularly terminated; pappus very
long.

Has. On the banks of the Mississippi, in the vicinity of New Orleans. Found by Mr. Little
and myself. Its measurements, according to Mr. Little, are three to six feet high. Stem two
inches in diameter, at base; the largest leaves one foot four inches long: (a specimen from the
Bayou Road.) The leaves are sometimes slightly arachnoid along the mid-rib. The larger spines
are nearly an inch long, and as stout as coarse sewing needles. The clusters of capituli may be
from ten to twenty, about three inches wide, when largest; the sepals terminated with mere acicular
points. Pappus plumose, near one and a quarter inches long, white; tube of the floret twice as
long as the nearly equal border; anthers caudate, the appendage deeply cleft; cusps acuminate,
Resembles at first glance C. spinosisstmum, but it is much larger, and wholly distinct. The seg-
ments of the leaves are long and narrow. One of the most terribly armed plants in the genus.

§. vi. ONOTROPHE. (Cassini.)

Circium *brevifoium; stem slender, subterete, and, as well as the under
surface of the leaves, whitely tomentose; leaves oblong-lanceolate, amplexi-
caule, sinuately pinnatifid, with shallow, simple, or bifid lobes, ending in spines
and spinose serratures; involucrum ovate, naked; scales lanceolate, glutinous,
smooth, terminating in small, erect spines.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain plains. Allied to C. Virginianum; but the leaves more divided
and far more tomentose, as well as the stem; the capitulum very similar. Stem terminating in two
or three capituli. Florets ochroleucous, unequally cleft. Anthers lacerately caudate. Pappus

plumose, with slender tips. Leaves about half an inch wide, two to three inches long, nearly
smooth, and green above.

Vil.—5 F

422 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Suborder II. LABIATIFLORA. (Decanp.)

Tribe VI. MUTISIACEAS. (LEss.)

Subtribe m1. LEriExz. (Less.)
* CURSONIA.

Capitulum heterogamous, radiate; liguli flat, with rudiments of stamina, trifid
at the apex, externally tomentose, inner lip obsolete, or none. Discal florets
hermaphrodite, tubular, five-toothed, ringent, two of the dentures larger. An-
thers in the discal florets caudate, the apex appendiculate. Stigma clavate,
undivided, the branches adnate, that of the ray exserted and clavate. Invo-
lucrum hemispherical, loosely imbricated, the segments linear-lanceolate,
setosely acuminate, and rather rigid. Achenium subcylindric-conic, some-
what sericeous. Pappus bristly and scabrous, in several series, and very
unequal, five central bristles much larger and longer.—A small herbaceous
plant of Peru, with alternate, lanceolate, denticulate leaves, tomentose be-
neath. Pedicels elongated, terminal. Capitulum somewhat loosely tomen-
tose. Florets apparently dark red or purple.

Cursonia * Peruviana.

With the aspect of a Chaptaha, to which genus it is allied. Leaves approx-
imating towards the summit of the branch, about an inch long, and less than
half an inch wide, lanceolate, acute, attenuated below into a winged petiole, or
properly sessile, repandly denticulate and acute, beneath somewhat whitely
tomentose, above slenderly arachnoid; pedicels nearly naked, two to two and a
half inches long, with one or two subulate bractes. Sepals about two series,
linear-lanceolate, arachnoidly tomentose, nearly all of equal height, acuminated
with long, bristly, rather rigid points. Rays few, about a single series, as long
as the involucrum, flat, linear and trifid at the apex, of a very dark purple,
almost black. Pappus a little shorter than the florets. Discal florets also dark
purple; caudal processes of the anthers long and very slender, simple. Recep-
tacle apparently naked.—(Collected in the mountains of Peru by Mr. Curson,
with many other interesting plants, after whom this genus is deservedly named. )

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 423

POLYACHYRUS. (Lagasca.)

Polyachyrus * glandulosus; summit of the stem and involucrum glandularly
pubescent, outer scales acute and much larger than the rest, which are scariose
and smooth; pappus of the outer flower shorter on one side; leaves
amplexicaule, the uppermost subulate, glandular and entire; capituli two-
flowered.

Has. In Peru. (Mr. Curson.) The specimen I possess is only a flowering fragment. The
lower part of the stem is smooth; the leaves have been deciduous, and being wanting the form is
unknown. ‘The flowering cluster is three times as large as that of P. niveus (which Mr. Curson
also collected in Peru,) the two outer scales lanceolate and acute, glandularly scabrous, the inner
smaller scales are tipped with red; a large chaffy scale intervenes between the two flowers of the
involucrum. Pappus long and yellowish white, in the outer flower shorter on one side. Ache-
nium pubescent, more so in the floret, with long pappus. Flowers apparently white. Stigmas

bearded and truncate at the summit, which is reflected. Corolla and caudate anthers much as in
P. niveus.

424 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Suborder III. LIGULIFLOR/.

Tribe VII. CICHORACEZ:. (Vatu. Jussiev.)

Subtribe 11. Hyoseripe#. (Lessing, Decand.)

APOGON. (Ellictt.) Srrrnta? (Rafin.)

Oss. Involucrum generally eight-leaved, connivent in the fruit. Liculi
about the length of the involucrum.

Apogon lyratum, (NutTT.;) smooth and glaucous; cauline leaves dilated at the
base, the lower and radical ones runcinate lyrate; pedicels two or three; pap-
pus none; achenium smooth—Serinia cespitosa? Rarinesque, Flor. Lud., p.
149. Probably a dwarf state, as it is not cespitose.

Has. The plains of Arkansa. Very nearly allied to .2. humilis, from which it principally differs
in its lower lyrate leaves; segments about two pairs, upper leaves elongated linear-lanceolate, the
floral pair opposite. Involucrum eight-leaved. In #. humilis, the summit of the pedicel, and base
of the involucrum is often pubescent.

*UROPAPPUS.
(Section Catocatais of Catais, Decand. in part.)

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum ovate, loosely imbricate; sepals sub-
lanceolate in two or three series, the outer shorter. Receptacle naked, flat.
Florets about equal with the involucrum. Achenium subcylindric, minutely
scabrous or muricate, striate, attenuated into a thick rostrum. Pappus of
five linear-lanceolate, one-nerved palee, cleft at the summit, with a slender,
somewhat scabrous awn issuing from the cleft—Smooth and rather slender
annuals of Upper California, with long, linear, attenuated leaves, entire or
pinnatifidly laciniate. Pedicels very long, scapiform, one-flowered. Flow-

ers yellow.—(The name alludes to the singular setaceously caudate pappus.)

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 425

§. 1. CaLocaxais, (Decand.)—Involucrum with the external series shorter and
unequal. Fruit in all the florets similar, and mith a long rostrum. |

Uropappus Lindley. Calais Lindley, Decanp. Prod., Vol. VII., p. 85.

Has. On the north-west coast of America.

Uropappus linearifolius. Calais hnearifolius, Decanv., Vol. VII., p. 885.
Exclude the synonym of Hymenonema? glaucum of Hooker, which appertains
to the following genus.

Has. This plant I have met with, both at St. Barbara, and St. Diego, Upper California. Obs.
Leaves very long and narrow, linear, the lower often irregularly laciniate, or more or less pinnatifid,
with slender segments. Flowers yellow and small. Pedicels six inches to a foot long; the stem
frequently branched from the base. Pappus of a silvery whiteness, and very shining, the awn
much shorter than the palee. Achenium black, ribbed, and transversely striate, but smooth, and
with a longish rostrum; the fruit all similar. Sepals from eight to twelve, with four or five other

shorter external ones.

Uropappus * grandiflorus; leaves (as in the preceding) long and linear, the
lower often laciniately pinnatifid, with filiform segments, the upper entire; at
first often tomentosely ciliate at base; stem branching, pedicels very long; in-
volucrum of ten to fifteen leaves, the outer shorter; achenium slightly striate
or lined, scabrous with minute hairs, and with a very long rostrum.

Has. With the above, which it wholly resembles, except in the larger capitulum, brown and

very slender, scabrous achenium, and the shorter proportion of the bristles of the pappus. Sepals,
as in all the other species, lanceolate and acuminate.

§. u. * Bracnycarpa.—Achenium somenhat attenuated, scarcely rostrate, trans-
versely rugose; the fruit of the outer series ( five or siz) hirsute, all deeply stri-
ate; the bristles of the pappus as long as the scale.

Uropappus * heterocarpus; stem short and few-flowered, often scapoid; leaves
long and linear, at first a little hirsute; longer sepals about eight, three or four
shorter.

Has. St. Diego, Upper California. About half a foot high, with the leaves entire, scarcely a
line wide, attenuated at both ends; pedicel long, resembling a scape. Flowers pale yellow and

small. Achenium long and cylindric, but not properly rostrate. Palex straw colour, the bristles
distinctly scabrous, and about the same length,

VII.—5 G

426 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

*SCORZONELLA.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum ovate, imbricate, the sepals acumi-
nate, the outer, or those of all the series ovate, the margins membranaceous.
Receptacle naked, alveolate. Achenium not rostrate, quadrangular, strongly
and obtusely ten-ribbed. Pappus paleaceous, five to ten parted, united at
base into a rigid cup, the segments short ovate, terminating in very long,
slender awns. Style exserted, slender, filiform, the branches of the stigma
rather short.—Perennial herbs of Oregon, with fusiform, tuberous roots, and
sheathing, slenderly pinnatifid, smooth leaves; pedicels very long, naked and
scapoid. Flowers yellow, the liguli longer than the involucrum, the apex
five-toothed. (The name alludes to the general aspect of Scorzonera.) AL
lied, though somewhat remotely, to Calais, from which they differ wholly in
habit and duration, having large, conspicuous flowers, like those of Scorzo-

nera; the achenium is also truncate and strongly angular.

Scorzonella laciniata; leaves deeply pinnatifid, with entire, narrow segments:
sepals all broad ovate, acuminate, in about three series; segments of the pap-
pus ovate, the awn scarcely scabrous. Hymenonema? laciniatum, Hoox. Flor.
Bor. Am., Vol. I., p. 301.

Has. On the plains of the Oregon, near the outlet of the Wahlamet. Twelve to sixteen inches
high; the pedicel often eight inches to a foot long, a little enlarged beneath the involucrum. Stem
bearing one to three or more flowers. Segments of the leaves often as slender as threads, and
very long. Florets very numerous, nearly as much so as in the common Dandelion, of a bright
sulphur yellow; sepals very much acuminated. Achenium light brown, a little scabrous towards
the summit. Root tap-shaped, nearly like that of Salsafy.

Scorzonella * leptosepala; leaves, as in the preceding, slenderly divided; in-
volucrum with the sepals in two series, the outer about five-leaved, ovate; the
inner eight-leaved, lanceolate, acuminate; segments of the pappus oblong-lan-
ceolate, with scabrous awns; achenium wholly smooth.

Has. With the above, and scarcely distinguishable from it, except by the involucrum.

Scorzonella glauca. Hymenonema? glaucum, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. L.,
p. 300. With this plant I am unacquainted.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 427

KRIGIA. (Schreber.)

Krigia occidentahs, (Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VII., p.
104;) leaves mostly lyrate, with slender segments; scapes glandularly pubes-
cent; sepals five to eight, lanceolate, carinate, somewhat obtuse; sete of the
pappus scarcely the length of the scales.

Has. Arkansa.. Annual, as usual, and so similar to K. virginica, that I at first considered it
the same; but the specific characters given are constant, and prove it very distinct. In K. virginica,
the sepals are flat, linear-lanceolate, and acuminate, and the awns of the achenium are several times
longer than the scales.

Krigia dichotoma, (Nutt.) is nothing more than an advanced state of growth
of K. virginica.

Subtribe vi. ScorzonEREH. (Lessing.)

*STEPHANOMERIA.

Capitulum subcylindric, three or five-flowered. Involucrum three to five-
leaved; sepals linear-oblong, imbricate, one-nerved, with a caliculum of a
few shortish, unequal scales. Receptacle naked, scrobiculate. Achenium
oblong, obtusely five-ribbed or pentangular, transversely rugose, the summit
truncated. Pappus of ten to twenty-four thick, closely plumose rays, sepa-
rate, or connected together at the base by pairs.—Perennial, tuberous-rooted,
or annual, herbaceous plants, very much branched, above nearly leafless, the
lower leaves linear, or runcinate-pinnatifid. Capituli terminal; the flowers
pale rose-red. Nearly allied, both in habit and character, to Lygodesmia,

but differing in the pappus and achenium.

STEPHANOMERIA minor; 2%, smooth, and much branched from the base,
branches obscurely striate; leaves entire, linear-subulate; achenium subrugu-
lose, with five obtuse, carinated ribs; pappus of twenty to twenty-four rays.
Lygodesmia minor, Hoox. Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. I., p. 295, tab. 103, fig. A.

Has. On the plains and hills of the Oregon. About a foot high, flowering only at the summit;
flowers small, pale rose-red; caliculum of about five, small, ovate scales. Pappus white.

Stephanomeria * heterophylla; 21, radical leaves oblong, runcinately toothed
or pinnatifid, subhirsute, as well as the lower part of the stem; upper leaves

428 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

linear-subulate, minute; stem much branched, erect or flexuous; flowers soli-
tary, terminal; scales of the caliculum lanceolate, acute.
Has. On the borders of Big Sandy creek, a rivulet of the Colorado of the West. A low species,

about a span high, with a large tortuous root; the upper leaves reduced to mere scales. Sepals
lanceolate. Stem scarcely striated.

Stephanomeria * runcinata; 2, radical, and often the stem leaves runcinate-
pinnatifid, more or less pubescent, the lower part of the stem scabrous; upper
leaves linear; branches short and somewhat spreading, one-flowered; involu-
crum six-leaved, six-flowered; sepals linear-oblong; pappus white, of about
twenty rays; achenium nearly even.

Has. With the above, which it nearly resembles, but has larger capituli, shorter branches, and
generally more of the runcinate leaves. Flowers, as in the preceding, rose-red. Height about

seven or eight inches. Pappus white and rather long. Infertile branches clad to the summit with
leaves, which are more deeply runcinate-pinnatifid as they approach the extremity.

+ Annual species, divaricately branched; achenium pentangular, transversely ru-
gose, obscurely ribbed.

Stephanomeria: * paniculata; ©? smooth and glaucous; stem tall, stout and
erect, cylindric and striated, virgately branched; flowering branches short and
axillary, somewhat paniculate or virgate; leaves linear, dentate or sagittate at
the base; segments of the caliculum or bractes oblong and small; pappus gray,
of about fifteen to twenty rays.

Has. On the Rocky Mountain plains, towards the Colorado. Stem rigid and stout, two or more
feet high, virgately branched. Pedicels very short and leafy, axillar. Flowers very small, pink
red, and pale. ‘The leaves and involucrum are frequently incrusted with clear drops, of a very
bitter resin. Achenium straw-coloured, linear, transversely rugose, and pentangular; the ribs de-
pressed.

Stephanomeria * exigua; ©, glaucous and smooth; branches divaricate, very
slender and numerous; radical leaves runcinate-pinnatifid; the cauline resem-
bling mere scales; flowers lateral and terminal, on long bracteolate branchlets;
involucrum three to four-leaved, three to four-flowered; pappus white, of fifteen
to eighteen rays.

Has. With the preceding. With divaricate, and almost capillary branchlets; scales of the
caliculum about three, lanceolate, minute. Flowers pale red, and small. Achenium pentangular,

with acute angles, and transversely rugose sutures. Minute leaves, often denticulate at the base.
Pappus with small intercallary simple hairs.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 429

* RAFINESQUIA.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum subcylindric-conic, caliculate; sepals
equal in leneth, imbricated in about two series, linear and acuminate. Re-
ceptacle naked, puncticulate. Achenia subterete, subulate, scarcely striate,
somewhat rugose, terminating in a long, filiform rostrum; the external series
pubescent. Pappus plumose, in several series.—An annual, much-branched,
tall, smooth herb of Upper California, with the aspect of a Sonchus. Leaves
amplexicaule, runcinate-lyrate, flowers in loose corymbs; the branches mi-
crophyllus; caliculum rather short and spreading, the segments linear-subu-
late. Flowers small, white, externally dark purple in the centre of the
heul. Allied apparently to Tvagopogon, but very distinct in habit.—(Dedi-
cated to the memory of an almost insane enthusiast in natural history ; some-
times an accurate observer, but whose unfortunate monomania was that of

giving innumerable names to all objects of nature, and particularly to plants.)

Rafinesqua Cahfornea.

Has. Near the sea-coast, in the vicinity of St. Diego, Upper California. An annual growing to
the height of two or three feet, and nearly erect. Stem terete, and purplish, somewhat divaricately
branched, branches fastigiate, tending to a corymb at the summit. Leaves more or less deeply
and runcinately pinnatifid, amplexicaule, lanceolate, and acute. Floral branches with minute
reflected leaves. Involucrum rather long, at first almost cylindric, but quickly enlarging at the
base, so as to become conic in the manner of the Sow Thistle. Sepals twelve to fifteen, all of the same
height, but in two series, with membranous margins; the caliculum squarrose and short. Florets
very fugacious and small, only opening for a few hours, and but little exserted, toothed at the apex.
The outer row of achenia pubescent, with short appressed hairs, all somewhat rugulose, attenuated
into a rostrum about one and a half times its length, and slenderly filiform; the crown of pappus
copious, and softly plumose, the rays fragile. J have had this plant in cultivation in Philadelphia,
but it is now lost.

Subtribe vu. Lactucez. (Lessing., Decand.)

PYRRHOPAPPUS. (Decand.)

Ozs. Achenium linear-oblong, muriculate, with five broad, appressed ribs,
and internally grooved.
Vil.—5d H

430 | DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Pyrrhopappus grandiflorus. Borkhausia grandiflora, Norv. in Journ. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 69. Pyrrhopappus scaposus, Decand. Prod.,
Vol. VIL, p. 144. The achenium, seen in a young state, exhibits a short ros-
trum.

Has. In the plains of Arkansa, (Dr. Pitcher;) also in Mexico, (Berlandier.)

Pyrrhopappus Carohnianus. (3. *maximus; smooth, leaves for the most part
laciniately pinnatifid, acuminate; capitulum very many-flowered.

Has. In Arkansa. ‘T'wo to three feet high; the root apparently perennial; the lower leaves a
foot long, with divaricate, linear segments. Stipe of the achenium about twice its length. The
pappus decidedly simple, not in the least scabrous, seen through an ordinary microscope. Sepals with

a lateral, obtuse tooth at the summit, as in the original species. Branches of the stigma short,
rather obtuse, and pubescent.

TARAXACUM. (Haller.)

7

Taraxacum *montanum; very smooth; leaves spathulate-oblong, nearly en-
tire or runcinately toothed; scape smooth, much longer than the leaves; cali-
culum biserial, short and appressed, the scales ovate, or lanceolate, with broad
membranaceous margins; sepals not corniculate, about twelve; achenium spi-
nosely muriculate at the summit, scarcely half the length of the rostrum.

Has. On the banks of the Platte, im subsaline situations towards the Rocky Mountains, and in
the highest valleys of the Colorado of the West. Allied very nearly to 7. obovatum and T. colli-
mum. Perennial. Leaves three or four inches long, half to three-quarters of an inch wide, erect:
never pinnatifid, mostly obtuse, the teeth shallow and simple. Base of the stem, in a young

state, somewhat pubescent, in the axills only. Scape six to ten inches high, perfectly smooth-
Flowers rather small.

MACRORHYNCHUS. (Lessing)

Oss. The genus ought probably to be confined to the species with an alated,
winged achenium.

Subgenus *KymapLeura.t Achenia compressed, deeply alated, ten-ribbed, the

mings undulated; the exterior series hirsutely pubescent, the interior smooth,
nith narrow ribs.

Macrorhynchus * heterophyllus; ©, more or less hirsute; primary leaves spa-
thulate, the rest pinnatifid, with remote linear segments, the central lobe elon-

t From xvuo, a wave, and nrevpa, a rib, the achenium having undulated ribs,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 431

gated; stem very short, pedicels naked, scapoid, one-flowered; outer sepals

rather shorter than the inner, somewhat smooth.

Has. The plains of Oregon. An annual, from four or five inches to a foot high. Stem scapoid,
hid among the leaves; outer series of sepals slightly pubescent, the inner smooth, both linear-lan-
ceolate. Corolla pale yellow, externally purplish, very fugacious. Outer pubescent achenia
larger, purple, the inner straw-yellow, with smooth and shallower ribs. The whole plant nearly
resembles MM. pterocarpus, for which it might readily be mistaken.

*CRYPTOPLEURA.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum subcampanulate, imbricate in a few
series, the external shorter, pubescent and caliculiform. Receptacle naked.
Liguli elongated. Achenium smooth, linear-oblong, compressed, obtuse,
terminated by a very long filiform rostrum, the inner series bearing ten nar-
row, alated ribs; the outer series inflated, truncated at the apex, marked with
obsolete lines; basilar areola minute. Pappus very slender, white and sca-
brous.—Annuals, with the whole habit of the preceding genus. Stem sca-
poid, scarcely any; florets yellow, conspicuous, as in Trozximon.—('The name
from xpvatws, hidden, and arevpa, a rib, the ribs of the radial achenia being
obsolete or hidden.)

Cryptopleura Californica.

Has. Near St. Barbara, in Upper California. A dwarf annual, about three to four inches high;
hirsute and nearly scapoid. Leaves linear-lanceolate, incisely serrate. Involucrum in about three
series, the outer resembling a caliculum, with the divisions ovate and acute, hirsute; the two inner
series nearly equal in length, lanceolate, almost smooth. Rays five-toothed, exserted. Pappus
softly pilose, white, very slender and scarcely hirsute; the stipe twice as long as the achenium;
all the achenia abrupt at the summit, straw white; those of the exterior series truncated at the
summit and inflated, so that the seed is seen free in the testa: these are without striatures, and

almost without lines. ‘The inner achenia are compressed, and have ten narrow sharply winged

ribs.
*STYLOPAPPUS.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum hemispherical or subcampanulate, of
several series of nearly equal leaflets, calyculate; caliculum foliaceous, spread-
ing, of several series, mostly resembling the true leaves. Liguli elongated.

Branches of the stigma short, nearly smooth, and slenderly filiform. Re-

A432 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

ceptacle naked. Achenia smooth, linear-lanceolate, somewhat compressed,
sharply ten-ribbed; the outer series abortive, tabescent; the apex attenuated
into a filiform rostrum about twice its length, the base with a callous cica-
trice. Pappus short and white, of slender subscabrous hairs.—Perennials
with long tap-roots and laciniated, incise or pinnatifid leaves. Stems scapoid,
naked or bracteolate; the involucrum large, subtended at base by numerous
large, and usually dissimilar bractes. Flowers yellow. Nearly allied to
Macrorhynchus, but of a different habit, with conspicuous flowers; an abor-
tive, external series, an involucrum of many leaves, and an achenium merely

ribbed.—(The name alludes to the long stipe of the pappus.)

§. 1. Caliculum of many series, wholly leafy, dissimilar to the involucrum, which
ts hemispherccal.

Stylopappus * grandiflorus; nearly smooth, except the base of the stem, which
is lanuginous; leaves lyrately pinnatifid, the terminal segment large and ob-
long-lanceolate; scape robust and grooved, bracteolate; involucrum hemispheri-
cal; caliculum squarrose, of many series of ovate, pubescent, toothed leaves;

sepals linear-sublanceolate and smooth.

Haz. High plains of the Wahlamet. A very stout species, the capitulum larger than that of the
Dandelion, containing very many flowers. Scape twelve to fourteen inches high, nearly as thick
as a goose-quill, grooved. Leaves eight or nine inches long, very irregularly divided, attenuated
into long petioles. ‘The flower not seen. An external row of abortive achenia, nearly without
striatures, and smooth; fertile achenium linear-lanceolate, narrow and acutely ten-ribbed, pale brown,
the filiform stipe more than twice its length. Leaves often pubescent beneath, the inner surface of

the broad leaves of the caliculum tomentose.

§. 11. Involucrum campanulate; divisions of the involucrum similar, the outer
leafy.and somewhat squarrose.—TROXIMERIA.

Stylopappus * laciniatus; smooth or pubescent; leaves very irregularly and
often deeply pimnatifid, the segments long and linear; scape naked, smooth;
involucrum campanulate; leaves of the caliculum lanceolate, somewhat squar-
rose; stipe more than twice the length of the achenium, slenderly filiform. @.
* longifolius; more pubescent, leaves very long and deeply divided; the calicu-

lum leaf-like, longer than the involucrum, spreading, sometimes proliferous
into true leaves.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 433

Has. Plains of the Wahlamet, near its estuary. With the habit of a Troximon. Flowers pale
yellow. Scape six inches to a foot high. Sepals linear-lanceolate, smooth, the outer two series,
for the most part, slightly pubescent. In §. the leaves are twelve to fourteen inches long, the scape

two feet, with the involucel or caliculum squarrose, and sometimes several inches long.

Stylopappus * elatus; smooth, the base of the scape pilose; leaves very irre-
gularly and deeply pinnatifid, the segments long and linear; involucrum widely
campanulate; leaves of the caliculum lanceolate, the lower series hirsute; stipe

rather thick, a little more than the length of the elongated achenium.

Has. With the above, which it closely resembles, but appears to be a larger plant, the scape
from twelve to fourteen inches high; but the principal distinction is in the achenium, which is
twice as large, with a much thicker stipe. ‘The outer series of tabescent achenia are also pubescent,
and there appears, likewise, to be another inner, abortive, smooth series. Flowers almost exactly

like those of Troximon glaucum.

TROXIMON. (Nort. Gen. Am., non GERTNER.)

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum imbricate, subcampanulate, divisions
lanceolate, distinct, or united at base. Receptacle naked, punctate. Ache-
nium subterete, with ten obtuse ribs, attenuated above into a somewhat simi-
larly striated, and rather short, thick rostrum. Pappus copious, setaceous,
persistent, widest at base, longer than the achenium, and scarcely scabrous.
—Stemless perennials, with fusiform roots, and mostly entire, linear, smooth,
sublanceolate leaves. Scapes terete, exserted, one-flowered; flowers yellow
or rose-coloured. Oss. The only species of this genus known to Gertner,
T. lanatum, is now referred to Scorzonera, the name thus unoccupied may,

therefore, still be retained for the American species.

+ Achenium terete, shortly rostrate, with obtuse ribs.

Troximon glaueum. 'The involucrum is usually smooth, the divisions in

about three series, the outer shorter, all of them lanceolate and acute.
Has. On the plains of the Platte, and Missouri, about the Great Bend.

Troximon marginatum. ‘The scape taller than in the preceding. Divisions
of the involucrum in about two series, with the outer broader and as long as
the inner, all of them linear-lanceolate. Achenium subcylindric, somewhat
narrower at the summit, pale straw-colour, with ten obtuse ribs, the basal cica-

VII.—5 I

&

434 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

trice minute, not a calosity. Pappus white and shining, coarse and rather
bristly, scarcely in the least scabrous, thicker at the base, longer than the
achenium.

Has. With the above, to the Rocky Mountains.

Troximon * pumilum; \eaves lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, scarcely acute;
scape but little longer than the leaves; involucrum campanulate; sepals nume-
rous, in three or four nearly equal series, ovate-lanceolate, acute, pubescent, the
inner linear, all divided to the base.

Has. Plains of the Rocky Mountains, in Oregon. ‘The only specimen I have seen is about
four and a half inches high, the scape about an inch longer than the almost obtuse, smooth, and
glaucous leaves. ‘The sepals are unusually numerous, and nearly all of a length, the outer a little

shorter. Allied to 7. glaucum, but with the habit and leaves of 7°. aurantiacum; the involuerum
wholly different from either.

Troximon * taraxacifolum; subhirsute; leaves lanceolate or oval-lanceolate,
scarcely acute, incisely and runcinately dentate at base; involucrum of about
two series of leaflets, the inner linear; achenium rostrately attenuated, the ribs
shallow and slender.

Has. Plains of the Wahlamet. But I have only seen it after flowering. A very distinct species,
from the broadness of the leaves, which are one and a quarter inches wide, by about six inches

long, attenuated at base, and most pubescent on the mid-rib, Scape rather short. Pappus very
long and coarse, minutely scabrous. ,

+ + Achenium compressed, nith ten shallow, acute ribs, and attenuated into a dis-
tinct rostrum, shorter than the long and bristly pappus. Involucrwm ovate, in
about three serves of unequal, lanceolate sepals.

Trozimon *parviflorum; leaves linear-lanceolate, acuminate, smooth or pu-
bescent, often runcinately denticulate towards the base; scape pubescent at
the summit, lanuginous; sepals nearly smooth, in three unequal series, lanceo-
late, acuminate; flowers yellow.

Haz. On the plains of the Platte to the Rocky Mountains. About four or five inches high.

The leaves about two lines wide, acuminated at each end. Pappus minutely scabrous; the outer-

most divisions of the involucrum only about half the length of the inner.

Troximon *roseum; leaves narrow lanceolate, runcinately pinnatifid, acumi-
nate, the segments or teeth linear and acuminate; scape elongated, smooth, ex-

cept the suramit, which is lanuginous; sepals in about three unequal series,
lanceolate, acuminate; flowers rose-colour.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 435

Has. With the above, which it wholly resembles, except the leaves, and red flowers; four to
six inches high. Leaves three or four inches long, half to three-quarters of an inch wide, with
narrow, curving, and mostly.runcinate teeth or segments. Achenium distinctly rostrate, rather

flat, with shallow, acute ribs, nearly as long as the coarse, white and bristly, scarcely scabrous

pappus.

* MALACOMERIS.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum widely campanulate, loosely imbri-
cate in about two nearly equal series, irregularly bracteolate or caliculate at
the base; the seements smooth, linear, nerveless, and membranaceous on the
margin. Receptacle naked. Anthers bisetose at base. Achenium oblong,
erostrate, truncate, somewhat pentagonal, with about fifteen very slender
strie. Pappus white, in several series, slenderly pilose, deciduous, long,
and somewhat barbellated towards the base.—A suffruticose, softly tomen-
tose, and canescent plant of Upper California. Leaves pinnatifid with few
linear segments; stem short, above scapoid, one to three-flowered ; flowers ra-
ther large and yellow. (The name is given in allusion to the soft pubescence.)
Malacomeris * incanus.

Has. St. Diego, on an island in the bay. Suffruticose and decumbent, base of the branches
woody. Radical leaves in tufts, whitely and softly tomentose; primary leaves smoother, all more
or less pinnatifid and linear, with very few segments, the summit trifid; scape or stem rising two
or three inches above the leaves, one to three-flowered, towards the summit becoming smoother,
with numerous, smooth, ovate bractes, six or eight of which form a sort of caliculum. Involuecrum
smooth, the segments numerous, linear and partly acute, all of them of equal height. Florets very
numerous and exserted, pubescent on the tube. Stigmas nearly smooth, slender, and but little
exserted. Pappus three or four times longer than the short, smooth achenium. The fruit some-

what like that of Hieraciwm, but not ribbed, and the involucrum and habit of the plant that of
Troximon.

BARKHAUSIA. (Mcench.)

Barkhausia elegans. Crepis elegans, Hooxer, Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. L., p.
297. Scarcely distinct from B. nana, which appears like a dwarf growth of
this species.

* CREPIDIUM.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum double, the inner of a single series of
leaflets, (about twelve,) the outer short and caliculiform. Receptacle naked.

Achenia linear-oblong, subpentangular, erostrate, truncate at the summit,

436 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

marked with ten somewhat elevated ribs. Pappus pilose, white and slender,
in two or three series, slightly barbellate, about the length of the achenium.
—Perennials, with the habit of Hveraczwm, as well as that of Crepis. Leaves
runcinately toothed, scapoid stems corymbose, branching. Flowers yellow.
—(The name alludes to the affinity with Crepis.)

CREPIDIUM *runcinatum; smooth; leaves oblong-lanceolate, runcinately and
incisely toothed, acute; scape branching, corymbose, few-flowered ; involucrum
pubescent, the segments acuminate. Crepis biennis, Hooker, (according to a
specimen from the author,) not of Linneus. It differs from the present, how

ever, in having somewhat hirsute leaves, and less deeply toothed.

Has. On the grassy plains of the Platte, in subsaline soils. Scape about a foot high, with seven
to nine capituli. and a linear bracte at the base of each pedicel, as well as at the base of the bifur-
cation of the stem. Leaves much like those of the Dandelion, but less divided, green, and some-
what fleshy. Involucel about eight-leaved.

Crepidium * glaucum; smooth and glaucous; leaves spathulate-lanceolate or
obovate, runcinately and incisely toothed, acute, attenuated below, but rather
broad to the base; scape smooth, divaricately branched, with minute bractes;
capituli small; involucrum smooth, the segments linear and somewhat obtuse.

Has. With the above, but less common; every where very smooth, the leaves much larger than
in the preceding, half a foot long, and one to one and a half inches wide, sometimes nearly entire,
rather thick and succulent. ‘The scape twice forked, or more; about three flowers together at the
summits of the branches, not half the size of those of the preceding. Scape eighteen inches to two
feet high, terete and almost entirely naked, all the bractes being minute and subulate. Involucrum
of about twelve linear leaves; involucel minute, of about eight lanceolate leaflets. Style and
stigmas very long and filiform, slightly pubescent.

Crepidium *caulescens; very smooth, but not glaucous; leaves spathulate-
lanceolate or oval-lanceolate, runcinately incise toothed and acute; stem scapoid,
naked, dichotomously branched, with a conspicuous toothed leaf at the base of
the first division; involucrum smooth, the seements lanceolate-oblong.

Has. With the above, of which I, at first, took it for a mere variety; but the presence of a true
stem, though short, and the form of the sepals, distinguish it.

CREPIS. (Mcench, Decand.)

§. * Leprorneca.—Involucrum cylindric, leaflets linear in a single series, (five
to eight;) involucel of three to five minute bractes; florets five to eight. Ache-

nium attenuated into a short, indistinct rostrum, similar with itself—Peren-

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 437

nial. Stems scapoid, dichotomous, corymbose. Leaves runcinately pinna-

tifid; stem leaves linear, entire.—In habit allied to Prenanthes.

Crepis * acuminata; 2%, stem smooth, above angular and paniculate; branches
corymbose, naked, many-flowered; leaves runcinately pinnatifid, acuminate,
pubescent; segments sublanceolate, sparingly laciniate, below attenuated ito
a petiole; upper stem leaves linear, entire; involucrum smooth; involucel ap-
pressed, pubescent.

Has. Plains of the Platte. Abouta foot high. Rootlong, black, and fusiform. Radical leaves
about six inches long, with a lanceolate outline, one and a half to two inches wide in the middle,
more or less pubescent on both surfaces. Flowers numerous and showy, bright yellow, with
exserted five-toothed liguli. Style and stigma exserted and hirsute. Receptacle scrobiculate.
Pappus copious, white and soft, a little barbellated. Central achenia longest, all ten striate, the
rostrum short and thick. C. elegans approaches this species in the involucrum, which is quite
similar; but the achenium is furnished with a long slender rostrum, which places it, artificially
enough, in the genus Barkhausia. It has also all the habit, as well as great affinity with Barkhausia

tenuifolia of Siberia.

* PSILOCHENIA.

Crepis, but with the achenium cylindric, curved, narrower above, and without
any visible striz, the testa indurated, and, when mature, black; an abortive
outer series of florets, with the achenium empty. Pappus copious, slenderly
pilose, scabrous, and yellowish white, about the length of the achenium.
Receptacle naked, alveolate, the alveoles minutely fringed.—A low perennial
herb; stem dichotomous and corymbose. Leaves lanceolate, runcinately
pinnatifid, and, as well as the somewhat hirsute involucrum, cinereously and

closely lanuginous; flowers yellow, rather large.

Psilochema *occidentahs. Crepis occidentahs, Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philad., Vol. VIL, p. 29.

Has. On the plains of the Platte, towards the Rocky Mountains. ‘The whole plant more or less
eanescently pubescent. Stem about six or seven inches high, forked and corymbose at the summit.
Leaves about an inch wide, four or five inches long, deeply and runcinately pinnatifid, the segments
linear-lanceolaie and denticulate, uppermost leaves linear. Involucrum campanulate; sepals about
twelve to fifteen in a single series, linear and somewhat acute; involucel or bractes four or five,
small and subulate: there are blackish hairs mixed with the hoary pubescence of the sepals. Florets
about twelve, yellow, exserted.

VII.—5 K

438 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

SONCHUS. (Cassini, Decand.)

Sonchus fallax? (. *Cahforncus.

Has. In Upper California, around St. Diego. Dentures of the leaves, which are pinnatifid,
deep and pungently spinulose; achenium smooth and even, elliptic, alated, puberulous on the mar-
gin. Probably a distinct species, though so similar to the present as not to be distinguishable, ex-

cept by the pungency and length of the marginal spines, and the alated achenia.

Sonchus * tenuifolhus; ©, smooth; leaves bipinnatifid and pinnatifid, auricu-
late at the base; segments few, linear-lanceolate, spinulosely serrulate, the up-
per simply pinnatifid, with linear, subulate segments; involucrum caliculate,
smooth; achenium substriate, transversely rugose.

Has. In Upper California, round St. Diego, in shady ravines, among rocks. A very distinct
species. Primary divisions of the leaves, when bipinnatifid, with a single pair of segments, central
or terminal segments usually elongated and acuminate; divisions of the lower leaves obtuse.
Involucrum scarcely tumid. Stem slender, about two feet high. Leaves three or four inches
long, of a very thin consistence, as in S. tenerrimus.

Subtribe * ANDRYALER.

Receptacle naked or fimbriliferous, sometimes with the margin paleaceous.
Pappus white, usually double, the inner deciduous, filiform, barbellate to-
wards the base, where it adheres in a circle, the outer a minute paleaceous

crown, Achenium erostrate, striate, angular or cylindric.

AnpryALA Ragusina, A. varia, A. sinuata, A. integrifolia, and proba-
bly other species. In these, except the first, the outer pappus is obscure, and
the salient summits of the ribs of the achenium resemble the outer pappus:
these, with a very deciduous and much less barbellated pappus, &c., ought to
be restored to the genus Voieutta, of Roth.

*LEPTOSERIS.

Capitulum many-flowered, (forty, or more.) Involucrum campanulate, cali-
culate; sepals distinct to the base, linear-lanceolate, in a single equal series,
the margin membranaceous; caliculum small, of about eight unequal bractes.

Receptacle naked. Achenium finely striate, somewhat attenuated above,

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 439

and partly quadrangular. Pappus double, the outer a very minute paleace-
ous crown; the inner in a single series, white, pilose and soft, slenderly
bearded towards the base, and connected together in a circle, which is
quickly deciduous in the mass.—An elegant, smooth, dwarf annual, from
the plains of the Platte, with several scapoid, somewhat corymbiferous stems.
Leaves nearly all radical, pinnatifid, or runcinate, with the segments short
and spinulosely denticulate, in the manner of the Sow Thistle. Flowers

yellow and conspicuous.

Leptoseris * Sonchoides. ©.

Has. The plains of the Platte. Flowering in June. Four or five inches high, with a slender,
simple, whitish tap-root. Leaves about two inches long and half an inch wide, resembling those
of a diminutive Sow-thistle, the lateral segments short, oblong and acute; stems three or four,
rather naked, branching from below, or only from above, producing an imperfect corymb of three
to four capituli. Sepals about twelve to fifteen, one-nerved, pale green, with broad whitish margins;
ealiculum similar, but very short; the scales ovate. The florets minutely toothed, bright yellow,
exserted, about the length of the involucrum. Stem leaves small and few. Stigmas filiform,
exserted and nearly smooth. Achenium pale straw-yellow, linear, much resembling the fruit of a
Crepis, but angular, though less so in the centre of the capitulum. Pappus deciduous, like that of
the Thistle, in a sort of ring, or rather circle of adherence, there being no true annular receptacle.
Flowers at first nodding. This curious plant appears almost intermediate with Sonchus and Crepis,
but with the former it only agrees in habit.

* LEUCOSERIS.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum broadly campanulate, involucellate;
sepals distinct to the base, imbricated in one or two series, subequal, linear,
acute, membranaceous on the margin; involucel in two or three series, sub-
squarrose, shorter than the involucrum. Receptacle convex, naked. Flo-
rets deeply five-cleft at the summit, the tube hirsute. Anthers bisetose at
base. Achenium short, unequally pentangular, truncate, five-ribbed, the
sides with one or two intermediate strie in each; the basal cicatrice four-
lobed. Pappus double, the outer a very minute paleaceous crown; the inner

in a single series, white, pilose and soft, slenderly bearded towards the base,

440 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

and connected together in a circle, which is quickly deciduous in the mass.
—Perennial plants of Upper California, with erect, or low, decumbent,
spreading stems. Leaves entire, laciniated, or pinnatifid. Branches leafy,
one or two-flowered; flowers large and white. Allied to Leptoseris, but with
a widely different aspect, and much more compound capitulum, &c. Also
to Andryala varia in the pappus, and in the presence of an outer, paleaceous,
minute crown; but wholly distinct in habit, pubescence, colour of the flower
and achenium, which last, in Andryala, is cylindric and ten-ribbed; the
whole, however, form a very natural group, with its usual gradations of

form.—(The name is given in allusion to the remarkable colour of the
flowers. )

Leucoserts *saxatihs; stem leafy and decumbent; leaves oblong or linear-
oblong, amplexicaule and auriculate; the radical lanceolate, subserrate, beneath

hirsute; lower leaves now and then irregularly cleft, or somewhat pinnatifid
towards the base; flowers large and white.

Has. St. Barbara, on shelving rocks near the sea. Flowering in April. A large spreading

perennial, with terete, hollow stems, spreading out in a circle of one and a half to two feet. The
leaves are rather thick and somewhat succulent, two to three inches long, by about half an inch
wide; the young shoots pubescent.

Flowers fastigiate, pure white, as large as those of the Dan-
delion.

Florets one hundred, or more, in a capitulum, ligulate, flat, deeply cleft at the summit, the
segments obtuse and glandular, the tube very hairy. Style and stigmas slenderly filiform, exserted,

nearly smooth: pedicel enlarging towards the base of the capitulum. Involucrum smooth, of many

equal, linear segments, in about two series; caliculum somewhat squarrose, imbricated in two or

three series, the segments lanceolate, acuminate. Receptacle wide and convex, merely punctate.

Achenium dark brown, very short, obtuse at each end; the pappus pure white and silky,. about

three times the length of the fruit, softly barbellated towards, and at the base, collected into a
single series of about thirty rays.

Leucoserts * tenuifola; suffruticose and smooth, erect and branching; leaves

sessile, laciniately pinnatifid, segments narrow, long and linear, upper ones
entire, filiform; capituli few, corymbose.

Has. St. Barbara, on the mountains near the town. ‘The expanded flower and fruit I have not’
seen, and I only place this plant here by its approximating habit. Two or three feet high, having

a considerable woody base. Involucrum and involucellum as in the preceding, but the segments

narrower and more acuminate.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 441

Leucoserts? Californicus. Hieracicum? Calhfornicum, Drcanp., Vol. VIL, p.
235. From the remark that “the pappus is mwihete, fragile, and in a single
series,’ I conjecture this may be a species of the present genus. The author
also imagines that it may belong to a new genus. The flowers have probably
been white, as he says they are purplish beneath.—Collected in Upper Califor-
nia by Mr. Douglas. It is described as smooth, with the stem erect, striated,
the summit paniculate, the branches bracteolate and monocephalous; the
leaves sessile, sublanceolate-linear, acuminate, entire; the scales of the involu-
crum linear and imbricated. ‘The mature fruit was not seen.

Oxss. This genus, nearly allied to Andryaia, is distinguished by the free leaves
of the involucrum, which are not at all ingrafted; by the presence of a copious,
imbricated involucellum; a convex receptacle, wholly naked; a pentangular
achenium, white flowers, and a pubescence which is not stellated or glandular.
On the other hand, the mode of growth is similar, the form of the involucrum,
as well as the singular character of the pappus, and general form and striatures
of the fruit. Under A. Chewranthifoha, L’Heritier has well described the
pappus of that species as pilose and pubescent at the base: the rays are about
eighteen.

Subtribe vir. Hizraciem. (Lessing.)

MULGEDIUM. (Cassini.)

+ Flowers blue, the substance of the achenium attenuated into a long point.

Mulgedium pulchellum. Sonchus pulchellus, Pursu. Lactuca integrifoha,
Nott. Gen. Am., Vol. II., p. 124. Lactuca pulchella, Decanp., Vol. VIL.,'
Pp: 134.

Mulgedium * heterophyllum; leaves linear-lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, the
lower ones often runcinately pinnatifid or toothed towards the base; panicle
divaricate, squamose; involucrum conic-ovate, the sezments lanceolate in three
or four series, and very unequal; flowers blue; achenium with a distinct ros-
trum, of the same substance with the striated achenium. Sonchus Szbiricus,
Hooxer, Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. I., p. 293, not of Linn.

Has. Lake Huron, and Canada, to latitude 66°. (Hooxrr.) On the Rocky Mountain plains,
and the banks of the Oregon, in the interior. Entirely unlike J7. Sibiricwm, which is annual;

VIl.— 9) L

442 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

ours a stout perennial, with large deeply penetrating roots; very smooth and sometimes glaucous;
the panicle spreading, not racemose. Flowers as large and showy as those of Cichorium Intybus.
Nearly allied to the preceding, which, however, appears to have different leaves, but with the fruit
very similar.

1 + Flowers blue or white; achenium shortly acuminate.

Mulgedium acuminatum. Sonchus acuminatus, Wiup. Achenium pale and
spotted, with a tumid margin and two or three strie on either side.

Mulgedium * divaricatum; branch leaves sessile, somewhat runcinately pin-
natifid with wide and shallow denticulated segments; panicle divaricate, naked;
involucrum subcampanulate, caliculate; achenium with a short, conformable
rostrum, transversely rugulose, with about three elevated central strie on either
side; pappus white.

Has. Louisiana. (Mr. Trudeau.) The flower appears to have been blue or white; segments

of the caliculum lanceolate. Bractes of the very divaricate panicle minute, distant, and subulate.
Apparently a very distinct and genuine species of the present genus.

§. LEvcoMeLa.— With the pappus gray; florets nearly half way tubular; anthers
bisetose at the base. Achenium transversely rugose, merely attenuated at the
summit, with three ribs on one side and four or five on the other; flowers white,
nith a tinge of purple.

Mulgedium leucopheum, Decanp., Vol. VIL., p. 250.

*GALATHENIUM.

(Lactuca and Mulgedium species of authors. )

Moutcepium, but with the achenium elliptic and flatly compressed, transversely
rugulose, with a broad and thin opaque margin, the centre on either side
marked with one to three slender strie; the rostrum distinct, abrupt, shorter
than the achenium, ending in a circular disk with a pubescent margin.
Pappus white, slender and slightly scabrous, in several series. —North Ame-
rican plants, usually perennial, with the habit of Lactuca or Sonchus; the
flowers yellow or blue; the achenium black.—(The name from yadtabyvos,

milky, in allusion to the milky properties of the plants, and also their alli-
ance with Lactuca.)

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 443

t Flowers blue, or bluish-white.

Galathenium macrophyllum. Sonchus macrophyllus, WitLv. Mulgedium ma-
crophyllum, Drcanp., Vol. VIL., p. 248.

Galathenium multiflorum. Mulgedium multiflorum, DEcanpD.. Vol. VIL, p.
249. Perhaps too nearly allied to the following.

Galathenium Floridanum. Sonchus Floridanus, Linn. Mulgedium Flori-
danum, DECAND., ib., p. 249. Achenium scarcely striated.

Galathenium * sahicifolkum; 2, very smooth; stem simple and terete; leaves
entire, lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, much acuminate, sessile, lower ones re-
pandly dentate; panicle contracted, racemose, bracteate; achenium elliptic,
acute, with a single nerve on either side, the stipe nearly the length of the
fruit.

Has. In West Florida. (Mr. Ware.) Bethlehem, Pennsylvania and Salem, North Carolina.
(Herb. Schweinitz.) The flower appears to have been pale blue or white. Leaves three to four
inches long, by half an inch wide, entire, or now and then with a slight denticulation, but nothing
down to the root like dentation or division of any kind, (in the three perfect specimens before me.)
Uppermost leaves diminishing to bractes with long filiform acuminations. Flowers crowded, on
short bracteolate pedicels in the Florida specimen, the flowers racemose, and rather distant.

Galathenium graminifolium. Lactuca graminifolia, Micu., Flor. Bor. Am.,
Vol. IT., p. 85. Stem leaves entire, sagittate at base. Achenium elliptic-lan-
ceolate, dark brown, with one striature on a side only, the stipe nearly as long
as the fruit. Panicle divaricate, naked and dichotomous. Radical and lower
stem leaves more or less runcinate.

+ + Flowers yellon.

Galathenium elongatum. Lactuca elongata, Mvuu. in Wit1p., Vol. IIL, p.
1525. Achenium brown, one-nerved in the centre, the rostrum shorter than
the fruit.

Galathenium integrifolum. Lactuca integrifoha, Bick. Flor. Bost. Lactuca
sagittifola, Exuiott, Sketch, Vol. IL., p.253. Leaves sometimes denticulate;
achenium black, with a distinct, pale coloured rostrum two-thirds of its length,
with only a single striature on a side.

444 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Galathenium sanguineum. Lactuca sanguinea, BicEu. Flor. Bost., (ed. 2,}
p. 287. Leaves very often nearly all entire, or only runcinately toothed ; ache-
nium one-nerved, black.

Galathenium ludovicianum. Sonchus ludovicianus, Nutt. Gen. Am., Vol. EI.,
p. 125.

Oss. The plants of this genus (peculiarly North American) appear to be
intermediate between Lactuca and Mulgedium. From Lactuca they differ
wholly in the achenium, which, in L. sativa and others, is of a pale colour,
and covered with longitudinal striatures. In Lactuca perennis, however, the
striatures are few, and the achenia has a tumid margin, as in Mulgedium, but
it is also furnished with a very long rostrum. From Mulgedium our plants
differ in the form, compression, colour, and margin of the achenium, as well
as in the presence of an abrupt and distinct rostrum, seldom, if ever, the length
of the elliptic fruit, and of a different colour and consistence with the ache-
nium.

LYGODESMIA. (Don.)

Subgenus * PLetacanruus.—Capitulum four to five-flowered. Involucrum
cylindric-ovate, imbricate, of a few unequal, flat, lanceolate sepals, the ex-
ternal so short as to appear like a caliculum. Receptacle minute, naked.
Achenium subcylindric, obtusely five-ribbed, truncated. Pappus bristly and
barbellate, yellowish-white, long, and in several series.—A nearly leafless,
divaricately branched, rigidly spiny perennial, with rose-red flowers in short

racemes. Probably a distinct genus.

Lygodesmia * spinosa; stem divaricate; branchlets spinescent, microphyllous;
capituli subracemose, with an irregular involucellum.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain plains towards California. About eight to fourteen inches high.
Lower leaves linear, entire, sessile, rather thick; upper leaves and those on the spiny branchlets
minute, like very small bractes. Stem divaricate and spreading, the base somewhat pubescent and
producing remarkably large tufts of brownish matted down; the bud scales broad ovate. Flowers
pedicellate, in racemes. Every branch and twig ends in a spiny point. Larger leaves of the in-
volucrum three or four, ovate, or ovate-lanceolate, three or four smaller ones at the base of the
involucrum. Florets rose-red, deeply five-cleft at the summit. Stigmas filiform, exserted, pubes-
cent. Pappus rigid and barbellated. |

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 445

* KRYTHREMIA.

Capitulum about ten-flowered. Involucrum subcylindric, caliculate; sepals
about eight, in a single series. Receptacle naked. Achenium short, sub-
cylindric, erostrate, ten ?-striate or ten-ribbed. Pappus exceedingly copious
and long, barbellate towards the base, nearly simple, and more slender above.
Style and branches of the stigma exserted beyond the anthers, very hirsute,
the stigmas acuminate, sublanceolate or clavellate.—Perennials, with low,
few-flowered stems, naked or foliaceous towards the base, with long, linear,
fleshy, entire leaves, almost all radical. Capituli with rose-red flowers. Al-
lied to Lygodesmia, but with a different achenium and pappus, and a more
compound capitulum; also to Nabalus, but with a widely different habit and
different achenium.—(The name is derived from epv0pyua, redness; in allu-

sion to the colour of the flowers.)

Erythremia * grandiflora; leaves long and linear, acuminate; stem scarcely
exserted beyond the leaves, forked, with two or three capituli.

Has. In the Rocky Mountain range, on the borders of the Platte. Root large, tuberous or tap-
shaped and descending; very milky and bitter. Leaves chiefly radical, or at the base of the stem,
linear, entire and acuminate, glaucous or pale green, two to four inches long, half a line to a line
wide, usually curved or spreading, of a thick and fleshy consistence. Stem three or four from the
root crown, forked, having two or three capituli. Stem three to seven inches high: a large leaf
at the first division, on the upper part of the stem shorter, or mere bractes as they approach the
flower. Caliculum of about five, very short, ovate, lacerately ciliate leaflets. Involucrum of eight
equal, linear-oblong, flat leaves, pubescent at the summits, somewhat obtuse, membranous on the
margin, with a single faint nerve in the centre, Florets about ten, fine rose-red, and exserted
beyond the involucrum, about its length, flat and five-toothed at the extremity. Style and stigmas
very much exserted, and very hirsute; no awns or obscure ones at the base of the anthers. Pappus
yellowish-white, in a crowded and numerous series, twice or three times the length of the achenium,
the rays thicker and more serrated or barbellated towards the base. Receptacle punctate. 'The
ripe fruit is unknown, but it appears to have about double the number of ribs there are in Lygo-
desmia. In Lygodesmia juncea, the stigmas only are exserted and slenderly filiform, and the
pappus appears almost perfectly simple, or without any serratures. In both these genera, as well
as in Vabalus, the anthers are bisetose at base,

Vil.—5 M

446 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

Erythremia aphylla; radical leaves linear? stem dichotomous, striate, nearly
leafless, with three to five capituli; stigmas clavate; anthers distinctly bisetose.
Prenanthes aphylla, Nurr. Gen. Am., Vol. IL, p. 123. Lygodesmia? aphylia,
Decand, Vol. VII., p. 198.

Has. Discovered on the Island of St. Marys, in Georgia, by Dr. Baldwyn. Stem twelve to
eighteen inches high. Involucrum, caliculum, and florets, as well as their colour, exactly as in the

preceding; the pappus, however, is scarcely more than scabrous. Lower part of the stem with one
or two leaves.

HIERACIUM. (Linn.)

Hieracium marianum. Oxs. This species is very nearly allied to H. sca-
brum, but is well distinguished by the achenium, which is attenuated above,
and so far rostrate as to be precisely that of Crepis!

Meracium barbatum, (Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Vol. VII.)
This species also inhabits the western plains as far as the Rocky Mountains.

The achenium, as in the preceding, is attenuated above, but not so much as in
the preceding.

Mieracium * macranthum; nearly smooth and green; stem erect and simple,
corymbosely branched at the summit; leaves numerous, sessile, linear-lanceo-
late or lanceolate, incisely and irregularly serrate, acute, scabrous on the mar-
gin; peduncles pubescent; involucrum blackish, but nearly smooth; sepals
lanceolate, imbricate in about three series, appressed; achenium nearly black
and truncated. H. wmbellatum, Hooxer, Flor. Bor. Am., Vol. [., p. 300.

Has. In the forests of Oregon, near the Wahlamet. Nearly allied to H. Canadense, and still
more nearly to H. wmbellatum. Pubescence very sparing, stellate. The involucrum never squar-
rose. From two to three feet high, and sometimes robust, with the leaves narrower; when slender,

with the leaves broader. Perhaps not sufficiently distinct from H. wmbellatum; the leaves, how-
ever, are more gen ally serrate, and never so narrow.

Hieraccum Scoulers.

Has. Common near the Wahlamet. Considerably allied to some varieties of H. Gronovii.

Meracium albifiorum.

Haz. Common round Fort Vancouver, on the Oregon, in shady woods, where it attains the height
of two to three feet. The stem is rigidly erect, and smooth to a few inches from the root, where
it presents long hairs like A. Gronovii, to which it is undoubtedly allied, and yet as certainly

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 447

white-flowered. Upper part of the stem almost naked, paniculate, the branchlets corymbose and
few-flowered. The involucrum of about two series, and slightly bracteolate. The flowers about
the size of those of H. Gronovii. Achenium dark brown, slender, but truncated, striate and angu-
lar, as usual. Pappus scabrous, brittle, yellowish-white. The radical and lower leaves are for the
most part repandly dentate, the teeth shallow and rather distant.

Meracium * argutum; leaves and base of the stem clothed with long deflected
hairs; stem smooth, paniculate, the branches divaricate, with long, naked and
smooth pedicels; leaves oblong, or oblong-lanceolate, all incisely and sharply
dentate, acute, the cauline sessile and few; involucrum small, slightly bracteo-
late, smooth and blackish-green, of very few sepals in about two series; pappus

gray and scabrous; achenium brown, and truncate as usual; flowers white?

Has. In St. Barbara, Upper California. The only specimen I have collected is about twelve
to fifteen inches high. The lower leaves three to five inches long, three-quarters to an inch wide,
marked beneath with a strong mid-rib. ‘The smoothness of all the upper part of the stem is re-
markable: the achenium rather slender, and striated, as usual. ‘The gray colour of the pappus is
very peculiar.

448 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

APPENDIX.

Subtribe Hyosrripez. (After Hyoseris.)

*CALODONTA.

Capitulum many-flowered. Involucrum imbricate in nearly a simple series,
the sepals linear, subcaliculate, or bracteolate. Receptacle naked, convex.
Achenium turbinate, cylindric, smooth, slightly striate. Pappus of about
ten to twelve entire, slender bristles, dilated at base, with short sete
interposed between them.—A perennial, evergreen plant of the Azores,
with oval, amplexicaule, pinnately nerved, elegant, incisely dentate, smooth
leaves. Flowers subcorymbose, pedicellate, rather large and yellow.—(The

name alludes to the elegant toothing of the leaves.)

CaLoponta * Azorica.

Has. In the Island of Fayal; im the Caldera and ravines adjoming. Root perennial, sending
up several subdecumbent stems, about a foot long. Jueaves broadish-oval and acute, amplexicaule,
smooth and somewhat lucid, deeply and very elegantly serrated, almost like the leaves of a Holly,
but with the serratures more. numerous. Stem pubescent, somewhat tomentose. Branches
spreading, one or two-flowered, the flowers terminal and fastigiate, in three or five, forming a sort
of loose corymb. Involucrum nearly smooth, sepals about fifteen, linear-lanceolate, nearly all
equal; bractes subulate, at the summit of the pedicels, and also forming a caliculum. Rays longer
than the involucrum, five-toothed, the tube hirsute. Style and stigma exserted, nearly smooth and
very slender. Achenium small, pale, testaceous, smooth, with about five broad, and almost even
striatures. Pappus more than twice the length of the achenium; the hairs almost perfectly simple,
dilated at the base, the dilated portion very short and somewhat lacerate: between each hair are
two or three minute ones, appearing like an outer crown of pappus, but the hairs of which it con-
sists are alternately intercalated and not external.

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 449

Tribe EKupaToRIACcEz.

* HELOGYNE.

Capitulum homogamous, many-flowered. Involucrum subcampanulate, imbri-
cate; sepals foliaceous, unequal, about eight, the inner scariose. Receptacle
naked, Corolla tubular, equal, glandular, the apex shortly five-toothed and
closed. Branches of the stigma connivent, clavate, very large, obtusely
rounded, exserted, smooth and glutinous. Achenium slenderly obconic,
pentangular, smooth, with a basilar cicatrice. Pappus plumose, short, about
the length of the achenium; the rays about twenty.—An annual? plant of
Peru, hirsutely pubescent and glandular. Leaves alternate, cuneate-oblong,
sessile, entire, or toothed at the apex. Capituli terminal, sessile. Flowers
whitish, or ochroleucous. It appears to have some affinity with Agrian-
thus, but the aspect of the involucrum is that of Apalus. It is bitter to the
taste.—(The name from mos, a nail, or stud, and yury, a female; in allusion
to the remarkable form of the stigma.)

HELOGYNE * Apalodea.

Has. In Peru, towards Arequipa; (Mr. Curson.) My specimen is only a branch, covered, as
well as the leaves, with short scaly hairs, more or less glutinous: many of the leaves are entire, a
few of the larger have a blunt tooth on either side, towards the summit, Capituli fastigiate, ter-
minal, and sessile, rather large, about twelve-flowered. Involucrum of about eight leaves, four or
five larger, external, oblong, or oblong-ovate, very similar to the leaves, and equally pubescent,
the inner narrower and scariose or membranous, all rather obtuse. Receptacle small. Corolla
slenderly and equally tubular, glandular, about twice the length of the pappus; the teeth of the
border very shallow and obtuse. Anthers small and closely included, not bisetose. Stigmas very

large and conspicuous, brownish and glutinous, the extremities rounded in a clavate form, each

summit wider than the whole corolla.

Tribe ASTEROIDE.
Subtribe BaccHARIDEH.—Division ConyzE&.

*PARASTREPHIA.
Capitulum many-flowered, heterosamous; the radial five-toothed tubular
florets masculine! discal florets filiform, oblique, two-toothed, feminine.
Stigmas equally filiform, exserted. Involucrum imbricated in about two

VIl.—®5d N

450 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

series; sepals linear, membranaceous on the margin. Receptacle naked.
Anthers not bisetose. Achenium compressed, linear, acute at base, villous.
Pappus of the radial masculine florets double, the outer paleaceous, entire,
acute and elongated, the inner of a single series of scabrous hairs; pappus of
the discal florets simple, pilose and scabrous, in several series.—A pparently
a small acerose leaved, evergreen shrub of Peru, resembling a Heath.
Leaves linear, obtuse, narrow and short, adnately revolute to the centre.
Flowers yellow? aggregated at the summit of the branches, sessile, and sur-
rounded by the imbricated leaves.—(The name is derived from oapactpedu,
to invert; in allusion to the singular inversion of the florets, the masculine
being external! in place of the usual order of internal.)

Parastrephia * ericoides.

Has. In Peru, near Arequipa; (Mr. Curson.) In sandy soil. Leaves and stem quite similar
to those of Ceratiola ericoides; the branches terete and tomentose; the leaves approximate, acerose,
short and spreading, in about four rows, smooth and glutinous, bitter to the taste, about two
lines long, and half a lime wide, on the young shoots inbricated as in £bies. Involucrum sessile,
the scales scariose on the margins, linear-oblong, nearly smooth. Pappus copious, as long as the
florets, unequal and scabrous, rather rigid: the outer paleaceous pappus of the male flowers nearly
half the length of the inner pilose hairs, subulate, white and shining, much longer than in any
Chrysopsis. Achenium somewhat villous and compressed, linear-fusiform, almost exactly like
that of Aster. In fact, our plant, notwithstanding its present arrangement, is nearly allied to
Chrysocoma or Lynosyris, of which it has entirely the habit. ‘The female florets are very slender
and without any vestige of stamens; the style is also abortive in the male flowers of the ray. ‘The
florets of each kind are nearly equal in number; the female probably somewhat more numerous,

(My specimens are mere sprigs, and I am, therefore unacquainted with, the habit of this curious
plant.)

Tribe SENECIONIDE 44.—-Division HELIOPSIDES.
*MICROCHATA. (Lipocnzta and Wotzastonta, Decand. in part.)

Capitulum many-flowered, radiate; rays in one series, feminine. Discal florets
hermaphrodite, five-toothed. Involucrum hemispherical or subcampanulate,
the sepals foliaceous in two nearly equal series. Receptacle convex, palea-
ceous, the palee membranaceous and folded. Branches of the discal: styles,
acutely acuminate, as well as those of the ray. Fertile achenia triquetrous,

or obtusely quadrangular, indurated, subalated and scabrous;, infertile or

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 451

tabescent, compressed and linear. Pappus a short, persistent, or somewhat
deciduous crown of two or three to five unequal, or nearly equal, short, acute
pale, longer and fewer in the infertile fruit—Suffruticose or herbaceous
plants, chiefly of the Sandwich Islands and Australasia, with opposite, ovate,
dentate or incisely lobed leaves; flowers terminal, or subumbellate, peduncu-
late, yellow. In habit allied to Wedeha and Wollastonia. With a different
involucrum, achenium, receptacle and pappus from Lzpocheta umbellata,

with which I have compared our plants.

Microchetal obata; 2. hastulata. Lipocheta hastulata, Decanp., Vol. V., p.
1. Verbesina hastulata, Hoox. and Arnott, Bot. Beechy, p. 87.

Has. In the island of Ouau and Atooi. A low suffruticose plant, with the leaves more or less
lobed, sometimes nearly entire. Pappus of the tabescent florets (in an early stage,) with two awns,
much shorter than the fruit, connected with a membranous, lacerate, minute cup. Involucrum sub-
campanulate, in almost a single series of broad ovate, leafy sepals. Rays about ten. Capituli
sometimes solitary. Leaves ovate, or ovate-lanceolate, somewhat acuminate, the base often in-
cisely one or two-lobed on either side; the short petioles connate at base.

Microcheta *lanceolata; herbaceous; stem aneular, decumbent, dichotomous;
leaves shortly petiolate, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, scabrous and strigose,
entire and very acute, distantly serrate, the serratures shallow, appressed and
mucronate; uppermost leaves alternate; peduncles solitary, dichotomal or ter-
minal, in twos and threes; involucrum rather flat and hemispherical; rays

short and numerous.

Has. In Ouau, near the sea, Branches long and trailing, prostrate and ascending: the leaves
three-nerved, attenuated into a short petiole. Pedicels elongated, naked; sepals ovate, strigosely
hirsute, ten, in about two equal series. Rays as short as the involucrum, about twenty. Palee
of the receptacle ovate above, hirsute, often three-toothed. Fertile achenium oval, turgid, trique-
trious and scabrous, with salient angles. Pappus a small persistent crown of three to five minute
palez united in the centre of the contracted summit into a sort of cup: in the tabescent achenia
(which are very numerous,) the fruit is narrow-linear, with the palez arising, as it were, from the
angles.

Microcheta? lavarum. Inpocheta lavarum, Decanp., Vol. V., p, 611.
Microcheta succulenta. Lipocheta succulenta, Decanp., ibid.

Microcheta *integrifola; herbaceous and prostrate; canescently strigose
with appressed hairs; leaves approximate, spathulate-oblong, small and entire,

A52 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

thick and somewhat succulent, three-nerved below; sepals oval, obtuse; pedun-
cles solitary, one-flowered; rays short, about eight.

Has. Near the sea, at Ouau and Atooi. Stems diffuse, procumbent, many from the same pe-
rennial tortuous root, each spreading out a foot or more, in all directions. Leaves about half an inch
long, two or three lines wide, strongly nerved beneath, thick and somewhat succulent, pedicels
two or three inches long. Capituli small, with the sepals obtuse. Scales of the receptacle obtuse,
and hirsute at the tips as well as the florets. Fertile achenia short, roundish and angularly trique-
trous, pubescent at the summit. Pappus rather deciduous, of three or four short linear, or linear-
lanceolate scales of different sizes, all scarcely visible to the naked eye; tabescent achenia, which

are numerous, compressed: some of the fertile ones are also often obtusely tetragonal. —

Microcheta procumbens. Wollastonia procumbens, Drcanp., Vol. V., p. 548.
Very nearly allied to M. fanceolata, differing principally in the coarsely toothed)
sessile leaves, and smooth achenium.

Microcheta strigulosa. Wollastonia strigulosa, Decanp., Vol. V., p. 548.
Achenium obtuse, with three or four angles, with a coronal pappus of one to
three deciduous awns.

\ . . .
+ Leaves connate, perfoliate; flowers paniculate, trichotomal; pappus minute.

Microcheta connata. Lnpocheta connata, DEcaND., Vol. V., p. 611. Verdbe-
sina connata, GAUDICHAUD, in Freycenet’s Voyage, p. 464.

Has. Ouau, near the sea. Herbaceous. Leaves three to four inches long, two to two and a
half wide, broadly connate, the centre of the connate portion salient, denticulate. Flowers tricho-
tomal; pedicels one to three-flowered. Involucrum campanulate, few-flowered, in nearly a single
series of six to eight oblong-ovate leaves. Palez of the receptacle often three-toothed. Achenium
narrow, acutely triquetrous, hispid on the angles; the pappus of three or five very minute scales,
which are somewhat deciduous; infertile achenia compressed.

* SCHIZOPHYLLUM.

Capitulum few-flowered, heterogamous. Rays feminine, two or three, biden-
tate; discal florets subcampanulate, five-toothed. Involucrum small, oblong,
imbricate, about five-leaved. Receptacle paleaceous, the scales resembling
the involucrum, embracing. Discal stigmas hirsute, with a slender conic
apex. Achenia of the ray turgid, indurated, three or four-sided, obtuse and
turbinate; those of the disk abortive, subquadrangular. Pappus none, or a

slight vestige of an aristate crown.—An herbaceous plant of the Sandwich

AND GENERA OF PLANTS. 453

Islands, with diffusely trailing, oppositely branching, quadrangular stems,
and opposite, pseudobipinnate leaves. Flowers yellow, usually terminal in
threes, nearly sessile—(The name from cya, to dissect, and @vAAor, a leaf;

the leaves being remarkably dissected.)

Schizophyllum * micranthum.

Has. The island of Atooi, in shady woods, near Kolao. A perennial plant with prostrate or trailing
branches, extending over two or three feet of surface. The whole plant sparingly strigose, green.
Leaves petiolate, deeply bipinnately dissected, the segments simple, cuneate-oblong, or two or
three-lobed, the rachis set with small simple segments. Flowers small and very inconspicuous,
terminal, on very short pedicels. Involucrum strigose, the leaves foliaceous, lanceolate, acute,

» very few, but imbricated, scarcely distinguishable from the palez of the receptacle. Rays two or
three, pale yellow, oval, scarcely as long as the involucrum, with a smooth exserted style and
stigma, and, as well as the florets of the disk, possessing a distinct tube. Anthers dark brown; teeth of
the florets reflected. Achenium truncated and pubescent at the summit, the angles tubercular,
the base also obtuse; tabescent achenia linear-obovate, also somewhat tubercular and quadrangular.
Considerably allied to the preceding genus, but very distinct in habit, and almost wholly divested
of pappus. :

VII.—5 oO

ARTICLE XXI.

Description of Nineteen new Species of Colimacea. By Isaac Lea. Read
February 21, 1840.

Burimus suscuogosus. Plate XI., Fig. I.

Testa globoso-turbinata, subtenui, rufo-fuscd, fasciatd, imperforatd; anfractibus quinis, ventri-
cosis; apertura rotundata; labro subreflexo, margine tenebroso; columella lxvi.

Shell globosely turbinate, rather thin, reddish-brown, banded, imperforate; whorls five, ventri-
cose; aperture round; lip slightly reflected, margin dark; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W.W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.3, Length 1.7 inches.

Remarks.—A very globose species, with the superior whorls pale, while the
base is dark brown. A single band of a deeper brown surrounds the middle
of the last whorl. ‘This character may vary in other specimens. A single one
only was received from Mr. Wood. The base of the columella is white, sur-
rounded by dark brown.

BuULIMUS viRIDO-sTRIATUS. Plate XI., Fig. 2.

Testa turbinato-conica, subcrassd, viridi, albo-fusciata, nitida, imperforatas anfractibus qui-
nis, ventricosis; apertura subrotunda; labro reflexo, margine albo; columella levi.

456 DESCRIPTION OF NINETEEN

Shell turbinately conical, rather thick, green, white-banded, shining, imperforate; whorls five,
ventricose; aperture subrotund; lip reflected, margin white; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin.
Diam. 1.3, Length 1.8 inches.

Remarks.—There were several specimens of this green and beautiful Bul-
mus. 'The white band under the suture, and the green strie which cover the
rest of the whorls, distinguish this shell at once. Some specimens have also
brown bands, and when this is the case, the base of the columella will be found
to be brown. In the interior the whorl is yellow. The apex is obtuse and
white. In its general aspect this shell has some resemblance to Hehz viridis,
Lam., but it is much larger than that species.

Buuimus vireinieus. Plate XI., Fig. 3.

Testa ovato-conica, albida, tenut, tenuissime striatd, imperforatas anfractibus quinis, convexis;

apertura ovata; labro simplicis columella levi.

Shell ovately conical, white, thin, minutely striate, imperforate; whorls five, convex; aperture
ovate ; lip simple; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1, Length 1.5 inches.

Remarks.—Although this species might, at first view, be mistaken for the
white variety of B. gracilis, herein described, it is distinguishable in being less
elevated in its spire, in having one whorl less, in being without any colour at
the base of the columella, and being devoid of any thickening there. The lip
is curved at the base, which is not the case with ‘the gracihs.

NEW SPECIES OF COLIMACEA. 457

Buuimus Liserianus. Plate XI, Fig. 4.

Testa exerta, lacted, pellucida, nitidd, minute striata, perforata; anfractibus senis; apertura
longula; labro incrassato, reflexos columella levi.

Shell produced, milky white, pellucid, shining, minutely striate, perforate; whorls six; aperture

rather long; lip thickened and reflected; columella smooth.

Hab. Liberia, Africa. Dr. Blanding.
My Cabinet.
Cabinet of Dr. Blanding.
Diam. .4, Length .8 of an inch.

Remarks.—This shell was among those obtained by Dr. Blanding from Li-
beria. It has some resemblance to B. radiatus, Lam., a European species,
but is rather larger, and is uniform in colour.

Butimus Woopranvs. Plate XI., Fig. 5.

Testa ovato-conica, crassa, rufo-fuscd, imperforata; anfractibus quinis; subconvexis; apertura
magna, ovata; lubro incrassato, refleco, margine purpurata; columella incrassata, levi.

Shell ovately conical, thick, reddish-brown, imperforate; whorls five, rather convex, aperture
large, ovate; lip thickened, reflected, margin purple; columella thickened and smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. .2, Length 3.6 inches.

Remarks.—This is one of the largest and finest species of Bulimus received
from Mr. Wood, and I dedicate it to him. It somewhat resembles the B.
hemastomas, Lam., but has a, more exserted spire, a smaller mouth, and is of a
different colour. ‘The interior is of a fine blue white, and the purple of the
large, thick, and reflected lip fades into it. At the base the lip has a curve.
Three specimens which are under my view all differ somewhat in character.
The large one has the apex of the spire white; the second one perfectly blue;
the smaller one has the spire considerably more exserted.

VIl.— 5 P

458 DESCRIPTION OF NINETEEN

Buuimus craciuis. Plate XI., Fig. 6.

Testa ovato-conica, tenui, imperforata; anfractibus senis, subconvexis; apertura parva, subro-
tundata; labro subreflexo, acuto; columella levi.

Shell ovately conical, thin, imperforate ; whorls six, rather convex; aperture small, rounded; lip
slightly reflected, sharp; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. .9, Length 1.7 inches.

Remarks.—Looking upon a number of this species, one would, without hesi-
tation, divide them into four, their colours being so very different. On close
examination, however, no specific difference can be made out in their form.
Some are of a uniform rich brown; others white, with a deep brown band in
the centre of the whorl; others, again, entirely white, except at the base round
the columella, where they are all more or less coloured; the fourth group is
beautifully pink. The base of the columella is slightly thickened and curved.

———eee

Burimus cartnatus. Plate XJ., Fig. 7.

Testa acuminato-conica, subtenui, rufo-fusca, imperforata, carinatd; anfractibus septenis, sub-
planulatis; apertura ovata; labro reflexo, margine tenebroso; columella levi.

Shell acuminately conical, rather thin, reddish-brown, imperforate, carinate ;. whorls seven, rather

flatiened ; aperture elliptical; lip reflected, margin dark; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.2, Length 3 inches.

Remarks.—This graceful species differs from all those sent by Mr. Wood in
having a carina visible on the last whorl, from the termination of the suture.
The mouth is rather more than one-third the length of the shell. The whole
surface is of a rich brown, light towards the spire, and quite dark at the base.
The mouth is very white, as well as the base of the columella, where the lip is
somewhat retuse.

NEW SPECIES OF COLIMACEA. 459

Buuimus picotoratus. Plate XI., Fig. 8.

Testa turrita, supra rufo-fuscd, subtus viridt imperforata, carinatd; anfractibus septenis, sub-
convexis; apertura subrotundata; labro reflexo, margine subnigyro; columella levi.

Shell turreted, above reddish-brown, below green, imperforate, carinate; whorls seven, some-

what convex; aperture nearly round; lip reflected, margin nearly black; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.3, Length 2.3 inches.

Remarks.—I am under obligations to W. Wood for this beautiful Bulimus,
and many fine shells herein described, from the Philippine Islands. They
were sent to me from Manilla, his present residence. This species is very
remarkable in the contrast of the brown above and green below the ca-
rina in the middle of the whorl. Within, it is very white, which contrasts
strongly with the dark margin. When the green epidermis is removed from
the inferior part of the whorl, the substance of the shell is white. The base of
the spire is dark brown.

Heurx Buanpinerana. Plate XII., Fig. 9.

Testa subslobosa, cornea, longitudinaliter striatd, imperforata, oblique depressds anfractibus
& 8 ip
senis; apertura oblique rotundata; labro incrassato, reflexo; columella levi.

Shell subglobose, horn colour, longitudinally striate, imperforate, obliquely depressed; whorls
six; aperture obliquely rounded ; lip thickened and reflected.

Hab. Banks of the River St. Paul, Liberia, Africa. Dr. Blanding.
My Cabinet.
Cabinet of Dr. Blanding.
Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin.
Diam. .7, : Length .8 of an inch.

Remarks.—T wo specimens of this interesting species were presented to me
by Dr. Blanding, to whom I dedicate it. It is remarkable for its gibbous form,

460 DESCRIPTION OF NINETEEN

and its general resemblance to the H. contusa of Fer., (Desh., No. 156,) being
obliquely depressed like it in the last whorl. In the mature specimens the
umbilicus is closed, and has a reflected fold. ‘The junior specimen has the
epiphragm perfect. It is very remarkable, being deeply striate, depressed in
the middle, and inverted at the outer edge.

Found on the roots of the Mangrove.

It belongs to the group which Mr. Gray proposes to separate under the ge-
neric name of Streptazis.

Hevix Bavestimriana. Plate XIL,, Fig. 10.

Testa orbiculato-conoided, sinistrorsa, subcarinatd, subtenui, castaned, inferne, inflata, prope
peripheriam tenebrosiori, minute rugoso-striata, perforata; anfractibus senis, convexis; apertura
parva; labro incrassato, subreflexo; columella lxvi.

Shell orbicular conoidal, sinistral, somewhat carinate, rather thin, chestnut-coloured, inflated be-
low, darker near the periphery, with minute rough strie, perforate; whorls six, convex; aperture

rather small, lip thickened, slightly reflected ; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. J. Balestier.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.4, Length .8 of an inch.

Remarks.—Any species of the Gasteropoda with the sinistral character, how-
ever inobtrusive it may be in other respects, must always prove highly inte-
resting. I owe this, with many other fine shells, to the kindness of Mr. Ba-
lestier,. of Singapore. It is, perhaps, more nearly allied to H. Himalana,
(nobis,) than to any other species, but may at once be distinguished by its
thickened and reflected lip; also by its darker colour, and having two more
whorls, which are less flat. It is also a larger shell, but not so large as H.
Senegalensts, Lam., (which comes here from Canton in abundance,) the latter
being a more globose species, with transverse lines.

NEW SPECIES OF COLIMACEA. 461

Heurx Lamarcxrana. Plate XII, Fig. 11.

Testa orbiculato-convexd, subcarinata, rufo-fusca, subtenui, irregulariter striata, minuté per-
forata; anfractibus quaternis, superné planulatis; apertura magna, transversd; labro acuto; co-
lumella levi.

7

Shell orbicular convex, somewhat carinate; reddish-brown, rather thin, irregularly striate, per-
foration small; whorls four, flattened above; mouth large, transverse ; lip acute ; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W.W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 2.4, Length 1.2 inches.

Remarks.—This fine large Helix seems to be most nearly allied to H. mono-
zonalis, Lam. It may be distinguished by the absence of the band, by the
whorls being more flat above, and by the strie, which, on the inferior part of
our shell, might be said to be wrinkled. Immediately below the periphery,
the brown colour is deep, and shades off to nearly the colour of the superior
part. If we were strictly to adhere to Lamarck’s division of Carocolla, this
species might be placed in that genus.

Hexix Coviertana. Plate XII., Fig. 12.

Testé orbiculato-converd, carinata, tenut, longitudinaliter minuté striata, infra peripheriam
tenebrosd, superné pallida; minuté perforata; anfractibus quinis, subplanulatis, supra suturas
impressis; apertura parvd, transversa; labro acuto; columella lzvi.

Shell orbicular-convex, carinate, thin, longitudinally and minutely striate, darkened below the
periphery, above pale; slightly perforate; whorls five, rather flattened, impressed above the su-
tures; aperture small, transverse; lip sharp; columella smooth:

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.2, Length .6 of an inch.

Remarks.—The carination of some of the specimens before me would war-
rant this species being placed with Lamark’s Carocolla. This species, in its
general aspect, is very like Carocolla bicolor, Lam. It is, however, not so solid

VII.—5 Q

462 DESCRIPTION OF NINETEEN

a shell, nor has it so sharp a carina. It also resembles Hehz Himalana,
(nobis. )

Hewix tureo-rascrata. Plate XII., Fig. 13.

Testa orbiculato-conoided, superne minute cancellata, inferne levi, tenebroso-castaned, luteo-
univittata, minute perforata; anfractibus senis, convexis; apertura parva, transversa; labro acuto;
columella lxvi.

Shell orbicular-conical, above minutely cancellate, below smooth, dark chestnut-coloured, with
a single yellow band, minutely perforate; whorls six, convex; aperture small, transverse, lip sharp;

columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W.W. Wood.
My Cabinet,
Diam, 1.4, Length .8 ofan inch.

Remarks.—The several specimens which are before me differ but little in
character. The region of the umbilicus is, like the band on the periphery, of
a fine deep yellow, which is more or less expanded on the several specimens.
In some of the individuals the concellate. appearance does not extend to the
periphery ; it never goes below it, the inferior portion of the whorls being per-
fectly smooth, or slightly striated longitudinally. It has some resemblance to
the dark varieties of H. cetrina, Lam., but is more closely allied to H. Nuttalh-
and, (nobis. ) It cannot, however, be easily confounded with any species
known to me.

Hewix ceporwwes. Plate XII., Fig. 14.

Testa globosa, conico-turbinata, subtenui, longitudinaliter striata, supra rufo-fusca, subtus.
luteo-fusca, infra peripheriam fasciata, ad basim uniplicata, imperforata; anfractibus septenis,
inflatis; apertura lunata; labro irregulariter reflexo, acuto, margine rufo; columella levi.

Shell globose, conically turbinate, longitudinally striate, rather thin, above reddish-brown, below
the periphery banded, with one fold, at the base imperforate; whorls seven, inflated; aperture
lunate; lip irregularly reflected, acute, with a. red margin; columella.smooth.

NEW SPECIES OF COLIMACEA. 463

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. .2, Length 1.6 inches.

Remarks.—This is among the most remarkable of all the Helices which have
come under my notice. It most resembles the H. wnidentata, Chem. and Lam.,
having a fold at the base of the columella somewhat like it. It is, however, a
more globose shell, not so solid, has one more whorl, and the lip is not so thick,
nor is it so regular; the band, too, is placed lower down. Within it is white.

Heurx Buarnvirwrana. Plate XII., Fig. 15.

Testa obtuso-convexa, superné granulata, inferné levi, infra peripheriam unifasciata, minute
perforata; anfractibus senis, convexis; apertura parva, transversa; labro acuto; columella levi.

Shell obtusely convex, above granulate, below smooth, below the periphery single banded, per-

foration small; whorls six, convex; aperture. small, transverse; lip acute; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.5, Length .8 of an inch.

Remarks.—In colour this species resembles the H. Lamarckiana herein de-
scribed, but is a much smaller shell, more convex, and has more whorls. In
colour it is also somewhat like H. Himalana, (nobis,) which, however, is a
sinistral species. On the superior part of the whorls the transverse strie cause
it to be completely granulate. The inferior part of the whorl is smooth and
shining, and of a paler colour. I dedicate this species to the distinguished
malacologist.

Hexvix Humeureysrana. Plate XII, Fig. 16.

Testa orbiculato-conoided, subtus convexd, minuté rugosa, albido-fulvd, ad peripheriam fasci-
ata, late umbilicata, profundeé perforata; anfractibus senis, convexis; aperturad submagnd, ob-
liqua; labro acuto; columella levi.

464 DESCRIPTION OF NINETEEN

Shell orbicular-conical, convex beneath, minutely wrinkled, tawny, banded on the periphery,
widely umbilicate, deeply perforate; whorls six, convex; aperture rather large, oblique; lip acute;
columella smooth.

Hab. Pondicherry. S. Humphreys.
Hab. Singapore. J. Balestier.
My Cabinet.
Diam. 1.9, Length 1.2 inches.

Remarks.—About a year since, Mr. Humphreys kindly presented me with
several specimens of this shell, and subsequently I have received two or three
from Mr. Balestier, of Singapore. In general outline it resembles H. wniden-
tata, Lam. Its spire is elevated. Some individuals have an indistinct band
over the dark one of the periphery.

HELIx FERRUGINEA. Plate XII., Fig. 17.

Testa globoso-conoided, transversim striata, solidd, ventricosa, interdum vittatd, imperforata;
anfractibus quaternis, convexis; aperturéd magnd, obliqua; labro incrassato, reflexo; columellé
levi.

Shell globosely conical, transversely striate, solid, ventricose, sometimes banded, imperforate ;
whorls four, convex; aperture large, oblique; lip thick, reflected; columella smooth.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.

Diam. 2.3, Length 1.5 inches.

Remarks.—Two specimens of this fine latee Hex were in the collection
from Mr. Wood. One has a band immediately below the periphery, and one
above it. The other specimen is without a band: under the epidermis it is of
a pale reddish-brown. In form it is somewhat like H. hemastoma, Lam., but it
is more globose, and has a white lip, which is more rotund. The lip is largely
reflected.

NEW SPECIES OF COLIMACEA. 465

Carocouua BIFAscIATA. Plate XII., Fig. 18.

Testa orbiculari, supra convexd, subtis subplanulaté, luteo-albé, nitidé, minutissime longitu-
dinaliter striaté, viridi bifasciaté; anfractibus. quaternis; labro acuto, reflexo.

Shell orbicular, above convex, beneath rather flattened, yellowish-white, shining, very minutely
and longitudinally striate, with two green bands; whorls four; lip acute and reflected.

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin.
Cabinet of Dr. Jay.
Diam. .9, Length .5 of an inch.

Remarks.—For several years I have had a single specimen of this beautiful
Carocolla in my cabinet. In the “envoi” of Mr. Wood were several of this
species. It resembles, in size and form, the H. carioscula, Drap., but is a
smoother shell, and of a more regular form. It may also be distinguished at once
by the two green bands, one above and the other immediately below the carina.

—e)

Cycuostoma Wooprana. Plate XIL, Fig. 19.

Testa orbiculaté, subdepressa, rufés; albo-maculaté et cincta; striata, late et profundé umbili-
cata; anfractibus. quinis; apice accuminato; labro incrassato, reflexo, albo..

Shell orbicular, rather. depressed, reddish, white spotted and banded, striate, widely and deeply
umbilicate; whorls five; apex acuminate; lip thickened, reflected, white..

Hab. Philippine Islands. W. W. Wood.
My Cabinet.
Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin.
Diam. 1.1, Length .6 of an inch.

Remarks.—There appears to be little or no variation in the several speci-
mens sent by Mr: Wood. The series of white spots along the-suture, and the
white band of the. periphery seem to be constant. The region of the umbili-
cus is also white. The. strie consist of several large- ones, with intermediate
small ones.

VIl.—5 R

we “hoo WOW - dha
28 femideD aM SAE ONE GRIT ees
"ith eiVe 2g ‘Lo ronda

Jenne &

or ai Bie stall sanexcrooW Antorreouoe)

sti ‘Sato % ‘evn: byeenle- ‘eptosa ty. Nslownatadtyy ae dueveaghd se sian sas tan
LN Tak eu on hide Senin eink Sumas ‘alata ~~ Pesan pi iatuo

:

DONATIONS.

Received by the American Philosophical Society, since the Publication of Vol. V.—
New Series.

FOR THE LIBRARY,

FROM SOVEREIGN PRINCES, GOVERNMENTS, AND STATES.
Great Britain.—From the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty of Great Britain.

Zenith Distances observed with the Mural Circle, at the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope,
and the Calculation of the Geocentric South Polar Distances. 4to. 1837.

NETHERLaNDs.—from His Majesty the Kine of the NrTHERLANDs.
Flora Batavia, of Afbeelding en Beschryving van Nederlandsche Gewassen, door Jan Kops,
Hoogleeraar te Utrecht; en F. A. W. Miquel. 118 aflevering, 4to. Te Amsterdam,
1839.—And (another No,) 119 aflevering five-platen Amsterdam, 1840.

From the Minister of the Interior of the King of the Netherlands.

Tijdschrift voor Natuurlijke Geschiedenis en Physiologie. Uitgiven door J. Van der Hoeven, M.
D. Prof. te Leiden, en W. H. de Vriese, M. D. Prof. te Amsterdam. Zesde deel le,
2e en 3e Stuk. Leiden, 1839.

GovERNMENT oF THE UnitEep States.—From the Secretary of State.

Public Documents, printed by order of the Senate of the United States. ‘Third Session of the 25th
Congress, begun and held at the City of Washington, December 3, 1838, &c. In 5
vols. 8vo. Washington, 1839.

Executive Documents, 25th Congress, 3d Session, 1838. In 6 Vols. 8vo.

Reports of Committees, 25th Congress, 3d Session, 1838. In2 Vols. 8vo.

Journal of the Senate of the United States of America, 3d Session, 25th Congress, &c. &c. 8vo.
Washington, 1838.

Journal of the House of Representatives of the United States, 3d Season, 25th Congress, &c. &c.
8vo. Washington, 1839.

468 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

STaTE oF New York.

Communication from the Governor, transmitting several Reports relative. to, the. Geological Survey
of the State. 8vo. New York, 1840.

STaTE oF PENNSYLVANIA.

Journal of the House. of Representatives of Pennsylvania. Session of 1838--9. Three Volumes.
Harrisburgh, 1838--9.

Journal of the Senate of Pennsylvania. _ Session of 1838-9., Two Volumes,. with an Appendix
in one Volume. Harrisburg, 1838-9.

Report of the State Treasurer, showing the Receipts and Expenditures at the Treasury of Penn-
sylvania, from the. first day of November, 1837, to. the 31st day of October, 1838.

: Harrisburg, 1838. Haw oncersanrar a

Minutes of the Provincial Council of Pennsylvania, from the Organization to the termination of the
Proprietary Government. Published by the State. Vol. 3, containing the Proceed-
ings of Council from May Slst, 171%, to January 23d, 1735--6. 8vo. Harrisburg,
1840..

FROM AMERICAN AND: FOREIGN SOCIETIES;

BritisH AssoctaTIon. Report of the Seventh Meeting of the British Association for the advance-
ment of Science; held at Liverpool in September, 1837. Vol. VI. 8vo. London,
1838.

Report of the Ninth Meeting, &c. &c., held at Birmingham, August, 1839. 8vo. London,
1840: .

Beruin. From the Royal Academy of Sciences. Abhandlungen der Kéniglichen Akademie der

Wissenchaften zu Berlin. Aus dem Jahre, 1837. Berlin, 1838.
—— Bericht iiber die zur Bekanntmachung geeigneten Verhandlungen der Kénigl. Preuss. Akademie
der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, im Monat Juli, 1838. Berlin, 1838.
Brussets.. L’Academie Royale des Sciences et Belles Lettres. Bulletins de l’Académie Royale,
des Sciences et Belles Lettres de Bruxelles. Tom. 1I.—VII. 8vo. Bruxelles, 1832-
39, et Nos. 1 & 2, Janvier, et Février, 1840.
Nouveaux Memoires de l’Académie Royale des Sciences et Belles Lettres, de Bruxelles.
Tom. X. XI. XI. 4to. Bruxelles, 1837~38-39.
—— Annuaire de l’ Académie Royale des Sciences et Belles Lettres de Bruxelles. 2e, 3e, 4e, 5e,
et 6e Années. 5 Vols. 12mo. Bruxelles, 1836--40.

Catcutta. Asiatic Society. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, edited by the Acting
Secretaries, and:circulated gratis to.the Members of the Society. Nos. 88 and 89, for
April and May, 1839.

—— Agricultural and Horticultural Society. ‘Transactions of the Agricultural and, Horticultural
Society of India, Vol. VE 8vo. Calcutta, 1889..

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 469

Camsripce. Philosophical Society. Transactions of the Cambridge Philosophical Society.
Vol. VII. Part 1. 4to. Cambridge, 1839.

Dusiin. Royal Irish Academy. The Transactions of the Royal Trish Academy. Vol. XVIII.
Part Second. Dublin, 1839.

Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy, for the Year 1837-38. Part II. 8vo. Dublin,
1838; and for the Year 1838-9. Part III. 8vo. Dublin, 1839.

Gortincen. Royal Society of Sciences. Commentationes Societatis Regie Scientiarum Gottin-

gensis recensiores. Vol. VII. ad A. 1828—31. 4to. Gottinge, 1832.

Lisson. Academia Real das Sciencias. Roteiro Geral dos Mares, Costas, Ilhas, e Baixos recon-
hecidos no Globo. Extractado per Ordem da Academia Real das Sciencias, por
Antonio Lopes da Costa Almeida. Vol. IJ. Part Third. Lisbon, 1838.

Compendio de Botanica do Doutor Felix de Avellar Brotero. Apresentado a Academia
Real das Sciencias. Vol. II. Lisbon, 1839.

Astronomia Spherica e Nautica, por Mattheus Valente do Couto. Lisbon, 1839.

— Memoria sobre os Pesos e Medidas de Portugal, Espanha, Inglaterra, e Franea. Por Fortu-
nato Jose Barreiros. Lisbon, 1838.

Annaes da Marinha Portugueza. Por Ignacio da Costa Quintella. Vol. I. Lisbon, 1839.

Lonpon. Royat Society. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London for the

Year 1839, parts I. and II., and for 1840 part I. 4to.
—— Proceedings of the Royal Society, Nos. 41 to 44, inclusive from December 5, 1839, to June
18, 1840.

—— List of the Members of the Royal Society, 30th November, 1839.

List of Councils, Fellows, &c., of the Royal Society, Nov. 30, 1839. 4to.

Catalogue of the Scientific Books in the Library of the Royal Society. 8vo. London, 1839.

—— Address of the Most Noble the Marquis of Northampton, &c. &c., the President, read at the
Anniversary Meeting of the Royal Society, on Saturday, Nov. 30, 1839.

Report of the Committee of Physics and Meteorology of the Royal Society, relative to the
Observations to be made in the Antarctic Expedition, and in the Magnetic Observa-

e

tories. 8vo. London, 1840.
Report of the Committee of Physics, including Meteorology, on the Objects of Scientific
Inquiry in those Sciences, &c. &c. 8vo. London, 1840.
—— Astronomical Observations made at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, in the Year 1838,
under the Direction of George Biddell Airy, Esq., M. A., Astronomer Royal, &c. &c.
4to. London, 1840.
—— Appendix to Part V. of the Greenwich Observations, for the year 1834. (A missing number.)
London, 1834.
Royal Astronomical Society. Monthly Proceedings of the Royal Astronomical Society. Vol.
Il. No.2. Vol. III. from June 1833, to June 1836, and Vol. V. Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7,
8. From February to June, 1840.
Geological Society. Transactions of the Geological Society of London, Second Series. Vol.
V., parts 2&3. 4to. London, 1840.

vi.—5 Ss

470 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Lonvon continued.

A Geological Map of England and Wales, by G. B. Greenough, Esq., F. R. S., President

of the Geological Society, &ic. &c. In 6 Sheets.

— Memoir of a Geological Map of England; to which is added, an Alphabetical Index to the
Hills, and a List of the Hills, arranged according to Counties. By George Bellas
Greenough, F. R.S., &c. &c. 2d Edition. 8vo. London, 1840.

Royal Asiatic Society. The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland.
Vol. V. No. 10. London, 1839,—and No. 11. London, May, 1840.

Linnean Society. Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. XVIII. Part Third.
4to. London, 1840..

—— List of the Linnean Society of London. 4to. 1840.

Proceedings of the Linnean Society of London to March 17, 1840, inclusive.

Geographical Society. ‘The Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. Vol. IX.

. 1839. Part 3. 8vo. London, 1839.

Royal Society of Antiquaries. Archzologia or Miscellaneous Tracts, relating to Antiquity. Pub-
lished by the Society of Antiquaries of London. Vol. XXVIII. 4to. London, 1840.

Zoological Society. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London. Part VII. 1839. 8vo.

Transactions of the Zoological Society of London, Vol. II. Part 4. 4to. London,

1840.
Reports of the Council and Auditors of the Zoological Seciety of London. Read at the
Annual Meeting, April 29, 1840. 8vo. London, 1840.

London Institution. A Catalogue of the Library of the London Institution; systematically classed.
Preceded by an Historical and Bibliographical Account of the Tracts and Pamphlets.
Vol. 2. (The Tracts and Pamphlets) 8vo. 1840.

Society for the Encouragement of Arts, &c. Transactions of the Society instituted at London for

the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce; with the Premiums offered
for the years 1838--39 and 1839-40. Vol. 52. 8vo. London, 1839.

Premiums for the Sessions 1840-41; 1841-42. 8vo.. London, 1840.

Moscow. Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin de la Société Impériale des Naturalistes
de Moscou. Nos. 2&3. Année, 1838. 8vo. Moscou, 1838.

New York. Historical Society. The History of the Late Province of New York, from its
Discovery to the Appointment of Governor Colden in 1762. By the Hon. William
Smith, formerly of New York, and late Chief Justice of Lower Canada, 2 Vols. 8vo.
New York, 1830.

Medical Society. Transactions of the Medical Society of the State of New York. Vol. IV. In
three Parts. 8vo. Albany, 1838-9-40.

University of New York. Fifty-third Annual Report of the Regents of the University of the State
of New York, made to the Legislature, March 2, 1840. 8yo. Albany, 1840.

Paris. Société Asiatique. Journal Asiatique. 3 Série. Tom. 1X. No. 49. Paris, January, 1840.
No. 50 (February,) 51 (March,) 53 (April, May, and June, 1840,) making the ninth
volume of the Series,

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 471

Parts continued.
Société de Géographie. Bulletin de la Société de Géographie, Deuxiéme Série. Tom. 11 and
12. 8vo. Paris, 1839.
Musée d’Histoire Naturelle. Archives du Musée d’Histoire Naturelle, publiées par les Professeurs-
Administrateurs de cet Etablissement. Tom.I. 4to. Paris, 1839.
Conseil des Mines. Annales des Mines, ou Recuiel de Mémoires sur |’Exploitation des Mines,
&c. &c., rédigés par les Ingénieurs des Mines, &c. &c. Vols. XV. & XVI. 5°
Livraison de 1839. 8vo. Paris, 1839.
Pestu. Hungarian Academy. A’Magyar Tudés Tarsasag’ Evkényvei, Harmadik Kétet. 4to.
Budan, 1837.
PuitapeLpuia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. Vol. VIII. P.I. S8vo. Philadelphia, 1839.
Artists’ Fund Society. The Prospects of Artin the United States: an Address before the Artists’
Fund Society of Philadelphia, at the Opening of their Exhibition, May, 1840. By
George W. Bethune. (By request.) 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Memoirs of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Vol.
IV. Part1. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
American Sunday School Union. The Life of Daniel, the Prophet of God, with a Bengali Trans-
lation. By the Rev. Wm. Morton, of the London Missionary Society. 12mo. Cal-
cutta, 1837.
Lehigh Coal and Navigation Company. History of the Lehigh Coal and Navigation Company,
&e. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
Savannan. Georgia Historical Society. Collections of the Georgia Historical Society. Vol. I.
8vo. Savannah, 1840.
St. Pererspurc. AcaDEMIE DES ScreNcEs. Annuaire Magnétique et Méteorologique du Corps
des Ingénieurs des Mines de Russie ou Recueil d’Observations Magnétiques et Méte-
orologiques faites dans l’étendue de Pempire de Russie et publiées par ordre de S. M.
VEmpéreur Nicolas I., et sous les auspices de M. le Comte Cancrine, Ministre des
Finances, par A. T. Kupffer, membre de l’Académie des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.
Année, 1837. 4to. St. Pétersbourg, 1839.
Srockuotm. Royal Swedish Academy. Kong. Vetenskaps-Academiens Handlingar, for Ar
1837. 8vo. Stockholm, 1838.
—— Aorsberittelse om Framstegen i Fysik och Kemi afgifven den 31 Mars, 1837; af Jac. Ber-
zelius K. V. Acad. Seer. S8vo. Stockholm, 1837.
Aorsberiittelse om Technologiens Framsteg till Kongl. Vetenskaps-Academien afgifven den
31 Mars, 1837, af G. E. Pasch. 8vo. Stockholm, 1837.
Aorsberittelse om Botaniska Arbeten och Upptickter for Ar 1836, till Kongl. Vetenskaps-
Academien afgifven den 31 Mars, 1837, af Joh. Em. Wikstrom. 8vo. Stockholm, 1838.
Turin. Accademia Reale delle Scienze. Memorie della Reale Accademia delle Scienze di Torino.
Serie Seconda. Tomol. 4to. Torino, 1839.
Vatencta. Sociedad Economica, Boletin Enciclopedico de la Sociedad Economica de Amigos
del Pais, &c. &c. &c. Numerol. Enero, 1840. 8vo. Valencia, 1840.

472 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

WasuineTon. National Institution. Constitution and By-Laws of the National Institution for the
Promotion of Science, established at Washington, May, 1840. 8vo. pp. 14. Wash-
ington, 1840.

FROM INDIVIDUALS.

Alexander (J. H.) A Treatise on the principal Mathematical Instruments employed in Surveying,
Levelling, and Astronomy; explaining their Construction, Adjustment and Use, with
Tables. By F. W. Simms, Assistant at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. Revised,
with Additions. By J. H. Alexander, Civil Engineer. 8yvo. Baltimore, 1836.

Avogadro (A.) Fisica de’ Corpi Ponderabili ossia Trattato della Costituzione generale de’ Corpi, del
Cavaliere Amedeo Avogadro, dell’ Ordine civile di Savoia, &c. &e. Tomo 2. 8vo.
Torino, 1838.

Baena (A. L. M.) Ensaio Corografico sobre a Provincia do Para, por Antonio Ladislau Monteiro
Baena, &ec. &c. &c. 8vo. Parad, 1839.

Bache (A. D.) Report to the Controllers of the Public Schools, on the Reorganization of the
Central High School of Philadelphia. By A. D. Bache, LL. D., President of the
Girard College for Orphans. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1839-40.

Report on the Organization of a High School for Girls, and Seminary for Female Teachers.
8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

—— Observations of the Magnetic Intensity at'Twenty-one Stations in Europe. By A. D. Bache,
LL. D., President of the Girard College for Orphans, one of the Secretaries of the
American Philosophical Society, &c. (From Vol. VII. of the Transactions of the
Society.) 4to.

General Karte der sichtbaren Seite der Mondoberfliche. Von W. Beer und J. H. Midler.
Berlin, 1837.

Bache (F.—M. D.) Rapports a M. le Comte de Montalivet, Pair de France, Ministre Secrétaire

d’Etat au Département de l’Intérieur, sur les Pénitenciers des Etats-Unis, par M.

Demetz, Conseiller & la Cour Royale, Membre du Conseil Général du Département
de Seine-et-Oise, et par M. G. Abel Blouet, Architecte du Gouvernment, Directeur de la
Section des Beaux Arts de l’ Expédition Scientifique de Morée. Folio. Paris, 1837.

Bancker (C. N.) Experimental Researches on Electricity. By Michael Faraday, D.C. L., F. R.
S., Fullerian Professor of Chemistry inthe Royal Institution, &c. &c. 8vo. London,
1839.

Beleké (C. J.) A Grammar of the German Language, systematically arranged on a New Plan,
Brief, Comprehensive, and Practical. By Casper J. Beleké, Professor of the German
Language and Literature in Mount St. Mary’s College, Emmetsburg, Md. 12mo.
Philadelphia, 1840.

Bell (J.—M. D.) Lectures on the Theory and Practice of Physic. By William Stokes, M. D., &e.
&c. Second American edition, with numerous Notes, and twelve additional Lectures,

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 473

Bell (J.—M. D.)—continued.
by John Bell, M. D., &c. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

—— Treatise on the Physiological and Moral Management of Infancy. By Andrew Combe, M.
D. &c. &c., with Notes and a Supplementary Chapter, by John Bell, M. D., &c. &ec.
12mo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Bessel (F. W.) Gradmessung in Ostpreussen und ihre Verbindung mit Preussischen und Rus-
sischen Dreiecksketten; ausgefiihrt von F. W. Bessel, Director der Kénigsberger Stern-
warte Us Ss. W. !

Balogh (F. A.) A’ Kavé, Thé és Csokolade Térténeti, Természethistériai Diaeteticai és Orvosi

Tekintetben. F. Almasi Balogh pal altal. 12mo. Pesten, 1831.

De Evolutione et Vita Encephali. Auctore Paulo Balogh de F. Almas. 8vo. Pestini, 1823.

Philosophiai Palyamunkak. Kiadja A’ Magyar Tudés Tarsasdg. 8vo. Budan, 1835.

Bosworth (J.) A Dictionary of the Anglo-Saxon Language, &c. &c., with a preface on the Origin

and Connexion of the Germanic Tongues; a Map of Languages, and the Essentials of
Anglo-Saxon Grammar. By the Rev. J. Bosworth, LL. D., Dr. Phil. of Leyden, &c.
&c. Royal 8vo. London, 1838.

Bowditch (N. J.) Memoir of Nathaniel Bowditch. By Nathaniel Ingersoll Bowditch. Boston, 1839.

Brogniart (A.) Tableau 'Théorique de la Succession et de la Disposition la plus générale en Europe
des ‘Terrains et Roches qui composent l’Ecorce de la Terre; ou Exposition Graphique
du ‘Tableau des Terrains, publié en 1829; par M. Alexandre Brogniart, Professeur
de Mineralogie au Museum d’Histoire Naturelle de Paris.

Buch (L. de) Petrifactions receuillies en Amerique par Alexandre de Humboldt, et par M. Charles

Degenhardt; décrites par Léopold de Buch. Fol. Berlin, 1839.

Explication de Deux Planches de Spirifer et d’Orthis. Par Léopold de Buch. Fol.

Explication de Trois Planches d’Ammonites. Par Léopold de Buch. 4to.

Trois Planches d’Ammonites, par Léopold de Buch. Folio.

Callisen (A. C. P—M.D.) Medicinisches Schriftsteller-Lexicon der jetzt lebenden Aerzte, Wun-
daerzte, Geburtshelfer, Apotheker, und Naturforscher aller gebildeten Vélker. Von
Adolph Carl Peter Callisen, Doctor der Medicin und Chirurgie, u.s. w. Biind. 1-21.
8vo. Copenhagen, 1830--35. Die anonymischen Schriften, mit Einschluss der

Cholera, der Hom@éopathie, der Pharmacopéen, Arzneitaxen und allgemeinen Medeci-
nalordnungen, Zeitschriften, gesellschaftschriften und gesammelte Schriften mehrerer
Verfasser. Bind. 22--25. 8vo. Copenhagen, 1835, 1837. Nachtrag enthaltend:
Berichtigungen, Erginzungen, die neuere Literatur, und die seit 1830 verstorbenen
medicinischen Schriftsteller, mit einigen Beitriigen von den Herren Doctoren: dem
Hofrathe Choulant, dem Leibchirurgen Koberwein, dem Director der Kénigsbergschen
Hebammen-Lehranstalt Richter, dem Archiater und Etatsrathe A. von Schénberg.
Bind. 26, 28. 8yo. Copenhagen, 1838--40.

Causten (J. H.) Public Documents of the 1st Session of the Twenty-sixth Congress. 1. On the
Tobacco Trade. 2. On the National Defence and National Foundries. 3. On the
Manufacture, &c., of Salt. 4. Onthe Receipts and Expenditures of the United States
for the year 1838.

Vil.—5 T

4T4 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Carey (H. C.) Principles of Political Economy. Part the Third—Of the Causes which retard
Increase in the Numbers of Mankind. Part the Fourth—Of the Causes which retard
Improvement in the Political Condition of Man. By H. C. Carey, Author of an
Essay on the Rate of Wages. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
—— The State of the Science of Political Economy Investigated; wherein is shown the Defective
Character of the Arguments which have hitherto been advanced for Elucidating the
Laws of the Formation of Wealth. By Wm. Atkinson, &c. &c. London, 1838.

Letters addressed to the people of the United States, in Vindication of his Conduct. By
Wm. J. Duane, late Secretary of the Treasury. 1834.

Answers to the Questions: What constitutes Currency?s What are the Causes of Unsteadiness
of the Currency? and What is the remedy? By H. C. Carey, author of ‘+ Principles
of Political Economy,” &c. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Report from the Select Committee on Lighting the House (of Commons;) together with
the Minutes of Evidence, Appendix, and Index. Fol. August, 1839.

Letters on the Factory Act, as it affects the Cotton Manufacture, &c. &c. By Nassau W.
Senior, Esq., &c. &c. 8vo. London, 1837.
Chapin (A. B.) The Study of the Celtic Languages. (From the New York Review for April,
1840.) By A. B. Chapin, M. A., Mem. Conn. Acad. Arts and Sciences, and Rector
of St. James’ Church, New Haven. 8vo. New York, 1840.
Charlesworth (E.) Magazine of Natural History. Vol. Il. New Series. Nos. 31, 32, 33, 34
and 35. December, 1839, to June, 1840, inclusive. Conducted by Edward Charles-
worth, F. G. S. &ce.
Cresson (E.) Address at the Annual Meeting of the Pennsylvania Colonization Society, Nov. 11,
1839. By R. R. Gurley. Philadelphia, 1839,
Cohen (J. J—M. D.) Del primo Scopritore del Continente del Nuovo Mondo e dei pit antichi
Storici che ne Scrissero ragionamento, &c. &c. Da Gianfrancisco Galeani Napione.
8vo. Firenze, 1809.

Esame Critico del primo Viaggio di Amerigo Vespucci al Nuovo Mondo, &c. &c. Da
Gianfrancisco Galeani Napione. 8vo. Firenze, 1811.

Cubi i Soler (M.) Traductor Ingles, 6 Sistema Practico i Tedrico para aprender a traducir la
Léngua Inglesa por Médio de la Espafiola. Por Mariano Cubi i Soler, Catedratico
de Idiomas Modernos en el Coléjio de la Louisiana, Segunda Edicion, Correjida i
Mejorada. 8vo. Cambridge.

—— A New Spanish Grammar, adapted to every Class of Learners. By Mariano Cubi i Soler,
Professor of Modern Languages in the College of Louisiana. Sixth Edition, with
Corrections and Improvements.

Daubeny (C.—M. D.) Sketch of the Geology of North America, being the Substance of a Memoir
read before the Ashmolean Society, November 26, 1838. By Charles Daubeny, M.
D., F. R.S., L. S., G. S., M. R. I. A., Member of the American Philosophical Society,
&e. &c. Svo. Oxford, 1839.

Dayenport (Col.) ‘The War in Florida; being an Exposition of its Causes,-and an Accurate His-.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 475

Davenport (Col.)—continued.
tory of the Campaigns of Generals Clinch, Gaines, and Scott. By alate Staff Officer.
Small 8vo. Baltimore, 1836.
Davis (I. P.) Fourteenth Annual Report of the Board of Managers of the Prison Discipline So-
ciety, Boston, May, 1839. 8vo. Boston, 1839.
—— Answer to the Whig Members of the Legislature of Massachusetts, constituting a Majority
of both Branches, to the Address of His Excellency, Marcus Morton, delivered in the
Convention of the two Houses, Jan. 22, 1840. 8vo. Boston, 1840.
—— Abstract of the Return of the Overseers of the Poor in Massachusetts, for 1839; prepared by
the Secretary of the Commonwealth. 8vo. Boston, 1840.
— Third Annual Report of the Board of Education, together with the Third Annual Report of
the Secretary of the Board. 8vo. Boston, 1840.

Seventh Annual Report of the Trustees of the State Lunatic Hospital at Worcester, December,
1839. 8vo. Boston, 1840.

—— Abstract of the Massachusetts School Returns for 1838-9. 8vo. Boston, 1840.

Proceedings of the Annual Meeting of the Western Rail Road Corporation, held, by adjourn-
ment, in the City of Boston, March 12, 1840, including the Report of the Committee
of Investigation, appointed by the Stockholders. 8vo. Boston, 1840.
Desjardins (J.) Notice Historique sur Charles Telfair, Esq., Fondateur et Président de la Société
d’Histoire Naturelle de l’Ile Maurice, &c. &c., lue a la 4me Séance Annuelle de la
Société d’Histoire Naturelle de l’Ile Maurice, le Samedi, 24 Aout. 1833, par M. Julien
Desjardins, Secrétaire et l’un des Membres Fondateurs de cette Société, &c. &c. 4to.
Port-Louis, Ile Maurice, 1836.
—— Liste des Membres qui composent la Société d’Histoire Naturelle de l’Ile Maurice. ler
September, 1836.

Huitiéme Rapport Annuel sur les Travaux de.la Société d’ Histoire Naturelle de l’Ile Maurice,
lu & la Seance Anniversaire du Jeudi, 24 Aoit, 1837, par M. Julien Desjardins, &c.
&ec. 8vo. Maurice, 1837.

—— Observations Météorologiques faites a Flacq, Ile Maurice, par M. Julien Desjardins, pendant
les années, 1836-37-38.

Desmond (D. J.) The Annual Address of the Philodemic Society of Georgetown College, deli-
vered at the Annual Commencement, held on Thursday, July 28,1831. By Daniel J.
Desmond, Esq., of Philadelphia. 12mo. Philadelphia, 1831.

Ducatel (J. T.—M. D.) Annual Report of the Geologist of Maryland (Dr. J. T. Ducatel.) 8vo.
1839.

Dunglison (R.—M. D.) Meteorological Register for the Years 1826, 1827, 1828, 1829, and 1830,
from Observations. made by the Surgeons of the Army, and others at the Military Posts
of the United States. Prepared under the direction of Thomas Lawson, M. D., Sur-
geon-general United States Army. To which is appended, the Meteorological Register
for the Years 1822, 1823, 1824, and 1825. Compiled under the direction of Joseph
Lovell, M. D., late Surgeon-general of the United States Army. (Published for the
use of the medical officers of the army.) 8yvo. Philadelphia, 1840.

A76 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Dunglinson (R.)—continued.
Pamphlets. 1. Notice of the Daguerreotype. By William E. A. Aikin, M. D., Pro-.
fessor of Chemistry and Pharmacy in the University of Maryland. 8vo. Baltimore,
1840. 2. Report of a Committee of the Medical Society of the State of New York,
on the Subject of Medical Education. 8vo. Albany, 1840. 3. Philosophy of Mind,
developing New Sources of Ideas, designating their Distinctive Classes, and Simplify-
ing the Faculties and Operations of the whole Mind. By John Stearns, M. D., of the
City of New York, late President of the Medical Society of the State. 8vo. New
York, 1840. 4. A Letter to William E. Channing, D. D., in Reply to one addressed
to him by R. R. Madden, on the Abuse of the Flag of the United States in the Island
of Cuba, for Promoting the Slave Trade. By a Calm Observer. 8vo. Boston, 1840.
5. An Account of the Visit of the French Frigate L’Artemise to the Sandwich Islands,
July, 1839. 8vo. Honolulu, 1839.
Enactments by the Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia. Charlottesville, 1825.
—— Sir James Clark’s Statement of the Case of the late Lady Flora Hastings, &c. &e.
—— A Second Appeal to the People of Pennsylvania, on the Subject of an Asylum for the Insane ~
Poor of the Commonwealth. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
Report of the Committee of the House of Representatives in the Case of N. P. Trist, American
Consul at the Havana, with the Documents.
—— The American Medical Library and Intelligencer, a concentrated Record of Medical Science
and Literature. By Robley Dunglinson, M. D., Sec. A. P. S., &c. &c. From Feb-
ruary 1, to October 1, 1840.
Dunn (N.) A Descriptive Catalogue of the Chinese Collection in Philadelphia. Philadelphia,
1839.
—— China Opened, or a display of the Topography, History, Customs, Manners, Arts, Manufac-
tures, Commerce, Literature, Religion, Jurisprudence, &c., of the Chinese Empire.
By the Rev. Charles Gutzlaff, Revised by Andrew Reed, D. D. London, 1838.
2 vols. Small 8vo. ;
Duponceau (P.S.) Tableau Statisque et Politique des Deux Canadas. Par M. Isidore Lebrun.
Paris, 1833.
—— Memoirs of the Hon. Thomas Jefferson. Two volumes. New York, 1809.
La Revue Américaine. Vols. I. I]. & III. Paris, 1826 and 1827.
Repertorium Commentationum a Societatibus Litterariis Editarum. Secundum Disciplina-
rum Ordinem Digessit, J. D. Reuss. Historia, ete. Gottingen, 1810.
—— Historisch Statistische Darstellung des Nérdlichen Englands. Von E. F. Rivinus. Leip-
sic, 1824.
—— The Ruins of Pesium and other Compositions, in verse. Salem, 1822.
—— Athens, and other Poems. Salem, 1824.
Academical Catalogues.

Scriptores Rerum Mythicarum Latini tres Rome nuper reperti. Ad fidem Codicum MSS.
Guelferbytanorum Gottingensis, Gothani et Parisiensis integriores edidit ac Scholiis

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 477

Duponceau (P. S.)—continued.
illustravit Dr. Georgius Henricus Bode, ordinis Philos. Gotting. Assessor Societatis
Litterar. que Cantabrigie Americanorum floret Socius. Two Vols. Cellis, 1834.

Catalogue of Columbia College in the City of New York; embracing the Names of its Trus-
tees, Officers, and Graduates; together with a list of all Academical Honours conferred
by the Institution, from A. D. 1758 to A. D. 1826, inclusive. New York, 1826.

— Circular Letter addressed to the Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania, by the Profes-
sor of Botany, (Dr. W. P. C. Barton,) on the Introduction of that Branch into the
Curriculum of Study for a Medical Degree. Philadelphia, 1825.

Two Letters on the Chinese System of Writing. By the Rev. Charles Gutzlaff, Missionary
at Canton, and Peter S. Duponceau, LL. D., President of the American Philosophical
Society. Extracted from the 7th Vol. (New Series) of the Society’s Transactions.
4to. Philadelphia, 1840.

Codex Juris Gentium recentissimi, é Tabulariorum Exemplorumque Fide Dignorum Monu-
mentis Compositus. 3 vols. 8vo., 1735 et 1772. Leips. 1781 and 1795.

Tableau de |’ Histoire Générale des Provinces-Unies. Par A. M. Cérisier. 10 vols. 12mo.
Utrecht, 1777 et 1784.

— Constitution of the Spanish Monarchy. Promulgated at Cadiz on the 19th of March, 1812.

8vo. Philadelphia, 1814.
—— Exposition d’une Nouvelle Méthode pour l’Enseignement de la Musique. Par P. Galin,
Instituteur a l’Ecole Royale des Sourdsmuets de Bordeaux. 8vo. Paris, 1818.

Fundamenta Jurisprudentie Naturalis & Fred. Gulielm. Pestel delineata, in usum auditorum.
Edit. 3tia aucta. 4to. Lugd. Batav. 1777.
— The Works of John Locke, Esq. Three vols. folio. Second edition. London, 1722.
—— A New Atlas of the Mundane System; or of Geography and Cosmography; describing the
-Heavens and the Earth, the Distances, Motions, and Magnitudes of the Celestial Bo-
dies: the various Empires, Kingdoms, States, and Republics throughout the Known
World: with the Particular Description of the Latest Discoveries. The whole ele-
gantly engraved on Sixty-four Copperplates; with a General Introduction to Geogra-
‘phy and Cosmography, in which the Elements of these Sciences are compendiously
deduced from Original Principles, and traced from their Invention to the latest Im-
provements. The fourth edition, with Additions, Corrections, and very great Im-
provements. By the late Mr. Samuel Dunn, Mathematician and Member of the Ame-
rican Philosophical Society, at Philadelphia, &c. Folio. London, 1796.
—— The Philadelphia Book; or Specimens of Metropolitan Literature. 12mo. 1836.
—— Praktische Deutsche Sprachlehre zum Selbstunterricht und fiir Schulen. 12mo. Leip-
zig, 1801.
—— My Prisons, Memoirs of Silvio Pellico of Saluzzo. Two vols. 12mo. Cambridge, 1836,
—— Charles d’Este, ou Trente Ans de la Vie d’un Souverain. 2 Tom. Paris, 1836.

VII.—5d U

A478 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Duponceau (P. S.)—continued.

Considerations on the Principal Events of the French Revolution, Posthumous Work of the
Baroness de Stael.. Edited by the Duke de Broglie, and the Baron de Stael. 8vo.
2 vols. New York, 1818.

Juris et Judicii Fecialis sive Juris inter Gentes, et Questionum de eodem Explicatio, qua

quz ad Pacem et Bellum inter diversos Principes aut Populos spectant, ex Precipuis
Historico-jure-peritis exhibentur. Opera R. Z. (Ricard. Zouch) Auctoris Elemento-
rum Jurisprudentie. 24mo. Hage Comitis, 1669.

Kong Christian den Femtes Danske Lov. paa nye oplagt ved Casper Peter Rothe, efter
Kongl. Allernaadigst meddelt Privilegium, 1753.

—— Litteratur des gesammten sowohl natiirlichen als positiven Volkerrechts. Von Diedr. Heinr.

Ludw. Freyherrn von Ompteda, Kénigl. Grosbritt. Churfiirstl. Braunschweig. Liineb.

Comitial-Gesandten bey der Reichsversammlung zu Regensburg, u.s. w. 2 Theil.

8vo. Regensburg, 1785.

Saggio di Poesie Alemanne recate in versi Italiani da Antonio Bellati-Edizione nuovissima.
12mo. Milano, 1882.

—— C. Cornelii Taciti que extant, Marcus Zuerius Boxhornius recensuit, et Animadversionibus

illustravit, é&c. &c. 24mo. Amstelodami, 1664.

Joannis Seldeni Mare clausum, seu de Dominio Maris, Libri duo. 24mo. Londini, 1636.

—— A Treatise on the Mulberry Tree and Silkworm, and on the Production and Manufacture of
Silk, embellished with appropriate Engravings. By John Clarke, Superintendent of
the Morodendron Silk Company of Philadelphia. 12mo. Philadelphia, 1839.

—— A Manual, containing Information respecting the Growth of the Mulberry Tree, with suita-
ble Directions for the Culture of Silk. In three parts. By J.H.Cobb., A.M. Ori-
ginally published by direction of His Excellency, Governor Lincoln, agreeably to a
Resolve of the Commonwealth. Fourth edition, enlarged. 12mo. Boston, 1839.

—— A Manual, containing Directions for Sowing, Transplanting, and Raising the Mulberry Tree ;
together with proper Instructions for Propagating the same by Cuttings, Layers, &c.
&c., as also Instructions for the Culture of Silk: to which is added, Calculations show-
ing the Produce and probable Expense of Cultivating from one to ten Acres, as tested
by actual Results. By Edward P. Roberts, Editor, Farmer, and Gardener. ‘Third
edition, with Improvements and Additions. 8vo. Baltimore, 1838.

—— The History of the United States for 1796; including a Variety of Interesting Particulars
relative to the Federal Government previous to that Period. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1797.

—— The American Monthly Magazine, from January to June, 1824. Edited by James M‘Henry.
Vol. I. 8vo. . Philadelphia, 1824.

Tracts and other Papers relating principally to the Origin, Settlement and Progress of the
Colonies in North America, from the Discovery-of the Country to the Year 1776.
Collected by Peter Force... Vol. 1, Washington, 1836,

—— The Original Letters written by the Rev. John Heckewelder, from the 3d of April, 1816, to.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 4:79

Duponceau (P. S.)—continued.
the 5th of May, 1822, on the Indian Languages, &c. Collected by Peter S. Dupon-
ceau. . 1840.

Description de Egypte, contenant plusieurs Remarques Curieuses sur la Géographie An-

cienne et Moderne de ce Pais, sur ses Monumens Anciens, sur les Mceurs, les Cou-
tumes, et la Religion des Habitans, sur le Gouvernement et le Commerce, sur les Ani-
maux, les Arbres, les Plantes, &c. Composée sur les Mémoires de M. de Maillet,
Ancien Consul de Francé au Caire, par M. l’Abbé le Maserier. Ouvrage enrichi de
Cartes et de Figures. 4to. Paris, 1735.

Indian Biography, containing the Lives of more than Two Hundred Indian Chiefs; also such

others of that Race as have rendered their Names conspicuous in the History of North
America, from its first being known to Europeans to the present Period; giving, at
large, their most Celebrated Speeches, Memorable Sayings, Numerous Anecdotes, and
a History of their Wars; much of which is taken from Manuscripts never before pub-
lished. By Samuel G. Drake. 12mo. Boston, 1832.

An Original Letter of William Smith, Secretary of the American Philosophical Society, be-
fore its Union with the Junto in 1769, to Governor Hamilton, October 18, 1768, rela-

tive to the Transit of Venus.

—— A Comparative Vocabulary of Indian Languages. By Benjamin S. Barton, M. D., (extracted
from his New Views,) with Manuscript Additions by Peter S. Duponceau, and a Ger-
man Review of Barton’s ‘‘ New Views.” 8vo.

—— An Inquiry into the Origin of the Population of America, from the Old Continent. By John
Severin Vater. Translated from the German, by Peter S. Duponceau. (In MS.)
Folio.

—— A Sketch of the Politics, Relations, and Statistics of the Western World, and of those Cha-

racteristics of European Policy which most immediately affect its Interests; intended
to demonstrate the Necessity of a Grand American Confederation and Alliance. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1827.
Hugonis Grotii Annales et Historie de Rebus Beleicis. 24mo. Amstelodami, 1658.
De la Liberté des Mers. Par M. De Rayneval. 2 vols. 8vo. Paris, 1811.
—— On the Freedom of the Sea. By M. de Rayneval. Translated from the French, by Peter
S. Duponceau. In 3 vols., (MS.)
— Monument de Yu, ou la plus Ancienne Inscription de la Chine, suivie de trente-deux formes
d’Anciens Caractéres Chinois, &e¢. Par Joseph Hager. Fol. Paris, 1802.
— Discours sur les Revolutions de la Surface du Globe, &c. &c. Par M. Le Baron Cuvier,
&c. &c. 5éme édit. 8vo. Paris, 1828.

Des Caractéres Physiologiques des Races Humaines considérés dans leurs Rapports avec
lV’ Histoire, &c. &e. Par W. F. Edwards, D.M., &c. &c. 8vo. Paris, 1829.

—— Lettres et Negotiations entre Mr. Jean De Witt, &c. &c., et Messrs. les Plenipotentiaires

des Provinces Unies des Pais Bas. aux Cours de France, d’Angleterre, de Suéde, de

480 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Duponceau (P. S.)—continued.

Danemarc, de Pologne, &c., depuis l’Année, 1652, jusqu’a l’An. 1669, inclus., &c.
&c. 3 vols. Traduites du Hollandois. 12mo. Amsterdam, 1725.

—— Resolutions Importantes de leurs Nobles et Grandes Puissances les Etats de Hollande et de
West-Frise, pendant le Ministére de Mr. Jean De Witt, Conseiller-Pensionnaire, Tra-
duites du Hollandois, &c. 12mo. Amsterdam, 1725. ;

—— Conjugation of the Verb ‘to hear,” in its various forms in the Chippeway Language, by

Dr. Edwin James, of Albany.

Coleccion de los Tratados de Paz, Alianza, Comercio etc. ajustados por la Corona de Espafia
con las Protencias Estrangeras desde el Reynado del Sefior Don Felipe Quinto hasta
el Presente. ‘Three vols. Madrid, 1796 to 1801.

—— Miscellaneous Papers on Political and Commercial Subjects, &c. &c. By Noah Webster,
Jun. 8vo. New York, 1802.

Pamphlets. 1. First and Second Annual Reports of the Aborigines Protection Society, &c.
&c. 8vo. London, 1838, 1839. 2. Extracts from the Papers and Proceedings of
the Aborigines Protection Society, No. 1, May, 1839; No. 2, June, 1839. 3. Report
on the Indians of Upper Canada. 4. The History, Antiquities, Topography, and Sta-
tistics of Eastern India, &c. &c. By Montgomery Martin, &c. London, 1838.

—— A History of the United States before the Revolution; with some Account of the Aborigines.
By Ezekiel Sandford. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1819.

—— The Resources of the United States of America; or a View of the Agricultural, Commercial,

Manufacturing, Financial, Political, Literary, Moral, and Religious Capacity and Cha-
racter of the American People. By John Bristed, Counsellor at Law, &c. &c. 8vo.
New York, 1818.

—— History of the late Polish Revolution, and the Events of the Campaign. By Joseph Hor-

-dynski, Major of the late 10th Regiment of Lithuanian Lancers. 8vo. Boston, 1832.

Memoirs of Goethe, written by himself. 8vo. New York, 1824.

—— The History of the Administration of John Adams, Esq., late President of the United States.
By John Wood, Author of the History of Switzerland, &c. 8vo. New York.

—— A Commercial Dictionary, containing the Present State of Mercantile Law, Practice, and
Custom. By Joshua Montefiore, &c. 'The first American Edition, with very consi-
derable Additions relative to the Laws, Usages, and Practice of the United States. In
three volumes, 8vo. Philadelphia, 1804.

Sundry Pamphlets, Catalogues, &c., relating to the University of Pennsylvania. 8vo.
(Bound.)

Lettere sull’, Indie Orientali. 8vo. Filadelfia, 1802. (2 vols.)

Des Crimes de la Presse, considérés comme Générateurs de tous les Autres. Dédié aux

Souverains de la Sainte-Alliance. 8vo. Paris. (No date.)
—— The Political Mirror: or Review of Jacksonism. 12mo. New York, 1835.
—— Traité des Tribunaux de Judicature, ou l’on examine ce que la Religion exige des Juges, des

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 481

Duponceau (P. S.)—continued.
Plaideurs, des Avocats et des Témoins, dc. &c. Par P. Roques, Pasteur de l’Eglise
Francoise de Basle. 4to. Basle, 1740.

Alger sous la Domination Frangaise; son Etat présent et son Avenir. Par M. le Baron Pi-
chon, Conseiller d’Etat, ancien Intendant Civil d’Alger. 8vo. Paris, 1833.

Memoirs illustrating the History of Jacobinism. A Translation from the French of the
Abbé Barruel. Part 1. Vol. 1. The Anti-Christian Conspiracy. Part 2. Vol. 2.
The Anti-Monarchical Conspiracy. Part 3. Vol. 3. The Anti-Social Conspiracy.
8vo. Hartford and New York, 1799.

— A Star in the West; or an Humble Attempt to Discover the long lost Ten Tribes of Israel,

preparatory to their Return to their beloved City, Jerusalem. By Elias Boudinot,
LL.D. S8vo. Trenton, N. J., 1816.
—— Biography and History of the Indians of North America; comprising a General Account of
them, and Details in the Lives of all the most Distinguished Chiefs and others, who
have been noted among the various Indian Nations upon the Continent; also a History
of their Wars, &c. &c. By Samuel G. Drake, Member of the New Hampshire His-
torical Society. Third Edition, with large additions and corrections, and numerous
engravings. 8vo. Boston, 1834.
—— Etudes Physiologiques et Pathologiques sur les Organes de la Voix Humaine, Ouvrage au-
quel l’Académie Royale des Sciences a décerné un des Prix de Médecine fondés par
M. Montyon. Par F. Bennati, Docteur en Médecine et en Chirurgie des Facultés de
Vienne, &c. &c. 8vo. Paris, 1823.

Memoirs of My Own Times. By General James Wilkinson. Three vols. 8vo. Philadel-
phia, 1816.
Eichwald (E.—M.D.) Naturhistorische Skizze von Lithauen, Volhynien und Podolien in geog-
nostisch—mineralogischer, botanischer, und zoologischer Hinsicht, entworfen von Ed-
ward Eichwald, der Medizin Dr. u. Prof der Kaiserl. Academie der Wissench. zu St.
Petersb. u.s. w. 4to. Wilna, 1830.
Emerson (G. B.—M.D.) Lecture on the Advantages derived from Cultivating the Arts and Sci-
ences. By G. Emerson, M.D. Delivered before the Philadelphia Mercantile Li-
brary Association. Dec. 8, 1839. 8vo. Pp. 22. Philadelphia, 1840.

Reports on the Fishes, Reptiles, and Birds of Massachusetts. Boston, 1839.

Engles (J. P.) Manuel Général pour les Arbitrages de Changes, et pour beaucoup d’autres Cal-

culs Nécessaires chez les Négocians, par Nombres fixes ou par Logarithmes, &c.
Suivi de Logarithmes depuis 1 jusqu’ 4 10400, &c. Par Félix Reishammer. 8vo.
Paris, An. VIII. (1800.)
—— A manuscript Treatise on the Means of extending the Learning and Civilization of Europe
to the English Empire in India. By C. E. Trevelyan, at Kotah.
Faraday (M.) Experimental Researches in Electricity. 16th and 17th Series. On the Source

ViI.—5 V

482 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Faraday (M.)—continued.
of Power in the Voltaic Pile. By Michael Faraday, Esq., D.C. L., F.R.S., dic. &e.
From the Philosophical Transactions, Part I., for 1840. 4to. London, 1840.

—— An Answer to Dr. Hare’s Letter on certain Theoretical Opinions. By M. Faraday. (From
the American Journal of Science and Arts.)

Fisher (J. F.) A Collection of the Publications relative to Slavery, Temperance, the Indian Na-
tives of this Continent, &c. &c., of Anthony Benezet. 12mo. Philadelphia, 1762
to 1784.

Fliigel (T. G.—M.D.) Berichte aus den Vereinigten Staaten von Nord America, iiber Eisenbah-
nen, Dampfschiffahrten, Banken und Andere Oeffentliche Unternehmungen. Verfasst
von Franz Anton Ritter von Gerstner, Landstand im Konigreiche Bohmen, emer. Pro-
fessor der Mathematik am K. K. Polytechnischen Institute in Wien, u. s. w.; wahrend
dessen Aufenthaltes in Nord America, im Jahre, 1838 und 1839. 4to. Leipzig, 1839.

Forbes (J. D.) On the Diminution of Temperature with Height in the Atmosphere, at different
Seasons of the Year. By James D. Forbes, Esq., F.R.S.S.L. and E., F. G.S., &c.
&c. (From the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Vol. XIV. Read
April 1, 1839.) 4to. Edinburgh, 1840.

Account of some additional Experiments in Terrestrial Magnetism, made in different parts of
Europe in 1837. By James D. Forbes, &c. &c.

Forbes (C. D.) ‘Transactions of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec, founded January

6, 1824. Vol. Il. 8vo. Quebec, 1831.

Forshey (C. G.) Besancon’s Annual Register of the State of Mississippi, for the Year 1838, com-
pleted from Original Documents and Actual Surveys, &c. &c. Vol. I. 12mo. Natchez,
1838.

An Address to the Members of the Mississippi Legislature on the subject of the Geological
Survey of the State. By C. G. Forshey.

Forster (T.) Florilegium Nugarum Cantabrigensium—Pan, a Pastoral of the first age, together
with some other Poems. By T. Forster, M.B., F.R.A.S., F.L.8., &c. &c. 8vo.
Brussels, 1840.

Eulogy on Shargs, a favourite Dog, together with the Life of Loski, a Memoir in French,
and other Miscellanies. A new edition with additions. By T. Forster, M. B., &c. &c.
8vo. Brussels, 1840.

—— Eloge de Chiens favoris avec plusieurs Anecdotes sur l’Intelligence des Bétes, par l’Auteur

de Philozoia, traduit littéralement de l’Anglais. 24mo. Bruxelles, 1840.

Fraley (F.) Fourth Annual Report on the Geological Survey of the State of Pennsylvania. By
Henry D. Rogers, State Geologist. Read in the House of Representatives Feb. 8,
1840. 8vo. T[arrisburg, 1840.

Franea (E. F.—Minister from Brazil.). Obras Completas de Luis de Camoes, correctas e emen-
dadas pelo cuidado e diligencia de J. V. Barreto Feioe J. G. Monteiro. Three volumes.
Hamburg, 1834.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 483

Frias (A. de.) Historia de la Revolucion Hispano-Americana. Por D. Mariano Corrente, Autor
de la Geografia Universal. 3 Tom. 8vo. Madrid, 1829-30.

Memorias de la Seccion de Historia de la Real Sociedad Patriotica. 8vo. Habana, 1830-31.

La Espafia Maritima. Serie de Articulos relativos 4 las Ciencias y Artes, proprias 6 Auxili-
ares de la Marina, &c. &c. 8vo. Cuadern. 1-9, Madrid, 1838-9.

Folletin Historico 6 Coleccion de Historias Espafolas. Su Autor, Don Juan Miguel de los
Rios. 8vo. Cuadern. 1-3. Madrid, 1837.

Gaines (General E. P.) Memorial of Edmund Pendleton Gaines to the Senate and House of

Representatives of the United States in Congress assembled. 8vo. Memphis, Ten-

nessee, 1840.
Gallatin (A.) Considerations on the Currency and Banking System of the United States. By
Albert Gallatin. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1831.

— Memoirs of the Committee appointed by the Free Trade Convention, held in Philadelphia
in September and October, 1831, to prepare and present a Memorial to Congress, re-
monstrating against the existing Tariff of Duties; with an Appendix. (Mr. Gallatin,
Reporter.) 8vo. New York, 1832.

Report of the ‘‘ Union Committee”’ appointed by the Meeting of the Signers of the Memo-
rial to Congress, held on the 11th day of February, 1834, at the Merchants’ Exchange,
in the City of New York. (Mr. Gallatin, Reporter.) 8vo. New York, 1834.

Gilman (S.) A Discourse on the Life and Character of the Honourable Thomas Lee, late Judge

in the District Court of the United States; pronounced in the Unitarian Church,
Charleston, 8S. C., Nov. 3, 1839. By Samuel Gilman, D. D., Pastor of the Church,
&c. 8vo. Charleston, 1859.

Gilpin (T.) [he Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London, from their Com-
mencement in 1665, to the Year 1800: abridged, with Notes and Illustrations. By
Charles Hutton, LL. D., F. R.S.; George Shaw, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S.; and Richard
Pearson, M.D., F.S.A. 19 vols. 4to. London, 1809.

Goodrich (S.G.) A Pictorial Geography of the World, comprising a System of Universal Geogra-
phy, Popular and Scientific, &c. &c., illustrated by more than One Thousand Engravings
of Manners, Costumes, Curiosities, Cities, Edifices, Ruins, Beasts, Birds, &c. &c.,
with a Copious Index, answering the purpose of a Gazetteer. By S. G. Goodrich.
Second Edition. 2 Vols. Large 8vo. Boston, 1840.

Graham (J. D.) A Map of the Extremity of Cape Cod, Executed under the direction of Major
J. D. Graham, U. S. Top. Engrs.

Gutzlaff (C.) Three Missionary Malay Tracts.

Mow Yih Tung Che. A Treatise on Commerce. (In Chinese.) 8vo. with a Map of the
Southern Hemisphere. By Mr. Guitzlaff. (This work is founded on M‘Culloch’s
publication.)

Haldeman (S. S.) A Monograph of the Limniades and other fresh water Univalve Shells of

North America. By S. Stehman Haldeman, Member of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, &c. &c. (Specimen number.) 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

A84 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Hare (R.—M. D.) The History of the Royal Society of London, for the Improving of Natural
Knowledge. By Thomas Sprat. 4to. London, 1667.
Harlan (Robert ——M. D.) De la Bienfaisancé Publique: par M. le Baron de Gérando, Pair de
France, Membre de I’Institut, &c. &c. 4 Vols. 8vo. Paris, 1839.
Researches on the Gale and Hurricane in the Bay of Bengal on the 3d, 4th, and 5th of June,
1839. By Henry Peddington. (From the Journal of the Asiatic Society.) 8vo. Cal-
cutta, 1839.
Hassler (F. R.) Standard Weights and Measures. Letter from the Secretary of the Treasury
transmitting a Report of F. R. Hassler, Superintendent of the Works of Standard
Weights and Measures. (Doc. No. 261. Ho. of Reps. Treas. Department.)
Hays (I.—M. D.) The American Journal of the Medical Sciences. Philadelphia. Edited by Dr.
Hays. XLIX., L., and LI. Nov. 1839, and Feb. 1840, and May, 1840.
— The American Journal of Natural Sciences, No. 52, August 1840. 8vo. Philadelphia.
Catalogue of the Library of the late Dr. Thomas Cooper. 8vo. Columbia, 1839.
—— A Report on the History and Causes of the Strangers’, or Yellow Fever of Charleston, read
before the Board of Health. By Thomas Y. Simons, M. D., Chairman of the Board.
Hemsé (J. Graberg da.) Various Tracts relating to the Inhabitants, Geography, Agriculture, and

Commerce of Morocco, Algiers, Tripoli, and Tuscany, by Count Jacob Graberg da
Hemso.
—— Memoria sulla Scoperta dell’America nel Secolo Decimo dettata in Lingua Danese da Carlo
Cristino Rafn e tradotta da Jacopo Graberg da Hemsé. Pisa, 1839.
— L’Europa; Quadro Fisiografico facilmente inteso. Opera del Prof. J. C. Schow, Danese,
notommizata da Jacopo Graberg da Hemso. 8vo. Milano, 1839.
—— Degli ultimi Progressi della Geografia. Sunto presentato al primo Consesso Scientifico
Italiano, tenuto in Pisa nell’ Ottobre dell’ anno 1839, da Jacopo Graberg da Hemsi,
&e. &e.
Statistica dell’ Italia del Colonello Conte Luigi Serristori. Estratto della Rivista Europea
del 30 Gennaio, 1840.
Catalogo delle Opere pit o meno estese in otto diverse Lingue pubblicate dal Conte Cavaliere

Jacopo Graberg da Hemsé. Florence, 1837.

Hodgkin (Dr.) Ethnological Extracts from the Monthly Chronicle; containing a Paper, by Dr.
Prichard, on the Extinction of Human Races, é&c., and a Communication on the Prac-
ticability of Civilizing Aboriginal Populations. |

Hoeven (J. Van der.) and Vriese (W. H.) ‘Tijdschrift voor Natuurlijke Geschiedenis en Physio-
logie. Uitgegeven door J. Van der Hoeven, M. D., Prof. te Leiden, en W. H. Vriese,
M.D., Prof. te Amsterdam. Zesde Deel. 4. Stuk. 1839, and Zevende Deel. Iste en
2de Stuk. 8vo. Leiden, 1840.

Holbrook (J. E.—M.D.) North American Herpetology, or a Description of the Reptiles inha-
biting the United States. By John Edwards Holbrook, M.D., Professor of Anatomy
in the Medical College of the State of South Carolina, &c. &c. Vol. 3. 4to. Phi-
ladelphia, 1838.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 485

Horner (G. B. R—M.D.) Medical and Topographical Observations upon the Mediterranean;
and upon Portugal, Spain, and other Countries. By G. B. R. Horner, M.D., U.S.N.
Philadelphia, 1839.
Ingersoll (C. J.) Proceedings and Debates of the Convention of the Commonwealth of Pennsyl-
vania, to propose Amendments to the Constitution, commenced and held at Harrisburg,
on the 2d of May, 1837. Thirteen Volumes. Harrisburg, 1837 to 1839.

Journal of the Convention of the State of Pennsylvania, to propose Amendments to the Con-
stitution, commenced and held at the State Capitol in Harrisburg, on the 2d of May,
1837. Two Vols. Harrisburg, 1837, and Philadelphia, 1838.

Ingrahant (E. D.) Sundry recent English Catalogues of Books.

Johnson (W. R.) Report of a Geological, Mineralogical, and Topographical Examination of the
Coal Field of Carbon Creek, the Property of the Towanda Rail Road and Coal Com-
pany, Bradford County, Pa. with an Analysis of the Minerals, accompanied by a Map
of the Surveys, Profile of the Road, and Sections of the Mineral Ground. By Walter
R. Johnson, A. M., Civ. and Min. Engineer, Professor of Chemistry and Natural Phi-
losophy in Pennsylvania College, Philadelphia, &c. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Johnson (Messrs.) A new Collection of Laws, Charters, and Local Ordinances of the Governments
of Great Britain, France, and Spain, relating to the Concessions of Land in their re-

spective Colonies; together with the Laws of Mexico and Texas on the same subject,
&c. &c. By Joseph M. White, Counsellor at Law, &c. &c. Twovols. 8vo. Phila-
delphia, 1839.

Jomard. Extrait du Rapport fait a la Société de Géographie de Paris, 4 l’Assemblée Genérale du
6 Décembre, 1839; par M. Sabin Berthelot, Secrétaire Genéral de la Commission Cen-
trale. S8vo. Paris, 1840.

Rapport fait (par M. Jomard) a l’Académie Royale des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres dans sa Séance
du 12 Juin, 1835. Surun Pied Romain trouvé dans la Forét de Maulevrier, &c.
&e. Ato.

Notation Hypsométrique ou Nouvelle Manieére de noter les Altitudes, par M. Jomard, Membre de
l'Institut: suivi de plusieurs fragments et de Nouvelles Récentes de la Nubie et de
l’ Abyssinie.

Jordan (J., jun.) Pamphlets. 1. Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast of Labrador, to
Ungana Bay, westward of Cape Chudleigh; undertaken to Explore the Coast, and Visit
the Esquimaux in that Unknown Region. By Benjamin Kohlmeister and George
Kmoch, Missionaries of the Church of the Unitas Fratrum or United Brethren. 8vo.
London, 1814. 2. Authentische Relation von dem Anlass, Fortgang und Schlusse der
am Isten. und 2ten. Januarii, Anno 1742 im Germantown gehaltenen Versammlung
einiger Arbeiter derer meisten Christlichen Religionen und vieler vor sich selbst Gort-
dienenen CuristEN-menschen in Pennsylvania: aufgesetzt in Germantown am Abend
des 2ten. obigen Monats. 4to. Philadelphia. 3. Defensive War, in a Just Cause,
Sinless: a Sermon preached by the Rev. David Jones, A. M. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1775.
4. A Lecture on the Excellence of the Gospel of Christ, &c. By John Stanford,

Vil.—5 Ww

486 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Jordan (J. jun.) —continued.

M.A. 12mo. New York, 1791. 5. Report of the Preliminary Survey of the Route.
of the Hudson and Delaware Rail Road. By James B. Sargent, Esq., Civil Engineer,
&c. 8vo. Newburgh, 1836.

Twelve Views of Churches, Schools, and other Buildings, erected by the United Brethren in
America, with Descriptions, History, &c. New York, 1836.

Justice (G. M.) The case of the Seneca Indians in the State of New York, Illustrated by Facts;

printed for the information of the Society of Friends, &c. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Twenty-second Annual Report of the Controllers of the Public Schools of the City and County
of Philadelphia, composing the First School District of Pennsylvania, &c. &&c. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1840.

—— List of Optical Instruments to be found in the Optical Institute of Utzchneider and Frauen-

hofer, Miinchen; with the prices.—(In French and German.)

Lang (J. D.) New Zealand in 1839, or four Letters to the Right Hon. Earl Durham, Governor of
the New Zealand Land Company, &c. &c., on the Colonization of that Island, and on
the Present Condition and Prospects of its Native Inhabitants. By John Dunmore
Lang, D. D., Principal of the Australian College, and Senior Minister of the Church
of Scotland in New South Wales. 8vo. London, 1839.

—— A Historical and Statistical Account of New South Wales, both as a Penal Settlement and
British Colony. By John Dunmore Lang, D. D., Senior Minister of the Scots Church,
&c. &e. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. London, 1837.

—— View of the Origin and Migrations of the Polynesian Nation; demonstrating their Ancient

Discovery and Progressive Settlement of the Continent of America. By John Dun-
more Lang, D. D., &c. &e. 8vo. London, 1834.

Transportation and Colonization; or the Causes of the Comparative Failure of the ‘Transpor-
tation System in the Australian Colonies: with Suggestions for Insuring its Future
Efficiency in Subserviency to Extensive Colonization. By John Dunmore Lang, D. D.,
Principal of the Australian College, &c. 12mo. London, 1837.

—— Specimens of an Improved Metrical Translation of the Psalms of David, intended for the Use
of the Presbyterian Church in Australia and New Zealand, with a preliminary Disser-
tation, and Notes Critical and Explanatory. By John Dunmore Lang, D. D., Senior
Minister of the Presbyterian Church in Communion with the Church of Scotland in
New South Wales.

Lea (I.) Notice of the Oolitic Formation in America, with Descriptions of some of its Organic
Remains. By Isaae Lea. Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 15,
1840.

— A Voyage Round the World; including an Embassy to Muscat and Siam, in 1835, 1836, and
1837. By W.S. W. Ruschenberger, M. D., Surgeon U. 8. Navy, &c. 8vo. Phila-
delphia, 1838.

Lee (Dr.) Proceedings of the Numismatic Society of London, 1837-8, containing the Address
of the President, Dr. Lee. 8vo. London, 1838.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 487

Lioyd (H.) On the Mutual Action of Permanent Magnets, considered chiefly in Reference to their
best Relative Position in an Observatory. By the Rev. Humphrey Lloyd, A. M.,
Fellow of Trinity College, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Dub-
lin, &c. &c., Honorary Member of the American Philosophical Society. (Published
in the Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy, Vol. XIX. Part I.) 4to. Dublin,
1840,

Lubbock (J. W.) On the Heat of Vapour, and on Astronomical Refractions. By John William
Lubbock, Esq., Treas. R. S., &c. &c. 8vo. London, 1840.

Macedo (J. J. da Costa de.) Discourso lido em 15 de Maio de 1888 na Sessano publica da Acade-
mia real das Sciencias de Lisboa por Joaquim José da Costa de Macedo, do Conselho
de S. M. e Commendader da Ordem de N, Senhora da Conceig¢ano de Villa Viciosa,
&c. &e. 8vo. Lisboa, 1838.

Martini (M. Minister from Holland.) L’Hivernage des Hollandais & la Nouvelle-Zemble, 1596,
1597, traduit de Tollens, par Auguste Clavareau. Maestricht, 1839.

Mease (J.—M. D.) Annals of Tryon County, or the border Warfare of New York, during the
Revolution. By William W. Campbell. New York, 1831.

Mercer (Col. H.) A Discourse on the Death of General Washington, late President of the United
States; delivered on the 22d of February, 1800, in the Church in Williamsburg. By
James Madison, D. D., Bishop of the Protestant Episcopal Church in Virginia, and
President of William and Mary College. Third Edition, with Additions. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1831.

Sundry Biographical Notices of Brigadier General H. Mercer, and Accounts of the Battle of

Trenton.
Original Journal of a Council of War, held at Perth Amboy, Sept. 17, 1776; General Mercer,
President, in which he proposed an attack on the British Posts at Staten Island. MS.

Merrick (S. V.) Report by the Board of Directors of the Transactions, Affairs, and Accounts of
the New Orleans and Nashville Rail Road Company, from its Organization to the
present Time. New Orleans, February 28, 1840.

Minckelers (Professor.) Observations Météorologiques faites 4 Maestrichi, pendant les Années
1805—1812. Par M. le Professeur Minckelers. 4to.

Morelli (le Chev’r.) Sopra una Meteora luminosa osservata in Filadelfia dal Regio Console delle
Due Sicilie negli Stati Uniti di America. Naples, 1839.

Morton (S. G.—M. D.) Crania Americana; or a Comparative View of the Skulls of various
Aboriginal Nations of North and South America. By Samuel George Morton, M. D.
Philadelphia, 1839.

Oakford (J. S.) Chinese Maps. 1. Map of the Chinese Empire. 2. Map of Pekin. 3. Map
of Canton.

Palfrey (J. G.) A Discourse pronounced at Barnstable on the 3d of September, 1839, at the Cele-
bration of the Second Centennial Anniversary of the Settlement of Cape Cod. By
John Gorham Palfrey. 8vo. Boston, 1839.

Parnell (R—M. D.) The Natural History of the Fishes of the Frith of Fourth, and Tributaries.

488 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Parnell (R.)—coniinued.
By Richard Parnell, M. D., F. R. S. Edin., &c. &c. Private Copy: from the Me-
moirs of the Wernerian Natural History Society. Vol. VII. 8vo. Edinburgh, 1838.

Patterson (R.—M. D.) Message from the President of the United States, transmitting a Report
from the Secretary of State upon the subject of the Law for taking the Sixth Census.
December 31, 1839.

—— Letter from the Secretary of the Treasury, transmitting a Report of F. R. Hassler, upon the
subject of the Coast Survey, and the Progress of Preparing Standard Weights and
Measures. December 30, 1839.

—— A Bill to Provide for the Disposal and Management of the Fund bequeathed by James Smith-
son to the United States, for the Establishment of an Institution for the Increase and
Diffusion of Knowledge among Men. Reported to Congress by Mr. Adams.

Pedder (J.) Frank; or Dialogues between a Father and Son, on the Subjects of Agriculture,
Husbandry, and Rural Affairs. By the Author of ‘The Yellow Shoestrings.” Small
8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Plana (J.) Mémoire sur |’Expression Analytique de la Surface totale de l’ellipsoide dont les trois
axes sont inégaux; et sur l’évaluation de la surface d’une voiite symmétrique, & la base
rectangulaire, retranchée dans la moitié du méme ellipsoide, par M. J. Plana & Turin.
4to.

Note ou l’on explique une remarquable objection faite par Euler en 1751, contre une régle

donnée par Newton dans son Arithmetique Universelle, pour extraire la racine d’un
binome réel da la forme fa + 4/0, quelque soit le degré impair de la racine demandée,
si toutefois elle est possible, par M. J. Planaa Turin. 4to.

—— Recherches Analytiques sur les Expressions du Rapport de la Circonférence au Diamétre
trouvées par Wallis et Brounker; et sur la Théorie de Il’ Intégrale Eulérienne, &c. &c.
par Mr. Jean Plana & Turin, &c. 4to. (Extrait du Journal de Crelle.)

Mémoire sur Trois Intégrales Définies, par Mr. J. Plana, Directeur de l’Observatoire de
Turin. 4to.

Mémoire sur une nouvelle maniere de determiner les Intégrales définies, &c. &c., par M. J.

Plana.

Mémoire sur le Mouvement d’un Pendule dans un Milieu Résistant, par M. Jean Plana, &e.
&ec. 4to. Turin, 1835.

Penington (J.) Nouvelle Formule, pour trouver la hauteur des lieux par celles du Barométre et

du Thermomeétre, avec laquelle on determine, pour la premiere fois, le degré du Ther-
mométre centigrade ot le froid est absolu. Par M. Du Villard de Durand, Ancien
Deputé, membre de la Société de Harlem, &c. 8vo. Paris, 1826.

—— A Letter to Antonio Pannizzi, Esq., Keeper of the Printed Books in the British Museum, on
the reputed earliest Printed Newspaper, ‘* The English Mercurie, 1588.” By Thomas
Watts, of the British Museum. 8vo. London, 1839.

—— Physicorum Aristotelis Libri. Argumenta in singulos Libros, ex Optimis Grecorum Com-

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 489

Penington (J.)—continued.
mentariis convérsa jam recens adjecimus. Catalogum verd Librorum in hoc Opere
contentorum sequenti Pagella reperies. 8vo. Lugduni, 1554.

Lapis Philosophicus sive Commentarius in octo Libros Physicorum Aristot. in quo Arcana

Physiologie examinantur. Auctore Joanne Caso, in Medicina Doctore Oxoniensi, &c.
Accedit in Fine Ancilla Philosophie, seu Epitome in octo Libros Aristot. Physicorum,
eodem Auctore, cum Indicibus Locupletissimis. 8vo. Francof.ad Menum. 1600.

Vues Prophylactiques et Curatives sur la Fiévre Jaune, extraites d’un Mémoire en date de
Decembre, 1823, intitulé; Topographie Physique et Médicale de Florence et d’une
partie de la Toscané. Par le Chey. Foureau de Beauregard, Docteur en Médecine de
la Faculté de Paris, &c. &c. Presentées 4 l’Académie Royale de Médecine, &c. &c.
8vo. Paris, 1826.

Purgstall (Von Hammer.) Jahrbiicher der Literatur, Band. 85, 86, 87, 88. 8vo. Wien, 1839.

Falknerklee, bestehend in drey ungedruckten Werken tiber die Falknerey, nihmilich. 1. Das
Falkenbuch (Tiirkisch.) auf der Ambrosiana zu Mailand. 2. IEPAKOZO®ION das
ist: die Habichtslehre (auf der k. k. Hofbibliothek zu Wien.) 3. Kaiser Maximilians
Handschrift iiber die Falknerey (auf der k. k. Hofbibliothek zu Wien) aus dem
Tiirkischen und Griechischen Verdeutscht, und in text und Ubersetzung herausgegeben
von Hammer-Purgstall. (In Dreyhundert Abdriicken.) 8vo. Wien, 1840.

—— Wiener Zeitschrift fur Kunst, Literatur, Theater, und Mode; Donnerstag, den 23 Janner,

1840. Enthalten:—‘‘ Der Sinften Pallast der Beduinen auf der Insel Raudha.”’
Von Hammer-Purgstall.

—— Gemildesaal der Lebensbeschreibungen grosser Moslimischer Herrscher der ersten Sieben
Jahrhunderte der Hidschret. Von Hammer-Purgstall. Band V. 8vo. Leipzig und
Darmstadt, 1838.

Catalogo dei Codici Arabi, Persiani e Turchi della Biblioteca Ambrosiana (per Giuseppe de-
Hammer.) 8vo. Milano, 18389.

Quetelet (A.) Sur la Longitude de l’Observatoire Royal de Bruxelles, Mémoire lu a la Séance du
6 Juillet, 1839. Par A. Quetelet, &c. &c. 4to. Bruxelles, 1839.

Annuaire de l’Observatoire de Bruxelles, pour l’an 1840. Par le Directeur A. Quetelet, Sec-
rétaire Perpétual de Académie Royale de Bruxelles, &c. &c. 12mo. Bruxelles,
1839.

—— Apereu de I’Etat de Observatoire, pendant l’année 1839. Par le Directeur de cet Etablisse-

ment. 8vo. Bruxelles, 1840.
Catalogue des Principales Apparitions d’Etoiles Filantes. Par A. Quetelet, &c. &c. Ato.
Bruxelles, 1839.
Raguet (C.) A Treatise on Currency and Banking. By Condy Raguet, LL.D., Member of the
American Philosophical Society, &c. 2dedition. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.
Rebello (J. S.) O Auxiliador da Industria Nacional, ou Colleceao de Memorias e Noticias inter-

ressantes aos Fazendeiros, Fabricantes, Artistas, e Classes industriosas no Brasil, tanto
originaes, como traduzidas das melhores Obras que neste genero se publican. Perio-

VIL.—5 x

490 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Rebello (J. S.)—continued.
dico Mensal, publicado pela Sociedade Auxiliadora da Industria Nacional, estabelecida
no Rio de Janeiro. Anno. VII. No. 1—12 Janeiro—Dezembro de 1839. 8vo. Rio
Janeiro, 1839.

Redfield (W. C.) Synopsis of a Meteorological Journal, kept in the city of New York for the
Years 1838 and 1839, including also the Mean Results of the last Seven Years. By
W. C, Redfield.

Reed (H.) Address delivered before the Philomathean Society of the University of Pennsylvania,
Thursday, Nov. 1, A. D. 1838. By William B. Reed. 8vo, Philadelphia, 1838.

—— The Infancy of the Union. A Discourse delivered before the New York Historical Society,
Thursday, Dec. 19, 1839, By Wm. B. Reed. Published at the request of the Socie-
ty. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Rogers (H. D.) Description of the Geology of the State of New Jersey, being a Final Report.
By Henry D. Rogers, State Geologist, &c. &c. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Ronaldson (J.) Observations on the Sugar Beet and its Cultivation. Philadelphia, 1840.

Ross (J.) ‘Fhe Constitution and Laws of the Cherokee Nation: passed at Tah-le-quah, Cherokee
Nation, 1889. Washington, 1840.
Ruffin (E.) The Farmer’s Register, a monthly publication, devoted to the Improvement of the
Practice and Support of the Interests of Agriculture. Edmund Ruffin, Editor and Pro-
prietor. Vol. VII. 8vo. Petersburg, 1839.
Supplement to the Farmer’s Register, containing the Essay on Calcareous Manures. Second
edition, greatly enlarged. 8vo. Prince George County, Va.
Saluces (A, de.) Histoire Militaire du Piémont parle Comte Alexandre de Saluces. Five Volumes.
Turin, 1818.

Sergeant (J.) Report of the Select Committee of the House of Representatives of the United States,
(J. Q. Adams, Chairman,) on the Smithsonian Bequest, March 5, 1840.

—— Memoir, Historical and Political, on the North-west Coast of America, and the adjacent Terri-

tories : Illustrated by a Map, anda Geographical View of those Countries. By Robert
Greenhow, Translator and Librarian to the Department of State. (Submitted by Mr.
Linn to the Senate of the United States.) 4to. Washington, 1840.

—— Third Annual Report on the Geology of the State of Maine. By Charles T. Jackson, M.D.
Augusta, 1839.

Short (W.) A Fourth Supplementary Catalogue of the Plants of Kentucky. By C. W. Short,
M.D., Professor of Materia Medica and Medical Botany in the Medical Institute of
Louisville.

Silliman (B.) ‘The American Journal of Science and Arts. Conducted by Benjamin Silliman,
M.D., LL.D., aided by Benjamin Silliman, Jr., A.B., &e. &c. Vol. XXXVIII. &
XXXIX. 1840.

Sundry Pamphlets, 1. Exposition of the Plan and Objects of the Greenwood Cemetery, char-
tered by the State of New York. 8vo. New York, 1839. 2. Report of the Com-
mittee on the New Haven Burying Ground. 8vo. New Haven, 1839. 3. A Sermon,

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 49}.

Silliman (B.)—continued.
by Thomas F. Davies; published by request of the Congregational Society in Green’s
Farms. 8vo. New Haven, 1839. 4. Annual Address to the Candidates for Medical
Degrees and Licenses in Yale College, Feb. 26, 1839. By Dr. Thomas Miner. Se-
cond edition. 8vo. New Haven, 1839. 5. Annual Address on a Similar Occasion,
Jan. 21, 1840. By Dr. Dyar T. Brainard. 8vo. New Haven, 1840. 6. Report of
a Committee on the State of the Prisons of Fairfield County. 8vo. Bridgeport, 1839.
7. The Completion of two Centuries, a Discourse preached in Fairfield, Nov. 28, 1839.
By Lyman H. Atwater, Pastor of the First Church in Fairfield. 8vo. Bridgeport,
1839. 8. Report of the Agricultural Meeting held in Boston, Jan. 13, 1840, contain-
ing the Remarks of Mr. Webster and Prof. Silliman, with Notes by Henry Colman,
Commissioner for the Agricultural Survey of the State. S8vo. Salem, 1840. A Dis-
course delivered in Norfield, May, 29, 1836. By John Noyes, at the close of the 30th
year of his Ministry. 8vo. New Haven, 1839.

Smith (J. J., jun.) The Charge delivered (by Judge Logan,) from the Bench to the Grand Jury,
at the Court of the Quarter Sessions, held for the County of Philadelphia, the second
day of September, 1723. Published at the desire of the said Grand Jury; together
with their address. 4to. Philadelphia, 1723.

Smith (T. L.) An Account of the Receipts and Expenditures of the United States, for the Year
1839. 8vo. Washington, 1840.

Snider (M.) A Selection of Church Music, printed for the Pennsylvania Institution for the In-
struction of the Blind, with Type on an Improved Plan, invented by M. Snider, Printer
to the Institution; arranged and figured for Thorough-base. By F. Rasché, Teacher
of Music in the Institution. Vol. I. Folio. Philadelphia, 1840.

Sparks (J.) ‘The Works of Benjamin Franklin ; containing several Political and Historical Tracts,
not included in any former edition, and many Letters, Official and Private, not hitherto
published ; with Notes, and a Life of the Author. By Jared Sparks. Vols. 1,8, 9, and
10, which complete the Work. Royal 8vo. Boston, 1839—40.

Struthers (J.) Tomb of Washington at Mount Vernon. By William Strickland. 8vo. Phila-
delphia, 1840.

Tanner (H. S.) A new Picture of Philadelphia, or the Stranger’s Guide to the City and adjoin-
ing Districts, &c. &c., with a Plan of the City, and a Map of its Environs. By H.S.
Tanner. 24mo. Philadelphia, 1840.

—— A Description of the Canals and Rail Roads of the United States, comprehending Notices of all
the Works of Internal Improvement throughout the several States. By H.S. Tanner.
8vo. New York, 1840.

—— The American Traveller, or Guide through the United States: containing brief Notices of the
several States, Cities, principal Towns, Canals, and Rail Roads, &c., with Tables of
Distances by Stage, Canal, and Steamboat Routes: the whole Alphabetically arranged,
with direct reference to, the accompanying Map of the Roads, Canals, and Rail-

492 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Tanner (W. S.)—continued.
ways of the United States. Sixth Edition. By H. 8. Tanner. 12mo. Philadel-
phia, 1840.

Taylor (R. C.) Two Reports on the Coal Lands, Mines, and Improvements of the Dauphin and
Susquehanna Coal Company, and of the Geological Examinations, present Condition,
and Prospects of the Stony Creek Coal Estate, in the Townships of Jackson, Rush,
and Middle Paxtang, in the County of Dauphin, and of East Hanover Township, in
the County of Lebanon, Pennsylvania: with an Appendix, containing numerous Ta-
bles and Statistical Information, and various Maps, Sections, and Diagrams, chiefly in
Illustration of Coal and Iron. Addressed to the Board of Directors of the Dauphin and
Susquehanna Coal Company, &c. &c. By Richard C. Taylor, President of the Board
of Directors. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

Pamphlets. 1. Notes respecting Certain Indian Mounds and Earthworks, in the Form of
Animal Effigies, chiefly in the Wisconsin Territory, U. S. By Richard C. Taylor,
Esq. 2. Sundry Communications.—a. The Natural History of the Alleghany Moun-
tains. 6b, The American Fucoides. c. The Natural History of Cuba. d. The His-
tory and Progress of Geology. e. Reviews of Martin’s Geological Memoir, and of
Professor Buckland on the Formation of the Valley of Kingsclere, &c. f. Introduction

to Geology. g. Antediluvian Zoology and Botany. h. Illustrations of Antediluvian

Zoology. i. Geological Arrangement of Fossil Shells. j. On part of the Mineral

Basin of South Wales. By R. C. Taylor. .

Taylor (R.) The Magazine of Natural History. New Series. No. 43, for July, 1840. Con-

ducted by Edward Charlesworth, F.G.S., &c. No. 44, for Aug. 1840. By Richard
Taylor, F.L.8., &.

Index Monasticus ; or the Abbeys and other Monasteries, Alien Priories, Friaries, Colleges,

Collegiate Churches, and Hospitals, with their Dependencies, formerly established in the
Diocess of Norwich and the Ancient Kingdom of East Anglia; systematically arranged
and briefly deseribed, according to the respective Orders and Denominations in each
County, and Illustrated by Maps of Suffolk, Norfolk, and the City of Norwich, and the
Arms of Religious Houses. By Richard Taylor, of Norwich. Folio. London, 1821.

—— On the Geology of East Norfolk: with remarks upon the Hypothesis of Mr. J. W. Rob-
berds, ‘respecting the former Level of the German Ocean. By Richard C. Taylor,
F. G. S. Author of the Index Monasticus. 8vo. London, 1827.

Thompson (G.) Eleven Annual Reports of the Inspectors of the Eastern State Penitentiary of
Pennsylvania. 1831—1840.

Tidyman (P. M. D.) The Statutes at Large of South Carolina. Edited under the authority of the
Legislature. By Thomas Cooper, M.D., LL.D. Vol. V. & VI. Columbia, 1839.

Tinelli (L.) Storia dei Progetti e delle Opere per la Navigazione-Interna del Milanese di Giuseppe
Bruschetti. Two Volumes. Milan, 1830.

Troost (G.—M. D.) Fifth Geological Report to the Twenty-third General Assembly of Tennes-

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 493

Troost (G.—M. D.)—continued.
see, made November; 1839. By G. Troost, M. D., Geologist to the State, &c. 8vo.
Nashville, 1840.

Tyson (J. R.) Discourse on the Integrity of the Legal Character. By Job R. Tyson, Esq.
Philadelphia, 1839.

— The Lottery System in the United States. By Job R. Tyson, Esq. Third Edition. 12mo.
Philadelphia, 1837.

Vanuxem (L.) Report of the Geologists of the State of New York. In Assembly. January 24,
1840. 8vo.

Vaughan (John.) The Proceedings relative to calling the Conventions of 1776 and 1790. ‘The
Minutes of the Convention that formed the present Constitution of Pennsylvania,
together with the Charter to William Penn, the Constitutions of 1776 and 1790, and
a View of the Proceedings of the Convention of 1776, and the Council of Censors.
Harrisburg, 1825.

—— The State of the Prisons in England and Wales. By John Howard, F. R.S. Warrington,

1784. ‘

State of the Prisons in England, Scotland, and Wales. By James Neild, Esq. London, 1812.

—— The Natural History of British Insects. By E. Donovan, F. L.S. Ten Volumes. Lon-
don, 1793 to 1802. :

— The Natural History of British Birds. By E. Donovan, F. L. 8. London, 1794 to 1798.
Five Volumes.

—— The Natural History of British Fishes. By E. Donovan, F.L.S. Vol.I. London, 1802.

Biographical Sketches of distinguished American Naval Heroes in the War of the Revolution.

By S. Putnam Waldo, Esq. Hartford, 1823.
An Account, Historical, Political, and Statistical, of the United Provinces of Rio de la Plata.
Translated from the Spanish of Ignacio Nunes. London, 1825.

—— Flora Caroliniensis, or an Historical, Medical, and Economical Display of the Vegetable
Kingdom. By John L. E. W. Shecut. Vol. I. Charleston, 1806.
Travels in Brazil, in the Years from 1809 to 1815. By Henry Koster. Two Vols. Phi-
ladelphia, 1817.
—— History of Spain, from the establishment of the Colony of Gades, by the Phenicians, to the
death of Ferdinand, surnamed the Sage. Two Volumes. Dublin, 1793.
—— History of the County of Worcester, in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. By Peter
Whitney, A. M. Worcester, 1793.
—— The First Settlers of Virginia. New York, 1806.
An Introduction to the Knowledge of Rare and Valuable Editions of the Greek and Latin
Classics. By the Rev. Thomas Frognall Dibdin, F.S.A. Two Volumes. London,
1808.
—— The History of Hindostan, translated from the Persian. Second Edition. Revised, altered,
corrected, and greatly enlarged. By Alex. Dow, Esq. 2 vols. 4to. London, 1770.
Vil.—5 Y

494 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Vaughan (John.)—continued.
Journal of a Residence in China, and the Neighbouring Countries, from 1829 to 1838. By
David Abeel, a Minister of the Reformed Dutch Church in North America, &c. Small
8vo. New York, 1834.
—— Flora Scotica, or a Systematic Arrangement, in the Linnean method, of the Native Plants of
Scotland and the Hebrides. By John Lightfoot, A.M. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo.
London, 1789.
—— A Memoir of the Life of Daniel Webster. By Samuel L. Knapp. Small 8vo. Boston, 1831.
—— A Sketch of the Laws relating to Slavery in the several States of the United States of America.
By George M. Stroud. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1827.
—— History of the late Polish Revolution, and the Events of the Campaign. By Joseph Hor-
dynski, Major of the late Tenth Regiment of Lithuanian Lancers. Fourth Edition.
8vo. Boston, 1838.
Essai Statistique sur le Royaume de Portugal et d’Algarve, comparé aux autres Etats de

V Europe, ef suivi d’un Coup d’Qiil sur l’Etat actuel des Sciences, des Lettres et des
Beaux-Arts parmi les Portugais des Deux Hémispheres. Dédié asa Majesté trés-fidéle.
Par Adrien Balbi, Ancien Professeur de Géographie, &c. &c. 2vols. 8vo. Paris, 1822.

Journal Historique de la Révolution de la partie Frangaise de Saint-Domingue, commencé le 10
Aotit, 1808, avec des Notes Statistiques sur cette partie. Par Gilbert Guillermin, Chef
d’Escadron attaché 4 l’Etat-major de l’Armée de Saint-Domingue. 8vo. Philadelphia,
1810.

Guida da Milano a Ginevra pel Sempione; con 30 Vedute ed una Carta Geographiea. 8vo.
Milano, 1822.

—— Dissertation Second: exhibiting a General View of the Progress of Mathematical and Physical

Science, since the revival of Letters in Europe. By John Playfair, late Professor of
Natural Philosophy in the University of Edinburgh, &c. (From the Supplement to
the Encyclopedia Britannica.) 8vo. 2 vols.
—— Dissertation Third: exhibiting a General View of the Progress of Chemical Philosophy,
from the Early Ages to the End of the Eighteenth Century. By William Thomas
Brande, Secretary of the Royal Society of London, &c. (From the Supplement to the
Encyclopedia Britannica.) 8vo.
— Original Papers, relating to the Expedition to Panama. 8vo. London, 1744.
Le Conservateur de la Vue, suivi du Manuel de l’Ingénieur-opticien, 4¢me édit. par l’Ingé-
nieur Chevallier (le Chev,) Membre de la Société Royale Académique des Sciences
de Paris, &c. 8vo. Paris, 1820.
—— Abrégé d’un Cours Complet de Lexicologie a l’Usage des Eléves de la Quatriéme Classe de
V’Ecole Polymathique: par P. R. F. Butet (de la Sarthe) Directeur de cette Ecole, &c.
8vo. Paris, An. 1X. 1801.
—— Essai sur la Théorie des Proportions Chimiques et sur l’Influence Chimique de 1’Electricité:
par J. J. Berzelius, Membre de l’Académie des Sciences de Stockholm. ‘Traduit du
Snédois sous les yeux de l’Auteur, et publié par lui-méme. 8vo. Paris, 1819.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 495

Vaughan (John.)—continued.
Dictionnaire Raisonné de Botanique, contenant les ‘Termes Techniques, Anciens et Modernes,

considérés sous le Rapport de la Botanique, del’ Agriculture, de la Médecine, des Arts,
des Eaux et Foréts, &c., par Sébastien Gérardin (de Mirecourt,) Ex Professeur a
l’Ecole Centrale du Departement des Vosges, &c. Publié, Revu et Augmenté de plus
de Trois Mille Articles, par M. N. A. Desvaux, Professeur de Botanique, &c. Nouvelle
Edition. 8vo. Paris, 1822.

— A History of the Heathen Mythology; or the Fables of the Ancients, elucidated from His-
torical Records, an Important Key to the Classics. To which is added, an Inquiry
into the Religion of the first Inhabitants of Great Britain, and a particular Account of
the Ancient Druids. Translated from the French of M. Abbé de Tressan. By H.
North. 2d Edition, embellished with 75 engravings. London, 1806.

— The Life of John Jay, with Selections from his Correspondence and Miscellaneous Papers.
By his Son, William Jay. Two Vols. 8vo. New York, 1833.

—— Vies des Peintres, Sculpteurs et Architectes les plus célébres, par G. Vasari, Peintre et Ar-
chitecte Arétin; traduites de l’Italien, avec des notes, particuliérement celles de Bot-
tari, et les portraits de chaque artiste, gravés 4 l’eau forte par G. Boichot, correspond.
de l’Institut National. Three Vols. 8vo. Paris, 1803.

—— A Condensed Geography and History of the Western States, or the Mississippi Valley. By

Timothy Flint, Author of Recollections of the Last Ten Years in the Mississippi Val-
ley. 2vols.8vo. Cincinnati, 1828.

Democracy in America, By Alexis de Tocqueville, Avocat a la Cour Royale de Paris, &c.
&c. Translated by Henry Reeve, Esq. With an Original Preface and Notes. By
John C. Spencer, Counsellor at Law. 8vo. New York, 1838.

—— The Speeches of Henry Clay, delivered in the Congress of the United States; to which is
prefixed, a Biographical Memoir; with an Appendix, containing his Speeches at Lex-
ington and Lewisburg, and before the Colonization Society at Washington: together
with his Address to his Constituents on the Subject of the late Presidential Election:
with a Portrait. Philadelphia, 1827.

Travels in the Central Portions of the Mississippi Valley: comprising Observations on its
Mineral Geography, Internal Resources, and Aboriginal Population (performed under
the sanction of Government, in the year 1821.) By Henry Schoolcraft, U. S. I. A.,
&c. 8vo. New York, 1825.

—— A Collection of Original Papers relative to the History of the Colony of Massachusetts Bay.

By Lieut. Gov. Thomas Hutchinson. Boston, 1769.

—— A Complete Collection of Scottish Proverbs, explained and made intelligible to the English
Reader. By James Kelly, M. A. London, 1721.

—— The History of the Province of New York, from the First Discovery to the Year 1832; to
which is annexed, a Description of the Country, with a Short Account of the Inhabi-

A96 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Vaughan (John.) continued.
tants, their Trade, Religious and Political State, and the Constitution of the Courts of
Justice in that Colony. By William Smith, A. M. 4to. London, 1757.

—— The Present State of Nova Scotia, with a Brief Account of Canada, and the British Islands
on the Coast of North America. 2d edition. 8vo. Edinburgh, 1787.

—— Reports of the Committee of the House of Assembly, on that part of the Speech of His Ex-
cellency the Governor in Chief, which relates to the Settlement of the Crown Lands,
with the Minutes of Evidence taken before the Committee. 2 vols. 8vo. Quebec,
1821.

—— The History of Hindostan; translated from the Persian: the second edition; revised, altered,
corrected, and greatly enlarged. By Alexander Dow, Esq. 2 vols. 4to. London,
1770.

—— The History of Hindostan, from the death of Akbar to the Complete Settlement of the Em-
pire under Aurungzebe. ‘To which are prefixed, 1. A Dissertation on the Origin and
Nature of Despotism in Hindostan. 2. An Inquiry ito the state of Bengal; with a
Plan for restoring that Kingdom to its former Prosperity and Splendour. By Alex-
ander Dow, Esq., Lieut. Col. in the Company’s Service. 4to: London, 1772.

—— Motifs des Guerres et des Traités de Paix de la France, Pendant les Régnes de Louis XIV.,
Louis XV., et Louis XVI., depuis la Paix de Westphalie, en 1648, jusqu’ a celle de
Versailles, en 1783. Par le Chev. Anquetil, &c. 12mo: Paris, An 6 de la Ré-
publique.

Zoonomia, or the Laws of Organic Life. By Erasmus Darwin, M.D,, F.R.S. 2 vols. 8vo.
Dublin, 1800.

—— Syllabus of a Course of Lectures on Natural and Experimental Philosophy. By ‘Thomas
Young, M.D., F. R. S. Professor of Natural Philosophy in the Royal Institution of
Great Britain. S8vo. London, 1802.

Select American Speeches, Forensic and Parliamentary, with Prefatory Remarks: being a
Sequel to Dr. Chapman’s ‘Select Speeches.”” By S. C. Carpenter. Two vols. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1815.

—— Sermons, Orations, and Eulogiums, by Various Individuals, in 1799 and 1800. 2 vols. 8vo.

Philadelphia, 1800.

—— The History of the Origin, Progress, and Termination of the American War. By C. Sted-
man, who served under Sir W. Howe, Sir H. Clinton, and the Marquis Cornwallis.
2 vols. 4to. London, 1794.

—— L’Egypte et la Turquie de 1829 & 1836: par MM. Ed. de Cadalvene et J. de Breuvery, avec
Cartes et Planches. 2vols. 8vo. Paris, 1836. Avec Atlas in fol.

—— Minshezi Emendatio, vel & Mendis Expurgatio, seu Augmentatio sui Ductoris in Linguas.
The Guide into Tongues. Cum illarum Harmonia et Etymologiis, Originationibus,

Rationibus et Derivationibus in omnibus his novem Linguis, viz.—1. Anglica; 2. Bel-

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 497

Vaughan (John)—continued.
gica; 3. Germanica; 4, Gallica; 5. Italica; 6. Hispanica; 7. Latina; 8. Greca; 9.
Hebrea, &c. &c. &c. Opera, Studio, Industria, Labore et Sumptibus Johannis Minshei
in luecem editum et impressum, 22 Julii, Anno, 1625. 2da Editio, folio. London, 1627.
—— The Bhaguat-géeta, or Dialogues of Krééshna and Arjdon, in eighteen Lectures; with Notes.
‘Translated from the Original in the Sanskreeét, or Ancient Language of the Brahmans.
By Charles Wilkins, Senior Merchant in the Service of the Honourable East India
Company, &c. 4to. London, 1785.
Memorials of Columbus: or a Collection of Authentic Documents of that Celebrated Navi-
gator, now first published from the Original Manuscripts, by Order of the Decurions of

Genoa; preceded by a Memoir of his Life and Discoveries. Translated from the
Spanish and Italian. 8vo. London, 1823.
Necessity of Popular Education as a National Object; with Hints on the Treatment of Cri-

minals, and Observations on Homicidal Insanity. By James Simpson. 12mo. New
York, 1834.

—— A Biographical Memoir of the late Commodore Joshua Barney, from Autographical Notes
and Journals in Possession of his Family, and other Authentic Sources. Edited by
Mary Barney. 8vo. Boston, 1832.

—— The Universal Cambist and Commercial Instructor; being a Full and Accurate Treatise on
the Exchanges, Moneys, Weights, and Measures of all Trading Nations and their
Colonies; with an Account of their Banks, Public Funds, and Paper Currencies. By
P. Kelly, LL.D., Master of the Finsbury Square Academy, London, &c. &c. 2 vols.
4to. The Second Edition, including a Revision of Foreign Weights and Measures,
from an Actual Comparison of their Standards, by the Order and Aid of the British
Government. London, 1821.

Index alter Plantarum que in Horto Academico Lugduno-Batavo aluntur, conscriptus ab Her-

manno Boerhaave. 4to. Lugd. Bat. 1720.

Calendars of the Ancient Charters and of the Welch and Scottish Rolls, now remaining in
the Tower of London, &c. &c. To which are added, Memoranda concerning the
Affairs of Ireland, extracted from the Tower Records, d&c. &c. By Sir Joseph Ay-
loffe, Bart., V. P. A, S. and F. R. S., &c. London, 1774.

An Examination of Dr. Burnet’s Theory of the Earth, with some Remarks on Whiston’s
New Theory of the Earth, &c. &c. By J. Keil, A. M., &c. Second Edition. To
the whole is annexed a Dissertation on the different Figures of Celestial Bodies, &c.
By Mons. De Maupertuis, &c. &c. 8vo. Oxford, 1734.

Des Administrations Provinciales, Mémoire présenté au Roi par feu M. Turgot. 8vo. Lau-
sanne, 1788.

Lettres Américaines, dans lesquelles on examine l’Origine, |’Etat Civil, Politique, &c. &c.

des Anciens Habitans de l’Amérique, &c. &c. pour servir de Suite aux Mémoires de
D. Ulloa. Par M. le Comte J. R. Carli, &c. &c. 8vo. 2 vols. Boston, 1788.

VII.—5 Z

498 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Vaughan (John)—continued.

Zevopartos Kupov Tavera, Bu6avu, ox7a. Xenophontis de Cyri Institutione Libri octo, &c. &c.
Cura Thom. Hutchinson, A.M. Edit: 6ta. 8vo. London, 1'765.

Map of the Inland Navigation, Canals and Rail Roads, with the situations of the various
Mineral Productions throughout Great Britain, from actual Surveys projected on the
Basis of the Trigonometrical Survey made by order of the Honourable the Board of
Ordnance, by J. Walker, &c. &c., accompanied by a Book of Reference, compiled by
Joseph Priestley, Esq., &c. &c.; in six sheets. London, 1831.

—— A Treatise on the Yellow Fever, ‘as it appeared in the Island of Dominica, in the Years
1793-4, 5, 6; to which are added, Observations on the Bilious Remittent Fever, on
Intermittents, Dysentery, and seme other West India Diseases; also the Chemical
Analysis and Medical Properties of the Hot Mineral Waters on the same Island. By
James Clark, M.D., F.R.S.E,, &c. &e. 8vo. London, 1797.

— The Possibility of Approaching the North Pole Asserted. By the Hon. D. Barrington. A
new Edition, with an Appendix, containing Papers on the same subject, and on a
Northwest Passage. By Colonel Beaufoy, F.R.S. Tlustrated with a Map of the
North Pole, according to the latest Discoveries. 8vo. New York, 1818.

—— A Complete Treatise on Electricity, in Theory and Practice, with Original Experiments.
By Tiberius Cavallo, F. R.S. Fourth Edition. 3 Vols. 8vo. London, 1795.

—— C. Julii Cesaris que extant, &c. &c. inusum Delphini. Edit.11ma. 8vo. London, 1794.

Corpus Juris Civilis Romani, &c. &c. cum notis integris Dionysii Gothofredi, &c. &c.

2 Vols. 4to. Lipsiz, 1720.

—— A Full Report of the Case of Stacy Decow and Joseph Hendrickson vs. Thomas L. Shotwell;
decided at a special Term of the New Jersey Court of Appeals, held at Trenton in
July and August, 1833, &c. &c. (This law case grew out of the division existing in
the Society of Friends.) 8vo. Philadelphia, 1839.

—— Mémoire sur les Moyens qui ont amené le Grand Développement que |’Industrie Francaise

a pris depuis vingt ans, &c. &c. Par Cl. Anthelme Costaz, &c. &c. 8vo. Paris,

1816.

Lettres sur l’Amérique du Nord, par Michel Chevalier avec une Carte des Etats-Unis

d’Amérique. Edit. Speciale, revue, corrigée et augmentée de plusieurs Chapitres.
2 Vols. 8vo. Paris, 1837.
Travels in Europe, viz.—in England, freland, Scotland, France, Italy, Switzerland, Germany,
and the Netherlands. By Wilbur Fisk, D.D., &c. é&c., with Engravings. Fourth
Edition. 8vo. -New York, 1838.
—— M. Tullius Cicero, of the Nature of the Gods, in three Books; with ‘Critical, Philosophical,
and Explanatory Notes. By the Rev. Dr. Francklin. New Edition, &c. 8vo.
London, 1775.

Vaughan (P.) Royal Society.. Report.of the Committee of Physics, including Meteorology, on
the objects of Scientific Inquiry in those Sciences. Approved by the President and
Council. 8vo. London, 1840.

DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 499

Vaughan (P.)—continued.

The Proceedings and Resolutions of the West India Body, including Copies of their various
Communications with His Majesty’s Government, relative to the Measures of the
Session of 1833, for the Abolition of Slavery. Small Folio. 1833.

Vaughan (W.) ‘The London Atheneum, for December 28, 1839, containing the Meteorological

Observations at the Apartments of the Royal Society, for ''wenty-four Successive
Hours, commencing at 6 A. M., Dec. 21, 1839, and ending at 6 A. M. of the following
day. By Mr. J. D. Roberton, Assistant Secretary Royal Society.

—— Address, delivered by the Actuary, (Mr. Morgan,) to the General Court of the Equitable Society,

on Thursday, the 5th Dec., 1839, with Tables and Statements of Insurance on Lives,

by the Society.

Report of the Directors of the Thames Tunnel Company to the General Assembly of Pro-
prietors, held at the London Tavern, on the 3d day of March, 1840;—with a Plan.
Warden (D. B.) Instruction sur la Fabrication du Sucre de Betteraves par le Procédé de
Macération, & l’usage des Fabriques Rurales: par C. J. A. Mathieu de Dombasle.
12mo. Paris, 1839.
— Question des Sucres.. Indemnité aux Fabricans: par C. J. A. Mathieu de Dombasle.

Société Royale et Centrale d’Agriculture. Coup d’cil sur l’Agriculture de la Sicile; par M.
le Cte. de Gasparin, Pair de France.

—— Institute Royal de France, (Etat actuel, Liste et Addresses de MM. les Académiciens, &c.)
24mo. Pour l’année, 1840.

Pamphlets. I. Institut Royal de France. Académie Royale des Sciences. a. Funerailles
de M. Turpin; Discours de M. le Baron de Silvestre. 5 Mai, 1840. 6. Funerailles de
M. Brochant de Villiers: Discours de M. Al. Brogniart, 19 Mai, 1840. cc. Funerailles
de M. le Lieutenant Général du Génie, Vicomte Rogniat. Discours de M. Becquerel,
11 Mai, 1840. d. Funerailles de M. Robiquet; Discours de M. Crevreul, Mai 2,
1840. e. Funerailles de M. Poisson: Discours de M. Arago, 30 Avril, 1840, et Discours
de M. Cousin, 30 Avril, 1840.—II. Institut Royal de France. Académie des Sciences

Morales et Politiques. Sujets de Prix et Programmes adoptés par l’Académie pour

.étre mis au concours des Années 1840, 41, & 42.—JII. Institut Royal de France.
‘Séance Publique Annuelle des Cing Académies, du Samedi. 2 Mai, 1840, d&c.—IV.
Institut Royal de France Académie Francaise; Séance Publique du Jeudi, 11 Juin,
1840.—V. Réglemens de la Société Royale des Antiquaires de France, 1840.—VI.
Rapport sur les Opérations de la Campagne dela Corvette l’Astrolabe, depuis le départ
‘de Rio Janeiro jusqu’ a 1’Arrivé 4 Valparaiso.—VII. Rapport fait a la Société d’En-
couragement pour l’Industrié Nationale, par M. le Vicomte Hericart de Thury, &c. sur
le procédé proposé par M.C. P. Brard, &c. pour reconnditre immédiatement les Pierres
quine peuvent point résister a la Gelée, et quel’on désigne ordinairement par les Noms
de Pierres Gelives ou Pierres Gelisses. . 4to, Paris, 1824.—VIII. Société Asiatique:
Discours et Rapport:lus dans la Séance Générale Annuelle du 28 Avril, 1825, &c.
8vo. Paris, 1825.

500 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY.

Warden (D. B.)—continued.

Récit de l’Inauguration de la Statue de Gutenberg et des fétes données par la Ville de
Strasbourg, les 24, 25, et 26 Juin, 1840. Par Auguste Luchet, &c. 12mo. Paris,
1840.

Pamphlets.—1. Institut Royalde France. a. Académie des Sciences, Morales et Politiques:
Séance publique du Samedi, 27 Juin, 1840. 6. Académie Frangaise: Séance publique
du Jeudi, 11 Juin, 1840. c. Académie Royale des Sciences; Séance publique du
Lundi, 13 Juillet, 1840. 2. Revue de l’Agriculture Universelle, publiée par la Société
d’Agriculture Universelle, sous la direction de M. l’Abbé Theodore Perrin, &c. &c.
Tom. ler. Ire et 2e Livraison, Oct., 1889. 3. Société Royale et Centrale d’Agri-
culture. a. Mémoire sur la Culture de Chéne Liége, sur la Récolte et la Fabrication
du Liége: par M. F. Jaubert, de Passa, &c. &c. Paris, 1836. 6. Dela Greffe du
Murier blanc sur le Murier des Philippines, par M. Bonafous, &c. &c. Paris, 1835.
c. Rapport sur une Herse-Rateau, de 1’Invention de N. Lestouniére, &c.—M. le Vte
Héricart de Thury, Rapporteur. Paris, 1840. d. Archives d’Harcourt, lere Année.
Paris, 1836. e. Premier Rapport fait aunom dela Commission d’CEnologie, composée
de MM. le Comte de Rambuteau, Président; le Due Deecazes, de Mirbel, Morin de
Sainte-Colombe,—O. Leclerc-Thouin, Rapporteur. f. Second Rapport sur le méme
sujet. 4. Compte rendu des Travaux de la Société Philotechnique, par le Baron de
Ladoucette, Sécrétaire perpetuel: Séances, de Dec., 1834; Juin, 1835; Mai, 1836;
Dec., 1836; Juin, 1837, et Juin, 1838. Liste des Membres de la Société, &c. 5. Dis-
cours de M. de Ladouchette, député de la Moselle, dans la discussion sur la proposition
de M. Anisson, relative au défrichement des Foréts. (Chambre des Députés: Séance
du 5 Mars, 1838.) 6. Discours de M. le Baron de Morogues, Pair de France, dans la
discussion du projet de Loi sur les Douanes. (Chambre des Pairs: Séance du 9 Juin,
1836.) 7. Note Historique sur les Bateaux a Vapeur, &c. par Mr. C. P. Molard, de
VAcadémie des Sciences. 8. Mémoire sur une Apoplexie Charbonneuse de la Rate
qui a regné épizootiquement sur les Bétes a Laine, dans les Départemens de |’Indre
et du Cher pendant l’Automne de 1834. Par J. Ch. Herpin, &c. 8vo. Paris, 1836.
9. Des Pertes qu’occasionerait a l’Etat la Continuation de l’application actuelle de
notre Puissance amortissante: par A. Séguin, del’Institut. Février, 1830. 10. Rap-
port sur l’Horlogerie de Paris, par M. Charles-Louis Le Roy, Horloger du Roi. 8vo.
Paris, 1840.

Washington (Captn. J.) Notes, taken during Travels in Africa, by the late John Davidson,

F.R.S. F.S. A., &c. Printed for private circulation only. 4to. London, 1839.
—— Voyages of the Dutch Brig of War Dourga, through the Southern and little-known Parts of
the Mohiccan Archipelago, and along the previously unknown Southern Coast of New
Guinea, performed during the Years 1825 and 1826. By D. H. Kolff, Jun., Lieutenant
ter Zee, le Klassé, en Ridder van de Militaire Willems Orde. ‘Translated from the
Dutch, by George Windsor Earl, Author of the ‘« Eastern Seas.”” 8vo. London, 1840.

DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET. 50L

Webb (T. H.—M. D.) Third Annual Report of the Board of Education, together with the 'Third
Annual Report of the Secretary of the Board. 8vo. Boston, 1840.

Welch (T. B.) Sundry Engravings. 1. James Madison. 2. Governor Strong. 3. Robert
Morris. 4. Charles Dickens. 5.: Rev. John Fletcher.. 6. A Lady. from Franea.
7. J. Rusling. 8. Rev. C. Wesley, by T. B. Welch. ,

Weld (L.) The Twenty-fourth Report of the Directors of the American Asylum at Hartford, for
the Education and Instruction of the Deafand Dumb. Exhibited to the Asylum, May
16, 1840. 8vo. Hartford, 1840.

Wharton (T. 1.) A Memoir of William Rawle, LL, D., President of the Historical Society, &c.
By T. I. Wharton, Esq. Read at a Meeting of the Council, held on the 22d day of
February, 1837, and printed by order of the Society; witha Letter from Peter 8. Du-
ponceau, Esq., to the Author, containing his Recollections of Mr. Rawle’s Life and
Character. 8vo. Philadelphia, 1840.

White (D. A.) An Address delivered at the Consecration of the Harmony Grove Cemetery, in
Salem, June 14,1840. By Daniel Appleton White, with an Appendix. 8vo. Salem,
1840.

Williams (H.) Antiquarian Researches, comprising a History of the Indian Wars in the Country
bordering Connecticut River and Parts adjacent, and other Interesting Events, from
the First Landing of the Pilgrims, to the Conquest of Canada, by the English, in 1760,
&c. &c. By E. Hoyt, Esq. 8vo. Greenfield, Mass., 1824.

Wood (S. R.) Fourth Report of the Inspectors appointed under the Provisions of the Act 5 and
6 Will. IV. c. 38, to visit the different Prisons of Great Britain. 1. Home District.
Presented to both Houses of Parliament, by Command of her Majesty. Fol. Lon-
don, 1839.

Worcester (J. E.) The American Almanac and Repository of Useful Knowledge, for the year
1841. S8vo. Boston, 1840.

Young (A.) A Discourse on the Life and Character of the Reverend John Thornton Kirkland,
D.D., LL. D., formerly Pastor of the Church on Church Green, Boston, and late
President of Harvard University; delivered in the Church on Church Green, May 3,
1840. By Alexander Young. 8vo. Boston, 1840.

DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET.
Astley (Mrs.) A Plaster Bust of Alexander Hamilton.
Brown (J. P.) A Collection of Turkish Coins, commencing with those of Othman, founder of the
present Dynasty.
Conyngham (R.) Several Stones, worked by the Indians with Stone Hammers, found in an Indian
workshop, five miles from Paradise, near Lancaster, Pennsylvania.
De Witt (R. V.) A Bust of Simeon De Witt, late Surveyor General of the State of New York.
Dunlap (T.) Specimens of Crystallized Carbonate of Lime and Pipe Iron Ore; found at the Iron

VIL.—6 A

502 DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET.

Dunlap (T.)—continued.
Works of William Reed, Perrysville, Mifflin County, and by him deposited at the
Bank of the United States, with N. Biddle, Esq.

Duponceau (P. 8.) Five Notes of Mr. Law’s Bank. Paris, 1720.

Forshey (C. G.) Sundry Specimens of Minerals, &c., from the Southern and Western Parts of
the Union.

Goddard (Dr.) Two Daguerrotype Portraits, the one of Mr. Duponceau, the other of Mr.
Vaughan, taken by Mr. Cornelius.

Melnikoff (Col.) A Specimen of Native Platinum, from Russia, weighing one ounce and twenty
grains.

Ruschenberger (W. S. W.—M.D.) A Musical Reed Instrument, consisting of fourteen Bamboo
Reeds, invented at Laos, and described in Ruschenberger’s Voyage round the World.

Walter (T. U.) A beautiful and ingeniously contrived Balloting Box, of Mahogany, for the use
of the Society.

Several Members. A Donation of Mastodon Bones, procured by a subscription of members of the
Society;—the head perfect.

END OF VOL. VIL.

Bao Aw ay Dy

| hig. 2.

Observations of the Thermometer Del 1G-A TEC,

December 19 th. December 20 th.

Fort Leavenworth

Fort Snelling

Fort Crawrord

FortDesMomes

Augusta Il,

J Louis

Fort Winnebago

creen Lay

Springtield 0.

Fort Brady.

FE Mackinae.

Detroit

tort Gratiot

| December 27

TOL) LAE AML

fig. ih

Oscillation of the Barometertn the 0 States Dec D9 A, 1836.
onascale in which the actual rise and fall of the Barometeris reduced {3.

Sy On oth. : | Se jl ;
December 19 © December 20%\ December 22" \ December 29%\ December 23°& | Dec’ 7 4

|
Sh | = ;
| Savannah

| | |
| |
|
|
a etches

|

Fensacala
Levimglon

Springield

WVarretta

Twinshiayg

Indian Kev

ht " hi wl?
SVACUSe
Sunbury
Washington
Ballmore
Montreal

Philac lelphia

baa Albany

_- WVew York
Flushing

Quebec

Hanover

carder

MUM AL

|
|

Coon a! iD h |

S*/hns

h

}
PNQSLAET S|

Paingsaurdayyn) |

UASOT |

YAMSTY

uopuo 46

SOSSNMT
SRT

Young

Davey)

Pou. “OTs

Uv} 7 |

Lp)

§ pels?

. 7D 0¢

7 06

pee

pte

“Yn IE

ple

ple

AMOUOLDT AY) JO PBJ PUP ht PONLOD ey PRNGIYXLE YVIS V UO
DE AT WOMNT UL A IMOLDT AY] LO UOYBY IIS ()

Ainguipy

“pi EO

“pu o

2

9

Ds 16

FOLA7

LADEN IIE. 05

D

Bermuda
~)

o

CHART,

Mustratng the Storm or Dec’ 90836.

o

rE «(O)) =

' ayer ; ; aes : ‘ DP AOFINC
The arrows indicate the direction of thewind on the morning of le 4°

Tay,
x
mid \
2
)
= oe
he
il
ei i
~ t
y
cs
ih
=
i t
i i

Teh cid
Fi Gipson

VOL. 7.

PEATE

=f}
Sly
Mackinac Be
1

| Fondling

i Frail

?

i
i
!
i

mon

) If Victches
ZVI Jessup

Fiona f ) y |
g 1

Nirmebagy

Midna

A) MGnatiot

On Vain

0

Limit

Tivinsliny

L yridg field

Maridta

Allegany
y Irsenal

Ba

1

iy

un bury

Phlacdelphinr

X
Hore

@
Jon

Monrve

\

\

\
\
1s

|
>|

4

Le

Hoaston » se

ere
i \
Wardle \
i i

ob

id}

DyeGandinen

eliind

harlestan

SF savann

Ticol

Maron

1
\
|

i

Pynvoek Tarn

a

a |

g ~
Tait

Bermuda
eS

ae
%

Mlustrating the Storm or Dic? 20830,

ee

The arrows indicate the dinection of the wind on the morning Ue 2 os

Ee Wasa deli
s Bae

tw

re.

VOL.VILPL mn.

.

_62™/305

__VOL MIL ELM.

SSS]

=
—)

ne

AUS C. 2063 @

|

EP Mason del,

Lice Heiman & Co Ste

= ~
4

aS ee eee oe

VOL ViL.PI VL.

“uu

1G) 20

nleras A
Petiee

AD ah
Mita ohy

Vu
xx"

Viv

Vol

19™

5a"

ety

at
Cc

. 7 J le. PY 2¢ ces Wil G4 8.

- 2. COrthocera Humbotltitiana 4. eBmrmonites Occidentalts
~ 2. Myermonites Tocaimacrsts Soe .. Vareutee77ses,
WS eee _. Ctibbonianis tS Oyen d AME tCAIUS.

ee

2S Duvat.LAlh. 77

f Saket Coe
Ke ee ae

MVS NY
ms s

‘a

ye Soak

EL G49.

7

5 OCP
Cece Yeetid “4%

5S:

vv.

Ppee

Uti. tore. a

LO.

20. Nitiwa Ctbbuniire

Lrigonia Crbhboncusa

aA

= Wi, Spaling is Columl antes,

Ny
S
NIN
NaN
SS
N
v8
X&
CSS

Ypund bn: Ph Boo. Z SAD, DEL % T¢ ro. r

12. Terebratula Tayloriane 7. Cucullea debian

SAE Mal eons _.. Loeparna L8. Chuma lortiosa

lt, Tellinites Hureboidtrane 19. Conus la lties

L5. Niutilus Cubaenses 20, Cardium globosium
LG. Area Srllimancana Le A eek LEfIT CSS UIC.

LP S.Duvat. Zi

f p 7 Coe Se ee
Land ti: bel iz, 2 Soul AC or Lt, 7.

L Butimus Subglobosus. 3. Bulimrs Moodiarvrts.,
2... ..... Wercdo-Striatios., 6. pees GTS.

Oh Z _ Lrg 7e€2es . Vise ye CAKLIZALIZS:
4, ase SL ALOCW LUMPS. 6. ,..... b&-coloratis.

WS OF, JICFEX

B.S. Duval, Lithe..PAul! Ove Store by TH YUE.

M Liwsor, pir?

Lelix

BlanA2G Larned .
. Balestertvanw.
. Lamarchiane.
Cureertara.

likeo JasCtathe,

TSeart. on. Phil, oe.2¢ Seuiebel 7B 10

{ (4. Helix cepordes.
15. , ... Blatrvelliarna.
46. ..,.... Hunyphreystarn.

Ll nc J CPG LILLE -
18. Carocoliw b¢-fusctata .
L9. Cyclostonia Woodiurn.

OS. Durvat, Ltt? P72

On Store by Te Giteer.

:

ip DV

ilt

|

302 tt)

ITUTION LIBRARI

|

|

mu

il

Lj 8 acaeeaeaet »

tenn venire

Lice oe